The History of Painting: From the Fourth to the Early Nineteenth Century
From The Art and Popular Culture Encyclopedia
"Geschichte der Malerei [...] treats the entire development of European painting from the downfall of the antique world to the early nineteenth century [...] [and interprets] the great styles of painting from the psychology of the age in which they originated."--The History of Painting: From the Fourth to the Early Nineteenth Century (1893/94) by Richard Muther "The Gods in Exile, the title of a fanciful sketch by Heine, would also be an appropriate designation for this chapter. In Leo X’s day the gods of Olympus had taken possession of the Christian heaven. Men lived and moved in antiquity, to such an extent that the most sacred monuments of Christian religion gave place to new structures conceived in the antique spirit. In place of the ancient basilica of St. Peter a temple arose in antique proportions, a Pantheon suspended in the air.’’ The Vatican, the residence of the pope, was filled with the masterpieces of antique art. The purpose of a crusade to which he summoned the nations was not to recover the Holy Sepulchre; he hoped to find Greek codices in Jerusalem. In life also the spirit of Hellenism, the joyous sensuousness of the ancients reigned. Not the princes of the apostles, Peter and Paul, but the heathen philosophers Plato and Aristotle, were immortalised by Raphael as the rulers of spiritual life."--The History of Painting: From the Fourth to the Early Nineteenth Century (1893/94) by Richard Muther |
{{Template}} Geschichte der Malerei (five volumes, 1899–1902) is a book by Richard Muther.
It was published in English as The History of Painting: From the Fourth to the Early Nineteenth Century (2 volumes, 1907), translated and edited by George Kriehn.
Preface
THE author of the present work, now for the first time presented in English translation, needs no introduction to the English-speaking public.
To all investigators and students of the history of art he is widely known as the author of numerous authoritative works upon the history of illustration and of painting. Some of us, indeed, had the good fortune to hear his brilliant paper upon Problems of the Study of Modern Painting at the congress held in connection with the Universal Exposition at St. Louis in 1904. To the general public also, he is widely known by his standard treatise, Geschichte der Malerei im neunzebnten Jabr- bundert (3 vols., Munich, 1893-4), the English trans- ‘lation of which appeared under the title, The History of Modern Painting, in 1895-6. This rather inaccu- rate translation of the German title of the work (since the term “Modern Painting” is usually employed to include the entire development since the Renais- sance) should not lead the reader to confuse it with the present work, the title of which i have translated The History of Patnting.
Its original, the Geschichte der Malerei, appeared in five small volumes in the Sammlung Goschen (Leipzig, iii 1900). While the first named work is practically confined to the nineteenth century, of which it is the standard history, the latter treats the entire development of European painting from the downfall of the antique world to the early nineteenth century, ending therefore where the former begins. But although it is more general in treatment and less prolix in detail than the earlier work, it is equally brilliant in style and interesting in conception. For it represents the consistent application to this more extensive period of the author’s interesting theory of the interpretation of the great styles of painting from the psychology of the age in which they originated.
The scope and purpose of the present work are most clearly indicated in Professor Muther’s brief and modest preface to the German edition:
‘These volumes [he says] do not constitute a text-book of the history of painting. The author has undertaken to present neither the biographies of the authors nor descriptions of their pictures. For the reader who is interested in such personal and descriptive records the material will be found available in a number of authoritative works. In the present treatise the author has attempted to explain from the psychology (so to speak) of each period its dominant style and to interpret the works of art as ‘human documents.’ The pre- scribed brevity of the work has rendered it impossible to do more than touch upon certain of the questions and problems considered.”
The interpretation of the works of the great masters from the time and circumstances under which they arose is not a novelty in the history of art. It is of common occurrence in the history of literature, and in artists’ biographies of the present day it is customary to devote one or more chapters to such interpretation. Some biographies, indeed, like Thode’s admirable Leben Michelangelos, are written entirely from the psychological standpoint. But no one has heretofore gone as far as Professor Muther in the application of the psychological method to such extensive periods, nor has any one used the method as incisively as he. The great styles are for him the necessary outcome of the intellectual and religious tendencies of the age; as, for example, the religious art of such painters as Botticelli, Crivelli, Perugino, and Memling are part and parcel of the great religious reaction throughout Europe of which the chief spokesman was Savonarola. The religious paintings of Zurbaran and the portraits of Velasquez are for him the logical expression of the two dominant tendencies of the Spanish monarchy, Catholicism and absolutism. Proceeding with the same method from the age to the individual, he interprets the works of the artist as the expression of his psychical development, bringing the reader into more sympathetic relation with the artist than is possible by any other method.
This is hardly the proper place for an exposition of the advantages of the psychological method or a comparison of it with others. Suffice it to say that, as applied by Professor Muther, it gives greater unity to the development of European painting in that it reveals new and interesting bonds of union between widely separated schools; that its use elucidates a number of doubtful points; that it discloses relations among individual artists not hitherto evident; and that it brings the reader into more sympathetic relation with the art of the great epochs as well as with the individual masters. So well, indeed, does the author’s treatment assign the relative importance of epochs and individuals, and so well has he selected for detailed treatment the really significant facts and masters, relegating the lesser lights to a proper subordinate position, that his work, although it forms a well organised and harmonious whole, generally assumes the character of a series of brilliant and critical essays. Such interpretations as the sections treating Giotto, Piero della Francesca, Durer, Rembrandt, Watteau, and many others are highly valuable contributions to art criticism.
It must not however be assumed, because the treat- ment is a psychological one, that the author fails to give an insight into the technical qualities of the great masters, even though this may be only incidental to the treatment. In this regard the present work fully sus- tains the reputation achieved by the author in his History of Modern Painting.
The style is clear and intelligible, more resembling clever magazine writing than the ponderous, involved style frequently met with in German works of this character. It has been the effort of the translator to preserve as far as possible the flavour of the original, although this has often been difficult.
In accordance with the popular character of the work, the author has refrained from the use of foot- notes. It did not seem within the province of the editor to change this plan, except in a few instances requiring elucidation to the English-speaking: public. A few other footnotes have been added in such cases where an explanation seemed desirable; as where the author’s view conflicts with the consensus of expert opinion, or in case of some seeming error of detail. Nor has the editor esteemed it his duty to express or comment upon the instances in which his own opinion differs from that of the author.
In the index will be found in connection with the name of each artist whose work is considered the specification of the year of his birth and death, in so far as these are obtainable. The translator has adopted the form of the names used by Professor Muther in all cases in which they are permissible in English.
In conclusion, the translator desires to express his sincere thanks to his friend, A. I. du Pont Coleman, Esq., whose valuable advice and assistance have been freely and readily given, and his obligation to the publishers, who have spared no expense to make the book attractive in form. The numerous _half-tone illustrations which appear in it have been selected with a view of supplementing the narrative with a pictorial presentation of the history of painting.
New York, November, 1906,
Book I.— Medieval painting
Chapter I.— The Middle Age
I.—The Mosaic Style
The history of Christian painting may perhaps be conceived as a great compromise with Hellenism. With the collapse of the antique world, the most subtly refined civilisation that the world has ever seen came to anend. By its spiritual tendencies and its denial of the earthly, Christianity placed almost insuperable barriers to art. “ Great Pan was dead.”’ Religion with the Greeks had been a joyous cult of the senses teaching men to enjoy life here below; it now became a belief in the other world, which regarded the earthly existence as only a sad preparation for the life to come. True, the spring still came; men loved, the flowers bloomed, the birds sang, and the meadows were green. But all this was a delusion of Hell intended to lead the believer astray and to fill his soul with sinful thoughts. The world beyond was his home, the present world only a Gol- gotha, where the skull lay and Christ hung crucified.
By this ascetic trend so hostile to sensuality,! which
proscribed: the love of nature and the enjoyment of
this world, Christianity tied up the chief artery of
artistic creation; and only in one direction was the
course left open.
‘It had deepened the psychical, and revealed treasures of kindness and love, of humility and self-denial, which Greek thought had not yet conceived. In this direction, if any art at all should originate, the development must go.- As Greek art had been sensual and physical, the Christian must become psychical and spiritual. If the former had sought its aim in the ideal perfection of bodily form, Chris- tianity must find hers in the apotheosis of the soul.” ?
Although by a circuitous route, painting approached this aim.
The first reaction against Hellenism was this, that art was entirely forbidden. "Cursed be all who paint pictures," is a sentiment often recurring in the writings of the church fathers. Not until Christianity had come into contact with other cultures, after it had come to Rome, did it lose its hostile character to art. But as these artists were Romans it is at the same time explicable why the first works of art were much less Christian than antique. It is the affair of the theologian to describe how painting began as a language of signs, and to explain all those symbols, the cross, the fish, the lamb, the dove, and the phoenix,
1 The terms ‘‘sensual” and ‘‘ sensuality ” are used in this translation to signify that which appertains to the senses; without evil significance, and corresponding with the German sinnlich and Sinnlichkeit.
- It was impossible for the translator to obtain from the author in time the source of this citation, evidently the same authority cited on pp. 6, 46-47.
which, as a kind of hieroglyphic writing, open the history of Christian art. The archeologist must explain why in the pictures of the catacombs, although they express a new spirit, the forms of the antique are used without reserve. All these mural paintings, Hermes Bearing the Ram, Orpheus Playing the Lute, or other figures borrowed from paganism, and now intro- duced with Christian change of meaning, are joyful and bright. As in the mural paintings of Pompeii, the entire treatment is decorative in a pleasant sense. But this correspondence shows that the art of the catacombs belongs to the past, not the future— that it is the end, not the beginning of an artistic development.
Not until after the first churches were constructed, and Christianity represented no longer a sect but the ruling state religion, could a Christian art develop. The symbolic element, which had been borrowed from the antique, becomes less prominent, and the sacred personages of Christian art receive their fixed types. This development is reflected in the mosaics. Although they also were created by a technical process known to the ancient Romans, the spirit which pervades them is a new one. In these works the whole tre- mendous power of the church in the first days of its recognition is expressed. ‘As once in the temples of the Hellenic world the gold-gleaming statues of Zeus and Pallas had shone, so now from the apses of the basilicas the images of Jesus and of His court look down in solemn splendour.’”’ A solemn repose char- acterises all these figures; motionless as statues, they are enthroned side by side in simple symmetry. The vine decoration and the playful, joyous elements of antique art which still prevailed in the paintings of the catacombs have disappeared. All is solemn, imposing, suffused with majestic splendour, like the heroes of the Christian faith, as if for eternity, and with a sublimity and power attained by no other technique.
‘‘ The gigantic size of the figures, their immobility, and the threat- ening glance of their staring open eyes has a superhuman terrifying effect. The whole spirit of the middle age, in its gloomy dogmatism and fanatic severity, and the unshaken sense of power of the ancient church have found form in these sublime works.
‘* Only one thing is no longer felt: that Christianity was originally the religion of love. In course of the centuries Christian doctrine had taken an increasingly dogmatic form. The loving founder of the new faith, the simple Jesus of Nazareth, had by the decree of the councils been transformed into a God; and God Himself, the loving Father, had - become a punishing despot. So, at least, the mosaics announce. They speak of the power and of the severity of God, not of His kind- ness; they preach the fear of God, but no heavenly love.”
That they are made of stone is significant; for stony, cold, and icy is the heart of these beings. All-know- ing, all-seeing, and unapproachable, divinity, like an omnipresent revenging Nemesis or a stony Gorgon, looks down upon the world.
The gloomy, rigid, and motionless character of the mosaic style was justified as long as Byzantine painting was confined to Byzantium; for here it corresponded with the development followed by Christian belief.
BUOY ‘DANA 2] 24ON YY O]0DI UDS fo asdy
SeTLSOdV UNOd AT CAGNNOUUANS ‘GANOUHINA LSIYHO
oze¢I 4O OLYSOW
It suited to the formal character of the state, the solemn ceremony of manners, the rigid gravity of the court, and the strangely stable, oriental spirit per- vading all life. But the youthful, unexhausted nations of the West, who from the close of the first millennium had entered as new factors into history, also required ideals. Whence should they be derived?
Although the Occident too had long been nourished from the mighty heritage of antiquity, the incursions of the northern barbarians put an end to this ancient civilisation. After the events of the German mi- grations and during the resulting struggles, there was for centuries no room for art, which can only flourish in the soil of a clarified culture. The new races began indeed to govern themselves and to form real nations; but with all their military greatness, energy and force, they had not yet entered that zsthetic stage which is a prerequisite of artistic development. Men were en- gaged in eating and drinking, building, tilling the soil, and populating the country: it was only a time for armi, not for marmi. Not until the material wants had been supplied did enterprising Byzantines cross over to adorn the new churches with their works of art. Through them the Occident received its first artistic veneer; but the schematism of that withered art was also transferred to the new domain. Confined between the civilisation of the declining Orient and the barbarism of their home, artists hesitated between blind imitations of Byzantine models and awkward, crude, and helpless creation from their own feelings, In the one case a rigid scheme prevails, in the other barbaric wildness.
The miniature painting of the Irish, Gallic, and German monks was less painting than calligraphy. From scrolls and flourishes purely calligraphic human figures were constructed. Panel-painting occasionally attempted to break through Byzantine rigidity: the artists painted gigantic crucifixes and even ventured upon more dramatic subjects, such as martyrdoms and passion scenes. But every effort was thwarted by their inability to draw. The limbs are uncouth, the movements clumsy, and the pictures unnatural, crude, and hideous. In other instances foreign models were imitated, only with greater crudity and rudeness. It seems as if the painters had intentionally imitated the aged character of their Byzantine models. Morose and emaciated figures, withered as mummies, with hollow cheeks and deep-set eyes—beings grown old through castigation and penance,—are the subjects of the later products of mosaic-painting. And even these, instead of becoming more lifelike, constantly grew more rigid and gloomy. As mosaics played the deter-. minative rolein art, mural and glass painting acquired the same ascetic, petrified style. Not an eyelash of these figures quivers; not a feature betrays that they could hear prayers of men, graciously comfort or mercifully pardon them. " Severe as judges, and with pitiless dignity, they stare down like threatening tables of the law, demanding submission, fear, and obedience, but according neither mercy, comfort, nor redemption.
And yet men long for love and comfort. When the official forms of religion had hardened into spirit- less rigidity, they again sought to enter into a personal relation with God, and to honour Him not as a slave his master, but as a child his father. They desired saints who should not make the sinner tremble by their heartless severity, but who should kindly and lovingly pity him. In the great religious movement accomplished in the twelfth century, this longing found expression. Amidst the great world-moving questions of Catholicism the care for the individual had been forgotten. The exciting age of the crusades had concealed for a time the interior emptiness; but after the jubilation of war had passed over, it was all the more perceptible. The people required clergy who should take part in their pain and joy; who should preach no longer in Latin but in the vernacular, and proclaim the gospel, not with scholastic subtlety, but with the same patriarchal simplicity as did Christ upon the Mount of Olives. Peter Waldo had already appeared, but the church had condemned him as a heretic. Francis of Assisi was the first to have a better fate.
When he began his sermons a feeling of springtime passed over the earth. It seemed to men as if a new Messiah had come; and Francis indeed refounded Christianity by the substitution of a religion of feeling for a rigid faith in the letter. Love bridged the abyss which had until now yawned so abruptly between God and mankind. By depriving the Godhead of its awful rigidity, mysticism gave it a feeling, human soul. Mary especially, the youthful mother of God, became the centre of worship. The adoration of Mary re- flected in part the knightly reverence for women felt by the Crusaders and the Minnesingers; but it is due also to her personality, which, in its tender, helpless womanhood, was more sympathetic to the sentiment of the age than the tragic figure of the Son of God and the severe majesty of the Father. To her St. Francis dedicated stammering love songs, just as the Minne- singers had written to their gentle ladies, their «liebe Frouwe.”’ In her honour the chimes of Ave Maria each evening sounded their salutation from the towers of all Franciscan churches.
Not only did Francis bring divinity nearer to man- kind; he also reconciled it with the animal world and with nature. As in the days of Hellas a pantheistic trend again passed over the earth. While the middle age had seen in animals only beings inimical to God, creations of Satan, and enchanted demons, Francis calls them his “brothers and sisters.’”” And the animals thank him for his love; the robins eat at his table, and the birds of the field listen to his sermon. In like manner he freed nature from the curse which monkish theology had spoken over her. He calls upon the meadows and the vineyards, the fields and the woods, the rivers and the hills to praise God. For him all creation is the result of the love of God, who wishes to see men happy; who lets the spring come and the mild winds blow in order that his children here below may rejoice in them.
These changed views did not remain without in- | fluence upon art. Through Francis nature was reconciled to religion, and again became a subject of artistic glorification. Therefore, in place of the gold background which had previously served the purpose of isolating the figures of the saints from everything earthly, the landscape gradually appears: rose hedges and paradisiac gardens, where the little birds sing and animals live peaceably beside the saints. But especially from a psychic point is the change perceptible. As in the midst of the religious enthusiasm the fervent hymns of the Franciscans replaced older chants, so in painting ecstatic feeling succeeds rigid solemnity. The saints, once so gloomy and severe, became kindly and mild as the Poverello himself. Especially in de- picting Mary and the lovely virgins of her train, art learned what it most lacked: the expression of psychic feeling.
II.— Panel Painting under the Influence of Mysticism
But the circumstance that panel-painting, which formerly had played a very modest part, now became the determinative factor in art is characteristic of the change in emotional life. In mosaic-painting also artistic progress and animation of the figures was ex- cluded by the technique of the work. The painter could not express himself directly, since he only de- signed the cartoon which served as a model for the artisans who completed the work. Now the place of this impersonal style, in whose cold material every emotion was chilled, was taken by a new technique which: permitted the master to record his thoughts without an intermediary, and also to express by means of the delicate technique of the brush the finer shades of emotion.
Nevertheless, the change was in no sense a rapid one. However much art endeavoured to follow the new spirit of the times, it stood under the ban of a thousand years’ tradition. Even after the appearance of Francis the Byzantine scheme prevailed, and very gradually the new sentiment breaks. through tra- ditional forms.
In older art Mary had usually been represented alone with arms raised in prayer. More rarely the theme was the Madonna with the Christ-child, although, according to the legend, the evangelist Luke had painted such a picture. But even then Mary pre- served her rigid sublimity. She is seated facing the beholder—the involuntary mother of God; while He, more a miniature divinity than a child, stands solemnly upon her lap, holding in one hand a scroll, as a sign of His office as teacher, and with the other giving the blessing.
The oldest panel paintings differ in no wise from these mosaics. Until the twelfth century it had been the custom to adorn the altars with costly reliquaries wrought in metal; and partly to preserve the metallic sheen of this decoration, partly because of the con- tiguity of mosaics or stained glasses, the paintings had to make the most glittering impression possible. The figures, therefore, are raised like mosaics from a gold background. Red, blue, and gold are the pre- vailing colours. The figures also have the solemnity of Byzantine types. The head of the Madonna, with the large almond eyes and long, pointed nose, and the indifferent manner in which she holds the Child with her elongated, bony hands, are the same in both cases; as is also true of the aged features of the Byzantine Christ-child. There is as yet no sign of any in- novation or of heightened emotion. ;
Not until the close of the thirteenth century, in the works of the Florentine master Cimabue, is a change perceptible. The Christ-child becomes more childish and tender; and a soft inclination of the head of the Madonna shows that she hears the prayers of men and can bring them help and gracious forgiveness. The hard, sullen features are animated by softness and charm, by human sentiment; and it is in this sense that Vasari wrote that through Cimabue more love had come into art.
More tenderly than the rest of Tuscany, Siena, the quiet hill city, incorporated the mystic ideal of the Madonna. The Siennese are the first lyric painters of modern art. As they imparted to their pictures a neat and dainty element and a splendour of colour and gilding that recall Byzantine art, so also their works reflect the wealth of ecstatic feeling that had come into the world through St. Francis. While Byzantine art emphasised age, here the youthful, lovely, and graceful prevail; if there all was stormy and rigid, the prevailing characteristic here is slender, supple grace. It seems as if the stone vaults of the churches had suddenly become transparent, and the eye gazed upward into the real heaven, where tender ethereal beings, singing and praising the Highest, lived in eternal youth and lovingly gazed down upon mankind. In his great Madonna of the Cathedral Duccio gave the first impulse. This Mary is no longer severe and dignified, but mild and gracious, as if she had had pity upon the longing soul of the believer; for a soft dreamy melancholy transfigures her features. Her relation to the Child also is changed; she is no longer the involuntary mother of God, but a tender mother. Ambrogio. Lorenzetti, the gentle poet, painted her tenderly pressing her cheek against the Child’s face, and giving nourishment to Him: motherly and yet maidenly, proud and yet modest.
A similar progress from rigidity to soul-painting may be seen in all subjects. Not only in the principal
DUALS ‘aIDAPINIDD vYJep v4adC 12p oasnjt
Svanf 40 SSIM @HL
VNOUSNINONA Id o1090ng ~~
PanelePainting 15
figures; for in order to neighten the psychic effect
painters loved to add angels and saints, whose joy or
sadness harmoniously echoed the sentiment of the
principal event. Formerly the Assumption of Mary
was depicted with frosty rigidity; now gratitude and
heavenly longing beam from her eyes, while the angels
sing and make music, and festal jubilation pervades
the pictures. In the Coronation of Mary nothing
else had been formerly represented but Christ, stiffly
seated, placing a crown upon the head of the equally
immobile Madonna. Now she crosses her arms in
humble ecstasy, and the Redeemer blesses her. while
saints and angel musicians follow the action in joyful
astonishment. If the Annunciation is depicted, the
endeavour now is to express the modesty of Mary
and the childish eagerness of God’s messenger. Even
to the crucifixes, which were formerly frightful pictures,
in awkward blurred outlines, with an uncouth, greenish
body, a sacred and melancholy sentiment is imparted.
Silent devotion speaks from the eyes of the Redeemer
wailing or lost in the depths of melancholy his friends
stand about: one pressing his hands upon his breast,
another lifting them in astonished adoration, a third
covering his face and weeping hot tears.
The same development was experienced during the fourteenth century in Germany; indeed, the ideals of the mystics perhaps found here their purest embodi- ment, since a dreamy sentimentality is more a part of the German than of the Italian character.
VOL. I.—2
16 The MDiddle Age
In Germany also, especially in Westphalia, it had
been preceded by altar-pieces in the rigid style of
mosaics. The position is stiff, the expression lifeless,
and the forms are outlined with severe conventionality.
Eyes, noses, beards, the folds of the garments, and the
wings of the angels, everything—although drawn with
a brush, makes rather the impression of being composed
of mosaic cubes.
The schools of Prague and Nuremberg likewise made little progress beyond this. In Prague, which had become an artistic centre through Charles IV, the chief painter was Master Theodorich, who carried specifically medizval painting to the highest perfection. All of his figures are of gloomy majesty and deep solemnity: the heads powerful, the eyes threatening, and the draperies arranged in accordance with the mosaic style. The painters of Nuremberg, indeed, attempted to follow the new spirit of the times; for their works, although commonplace and compre- hensible, are softer than those of Prague. The solemn grandeur of the medizval style is lost upon them; but to the ideals of the self-sacrificing love of God, which St. Francis nad revealed, the artist of that thrifty commercial city could not honestly surrender.
As Assisi of Italian, so Cologne became the centre of German painting. It was in a peculiar sense a sacred city, hallowed by the poetry of an ancient history and the seat of the mightiest cathedral of the middle age. During the fourteenth century, it was the home of the greatest German mystics, Albertus Magnus, Master Eckhardt, Tauler of Strasburg, and Suso—all apostles of the same doctrine which Francis had pro- claimed in Italy. In Suso, especially, the seraphic saint found a successor kindred in spirit. His whole life was an eternal love struggle, his adoration of the Madonna of an almost sensual character. He calls her his heart’s love, and begs that she will become his lady, because his young and gentle heart cannot exist without love. At night he longs for her and he salutes her in the morning. In the month of May, when the youths sing songs to their sweethearts, he also brings ~ his song to the blessed one. He sees her before him in body, clothed in a long white garment, a wreath of roses in her golden hair; and hears songs like the sound of zolian: harps. Just such visions, translated into painting, are the pictures of the epoch: the delicate ethereal dreams of pious visionary enthusiasts. As Mary had before been a solemn and majestic queen, she now appears as a most gracious virgin in all the charm of youth, attended like a princess by a court of well-bred maids of honour.
The founder of this new tendency was until recently supposed to have been Master Wilhelm of Cologne. But it is evident from dated panels of the school that in the years 1358-72, when Wilhelm of Herle laboured at Cologne, the school of that city still moved in thoroughly medizval paths. The rigidly-drawn figures with angular movements and awkward hands in no wise resemble the languishing beings with soft and — oscillating. bearing, so typical of the Cologne school. The actual creator of this new style was Hermann Wynrich of Wesel, who after Wilhelm of Herle’s death took charge of his workshop, and dominated Cologne painting from 1390 to 1413. He, and not Master Wilhelm, is the master of the celebrated Altar of Mary in the Cathedral, which reveals with especial clearness the awakening of the new sentiment.
The paintings are not all by the same hand. The crude passion scenes of the upper row seem the work of an assistant, who painted in the old style. Wynrich painted the six middle panels in which, with delicate freshness, the childhood of Jesus is recounted. When at a later period he attempted dramatic subjects, he had little success. Only where the problem is to depict quiet Madonnas and mild womanhood his delicate lyric art is in place. The slender, fragile bodies of his Virgins, encircled by flowing garments, are quite overshadowed by the expression of their soft brown eyes, beaming with longing for the other world and for the heavenly bridegroom. The heads are inclined softly to the side; the shoulders are narrow and the chest is flat; and the weak, slender arms terminate in delicate, ethereally white hands. Even the men, although they wear beards, possess nothing of powerful manhood. They look bashfully and humbly into the world, dreamy as children, reminding one of the doctrine of the mystics that a healthy body
Panel-Painting 19
is the severest hindrance in the journey to blessedness.
One also recognises that from this subordination of
body to soul all the excellences of this art are derived.
Just because Wynrich placed the bodily element in
the background, he succeeded in rendering the ex-
pression of feeling with such purity and clearness,
“The typical resemblance of the figures, the delicate
oval of the heads, the fragile slenderness of the bodies—
all serve to transport into a distant world, where
everything is charming and beautiful, and the feelings
are tender and refined: a paradise where neither
rudeness nor discord disturbs the great harmony, the
heavenly music of the spheres.”’
«That the landscape is occasionally called into re- quisition in order to heighten the paradisiac sentiment of the pictures, is also due to the teachings of the mystics. As Francis in Italy, so Suso in Germany freed nature from the curse of monkish theology. Flowers, especially roses, and beautiful gardens in which the Madonna wanders, frequently occur in his visions.”
He describes Paradise as a beautiful meadow, where lilies and roses, violets and mayflowers exhale their odours, and where starlings and nightingales sing day and night their glorious melodies: Therefore Wynrich also loves to represent the Madonnia out-of-doors, upon blooming meadows, escorted by dainty virgins. Some- times St. Catherine kneels beside her in the act of betrothal with the Christ-child; sometimes it is Agnes
20 The Middle Age
who plays with the lamb. Others read to her from
precious books, make music, pluck flowers, or teach
the Christ-child to play the zither. Knights, also,
slender as maidens, join them to carry on well-bred
conversation with the young ladies upon the green
sward, where the flowers bloom and waft their per-
fume. In works of this kind the medizval period of
German art ended. They are the last echo from that
world of pure harmonies which Francis and Suso had
revealed.
III.— The Foundation of the Epic Style by Giotto
In another direction the appearance of St. Francis was even more fruitful in consequences. Not only did he deepen by his sermons the religious life of the period, thus creating the soil for mystic painting; but by re- placing the dogmatic by a personal Christ, as His earthly life had shown Him, a man among other men, he added the “Life of Christ” as a new subject of art. An epic was furnished which could be related only by painters. Especially did the life of the saint, with its self-denial and miraculous occurrences, call for present- ation with epic breadth in great monumental paintings.
As the Gothic in Italy was different from that in the North, there was no lack of mural surfaces. Its principle was to vault wide interiors with great arches upon small supports; and as these broad surfaces required decoration, fresco painting became the de- terminative factor in Italian art.
For the legend of St. Francis there was no sacred tradition. The artists, confined for centuries to de- votional pictures of Christ and Mary in which every motion, every fold of the garment had been determined by ecclesiastical prescription, suddenly found freedom in this new theme. All the scenes had to be created anew from the oral traditions of the monks or from his Life by Bonaventura. The problem now was to depict events and actions, instead of quiet devotional paintings. For the mastery of such things emotional ecstasy and mystic meditation would not suffice. A mighty, virile formative power, a power to create independently, and a certain realism were necessary. The substitution of an actual, almost a contemporary, subject for immutable heavenly figures meant a com- plete break with medieval tradition. It is therefore no accident that the solution of this problem was ac- complished by a city which had no tradition to break, because it had stood silently aside during the middle age; not by eternal Rome, proud Venice, or mighty Pisa, but by youthful Florence, which, fresh, strong, and with unexhausted power, now took its place in the culture and art of Italy. By the side of the lyric artists of Siena and Cologne, the great Giotto arose as the epic painter; a realist among the mystics of the fourteenth century.
He won his spurs in the church which was the burial-place of St. Francis at Assisi. Giovanni Cimabue, who had been commissioned with the decoration,
22 The Middle Age
had taken him, the former shepherd boy, along with —
his other assistants, and assigned to him, for inde-
pendent execution, the pictures which adorned the
walls of the upper church with scenes from the life of St.
Francis. Having exercised his powers upon the new
theme, and freed himself through this contemporary
subject from the chains of Byzantinism, he saw also
the ancient with the modern eye. The Legend of
St. Francis was followed by a new version of the Life
of Christ, which he painted in the Church of the Arena
at Padua. After he had decorated the nether church of
Assisi with frescoes of the three vows of the Franciscan
order, Poverty, Obedience, and Chastity, as well as the
A potheosis of St. Francis, and had created exten-
sive but not longer existing works in various other
cities (Rome, Ravenna, Rimini, and Naples), he re-
turned in 1334 to Florence. He was made chief
architect of the cathedral and of the campanile, and
also began an extensive activity as a painter in Santa
Croce, the church of the Franciscans, which had just
been completed. Three years after his return, on the
8th of January, 1337, his death occurred. Of him
Boccaccio wrote in the Decamerone: ‘Giotto was such
a genius that there was nothing in nature which he
could not have represented in such a manner that it
not only resembled, but seemed to be, the thing itself.”’
And Poliziano wrote as his epitaph:
‘T]le ego sum, per quem natura extincta revixit.””
Such praise offered to Giotto as a naturalist seems
BIUALOD 1] ‘9IOLD DIUDG ‘OISAAM
SIONVUd “LS JO ONITIVMAE AHL
@NOGNO" Id OLLOIN
Giotto 23
much exaggerated to the modern mind. For whoever
approaches Giotto’s works with a realistic standard
derived from the style of later epochs, finds no entry
into the workshop of his spirit.
True, when the problem is to depict something unusual or exotic he astonishes by a quite modern naturalism. Among the following of the Three Kings in the church of Assisi are strange examples of the Mongolian race, with flat noses, yellow skin, and ebony hair; and in like manner the heads of the Nubians in the Church of Santa Croce are astonishing in ethno- graphical fidelity. But that they thus impress us shows how isolated such things are in Giotto’s works. Like all earlier artists he also has a prevailing type: those hard, impersonal faces, as if sculptured in wood, with protruding cheek-bones, almond-shaped eyes, and straight, Grecian nose.
The time was not yet ripe for the study of the nude. Consequently, where unclothed figures were depicted, as in the Baptism of Christ or in the pictures of the Crucifixion, the drawing is quite general.
As to costume he has in isolated cases, as in his picture of the Adoration of the Kings, used con- temporary fashions; but only in case of figures which he wished to contrast with those belonging to specifically Christian mythology. For the saints he retains the solemn ideal costume which the middle age had adopted from the antique: the toga, tunic, and sandals, with the head uncovered.
24 The Middle Age
As in the representation of man, so as a painter of
animals he is far distant from truth to nature. The
pointer which in one of the Paduan frescoes springs
upon St. Joachim, the mule which in the same series
St. Joseph rides, and the three camels in the Ado-.
ration of the Kings at Assisi are, as regards natural-
istic execution, probably the most important that
Giotto has accomplished in the domain of animal
painting. The sheep, with which as a former shepherd
boy he must have been familiar, are incorrectly drawn;
and the horse remains for him an incomprehensible
mechanism.
Even more singular are his backgrounds. The buildings, although true to nature, do not as a whole form a realistic background. Far too small, they are neither drawn in correct perspective nor in proper relation to the figures of men, who are often larger than the house in which they live. As a landscape painter he also moves along the most primitive lines. In his frescoes nature is usually composed of strangely jagged and bare cliffs, upon which here and there a tree grows, having as its only foliage at most a dozen leaves which look as if they were made of lead. The picturesque elements of the landscape—streams, val- leys, hills, and woods,—its sombre and light vegetation, existed as little for him as for other painters of the lrecento. ‘lf thou wishest to design mountains in correct fashion, so that they shall appear natural, choose great stones, rough and unpolished, and draw them
Giotto. me
after nature.” This prescription of Cennini’s is a
significant document for the conception of nature
during an epoch for which the tree signified the forest
and the stone the mountain.
Even the colour of Giotto, however much it may differ in its light tones from the elaborate and barbaric colour of Byzantine art, is far from corresponding with reality. As he sometimes paints horses red and trees blue, so he has never attained nor even attempted to render the difference of the substances of which things are composed, or to differentiate the treatment of architecture, drapery, or flesh.
But in forming a conclusion as regards the im- portance of an artist, he should be compared never with later but with earlier artists. From this point of view even the extension of the subject-matter of painting accomplished by Giotto is most important. Whereas Byzantine art had only represented the regular, eternally fixed repose of the divine, and had ‘only attempted to represent dramatic scenes in an incidental and modest fashion, Giotto was the first to depict action, and to represent not the quiet but the dramatic; not that which transcended time but what had actually happened. By substituting complete epics. and dramas for representative devotional paintings, he became the first historical painter in Christian art. |
Continuing the comparison with work that preceded his, one is immediately impressed by the aggregate technical means of expression which Giotto had to
26 The Midole Age
create in order to found this new style. The figures
are not naturalistic in detail, but he is the first to present
human figures in complete action. The animals are
not well drawn, but he was the first to introduce into
fresco painting the representatives of the animal
kingdom, from the quadrupeds to the birds listening
to the sermon of St. Francis. Although his landscapes
are still symbolic, it was a great step to transfer the
figures from the Byzantine void into fixed earthly
surroundings, and to depict them upon the earth,
both in the country and in the streets and squares of
the cities, in a new lifelike activity.
Finally, much that seems to offend against natural truth should be explained not so much from lack of ability as from the requirements of a great style. In the absolute certainty with which he fixed the laws of the monumental style, his real immortal greatness lies. Giotto still knew, what later painters forgot, that it is not at all the purpose of mural painting to achieve naturalistic effects in form and colour; but that it only fulfils its purpose when it remains within the bounds of pure surface decoration. For this reason his art, even in our own day, has become the starting- point for Puvis de Chavannes and others. After the | development which had for centuries been directed towards realism had at length concluded, it was all | the more evident that Giotto had six centuries before possessed that which we are to-day trying to attain, His whole activity was determined not by the natural:
Giotto 27
istic but by the decorative point of view; and just
because he sacrificed much of natural truth which he
also might have attained, in order to achieve a monu-
mental effect, he achieved in its very essence the pur-
pose of decorative art.
His secret lies in the great flow of line, the clear arrangements of groups, and the severe subordination of all detail. That no belittling detail might disturb the flow of line, he chooses types which are simple and measured in feature and form. In order that the clear- ness of presentation might not suffer, he avoids all ac- cessory figures, confining himself to a laconic expression of the spiritual content of his theme. As the sustained grandeur of the monumental style is not reconcilable with abrupt change and uncertain gestures, he forms for himself a fixed language of gestures, which, like the written language, always uses the same words for the same things, and thus immediately relates to the observer what the figures have to say. A sig- nificant glance, a light movement of the hand and of the body, which the loosely hanging garments freely follow, suffice to express the person represented and the emotions of his soul. As he considers mural painting simply as surface decoration, he avoids all, plastic effects depending upon illusion of corporeality, and labours in the same style as the Japanese, in whose works also the figures have neither roundness nor throw shadows. The colour also is subordinated to the decorative purpose; for which reason he has no
28 The Middle Age
scruples against a conscious deviation from reality,
if a natural colour would have disturbed the gobelin
tone of his paintings.
Another consequence was the adaptation of the landscape to the requirements of this style. As the landscape could not be an independent factor, but only an accompaniment to the simple lines of the figures,- he confined it to the simplest forms. Giotto also knew that no human beings could live in such little houses, that trees and plants could not grow so sym- metrically, and that cliffs were not formed like steps or pointed like needles; but he paints them so because he knew that a naturalistic presentation would have deviated from his aim. For if he had depicted the houses larger, his frescoes, instead of being monu- mental paintings, would have become architectural and historical genre-pieces in the style of Gentile Bellini. Had he not drawn his cliffs in such sharp, straight outlines, he would not have been able to separate the planes so sharply, or the different events so clearly from each other. Had he painted the trees in naturalistic fashion, they would not only have been out of harmony with the measured straight-lined figures, but the impression of solemnity achieved by his style would have been lost. Only by doing away with everything trivial and all naturalistic detail, and by simplifying nature in order that she might speak more clearly, could he give his works the firm precision and the solemn dignity demanded by the
GIOTTO DI BONDONE
ALLEGORY OF ENVY Fresco in the Arena Chapel, Padua
Giotto 29
theme as well as by the style of decorative art.
The founder of this style could only be a man of such a clear and virile mind as Giotto. It is a psycho- logical curiosity that in the midst of such an ecstatic generation a man should live with nothing of. the mystic about him. In order to recognise this trend of his character one has only to examine his Madonnas. They are far separated from the tenderness and the mystic sincerity of the Siennese and Cologne artists. A certain sobriety, ungraceful severity, and prosaic objectivity clings to them. Instead of attempting, like the others, to attain ethereal blessedness, he introduces realistic and genre features. The Christ- child sticks his finger in his mouth, plays with a bird, or is on the point of climbing into his mother’s lap. The few anecdotes known from his life also point to the same double position. While glorifying the vows of the Franciscans, he was very careful that poverty should not be the chief aim of his own effort. Although a painter, he was equally successful in the most ma- terial of arts, one postulating no sentiment but only technical ability and mathematical calculation—ar- chitecture. He, indeed, painted mystic subjects, but was known among his contemporaries as a very clear- headed man, whose modern views and caustic witti- cisms contrasted strangely with the character of the saint, whose glorification it was his mission to celebrate.
Such also is the character of his art. It reveals, like the works of the Siennese, what depths of psychic
30 The Middle Age
life were revealed by St. Francis. All the emotions
of the human heart—anger and humility, love and hate,
courage and self-denial—are interpreted in masterly
fashion; but without mystic blessedness and with
sensible objectivity. His art is cold and transparent
and speaks in sentences as brief and convincing as
the conclusions of a mathematical theorem. No
enthusiast, but a man of positive, exact mind; no
dreamer, but a powerful workman of healthy, com-
prehensive vitality, he determined for a century to
come the development of Italian art.
IV.— Fresco Painting in the Later Fourteenth Century
After Giotto had created a language for painting, an extensive activity began throughout Italy. In Florence, the Church of Santa Croce, where he had painted his last pictures, offered a rich field of work for the younger generation, and at the same time Santa Maria Novella received its decoration. Siena, not- withstanding its lyric and mystic tendencies, also fol- lowed the spirit of the age, which had now become epic, in causing its Palazzo Pubblico to be decorated with frescoes. In Pisa, the slumbering city of de- cayed grandeur, the Camposanto received one of the most powerful cycles of frescoes in medizval art. In Padua, where Giotto’s work in the Arena Chapel had awakened a sense for monumental art, native artists proved their power in the Church of Sant’ Antonio and in the Chapel of San Giorgio.
The names of the principal artists are: in Florence,
Taddeo Gaddi, Giottino, Maso di Banco, Giovanni da
Milano, Andrea Orcagna, Agnolo Gaddi, Antonio
Veneziano, Francesco da Volterra, and Spinello Aretino;
in Siena, Simone Martino, Lippo Memmi, Pietro and
Ambrogio Lorenzetti; and in Padua, Altichiero da
Zevio and Jacopo d’ Avanzo. Pisa, though once the
chief seat of plastic art, produced no native painters,
with the single exception of Francesco Traini, but
imported foreign talent for the accomplishment of
its great commissions.
After Giotto had portrayed the life of Christ and the legends of St. Francis and St. John the next step was to treat in a similar manner the entire Bible and the legends of the saints. The events of the Old and of the New Testament and the narrative of the Legenda Aurea were depicted in the same lucid style in which the sermons of St. Francis had been delivered.
Then the order of the Dominicans entered as a mighty factor into the artistic life. The Franciscans, simple men of the people, were now joined by the learned advocates of the church, whose principal mission was the scientific formulation and the strict preservation of the pure teachings of the church. The art which developed under the protection of the Dominican order is characteristic of their rigidly learned and strictly scholastic spirit. While in the Franciscan art allegories are exceptional and a simple legendary narrative is usually preserved, the chief
VOL, I.—3
32 The Middle Age
purpose of their rivals was to glorify in learned alle-
gorical representations the moral and religious system
of the great Dominican St. Thomas Aquinas, the
prince of medizval scholars. It is remarkable with
what consecrated seriousness the artists endeavoured
to translate these abstract thoughts, hardly to be
appreciated by the senses, into the language of art.
In the celebrated Apotheosis of St. Thomas by
Francesco Traini it was proposed to represent in a
symbolic manner the spiritual influences which the
saint received from different quarters and in turn
exercised upon the believers,—an effect accomplished
by means of a complicated system of rays, which fall
upon and issue from St. Thomas. In the cycle of
frescoes in the Spanish Chapel in Santa Maria Novella
the subject was the importance of the Dominican order
in the history of civilisation, its scientific system, and
its severe office as a guardian of truth. About the
papal throne lie the ‘‘watch-dogs of Christ’? (Domini-
canes) awaiting the call to spring upon the wolves
(the heretics); farther on friars are preaching and
the souls converted by their labours enter the heavenly
portals. As here the practical, so on the corresponding
fresco the scientific activity of the order is represented.
St. Thomas sits on a Gothic throne, at the foot of which
the conquered heretics Arius, Averroes, and Sabellius
cower. There follow, personified by female figures,
the sacred and profane sciences. One of them, holding
the globe and sword, represents imperial power; an-
Later FrescosPainting 33
other, with bow and arrow, the terrors of war, and
a third, with-an organ, is music. As earthly repre-
sentatives of these allegorical conceptions the figures
of men are added.
Similarly, the political allegories, such as were cus- tomarily depicted in judicial and council chambers, are usually derived from the works of the greatest poetical genius of the day, Dante. After he had furnished the ideal of civic life, Ambrogio Lorenzetti, of Siena, could paint his mural decorations in the Palazzo Pubblico, which, partly as pictures of manners, partly as an allegory, depicted the blessings of good and the evils of bad government.
The symbolic and visionary subjects portrayed at the same time as the allegories are derived partly from Dante, partly from the teachings of the two mendicant orders. As popular preachers, the friars found a reference to the last judgment and the ensuing paradise and hell to be the most effective method of moving popular feeling. One of their number, Giacomino da Verona, describes paradise as a royal court in the heavens. The patriarchs and the prophets, enveloped in green, white, and blue mantles, the apostles, seated on golden and silver thrones, and the martyrs with roses in their hair, are gathered about the Eternal One in a life of untroubled joy. At Christ’s side, His enthroned mother, beautiful as a flower, is greeted by the angels with the music of harps and jubilant hymns. Hell, on the other hand, is described as a
36 The Middle Age
A certain stylistic progress over the works of Giotto
may, indeed, be observed in other paintings. Orcagna
and the Siennese supplemented him in psychological
analysis. While Giotto interpreted powerful sentiment
with dramatic perspicuity, Orcagna paints the finer,
more quiet feelings, which live half in dreamland.
Even when painting the Siennese hold fast to their
native sentiment, thereby surpassing Giotto in
psychical expression. Instead of his energetic nar-
rative they prefer to depict mild visions; instead
of deep passion, a gentle beauty; instead of dramatic
life, a sentimental tenderness.
The master who created the frescoes of the Spanish Chapel is conspicuous by reason of his realistic back- grounds. In one instance he shows a garden planted with fruit-trees and inhabited by young people picking the fruits or resting in the shade; in another, the cathedral of Florence exactly as it had been planned by contemporary architects. The school of Padua went even farther in its realism. While Giotto was content to place the figures in the same plane in the simple style of a relief, the Paduans attempted difficult problems of perspective. Their architectural back-: grounds are more correctly drawn and the distant figures are more properly diminished in size. The char- acters, also, are conceived in a more individual, portrait- like manner, and the animals are observed as carefully as the men; as, for example, the slow and quiet tread of the oxen, which is rendered in an astonishing man-
Dstq ‘ojuns odumpg
HLVGd JO HdWOAIUL
OLNGOaaL YALVI AHL AO AALSVYW NMONYNO
Later Fresco-Painting 37
ner. Even the nude, when it occurs in martyrdoms,
is presented with considerable knowledge of nature.
But even in cases like these we can hardly speak of
an actually realistic development. When it is recorded
of a pupil of Giotto, a certain Stefano, that on account
of his naturalistic style he was called the “ape of
nature,’’ this must be taken with the same reservation
as Boccaccio’s statement about Giotto’s naturalism.
A more correct characterisation is that of the com-
mentator Benvenuto da Imola, who, in 1376 (forty
years after Giotto’s death), commenting on the verses
in which Dante states that Giotto held the field in
painting, notes: “Be it well observed that he still
holds it; for since his day no greater has appeared.”
As in the middle ages the Byzantine, so during the
fourteenth century the Giottesque style prevailed.
The development consisted rather in the broadening
of the subject-matter of painting than in technical
improvements on Giotto. The forms which he created
were sufficient for the translation of the principal
spiritual ideas of the day into pictorial presentation
effected by his successors. The latter approached the
most obscure allegories, the most fantastic ideas of
the future life, and the most learned dogmas of the
church, endeavouring to express, in the language of
form established by Giotto, an infinity of world-mov-
ing ideals. Few attempted the technical perfection
of these forms. As during the nineteenth century in
the time of Cornelius, painting was the product of an
38 The Middle Age
epoch predominantly literary, so in the trecento the
great poets and thinkers, Dante and Petrarca, swaying
all minds, compelled the artist also to approach his
work as a poet rather than as a painter.
Chapter II.— The Aftergrowth of the Medieval Style in the Fifteenth Century
I.— The Struggle of the Old with the New Spirit
The school of Giotto was more than necessary, it was a vital question. Instead of leaning upon the teachers of the church and the poets, painting had to learn to stand upon its own feet; instead of illustrating scholarship it had first to become mistress in its own house. That was the revolution which the fifteenth century effected. The triumphs of chastity, poverty, and of the church militant, and allegories of good and bad government, as the painters of ideas had conceived them, were no longer treated. In place of dogmatic and didactic tendencies and of literary composition, we find simple pictures which bear in themselves the justification of their existence. Artists no longer poetised but observed; they no longer painted thoughts but objects. The significance of the fifteenth century, therefore, consists in its gradual conquest of the visible world, and hand in hand with this the gradual development of the technique of painting.
The great renaissance of culture at the beginning of the quattrocento directed painting along this path. The civilisation of the middle ages was altogether ecclesiastical. The church regulated the customs of the people, taught them practical things, and, as far as it thought proper, instructed them in spiritual. But gradually, as humanity grew more mature, it repudiated this tutelage as compulsion, and the unity of medizval consciousness was lost in the breach. The senses and the intellect asserted their rights against asceticism and blind faith, and Christian humility yielded to the sense of personal strength. Instead of satisfying himself with the promise of future life, man began to establish himself upon the earth, and to make the forces and secrets of the universe subservient to him. New continents were discovered; revolutionary inventions were made in all lines of industrial activity; and it is well-known how, under the influence of these new principles, the great problem of an entire recon- struction of human knowledge appeared in the back- ground. No less well-known are the mighty results of the collapse of medizval ideals on public and private morals. It seemed as if suddenly the earth had been withdrawn from under the feet of mankind. All traditions which had until then the binding power were shattered, and all the shallowness of the human heart was revealed. If men had formerly considered the earthly life as a mere preparation for future happiness, they now wished to make the most of life upon the earth; if they had formerly gone about
Struggle of Old with Hew Spirit 4I
in sackcloth and ashes, they now delighted in fes-
tivals and tourneys, in balls and mummeries, in
luxury of the table and of dress. Along with the
revival of the power of the senses came the rebellion
against the state and the family. Writers appeared
who in modern skepticism held up to laughter and scorn
the system of morals enunciated by the monks and
theologians. On every hand new states were formed:
here monarchical despotisms of which he became the
ruler who could elevate and maintain himself by force
and terror; there civic republics, the victims of the
wildest party strife, but at the same time flourishing
through the industry of a free bourgeoisie. __
The art of a nation always develops along lines ‘parallel with its ideas, culture, and customs. It is the mirror, the abbreviated chronicle of its time. In art, therefore, the trend towards the after-life gave way to love of the present; and the worldly joy of the epoch also found its expression in painting. Just as the fourteenth century, the age of mysticism, had revealed the depths of the soul-life, so now the fifteenth takes possession of the external world; as trade and navigation had discovered new worlds, so painting discovered life. She no longer seeks to arouse con- templative and pious sentiments, but rather to mirror the external world in all of its beauty.
For such a task the technical achievements of the trecento were insufficient. Upon the expansion of the content of painting which it had accomplished, the
42 Medfeval Style in Fifteenth Century
improvement of the means of representation had to
follow. While the painting of the ¢recento, just because
of its spiritual and didactic tendencies, had never
achieved progress, the quattrocento, which was more
modest in scope, was all the richer in purely artistic
achievements. Not merely in their delight in the
external world are its painters the real children of
the time; but as technical pioneers they are the
worthy associates of Columbus and Gutenberg. Only
upon the foundations which the quattrocento had laid
could modern painting arise.
The revolution, however, was neither abrupt nor sudden. Too many different tendencies crossed in this century for it to be called, en bloc, the century of realism. The materialistic current directed upon the conquest of the external world formed but a single factor in this great movement of culture. It must not be assumed that all religion was at once forgotten and all questions of feeling were at once silenced. On the contrary, the doctrines of the wretchedness of the earthly existence and salvation by faith alone still found enthusiastic apostles. At the beginning of the century stands the wonderful figure of St. Catherine of Siena; and later Fra Giovanni Dominici and St. Anthony of Padua, through their ser- mons and writings, awakened a new religious enthu- siasm especially among womer. The fifteenth century is an epoch in which the principles of two ages contend with each other—the religious ideas of the waning
Bvy3antinism and Mysticism 43
middle age and the worldly delight of the modern spirit.
The same double tendency permeates painting. In
contrast to the realists earnestly seeking after truth
alone stand those who endeavour to unite the progress
, of the modern with the spirit of the middle age. While
| they do not scorn the technical achievements of con-
temporaries, neither are they ready to relinquish the
heritage of the past. For them the body is still the
‘mere tenement of the soul, the earthly chrysalis en-
closing the divine butterfly. They do not, like the
‘realist, appeal to the eye, but to the heart and the
spirit. A certain archaic attitude places their pictures
even in external contrast with the others. For while
the fifteenth century usually substituted scenes from
nature for golden backgrounds, these masters, refining
the usage of the middle age, were the first to recognise
the full possibilities of the use of gold in painting.
They were not satisfied to retain the golden back-
grounds and use gold ornaments whenever possible;
but went so far as to represent certain objects, like the
keys of St. Peter and the jewels in the crown of the
Virgin, in high gold relief, thus giving their pictures
a solemn, richly archaic effect. As late as 1430 these
progressive and conservative elements co-existed,
equally justified by the tendencies of the age.
II.— Byzantinism and Mysticism —
The most conservative city, not only of Italy but of Europe, was Venice. She felt herself the daughter of
44 Medieval Style in Fifteenth Century
Byzantium; for her power was principally in the Orient
and her customs were Oriental. In the secluded life
of the women, in the practice of the slave trade, and
the costumes of the people, this was a fragment of
the Orient on Occidental soil. Although a republic
in name, the government was Byzantine. The power
was in the hands of a few old aristocratic families
who in art, as in their other opinions, were conservative.
The solemn dignity and severe majesty of the Byzan-
tine style and its dependence on rigidly traditional
forms were far more in accordance with their character
than an art which sought after novelties. The old was
good enough. Quwieta non movere was their motto.
But the splendour of colour and bright glitter of Byzantine painting were also pleasing to the Venetian taste.. The enchanting situation of Venice between sea and land and the bright glittering wares which came from the Orient—Persian carpets, shim- mering gems, and sparkling gold-ware—all of these had accustomed the eye of the Venetian to strong colour effects. Brightly-coloured marbles encrust the walls of St. Mark’s and all of its cupolas are adorned with glittering mosaics. This solemn effect of gold, the severe splendour of the mosaics remained, even in the fifteenth century, their highest ideal. The Venetians, therefore, demanded of the panel picture the same splendour of colour, golden gleaming light, and solemn figures, surrounded by a trelliswork of rich ornaments, and arising mysteriously from a
By3antinism and Adysticism 45
golden background. Such effects had long ago been
achieved by Byzantine painting.
As late as the fifteenth century Jacopo del Fiore and Michele Giambone were true representatives of this style. In their pictures saints bristling with gold and with emaciated, clumsily drawn figures appear in the midst of barbaric architecture of dazzling splendour. Archimandrites and patriarchs with long white beards, solemn as judges, raise their arms to bless the con- gregations kneeling in the dust. As late as 1430, and in a city of Italy, the cold and sublime spirit of Byzan- tinism prevailed;. and with it that awfully empty and yet so powerful art, which, in its gloomy rigidity, re- flects as no other does the sense of powerof the medizval church. Pictures were still painted from which one would never dream that, two centuries before, St. Francis of Assisi had preached there.
Yet during the fifteenth century, and in Venice, mysticism also experienced a fragrant aftergrowth. A series of masters appeared to depict the mystic vision of the heaven on earth revealed by Duccio, Lorenzetti, and Wynrich, with even greater tenderness and charm than did older painters with their deficient technique. In a certain sense these masters followed the modern spirit. In contrast with the ¢trecento, the century of the mendicant friars, they delighted in the splendour of this world. Luxuries that were pleasing to the rich—the dainty products of the goldsmith’s art, pearls and treasures—were also used to adorn the
46 Mdedizseval Style in Fifteenth Century
heavenly personages. The “Adoration of the Kings,”
especially, became a popular subject, because it offered
an opportunity to depict, at the same time, a biblical
subject and earthly pomp, pious humility and the
splendour of life at court. In landscape, too, they
make progress over their predecessors by the use of
rose hedges, flower-deckéd meadows, and gaily-coloured
birds singing in trellis work to attain the effect of
paradise in their pictures. They even acquired the
technical tricks of their contemporaries, modestly and
not for dexterity’s sake, but that they might, by means
of these more perfect instruments, express more clearly
those ideals which had justified the art of the trecento,
those qualities in it which were eternal. As dreamers,
not as observers, and with sensibility, not with the
cold spirit of research, they used the new technical
acquirements to reveal that great treasure of the
trecento—the tenderness, fervour, and love which the
spirit of mysticism had revealed.
As late as 1450, sacred Cologne, the home of Suso, held fast to the style founded by Hermann Wynrich. It is true that an examination of the works of Stephan Lochner, who dominated the art of Cologne from 1442 to 1451, and especially of his celebrated masterpiece in the cathedral, will reveal a certain modest appearance of mundane elements. The spiritual endeavour to effect the absorption of all earthly into the divine element is no longer the only aim. “The bodies have lost their languor, the heads are rounder; the hands
By3zantinism and Mysticism 47
and arms are less slender than in the earlier works.
The feet, which formerly hardly dared to touch the
earth, are now firmly planted. In the heads of the
women the artist endeavours less to attain a modest
and maidenly than a charming and arch expression.
While the costumes were formerly ideal, enclosing
the body in heavy masses of drapery, they now tend
to follow the fashion of to-day.’’ His language is
that of a painter who with childish joy collects every-
thing bright and sparkling to adorn his saints. Never-
theless, there is no difference in principle between his
works and those of Wynrich. The innocence, blessed
happiness, and spiritual beauty of the old master are to
be found in these figures also. Like Wynrich, Lochner
is not most at home in representing martyrdoms and
dramatic incidents, but in depicting piety, humility,
loving-kindness, and enchanting idyls.
The beautiful Madonna of the Archiepiscopal Museum at Cologne is evidently earlier than the altar- piece of the cathedral. The figure of Mary has the fragile slenderness of the old epoch. Her thin arms, small hands, and narrow shoulders, the stoop of the figure, and the almost girlish tenderness of the child, which in its little frock feels half infant, half Saviour, are quite in accordance with the art of Hermann ‘Wynrich. But the head of the Madonna, with hair carefully parted and encircled with a string of pearls, and the large clasp which adorns her mantle, point to the difference in time between Wynrich and Lochner. In
VOL. I.—4
48 Medieval Style in Fitteenth Century
like manner his Madonna in an Arbour of Roses treats
a theme popular since Wynrich’s day. Two angels
draw back a curtain and the heaven in gleaming
splendour is revealed. Enthroned like a king, the
Christ-child sits in the lap of Mary, who, adorned with
a royal crown, is seated upon a grassy ridge. Angels
make music and worship her, offer fruits to the Christ-
child, and break for him flowers from the rosehedge,
in the branches of which little birds are singing. Al-
though in this painting worldly joy is united with the
spirit of abnegation, the dreamy longing and the
heavenly peacefulness of the itrecento hover like an
echo from the other world over Lochner’s work.
__——-Fhe note which he had struck did not sink into
silence after the master’s death, but echoed like a
sacred peal of bells through the land. It was even
brought by a pupil to Venice, and in the next paintings
of the City of the Lagoons we find the solemn majesty
of Byzantium combined with the tenderness and
mysticism of Cologne. It is probable that the Vivarini
would not have relinquished the Byzantine manner
had not Antonio of Murano, in 1440, formed a partner-
ship with Johannes de Alemannia, seemingly a Cologne
artist, who in his wanderings had come to Venice.
The joint activity of these artists resulted in a series
of pictures which presented a remarkable com-
bination of solemnity and youthful freshness. The
golden splendour so dear to the Venetians was re-
tained, and furthermore all the figures were adorned
BPv3zantinism and cadysticism 49
with gold and with precious stones, like princes in a
fairy tale. Raised golden ornaments and ancient
frames, with steep Gothic gables and with flowers
and trelliswork, completed the impression of Oriental
splendour which reverberated like a stirring hymn
through these paintings. But there is also a novel
element: a touch of new psychic life and a feeling for
landscape. As in the German paintings, the throne
of the Madonna is erected in a secluded, paradise-
like garden, where brightly-coloured birds are nesting.
Instead of the mummy-like figures of Byzantinism
we find the youthful blessedness, the silent purity and
gentle humility of a Stephen Lochner. After having
at first confined themselves to traditional represent-
ations of saints, the artists progressed to more
narrative subjects. In Antonio’s Adoration of the
Kings, halos and crowns, weapons and trimmings
~ of garments, arms and utensils, even the harness of
the horses and the spurs of the riders—all appear in
plastic relief. Yet the dainty, languishing figures of
the youths are equally surprising by reason of their
friendly and gracious charm. Here again a soft
Cologne strain is curiously commingled with Byzan-
tine splendour.
Or should we rather speak of Giibriak than Cologne influence? For there was a remarkable commingling of influences at Venice. While the painters of Murano were engaged upon their works, an Umbrian master had laboured in Venice who in the whole spirit of his art
5so}6-. Medieval Style in Fifteenth Century
bears a curious resemblance to Lochner. Although
the efforts of Venetian painters had previously been
confined to churches, the Venetian government, in
1419, determined to provide the palace of the Doge
with suitable mural decoration. The subject chosen
was an incident from the glorious past of Venice—the
mediation of this small but powerful state between
Frederick Barbarossa and Pope Alexander III. As
Byzantine painting was not capable of accomplishing
such a task, the choice for the artist fell upon Gentile
da Fabriano, who, although modern in style, was not
an iconoclast, but full of respect for ancient tradition.
The inhabitants of the mountain countries cling more tenaciously to their traditions than the inhabitants of large cities. As the mountain city of Siena had throughout the old century remained faithful to the principles of Duccio, so Umbria also, that quiet mount- ain district in whose valleys St. Francis had laboured, closed its doors to the modern spirit. The panels of Alegretto Nuzi and Ottaviano Nelli, the earliest Umbrian painters, echo the style of the trecento in tender, modest beauty; but it was reserved for Gentile to rescue Umbrian art from its provincial exclusiveness and transplant it to the soil of the cities: from the quiet chapels of distant villages to the festal halls of city palaces. The Adoration of the Kings, his most celebrated panel, painted in 1423 for Palla Strozzi, breathes the spirit of youth and the love of legend characteristic of the quattrocento. Gentileisindeed
Byzantinism and Adysticism 51
an innovator; for the epic breadth in which he ren-
ders the entire subject is quite as characteristic of the
new realism as the refined feeling for landscape with
which he scatters bright flowers through the mead-
ows. But with him realism has not destroyed
poetry. An indescribable charm of youth and of
grace suffuses all the precise details which he gives.
Even the golden ornaments and the ancient looking
frames with Gothic gables heighten the fairy-like
effect. As Michelangelo observed: “Aveva la mano
simile al nome’’; and this gentilezza, this timid and
loving manner has not lost its charm with the
centuries.
Even in a large city like Florence there was a quiet and lonely cloister from whose walls all waves of the modern. spirit recoiled—San Marco, the convent of the Dominicans, where the blessed Fra Giovanni da ~ Fiesole laboured. Although no profound artist but more like a grown child in sentiment, he was yet the most lovable apparition of all these survivors of the middle age. The circumstance that he was not a native of a city, but of the village of Vicchio, and that he had lived until his fiftieth year in the hill towns of Cortona and Fiesole, is important for the analysis of his style. A man who did not come to Florence until his fiftieth year could no longer change his personality, even had he so wished. Not the contemporary mas- ters, but the works of the past epoch, especially those of Orcagna, were his guiding star; in the middle age
se Medfxval Style in Fifteenth Century
lay the sources of his power. In Santa Croce and
Santa Maria Novella he absorbed to such an extent the
feeling of the trecento, that he was henceforth proof
against the realistic tendences of his day.
In a certain sense Fiesole too is an innovator. His eye lingers lovingly on the landscape; the pleasing forms of mountains sometimes serve him as a back- ground, and he never tires of painting the meadow in the garb of spring when a thousand flowers are bud- ding. He also acquired some familiarity with per- spective, and occasionally there appear in his paintings heads painted from living models.
But these things do not determine the character of his art, which in its gentle soulfulness is quite of the trecento, or reminds us even more, perhaps, of the most delightful of the Germans, Stephen Lochner. As in the case of Lochner, the scale of the good frate’s feeling is not extensive; for he was himself so good that he was unable to realise the bad. As Walter von der Vogelweide has a comical effect when he attempts to swear, so Fra Angelico in depicting evil. His devils are very harmless little chaps who are quite satisfied with innocent pinching and squeezing, and do even this good-naturedly, as if ashamed of their profession. His pictures of martyrdoms create the impression of boys disguised as martyrs and executioners; and his bearded men weeping like women are equally incred- ible. But when he does not leave his proper sphere, and the problem is to portray tender feelings, a great
Ico
FRA GIOVANNI DA FIESOLE, CALLED FRA ANGEL
a Wn 2 iq O o Zz > et a O Q a4 Wn Z < O S
TWO DOMID
San Marco, Florence
BHy3zantinism and Mysticism 53
and silent joy of the heart, a holy ecstasy or tender
sadness, his pictures have the effect of the silent prayer
of achild. And for this heavenly world, the only real
world for him, he has also found the suitable, rosy, and
joyful colours: a transparent blue, a jubilant red,
yellow that gleams like honey, and gold which like a
heavenly splendour encircles celestial beings.
San Marco owes it to him that it has become the most sacred cloister in the world. Even in the confusion of picture galleries, one forgets the world in the presence of Fiesole’s pictures: whether he depicts Mary receiving in modest confusion the message of the angel; or the rich kings from afar, who, in such unbounded humil- ity, worship the Christ-child; the kneeling Apostles thankfully and joyfully receiving the host from the Saviour; or the friends of our Lord as, thoughtful and melancholy, they assemble around the cross; fair- haired angels, who celebrate in joyous transports, with harps and song, the crowning of the Blessed Virgin; or the the elect, crowned with red and white roses, marching with stately tread to paradise. A pic- ture of the last-named subject, now in the Berlin Gallery, is perhaps the most beautiful of his works. Since his day thousands who were far greater techni- cians have painted the other world, but in no paradise would one so gladly live asin Fiesole’s— that beautiful, innocent world where it is always Sunday: where the child finds his toys again, the friend his friend, and the lover his mistress. These blessed
34 Medixval Style in Fifteenth Century
ones who gaze, astonished as children an Christmas-
day, upon the glory of heaven, the mystic dances on
the flower-strewn sod, the movements of the dainty,
tender bodies, which revolve more melodiously, more
ethereally, the nearer they approach their heavenly
home—such paintings involve a world of poesy.
Even in Rome, where at the close of his life Angelico decorated the chapel of Nicholas V. with frescoes, one remains standing before his works in thoughtful re- flection, after having walked through Raphael’s Stanze. Here, indeed, influenced by his pupils, he used a some- what.more modern style, avoiding all archaisms and golden splendour; buildings drawn in proper per- spective fill the background. But even with these concessions to the modern spirit, his native lovableness has not suffered. His old sincerity, the solemn moder- ation and delicacy of taste still remain. And when in the Vatican, even compared with Raphael, the art of Fiesole enchains us, it only proves something which later ages often forgot: that soul alone can speak to soul; the soul of painting, and not its form, is immortal.
III.— The End of the Monumental Style
Outside of the quiet cloisters of San Marco, there was little room for mysticism in a city like Florence. The circumstance that Fiesole, himself a Dominican friar, painted not scholastic but’ rather mystical subjects, shows a certain progressive tendency which is characteristic. As in the four-
End of the Monumental Style 55
teenth century Florence was the soil from which
the virile and objective art of Giotto grew, so in
the fifteenth it produced a painter who bears the
same relation to Fiesole that the epic and serious
Giotto bore to the gentle and dreamy Siennese.
Giotto born again and beginning at the point
where death had cut off his development—such
is Masaccio. He it was, and Masolino, who conducted
the school of Giotto into the fifteenth century.
From an external point of view (he was a pupil of Starnina) Masolino is connected with the school of Giotto. His frescoes in San Clemente at Rome are distinguished from the works of the Giotteschi by a more lively feeling for reality, a softer expression in the heads, and less stiffness in motion. There is something innocent and pure in the expression of the figures, and the whole character of presentation is strikingly simple and natural. A member of the painters’ guild of Florence in 1423, he received in the same year the commission to decorate the chapel of the Brancacci in Santa Maria del Carmine, dedicated in the preceding year, with frescoes of the Life of St. Peter. On the wall to the right he painted a large picture representing the Healing of the Lame Man and the Raising of Tabitha, on the_ pilaster to the right the Fall of Man, and on the window wall Peter Preaching, From these works also an artist speaks to us who originated in the school of Giotto, but endeavours to enliven and change its style.
End of the Monumental Style eg
Visiting the Sick; and on the wall to the left the
Tribute Money and the Raising of the King’s Son.
By virtue of these works Masaccio is now generally
eclebrated as the real founder of the new style. Let
us consider with what justice.
It is true that his pictures contain a wealth of new elements. Contrasted with the frightened couple fleeing from paradise, followed by the angel with drawn sword, the works of Masolino seem mere awkward designs. In the Tribute Money the image of Peter, throwing back his mantle and bending over to seize the fish with such eagerness that the blood rushes to his face, was long ago praised by Vasari because of its striking realism. In the picture of the Raising of the King’s Son the figure of the kneeling youth early became an object of admiration and of copying, because of the sure mastery of the nude displayed. While Masolino’s buildings seem laboriously constructed, Masaccio has, apparently without effort, achieved the harmonious relations which appear in space. Whereas the former, as a disciple of Cennini, still retains the rigid, cake-like forms of mountains, the latter portrays, for the first time in art, the quiet lines of the valley of the Arno. The difference in colour also deserves attention. Masolino still pre- serves the pleasing rosy tone which Giotto loved; but Masaccio has adopted a more powerful colour scheme, which no longer endeavours to attain the effect of faded gobelins but aims at natural truth. It is also customary
58 Medieval Style in Fitteenth Century
to emphasise, as a characteristic of his realism, an
external feature, the treatment of the halo. While in
the older style, even in the case of Masolino, the halo
appears as an immovable circle about the head of the
figures, Masaccio treats it as an actual disc suspended
horizontally above the head, and participating in all
the movements of the body.
The question at issue, however, is whether it was in these innovations that Masaccio’s greatness consisted ; whether his works should be considered as paradigms of Renaissance painting. Episodic details, con- temporary fashions, and portrait heads, which appear sO numerous even with Masolino, are justly considered innovations of the quattrocento; but Masaccio has none of these. He makes a very limited use of por- traits, merely venturing to place his own among the Apostles. Far from giving a literal reproduction of his model, he ennobles and idealises, he raises individual to majestic qualities. Contemporary costumes, which appear but seldom in his paintings, are restricted to the spectators; while the saints, as in the earlier period, wear the antique toga, the drapery of which he models with simple grandeur. Genre episodes and conspic- uous tours de force in perspective do not appear; not that he does not understand how to solve difficult problems, but rather shuns them in order not to dis- turb the great, quiet harmony of his work. Even in landscape backgrounds he avoids all naturalistic detail, confining himself to simple and majestic lines. .
End of the Monumental Style 59
Masaccio’s greatness lies not in his realism, but rather
in the quiet repose, the grandiose simplicity, and the
solemn style of his work. Although combined with
more technical ability, his is still the heroic style
created by Giotto a hundred years before. It is no
accident that the masters of the cinquecento chose
Masaccio as their leader. When the reaction against
the naturalism and detailed realism of the quattrocento
began, the young painters thronged to the Brancacci
Chapel as to a university. Here Michelangelo received
from Torregiani the well known blow that flattened his
nose, and Raphael made those copies which he after-
wards used in his Roman frescoes. It was not the
realist in Masaccio that they admired, but the qualities
of Giotto which he had preserved for modern art—the
sustained grandeur and the impressive dignity of his
style.
Parallel with Masaccio in this regard are the works of a northern master, who, like a solemn patriarch of a bygone age, lives on into a new epoch—Hubert van ‘Eyck. Of equal importance with the Brancacci fres- coes for Italian art were the monumental figures of the Ghent altar-piece for northern art.
Like Masaccio, Hubert van Eyck belongs as a tech- nician to the new epoch. He in particular made prac- ticable the use of a vehicle for the expression of that natural truth which the new epoch demanded: colour. The light, pale, bodiless tints of the earlier artists sufficed as long as the problem of painting was
60 ©6WMedieval Style in Fifteenth Century
confined to the expression of purely visionary effects;
they were insufficient as soon as real illusion and
striking natural truth were required. The most varied
experiments in colour were therefore attempted
throughout the century. On the one hand, the ancient
tempera technique was raised to new perfection; not
in measured harmonies, but by placing the colours side
by side, full, powerful, and bright, thus achieving by
contrast a heightened effect. On the other hand, the
invention of oil painting supplied a vehicle even more
pliant for the new requirements; to have first used
this technique in panel painting was the achievement
of the great master of Maaseyck.
It is not known whence he came, nor can his devel- opment be traced in any youthful works. When he began the work with which his name is for all time con- nected, the altar-piece of Ghent, he was nearly seventy years of age,! and he left it for his brother to complete. It is even questionable how far the altar-piece as it is seen to-day corresponds with the plan of the original designer. Only one thing seems certain—that the panels of God the Father, Mary, John the Baptist, and the Angels making Music are by the hand of Hubert.
Most astonishing is the artistic power which the work reveals. The blue, green, and red mantles enve- loping the figures as in flames; the shimmering
' This computation would place Hubert’s birth about 1356 (for he
died in 1426), antedating by ten years the earliest estimates of his
_birth year hitherto reached (including Professor Muther’s),—Ep
End of the Monumental Style 61
tiara studded with diamonds, pearls, and amethysts;
the sceptre adorned with precious stones, and the
heavy brocaded garments of the angels; the glittering
agraffes, the sheen of the oak-wood and the gleam of
the organ pipes—such effects of colour an earlier painter
would have attempted in vain to produce.
In like manner does his draughtsmanship far excel that of an earlier period. The figures are seated as if they were actual bodies, not ethereal spirits, but corporeal beings of flesh and blood. He has even deprived the angels of their shadowy qualities and placed them in the choir of St. John’s church, where the tones of the organ peal forth and the music of viols and harps sounds.
Yet the parallel with Masaccio is a correct one; for the naturalism and the splendour of colour of the new epoch are interwoven with the sublimity of the medi- zeval style. However material the figures may be, they hover beyond all earthly reach; however well painted and designed, the impression they give is less one of the quattrocento than of those solemn saints who, encircled by the splendour of mosaics, sit enthroned in the apse of early Christian churches. As in Italy, so in the Netherlands there flourished during the mid- dle age a great monumental style, of which Hubert’s works are but a reflection. Mighty sublimity, simple grandeur, and consecrated dignity—such are the epithets which best characterise his panels. Their intimate relation to the works of Masaccio is also
62 Medisval Style in Fifteenth Century
shown by their effect upon succeeding generations.
The painters of the quatirocento had forgotten Hubert
van Eyck; but when the passion for naturalism had
been satiated, and the yearning for a monumental
style returned, a great German stood reflecting before
the altar-piece of Ghent. In the presence of Hubert’s
God the Father, Diirer first conceived his Four
Apostles.
Book II.— The Renaissance
Chapter I.— Nature and Antique
I. The First Realists
Up to this time, the art of the fifteenth century had presented nothing new. Although it had indeed acquired a better draughtsmanship and created new means of expression in colour, its style thus far had remained that of the past. Not until art had definitely broken with tradition, until there had been an after development of the medizval style from Byzantinism through Mysticism down to the monumental art of Giotto, did painting turn into new paths. Artists then appeared who, unconnected with the past, began quite anew, as if the use of brush and colour had just been invented for them. Change followed change, and a revolution occurred, more rap- idly perhaps than any in our own nervous century. The subject-matter of painting indeed remained ecclesiastical; for the Church was still the principal patron of art. But as the artists were not permitted to paint earthly subjects without a biblical mask, their worldly tendencies found satisfaction in another way: by making all religious painting worldly. Giotto had avoided portraiture, and Masaccio 65
LJ P to this time, the art of the fifteenth century
66 Mature and Antique
confined himself to portraying himself and Masolino among the spectators in the Tribute Money. Now,
at one sweep, all paintings are filled with portraits.
Not satisfied with inserting their own into biblical pic-
tures, artists even added, in life size, the portraits
of the donors, which had formerly appeared either not
at all or else in very diminutive size. Man no longer
felt himself a dwarf in the presence of the saints, but
as an equal among equals. They then went further,
introducing their friends and protectors as patriarchs,
apostles, and martyrs among biblical scenes. The
final step was to deprive the saints of their
supernatural character. All beings who had formerly
lived in the domain of idealism were changed into
men of flesh and blood, to be distinguished from
others only by the halo above their heads.
This resemblance is by no means confined to the heads, but extends also to the costumes. The quattro- cento was perhaps the most splendour-loving epoch in the history of civilisation; a century inexhaustible in the invention of new fashions, which allowed no edicts against luxury to rob it of its pleasure in the toilet. All these bizarre fashions were adopted by art. While Masaccio, following the principles of Giotto, had enveloped most of his figures in flowing draperies resembling those of the statues of the antique orators, in contrast to this ideal style the art of the following epoch creates the impression of a great book of fashion plates. Delighting in the smallest detail of costume
The First Realists 67
_ artists furnished even the saints with the most piquant
toilettes: coquettish little cloaks trimmed with feathers,
and impossible head-dresses. An exquisite dandyism
seemed to have affected the inhabitants of heaven
as well as of this world. If the picture represents a
Madonna, an earthly family-scene is actually portrayed.
Mary has laid off the hieratic costume; her hair is
coquettishly dressed and she wears a tight bodice
with rich border and adorned with delicate needlework.
The Christ-child holds a starling or a flower, listens
to the word of his mother or lies on her breast; and
it became a favourite practice to give him the infant
St. John as a playfellow. Purely genre scenes took the
place of devotional pictures. The Adoration of the
Kings was converted into a complete picture of
contemporary manners; the kings of Bethlehem
are princes of the quattrocento, attended by a rich
train of men at arms and Oriental slaves, just as
they would appear in making a visit to a foreign court.
As the episodes were transferred to the immediate present, since only the present seemed true and beauti- ful, so the most different elements were introduced, things having no connection with the principal event and owing their existence solely to the pleasure which the artist took in the beauty of the world: here an amusing episode, there some graceful animal like _a bird, a hare, a monkey or a dog; there again, flowers and fruit. Pleasure, splendour, riches, everything but piety is characteristic of these pictures. Every-
68 Wature and Antique
thing beautiful that life offered is woven into bright
and gleaming nosegays.
Even the technical execution betrays to what extent earthly joy predominated over religious feeling. The care with which the principal figures are executed is extended to the smallest detail. While in the pictures of the trecento, even with Fiesole and Masaccio, the accessories played no part, but were indicated only when they served to make the principal event clearer, now vessels, carpets, arms, and flowers are executed with such care as if the subject were an independent still-life. The result is that the art of the quattrocento, although the subjects are biblical, nevertheless involves the entire profane painting of later centuries; and that in these works, even though they represent saints, the whole epoch with its people, costumes, arms and utensils, dwelling rooms and buildings, lives on as in a great picture-book of the history of civilisation.
The backgrounds of these paintings also show a radical innovation. In contrast to Giotto, who had indicated the scene of action by conventional forms of — buildings and cliffs, and to Lochner, who had con- structed ideal gardens of hedges and roses, the artists of the quattrocenio conceived the actual earth as the natural home for their very human saints. The rooms in which they lived are the same which may still be found in ancient cities; rooms with heavy wooden ceilings, panelled walls, majolica tiles, and carved furniture. The landscapes through which they stride
4
The First Realists 69
are the same upon which the sun still shines. Whereas
Masaccio, Lochner, and Fiesole had confined themselves
to powerful lines and modest suggestions, those who
followed never tired of a circumstantial description of
all details. The background is filled with buildings,
views of cities, towers and palaces, sometimes crowning
the ridge of a mountain, sometimes extending into
fertile plains. Even in interior scenes there is usually
a view through a window upon woods, meadows, rivers,
and hills. Much more is given than the eye can discern
in nature. Hazy and melting effects do not exist for
the sharp eye of these painters. Not only are the grass
and flowers of the foreground painted stem for stem
and leaf for leaf; but even in the far distance objects
retain equally sharp outlines and colours.
Although this may often seem unnatural to the modern eye, we can easily understand the feelings that swayed the artists. The logical reaction against an art to which natural scenery had for so long been strange, and which permitted only golden backgrounds, was just such a richly detailed landscape, which in its reverential pantheism thought the smallest leaf with its spark- ling dewdrop equally important with the proud palm, and the pebble with the mighty cliff; which would not permit cloudy atmosphere to darken the brightness of things; and which in a single work would fain have sung the whole richness of form and colour in the universe. Even the church reconciled itself with the new views. When Raymond of Sabunde, in his
70 Wature and Antique
Theologia Naturalis, taught that nature was a book
written by the finger of God, he gave its blessing to the
worldly delight of the age and to the efforts of the
artist to depict it.
As the altar-piece of Ghent is the last echo of the medizval conception of art, so it is also the first classical expression of the new worldly style. Although Jan van Eyck was but twenty years younger than Hubert, a whole world seems to separate him from his brother. The solemn, ideal style of Hubert is of the middle age; but the art of Jan is firmly planted in the soil of modern times. That he completed the altar-piece of Ghent as Hubert had originally planned it, seems very doubt- ful. Even from the panels in which it was necessary for him to follow his brother’s designs, another spirit speaks. As he could never have created the three mighty central figures of the altar, he was also unable to attain his brother’s excellence in the panel of the Singing Angels which he painted as a pendant to Hubert’s Angels Making Music. With Hubert not only the faces but the hands also are inspired with nervous life; through these nimble fingers the spirit of music streams. But in Jan’s Singing Angels, how- ever highly Karel van Mander praises them, the faces are spiritless, the hands are clumsy and badly drawn. He possessed neither the spiritual greatness and the serious thoughtfulness of his brother nor his plastic sense for the organic construction of the body. Even in the panels, which in accordance with the plan of the
VAN EYCK
GIOVANNI ARNOLFINI AND HIS WIFE
National Gallery, London
The First Realists 71
altar had to be rendered in large form, he speaks to us
as a miniature painter whose eye rests only upon the
coloured surface of things.
His figures of the Two Donors are the first real portraits in modern art. They are genuine types of the sterling burgher class which had made Flanders the wealthiest country of the earth: the husband a wealthy and rather dull bon vivant, who after the day’s successful labour has settled himself to repose; his wife a true mistress of the house, with the highly respectable features of a lady used to command. In the panel of the Annunciation he places the chief emphasis upon the still-life—a room containing a washbasin and all kinds of household furniture, and with a view through a window upon the street. In the figures of Adam and Eve, he does not strive, like Masaccio, after great lines and spiritual content, but confines himself to reflecting with photographic accu- racy the sunken breast and the prominent abdomen of Eve, the hair of Adam’s legs, the pale colour of the skin of the body, and the darker hue of the hands. |
He was not in his real element until he painted the lower panels with the many small figures: the Adoration of the Lamb, the Just Judges and the Soldiers of Christ the Holy Anchorites and Hermits. Thus, indeed, are the panels inscribed; but from the figures themselves it would be difficult to surmise a biblical significance. They are men of flesh and blood, in no sense resembling the ideally
72 ature and Antique
draped and spiritual beings of the older epoch. On
one side he has painted the Burgundian princes riding
with their train to the hunt; on the other, monks and
beggars, the rabble of the road, as with swollen feet,
sunburned faces, and care-worn brows, they stride
over the stony soil.
Even more fascinating than the people is the land- scape. The sky is no longer golden but blue, and the grass-covered sod stretches far into the distance. Daisies, anemones, violets, dandelions, strawberries, and pansies are in bloom; in the bushes the roses glow; cypresses, orange and pine trees tower aloft, and in dark arbours purple grapes shimmer.
_This southern character of nature at the same time calls to mind why Jan was destined to be the father of landscape painting. He may have derived the first impulse from the miniature-paintings; for the novelties which he introduced into the altar-pieces had long been customary in illuminated manuscripts, which as an aristocratic luxury might possess greater wealth of detail and maintain a more worldly character than religious panels. In his position as valet de chambre, he probably saw many a Book of Hours which was inaccessible to ordinary mortals; and what he learned as a court painter was used for the benefit of the good donor of the altar, Jodocus Vydt. But the determining active factor was another event in his life. Wide travel necessarily directs the attention to the strange things in the new surroundings. The
The First Realists 73
air appears bluer, the distant view awakens a more
sentimental mood, and the earth seems more beautiful.
Things passed listlessly by at home suddenly acquire
anew meaning. As in the nineteenth century artists
made pilgrimages to Italy, Norway, and the Orient
before depicting their native home, so for Jan van
Eyck a journey which in 1428 he made to Portugal
_in the service of the Duke of Burgundy proved a reve-
lation. In southern climes nature was more fully
revealed to him, and upon his return home he enthu-
siastically embodied in his paintings the memories
of what he had seen in foreign lands.
In his independent works he followed even further his personal inclinations. While Hubert, as the offshoot of the old monumental painting, depicted only the sublime and always maintained a solemn tone, Jan, as a descendant of the miniaturists, is the painter of detail par excellence; the unsurpassed an- cestor of all Fortunys and Meissoniers, who, in his small cabinet pictures has created works as delightful in workmanship as they are delicate in colour. His little Madonnas, indeed, make no attempt to awaken pious sentiment. If the older masters attempted to ascend to heaven, Jan brought heaven down to earth; if they had visions of the other world, Jan painted simple episodes of life.
While the painters of Cologne drew all figures tall and slender, like the soaring pillars of Gothic architecture, Jan van Eyck painted them heavy-set; and in order to create a suitable background, instead of the soaring Gothic, he used the massive Romanesque style. In their works a heavenly longing gleams in Mary’s eyes, but Jan paints her as a healthy Flemish mother. With them the figures lived in Paradise, with him in the midst of a joyous reality. Sometimes he reveals Mary in the interior of a church, in which an architectural perspective, with the interesting effects of light streaming through stained glass windows, opens to view; sometimes the background is a simple living room, affording the opportunity of reproducing a veritable still-life of pewter dishes, lamps, tankards, gleaming water-bottles and carpets; or again she stands in the open air and the eye beholds churches, palaces, gardens, streams, market-places and streets in the dis- tance. It is astonishing how upon a bit of canvas of the size of a hand he can produce the effect of furthest distance; with what fidelity he renders the sheen of metal, every blade of grass in a landscape and the very dewdrop upon it; and lets the light play and shimmer on shining armour, a crystal globe or a piece of goldsmith’s work.
It might even be said that little pictures of this kind form the culmination of the entire technical skill of the northern art during the middle ages. For the fascinating quality of Gothic buildings, tabernacles, pulpits, and baptismal fonts of the fourteenth century is neither the harmony of proportion, purity of line, nor delicacy of decoration; but rather the incredible
The First Realists 75
skill with which the fretwork, rosettes, and other
decorative features are carved and fitted together
just as if the material were not hard stone, but soft
enough to be kneaded in the hand. Now in
the fifteenth century these manual gymnastics re-
dounded to the benefit of painting. After the
eye had once accustomed itself to the actual forms
of nature, the hand was soon able to master them
with the juggling surety of the Gothic architects in
stone.
But a glance at Italy will show that it would not be correct to regard miniature painting as a specifically northern peculiarity. It was a natural reaction from the monumental style of the earlier epoch, and therefore found as enthusiastic followers in Italy as in the Nether- lands. The qualities which in the north are attrib- uted to Jan van Eyck are identified in the south with Pisanello. It is not impossible that there was a mutual influence, since, according to the account of Facius, painters from the Netherlands were active in Verona. At all events, Pisanello is as nearly related to the Netherlander as he is different from his country- man Masaccio. Where the latter rendered only ideal types, Pisanello paints his contemporaries ; and whereas Masaccio retained the ideal costume of Giotto, Pisan- ello never tires of depicting small cloaks, hosiery, enor- mous hats, and dainty pointed shoes. The delight of the quattrocento in the wardrobe now finds place in sacred pictures. Smiling landscapes stretch before us, and,
76 ature and Antique
as in the case of Jan van Eyck, animals move and
live among the biblical figures.
The frescoes which he painted in Verona differ as widely from those of the Brancacci Chapel as the lower panels of the altar-piece of Ghent from the monumental figures of the upper row. They are the works of an interesting charmer, who expresses neither spiritual nor formal thoughts, but who observes men and things with a refined and refreshing glance. In- stead of biblical stories he portrays knightly processions and hunting expeditions. Partridges, dragons, dogs, and horses are mingled in the respectable assembly of saints, who in their dandified, tight-fitting clothes seem personages from Boccaccio rather than the Bible. In their visit to the Christ-child, his three kings have brought along all their pages, equerries, hunting dogs, and falcons, and appear in a landscape of the Lake of Garda rich in villas, vineyards, herds of sheep, and birds flying about. His St. George, in a cuirass and with an enormous felt hat, resembles a condottiere of the fifteenth century; while St. Hubert, the mighty hunter, only affords him an opportunity to populate a thick wood with dogs, hares, rabbits, and bears. Even his drawings betray that he was at heart more an animal than a biblical painter.
Finally he resembles Jan van Eyck in this respect, that he was the first to paint purely profane pictures and to elevate portraiture to a separate branch, equally justified with religious painting.
The First Realists 77
Before the fifteenth century portraiture did not
exist. Sovereigns alone had the right to be immortal-
ised ia statues and mosaics, and portraits were only
permitted as plastic decoration of tombs. The spirit
of the new epoch first awoke in the fourteenth century.
Men wished to leave behind them traces of their
earthly career, to hand down their names and effigies
to distant generations, and thus achieve immortality
on the earth. Ona wall in the Bargello, Giotto de-
picted the poet of the Divine Comedy among the blessed
in Paradise, and it is related of Simone Martino that
he went to Avignon of his own accord in order to
portray Petrarca. But Giotto’s picture is rather
silhouette than portrait, and an idea of the portrait-
ure of Simone Martino is furnished by his fresco of
Guidoriccio Fogliani de’ Ricci, which certainly does
not greatly resemble the original. Art was yet too
-much swayed by the typical to succeed with the
individual characterisation.
In the fifteenth century, not only had the love of fame grown to such an extent that every rich citizen henceforth felt the need of handing down his lineaments to posterity, but art had now acquired the ability to portray them with strict fidelity to nature. In Italy it became the vogue to adorn mantels and friezes with colored portrait busts; or at least to preserve likenesses on a bronze medal.
To Pisanello belongs the fame of having, upon the basis of memorial coins, revived the medallist’s art,
78 Wature and Antique
and of having applied the style of the medal to paint-
ing. As the medal is based upon a negation of
depth, his painted portraits are confined to the profile
view, the heads being drawn with plastic severity.
In place of the metal background of the medal, he
used a carpet-like ornament of a monochrome mass,
upon which the profile is firmly planted.
In the Netherlands there was no such connection with the medallist’s art, and the portrait of Jan van Eyck consequently differed from Pisanello’s in that they never presented the heads in profile, but in three- quarters view. While the Italian draws the charac- teristic line, the Fleming paints the coloured surface. Common to both, however, is the endeavour to present human physiognomy with the uncompromising reality and the unbounded exactitude of the photographic apparatus. As landscape painters, who had formerly been permitted to render golden backgrounds only, now painted every pebble, leaf, dewdrop, and blade of grass, so portrait painters, who had previously been confined to general types, now delighted, with veritable passion, in crisp details, such as wrinkles, furrows, warts, and stubs of beards. Even in the choice of models they proceeded in accordance with this point of view. For while they seeem to have avoided youth- ful portraits, both male and female, the shrivelled heads of old men and women are subjects after the heart of these realistic artists. Think of the rugged old man in the Berlin Gallery, holding with comic
The First Realists 79
earnestness a pink in his hand‘; or the strange head of
Arnolfini, particularly in his Betrothal in London
which, with its rich accessories so illustrative of the
customs of the day, already contains the germ of later
genre painting.
The development progressed along the same lines. Now that painting had discovered the poetry of the earthly, it could not remain where Jan van Eyck and Pisanello had left it. Their dainty, trifling miniature art had to be changed into serious painting, no longer confined to coloured surfaces, but which should discover the reality of things, and thus justify scientifically the existence of realism. In these further investigations the Netherlanders took no part.
After the founders of the school had given a an important impulse by the perfection of oil painting, their followers confined themselves to working on in the style of the van Eycks.
The works of Petrus Christus offer nothing not already contained in those of Jan. He appropriated the models of his master and the furniture of his studio, adopting whole figures of Jan’s pictures in his own. As in the Frankfort Madonna he used Jan’s Turkish carpet and the figures of Adam and Eve of the Ghent altar, so in the Madonna at Burleigh House he copied the Carthusian monk of the Rothschild Madonna. An interesting subject, because no similar work of Jan’s
1 The pink, which had at that time just been introduced into Europe,
created a similar sensation to that caused by the orchids in our own day.
VOL, £.—6
80 Wature and Antique
survives, is his St. Eligius at Cologne; it shows what
worldly and purely pictorial points of view then deter-
mined the choice of subjects. The artist desired’ to
paint gleaming objects like golden tankards, beakers,
necklaces, aigrettes, and wings; and as this could not
yet be done in the form of pure still-life, he remembered
good old Eligius, and placed him, purely as a matter
of form, in the foreground.
While he lived at The Hague Jan van Eyck may have also had a determinative influence upon con- temporary Dutch painting. At any rate Albert Ouwater’s masterpiece, the Resurrection of Lazarus, is quite in the manner of his school. Like Jan he has placed the scene in a Romanesque cathedral, and the daintiness and repose of the figures, who are in no wise disturbed by the miracle, are equally reminiscent.
Although Dirk Bouts is reputed to have improved upon Jan in landscape, his panels’ of the altar at Louvain indicate no progress from elaboration to greater intimacy. On the contrary, Bouts even adds details and piles the most arbitrary objects upon each other. .It is curious to note how with him the spirit of realism led to the fantastic landscape. The artist felt that biblical scenes should not occur in the Nether- lands; and as he distinguished the figures as Orientals by turbans or other Eastern head-dresses and curious arms, so also he sought to give the landscape an exotic character. For Jan van Eyck, who had travelled widely, this was easy enough—he simply gave Portugal as the Orient; but Bouts, who had never left home, had to invent. As Holland was such a flat and level country, he thought the Orient must be mountainous; and he believed that by painting the opposite of what his home offered he could most correctly achieve the real character of biblical scenes. Another innovation by him is the endeavour to interpret certain effects of light. In contrast to Jan van Eyck, who painted everything in broad daylight, Bouts has in his St. Christopher depicted the background of the reddish light of the rising sun, while a ravine in the foreground is still enveloped in the darkness of night. In his Christ Taken Prisoner he has even attempted a problem not again ventured upon until it was at- tempted two centuries later by Elsheimer; while the background shows the pale light of the moon in a nightly sky, the figures are enveloped by the glare of torches.
But even such achievements only indicate progress along the old path, and no diverging road. The ap- pearance of Jan van Eyck was so sudden, and so far did he reach into the future, that those who came after had quite enough to do to hold the field which he had conquered. It is true that in the Netherlands great personalities still appear who even enter into the drama of European art; but as they march alone, there is no co-ordination of labour or logical develop- ment of art. A real evolution of art during the fifteenth century exists only in Italy.
82 Wature and Antique
II.— Storm and Stress in Florence
In Florence, especially, all the conditions for the logical development were present. Here, where Cosmo de’ Medici was at the head of the state, and where the Strozzi, Bardi, Rucellai, Tornabuoni, Pitti, and Pazzi sought, by the patronage of art, to emblazon recent coats of arms, there were such commissions for painting as were given nowhere else in the world. But Florence had also become the scientific centre of Italy, and the great scholars, anatomists, and mathematicians whom the Medici had summoned thither worked hand in hand with the artists. A scientific spirit pervaded art, the only spirit capable of solving all the purely technical problems which the century proposed. Sim- ply because in Florence artists laboured who, more as scholars than as artists, dedicated themselves with fanatic eagerness to the solution of the different prob- lems, and made it a life work to penetrate into the formative workshop of nature, could the painting of the quattrocento make such rapid progress. Only upon the foundation which these Florentine investigators had laid could the structure of modern painting arise.
The first important problem was perspective—the problem with which the early period had most clumsily striven. Giotto always failed in attempting to divide his figures among several planes and to place them in correct relation to the buildings.” With however much genius Masaccio solved the problem, he did so by arbitrarily following his own feelings. Such experi-
Storm and Stress in Florence 83
ments had to be replaced by clear, scientific knowledge.
As the correct proportions of the figures in space as well
as the further development of landscape painting was
only possible after the laws of perspective had been
established, the foremost minds of the day proceeded
to devote themselves to this subject.
Brunellesco, the great architect, laid the foundation. Assisted by the mathematician Paolo Toscanelli, he established as the first principle that objects appear smaller in accordance with their distance from the eye, and offered the proof in a drawing of the piazza in front of the Baptistery. The way being thus paved, his conclusions were followed further. In his first book on painting, which was devoted mainly to the laws of perspective, Leon Battista Alberti put in writing all that had heretofore been orally transmitted, and in- vented the scheme of quadrates which enabled the artist to solve the most complicated problems with mathematical exactness. The origin of a special profession, that of the prospettivista; the facts that, in the coloured incrustation of furniture, representations were for a long time popular which were nothing more than perspective paradigms, and that Ghiberti even treated reliefs as picturés with a background in per- spective—these are further examples of the importance which the quattrocento ascribed to the new science.
Paolo Uccello used these achievements as a starting point in painting. According to Vasari, he received the appellation Uccello because, notwithstanding his
84 Wature and Antique
poverty, he possessed an entire menagerie, including
a collection of rare birds. In his study of animals, so
characteristic of the quattrocento, he is therefore related
with Pisanello. His principal activity, however, con-
sisted in the establishment, in connection with his
friend the mathematician Manetti, of a system of the
rules of perspective. It is touching to see a workman of
this calibre becoming a fanatic over his problems, for-
getting the whole world and brooding through whole
nights over his investigations. What cares he for life
or for painting! If it is in any wise possible he paints
his pictures in monochrome, and if he must carry them
out in colour, it is immaterial to him whether his horses
are red or green. The life work which fate has decreed
for him is only the solution of problems of perspective.
Thus in his fresco of The Flood in the cloister of Santa Maria Novella, he does not paint the terrors of an inundation of the world, as any pupil of Giotto could have done; but he attempts the solution of problems which, chosen only for their difficulties, make the entire painting seem an illustration for a text-book of per- spective. In the pendant representing the Sacrifice of Noah he causes a being supposed to represent. God the Father to fall headlong from the clouds—for the sole purpose of determining how a person who had suddenly fallen from a scaffold would appear if he remained suspended in space. His battle-pieces, too, seem strange to the modern eye. The weirdly- coloured, thick-necked horses, rearing or lying stiff
Storm and Stress in Florence 85
upon the ground, resemble the horses of a merry-go-
round more than real animals.
But the word battle-piece calls to mind what a great revolution we now witness. The very fact that such profane objects could be painted reveals the seven- league strides of the time. When we reflect that Uccello had no predecessor in this field, and that what he attempted was not again taken up until Raphael and Titian did it in the sixteenth century and Salvator Rosa and Cerquozzi in the seventeenth, we cannot but recognise the historical importance of this keen and fanatic mind. No great conquest is accomplished at one blow, and it is more meritorious to attempt new problems than to imitate perfectly the traditional. It is due to such minds as Uccello’s that Florentine painting did not remain stationary like the Nether- landish, but continued to ascend to new heights. With what astonishing fineness are the movements of these riders observed! How clearly the different planes are separated, and with what botanical exactness the leaves and the oranges are drawn! With what pains he endeavours, with a Japanese sharpness of eye, to render all the branches and leaves in correct perspective! In reading his biography and studying his works one cannot but feel reverence for this zealot who prosecuted his study of perspective in leaves and branches with as much reverence as though it had been a holy service
to God.
His equestrian portrait of the condottiere John
86 Wature and Antique
Hawkwood, in the cathedral of Florence, is also of
epoch-making importance. The spirit of the Renais-
sance and the equestrian statue—these involve almost
the same idea. Equestrian statues must again, as in
classical antiquity, be erected in public places; but
plastic art was not yet capable of solving these prob-
lems and painted statues had to suffice. In Uccello’s
fresco everything has a characteristic and monumental
air. Donatello learned from him, when seventeen
years later he created the statue of Gattamelata,
and even Titian’s Charles V. presupposes Uccello’s
Hawkwood.
The second problem was to furnish the new age with a new soul and a new body. In the middle ages men regarded themselves as a flock following the Good Shepherd, and art consequently did not recognise the individual and the particular. In the structure and position of the figures, as in their expression, a general and uniform type of beauty prevailed, which in the previous pages we have had ample occasion to examine. The fifteenth century, on the other hand, marks the victory of individualism and the uncompromising prominence of the individual. An abundance of sharply outlined characters suddenly appears—robust, clear-cut personalities; lawless natures belonging just as much in the gallery of criminals as in that of great men. Character, individuality, power, and energy are the passwords of the age. This new humanity, all these rugged and manly figures which the age had
Storm and Stress in Florence 87
created, had also to appear in painting. In contrast to
the former preference for beauty of an angelic and
tender type, the problem now was to depict energetic
and powerful beings; and to replace the shy and
feminine, though bearded, men in the pictures of the
older masters by angular, harsh, determined, and daring
types. The figures which had formerly hovered like
spirits above the earth had now to stand firmly upon
their own feet and become a part of their earthly home.
But the sentimental as well as the external ideals of mankind had changed. Instead of humility and self- effacement shining from downcast eyes and transfigured features, rugged faces with furrowed brows appear. The whole menagerie of passions was let loose. As the tyrants of the quattrocento unreservedly followed the passion of the moment, whether it were sensuality or towering rage, art was now commanded to represent more powerful emotions than earlier painting had known; to depict flitting motion, changing gesture, and passion convulsively thrilling the human frame.
Such problems were not even approached by Jan van Eyck and Pisanello. Although they had indeed painted the new costumes of their day, yet in their dainty manner of representation they remained Gothic. Their works have nothing of the rough breadth of the new age and its free demeanour, nothing of the depths of soul which suddenly appeared with such elementary power. Donatello was the first to give sculpture its new ideal; and it is characteristic how one extreme
88 Wiature and Antique
followed the other. The standard of beauty was
measured by the rudimentary and uncompromising
representation of individual qualities. For thus may
be best explained all the strange physiognomies which
suddenly made their appearance in art: coarse men of
the people with uncouth, overworked figures; peasants,
with bones of bronze and pointed weather-beaten
features; half-starved old beggars with flabby muscles
and tottering bodies; neglected fellows with bald heads,
stubbly beards, and long muscular arms. In place of the
former dainty pose, every line is now a sinew. Their
firm, energetic attitude reflects the entire spirit of the
rugged age of the condottiert; especially when, under
the power of passion, the whole body is shaken as by
convulsions. In his endeavour to render drastic ex-
pression Donatello occasionally descends to grimaces,
and it is no accident that he so loves the figures of
Magdalen and John the Baptist. For in these figures
all is united that the time demanded: a body upon
which hunger and self-denial have left their hideous
mark; a withered skeleton, held together by the leathery
skin alone, and convulsed by tearful woe and fiery,
ecstatic pathos.
The Donatello of painting is Andrea del Castagno, a keen and fearless spirit, who hesitates at no brutality or exaggeration which lends character to his figures. Like Donatello he loves revolting physiognomies, wild men of the desert, and starving ascetics, whose mighty and powerful features, consumed by an awfully intensi-
Storm and Stress in Florence 89
fied life, nevertheless create an indelible impression.
Like Donatello, he combines with keenness of facial
expression mighty statuesque power. His Cruci-
fixion in Santa Maria Novella is a marvel of pathetic
expression; particularly the figure of Mary, a harsh and
embittered matron, whose entire body is bowed in
suffering. In his Last Supper in Sant’ Apollonia
every figure has a character of rigid severity —that con-
centrated fulness of life expressed in Donatello’s statues
of the Campanile. One lingers before his Pieta in
Berlin because of its grandiose, heroic ugliness. His
Magdalen and the two Jobns in Santa Croce find
their equal only in the ascetic figures of the great con-
temporary sculptor.
By dint of sheer realism he sometimes attains a mighty, kingly style. His equestrian portrait of Niccolo da Tolentino, the pendant of Uccello’s Hawk- wood in the cathedral, is of a defiant and monumental grandeur, and the portraits of Dante, Petrarca, and Boccaccio, as well as those of Acciajuolo, Uberti, and Pippo Spano, all of which he painted for Villa Pandol- fini, are most impressive in their mighty, heroic power. Pippo Spano especially, standing, his sword in hand, with legs spread apart, seems the spirit incarnate of the quattrocento—that elemental age, equally great in art and in passion. Terribile—that much misused word— is certainly appropriate for Castagno. He is the king of the lawless age which piled up the unhewn stones of the Pitti Palace.
go Wature and Antique
The third subject requiring study was the problem of
colour. . Accustomed to fresco painting artists had de-
voted little attention to the technique of panels, and
were therefore far from having achieved the luminous
colouring of the Flemish pictures that had found their
way to Italy. To fill this deficiency was the lot of an
artist who came from the city in which the greatest
triumphs of colour in later Italian art were celebrated—
from Venice. Domenico Veneziano, who had seen
Pisanello’s frescoes arise in the Ducal Palace, had then
followed him to Rome, and had finally settled in
Florence, is reputed to have been the first man who
experimented with colours, independent of the Nether-
landers.!. Although his panels are painted in tempera
they are characterised by a peculiar brilliancy and
shimmer and a soft enamel-like effect. We are con-
fronted by the interesting fact that a Venetian, who had
evidently acquired the colour sense at home, attempted,
as early as the first half of the fifteenth century, and
in severe, plastic Florence, to solve the same problems
which did not again occupy Venetian painters until Bee
days of Bellini.
Even in sentiment the Venetian is recognisable.
1In common with other German writers, Professor Muther uses the terms Netherlands and Netherlanders for the Low Countries and their inhabitants during this epoch. Their art is more properly termed Netherlandish than Flemish, since it was common to both the Dutch and the Flemish provinces. Not until the sixteenth century did it
differentiate in consequence of their separation, and we may then more
properly speak of Flemish and Dutch art than one the earlier period.
—Ep.
Storm and Stress in Florence gi
The harsh, realistic traits which obtrude in Domenico’s
altar-pieces should not mislead us into considering him
an unbridled naturalist in the sense Castagno was.
The relation between these two artists was one of
mutual giving and taking. The impressions which
Castagno received from Domenico are expressed in his
occasional experiments with colour in such paintings as
the Crucifixion; it is even related that he killed
Domenico on account of envy at his success as a
colourist. Domenico, on the other hand, assumed the
garb of Castagno when he painted Sts. Jobn and
Francis in Santa Croce. As a matter of fact this
rugged rusticity was little in accordance with his
nature. He was the first after Pisanello to paint
portraits—those profile heads in which the evolution
of the portrait from the medal can be so clearly fol-
lowed. His subjects are all young girls. In_ his
portrait of the little Bardi maiden (Museo Poldi-
Pezzoli, Milan), he has depicted with loving tenderness
the charming lines of the arch profile and dainty neck,
the eye with free, childish glance and the blond hair
adorned with pearls. At a time when other portrait
painters were only in their element when giving the
facsimilies of old wrinkled faces and characteristic
ugliness, he could thus render the budlike freshness of
maidenhood with finely felt grace. The same young
woman, only a few years later, may be seen in a profile
portrait of the Berlin Gallery: in the one instance a
shy fiancée fresh from school, in the other a more
s
92 Mature and Antique
developed young wife. As several other portraits of
young women ascribed in the different galleries to other
artists are probably the work of Domenico, he may be
characterised as feminine in the midst of virile Floren-
tine art, and so the first artist who realised the grace of
youth and the charm of tender womanhood. Thus
did Venice, whose later art developed into a hymn to
womanhood, produce even at the beginning of the
fifteenth century the first portraitist of girls.
Such active minds wrestling with great problems were of course not in a position to supply the entire artistic needs of their day. The éclazreurs, therefore, were accompanied by the profiteurs, the investigators by those who popularised their ideas. The former did not dissipate their efforts or attempt activity in different fields, but laid down the results of their in- vestigation in a few works every one of which meant a conquest. The latter attempted to achieve breadth instead of depth. With the aid of the technical in- struments which others had forged, they set out to conquer the world. The whole fulness of life entered into art; and the history of the civilisation of the age is recorded in its paintings.
Fra Filippo, especially, and Gozzoli became the chroniclers of their epoch: careless, versatile minds, who, without troubling themselves over scientific problems, plunged with a joyous quiver in the stream of worldly events. By their position in life and educa- tion, both had been called to hold aloft the banner of
Storm and Stress in Florence 93
the old religious painting; for one was a friar, the other
the favourite pupil of the blessed brother of San Marco.
But how little religious feeling remains in their works!
Even as an individual, Fra Filippo is an interesting type of the day. Although only eight years younger than Fiesole, he was as different from him as a gallant abbée from a saintly hermit. In his quiet cloister Fra Giovanni knew nothing of the temptations of life or of the love of woman; but Filippo was of “‘such a loving nature that he would have given all his possessions for women.” In order to seek an adventure he would leave his workshop and work for days. When confined in his convent he made a rope out of the bedclothes in order to escape through the window upon a nightly expedition. He eloped with Lucrezia Buti, a pretty nun of Prato, and Spinetta, her younger sister, also fled to the home of the jolly couple. When Cosmo de’ Medici heard of these scrapes, he only “laughed heartily over them.” |
These performances, although indifferent as anec- dotes, illumine the joyful and worldly character of the age, and explain why the pictures of Fra Filippo have so little in common with Fiesole’s. Only in several of his youthful works, as in the delicate Adoration of the Christ-child, in Berlin, is there a breath of. that heavenly love which Fra Angelico painted. The sub-
1 According to Vasari, in the story which Browning followed in his famous poem, and from which the author's. version is derived, Filippo
was confined in the house of Cosimo de’ Medici, who thus sought to
keep the roving friar out of mischief.—Eb.
94 Wature and Antique
ject of the painting, its light, rosy colour and the soft
flow of the draperies, betray a connection with the older
art. He even became a fresh narrator, gazing with
sensual glance into life, and portraying in his paintings
sprightly maidens and women with nothing holy about
them. His Coronation of the Virgin rivals the
beauty of a harem, in the charming maidens who
are kneeling, their hair crowned with rose wreathes,
and carrying flowering, long-stemmed lilies in their
hands. In his paintings of Madonnas everything
solemn and representative is eliminated. The lowly
Virgin has become a blooming Florentine woman who
devotes much attention to the toilette. He clothes
her with gold-seamed garments, drapes her with scarfs
and jewellery, and arranges her lace collar with the
choice taste of a man who is an authority upon such
things. Of course, with the principal figure the sur-
roundings also change. Mary is no longer enthroned or
surrounded by saints, but sits in her home or in a
garden. Even in his frescoes at Prato depicting the
life of the Baptist and of St. Stephen, he remains an
admirer of women. In this cycle he occasionally at-
tempts a serious, solemn style; but he certainly took
most pleasure in the picture which represented Herod’ s
Banquet with Salome dancing. A Dinner with the
Medici would have been a more suitable title. “Fra
Filippo was very partial to men of cheerful character,
and lived for his own part in a very joyous fashion”’:
thus Vasari characterised him, and the artist certainly
IINALO] +] ‘DIMapnIIV
NIOUIA AHL AO NOILVNOUOD
IddIT OddITla
Storm and Stress in Florence 95
resembled the man. It would be vain to seek depth
or grandeur in his works. As the son of a butcher, he
passed his life among rather elementary feelings; but his
wholesomeness and good nature, his harmless epicu-
reanism, and fine feeling for feminine beauty make
him a true son of this joyful and happy age.
‘Benozzo Gozzoli experienced a similar artistic de- velopment. When in his youth he painted the delight- ful woodland story of the Journey of the Three Kings in the Palazzo Medici, he was still the dainty pupil of Angelico, and although he had fallen in love with the springtime, he had not yet forgotten heaven. He does not merely relate a novel of Florentine life; for groups of angels of captivating beauty terminate, on either side, this fresh and lovable work. Afterwards this dreamy tendency disappears. The lyric poet no longer survives and the narrator alone speaks in the celebrated cycles of San Gimignano and Pisa, which under biblical titles illustrate the whole life of the quattrocento. In the former cycle, which represents the Life of St. Augustine, one picture is particularly celebrated, because it gives information in regard to instruction in the schools of the fifteenth century. In the Pisan cycle, which treats subjects from the Old Testament, there is a veritable history of Florentine manners; the Legend of Noah is transformed into a Florentine vintage and the Building of the Tower of Babel affords an opportunity to depict the confused action of a building site, in which Cosmo de’ Medici, accom-
VOL, 1.—7
96 Mature and Antique
panied by his friends, views the structure. There is
nothing of the thunder of the prophets or of the bloody
wrath of Jehovah; but he relates contemporary. wars,
the foundation of cities, and the pleasures of country
life. He knows as little of artistic subtleties or of mod-
ern problems as the Giotteschi who laboured in the
Camposanto before him. But his bubbling narrative
talent and facility of execution are most astonishing.
Minarets, obelisks, triumphal columns, palaces, gardens
and vineyards, people of every age and condition,
animals and flowers—all these he weaves into bright
garlands. To improve and convert is as far from his
purpose as possible; his only aim is to entertain, chat
superficially, and record the chronicles of his age.
III.— Piero della Francesca
As the activity of the Florentine masters had not been confined to their native city, but had spread throughout Tuscany, it was not long before the spirit of realism took root elsewhere. Prato, the coquettish little city in the plain of the Arno, Em- poli, and Pistoja, summoned Florentine masters; in Pisa the time-honoured cradle of medizval painting, the new works of Gozzoli arose; in San Gimignano, in the picturesque mountain town of Arézzo, in Borgo San Sepolcro, and Cortona—everywhere Florentine painters were active. :
By this means realistic art was carried into these distant provinces. There, too, the painters were no longer willing to listen to the melodies of centuries gone by, as Gentile had done. Forgetting the ancient churchly ideals, they contended with their Florentine associates in the difficult labour of investigation. The dreamers who had lived so completely apart from the world were followed by calm and clear observers. Indeed, the artist with whom the realistic movement in Umbria began, Piero della Francesca, is the greatest of those searching minds whose scientific experiments created the grammar of modern painting, and who at- tempted problems which have occupied the world even until our own day.
Scarcely twenty years have passed since Impression- ism entered the artistic activity of the present day. The problem was to represent objects in their atmos- pheric veil, enveloped by light and air; it was not to paint local colours, but the effects of light under which every object momentarily changes colour. The activ- ity of Piero della Francesca confirms the old saying of Ben Akiba. Four hundred years ago he proposed the problem of realism, and endeavoured as the fore- runner of the most modern artists to establish in what manner atmosphere changes colour impressions.
The conditions then were very much the same as in our own-day. The consciousness had gradually arisen that there was a contradiction between the sharp out-
1A rabbi in Gutzkow’s Uriel Acosta, whose favourite expression
was, ‘Alles schon dagewesen”—there is nothing new under the sun.
—Ep.
lines and bright glistening colours of the van Eycks and Pisanello and what the eye actually sees; for ob- jects do not glisten in nature as Jan painted them on the Ghent altar. Yet another problem arose. Earlier art- ists, whose eyes lingered upon details, were not capable of rendering wide and distant views. Their perspec- tive knowledge only permitted them to indicate the recession of planes by means of hills and curtains. As they were not able to paint the broad heaven which lies above the plane, they avoided attempting it. The landscape rises almost vertically to two thirds of the . height of the picture, and often indeed the ascending surface is given without attempting to render the sky. The picture is the representation of a flat surface, and does not create the impression of depth.
By reason of his origin, Piero was called to offer a successful solution of these problems. The little town of Borgo San Sepolcro, where, in 1420, he was born, lies in the midst of the Umbrian plain. While artists who laboured in densely populated and closely built cities were accustomed, with sharp eye, to observe things from near by, Piero, standing on the hill of his native town, saw only light and space. He saw the sun as it brooded over the valley and bathed objects, now in the splendour of the morning, now in the quiyering light of noon, now in the soft twilight. Narrowed by no limit, his eye swept over numberless hills into infinite space. The two problems of space and light, therefore, became the great objects of his life.
The Florentines had also approached both. Uccello endeavoured by lines in perspective to awaken the feel- ing of depth; Castagno was fond of placing his fig- ures in a niche in order to attain the impression of a plastic object in space, and Domenico Veneziano at- tempted to interpret the gleaming shimmer of objects. When Piero, in 1438, came to Florence with Domenico, after the latter’s employment in Perugia, he saw the works of all these masters. What he had felt in his home became the object of scientific research. An Umbrian gathered the threads together in his hand, and solved the problem which the Florentines had laboriously attempted. The country in which St. Francis had written his hymn to the sun bestowed upon the world the first painter of light.
Even in his earliest work, the altar of the Miseri- cordia, which is still preserved in the hospital of Borgo, both problems are announced. The style is as new as the subject is medieval. While earlier artists had laboured rather in the style of relief and upon flat surfaces, Piero, in order to create the impression of spacious depth, represents the mantle of the Madonna as a hollow, cubic space, in which the kneeling figures are arranged in circular form. In contrast with earlier paintings, which reveal only broken local colours, the inner side of the mantle which Mary spreads over the believers refracts and reflects the colour in accordance with the light that sweeps over it. In his next picture, the fresco in San Francesco at Rimini, representing the lord of the city, Sigismondo Malatesta, a celebrated condottiere, kneeling before his patron saint, Piero has transferred these principles to landscape; the wall is broken open and the Duke is seen kneeling in an open space, which, pervaded by delicate light, stretches into the infinite. In order to heighten the impression of infinite space, he has erected in the foreground, like a mighty screen, a Renaissance column; that is to say, in order to direct the eye into the depth, he used the same artifice afterwards employed by Claude Lorrain. The two portraits of the Duke and Duchess of Urbino are also significant of these tendencies. While Pisanello and Domenico Veneziano had preserved, in their por- traits, the severe style of ancient medals, Piero, in his tendency to attain the impression of depth, broke with this point of view. A wide landscape with well tilled acres, hills and valleys, representing the blessings of good government, stretches out. The blue back- ground is no longer that of a medal, but the sky stretch- ing brightly over the fields. Instead of painted reliefs the figures have the effect of bodies in space. It is true that he did not solve the problem perfectly. His insistence upon the rigid profile causes a dissonance between the spacious effect of the background and the flat, constrained style of the heads. But he has made the beginning for the substitution of really painted portraits in place of painted medals.
While in these works he competes successfully with his Florentine colleagues, in a series of others he has
<
Piero della Francesca ol
taken over the ancient inheritance of the Umbrians, the
sense for feminine charm, into the new period. For
there hardly exists a more tender picture than his
Madonna, in Oxford, who, pale and emaciated, with
irregular but distinguished features, bends so silently
to the Christ-child. In his Birth of Christ, in Lon-
don, the scientific problem is, as usual, most promi-
nent. In order to attain the impression of spacious
depth he causes the roof of the hut to descend in keen
foreshortening, so that one feels that the figures really
stand in space; and on both sides he directs the view
to the landscape which, just because the scene in the
foreground is pushed forward, seems the more distant
and infinite in effect. In like manner he proposes a
fixed problem of light, the interpretation of the silvery
gleam of moonlight. Pale, blue light fills the room,
quivers in greyish beams through the hut, and bathes
the landscape of the background a bluish mist. But
the eye lingers with rapture upon the beautiful angels
who have come down from heaven to greet the Madonna
with song and with the music of mandolin and viol,
They are very wonderful and of a captivating modern
beauty, reminding one of Rossetti—these budding
maidens in gay costumes like those of an operetta,
with their wavy locks and gleaming necklaces.
“The frescoes of the History of the Holy Cross, upon which he was engaged in the Church of San Francesco in Arezzo until 1466, show him at the height of his ability. All the problems which he had adopted from the
102 Wature and Antique
Florentines are here solved in classic perfection. While
Uccello’s. battle-pieces do not progress beyond au-
tomatic stiffness, Piero’s pictures are perfected results of
modern battle painting. Castagno had laboured to
acquire the third dimension, but with Piero the surface
that he had to paint resolves itself without effort into
space. Although Domenico Veneziano was the first
to render the effects of light, Piero transformed all
nature into a world of values which were determined
by the all-ruling factor of light. In his Adam and Eve
Masaccio was the first to approach the problem of the
nude; but Piero renders scenes—especially nude men
seen from behind—which seem to have been taken from
the works of Klinger.
The psychological aspect of his work is no less re- markable than the technical. In representing the History of the Holy Cross, he actually gives the history of the Tree of Life which Seth, the son of Adam, planted: the history of the tree trunk, the wood of which served as a bridge, then as the threshold of the Temple, which once lay at the bottom of the sea, then in the depths of the earth; and which, although the Nazarene was crucified upon it, still preserves its indestructible power. The introductory picture, in which the dying Adam gives the command to plant the tree, contains the master’s philosophy. He sits there, aged and tired; the power of primitive man has left his sickly limbs. Beside him stands Eve supported by a crutch, her face wrinkled and her breasts withered.
PIERO DELLA FRANCESCA
THE BIRTH OF CHRIST National Gallery, London
Piero della Francesca 103
This group, however, is balanced on the other side by
a powerful young man, strong as an athlete, and beside
him a buxom lass whose full breasts protrude from her
clothing. Itis the contrast of age and youth, of decline
and power, of death and of ever renewing procreation
referred to by the Earth Spirit in Goethe’s Faust—
‘*“Geburt und Grab,
Ein ewiges Meer,
Ein wechselnd Weben,
Ein gliihend Leben.”
Piero resembles the Earth Spirit. What Millet called
“Je cri de la terre’’ resounds through his works. He
knows no heaven, but only the fruitful all-supporting
earth. The grain ripens, the soil of fertile acres steams,
and waving fields of grain stretch before us. Man,
bound fast to the soil and hard pressed, leads upon
this earth a great animal life. For Piero the world is
no longer a station on the road to heaven. He is the
son of the soil, made of the earth, to which he will
again return. He loves the workman, leaning on his
spade; the tiller of the soil, who makes it tributary and
fruitful. He is also attracted by Nubian types, because
these primitive men have something earthly and vege-
tating about them. His women resemble nurses who
only live to give life to new generations. In contrast
to the figures of Gentile gazing longingly towards
heaven, an Umbrian peasant now proclaims a new
gospel: that there is no immortality after death,
but only the withering and the budding, the eternal
process of creation in nature, is immortal.
104 ature and Antique
The Madonna del Pario, which after the com-
pletion of the frescoes of Arezzo he painted for the
mortuary chapel of the mountain town Ville Monterchi,
is perhaps his most representative work. Angels draw
back a curtain, revealing a woman placing, with
monumental gesture, her hand on her consecrated
body. Here he has painted the symbol of life; for the
Madonna is not the Blessed Virgin, but Cybele, the
primeval mother of the race of man, the incarnation of
Zola’s La Terre. Nor is there any death or resurrection
of existence for him. As in the frescoes at Arezzo he
had avoided representing the Crucifixion, although the
theme demanded it, so at San Sepolcro he paints not
the crucified but the risen Christ. Motionless as if a
part of the soil, the sleeping guards lie before the sarco-
phagus, and with solemn dignity the Earth Spirit,
superhumanly powerful, rises from the dark shaft.
Some of the trees are dead and bare; but on others a
new and succulent green begins to sprout.
His later works are onlyfurther paradigms of his prin- ciples. A flaring daylight lies over the Baptism of Christ, in the National Gallery (London). The body of Christ is not flesh-coloured, but the light falling through the treetops plays upon the skin with greenish reflec- tions. The figures do not stand in front of the landscape, but grow out of it mighty as statues. The trees meet- ing above the scene are pomegranates, the symbol of fertility. As angels, the fresh, saucy maidens of the Birth of Christ, with green wreaths and red and
The harbingers of the Storm 105
white roses in their fair hair, have returned. In the
_ picture of the Brera in which Federigo of Urbino kneels
before the Madonna, he has painted the latter’s wife,
Battista Sforza, as the Madonna, and her son, the little
Guidobaldo, as the Christ-child; the view opens into
the apse of the church in which the figures are ar-
ranged cubically ina hollowspace. Inthe Madonna di
Sinigaghia he attempts the favourite problem of Pieter
de Hoog in showing how the light from a window,
flooding into a room, vibrates more dimly in one place
and more brightly in another. The love of still-life
revealed in this painting led him to paint pictures with-
out figures, representing wide squares enlivened by
festive Renaissance buildings; and thus architectural
painting took its place in Italian art. It is true that in
these last works a yellowish-green mist has taken the
place of the clear, bright colours he had formerly loved.
It announced his disease of the eye—a strange irony
of fate that just the man who had seen so much
light was finally blinded.
IV.— The harbingers of the Storm
All these pictures seem separated by many de- cades from those of Gentile and Fiesole. Every vestige of the medizval feeling has died away, and all traces of religious devotion have been elimi- nated. Some treat subjects only to solve technical problems. With what a mocking shrug of the shoulders they must have looked upon Fiesole, seeing in his piety
106 ature and Antique
nothing but a melodvariae concession to the public.
Others, while they did not change painting into science,
nevertheless translated the whole Bible into a worldly
language, using all scriptural subjects as a pretext
for pictures of manners and fashions. That painting
should be a handmaiden of religion and satisfy certain
psychic needs seemed to them an exploded theory.
It is a question whether this art could have remained permanently dominant. However worldly-minded the upper classes may have been, and however proudly painters may have followed the programme of art for art’s sake, there was also a people who demanded other nourishment from art, who wished to be moved, and sought edification and comfort in pictures. Thus it came to pass that about the middle of the century a popular art appeared, in direct opposition to worldly and scientific painting. Among the people themselves, suppressed and grudging, a religious reaction was pre- paring. Although Roger van der Weyden and Fie- sole are separated by only a few years, one was the end, the other the beginning of an epoch. The art of the former is no longer of the soft yet rather thought- less and phlegmatic piety of the middle age, but the thunder preceding the storm; an earthquake that con- vulsed the nations.
This is not true of all the master’s paintings, for at the end of his life- he became even soft and conciliatory. In his last works, the Middelburg altar-piece and St. Luke, he is almost reconciled in character and in
The harbingers of the Storin 107
execution with the school of van Eyck, gentle and quiet
in feeling, delicate and detailed in landscape. If
another work ascribed to him in the Munich Gallery,
the altar-piece of the Three Kings, is really by him and
not by Memling, it might be said that in his latest
period he achieved an almost courtly delicacy of
execution. The costumes are smart and elegant, the
movements pleasing and courteous. The bit of land-
scape in the background—showing Memling’s rider on
a white horse approaching by a lonely road—would
even stamp him as the first painter of paysage intime
in the Netherlands.
But it is not of such elegant works that we think when Roger’s name is mentioned. One recalls great, wide- open eyes, tears streaming down emaciated cheeks, hands convulsively clasped or with stiff fingers stretched to heaven; one thinks of wailing and of wild anguish.
Jan van Eyck was not concerned with the suffering and heavy-laden; he appealed only to the wealthier classes, who demanded of art.a feast for the eye but no psychic emotion. With him everything is gay and bright; the flowers bloom, clothes glimmer, and a joyous Easter feeling pervades the world.
When Roger, the city painter of Brussels, spoke to the people, he spoke in words of thunder, like an im- passioned prophet of the Old Testament. His only theme is the suffering of the Saviour. Emaciated people with staring, tear-stained eyes stand sobbing
108 Wature and Antique
and wailing about the cross; Mary sinks unconscious to
the earth, and the apostles cry to heaven in wildest
despair. Or he paints the Madonna seated, a grief-
stricken matron, as if petrified by pain, and holding in
her lap the wounded and emaciated corpse of her Son.
In another painting the heaven has opened and Christ
calls the blessed to him, consigning the damned to
eternal tortures. In so far as he does not revert
to the medizval gold background, he even draws the
landscape into the struggle of passion. Abrupt and
jagged cliffs arise from dismal chasms, and all nature
seems petrified when the rigid body of the Redeemer
is interred.
As we of the present are no longer familiar with such passions, much about Roger’s pictures seems forced and the outbursts of pain impress us as grimaces. But if we reflect with what theatrical hollowness later artists painted the same theme, we cannot but feel the elemental force and the primeval power of these works. It seems as if no single man, but the people itself, had created them. As in Roman times it had once demanded panem et circenses, it now cried for religion, not begging but threatening and prepared for a revolt. Roger was.the interpreter of this senti- ment of the age. Never before and seldom since then has painting spoken in such tragic, convulsing tones. This explains the tremendous effects of his work, which
may be likened to an avalanche rolling over the
countries,
ROGER VAN DER WEYDEN
F CHRIST
THE BODY O
Berlin Gallery
F
BEWAILING O
The harbingers of the Storm 109
For Roger’s influence was not confined to the north.
The journey which as a pious man he made in order to
celebrate the jubilee of 1450 in the Eternal City, was
also an event for Italian art. From Cosmo de’ Medici
he received a commission for that altar-piece with the
Medicean patron saints, which now hangs in Frankfort.
This shows that in Italy also there existed religious
needs for which the scientific and worldly painting was
not sufficient. It would be interesting to know what
external event caused this sudden flaming up of the
religious spirit. Did St. Anthony of Padua, who was
at that time preaching, bring about the revolution?
It is very remarkable that the aged Donatello, who had
become a classicist while at Rome, suddenly changed
into a wild and impassioned Baroque master. A shrill
cry of despair seems to echo through his works at Padua,
and it is noteworthy that the school of that city as-
sumed the same tone.
For all such pictures as Gregorio Schiavone and Marco Zoppo painted have nothing in common with the superficial worldliness of Fra Filippo and Gozzoli, but are products of the same spirit which dominates Donatello’s reliefs and Roger’s Pzela. Earnest, un- approachable, and almost haughty, the Madonna sits on her marble throne, with saints of bony harshness and gloomy, threatening expression gathering about her. The world is dead; the eye sees no sprouting and budding, no flowers and perfume, but naked cliffs and gloomy caves. Bare and robbed of their foliage, the
110 ature and Antique
trees, as if freezing, stretch their withered branches
towards heaven. Men, too, were freezing; they longed
again for the warming rays of the light of heaven. A
harsh, frosty and ascetic spirit, as if of the north,
pervades these works.
The same spirit is even more prevalent in the product of the school of Ferrara. The very soil of this city is more northern than Italian. A flat plain, monotonous and dreary, stretches out like a mighty solemn Nirvana, filling the human spirit with religious stupor. The eye sees only little fields separated by crippled, leafless mulberry trees, among which scraggy grape-vines climb. Solemn and crude, defiant and gloomy, the Palazzo Schifanoja towers aloft, behind whose red brick walls the bloody tragedies recounted by Byron occurred. The streets are sober-looking and straight, and are flanked by palaces built of dark brick in the same severe and gloomy style.
It is easy to understand how Roger van der Weyden, on his road to Rome, found an appreciative reception in this serious northern town. Lionello d’Este, the friend of Pisanello, ordered from him that triptych of the Descent from the Cross, the central panel of which now hangs in the Uffizi. Indeed Roger’s harsh, angular art had a determinative effect upon the character of Ferrarese painters. From Squarcione, in whose studio at Padua they received their education, they acquired technique, and from Piero della Fran- cesca, who had been employed for some time at the
The harbingers of the Storm TII
court of Lionello, they derived their preference for
light grey values of colour and for wide extensive land-
scapes from which the figures arise like statues.
Roger van der Weyden added an especially harsh note,
that of Netherlandish ascetisicm.
The joint work of the school, the cycle of frescoes in the Palazzo Schifanoja, is characteristic of the medizval spirit of Ferrarese art. The theme of the Twelve Months affords the opportunity of portraying, besides political events, the labour of the field and the pleasures of the hunt. The representation of March by women spinning in the midst of a landscape is especially important as the first picture of labour in the history of art. By the same artist, Francesco Cossa, is an Autumn, in the Berlin Gallery, which has made his name one of the best known of the quat- trocento: a peasant woman in tucked-up dress, with spade and hoe in hand and a cluster of ripe grapes over her shoulder, stands in the midst of the field; a proud picture of labour, lonely as a mighty statue, with her eyes turned to her native village. The “scent of the earth,” as we perceive it in the works of Piero della Francesca, seems to stream from this work. It must not, however, be forgotten that the Ferrarese still maintained more intimate relations with the middle age than their contemporaries. While the Florentines narrate in a worldly manner, the Ferrarese reach back to medizval allegory. For Autumn is one of those “pictures of the months’ which occur in medieval
VOL, 1.—8
112 ature and Antique
calendars, and the entire Schifanoja frescoes treat the
medizval theme, that the course of the stars determines
the fate of men.
Besides these allegories practically the only other works in Ferrarese painting are such as treat with ascetic severity and almost grimacing pathos the theme of the Bewazling of the Body of Christ or the Madonna Enthroned. Thin, ugly, aged figures, bony old men and careworn matrons, dominate almost ex- clusively the repertoire of Ferrarese art. No other Italian school stands as near to the naturalism of Roger; no other took such delight in harsh and disagreeable lines, callous hands and emaciated bodies quaking as if from the fever. But it is just to this one-sidedness that its works owe their mighty and characteristic greatness. The colour, the harsh juxta- position of lemon yellow, blue, and vermilion, even heightens the harsh and solemn effect.
In its wild barbaric pathos, the Pzeta of Cosimo Tura in the Louvre has a grandiose effect, and his Madonna in Berlin glitters like Byzantine mosaic. Her throne, adorned with gilded bronze reliefs and glittering mosaics, rests upon columns of crystal, and her garments gleam in emerald, scarlet, and yellow; while the stiff, ascetic, and bony saints have the effect of mighty statues. Even Ercole dei Roberti, although belonging to the younger generation, has the same rugged and archaic style. In describing his passion Scenes in San Petronio at Bologna, Vasari could speak
Mantegna 113
only of Mary sinking into unconsciousness and of
weeping faces, disfigured by pain. His best known
work in Germany is the John the Baptist in the
Berlin Gallery—a skeleton arising like a statue from a
reddish, solemn landscape. In the presence of such
paintings one feels the announcement of a spiritual
tendency to which the future would belong, and sees,
approaching at a distance, the man who was called to
be the Luther of Italy. But the time was not yet
ripe; for another power, the antique, was as yet stronger
than Christianity.
V.— Mantegna
Up to this time the antique had exercised but little influence upon the artistic activity of the quattro-cento. The word “ Renaissance’’ in the sense of a revival of antiquity would be more suitable for the trecento. At the time when Petrarca, the youth- ful enthusiast, set out to make known the buried treasures of the pagan world; when Cola di Rienzi dreamed of restoring the greatness of ancient Rome, and when Boccaccio wrote his Genealogia Deorum and those lightly-clad novels in which a thoroughly heathen spirit dallies and jests—at that time art also experienced an antique Renaissance. It was the age of the baptistery and the church of San Miniato in Florence, of the cathedral, the baptistery, and the leaning tower in Pisa—all works of the Romanesque style, after antique models and of an almost Hellenic purity. In close imitation of the antique the Pisani carved their sculptures, and in the domain of painting Giotto filled the antique forms with new life and animated their serious outlines with Christian content. At hardly any other time was Christian art so permeated by antique elements as when the master of the Triumph of Death painted his nude putt: at Pisa, and Lorenzetti created those frescoes in which many a figure seems to have been taken directly from Pompeian mural paintings.
In contrast to this the antique plays a more modest part in the earlier art of the quattrocento. The advice given by Leonbattista Alberti to the artist, to substitute . for antique forms an independent study of natural ones, clearly indicates the change. The only thing adopted from the trecento was the delight taken in antique accessories. As in Giotto’s pictures the column of Trajan, the temple of Minerva at Assisi, the horses of St. Mark’s, and Victories bearing palms occur, so now paintings fairly abound in antique buildings and orna- ments. Even before architecture had taken the new path, painters used architectural backgrounds of an antique character and scattered a profusion of palmettes and rosettes, sphinxes and satyrs, cornucopias and meanders, garlands and triglyphs, candelabra and urns, sirens and trophies to attain a pleasing surface decora- tion. Antique statuettes, here a Cupid, there a Venus, are placed in niches; masks, antique busts and medal- lions of the emperors are introduced wherever the
Mantegna 115
space permits. Artists take as much pleasure in
antique detail-as a child with a new toy, and play with
it wherever possible. Yet they never progress beyond
this dallying appropriation of classic ornament.
Nothing is more distant from the simplicity of antique
line than a statue by Donatello, with its sharply
accentuated head, long limbs, capriciously ordered
draperies; nothing is less like the classic style of antique
reliefs than Ghiberti’s Baptistery doors, with their
introduction of pictorial perspective. Even less do
we find antique echoes in the types, costumes, position
or arrangement of paintings of Uccello and Castagno,
Fra Filippo and Gozzoli.
Not until the second half of the fourteenth century does the antique begin to exercise a stylistic influence. This influence first appears in Padua, which was the city of Livy as well as of St. Anthony. Whenin 1413 the supposed grave of the great Roman historian was discovered, every one, even the most humble, con- sidered himself a man of the antique world. Wherever Paduans went, they were enthusiastic collectors. Cardinal Scarampi, especially, is a type of the age; a prince of the church who took greatest pride in the fact that the arena of Padua belonged to him; an enthusiast for the antique, who had Roman aqueducts built, and in connection with Cyriacus of Ancona gathered a much envied collection of Greek gems. His counterpart in the domain of painting was Francesco Squarcione, who, in order to see the celebrated works of antique art,
116 Wature and Antique
travelled even in Greece; made plaster casts, collected
busts, statues, reliefs, and fragments of architecture;
and after his return to Padua opened an academy of
painting on the basis of this collection.
It is true that Squarcione’s own works show little influence of the antique, and it would be erroneous to characterise Andrea Mantegna, his greatest pupil, as exclusively a partisan of the antique. Mantegna, of all painters, can only be explained through his own personality. Piero della Francesca and he signify respectively the soil and the rugged cliffs in Italian art. With Giotto, Castagno, and Segantini, he was one of the four great shepherd boys in the history of art. A keen Alpine air pervades his works; they have the quality of granite, like the cliffs of the Euganean Mountains.
A glance at his portrait will reveal why the bust form was chosen for it. Although this was never done in painted likenesses of other artists of the guattrocento Which survive, the master who created Mantegna’s portrait had the feeling that only bronze would be suitable material for this stern head. What power, strength of purpose, and indomitable will appear in these features! This was evidently no mild and lov- able man, but a strong and harsh character. As his relations to Squarcione, who adopted him as a poor boy, soon changed into enmity, so he maintained the same stiff-necked pride towards his later prince, Gonzaga of Mantua. In his letters every word is as
‘M@antegna 117
keen and biting as a sharp knife. As he was always
in conflict with his prince, so neither could he live
in peace with any neighbour, but accused and sued
without mercy; every one who came in contact with
him was wounded. Corresponding with these qualities
in his pictures are the jagged halos and stiff tree-
leaves, which also make the impression that one could
scratch himself upon them so that the blood would
flow. Of the same character is his entire art, which
resembles a garden fenced closely about and full of
steel traps. It sounds as sharp and as shrill as a brass
shield struck by a sword. And it is precisely in this
severity, from which everything mild, agreeable, and
reconciling is eliminated, his one-sidedness and also his
‘greatness lie, Le style c'est l’homme.
The man with the bronze head and the stony glance created people after his own image. How they stand there, pressed into their iron armour, like fabulous giants whose muscular backs and firm and sinewy legs seem formed by a sculptor rather than by a painter! Their whole bodies are tense, like an arrow on the string of a bow; just as Mantegna himself was always expect- ing opposition and ready for defence. They look sullen and silent, and the sharp folds that fall from the protruding cheekbones are hard and abrupt as if by a magic formula they had been petrified in motion. The draperies, even when they are of soft material, seem to be of steel; especially those stiff protruding little cloaks, which occur so frequently in his pictures.
118 Wature and Antique
In order to attain most pointed and stiff folds he was
accustomed to model from rigidly sized paper and he
would perhaps have preferred models of tin. This
metallic style of drawing also reacts upon the colour.
In conceiving appearances to be so rigid, he was
naturally compelled to give the colour a metallic tone.
Many of his figures, although they are painted after
nature, resemble bronze statues, so hard are they in
outline, and so much like polished bronze do the folds
of the drapery glisten.
His manner of choosing the accessories is also determined by the same point of view. As he loves warriors in bronze armour with glittering arms and draperies with stony folds, he also heaps about them accessories of similar appearance; armour, helmets, tin vessels, gleaming metallic greaves, jagged halos and nails. The halo, which with other artists is an ethereal representation, Mantegna forms of heavy, glittering rings of pewter; and angels’ heads, lightly indicated by others, look like floating pieces of Robbia- ware.. Upon his picture of the Resurrection the edges of the halo behind the Saviour are jagged and as sharp as those of a razor. In his line engraving of the Crucifixion the inscription I. N. R. I..is fastened with thick iron nails, and in the foreground lies a heavy door of dry oak with a rusty iron frame. In other pictures urns and vases, copper vessels and gold chains are used to heighten the metallic effect.
Grandest of all, however, is his translation of land-
Mantegna 11g
scape into the brazen style. For people like those he
created could not live on the ordinary earth, but
needed a world of the same rigid grandeur. In his
pictures there are no meadows and gardens, no grass
and flowers; but creation is transformed into a vision
of the age of stone: bared of the covering earthly
crust, and only enlivened by blocks of stone, dried
trees, hedges, boulders, and sandy roads. Upon the hill-
tops turret-crowned castles and _ high-walled cities
tower. All vegetation is dead and the slaty summits
of the cliffs are pushed into the foreground, opening
into yawning chasms. Many of these scenes he must
certainly have seen in nature. When he paints the
Deposition from the Cross in a quarry of trachyte,
chooses a cave of black lava for the scene of the
Adoration of the Kings, and depicts on the left wing
of this altar-piece a towering volcanic cliff, the basis of
these paintings was probably studies made in the
Euganean Mountains. But in other cases he uses the
elements of nature for independent creations. As he
loves to insert in the picture giant corals, such as no
mineralogist has ever seen anywhere, so in the Ma-
donna della Petriera he has enlarged a little stalactite
formation into monumental proportions. In a quarry
near by masons are occupied in hewing stone blocks;
but even these are only introduced to strengthen
the stony impression. The same purpose is served
by his fondness for concentric paths ploughing
through the hills. In introducing them he dis-
120 Wature and Antique
robes nature, as it were, and lays bare her stony
skeleton.
He proceeds in the same manner with plants, being especially fond of grapes and leaves of vines. Just as wonderfully as they can be imitated to-day—the fruit in glass, and leaves in tin—so he painted them, equally true and equally hard. Greater changes were necessary in order to make trees harmonise with his style. They seemed to wear heavy iron armour, and their leaves, which no breeze could disturb, hang fast as steel from the branches. The branches stretch into the air, jagged and barbed as the points of javelins. Even the plants which grow in this stony soil have something metallic and crystalline about them. Some look like zinc sprinkled with white lead; others as if painted over with a coat of greenish bronze through which the white leaves of the steel still shimmer. He has translated even the air and the sky into this stony style. The soft, melting, and intangible qualities of clouds are rendered. in hard, sharply outlined plastic forms. It is no accident that the painter who paid most attention to clear outline was the first to master the technique of line engraving, which is most adapted to rendering, free from their coloured veil, objects in relief, strength of contour, and solidity of form.
If we may at all speak of external influence in case of amind like Mantegna’s, it is probable that he received the determinative impression when Donatello was labouring in Padua. He probably witnessed the
Mantegna 121
creation of the equestrian statue of Gattamelata as
well as the reliefs of the high altar, and may perhaps
have entered into personal relations with Donatello.
At all events the great Florentine found his most
capable pupil not in a sculptor, but in this painter.
Bronze statues were the first works of art upon which
the glance of the lad fell; and it was this taste for them
which caused him to attempt such plastic effects, as
though sculpture were an accessory to painting. Next
to Donatello, his principal teacher was Paolo Uccello,
who had come to Padua in the train of the great sculptor
and had painted in the Palazzo Vitaliani. To him
Mantegna owed his inclination to devote himself to the
science of perspective, which he enriched by revolu-
tionary discoveries. That at an earlie: period he. was
also familiar with the works of Piero della Francesca
may be concluded from the resemblance of his picture
of the Resurrection, at Tours, to Piero’s fresco in
San Sepolcro, from the plein air methods which pervade
his representation of the Legend of St. Christopher,
and, quite generally, from the problems of space which
he attempted to solve.
Even in the celebrated pictures which he painted from 1454 to 1459 (between his twenty-third and his twenty-eighth year) in the church of the Eremitani at Padua, these elements all appear. As well in his manner of showing the figures from below, foreshortened in the way they would actually appear to the observer looking upward, as in the general space arrangements,
122 ature and Antique
he endeavours to create the impression of depth. Ata
later period, when decorating the ceiling of the Camera
degli Sposi in the Castello del Corte at Mantua, his
perspective studies again led him to a new result. In
transferring Uccello’s principles to the decorating of
the ceiling, he practically opened it, painting the puttz
as if they were actual beings suspended in space and
seen from below; thereby becoming the inventor of
perspective ceiling-decoration, and the ancestor of
Correggio, Veronese, and Tiepolo.
In the portrait groups also, which he painted on the walls of this hall, two centuries join hands. Artists had at first confined themselves to introducing portraits of the donors into religious representations, and after- wards Castagno had created the first life-sized single portraits; but in these scenes from the lives of the Gonzagas the first independent portrait groups are represented. The path is for the first time trodden which led to Tintoretto, and from him to the Dutch doelenstukken of the seventeenth century.
But richest in consequence for the quattrocento was his relation to the antique. It is significant that the master who painted the portrait bust of Mantegna conceived him as a hero of antiquity, his long hair crowned with a laurel-wreath. For he towers in his epoch like the offshoot of a forgotten heroic age, like a Hellene born after his day. It seems as if Providence had only made use of Squarcione in order to produce Mantegna; for it was in his spirit that what Squarcione
Mantegna 123
had collected first won life and soul. In association
with the humanists of Padua, he mastered the spirit
of the antique, somewhat as Menzel mastered that of
the age of Frederick the Great. With the zeal of an
antiquarian, the scientific severity of an archeologist,
he sought out even the smallest fragments that would
serve to afford a living picture of the antique world;
such as reliefs, coins, inscriptions, works of marble and
bronze. He took pains to ascertain, even to the small-
est detail, the armament of the ancients, and was not
satisfied until he knew the appearance of a Roman
bridle or sandal; and he was as familiar with their archi-
tectural forms as he was with their clothes, implements,
and customs. In later life a sojourn in Rome afforded
him a new opportunity to freshen his antique studies.
Before this world of buildings and statues he stood
amazed, and lingered, sketch-book in hand, before the
column of Trajan and the arch of Titus.
Even the impression of his early Paduan frescoes, although they treated saintly legends, is one of solemn classicism. The strictly Hellenic character of these structures could only be obtained by a master who had grown up in a classic atmosphere; and the Roman equipments of the soldiers by a painter whose mind was a veritable encyclopzdia of antiquity. When he painted the celebrated tablet in the Camera degli Sposi, telling in classical Latin andequally classic letters about the donor and the completion of the work, when he chained Sebastian not to a tree but to the ruin of a temple,
124 ature and Antique
adding his name in Greek letters: such incidents only
reveal how completely his spirit was dominated by the an-
tique. Later, when Isabella d’Este mounted the throne
of Mantua, the opportunity was afforded to create the
work which he himself probably regarded as the climax
of his artistic activity—the Triumph of Ca@sar.1 If
formerly he could only use monuments of antiquity
as accessories to religious paintings, he was now per-
mitted to treat an actually antique theme. Making
use of all the material he had collected for decades, he
gave us the most learned reconstruction which antiquity
has ever found; an evocation of the past to which
following centuries could add nothing, either in the
exactness of archeological detail or in the thoroughly
antique conception of the subject.
But this is not the only novelty of his work, that to the Christian subjects which had heretofore dominated the répertoire of art the antique was now added. The occupation of artists with the antique introduced a number of new problems. To begin with, they were inspired by antique statues to discover more exactly than had been done before the laws of movement in the nude. For even though Piero della Francesca had previously taken a decisive step in portraying the nude, it was not in the nature of his art to depict motion. All of his pictures are in motionless repose, as if planted for eternity. They stride as heavily to and fro as the
' This celebrated series of nine cartoons on paper backed with can-
vas is now at Hampton Court, near London.
ANDREA MANTEGNA
PARNASSUS
Louvre
Mantegna 125
peasant, who, walking through his field, sinks at every
step in the loamy soil. Mantegna, whose beings lived not
on the soil but in the mountains, supplemented Piero,
in that he was the first to paint action as well as repose.
He was the first to take up the movements of the nude
body, with the resulting contractions and relaxation of
the muscles, as an especial object of study. His line
engraving of Hercules Strangling Antaus, especially,
must have affected the artists of those days like a
revelation.
No less evident is the influence of the antique in his treatment of costume. Whereas, heretofore, the bigarrerie of fashion had been an inexhaustible field of new discoveries for the painters, Mantegna altogether avoids contemporary costumes; substituting for the gaiety of costume and bric-a-brac, which former artists had loved, simple antique draperies, upon the artistic rendition of which he bestowed special attention. Something similar had been attempted by Piero della Francesca; but for Mantegna the search for beautiful motives of drapery is a determinative factor of the artistic activity. Not satisfied with arranging the draperies about the body with sovereign tact, he approached those problems of harmony and elegance which the sculptors of antiquity had so matchlessly solved. Evenin one of his first works, Sant' Eufemia in the Brera, the play of the draperies is equal in beauty to the best draped statues of antiquity. His Parnassus, in the Louvre, painted for the private room of Isabella d'Este, might be a work of Poussin -in the severe antiquity of the rhythm of movement and the fall of the light draperies, here softly clinging to the body, there fluttering in the wind. Quite a new order of beauty, having nothing in common with the joyful realism and the indiscriminate copying of nature of the early quattrocento, makes its triumphal entry into art.
To recapitulate: Mantegna was the first to give his
figures full plastic rotundity; to create the earliest
perspective ceiling decorations and the earliest portrait
groups, and to raise the study of the nude in motion and
of draperies to a real artistic problem. He stands,
therefore, revealed as the genius who, next to Piero
della Francesca, exercised the most determinative
influence upon the artistic activity of the younger
generation.
V.I.— The Successors of Mantegna
Without Mantegna, Melozzo da Forli is unthinkable.! He lacks, however, the sturdy greatness of the Paduan; being as soft as the latter is hard, and as mild as he is austere and defiant. He was also influenced by his countryman Piero della Francesca, who imparted to him something of his delicate charm.
1It is, however, the prevailing opinion with art historians that the two painters working independently arrived at the same results.
The same is probably true of Antonio Pollajuolo and the next artist
treated, whose style was formed before Mantegna’s brief stay in
Florence.—Ed,
Successors of Mantegna 127
Even in his earliest works, the personifications of the
liberal arts, which in 1474 he painted for the library
of the Duke of Urbino, the manner in which he com-
posed his figures in space reveals his relation to Piero.
Instead of arranging the scenes in the manner of relief —
the figure of each science to the left and her followers
to the right—he places the throne in the middle of the
background, with the masculine figures kneeling before
it, and indicates the dimension of depth by means of
the steps of the throne. In addition to this, he was
principally occupied with draperies. With outspoken
formal talent, he devoted to the cast of draperies an
attention which would have delighted Fra Barto-
lommeo, the inventor of the lay figure.
In his next work, the painting of the cupola of the cathedral of Loreto, he first attempted Mantegna’s problem of painting from below, but did not succeed in solving it, because he was lacking in a certain light- ness; his figures are smothered in their heavy draperies. These difficulties were at last overcome in his cupola frescoes of Santi Apostoli at Rome. As Vasari relates, Christ was suspended so freely in the air that he seemed to burst the vaulting of the cupola, and the angels, too, appeared to move in the free space of heaven. As the cupola has been destroyed, it is im- possible at the same time to say how far these per- spective illusions were successful; but the fragments preserved in the sacristy of the Vatican are as remark- able for a delicate sense of beauty as for the mastery
VOL. I.—9
128 ature and Antique
of perspective. The angels with their fair fluttering
locks, making music and singing while they are wafted
about and a supernatural breeze stirs their garments,
have not ceased to exercise their attraction for succeed-
ing generations.
In this last work, the fresco of the Vatican Library representing Sixtus IV. appointing Platina its director, Mantegna and Piero della Francesca again clasp hands. With some resemblance to Mantegna’s portraiture, he has created a portrait group of representative nobility. The disposition of the space noticeable in the keen foreshortening of the incrusted ceiling, the manner in which the columns recede, and in the view of the loggia opening in the background reminds one of Piero’s Santa Conversazione at Milan, and at the same time points to the future; for Raphael had this picture in mind when he conceived the School of Athens.
In Florence, where in 1466 Mantegna had resided, he found a successor in Antonio Pollajuolo, the great bronze caster. Like Melozzo the latter was influenced by the mighty statuesque qualities of the Paduan and the classic repose of his draperies, especially when he created in the figures of the Five Virtues for the Mercatoria in Florence the counterpiece of the former’s Sciences in the library of Urbino. But in another domain Mantegna was even more his master. Polla- juolo was first to acquire the technique of line engrav- ing, and among his prints, one in especial, the Battle of the Nudes, is characteristic of his tendency. Never
Successors of Mantegna 129
had fiercely struggling figures, life and motion, been
presented with such skill. All the muscular con-
tractions and complicated motives of motion are
rendered with a hitherto unknown mastery. This
print is also significant of the tendency that ruled him
as a painter. Following Mantegna he made anatomy
a special field of study. ‘He understood the nude,”
relates Vasari, “better than any of his predecessors.
As he studied anatomy on the dissecting table, he was
the first to render the full play of muscles.” From this
point of view he chose his subjects, and by it alone his
pictures should be criticised. Human bodies, contending
in battle, contracted limbs in the most difficult contor-
tions, the commingling and contest of struggling forces
—such is his domain. His practise of bronze casting
may also be recognised in his rendition of form, his pre-
ference for well rounded and undulating positions, and in
the hard metallic character which characterises his style.
Of Christian subjects affording an opportunity for the solution of such problems he first chose Sebastian. The life-size painting in the Pitti Gallery reveals mighty forms which seem cast in bronze, with foreshortened head, swollen muscles and a loin-cloth formed like a bronze plate. In the London picture he has increased the problem by the introduction of archers: six men spanning crossbows and shooting at a nude figure. This gives an opportunity for varied positions and a rich play of muscles. Some of the executioners bend- ing over to string their bows do it with such zeal that
\
130 - fAature and Antique
one can see their veins swell; their sinews, hair, and the
wrinkles of their faces are chiselled in bronze. For a
similar reason he added to his répertoire the figures
of Hercules, whose labours he depicted in a series of
Cecorative paintings in the Palazzo di Venezia and the
small double figures in the Uffizi: Hercules Sirangling
Antaus and the Hydra. How in the picture of Antzus
the feet of Hercules are fastened to the earth; how the
calves of his legs swell and his breast is thrown back-
ward; and with what strangling power he clutches his
antagonist —all this is another triumph in the represent-
ation of motion and of the nude. Even inthe little panel
of Apollo and Daphne in the National Gallery, the
theme is chosen from this point of view. The elastic
body of a youth and the austere body of a maiden, one
following, the other fleeing—is this not a veritable
compendium of difficult movements and anatomical
studies? Along with human anatomy he was occupied
with that of the horse, as witness the Munich sketch
for an equestrian monument, which long passed for
the work of Leonardo. We can understand how
artists stood astonished before such works, for no
Florentine before Pollajuolo had thus mastered the
structure of the bodies of men and animals.
“What with Pollajuolo was still experimental, Signor- elli raised to quiet mastery. After Mantegna and Pollajuolo had fixed the laws of motion. for the nude body, it was only left for Signorelli to go one step further and express the emotions of the soul by movements of
Successors of Mantegna 131
the body. He is, therefore, the connecting link between
Mantegna and Michelangelo. The activity of Signorelli
included everything. He painted altar-pieces for
the cities of Tuscany and Umbria, and even in these
he is reflected as a serious and virile master. Like
Mantegna he knows no gentle lyricism; his pictures
are crude and harsh, almost brusque and violent;
he loves hard faces and profiles as sharp as a razor.
But most of all he loved the nude, less the softness
of the feminine body than the sinewy spareness of the
masculine. Not because the legend tempted him, but
only to glorify the splendour of the nude and sinewy
human body, he painted the Education of Pan.
In this painting, now in the Gallery of Berlin, all the
movements of which the nude body is capable are
represented; some of the figures are erect, others
are seated, and still others recline. He is actuated
by a similar point of view in the choice of his biblical
subjects. The Baptism of Christ was.a favourite, be-
cause it permitted him to represent in the figures of
the candidates for baptism bodies in various positions.
But he was fond of the Crucifixion, because the
theme gave opportunity to depict a corpse with all
possible contractions and contortions of the sinews.
Of the saints who stand about the throne of Mary,
Jerome was his favourite, because tradition per-
mitted him to represent an aged body with wrinkled
skin and overworked muscles. If such a figure-is not
possible in the foreground, he inserts it in the back-
132 Mature and Antique
ground, even though it may be in no wise related
with the theme. It is like a monogram of Signorelli
to find in all of his paintings, even in portraits, nude
youths standing, sitting, or reclining. The rear view,
showing powerful thighs and firm shoulder-blades,
particularly tempts him. If there is no opportunity
to depict such figures nude, he at least paints them
clothed in tricot or tight-fitting armour. The angels
are therefore his friends, especially Michael with
his gleaming coat of mail, and lansquenets with
stretched, steely sinews. It is especially these ener-
getic, weather-browned figures, standing with legs
spread apart, in a position which gives opportunity
for all the muscles to play, and defiant as if they were
courting danger, which gives his pictures a heroic,
martial boldness. In his female figures and saints
the drapery is simple and dignified without unnecessary
bulging folds, everything being arranged in heavy
masses and in great simple lines. To this powerful
strength of line the colour quite corresponds. As in the
case of Mantegna, it has a certain metallic sharpness,
a tone of copper or bronze, not hard or dry but grey
and gloomy. Although, as a pupil of Piero della
Francesca, he is occupied in the Education of Pan
with the study of reflex light, he is nevertheless too
much of a draughstman and anatomist, too serious
and harsh, to seek after charms of colour.
When he is not confined by the size of a panel paint- ing, but stands in front of large mural surfaces, a great
Successors of Mantegna 133
dramatic talent rises within him. Among the paint-
ings of the Sistine Chapel those of Signorelli immediately
attract attention by their dramatic action and by a
certain crude beauty. In his second cycle, the scenes
from the Life of St. Benedict, painted in 1447 for
the monastery of Monte Oliveto near Siena, the manner
in which he has treated the theme is very characteristic.
Passing over the youthful life of his hero, he begins
abruptly with the picture which gives the opportunity
to represent wild motion, the Punishment of Florens.
In further sequence he selects scenes in which it is
possible to portray lansquenets with martial equipment,
especially soldiers on the march with halberds,
feathered caps, and tightly fitting checkered uniforms.
When in his sixtieth year he was summoned to create his most celebrated work, the cycle of frescoes at Orvieto, he did not need to select a subject; the theme was as if created for him: the Last Judgment, its Approach, Heaven, and Hell. Here, where there was nothing but nudes to be portrayed and he was not circumscribed by the size of the picture, his power grew into something tremendous. Had Fiesole, the beginner of the work, completed it, the spectator would have been led into a kingdom of eternal peace. Signorelli, on the other hand, changes heaven and hell into an anatomical theatre. Delicacy and tenderness of expression are not to be found, but in the manner in which he uses the nude to express emotion, developing psychical motives from physical action, there lies a
x
134 ature and Antique
superhuman, a Titanic greatness. Here the dead are
slowly and solemnly leaving their graves, some still
ascending from the earth, others already risen and
stretching their limbs as after a long sleep. There joy
and blessedness prevail; knees are bowed, hands laid
upon hearts and arms raised gratefully towards heaven.
In the last painting Hell is an athletic drama.
Monsters fly through the air; wild demons knead and
strangle their victims as if with bronze tongs; nude
bodies writhe in cramped convulsions on the ground
or brace themselves up against crazing agony.
The tendencies which began with Mantegna and formed the life work of Pollajuolo thus found in Signorelli their consummation.
VII.— Hugo van der Goes
In the meanwhile an abrupt change of scene had taken place in Florence. About the same time that Mantegna resided there, a picture had arrived from the Netherlands before which to-day one. stands astonished in the hospital of Santa Maria Nuova. Hugo van der Goes, the painter of this work, is known also from many similar works in German and Belgian galleries. In one of them at Brussels, a young Fran- ciscan kneels in silent adoration before Mary in the midst of a yellowish-green autumn landscape. In an Annunciation at Munich, he attempts the very modern problem of creating a harmony in white. Instead of a warm and glowing tone, the picture was
0ja1n4C) Lo 1vAPaYJDD ‘OISAAT
(LUvVd) INAWOaOL LSVT AHL
IITAUONDIS VONT
hugo van der Goes 135
intended to have a light and silvery effect, but it be-
came hard, cold, and chalky. In his portraits he often
frightens by phenomenal ugliness. It seemed as if he
took delight in the mongrel when he painted Cardinal
Bourbon looking like an old woman. A toilsome,
troubled, and struggling element runs through his work;
he appears as a tormented spirit, always undertaking
new problems, but who in the course of the work lost
confidence and inspiration. ~
What may be read from his pictures is confirmed by his biography. At first he was a pleasure-loving child of the world. The town council of Bruges summoned him when pompous processions were to be arranged, arches of honour to be erected, or banners painted with the festal images of antique heroes and goddesses. Wine, women, and song dominated his life. Suddenly he withdrew into the Augustinian convent in the wood of Soignies, to live only for the salvation of his soul. For a while two powers, the spirit of worldliness and the spirit of self-denial, struggled within him. He still rejoiced to take part in the sumptuous repasts of the noble lords who came to the monastery for portrait sittings ; but such hours of worldly delight were followed by others of deepest despondency in which he con- sidered himself eternally damned. Conscience-stricken, he now painted pictures devoted to the end of things and to the bitter sufferings of the Saviour. In a painting at Frankfort, Mary stands with the veil of a matron drawn over her head and gazes with solemn
136 ature and Antique
earnestness upon the Child; in one at Venice the lifeless
body of the Redeemer hangs in a gloomy landscape;
in another, at Bruges, Mary lies upon her death-bed,
while to her failing eyes the Redeemer appears in
heavenly glory; and in still another, at Vienna, friends
are mournfully taking the rigid body of our Lord down
from the cross—the old theme which Roger so often
painted. With Goes, however, there is no pathos and
no wailing; everything is suppressed and deep, a hopeless
woe, to which not even tears will bring relief. A pale
woman, deserted and emaciated in appearance, the Mag-
dalen silently folds her hands and gazes gloomily into
space. Ravens flutter about the cross, which towers
like a ghost into the clouded evening sky. But even
such pictures do not express what Goes wishes to say.
He conceived the strangest plans—visions of pictures
for the completion of which one life seemed too short;
for during the work he lost pleasure in it, and despaired
of ever expressing the feelings that moved his heart.
One day, with the cry, “I am damned,” he collapsed.
All the scruples of conscience which for years had
martyred his soul ended in religious insanity, and
henceforth only the resounding tones of the organ and
the pious songs of the brethren gave relief to his
torments.
His works show what a noble spirit was here crushed. The altar-piece with the Adoration of the Kings which, under the orders of Tommaso Portinari, the Medicean agent in Bruges, he painted for Santa
tbugo van der Goes 137
Maria Nuova, offers one of the most powerful artistic
impressions to be experienced in Florence. The thought
is as new as is the problem of light which he proposes.
On a heap of straw, the Christ-child reclines, encircled
by rays of light, which also illumine the kneeling
Madonna. Languishing angels kneel about or hover
in the air. One in particular, joyfully rising on gleam-
ing wings to heaven, but still illumined by the divine
light flooding the lower part of his clothing, might
have been taken from the painting by Rembrandt.
But we are also reminded of Bocklin. The manner in
which light green branches stand out against the deep
blue sky and the fire-red lily standing as a bold spot
of colour in the foreground are conceptions of colour
which belong much less in the fifteenth than at the end
of the nineteenth century. In the garments dark blue,
violet, green, and gloomy black tones of colour are
united in accords never before heard. An indefinable
charm is woven about the figure of the Madonna, who
looks not like a maiden but like a woman who has
experienced the mighty pains of childbirth. Old and
sullen, with the callous hands of a labourer, and yet
majestic as a doge by Tintoretto, Joseph stands near
by. On the other side are the nude and weather-beaten
figures of the shepherds, sun-browned, rough, and true:
one.of them kneeling, another gazing curiously, and a
third approaching in breathless haste. Remembering
the difficulties experienced by painters even of the
seventeenth cenutry in avoiding caricature when paint-
138 ature and Antique
ing peasant pictures, and recalling the grotesque
boobies and drunken harlequins introduced by Brueghel
and Ostade as peasants, one cannot but admire
the great and simple realism of this master, who
approaches Millet and Bastien-Lepage.
Even more impressive than this central panel are the wings of the altar. On the one side are saints, strange Jewish types of patriarchal, royal dignity. At their feet kneels the great grandson of Dante’s Beatrice, Tommaso Portinari—a fine head with the solemn and reticent features of an aristocratic merchant; and at his side the pale, modest faces of his two boys, wonder- ing what it is all about, and timidly, half mechanically folding their dainty fingers in prayer. The other wing is devoted to women of quiet and noble dignity: his wife, slender and delicate, his fair little daughter, fresh as a schoolgirl, and, behind them, their patron saints, Margaret and Mary Magdalen, dressed like princesses in grey, gold-bordered robes and shimmering white damask, with hair combed back and covered with a high and coquettish cap. .Even the older artists celebrated Goes as the greatest painter of female por- traits of this epoch. Van Mander speaks of their well- bred modesty and their sweet, demure appearance, as if Cupid and the Graces had guided the artist’s brush— statements confirmed by the Portinari altar. The artist’s strong and powerful characterisation of men does not prevent an equal success with women. To a subtle and distinguished bearing, almost affected in its
aouasop it ‘C4aqqo4) 221f
SGUAHdAHS AHL 1O NOILVUOGY
Sa09 4dd NVA OONH
Hugo van der Goes 139
girlish coyness, he adds a flowerlike grace; and at the
same time a solemn melancholy lies in the pale, thought-
ful heads, with dark eyes shaded by thin brows, and
small, nervously twitching lips. The hands, in the
case of men so hard and callous, are delicate and white,
and as expressive as if they could themselves relate
romances. With an austere charm he combines meas-
ured harmony and a grandeur of style, which makes
quite intelligible that his highest ideal was fresco
painting. Every theme is of a monumental sublimity
such as no Flemish artist since Hubert van Eyck had
attained.
Hand in hand with this grandeur of line goes an intimate quality of landscape painting such as had never yet appeared. Jan van Eyck, the first landscape painter of the Netherlands, had been attracted to his theme by the exotic taste of a tourist. As a widely travelled artist he presents to his simple countrymen, who had never got beyond Bruges or Ghent, all the gay splendour of the south. Even when he occasionally renders Flemish motives, there is something elaborate and overloaded about his landscapes. The same tendency which led him to represent his figures in rich robes, and to weave flowers and gold seams into their garments, caused him to paint lansdcapes much richer than they actually are. The most heterogeneous vegetation, palm-trees, sorbs, cypresses, and pines, he depicted as growing side by side, only to attain a rich effect and without regard for season and climate. In
140 ature and Antique
place of this festal feeling of Jan van Eyck, Goes sub-
stitutes the intimate and the every-day. The first to
feel that landscape did not need to be exotic and
adorned, he revealed a taste for the simple nature that
he saw about him; for acres, meadows, ponds, and
trees. In the right panel of the altar just mentioned
with the lofty trees, on whose bare branches crows have
alighted, one gazes into a fallow winter landscape,
sadly stretching out beneath a clouded sky. At the
same time he penetrated more than did the earlier
artists into the very structure of the landscape. While
Jan placed flowers and trees carefully in his pictures,
as children do with their toys, Goes was the first to
examine their roots and leaves. The manner in which
he paints trees is extraordinary. Each has its own
physiognomy, and yet, with the finest calculation, all
the lines are subordinated to the chief outlines of the
figures.
Under the influence of this wonderful work an entirely new conception of nature must have originated, which, characteristically for the epoch, took root not in the Netherlands but in Italy. While it would hardly have found appreciation in the north, in the south painters streamed to see it. Piero della Francesca must have had it in mind when he painted his Oxford Madonna, and the Birth of Christ and the Santa Conversa- qione in the Brera. This is indicated by the type of the Madonna in the first named painting, the group of Shepherds in the second, and in the third by the figure
ugo van der Goes t4t
of the saint to the left, which seems to have been taken
directly from the Flemish altar-piece. Jean Foucquet,
the Frenchman, must also have seen works of Goes;
for the resemblance of his Etienne Chevalier, whom in
the Berlin painting St. Stephen commends to the
Madonna, to Goes’s St. Victor is too striking to be ~ accidental. Other adaptations may be seen in the works of Baldovinetti, Piero di Cosimo, Ghirlandajo, Lorenzo di Credi and Piero Pollajuolo, and it was under the impression of Goes’s work that the Duke of Urbino summoned a Fleming, Justus van Ghent, to his court. It would be wrong, however, to emphasise only such details. The whole further development of Florentine _ art indicates that, next to the visit of Mantegna, the appearance of this Flemish altar-piece was regarded as the greatest artistic event of the decade between 1460 and 1470!
Its influence is next revealed in the new colouristic tendencies of the painters. While, with the exception
Professor Muther’s view of the influence of van der Goes, and
particularly of the Portinari altar-piece, upon Florentine painting is a
very interesting as well as a novel one. The more detailed statement
of the proofs which his promised larger work will doubtlessly contain,
should prove most valuable. For the present, it seems to us that this
influence is somewhat overrated. From a chronological point of view,
it is difficult to conceive of a marked influence upon Piero della Fran-
cesca, who was some twenty years his senior, and whose style was
certainly formed before he saw the Portinari altar-piece; and the same
is true of other masters mentioned. The change in colouristic tendencies
in Florentine art revealed in the work of Baldovinetti, the improved
rendition of atmosphere practised by Verrocchio and the other changes
noted were, in our opinion, due to tendencies which existed in Flor-
entine art before the arrival of Goes’s celebrated altar-piece.—Eb.
142 ature and Antique
of Domenico Veneziano, they had not progressed
beyond the primitive colouring of the Florentine
school, they now cultivated the purely pictorial element.
Even more than formerly ornaments, architecture, and
landscape were introduced to increase the brightness
of colour. Furthermore, the peasant figures of the
altar-piece and its wonderfully painted animals stim-
ulated the taste for rusticity. Another element new
to Florentine art is evidently connected with the ap-
pearance of Goes’s work—grace.. In the earlier works
of the fifteenth century, like those of Filippo Lippi and
Gozzoli, a thoughtless and rather vulgar charm pre-
vailed, and in Castagno the spirit of the quattrocento
found expression in all its energy, manhood, and defiant
strength. This tendency towards the powerful was
now followed by an artistic trend, more feminine in
character; and the distinguished delicacy and silent
melancholy which beams from the eye of Goes’s women
now enters Florentine painting. In wholesome Italian
art the fascinating charm of sickness appears. When
suddenly all painters, as if by appointment, began to
paint Tobias or the legend of the Blind Man
Restored to Sight, it almost seems like homage to the
great Fleming who opened their eyes and revealed to
them new a beauty.
Alessio Baldovinetti was called by his training—for. he was a pupil of Domenico Veneziano—to take uv the new colouristic principles of the Netherlanders. Vasari describes him-as a Flemish miniature-painter: rivers,
et
hugo van der Goes 143
bridges, stones, grasses, fruits, paths, fields, villas, and
palaces, all such things he painted after nature. In
his Birth of Christ one can count the blades of straw
and the roots of the ivy, the leaves of which are also
painted true to nature, of deeper colour on the one side
than on the other. One sees also a half-fallen house,
the stones of which, weather-beaten by rain and frost,
are covered with moss; a snake creeps along a wall.
In fact, the group of shepherds in this picture, painted
in the forecourt of Santa Annunziata, leaves no doubt
that he was familiar with Goes’s altar-piece. Not only
in his gleaming colour did he follow the refined Fleming.
Some of his pictures, like the Annunciation and
the Madonna in the Duchatel collection, formerly
ascribed to Piero della Francesca, characterise him
as a delicate painter of women, who transformed the
feminine trend of Goes (which likewise ran through the
works of Domenico Veneziano) into an almost affected
grace. In the last named painting the landscape also
contributes a strange, romantic charm.
To ascribe this group to Verrocchio, the great sculptor in bronze, seems uncalled-for. For he is known as the artist who created in his Colleoni the most power- ful equestrian statue of the quattrocento, and as the master of the Baptism of Christ, a harsh, ascetic picture with the two nude sinewy bodies, which is generally used to contrast the “dry realism” of Verrocchio with the celestial tenderness of his pupil Leonardo. Yet at bottom Verrocchio was not a harsh.
VOL. I.—I10
144 ature and Antique
~ but agentle spirit. Although he conceived the Colleonz,
it was no longer as a man who had himself, like Dona-
tello, lived in the age of the condottier1, but as the
survivor of a vanished age, for whom this Colleonz
meant the “last knight’’—the symbol of a spur-clang-
ing, heroically great past, to which the present looked
up with sad astonishment. This thoughtful, dreamy
present lives in the gracious head of his David, and
in the dainty, almost coquettish pictures of the master, .
who in his portrait looks into the world as quiet and
thoughtful as a Florentine Giambellini, and in no respect
resembles the wild and defiant race to which Donatello
and Castagno belonged. Castagno’s Pippo Spano
creates such a powerful impression because he wears his
armour as unconcernedly as we a dressing gown.
Verrocchio can only attain this impression artificially
by adorning the armour of his hero with the serpents
and heads of gorgons.
He may have received his first impressions from Mantegna, whom he approaches in the plastic finish of his figures. Well rounded bodies, tense lines, neat- ness and precision of outline, the greatest smoothness and finish of surfaces—everything that a good bronze cast should have he endeavours to reproduce. In addition to this he shows a goldsmith’s delicacy in the finish of accessories; every ornament, the golden em- broidery of the clothes as well as the dainty gauze veil which adorns Mary’s head, is painted with the most careful accuracy. Goes strengthened him in these
ugo van der Goes 145
colouristic tendencies. Verrocchio’s workshop was the
first one in Florence where oil-painting was system-
atically carried on. Under the influence of Goes, he also
guided Florentine landscape painting into new paths.
In contrast to the earlier Florentines, who had lost
themselves in elaborate detail and caused the most
distant objects to gleam in unbroken colours, Verrocchio
had a taste for simple plains, which he depicted with
certain plein air tendencies. His favourite hour was
the twilight, when the trees stand out black from the
light grey heaven and the cool moisture sinks over
withered and dusty plains.
But even more characteristic of the impression of his pictures is the dainty grace which he endeavours to render in facial expression and motion. While the figures of Donatello and Castagno hold their hands wide open and extend the second finger, Verrocchio’s merely bend the little finger—a detail which alone is significant of the change of taste: there, energy; here, . an almost affected delicacy. Noli me tangere is the inscription upon his portrait of a girl in the Berlin Museum, which might also serve for Castagno’s portrait of Pippo Spano, though in a very different sense. Verrocchio himself felt what a delicate, fragile ideal he substituted for the mighty, powerful figures of the older masters. He was the first to depict the dainty putto in place of their robust, healthy children; to give to the features of the Madonna a touch of that soft, enchanting smile associated with Leonardo’s name.
146 ature and Antique
His picture Tobias in the Florentine Academy pro-
bably contains. the quintessence of his work. This
subtle, maidenly youth with the wavy locks, striding
in minuet step through the landscape, with bands and
sashes clinging and fluttering in the breeze, and raising
with mannered grace his fine, aristocratic hands—such a
figure clearly reveals that the ideal of beauty cherished
by this new generation was directly the opposite of
what their fathers had honoured.
If Verrocchio, in his own works, at least, reminds us of the powerful past, Piero Pollajuolo is quite an off- shoot of this new over-delicate age: as fine in feeling as he is weak, pale and dreamy; a Niels Lyhne of the quattrocento, oscillating between one master and an- other, and unable to stand without leaning in feminine devotion upon some stronger man. In his earliest work, the Coronation of the Virgin (1483). he is still dominated by his teacher Castagno, and attempts to be crude and powerful. But it is not in him to paint in this rugged fashion; and Hugo van der Goes furnished him an ideal more in accordance with his nature. The bearded man in his Three Kings is taken literally from the Flemish altar-piece. Like Baldovinetti, he then turned to colour and created the Annunciation of the Berlin Gallery, which in its deep glowing fire belongs to the greatest pictorial achievements of Florentine art. But he is most at home in those works in which he translates the dainti- ness of Verrocchio and the grace of Goes into an even
Doren3zo the Magnificent 147
greater effeminacy. He is especially fond of painting
‘limp, falling boot-legs—a symbol, by the way, of his
own character. It seems as if the whole weariness of a
sinking century weighed upon his small shoulders. A
strange feeling of decadence exhales from these tender,
languishing figures who are clothed so coquettishly,
move their hands so affectedly, and so modestly tread
the earth. Witness his David in Berlin, which
might just as well have been painted by a modern
Rosicrucian as by a son of the youthful quattrocento;
or his Tobias in the Turin Gallery, with the nervous
white lapdog and the mincing, affected beings, so timid,
weakly, and over-delicate that they tremble at every
noise. It might be said that this Tobias laying his
little hand. upon the arm of a strong man is: Piero
Pollajuolo himself, helpless the moment a stronger does
not lead him. As he was fourteen years younger than
his brother Antonio, one might think of the pampered
helplessness of late-born children, if this soft, weary
trait did not pervade the entire epoch. The strong
were followed by the weak, the healthy by the nervous,
and the conquerors by the weary aristocrats, wishing
no longer to work but only to enjoy.
VIII.— The Age of Lorenzo the Magnificent
Lorenzo the Magnificent embodied in his personality the age in which he lived. After the elder Cosimo, the wise and able banker who had collected the riches of the house of Medici, came his grandson who enjoyed them. For Cosimo business stood in the foreground, and art was only a means of making an impression on the people. Lorenzo, who through his marriage with Clarice Orsini had invested their modern coat of arms with the lustre of an ancient house, was too much of the grand seigneur to soil his hands with money affairs. With him the patronage of art was an artistic predilection.
Reared in the midst of all the works of art which three generations of his family had collected, his eye was accustomed to the finest zesthetic enjoyment. He could suffer nothing ugly or plebeian about him; every object, whether it be furniture or ornament, gobelins or table furniture, must be a work of art, a jewel in itself. Festivals of costume, showy tournaments, and festal processions were arranged, because they disguised grey life with a brighter lustre. But not only the eye was delighted with the most costly enjoyment; a like cult was dedicated to all the senses. For the age of the Magnifico is also that of music and of love, of flowers and gastronomy.
A pronounced aristocratic tendency, a feeling of Odt profanum vulgus et arceo, pervaded the age. While Cosimo had endeavoured to be one of the people, Lorenzo is a solitary man. As in Barré’s novel Sous l'ceil des barbares, humanity is divided into two classes, the barbarians and the intelligent. The barbarians are all those who have to work and live a commonplace, every-day life; the intelligent are the chosen ones, the
Loren30 the Magnificent 149
élite of the spirit, the esthetic connoisseurs, who in the
midst of the plebeian world create for themselves an
artificial paradise, where they live in association with
works of art and books which suit their exquisite
taste. As in the day when Horace wrote Beatus ille
qui procul negotits, country life is the ideal of the
elect. Lorenzo seldom tarried in the city, but led, in
his villas of Careggi, Caffagiolo, and Poggio a
Cajano, the life of a country gentleman surrounded by
choice spirits, who, like himself, considered themselves
devotees of pure beauty. The Platonic Academy
especially, founded by Cosimo de’ Medici, acquired a
new importance under Lorenzo. Although it had
formerly been dedicated to learned studies it now
became a voluntary association of friends, who, as
“brothers in Plato,”’ professed the cult of the senses
and faith in the ancient gods of Greece. Christianity,
as a universal religion, meant little to such esthetes.
They were so epicurean in matters of form that the
Bible repelled them, because “the style of Holy Writ
was bad.’ They assembled in Lorenzo’s villa at
Careggi, that charming building whose ruins even to-day
are replete with the full charm of the early Renaissance.
Wide, shadowy rows of columns surround a quiet court-
yard in which a fountain dreamily patters, and from
the windows of the high, graceful, simple rooms, the
view extends over the blooming valley of the Arno
and the hills of Fiesole adorned with villas, where pines
and dark cypresses rise above grey olives and sun-
150 “fiature and Antique |
crowned laurel. To the clink of beakers and the music
of the harp, they discussed Platonic dialogues or read
new poems. If the heat was oppressive they fled into
the woodland hills, as described by Landini in that
passage so strangely recalling Boccaccio. They lay
down in the silent coolness of the wood under lofty
plantains; a brook rippled near by, and the view ex-
tended to the sea shimmering in the distance. In this
secluded solitude, into which the sound of no church
bells penetrated, they forgot that they were Christians
and believed themselves Greeks as they philosophised
about the conception of human happiness.
The poems of Poliziano and Lorenzo are the chief literary works of this select circle. Although not replete with deep thought, they are full of grace, the poetry of souls thirsting after beauty and tuned to Arcadian repose; who have fled from Golgotha to Olympus, from the present into a distant Elysium. Poliziano wrote his Giostra, a mythological poem in praise of the tourna- ment which Giuliano de’ Medici, the elegant and chivalric leader of the gilded youth, had held in honour of his Simonetta; and Lorenzo dedicated sonnets full of tender infatuation to his beloved Lucrezia Donati. These sonnets curiously illumine the ideal of beauty of this over-refined age. For what he treasured in woman was not a wholesome and robust, but a suffering beauty of ethereal pallor and with deathly sick, enchanting eyes—the beauty of consumption, from which Simonetta died.
Loren30 the Magnificent 151i
The sentiment of Vergil’s Eclogues pervades his
Nencia, the jests of a joyful carnival his lightly clad
Cant: di ballo; and his Corinto, the love plaint of a
shepherd, might have been written by a Greek idyllic
poet and illustrated by Bocklin.’ Again and again he
repeats the teaching of Horace to enjoy as long as one
can enjoy, and the summons to live without whims and
cares, to crown beakers and to enjoy life with song and
dance; for so sounds the melancholy refrain: ‘One
cannot know what the morrow will bring.”
In these works repose the thoughts to which painters gave pictorial form. No remembrance of the suffering Nazarene and of bleeding martyrs should bring a false note into this Arcadian blessedness; but only idyllic pictures of Hellenic mythology, pleasing to the senses, were suitable for the villas which these zsthetes erected as oases in the desert of every-day life. A quite new variety of Arcadian and bucolic painting was created. For all those pictures which Lorenzo had painted for his. villas, Signorelli’s Pan as well as Botticelli’s Spring and Birth of Venus, have nothing in com- mon with the antique which Mantegna cherished. The latter was a great scholar who by means of science transplanted himself into antiquity, and who by the most careful study of costume and arms sought to reconstruct the epoch in an archeological manner. The painters of Lorenzo’s circle might have done this also: for in the extensive gardens of San Marco whole rows of statues were erected along the avenues of trees,
152 Wature and Antique
and in the collections of Lorenzo hundreds of Greek
vases and antique gems were preserved. What,
however, they wished to depict was not the antique, but
a Saturnian age, in which man, rejoicing in the senses,
lived in unbroken joyful existence in blessed unity
with nature. While Mantegna saw the antique world
with the eyes of Menzel, they gazed at it as did Bécklin
and Puvis de Chavannes. The land of the Greeks
which the Paduan had sought with his intelligence,
they sought with the soul, and would have said about
Mantegna what Bécklin said of Menzel, “He is a great
scholar.” On the one hand a clear and intelligent
classicism, on the other a romanticism flying from
actuality into a dreamy Hellas as to a blessed shore,
to repose in the land of poesy, and afterwards bring
home sweet sentiments and beautiful pictures.
As these works revealed the spiritual, so Ghirlan- dajo’s paintings reflect the external garb of the epoch. Although they seemingly portray biblical subjects, they are in truth only a glorification of a great age; when, as the inscription says, “Our most beautiful city of Florence, renowned for its riches, arts and buildings, lived in prosperity, health and peace.” The thought that he was painting biblical subjects never seems to have entered Ghirlandajo’s mind, in his commission from Lorenzo’s cousin Giovanni Tornabuoni to paint the cycle of frescoes in the choir of Santa Maria Novella. He paints only the world which he sees about him, and in the festal garment of pleasure. The Florence of
IIUILOI HT ‘DIJIQONT DID DIUDG Ut OISAA
NIOUIA AHL JO HLYIE
OfVGNY1TaIHD OOINAWOG
7: 5
"45 * nese jae
13 z
‘ate te
‘ 4 ¥
Loren3o the Magnificent 153
those days in its sincerity, its distinguished renown
and its nobility of culture is immortalised in these paint-
ings. One witnesses the pompous display of ecclesias-
tical pageantry, sees how marriages were celebrated,
and is introduced into the lying-in room of a Florentine
patrician lady. Other ladies with a worldly air, the
créme of the Florentine aristrocacy, come to visit; very
piquant with their irregular but delicate faces and their
brocaded, dignified costume. Marble friezes, such as
the Robbias had created, adorn the walls of the room.
It must have been an event when all Florence streamed
to see the portraits of these well known beauties, and to
admire the ladies of the houses of Tornabuoni and
Tornaquinci, Sassetti and Medici.
We must also thank Ghirlandajo for his faithfulness in portraying the culture of the age. It is his gift to us that the whole epoch stands so tangible and full of life before our eyes; and his pictures have the same interest as a lecture on the culture of the age of the Magnifico. But his artistic qualities also are impres- sive. While Gozzoli, who laboured in the same manner a generation earlier, did not rise above the level of a clever illustrator, in Ghirlandajo’s pictures there is a great historic trend. There, easy complacency; here, a clear, serious composition and monumental dignity. Whereas Gozzoli, with relief-like breadth, overloads his mural surfaces with such a number of details that one interferes with the other, with Ghirlandajo a simple, forceful space composition prevails. He has developed
154 Wature and Antique
Benozzo’s waggish chatter into a well-written oration,
and clarified his naive juxtaposition of single episodes
into a classical lapidary style.
On the other hand this change involves no great personal service on the part of Ghirlandajo. The reason for his superiority consists merely in the fact that while Gozzoli could only avail himself of the achievements of Masaccio, Uccello and Castagno, Ghirlandajo had at his disposal those of a wider period. He is a greater space composer, because Piero della Francesca had created the laws of space composition; more dignified and simpler because Pollajuolo had taught the Floren- tines a sense for monumental simplicity. His figures have a corporal and not a flat, geometrical effect, like those of Gozzoli, because Verrocchio had taught the methods of achieving plasticity of form. The cast of his draperies and the antique monuments and ornaments which he uses in the background and as decorative ac- cessories, are of a classical purity of style, because he had seen Rome, and because since the publication of Mantegna’s line engravings the study of draperies had been systematically carried on in Florence. Sometimes he even surprises us with intimate details, with flowers and animals—because Hugo van der Goes had awak- ened taste for these things. Ghirlandajo made use of the entire capital in art that the age had collected, and availed himself of everything that the great in- vestigators had established. While this raises him above Gozzoli, it also shows that Gozzoli signifies the
Lorenzo the Magnificent 185
termination of an epoch. For as often as an epoch of
art approaches its end the éclaireurs are followed by
the profiteurs, who, instead of attempting new things,
merely collect what has been already achieved.
In other respects as well, no further progress was possible along the path taken by Ghirlandajo. How- ever much gratitude is due him for having transmitted with documentary fidelity a picture of that great age, it is nevertheless questionable whether the legends of John and Mary are a proper pretext for furnishing con- temporary fashion plates. Religious feeling is no longer to be found in his paintings; the last vestige of piety which the fourteenth century had retained is eliminated. Even the legend of St. Francis which Giotto had painted with such serious sublimity becomes in Ghirlandajo’s hands a representation of ecclesiastical ceremonies and architectural scenes. The Paul Vero- nese of the quattrocento, he has rendered biblical subjects in a more worldly style than any of his pre- decessors. While even in Gozzoli’s works there still exists a story-telling sentiment, a certain rustic patriarchal air suitable for biblical themes, with Ghirlandajo they have become social episodes of the salon and worldly representations of society. By his well-known expression of regret that, after he had acquired a mastery of this kind of art, he could not decorate the entire city walls of Florence, he has him- self betrayed how purely superficial his conception of his profession was.
156 ature and Antique
Although in his altar-pieces the translation of biblical
into modern subjects is less conspicuous, they offer a
logical commentary of this transformation. They are
able, but prosaic, sober and crude. An experienced
business man, he carried on the painting of altar-
pieces as a factory owner would have done, never
refusing a commission. This explains why his works
possess neither psychic qualities nor colouristic charm.
Glaring red and blue colours, fresh from the tube, stand
side by side. Pictures which for Fiesole would have
been soul-confessions are for Ghirlandajo articles of
commerce, which he executes with the help of his
apprentices, as well as may be, in his shop.
It is easy to understand how, in an age no longer possessing Christian ideals, whose choice spirits made pilgrimages into the land of the Hellenes, religious painting also acquired the same mundane or else a purely manufactured character. It is impressive to find a view of life which no longer recognised a Christian heaven expressing itself with such candour. But one also understands why, in consequence of the store of religious feeling which still existed, such an art as Ghirlandajo’s must be followed by the severest reaction.
Chapter II.— The Religious Reaction
I.— Savonarola
‘* Di doman non é certezza.”’
LORENZO himself had still to experience this.
When at the close of his life he wrote his Laudz,
a strange change had transformed him. The
exuberant poet of the carnival songs discusses the
gloomy problem of human fate, demands to know
the wherefore of life, speaks of the evil hours of an
inner void and of the pale terror that affrights the soul.
It was in such a moment of inner void that he
sent from his sick-bed in the Villa Careggi to the
cloister of San Marco to summon the Domin-
ican prior Girolamo Savonarola to console him
and grant absolution. At the death-bed of the
favourite of the Graces the great reformer stood
long and silently—a gloomy, threatening phantom,
transfixing the dying man with his eagle eye—
then turned away and departed without granting
absolution.
157
158 The Religious Reaction
The years of theocratic rule have now dawned.
The Platonism of the aristocratic circles could not
satisfy the feelings, and repletion reigned after the long
intoxicating dream of beauty; a burning desire for
salvation after earthly pleasures, and _ puritanical
fanaticism after the cult of the senses and the pleasure-
loving epicureanism of the past. Savanarola belonged
to those rare men who come at the right hour. The
same little monastery of San Marco, where in Fiesole’s
time St. Antoninus had laboured, now became once
more the bulwark of Christianity. The ideas of asceti-
cism and renunciation which at that time only existed
in narrow monastic circles were carried by Savonarola
to the passionately excited masses. To the enticing
ideals of antiquity, the siren song of sensual pleasure and
of antique beauty, he opposed the power of a thousand
years of ecclesiastical traditions and the gloomy passion
of a religious life. As early as January, 1491, Savo-
narola had begun his penitential sermons in Santa
Maria del Fiore, and in a few months Florence was
changed. Like a storm his inspired word fell upon the
pleasure-loving masses. It seemed as if a prophet
from on high had come down from heaven to call the
luxurious city to penance and contrition. Ecclesiastical
processions took the place of worldly festivals, and
exuberant carnival songs were succeeded by spiritual
hymns of praise. The number of his adherents in-
creased daily. Even though the Pope threatened
excommunication and the aristocratic circles raged
Savonarola 159
against the demagogue, with the cry “Viva Cristo” the
electrified masses surged about, and dervish-like scenes
reminding one of the processions of Flagellants in the
middle ages began. The house of Medici no longer
reigned; but Jesus Christ, populi Florentini decreto
creatus, Was in proper person King and Lord Protector
of Florence. The Auto da fé of vanities arranged
for the carnival of 1497, probably marks the summit
of his activity as an agitator. Thirteen hundred
children, marching from house to house, demanded
and collected the tinsel of this world. Silken clothes
and musical instruments, carpets and editions of the
Decamerone, antique authors and mythological pictures
—all were piled into a high pyramid, and the smoke
mounted to heaven. Women and maidens crowned
with olive branches danced around the blazing
pile in mystic ecstasy, offering rings, bracelets,
or whatever ornaments they possessed to the
flames. A dzmonic, hypnotic power must have
proceeded from the great zealot; for even Miran-
dola, the friend of the Magnifico, relates that he
trembled and his hair stood on end, when listening
to one of the fanatical sermons of the Dominican
friar.
Against art too he hurled his ban: “Aristotle, who was a heathen, says in his Poetics that immodest figures should not be painted, lest children be corrupted by the sight. What shall I thensay to you, ye Christ- jan painters, who expose half-nude figures to the eye?
VOL. 1.—1I
160 The Religions Reaction
That is a thing of evil which must cease. But ye who
possess such paintings, destroy them or paint them
over and ye will then do a work pleasing to God and the
Blessed Virgin.” As he thundered against the repre-
sentation of the nude, so he protested against the
introduction of contemporary portraits into religious
paintings: “The figures which ye have painted in your
church are the figures of your gods. Nevertheless,
young people may say when they meet this or
that person, ‘This is Magdalen, that is St. John.’
For the pictures of your wantons ye cause to
be painted as saints in the churches, thus drag-
ging that which is divine into the dust, and bring-
ing vanity into the house of the Eternal One.
Think ye that the Virgin Mary was so clothed as
ye paint herP I say unto you, that she wore the
clothes of the poor, but ye paint her as a woman of
the streets.”
The injury done to art by this great ecclesiastical reaction, which changed the new Athens into a second Geneva, as intolerant as the capital of Calvin, has often been described. If the representations of the antique in the fifteenth century never progressed beyond beginnings, and the gods of Greece for whom Lorenzo prepared a home had again to flee from Italy, this is entirely due to the teaching of Savonarola. In consequence of his zeal against contemporary portraits and modern costume, the wholesome relation of art to life was lost. On the other hand, he offered a
Savonarola - 161
substitute for that which he destroyed and gave back
to art what she had lost in the days of Lorenzo: her
Christian ideals, which he showed in a light which
made them seem to have become quite new. When in
his sermons he speaks of the maternal love of Mary,
of her timid prophetic soul, gazing with a pathetic
glance into the future, when he describes-her as a som-
nambulist living from day to day in painful anticipation
of a coming fate, or represents her as a poor,-simple
maiden unable to comprehend the mercy shown her
in being the chosen of heaven—all these things reveal
the far deeper ideal of the Madonna with which he
inspired painters. ‘Beautiful alone is the beauty of
the soul. Behold a pious person, whether man or
woman, who is inspired of the Holy Ghost; observe him
when he prays and a heavenly inspiration seizes him;
then ye shall see the beauty of God beaming from his
face, and his features will have the expression of an
angel.” In such words a whole new programme for
art was given. And the artists, each after his own
fashion, took sides in regard to the preacher of penance.
For one he was an evil demon, for another the Holy
Ghost; this one he robbed of his ideals, that one he
assisted to discover himself. Standing in the midst
of these passionate disturbances, art also was shaken
by the spiritual fever which streamed through the
‘veins of the whole people.
162 The Religious Reaction
II.— Piero di Cosimo
For Piero di Cosimo, Savonarola proved an evil genius; for he destroyed his world of fables and drove him from the enchanted domain which he had built for himself in gleaming splendour: where fabulous beings glided through the air; where stately knights and captive princesses, three-headed gaints, and enchanted heathen deities frightened and loved, fought and teased each other. If any one, then, Piero di Cosimo is the true child of the age of the Magnifico, the kindred spirit of those bucolic poets who played with the ancient myths with such a coy and gracious charm.
Although usually accounted a pupil of the dull and clumsy Cosimo Roselli, he was in reality a follower of Hugo van der Goes. From him he acquired the sense of rusticity and of beautiful luminous colours, his taste for the intimate observation of plant and animal life, and his pleasure in sunlight playing upon faces, flowers, and clothes. Especially characteristic for the Nether- landish spirit of his art is the Berlin picture of the Adoration of the Shepherds. No festal splendour, but rather a rustic charm pervades the representation. Mary folds her hands devoutly; a coarse-grained shepherd, with a little goat under his arm, raises his great greyish-yellow hat. A sunbeam strikes his weather-browned face, light brown coat, and bluish- gray hose. The landscape is simple and modest in
Piero di Cosimo 163
design, and bathed in even light; and the pale green or
delicate yellow leaves of the lofty trees stand out
daintily against the blue firmament. The rustic
character of the picture is further heightened by a
heap of vegetables, the thatched roof of the hut, and
the powerful animals.
This primitive, yet confidential manner, which has nothing in common with the light elegance of the Italians, pervades also his other works. A Madonna in the Louvre looks more like a Dutch market woman than an Italian picture of the Virgin. A simple peasant woman in plain, homely clothes, she wears a striped light blue head-dress, tucked under her chin and knotted at the ends—a delightfully artistic motive which never occurs in Italian paintings. In the foreground a white dove and a book bound in red are arranged quite in the manner of Flemish still-life. In other paintings he is occupied with the analysis of light. Quite in the sense of Ghirlandajo he has given in his Magdalen the portrait of a richly dressed young lady. But this lady stands at the window, through which the sunlight floods the room, enveloping the figure in bright light; gleaming upon her cheeks, skipping over her hair, glimmering upon pearls and rubies, and refracting in a thousand colours upon her dark green dress. Other Flemish traits are the use of the three-quarter instead of the Italian profile view, and the still- life, consisting of salve-box, paper, and book, which he has grouped upon the window-sill. The window-
164 The Religious Reaction
sill is very skilfully used to exhibit the third
dimension and to increase the plastic impression of
space.
In other pictures again he charms by his close ob- servation of animal and vegetable life. In the Adoration of the Christ-child, painted for Lorenzo de’ Medici, a brooklet ripples over the pebbles; a starling sits near a tree trunk, and in the foreground flowers sparkle in the green grass of the meadow. There is hardly a picture of his in which animals do not occur; such as pigs, rabbits, or pigeons, ducks, cranes, or swans. He is everywhere recognisable by the botanical faithfulness with which he paints palm and olive trees, clusters of myrtle, heads of grain, tulips, primroses, and daisies. Yet, with all this richness of detail, his landscapes are impressive by reason of their broad and distant views and their mighty simple line. One feels that he did not adorn nature, as the earlier painters had done, but, like Goes, portrayed her as a simple analyser.
The impression made by his paintings is confirmed by what we know of his life. Vasari relates that he always locked himself in his workshop and would not permit others to see him paint; which shows to what extent he considered himself a technical experimenter, and was conscious that he had discovered Goes’s secrets of colour, which he wished to preserve as his own property—just as Leonardo used backhand writing in order to guard his manuscripts from unwelcome eyes.
Piero di Cosimo 165
Vasari further relates that Piero would not suffer
any one to cut the fruit in his garden, but let the grape
vines grow wild, maintaining that we should let nature
take her own course rather than endeavour to make
something else out of her. This reminds us of Bous-
seau’s theory that everything is good just as it has
sprung from the lap of nature, the mother of all, and
at the same time shows the cause of the realism of his
landscapes, which also reproduce nature without
“desecrating by improvement.” It is further related
that Piero lived only on eggs; and even this abstinence,
seemingly the caprice of an eccentric spirit, is closely
connected with the pantheistic views of the master, who
was such a friendly observer of animals, and, after
Goes, created the first important animal-pieces in
modern art.
But this habit of intimate observation is only one side of Piero’s nature; hand in hand with it goes a trend towards the fantastic. The same man who observed nature with such a bright and acute eye also listened for the sound of lost melodies, soft and low. Weird beings appeared to him, fantastic yet serious; and the figures of the legends, mounted upon strange animals, glide through space. A fabulous hippogriff carries him into lost worlds of beauty, to Greece, the Orient, and Utopia. “This youth,’ says Vasari, “was blessed by nature with much intelligence and was very different in his strange notions from the other young people who worked at the same time with Cosimo Roselli. Often when he wished to relate something it seemed as if he suddenly no longer knew what he was talking about, and he had to begin anew because his mind had in the meanwhile become occupied with quite different things. At the same time he was so fond of solitude that he only felt comfortable when he could go about alone, devoting himself to fantastic thoughts and building air castles.”’! From this and the succeeding description it is evident that, long before Leonardo, he had followed the advice which the latter gave to young artists in his treatise on painting: “If thou hast a situation to invent, thou canst behold strange things in clouds and weather-beaten walls: beautiful landscapes adorned with mountains, views, cliffs, trees, great plains, valleys, and hills. Thou canst see all kinds of battles there, dramatic positions, strange figures, faces, and clothes. In viewing such walls and mixtures the same thing occurs as in listening to the sound of bells, in the peals of which thou wilt again find every name and every word which thou dost imagine.”
Piero’s talent for the fantastic revealed itself earliest in the carnival processions which he arranged for the aristocratic young gentlemen of Florence. Vasari relates that he designed entire triumphal processions, with music and verses which had been made for this purpose. There were men on horseback and on foot
While the author’s translation of Vasari is not a literal one, it
embodies the entire sense of the original in better and briefer form.—Epb.
Piero df Cosimo 167
and everything was of incredible pomp, the clothes
corresponding strictly with the picture represented.
It was beautiful to see at night about thirty horses
mounted by knights in magnificent costumes, each
one attended by six or eight pages, lance in hand, and
then the triumphal chariot adorned with trophies and
fantastic ornaments. Ata time when painting was still
practically confined to the traditional religious sub-
jects, fantasies could only find vent in such ephemeral
representations. Through the journey to Rome, which
in 1482 he made in company with his teacher Roselli,
this trend towards the fantastic was guided into a firm
course. The radiant and wonderful antique world and
the charm of the ancient legend were revealed to him.
His imagination, which formerly had not known how
to occupy itself or what course to take, now found a
sure aim. The antique world was for him a lost, en-
chanted kingdom, where witchcraft and love, adventure
and knighthood reigned. He leads us into the deep
forest where satyrs and nymphs dwell; to the seashore
where courageous knights fight against dragons to
release captive princesses. Sometimes the prevail-
ing note of his pictures is the coy, jesting tone
which laughs from Boccaccio’s Genealogia Deorum ;
at others the romantic longing which echoes from
the verses of the Magnifico; then again a_ very
modern feeling, reminding of Lohengrin or Nickel-
mann.
Like an antique legend set to Offenbach’s music is the
168 The Religious Reaction
effect of his picture which, following Poliziano’s
Silvae, portrays the Finding of Hylas. A nymph has
found the handsome youth, the favourite of Hercules,
in a flowery meadow; and like dogs scenting the game
all the maidens hurry to the scene to admire the nude
boy. Each one wants him for herself. One brings
him flowers, another fruits, a third a little dog; another
is so fascinated with the sight that, stopping with
wide-spread limbs, her hands on her thighs, she stares
at the lad like one crazed and in her excitement drops
all the flowers. The fat Tritons, gazing on the bathing
Naiads in Bécklin’s Play of the Waves do not look more
astonished than Piero’s nymphs. His Venus and Mars
in Berlin is a shepherd’s idyl of mischievous charm.
Cupids play with the armour of Mars, and doves lock
bills; a red butterfly has lighted on the knee of Venus,
and a little rabbit nestling to her intelligently pricks its
ears, as if sniffing the perfume of her body. In the
picture of the Liberation of Andromeda, Perseus, with
yellow cuirass, blue tabard, fluttering sash, and red
hose, flies through the air like a burlesque Lohengrin,
and the dragon clumsily coils itself like a primeval
Fafner.
According to Vasari, Piero for a long time laboured exclusively with such subjects. He had found the true direction for his activity, and was inexhaustible in the invention of fabulous monsters and strange hobgoblins. Centaurs and satyrs storm about, Lapithze struggle, and Prometheus brings down fire from
Piero dt Cosimo 169
~~
heaven. In his fantasy the whole space of the earth is
peopled with spirits, and the air with legions of strange
beings. It seemed as if, after a thousand years slumber,
old Pan had awakened again. Probably the most beauti-
ful of these subjects is the Dead Procris in London, a
lovely ideal of Bocklinesque charm. Her tender body
lies upon a sweet-scented, blooming meadow, and a
faun kneels beside her, unable to believe that the
daughter of Erechtheus is dead. Silently he bends
over, seeking to raise her head, and glances into her
eyes. The picture is pervaded by a romantic Hellen-
ism and a deep melancholy. Not only the dog, her
faithful guardian, sitting near, but the very landscape
mourns; like the branches of a weeping willow the
shrubbery hangs down. Piero, the merry knave, has
become serious and thoughtful: one almost believes
that in the mourning faun he has painted himself,
and in the dead Procris his art.
For when the penitential sermons of Savonarola thundered, it was all over with the joyful fables. Gay antiquity was again followed by the gloomy middle age, and merry sensual pleasure by sanguinary asceticism. Although he even tried it for a time, Piero, the heathen, could not accommodate himself to the change. The Holy Family in Dresden is probably his first concession to the Dominican. His landscape, formerly flowery, has become rocky and desolate, and bare trees stretch their branches towards heaven. St. John, formerly the playfellow of the Christ-child, now timidly
170 The Religious Reaction
approaches him with the cross; mighty angels’ wings,
indistinct as clouds, spread over the landscape. In the
Immaculate Conception of the Florentine Academy he
even rises to a great achievement in the sense of the
new spiritualism. The very theme shows the spirit
of the Counter-reformation casting its shadow before,
being the first representation of the incident to the
glorification of which Murillo afterwards dedicated
his art. In this painting the heads are full of ecstatic
devotion, and he has actually succeeded in attaining
the pitch of religious excitement which thrilled the age.
But this excitement did not last long. Although he
lived to paint many religious pictures, his personality
was lost. At one time it is Signorelli, at another
Leonardo or Fra Bartolommeo whom he imitates, and
he feels that his labour is forced. The moment he no
longer expresses himself he is no longer the peer of
the others. He begins his panels in discouragement,
to end them either in a forced manner or not at all.
Under the pretext of painting portraits he occasionally
ventures upon a modest excursion into his old domain:
like his uncanny Cleopatra, the nude woman with the
oriental shawl, about whose necklace a greenish-yellow
snake is curled. But one feels that a man in whose
soul a chord had snapped painted this picture; so shrill
is the dissonance between the tropical, exuberant char-
acter of Cleopatra and the desolate hungry landscape
with the withered trees presented as a background;
so devilish is the contrast between this pale profile
uopuoT ‘4a [DUOUD AT
sIwo0ud AO HLVAGC AHL
OWISOO 1d OUFId
Piero di Cosimo 171
and black masses of clouds which gather behind it.
The portraits of the musician Francesco Giamberti
and the architect Giuliano da Sangallo at the Hague
also belong to this period. They were surely no
commissions, but the portraits of friends; embittered
people with whom he, like Gottfried Keller, associated
in the evening over a fiasco of Chianti, to denounce
the change of times: Giuliano gazing with dull, imbecile
eye, and the other a toothless old idealist, who has
angrily cocked his great cap over one ear. The land-
scape is so little suitable to the allegorical accessories,
that one would imagine he had painted these heads
over previous landscape studies.
The life-blood of his art had been sapped by Savo- narola. The Christian ideals which had again become omnipotent left no room for fantasy. The figures of the saints had again to be painted in accordance with the strict canons that had for centuries prevailed. But once more his old pleasure in carnival processions awakened, and he resolved to express himself freely in mummeries. The carnival procession which he de- signed in 1507 brought for the last time his name on every tongue. But what had Savonarola made of the jolly Piero! The procession exhibited, as Vasari relates, ‘the triumphant chariot of Death drawn by buffaloes, quite black and painted with bones and white crosses. The figure of Death, scythe in hand, was seated upon it, and coffins followed. When the procession paused and sang, the lids of the coffins
172 The Religious Reaction
opened, and skeletons appeared’ wrapped in black
grave-clothes upon which the bones and ribs had been
painted so naturally that one shuddered to behold it.
Then shrill trumpet blasts sounded, at which the dead
half arose from their coffins, sat up and with wailing
voices sang: ‘Dolor, pianto e penitenzia.’ Behind the
chariot dead men rode upon horses which he had
carefully selected from the leanest in the city. Upon
the black covers, white crosses were painted. Every
man had four pages, who were also dressed as dead,
carrying in their hands black lances and great black
standards adorned with crosses and death heads.
Other corpses, clad in black cloth, marched: beside the
chariot singing with wailing voices, ‘Miserere mei,
deus.’”’
Although he lived ten years longer noone was heard to speak of Piero after this. He even dismissed his pupils. He painted many pictures, like the representa- tion from the Legend of Andromeda in the Uffizi, but they were only works executed to kill time; joyless repetitions, drawn with trembling hand, of that which he had portrayed with such charming spirit in his youth. When it rained he would go out into the street to ob- serve how the raindrops sprinkled the earth: such, he said, was human fate. When a storm came he would sit in the corner of the room, trembling as if pursued by spirits. Misanthropic, friendless, and neglected, he lived on, a fantastic without means of existence, awaiting death. Only when he heard the church bells
Botticellt 173
and the chant of priests he would awaken from his
apathy and angrily clench his fists; for church bells and
priests’ chants had killed his art. One morning he was
found dead on the doorstep.
III.— Botticelli
Botticelli was affected in quite a different way by the tragedy of Savonarola. Indeed, considering his youthful works, it might seem that the religious revival should be traced to him rather than to the preacher of San Marco. For what Savonarola preached, Botti- celli had previously painted.
His youth fell in the age which was tired of dreaming and wished only to investigate and observe. Fra Filippo, the jolly Carmelite, was his first teacher, and after he had left Florence he attached himself to the great technicians Verrocchio and Pollajuolo, from whom he learned colour, anatomy, and perspective. But even his early works show that he used the forms derived from his teachers to express a sentiment quite different from theirs. In the midst of a time without spiritual tendencies, Botticelli penetrated anew the unfathomable depths of religious emotion; and among a group of realists he stands alone as a mystic enthusi- ast in a world apart from the rest. The joy in nature and the laughing optimism of the others he confronted, even at that time, with the solemn ecclesiasticism of the middle age, painting pictures which were a protest of a dreamy and sensitive soul against the prosaic
174 The Religious Reaction
objectivity reigning about him. The works of the
older painters are sensible, sober, and clear, his are
full of ecstatic emotion and dreams; a romanticism
which, longing for the home of the soul, flies back to the
middle age, strong in belief, and weaves about it all the
charms of mysticism.
Three pictures in the Uffizi—La Fortezza, a small Judith, and the Finding of the Body of Holofernes—and also the St. Sebastian in the Berlin Gallery show how, beginning as a pupil of Pollajuolo, he nevertheless differed from him in the soft, melancholy trend of his art. Similarly, while strictly following in several Madonnas the types of his teachers, he differs from them in that he never introduces genre subjects or jolly episodes, but conceives his paintings as the bearers of symbolic thoughts. The Madonna looks thoughtfully upon the crown of thorns and the nails, which the Christ-child innocently, unsuspectingly holds, or else a curly-haired angel offers her grapes and ears of wheat, the symbol of the sacrifice. In the place of the fresh worldliness of Fra Filippo, Botticelli’s works reveal the presence of a mystic and transcendental, a solemn and sacramental element. While the realists in their Madonnas portray the joys of motherhood, Botticelli’s know no joy whatever. Mary appears gloomy and lost in thought, as if, even when she presses the Christ- child to her bosom, a foreboding of coming suffering casts its shadow over her soul. But generally the artist quite removes her into the heavenly spheres,
Botticelli 175
and he is more solemn and effective with the medizval
theme of the Queen of Heaven. Saintly men,
solemn and severe as Direr’s Four Apostles, assemble,
like the protectors of the Holy Grail, around her throne;
or else angels draw back the curtains of the baldachin
and place the crown upon her head. In these paintings,
so different in their solemn contemplative feeling from
the joyful prosaic art of Filippo, his teacher, all re-
miniscences of earlier forms have also disappeared.
A new type of the Madonna, independently created by
Botticelli, enters the domain of art. She is no longer
the mother, but a pale, thoughtful maiden, who seems
only to be in the world to pine away like an unopened
bud, and of such a silent melancholy as if the end of the
earth were nigh. No joy in life, no sunshine and no
hope is left. Pale and quivering are her lips, and a
tired, world-weary expression plays about her mouth.
In the eyes of the Christ-child, too, a secret dawns, as
if foreboding the purpose for which it was chosen,
This is no playful child, but the Saviour of the world,
solemnly blessing or looking thoughtfully upward as if
under an inspiration. Even the angels, unlike Fra
Filippo’s self-willed boys, here performed their office in
contemplative solemnity; not playfellows of the
Christ-child but prophetic beings, who gaze with deep
pity upon the world of sorrows, and dedicate with
longing devotion and timid hesitation their services
to the Son of God.
~ In the manner, also, in which he treats costume and
VOL. 1.12
176 The Religious Reaction
uses flowers to heighten the sentiment, he has more in
common with the trecento than with his realistic con-
temporaries. Instead of clothing the Madonna in the
fashionable costume of the day, he envelops her in a
great mantle, decked with flowers and adorned with
gold and lace, which alone suffices to give the impression
of elaborate solemnity. For the clothing of the angels
he reverts to the Greek chiton, to which he adds articles
selected from the ancient ecclesiastical garb: the
alb, stole, and amice. Entire still-life scenes, composed
of fruits and flowers, and artistic niches of cypress
branches and thick palm leaves envelop the figures;
and the angels press forward bedecked with wreaths
of roses, bearing vases, candles, and lily stalks. He
only needs to apply the brush, and we are transported
into a wide and lofty cathedral where the odor of
incense mounts to heaven and a thousand great white
candles flicker. We see solemn processions with
flower-decked baldachins marching across the floor
strewn with roses, and hear the silvery voices of
children singing the praises of the Infinite One.
The Magnificat, which, to the contemplative delight of thousands, hangs in a gallery of honour in the Uffizi, and the Madonna of the Palms in the Berlin Museum are the most characteristic examples of such works. The former has such an unspeakable character of grandeur and sublimity that the beholder fancies he is listening to the mighty, solemn tones of an organ mingling with angel choirs. The word “Magnificat,”
SANDRO BOTTICELLI
THE MAGNIFICAT Ujfizt Gallery, Florence
Botticelli oo
which the Madonna is writing, sounds through the
whole painting. The Berlin picture owes to its floral
decoration the solemn and festal effect. An arbour of
palms, from the dark leaves of which. white blooming
myrtle gleams, forms the vault above the pale, maidenly
Mary, while the sweet perfume of roses, lilies, and in-
numerable flowers fills the air about. The whole
psychology of the perfume of flowers, which we are —
so fond of claiming for the nineteenth century, was
anticipated by Botticelli. All those rose-crowned
angels approaching the Blessed One, bearing lighted
candles wound about with flowers, or holding with
hieratic stiffness the long stalks of lilies in their white
trembling hands—while admiring them in the paintings
of Burne-Jones, we often forget that they originated
with Botticelli.
A fresco of this period, Sit. Augustine, in the church of Oganissanti, often shows how different his taste is from that of a realist. While in the pendant representing St. Jerome Ghirlandajo has simply at- tired an elderly Florentine gentleman as a saint, Bot- ticelli’s Augustine gazes with the eyes of a visionary into the distance, his hands pressed upon his breast, as if to control his excitement over the revelation which he has just received. His frescoes in the Sistine Chapel are no paintings, but learned discussions and interpretations of theological wisdom, hardly excelled in their severe dogmatism by the works of the Domini- can painters of the fourteenth century. In the midst
178 The Religious Reaction
of an art which hated everything symbolic, which
depicted not thoughts but actualities, and which never
wished to invent, but observe and relate, Botticelli
stands alone as a thinker who has much in common
with the art of the trecento, so rich in ideals, as with
' the heavy thoughtfulness of the German Cornelius.
That such a sensitive and impressionable mind could not remain untouched by the splendour of the antique world, is a matter of course. However little his style may have been influenced by the antique—for there is nothing less antique than these slender forms, these restless, ruffled and puffed draperies—his back- grounds, nevertheless, betray the enthusiasm with which he studied the remains of antiquity. From the time of his stay at Rome, ancient buildings, sculptures, and gems occur frequently in his works. In one of his frescoes of the Sistine Chapel he has painted the arch of Constantine and in the background of another the group of the Disocuri of the Quirinal. The portrait of a young girl in the Frankfort Museum wears as a necklace an antique gem carved with the images of Apollo and Marsyas. At that time every heathen temple and triumphal arch had a particular legend; and it was just this mystery enveloping the antique which attracted a dreamer and a brooder like Botticelli.
When he returned to Florence the harvest of human- ism was ripe. He entered the circles of the zsthetes collected about the Magnifico, and was for several
Botticello 170
years a guest in Lorenzo’s house, dining at his table.
Most of his mythological pictures were painted for
the Villa Careggi. It is principally of these works,
painted for the Medici, that we think when Botticelli’s
name is mentioned. Everybody knows that from
these entrancing paintings is wafted a perfume of
youth, purity, and grace, identifying Botticelli himself
with the springtime which in the principal one he
glorified. In his Pallas the head of the goddess, with
its soft full outlines and long wavy hair, is of such
radiant beauty and so different from the harsh type
of Simonetta, which usually recurs in his works, that
one thinks of the transcendental sweetness of Leonardo
da Vinci. In the figures of his remaining paintings
the grace of slenderness prevails, together with a certain
dreamy and transfigured expression which heightens
the mysterious effect. If his Birth of Venus had been
painted thirty years later by the clever decorators of
Rome or Venice, they would have painted geniuses
fluttering through the air, gods reclining in the clouds,
and all Olympus in a state of commotion, and the result
would have been a picture like Raphael’s Triumph
of Galatea. Botticelli, on the other hand, develops the
sentiment from the landscape, the wide and endless
ocean, upon whose quietly rippling waves the Cyprian
goddess is wafted like a fair dreamland picture. The
ringing of bells, the song of voices, and the rustling
of garments is in the air; a longing, dreamy feeling
pervades the entire earth.
180 The Religious Reaction
A midsummer night’s dream has taken form in his
Primavera, with its nymph-like graceful beings which
seem like an anticipation of Bécklin. Botticelli was the
first to see the elves dance. Slender Dryads who housed
in a thicket of the wood beside bubbling springs,
have come to take part in the dance of spring. It is
wonderful how in these paintings also he uses flowers
to enhance the effect. Olive branches encircle Pallas
and crown her head, and in the Birth of Venus the
mantle of the Hour is decked with flowers of spring,
and the wind god strews roses in the air. Inthe Pri.
mavera oranges and myrtlesshimmer; golden fruits and
white blossoms gleam from the dark foliage.’ Like the
Sleeping Beauty of the fable, Primavera is enveloped
with wild roses; flowers of the meadow encompass her
neck; blue cornflowers and white primroses are en-
twined in her fair hair. Buds of the springtime,
anemones, tulips, and narcissus, she lightly scatters
over the earth. Botticelli appears as a_ perfectly
charming mannerist in his treatment of draperies,
these transparent veils and fluttering bands. None
before him used such fine gauze draperies, clinging
tightly to the limbs and clearly revealing the flower-
like forms.
And yet, however magically beautiful these pictures
1The Birth of Venus is now in the Florentine Academy, and
Primavera 3s in the Uffizi Gallery. In an excellent monograph,
Geburt der Venus und Friihling (Hamburg and Leipzig, 1893), Dr.
Warburg has shown that the latter picture was painted after a poem
by Poliziano, entitled the Realm of Venus which is also the more
correct title for the painting. —Ep.
IIUAAO} oT “DIMapnII\7
VUGFAVWNIUd VI
ITTAOILLOd OUAGNVS
Botticello 181
are, even though they be the finest survivals of that
glorious day in which the gods of Greece were called
from exile, there is nevertheless something lacking, a
dissonance between the joyous fables which he relates
and the style in which he does it. The poetry of
Lorenzo il Magnifico and of Poliziano, which gave the
inspiration for these works, is pervaded by the love
of pleasure and an epicurean joyfulness; it is a poesy
of sensual Arcadian souls who have quite forgotten
that they are Christians. Botticelli’s paintings, on
the other hand, possessed nothing of this bucolic
repose, nothing of the joyful fable and the quaint
charm which pervades those of Piero di Cosimo. That
he could not laugh is clearly shown where he forces
himself to do so—in such an example as Mars and
Venus in the National Gallery (London). A beautiful
woman, a nude youth, cupids, a southern landscape,
thin draperies, and glittering accessories—such are the
elements of the picture; and. yet the impression does
not correspond with them. Mars resembles the cruci-
fied Saviour; his mouth is distorted by pain, and he
does not sleep, but breathes heavily as if oppressed by
a nightmare. Equally unpleasant, with a cold mur-
derous glance like Klinger’s bust of Salome, Venus looks
upon the sleeping hero. Is this the bliss which the im-
mortal gods enjoy in heavenly repose? Is this the
love-goddess of the HellenesP Even when Botticelli
ventures to paint her nude, there is something ghostly
about her, staring with green eyes, like a mermaid,
182 The Religious Reaction
into the infinite, or with a melancholy smile
pervading her trembling lips. Far from resembling
the joyous mistress of the war-god, she is rather
like the red-haired she-devil of the middle age, passing
in her exile by the cross upon which the Son of Man
hangs crucified. A weary dreaminess or a resigned
sadness is characteristic of all of his figures. It
seems as if these women were about to enter the con-
vent to do penance for their sins of the flesh. The
classic clearness of heathen mythology is combined
with a Catholic mysticism; a breath of monkish
asceticism represses joy.
Botticelli did not feel himself at home in the Hill of Venus. It seemed as if he had been followed by the thought of a purer ideal, the chaste Mary to whom he sang his first hymns. With all the filaments of his soul rooted in the middle age, he shuddered at the heathen enthusiasm which for a time beclouded his soul like a delirium. His pictures of the antique world seem to have been painted as if with hesitation, as if an unseen hand held him back. From the last of them, Calumny, after Lucian’s description of a painting by Apelles, and now in the Uffizi Gallery, a shrill cry of despair sounds. An action stormy beyond measure, the restlessness of fluttering garments, and a wild, uncanny expression of countenance appear in place of his usual quiet beauty of line and repressed melancholy. One feels that a man shattered by physical discontent painted this almost insane picture.
Botticelli 183
Most terrible of all is the figure of Repentance, an
emaciated, grief-stricken old woman, clothed in torn
mourning garments, who, stretching her bloodless,
spider-like fingers, totters forward, timid and trem-
bling. Botticelli regretted his tarrying in the Hill of
Venus. But what power could lead him back into
the community of the pure, him, the Christian, who
had sacrificed to strange gods! In this frame of mind,
he painted The Outcast,’ a work which stands alone in
the entire art of the century, and could only originate
because inconsolable suffering in the heart of an artist
cried out, with elemental power, for expression. Before
the locked portal of a Renaissance palace sits a maiden
lightly clad. She has followed her own vagrant fancy,
and now that the morning has dawned, and she wishes
to return to her father’s house, the door is locked.
Trembling from the frost and sobbing bitterly, she
buries her face in her hands, and her body writhes
in deepest woe; but all her wailing avails not to open
the locked portal.
Botticelli himself, like Tannhauser, found redemption:
it was Savonarola who again opened to him the gate of
salvation. The prophet’s voice of thunder which
frightened others only told him what as a youth he
had long ago felt. All his youthful dreams, the most
secret emotions of his soul, were expressed in words,
and the time of his first romantic attachment seemed
to return. Inspired and supported by Savonarola,
1In the collection of Prince Pallavincini at Rome, —Eb,
184 The Religious Reaction
Botticelli’s art received a powerful impulse. Forever
forgetting Venus, the witch, and with a devotion
all the more glowing and stormy because united with
repentance, he sank at the feet of the object of his
youthful worship, Mary, the mother of God. The three
Hours, who in Primavera with clasped hands tread a
measure, are changed into theological virtues, escorting
in joyful dance the triumphant chariot of the church.
Not until this work is the whole power of the master
revealed. Savonarola had touched his lips and the
timid, hesitating, dreamy Botticelli had himself become
a prophet, who with glowing enthusiasm and loud
pathos preached the return to asceticism and to the
Christian doctrine of salvation. No longer do his
figures glance at us with beseeching sadness, but they
seem to exhort and to warm.
The difference between his late and his earlier Madonnas consists in the much greater emphasis upon the gloomy and solemn character of the devotional picture. As he changed the youthful, deeply reflective mother of God into a thoughtful sibyl to whose prophetic glance the future lies revealed, so his angels became deeply earnest, sad and tired beings, staring with wide-open eyes as if into an abyss. Sometimes Mary, as if she had suddenly awakened from an awful dream, embraces the child with a stormy fervour; or she passes by absorbed in thought like a somnambulist, mechanically holding the Christ-child, who with equal sadness bends over to John. As the mother is con-
Botticelli 185
vulsed by a silent woe, so the child feels the whole
weight of an unavoidable destiny resting upon him.
To Savonarola’s influence also is to be attributed the
emphasis which in other altar-pieces he places upon the
maidenly, modest character of the Virgin. The most
costly objects, glittering stuffs, gleaming marble and
grey granite are heaped up; and men in all the pomp of
earthly splendour have assembled as a guard of honour
around the imposing throne. But upon this throne,
barefooted and in the black garb of a matron, there
sits a pale, timid, thoughtful maiden, who does not
understand the homage paid her. Only Burne-Jones in
his King Cophetua has with equal refinement depicted
a similar contrast.
But Botticelli now struck even louder and more penetrating tones. While he had formerly only lived in gentle dreams, he struck in his last works the whole scale of human emotion; from the joyful dithyrambs of the angels, who in the Coronation of the Virgin dance, fly, flutter, and rush through the air, singing the praises of the Almighty and strewing flowers down upon the earth, to the mournful pathos in his picture of the Entombment of Christ.!. The sermon which Savonarola preached on Good Friday, 1494, to the breathless, tearful people is echoed in the gloomy, sobbing pathos of Botticelli’s works. One sees women sink into unconsciousness, dying of insane anguish, and men writhe with loud moaning. The painter of the Venus
1 Both of these paintings are in the Florentine Academy.
186 The Religious Reaction
has become the Jeremiah of the Renaissance. Instead
of whispering, he thunders with the fanaticism of the
convert; he struggles as if defending a great treasure,
labours with such haste as though he feared that he
would not be able to express what he had to say.
More than two thirds of his work originated in these
years of theocratic rule.
Then almost nothing more. The martyrdom of Savonarola was the funeral of Botticelli’s art. As the great figure of the prophet had held him above water, the fall of his hero robbed him of his power. After he had celebrated the memory of the martyr in the Adoration of the Kings (London), he laid down the brush, hardly fifty years old, but a brokenman. The illus- trations of Dante are almost the only evidence of his existence during the last decade of his life. “Being whimsical and eccentric,’’ relates Vasari, “he occupied himself with commenting on a certain part of Dante, illustrating the Inferno, and executing prints, over which he wasted much time, and, neglecting his proper occupation, he did not work, and thereby caused infinite disorder in his affairs.”’ In other words, the nedizval romanticist took refuge in his true spiritual home. In the mystic transcendental poetry of Dante, the great genius of the middle age, he sought to find a resting place for his afflicted soul. He buried himself in remote ideological speculations, in order to forget as much as possible the impious present, and sought to express in the language of art things which mock
Filippino Dippt 187
-
at artistic reproductions; hoping to find in the mighty
epic poem of the future world the quiet repose which
he so entreatingly and hopelessly sought. But this
work, too, he threw aside, discouraged. Brooding
and devoted only to his dreams, lonely and lost in
meditation, he lived on. Misery and poverty befell
him. He had to walk about on crutches and would
have died of starvation had not the Medici occasionally
remembered him.
IV.— Filippino Lippi
Although the lives of the remaining painters were not changed into a tragedy, as were those of Piero di Cosimo and Botticelli, they also were unable to escape from the influence of the great Dominican. Externally the difference appeared in the completely changed subject of painting. In place of the genre paintings of the Madonna the devotional picture again appeared. The Madonna is majestically enthroned, no longer a richly dressed Florentine woman with coquettish little cap, but
1 Vasari’s story of Botticelli’s poverty and misery in old age, upon
which the present account is based, is not confirmed by documentary
evidence. In 1491, under Medicean rule, Botticelli, associated with
Ghirlandajo, was in charge of the mosaic work of the Cathedral and
competed in the plans for the fagade. According to the income-tax
of 1498 he possessed a villa and vineyards outside of the gates of San
Frediano; and in 1503 he was one of the commissioners consulted in
regard to a location for Michelangelo’s David. In1510 his father
was sufficiently wealthy to purchase a family vault in the church of
Ognissanti, where Sandro lies buried.
188 — The Religious Reaction
the donna umile whom Savonarola had described,
the poor hand-maiden of the Lord, her face trans-
figured with silent sadness and a matron’s veil drawn
over her head. Angels draw back a curtain or press
forward in happy enthusiasm; with coquettish glance
the saints gaze upward; the Christ-child no longer
plays, but gives the blessing, and little St. John
approaches him with a cross in his hand. As
in the trecento, flowers and music are used to heighten
the effect. The Adoration of the Kings and the Sujf-
jerings of the Redeemer, His Crucifixion, Deposition, and
Entombment, of which Savonarola had so often spoken,
also occupy the artist. The usual custom of represent-
ing Christ as beardless more frequently than was
formerly done may be due to the fact that in the
eyes of the artists, Savonarola himself seemed the
Saviour. Visions, also, especially Mary appearing to
various saints, or Christ to His mother or Magdalen,
became as popular as in the times of the Counter-
reformation. While the realist wished to know nothing
of supernatural things, the miracle, “ Faith’s dearest
child,” again enters into art. Only the manner in
which the themes are treated differs in accordance
with the temperament of the individual artist.
Lorenzo di Credi followed the course of events in
thoughtful silence. As his Annunciation in the Uffizi
and his Adoration of the Shepherds in the Academy
show, he was a very lovable master, who-acquired a
good colour sense and a delicate feeling for landscape
Filippino Dippt 189
in the workshop of Verrocchio and from Goes’s altar-
piece. Then he also sacrificed to the gods of Greece
and painted that Venus of the Uffizi, a work of Botticellj
translated into Cranach. At the auto da fé of vanities
on Carnival Tuesday in 1497, he as a modest, quiet
man, would have found it discourteous not to have
taken part; so with bold determination he threw all
of his life studies into the flames, and began to paint
the many mild and contemplative pictures which repre-
sent him in all the galleries. In the midst of that
temperamental, nervous race, Credi is the only one
who had no nerves: a kind of Gerard Dou, who was
lost in the stormy time. He prepared his own colours,
and with a Dutch sense of cleanliness he was careful
that no bit of dust dimmed the enamel-like smoothness
of his paintings. His landscapes must be as clean as
the room in which he labours: the sod well-trimmed,
the gravel paths without weeds, the brook sparkling,
and the sheep fresh-washed.
' He never exercises his intellect, but with incredible persistence continues to repeat all his life the same scenes. The Adoration of the Christ-child especially he treated in endless repetitions with a mild and friendly charm, too soft to be called melancholy, and with a childish, somewhat stupid piety, too phlegmatic to rise to passion. Even when, after Savonarola’s fall, taste again turned to other subjects, Credi did not permit his repose to be disturbed. He became a restorer of paintings, and finally bought himself a place in a
190 The Religious Reaction
hospital for old men, where, much esteemed by his
fellow-citizens, he ended his days in contemplative
peace.
A similar nature, only much more delicate and tired, was R, xellino del Garbo. With him everything fades into the perfume of flowers and music of mandolins. His circular painting of the Madonna at Berlin, in particular, has a fragrant, almost hypnotic effect. To the music of viols and flutes, angels have rocked the Christ-child to sleep; a dreamy silence rests over the earth, and the last sounds of the angel’s viol, dying quietly away, vibrate through the air; while the other angel, who has ceased playing the flute, gazes upon Mary as if lost in a dream.
Even more interesting is the attitude which Filippino Lippi, a thorough child of the world, takes towards the new events. It is a piquant coincidence that this son of the jolly monk and the former nun, the son of that light-hearted sensual period. which made a harem of the convent, was called to become the painter of rigid Dominicanism. And even more piquant is the clever and frivolous manner with which he dedicated his fascinating talent to the service of ideals quite indifferent to him.
To attempt to explain Filippino Lippi’s style would be love’s labour lost.. Whenever he so desires, he can imitate others to the point of illusion. At first he followed his teacher Botticelli, as whose double he appears in his youthful works. The wonderful picture
Filippino Lippi Ig1
of the Virgin Appearing to St. Bernard, which he
painted for the Badia in 1480, might have been signed
Botticelli. Like an aristocratic lady she gently
approaches the saint, who almost lets his pen fall in
astonishment when with her tender hand she couches
his book. The altar-piece of the Virgin Mary in the
Uffizi and another in Santo Spirito are further works
reminding in their: quiet melancholy of Botticelli.
He is equally delicate when, following Botticelli, he
paints fantastic, allegorical pictures, like the Allegory
of Music in Berlin, over which a dreamy far-away
feeling broods.
Then came an abrupt change of scene, transforming Botticelli’s double to Masaccio’s. He was twenty-seven years of age when he received the commission to com- plete Masaccio’s cycle of frescoes in the Brancacci Chapel. The subjects were the Visit of Paul to Peter; the Release of Peter from Prison; Peter and Paul before the Proconsul; the Crucifixion of Peter, and the in- complete subject of the Razsing of the King’s Son. Truly, a style could not be imitated in a more virtuose fashion. During the sixty years intervening between Masaccio and Filippino Lippi a very different nervous
_life had come into the world. Nevertheless, Filippino Lippi wears the mask of the older master with the same self-possession with which he had formerly worn Botticelli’s. The solemn monumental style of Masaccio seems quite as natural to him as the emotional art of Botticelli.
VOL. I.—13
192 The Religious Reaction
As a skilful prestidigitator he quickly adapted him-
self to the style of the age of Savonarola, and thus
at the close of the fifteenth century the Baroque style
appears; like causes producing like effects. Under the
impression of the sermons of Savonarola emotions had
been raised to the fever pitch. The quiet objectivity
of the old masters no longer sufficed; agitation and
pathos were demanded; pictures which spoke in the
same words of thunder which rolled from Savonarola’s
lips. But the entirely modern trend of his talent, his.
versatility and adaptability, enabled Filippino at once
to satisfy these demands. As he had formerly
imitated Botticelli and then Masaccio, he now adopted
the religious style, with the versatile talent and the
unbelieving indifference of a child of the world. He
merely plays the tragedy which Botticelli lived. Just
because he was not a convinced but only a disguised
apostle, there enters into his art that affected theatrical
quality adopted for the same reason by the Baroque
in the seventeenth century.
The very theme of the frescoes which in 1493 he painted for the church of Santa Maria sopra Minerva in Rome, shows that the spirit of Dominicanism had again entered as a power into the development of art. While the masters before Savanarola had treated simple and narrative themes from the legend of the saint, Filippino depicts an Apotheosis of St. Thomas Aquinas. In the pictures the same dogmatism prevails which a hundred years before had been the programme
Filippino Lippi =
of the Dominican paintings by Traini and the frescoes
of the Spanish Chapel. Learned inscriptions, alle-
gorical figures, Aignificant references to the heretics
refuted by the Saint—things with which the realism of
the quattrocenio had broken—are taken up anew.
And as he had in his subject attached himself to the
propagandist painting of the trecento, he also by his
style paves the way for the art of the Jesuits. The
simple, sustained narrative of Masaccio is followed by
theatrical pathos. All the figures gesticulate and
screw themselves into sanctimonious grimaces; the
draperies are arranged in puffed and restless folds; and
fluttering bands, sashes, and veils complete the Baroque
effect. The architecture plays a suitable accompani-
ment to the melody of the figures. In place of the
delicacy of the quattrocento, wildly exaggerated and
fantastic forms appear.
Before his last cycle, the frescoes of Santa Maria Novella in Florence (1498-1512) one stands speech- less as before an anachronism. Here also the theme of the painting, St. Philip Exorcising the Demon, is characteristic of the changed views. On a compli- cated pedestal stands Mars swinging a torch; while from a hole beneath the monument the demon crawls forth whom the apostle with a mighty gesture exorcises. Round about surges an excited, neryous crowd. In place of the quiet spectators of Ghirlandajo’s paint- ings, Filippino introduces actors, each one of whom plays a réle, explaining his theatrical pathos with
194 The Religious Reaction
corresponding gestures. Everything in this astonishing
picture is movement and excitement. Even the cary-
atids of the triumphal arch, the victories, hermaz and
trophies, stretch themselves and grin; the gables rear
and writhe, and all technical laws are broken. Bor-
romini thus appears in art a hundred years before his
birth. The non plus ultra, however, is the ceiling-
decorations; angels fly about with the same aplomb
that Correggio afterwards achieved. Noah resembles
an ancient river god, while Abraham and Jacob reveal
such breadth of treatment and such boldness in dra-
peries and movement, and are encircled by such .im-
possible bands and folds that one can do nothing but
gaze in silent astonishment.
The same is true of his later panel-paintings. The heavy puffed draperies which encircle his Madonna are the same which Bernini gave his angels a hundred and fifty years later. In his last work, the Deposition from the Cross,in the Florentine Academy, the influ- ence of Savonarola is shown in the reversion to the golden backgrounds of the middle age, in the simple drapery, the desolate Golgotha with its skull, and the gloomy, mournful colour. More personally character- istic of Filippino are the Baroque angels, with draperies streaming in the clouds, and the fluttering sashes and bands which they wind about the goblet. The fifteenth and seventeenth centuries clasp hands. Had he died a generation later, instead of in 1504, he would be celebrated as the founder of the Baroque style.
The Secular Religious Masters 195
V.— The Secular Religions Masters
Savonarola’s influence was not confined to Florence alone, but throughout all Italy it guided art back into religious channels. It is certain that he did not alone create the religious reaction which at that time swept over Europe; for in him an explosion found vent, the materials for which were everywhere present. He was the speaking-tube of his time, proclaiming with loud voice what others had felt in silence. It was just for this reason that with his appearance a new section of the history of art begins.
At the close of the fifteenth century a similar feeling must have pervaded the earth to that experienced in the years when the triumphs of Courbet’s realism and Manet’s impressionism were succeeded by the enthu- siasm for Rossetti and Moreau, and the reaction of the Rosicrucians began. Realism was the product of a positive and worldly epoch which expressed itself in epic, never in lyric strains. A clear eye was considered sufficient, and feeling could be dispensed with. Pas- sionless and in the same attitude of science to nature, painting wished to conquer by means of the eye alone. Nature and the antique were the two powers which inspired their activity. “ Only one thing had been forgotten: Christianity. They knew nothing more of that longing for the future world which at the beginning of the century still pulsated in all hearts.
196 The Religious Reaction
Then there came, as in the nineteenth century, the
moment when the long-suppressed inner life asserted
itself, and feeling revolted against science. Not in
Florence alone, but in all countries the narrators and
investigators, whose eye was fixed clearly upon the
objective world, were confronted by the lyricists and
the dreamers, for whom art was only a means of express-
ing the inner life. The realists were followed by the
romanticists, who, tired of the decades of unbelieving
investigators, longed for the fervent faith and the
unselfish love which the middle age had professed.
True, there were still individuals who decorated the churches and palaces with narratives of the news of the day. During his sojourn in Constantinople, Gentile Bellini had ample opportunity to see many things that were ethnographically interesting, which he recorded in his sketch book; and after his return to his native city he illustrated in the same way the manners and usages of Venice. Festal processions approach; richly decked Venetians, dignified senators, and browned sons of the Orient in strange gaudy costumes move upon the pavement of the Piazzetta. The whole of Venice of the quattrocento, with its streets, squares, churches, and palaces; with the charming colour of the costumes of its inhabitants, collected from the Orient and the Occident, is preserved in his paintings with the faithfulness of a document and with the exactitude of a photographic apparatus. Of course it is at bottom immaterial who takes such photographical representations, which do
Tbe Secular Religions Masters 197
not rise above the level of painted illustrations. What
was an actual achievement in Pisanello’s time was no
longer one at the close of the century.
Gentile’s counterpart in Umbria was Pinturicchio, who left an amazing number of frescoes in Rome, Spello and Siena—paintings which may be described with the same words as those of Benozzi Gozzoli. Like the latter he is a merry narrator, who with great skill devotes himself to wordy descriptions of festal scenes and with great ease invents rich Renaissance buildings. Resplendent costumes, gaudy carpets before the throne, stately halls, and proud facades give his pictures a joyous, festal imprint. But as Gozzoli had achieved this effect as early as 1460, it was no achievement to repeat the performance in 1500, the less so as Pin- turicchio does not even excel his predecessor in technique. With the childishness of a miniature painter he places red, green, and blue side by side, as if the great technicians in colour had never existed. He never succeeds in seizing the dramatic elements of a scene, in connecting the figures with each other, or in bringing unity into the action. Nor does he understand how to arrange the figures in perspective, but places those of the background upon the heads of those in front. He seems to be a primitive who has survived in the sixteenth century. His position as the court painter of that Borgia who was instrumental in burning Savonarola shows how distant he stood from thé great ideals of the age. For in the case of Pinturicchio it
198 The Religious Reaction
could hardly be maintained that his was a conscious
reversion to medieval miniature painting.
His works, therefore, as well as Gentile Bellini’s merely confirm the passing away of realism. The very scene of their activity is characteristic. Gentile laboured in Venice, which was always decades behind the artistic development of the rest of Italy; and while Pinturicchio succeeded in playing an important rdle in Perugia, Orvieto, Spello, Siena, and even in Rome, whose artistic activity had lagged behind, he never dared attempt Florence. In other words, whereas about the middle of the century the spirit of realism prevailed in all progressive cities, and religious art quietly survived chiefly in the country, the relation now is reversed. Precisely in the most modern city of Italy, in Florence, which had done the longest and most complete homage to realism, the signal for a complete change was earliest and most loudly sounded. After that, even in the remainder of Italy, the need for worldly pictures was supplied by illustrators of the second rank. The realists are no longer factors in the historical development, but stragglers who blessed unprogressive cities and small villages with doubtful artistic productions.
As with the contemporary historical painting and the presentation, also, of New Testament subjects in modern costume so it is all over with the antique. Although in the preceding epoch Padua had been the strong citadel of Hellenism, now even the heathen Mantegna
The Secular Religious Masters 199
flees as a repentant Christian to the foot of the cross.
Savonarola had preached in the cities of northern Italy
as well as in Florence. Did Mantegna hear him, or
did the waves of the new religious revival which the
Dominican had inspired indirectly reach him? Strange
incidents are related of his last years. He, the Roman,
the hard, implacable spirit, had a chapel built, in which,
as a hermit, he daily practised contemplation. An
antique bust of Faustina, the gem of his collection,
which he had guarded as a precious treasure, he offered
for sale to the Marchioness of Mantua, and his last
works offer further proof of the great change in his
spirit.
As in the case of Botticelli, the transition first reveals itself in his preference of allegorical to antique subjects. Especially, the picture he painted for Isabella d’ Este, showing Wisdom Expelling the Vices, is a strange pendant to Botticelli’s Calumny of Apelles. The whole is pervaded by a disagreeable torn and shattered feeling; and in the air, quite out of connection with the principal theme, a heavenly group appears. Finally, he refused altogether to work further upon the cycle, and his activity ceased in Christian representations of quite a different spirit from those he had painted during his heathen period.
‘Then he had painted Sebastian bound to an antique ruin, professing himself a Hellene in the Greek inscrip- tion, and had in a line engraving represented him as a Greek ephebos dying in his beauty. In the painting
200 The Religious Reaction
of the Franchetti collection in Venice, the beautiful
youth has become an emaciated man, a suffering mortal
whose features are furrowed by painful woe. “ Nil
nisi divinum stabile est, cetera fumus,” the inscription
reads. Formerly in painting Madonnas and Entomb-
ments, the emotional content of the theme was in-
different to him. He was attracted by the bronze-like
beauty of sinewy bodies, the splendour of marble
thrones and fruit garlands, and the stony appearance
of the landscape. In the works which sound the last
chord of his activity, the spirit of Christianity begins to
animate the rigid stony objects. The clear-headed
and carefully-weighing Mantegna becomes a lyricist
and a wailing prophet. Sometimes his figures have a
mild, thoughtful, and melancholy expression ; at others
a passionate pathos, formerly confined within the steel
corslet of Grecian rules of style, breaks forth with
abrupt directness. The Christ-child is sad, almost
weeping, and Mary, with foreboding of future suffering,
thoughtfully bows her head. The altar-piece of the
National Gallery in London and the Madonna della
Victoria of the Louvre show this change with especial
clearness. -The tones of the organ resound, festal
niches of foliage arise; saints, no longer the sullen,
reticent bronze beings of his earlier days, but fair-
haired and ecstatic gather around the throne. The
Christ-child, who in the altar-pieces of San Zeno in
Verona sang so joyfully with the angels, now, solemn
and shrinking, gives a melancholy blessing. Mary,
The Secular Religious Masters 201
formerly rigid and majestic, is now a pale and languish-
ing maiden staring dreamily and sadly into vacancy,
clothed as humbly as a beggar, the donna umile of
Botticelli.
At the same time that the latter completed his grief-convulsed Entombment, Mantegna painted his. His feet in the foreground, the corpse of Christ appears in boldest foreshortening—a revival of Mantegna’s love of perspective. But who thinks of perspective in the presence of this sunken body, with the hands cramped together; of these old women whose wrinkled faces are contorted in nameless woe? From the contemporary line engraving of the same subject, the cry of despair sounds even wilder. In raving grief Magdalen bends over the corpse; Mary sinks into unconsciousness, and, loudly as a maniac, John cries his agony to heaven. The cold and reticent, classically severe Mantegna has through Savonarola become a Rogier van der Weyden. “Humani generis redemp- - tori” is inscribed in large letters upon the sarcophagus. To the same Saviour of mankind Mantegna’s last line engraving is dedicated. Christ, arisen from the grave and holding the banner of victory, stands blessing between Sts. Andrew and Longinus. The former, holding the cross in quiet confidence, is the saint for whom the artist is named; and the Roman warrior bowing his head so deeply, who, timid as a prodigal son, approaches the Saviour with folded hands, is Mantegna himself, the man .of the Renaissance seek-
202 The Religious Reaction
ing peace in the faith of Christ. In this print the tra-
gedy of a life is summarised —the tragedy of the
quaitrocento.
V.— Crivelli
Although at the beginning of the fifteenth century the middle age quietly passed away, its close witnessed a subtle and refined revival of all the medizval styles. Instead of going forward the artists looked backwards. “Le moyen-age énorme et délicat” is their spiritual home.
The reactionary tendencies are especially evident in Venice. The new religious current of the epoch en- abled its painters not only to hold fast with conserva- tive rigidity to the ideals of the early quattrocento, but once more to invoke the gloomy majesty of the By- zantine style. Although he lived until 1499, Bartol- ommeo Vivarini remains, in his austerity, a Paduan of the days of Squarcione. Rigid and in separate panels, as in Squarcione’s altar, his figures stand before us. The elevated marble thrones are adorned with statuettes of angels, stone ornaments, and with garlands of fruits and flowers. The figures of the saints are severe and ascetic, their features careworn or sullen, and their mighty brows are ploughed with deep furrows. The colour is gloomy and threatening, and the white, black, and yellow draperies gleam harshly from the golden background.
Carlo Crivelli does not appear to belong to the fourteenth century at all, but to the pre-Giottesque period of Cimabue. In Huysmans’s A rebours there is a passage describing how Des Esseintes had the shell of a tortoise varnished with a gold glaze and set with rare and precious stones,—after which he placed it upon an oriental carpet and rejoiced in the glittering colour-effect. Carlo Crivelli’s paintings resemble this gilded tortoise: in their sparkling metallic splendour and icy reptilian coldness, they have at the same time an offensive and delicate, a revolting and attractive effect. Like the mosaicists of the middle age, he could not conceive a painting without rich and glittering orna- ments, applied (especially in the case of keys and -crowns) in the heavy style of-a relief. Like them his eyes were entranced with the sheen of fabrics, the sparkle of precious stones, and a quite barbaric material splendour. His saints wear the triple papal crown, their clothes are set with precious stones, and an amazing wealth of ornament adorns the frames. But he was not satisfied with keeping Grecian stoles, mass-vestments of gold fabric, and brocaded choir mantles, and setting the crosiers of his saints with transparent pearls of a glassy, piercing splendour. Even where ornaments do not belong, upon the sar- cophagus of Christ, for example, emeralds, rubies, topazes and gleaming amethysts sparkle, here a bluish-red, there sea-green in their chilling splendour. He loved the glittering products of the goldsmith’s art, the magic of slender goblets and pyxes; monstrances of gilded copper in the Byzantine style; precious altar tables with engraved ornaments, and old quarto volumes clasped in silver. Even the gay plumage of birds must assist to heighten the splendour of his paintings, especially of peacocks, with tails gleaming in gold, green, blue, and silver.
Quite as medizval as this barbaric splendour of colour is the effect of his archaic drawing. The position of his Madonnas is as rigid as those of Cimabue; the colour of their faces is pale and corpse-like; their emaciated arms are bare to the elbow, and small and withered hands stretch out from their sleeves. Although in other altar-pieces of the day the donors are depicted equal in size to the saints and kneel in the midst of the chief painting, Crivelli reverted to the medizval custom of introducing them as pygmies quite outside of the composition.
Alongside of these Byzantine traits are Paduan and Umbrian tendencies. In the sweetness which he sometimes imparts to his Madonnas, he reminds us of Gentile da Fabriano; he comes in contact with the mystics of the trecento when he distinguishes the Christ- child as a fisher of men by placing a hook in his hand. Even a Netherlandish trait is thought to be observed in his manner of grouping pots and candlesticks, plates and glasses, carpets and cushions, bottles and vases as still life. His severe types of children and careworn old women are quite Paduan, reminding us of Schiavone and Zoppo; as are also the heavy garlands hanging over
CARLO CRIVELLI
MADONNA WITH SAINTS
Berlin Gallery
Crivelli 205
the rich marble throne, and the large peaches and stiff
flowers scattered upon the ground. Quite Paduan is
the pathos which pervades his presentation of the
Pieta. Howling Megzras prostrate themselves over
the corpse, a half-decayed, mouldering body, the skin
of which hangs like leather from the ribs; great tear-
drops run down the cheeks of the angels, and a con-
vulsive pain distorts the figures and the features of
the Redeemer.
But it is precisely in such paintings, where he weeps pathetically, that his cruel coldness is the more evident. Although he has sounded the entire gamut of emotion, from howling pain to affected ecstasy, the effect of his art is cold as ice. Even though his saints distort their lips with morbid gracefulness or in grotesque pain and weep hot tears, his works retain the petrified jewel-like effect of the mosaic style. Rigidly as exhumed corpses the men stare at us; cold and clear is the glance of the women, with their steel-blue, faience- like eyes. The very pottery which he heaps about, and the ugly, pale, confused landscape, over which such a strange greenish light shines, strengthen the cold, corpse-like effect. Only in his refinement of colour, in the subtle manner in which he takes up an- cient notes and combines them to new chords, and in the tortuous daintiness with which his women stretch out their nervous hands and crook their spider-like fingers, can we recognise the artist of the quattrocento, for whom this archaic style is not natural, but an
206 The Religious Reaction
~ artificial one chosen with conscious epicureanism.
We can also understand why just Crivelli was called to effect this strange revival of the middle age. For he was an aristocratic gentleman, and when in 1490 King Ferdinand of Naples raised him to the dignity of knighthood, he seems to have regarded this dis- tinction as the most important event of his life. From now on he represented St. Sebastian as a_ knight, and always signs himself eques. If he lived to-day he would belong not to the Liberal but to the extreme Conservative party. The most reactionary of all aristocratic Venice he conceived the idea of again proclaiming, at least in the country, the gospel of the mighty, unshaken medizval church—in all those little towns like Massa, Ripatransone, Ascoli, Camerino, and Fermo, whither neither worldliness nor ecclesiastical struggles had penetrated. Considering also that his belief was not a sincere one and that the distinguished Crivelli, himself a sort of Des Esseintes, only regarded Byzantine art as a source of zsthetic pleasure, and the old ecclesiastical ideals as so much perfumed golden tinsel—the character of his painting is evident. It is an artificial and affected art, playing in a cold-blooded manner with all the emotions of the heart; uniting childishness with mouldy decay, archaic severity with putrid decadence. . This perversity also explains why our own time has made a favorite of Crivelli. As latter-day beings burdened with a long past, for whom the art of our predecessors signifies zsthetic nature,
Perugino » 207
we love Crivelli, because the blue blood of the ancient
and cultivated past flows through his veins; because,
as a conscious abstracter of the quintessence of things,
he chose the most dainty and the most precious in
the past to form his bizarre style. We admire, because,
in the midst of the world which had grown quite
different, he resurrected such cruel visions and such
fantastic apotheoses of a bygone time, and invoked in
such an amazing manner the splendour of the middle
age in its barbaric glory. We love him as we love
Gustave Moreau, because his dainty, aristocratic and
mannered style is the acme of refinement; and because
his art is unknown to the masses for the very reason
that it preserved these haughty and noble qualities.
VI. Perugino
An apparition like Crivelli was only possible in Byzantine Venice, whose aristocratic population had never loved a living art, but had preferred to collect only ancient and sparkling things, medals and cameos, mosaics, filigree work, and ivory. The following artist has the same relation to Crivelli as the Siennese, as Fiesole and Lochner, to the mosaic painters. As in Venice the ancient Byzantine style, so in Umbria the spirit of Francis of Assisi was revived anew. It is customary to deduce the mystic and dreamy traits of Umbrian art from the character of the country. While in a city like Florence a worldly and realistic art necessarily developed, only a lyric and elegiac art was
VOL. I.—I4
208 The Religious Reaction
possible in the isolated valleys of Umbria, where poor
people, silently trusting in God, lived a contemplative
life. But however convincing this may appear, styles
of painting can only result from the prevailing spiritual
factors of the epoch. At the same time that Umbria
possessed a mystic painter in Gentile da Fabriano,
Florence saw hers in Fiesole. At the same time that
the great investigators, Uccello, Castagno and Pol-
lajuolo, labored in Florence, Umbria produced the
greatest of all investigators, Piero della Francesca,
and later Melozzo and Signorelli. Among other
Umbrians Benedetto Bonfigli, Fiorenzo di Lorenzo,
and Niccol6 di Liberatore are still confirmed realists,
knowing nothing of that emotional blessedness and
sentimental ecstasy which came into Umbrian art
through Perugino.
The latter, however, received his inspiration not in Umbria but in Florence. “Think not that Mary at the death of her Son went screaming through the streets, tearing her hair and acting like one possessed. She followed her Son with meekness and great hu- mility. She shed tears, indeed, but externally she did not appear sad—rather at the same time sad and joyful. Thus also she stood under the cross, sad and joyful at the same time and quite lost in contemplation of the secret of the great goodness of God.” These words of Savaronola were a revelation to Perugino: a joyful sadness, smiles among tears, is the prevailing sentiment of all of his pictures. Umbria added only
Perugino 209
the delicate charm of its landscape; the melancholy
effect of a pale, delicate green, and the spare, quivering
trees of spring, shivering and longingly stretching
out their branches towards the sunlight.
In this dreamy melancholy Perugino is one of the most enchanting masters of the quattrocento. The reproach has been brought against him that his art was not in harmony with his character; that the painter of such mystic and supernatural work was a clear- headed and calculating business man, who repeated the joyful ecstasy of his saints in cold routine, merely to please the public. His one-sideness has also been dwelt upon; and it has been maintained that the con- ception of powerful and virile characters, as well as the lifelike representation of energetic action, was denied him; that instead of connecting his figures, he places them side by side, often so symmetrically that the left half of the painting corresponds with the right; and that, instead of differentiating them with reference to their character, he made all of them either boyish pages or meek and mild old men.
-Yet all of these peculiarities resulted as a logical consequence of the end he sought to attain. The contemplative and lyric character of his saints and the impression of sustained repose and archaic sublimity which he wished to create could only be attained by a composition which did not permit its quiet repose to be disturbed by hasty movement or changeful contrasts. For this reason he avoids variety in position; the
210 The Religious Reaction
figures either stand straddling or in affected daintiness
upon the toes. The symmetrical arrangement of his
paintings may also have been determined by the point
of view that this arrangement best expressed the
“divinity in the construction of nature’’—in accordance
with the saying of St. Augustine: “Where order exists,
there is beauty, and all order comes from God.” The
feminine proclivities of his art he has in common with
all mystics, the Siennese as well as the Cologne painters.
Women (and also girlish youths and weary old men)
are better suited to be bearers of the soft sentiment
which he alone interprets.
Perugino’s adoption of Savonarola’s idea of joyful sadness is perhaps a_ specifically Umbrian trait. Whereas in the works of Botticelli and Mantegna the sentiment, whether it be abrupt pathos or suffering despair, is that of a wild struggle, in the sweet, soulful figures of Perugino, smiling so sadly or dreaming so mournfully, the mild piety and childish peace of soul of Francis of Assisi still appears. Ina storm-convulsed time which usually played fortisstmo, he was the first to prescribe dolce, adagio,and mezza voce for his composi- tions, and to seek out the softer and finer emotions instead of great convulsions. It is just this absence of movement and discreet moderation, this delight in dreaming and this preference for tender and weary feel- ings, which make him so related to our own time. Al- though he lived more in Florence, the great city, than in little Perugia, his art resembles a quiet, secluded
Perugino 211
mountain tarn, reflecting the entire heaven in its
clear depths.
What the artist of the Medicean age saw in the antique, Perugino found in allegory. When Isabella d’ Este commissioned him to paint a picture for her study, he did not choose a heathen subject like Mantegna’s Parnassus, but depicted the Victory of Chastity over Love (now in the Louvre). In like manner the cycle of frescoes. painted in 1499-1500, for the court-room of the money-changers in Perugia, is characteristic of the change which had come over art since Savonarola’s appearance. Although upon the ceiling the deities of the firmament move to and fro, and Greek and Roman heroes are portrayed upon the walls, the theme is not antique, but rather a reversion, under the influence of the spirit of the time, to the allegoric subjects popular in the érecento. As in the Dominican paintings of the Spanish Chapel, Wisdom, Justice, Fortitude, and Temperance are personified by female figures to which those of men famed for these virtues are added by way of commentary.
All of his remaining paintings are dedicated to the Mother of God, and however different the themes the sentiment is always the same, a joyful sadness, smiles amidst tears. For the mild ecstasy of his figures he also found suitable soft colours, and was one of the first to discover the secret threads which bind the sentiment of the landscape with the human soul. With the Child upon her arm Mary usually sits dreaming,
212 The Religious Reaction
her eyes fixed upon a mysterious horizon; or she kneels
before the new-born infant, happy and yet sad, as if
her joy were subdued by the presentiment of a future
fate; or else a melancholy smile spreads over her features
when the music of heavenly harps sounds. A wonder-
ful effect is attained by the pious, refined, and yet
simple manner in which he depicts the Vision of St.
Bernard. \n a graceful hall of columns opening into
a view upon an Umbrian mountain landscape, the saint
sits at his desk gazing upon the incarnation of the
Blessed One who had just occupied his thoughts.
Inaudibly, with maidenly timidity she approaches
and then speaks to him, accompanied by two dove-eyed
angels. Bernard is not frightened, makes no motion,
and does not rise from his seat, but raises his hand as if
to welcome a long-expected visitor, and looks joyfully
upon the heavenly vision.
In another cycle of frescoes, painted in 1492-96 in the church of Santa Maria Maddalena dei Pazzi, Florence, he depicts the Crucifixion and the events following. The wall is separated by three arches, in the middle one of which stands, in the silent desolate landscape, the cross with the Saviour. He is portrayed as very youthful, without a beard, and disfigured by no traces of suffering. The Magdalen is praying, Mary looks reflectively before her, and no cry or gesture of pain disturbs the holy quiet; a weary peace has spread over the landscape. With equal repose, without any dramatic excitement, the Entombment is portrayed.
JIUALO] LT “WED lap DUaIVPPoO I “WW “S ‘O0I9SALT
NOIXIGIONYO FHL
ONIONAAd OULDId
Perugino 213
Instead of writhing bodies convulsed with pain, such
as Botticelli and Mantegna had painted, Perugino
only gives a sorrowful scene of parting, a silent wor-
ship of souls. Mary, whom Botticelli has represented
as sinking into unconsciousness, bends over the dead
man as if she wished to speak apart with him; the
other participants stand murmuring silent prayers and
lost in painful contemplation. As little as he here
knows wild pathos did he depict stormy joy in the
Ascension. With a tired inclination of the head, the
apostles, arranged in a straight line, look up to heaven,
where, borne by the heads of seraphs, the Risen One
hovers, while upon the cloudlets angels make music.
The delicately poised position, the childishly con-
ceived cloudlets, and the symmetrical arrangement—
all these things betray how consciously Perugino
imitates the archaic in order to attain an unreal,
trecento effect.
The note which he struck was so much in the spirit of the times, and his paintings in their bitter-sweet sentimentality had such a tormenting and fascinating effect, that others soon tuned their instruments to the same key. Francesco Francia in Bologna, choosing the same subjects, paints Madonnas, Holy Families, the Adoration of the Christ-child, and Holy Conversations. As with Perugino, Mary wears the matron’s veil over her head; like the Umbrian master he is more at home in painting women than men; only that he has a similar relation to Perugino that Lorenzo di Credi had to
214 The Religious Reaction
Botticelli. He is harsher, less temperamental and
more fleshly, and cannot rise to the sweet ecstasy and
divine languor of Perugino. As the figures themselves
are fuller, more healthful and powerful, so the colour
is more quiet and material, but less warm and fragrant.
The trembling melancholy of Perugino is replaced by
a woful meekness, his vibrating tervousness by
phlegmatic calm. Like Credi he was a quiet, lovable
man, who attracted numerous pupils to his atelier.
Timoteo Viti, Raphael’s first master, a charming
and delicate artist, whose works are characterised
by quiet joyfulness and a soft dreaminess, is especially
indebted to him. Lorenzo Costa, also, who at first
painted in the harsh manner of the Ferrarese, acquired
his later style, which was full of sentiment and grace-
fully artificial, from his association with Francia.
In his paintings meek men and modest women who
only know soft feelings and mild gestures lead an
esthetic life in the midst of dainty landscapes.
Rather hovering than walking, and with modestly
sunken head, they move about with a mannered grace
—quite a different race from the powerful and
angular mortals which he once painted from Tura’s
pictures. ;
- Quite otherwise the religious sentiment of Milan is
differentiated. Vincenzo Foppa, who is considered the founder of old Milanese art, can hardly be recognised as a pupil of Mantegna. Although he decorated a chapel in the church of Sant’ Eustorgio in accordance
Perugino . 215
with the principles of Mantegna’s ceiling-decoration,
the effect here, as well as in the Marytrdom of Sebastian,
is not one of Paduan severity but of Umbrian softness.
As regards Bernardo Zenale, the artist next following
him, nothing can at present be said, because the Madon-
na in the Brera formerly considered his principal work
was probably painted by Boltraffio. Although it is cer-
tainly a phrase to call Ambrogio Borgognone a North
Italian Fiesole, there is one point of resemblance.
Like Fiesole, Borgognone lived for a long time in a
convent, the Certosa of Pavia. This sentiment of
the cloister, a breath of peace like the sweep of angels’
wings, pervades his paintings. The heads are pale and
spiritual, and the colour in its veiled silvery-grey
harmonies had the effect of a song played in the high,
delicately touched notes of a violin. He appears like
a distinguished clergyman of quiet tastes who has
fled from the noise of the world to seek quiet con-
templation. Indeed, he does not impress one as an
Italian. Something of the sincerity of an old German,
I might almost say the sentiment of “forget-me-nots,”’
hovers over his modest, lovely works. Think for a
moment of the putti of the Italian artist, and then
look upon the little philistines in night dresses who in
Borgognone’s Crucifixion bewail the Saviour in an old-
fashioned, pathetic manner, as if they were repeating
school poems, or the two small lads in gold-embroidered
caps who appear beside Mary in the Berlin picture.
Compare the pictures of Christ by the Italians with
216 The Religious Reaction
the pale, consumptive man with the spare beard,
softly inclining to his mother in Borgognone’s picture
in San: Simpliciano. Even the Gothic character of
his composition is significant. It seems as if he had
wished to create the impression of an ancient glass
painting, the arrangement of which is never triangular,
but vertical and straight-lined in accordance with the
demands of Gothic architecture. This explains why
none of his figures make broad, ample movements,
and why the Christ-child sits so bolt upright in Mary’s
lap; why he always arranged his draperies in vertical
parallel folds; why of the flowers he especially loved
the slender lily; or why in his picture of the Crucifixion
the hair of Magdalen falls in such straight lines over
her shoulders. It also explains why the rich Renais-
sance ornament in his hands almost acquires the per-
pendicular and stiff forms of the empire. Of modern
artists, Burne-Jones especially has learned much from
Borgognone. The extended angels who in his Days
of Creation hold the celestial sphere with the hieratic
solemnity, are lineal descendants of those in Borgo-
gnone’s Coronation of the Virgin. Yo the German Naza-
renes, had they known him, his esthetic thoughtfulness
and pale dreaminess would have been sympathetic.
For the knightly princes of fable whom he so loved may
be found in the pictures of Steinle. The pale and
young deacon in the painting of Siro in the Certosa
is like Borgognone himself, the type of the art-loving
friar who lived in the fantasy of Wackenroder.
Giovanni Bellint 217
VIII.— Giovanni Bellini
At Venice Giovanni Bellini conducted art from the Byzantinism of Crivelli and the Paduan rigidity of Bartolommeo Vivarini into the paths of Lotticelli and Perugino. At first he had no individual style, but be- ing of a pliant nature he began by following his brother- in-law Mantegna in painting pictures like the Pzeta of the Brera, which inits harsh pathos and hard draw- ing might have been the work of a Paduan. After Antonello da Messina had come to Venice, Giovanni was the first, under the influence of this Sicilian Nether- lander, to adopt the technique of oil painting. Not until he had absorbed these different elements did he become Bellini. The great religious revival which, since the appearance of Savonarola, had convulsed Italy also helped him to find himself. His great altar-piece in the church of the Frari (1488), with the angel boys making music, and the mighty saints; that of San Pietro in Murano, in which the Doge Barbarigo kneels before the Christ-child; that of San Giobbe, where Mary as if astonished stares into the infinite; and that of 1505 in San Zaccaria, in which an expression of woe transfigures her serious features—these are the world-known pictures of which one always thinks when Bellini’s name is mentioned.
it is difficult to express in words the sentiment of these works. Writers on art formerly endeavoured to characterise Venetian painting by contrasting it with the Florentine. They maintained that, while the Flor-
218 The Religious Reaction
entines loved broad epic narration or dramatic action,
a lyric sentiment pervades Venetian painting; they
contrasted the plastic severity of the Florentines with
the power of Venetian colour to awaken sentiment,
and their representations of motherly love with the
solemn devotional subjects of the Venetians. But in
doing so they compared works of art of two quite
different epochs. At the time when Bellini created
his mature works, dreamers had succeeded the scho-
lars also on the bank of the Arno, and profane paint-
ings had been followed by devotional. In Flor-
ence, also, since the appearance of Goes’s altar-piece,
no longer form but colour stood in the foreground.
Here as there, artists painted Mary as the donna umile,
a maiden of the people unadorned and with the matron’s
veil drawn about her head, and the female saints
surrounding her aristocratically fine, pale, and richly
clad, their carefully dressed hair adorned with pearls.
Even the angels making music, cited as characteristics
of Venetian painting, are quite as frequent in the
works of Perugino and Raffaellino del Garbo. The
tender keynote, the musical and emotional elements, are
common to all works of the period. What distinguishes
Bellini from the rest is purely personal things, delicate
nuances, which are to be explained partly by the
character of the painter and partly by the surroundings
under which he laboured.
‘When the epicurean age of the Magnifico had passed away, Botticelli, a characteristic son of nervous
anua \ ‘pimapnoi9y
VNNOGVW FHL FaxXOdaA ONITGANYM OOINAAUVA ADO
Rey dee eed ed Ce de oO ed a
Nr
INIT1¢9@ INNVAOIO
Giovanni Bellint 219
Florence, in need of an abrupt contrast, threw
himself into the arms of the great Dominican. The
feeling with which he did this was similar to that which
in Paris, ten years ago, the Rosicrucians, also seized
by a profonde tristesse epicurienne, proclaimed their
spiritual gospel. Weary and no longer able to bear
the benumbing odour of Aphrodite’s roses, he ap-
proached with unsteady tread the throne upon which
Mary, crowned with cold white flowers, sits in silence.
Just because he had formerly sacrificed to heathen
gods, he now battled for the ideals of Christianity with
the zeal of the convert. He speaks in shrill and wail-
ing tones, and the lines in his paintings are hard
and austere; deathly pale hands are stretched forth.
It seemed as if Mary herself could not escape the
recollection of the Hill of Venus, as she glances fear-
fully, like a timid roe, convulsed by a trembling
longing for peace. :
Perugino, the true son of the Umbrian mountains,
passed his youth in high and lonely valleys among
a poverty-stricken population. The character of his
home is impressed upon his pictures. The landscape
which he paints is of a lyric charm; bare trees grow
upon delicate swelling ground, and there is something
unstable, timid, and imploring in this sickly vegetation.
His figures resemble the quivering trees which any gust
of wind could fell. He deprives them of everything
that smacks of the earth, disrobes them of everything
carnal; so that only a shadow, a soul quivering in
220 The Religious Reaction
delicate, intangible accords, remains. They are sensitive
to the finger-tips, spiritual to the point of sickliness,
suffering and filled with a mystic longing. For the
hill country of Umbria was also the land of mysticism
and of second sight, the land of forebodings and of
dreams. Here St. Francis dreamed that he had been
called to support the Lateran Basilica, and here he
saw Christ hovering above him in the figure of a winged
seraph. Here Catherine of Siena had her blessed
visions, and in every shepherd-maiden a Joan of Arc
. lived. Perugino’s Madonnas also resemble country
maidens, pious, dreamy children, who, attending to
the flocks and buried in mystic contemplation, sud-
denly hear the voice of their patron saint.
Giovanni Bellini had never visited the Hill of Venus; for the spirit of Hellenism had never penetrated his oriental corner of the earth. He had never experienced tragedy, but passed an entire life like a long, beautiful and stormless day. Furthermore, when he created his most beautiful pictures he was already an old man. To the little plush cap which he wears in his portrait one would like to add a dressing gown. Everywhere his pictures are lacking in the psychopathic, nervously excited and shattered elements which bring Botticelli so near to our own time. There we find psychic unrest, the cry of a human soul; here eternal peace, a great and simple harmony—the mild, transfigured repose of old age, which no longer knows impetuous action. As we love Botticelli because we find in him a reflex of every-
Giovanni Bellini 221
thing that is morbid, nervous and strained with us, we
look up to Bellini as to a noble patriarch who possessed
the great and secluded repose which is no longer ours.
He differs from Perugino in his solemn grandeur and
in the specifically ecclesiastical sentiment that pervades
his pictures: country air with Perugino, the perfume of
flowers with Botticelli, and incense with Bellini. While
the Umbrian’s Madonnas possess a bucolic element,
Bellini’s give the impression of entering into a wide
and lofty cathedral. All is quiet about, and the
sublime figures of his paintings live their serious and
lonely existence in solemn grandeur. This solemn,
ecclesiastical effect is not only produced by placing
the throne of Mary in the mighty apse of a church;
but the figures themselves exhale a sort of magic
breath of the divine, and appear themselves to
possess the sentiment which comes over one when,
with bared head, one passes from noise and daylight
into the consecrated dimness and deep silence of the
house of God. They neither speak nor make motion;
silent as if under the spell of the Holy of Holies, they
stand there just as we stand when, lost in dreams,
we gaze into the golden night of St. Mark’s, and let
ourselves be hypnotised by the eyes of the Byzantine
saints, solemnly staring down from the golden mosaics;
or as when sitting on the Lido we gaze upon the dreamy
mirror of the lagoons. .For Byzantinism and the
lagoons produce the same effect: a solemn Nirvana
stupefying the human spirit. This stupor of the
222 The Religious Reaction
spirit probably best expresses the sentiment of Bellini’s
paintings.
He never paints action, but only feeling; never motion, but only repose; and these feelings are so sup- pressed and have entered so little into the sphere of consciousness that his people seem stupefied by opium. His saints never have the languishing ecstasy or the sentimental upward glance of the eyes that Perugino loves; his Madonnas never feel that supernatural long- ing, that devoted sacrifice with which the Umbrians re- present her bending over the Child. With a calmness that is almost indifference Mary holds the Infant upon her arm, as the mother of God, whom the Byzantines painted; or else she is a woman of the people, sitting with her child at the door of the church—having no wants and dreaming, as if stupefied by the glare of the sun and the sultry heat of the noonday. Perugino’s Madonnas are shepherdesses, the sisters of Joan of Arc; but over Bellini’s hover soft drowsiness and in- different indolence—the melancholy, tired character of the oriental spirit. There the inward and ecstatic glance of the sibyl, here the uncertain weary glance of the eye gazing dreamily over the lagoons.
The landscape even heightens the dreamy repose of his pictures. For his early pictures, like Christ Crucified of the Museo Correr (Venice) or the Christ in London, do not give a true idea of his feeling for landscape. As in other respects, he was at that time a Paduan in landscape painting, and like Mantegna laid bare the
Giovanni Bellint 223
skeleton of the earth, taking pleasure in the plastic
execution of hard details. It was only gradually that
the Venetian element entered his pictures. No longer
with the eye of an investigator, but with that of a
dreamer he gazed upon nature as the traveller ploughing
quietly and noiselessly through the waves in a gondola.
No waggon or footfall disturbs him and he sees no de-
tails. Bathed in light, like phantoms of the fairy world,
palaces and blue mountain chains rise up only to dis-
appear. Bellini was the first to be caressed by the salt
air of the lagoons and to realise the dreamy atmosphere
which hovers over the coast of Venice. The mountains
are bathed in bluish undulating clouds; the valley
lies silently in the golden shimmer of the evening red,
and the twilight spreads over the silent hills. One is
reminded especially of Bécklin’s fairy picture in which
a slender nymph-like woman, encircled by a flowing
white robe and holding a great globe upon her knee,
reposes in a boat which, impelled by light winds,
is gliding silently away. I know as little what it
represents as the thousand others who stand dreamily
before it. It seems as if the artist had painted his own
life, which, unmoved by storm, also passed away as
quietly and silently as a beautiful autumn day. Now
that the evening has come, the water maiden takes
him by the hand, leads him to the boat, and conducts
him over the lagoons to the Island of the Blessed.
In the works of this honourable patriarch we have also described the subject-matter of the many others
VOL, I.—I5
224 The Religious Reaction
who laboured partly as contemporary, partly as his -
pupils in Venice. Mary, with or without a following
of saints, and occasionally another saint, who instead
of Mary forms the central figure, are almost the only
themes treated in the altar-pieces and the broad half-
length pictures. Next to the Madonna—and this is a
characteristic of the religious spirit of the age—St.
Jerome plays the principal part: an old man repent-
ant of his past and recognising that everything
earthly is vain.
A proud artistic spirit, mental sufferings, and buried hopes—such is the life history of Alvise Vivarini. As the last offshoot of the old artist family of Murano, he struggled for decades to hold the field beside Bellini. That gloomy and severely archaic art which Bartol- ommeo Vivarini had brought from Squarcione’s studio to Venice was revived in his hands. Plastic strength and an almost ascetic simplicity are the characteristics of his early works: he loves the black cowl of monks, old wrinkled faces, and furrowed hands. His picture of St. Clara especially—an old abbess holding the crozier with a firm grasp—is so full of the sentiment of the cloister that one thinks of Zurbaran. But from being an opponent he become an imitator of Giovanni Bellini. After he had battled in vain for the Muranese ideals, he now wished to show that he could also do all that was admired in his oppo- nent; gave to his figures the weary droop of the head and the melancholy expression of Bellini’s; and endeavoured
Giovanni Bellini 225
to be mild instead of harsh, tender instead of rough.
This endeavour to feel with the sensibility of another
became the tragedy of his life. At first sight one can
hardly distinguish his paintings from Bellini’s; the fea-
tures of the enthroned Madonna are the same, the angels
make similar music, and the mantle of Mary falls in
the same soft, curved lines. The female saints standing
about the throne seem the sisters of those who do
homage to the Virgin in Bellini’s paintings. Neverthe-
less, a responsive chord is not struck by the pictures;
one seems to feel that Alvise himself had the oppressed
feeling of a man of compromise, who no longer ex-
presses himself and could not equal his model. With
Bellini everything is veiled and dreamy, animated by
that great repose which flowed from the artist’s soul
into his works. Alvise, the awkward and struggling
talent, lacking confidence in himself, does not achieve
this effect. His colour remains hard and the sentiment
sullen. Grudgingly he finally withdrew to die almost
unnoticed.
Even Cima and Basaiti, his pupils, had in the meanwhile deserted to Bellini. The only novelty in their works is the element of landscape. Cima da Conegliano, who in his Pzefa in the Academy has a harsh Muranese effect, but later grew to be soft and lyric like Bellini, filled the narrow circle of his artistic activity with honest ability; he interprets contempla- tion and quiet solemnity in a simple and unpretentious manner, though less delicately than Bellini. He is
226 The Religious Reaction
independent in that he places the throne of Mary in
the open landscape instead of in the gloom of a church.
He was not a native of Venice but of the Alpine region,
and this love of the mountaineer for his home is expressed
in his paintings. He never misses a chance to represent
the splendid mountains and valley in which he passed:
his youth, delighting especially in the wonderful, cold
effects of autumn. A deep blue sky, harmonious in
tone and full of gleaming clouds, melts into the green,
brown, and blue colours in which the earth gleams.
Quiet melancholy and idyllic peace are the prevailing
sentiments in all his landscapes.
Basaiti experienced a similar development. In_ his early works, like the Pzeta in Munich, he endeavoured to surpass Mantegna in pathos; later he became mild and imitated Bellini in sentiment and colour, but without losing his individuality as a Jandscape painter. The coast of Illyria and Dalmatia whence he came is a bare and rugged country, sloping precipitously to the sea, whose wild ravines, narrow inlets, and steep cliff walls remind us of the fjords of Norway. The wild character of his home is reflected in the landscape background of Basaiti’s pictures. Bartolommeo Montagna of Vi- cenza, a great and serious artist, may also be classed with the group halfway between Mantegna and Bellini. »With the artists described below there is no longer a trace of Muranese influence; they stand from the beginning upon the ground prepared by Bellini. Scant justice has been done to Vittore
Giovanni Bellini 227
‘Carpaccio by the general opinion, based upon the sub-
jects of his paintings, that he was a pupil of Gentile
Bellini. Next to Gentile he is esteemed the greatest
epic painter of the school, as is evinced by his fresh
narrative talent in the use of rich buildings, girlish
heads, and trim figures of youth to compose gay and
festive novels. Indeed .Carpaccio’s best-known work,
the cycle of the Legend of St. Ursula, may be described
with the same words as Gentile’s paintings. The
spectator takes part in diplomatic audiences; sees
gondolas and richly pennoned ships riding the waves;
gazes upon half classic, half oriental monuments, and
before them, upon terraces and stairways, a festively
adorned multitude: proud senators, elegant youths,
beautiful women, musicians sounding fanfares, and
gay banners fluttering in the breeze. He has created
a fairy world of pompous palaces, picturesque cos-
tumes, and gleaming waves. But herein also lies the
difference between him and Gentile. ‘While the
latter painted architectural views with the dry eye of
the illustrator, Carpaccio is a poet, who interweaves
reality with the charm of a fairy story; leading us from
the earth to dreamland, where there are only heavenly
beings and pure feelings. He does not depict Venice,
but rather the “courts of love’’ of Provence and of
German legend, redolent with linden blossoms, peopled
- by slender princesses and enchanted king’s sons. His
pictures are fétes galantes, the scene of which is laid in
paradise. As in St. Ursula’s Dream in the Venetian
228 The Religious Reaction
Academy he has depicted the entire mysticism of
Christianity, so his Presentation in the Temple and his
Coronation of the Virgin are also of a delicate though
painful beauty. Even the two courtesans sitting,
in the picture of the Museo Correr, upon the balcony
of their house, have been made angels by Carpaccio:
street women with the soul of a Madonna. One
almost believes that he had descended in direct line
from that Johannes de Alemannia who had once come
from the home of Suso to Venice.
Of the remaining painters of this group, Andrea Previtali of Bergamo, who is probably the most nearly related in spirit to Giovanni Bellini, is sometimes surprising in the intimate, almost German character of his landscapes. The Martyrdom of St. Catherine, by Vincenzo Catena, is an achievement before which one lingers admiringly in the church of Santa Maria Mater Domini, not only because the landscape (a wide plain with the sea glimmering in the distance) is of such heavenly beauty, but because it so completely reflects the soul of this spiritual epoch. This maiden, about whose neck the millstone has already been bound, yet who makes no complaint and sheds no tears, bow- ing herself in silent humility to the will of God, is the incarnation of the triumph of soul over body.
In contrast to the above masters, revolving like little planets about the sun of Bellini, an independent position is maintained only by the few who might be termed Venetian Netherlanders. Venice had, since
AMemling 229
the beginning of its artistic development, been united
_by many bonds with the North. As Johannes de
Alemannia had carried the style of Stephan Lochner
to the Lagoons, so Antonello da Messina had in 1473
brought the technique of oil painting from the Nether-
lands. As the portraits of Giovanni Bellini sometimes
appear Netherlandish, so Marco Marziale’s name only
is Italian, and his style as Flemish as if he had been an
associate of Roger van der Weyden. Another bond
between north and south was furnished by Jacopo de’ Barbari, who painted the first purely still-life
subject in the history of art—the partridge in the
Augsburg Gallery—influenced Durer at Nuremberg,
and ended as a court painter in Brussels.
IX.— Memling
What Botticelli was for Florence, Perugino for Umbria, Borgognone for Milan, and Bellini for Venice, Hans Memling was for the Netherlands. In the quiet hospital of St. John at Bruges where he laboured, the battle-cry of the age of Savonarola became a soft and harmonious echo.
Even after the appearance of Goes, there had been mockers in the Netherlands. The short-lived Geertgen van St. Jans occupies a similar position in the North to that of Piero di Cosimo in Italy. He is said to have lived in the priory of St. John at Haarlem, from which, however, it does not follow that he had the character
230 The Religious Reaction
of amonk. In his paintings he appears as an exuberant
young man—cracking jokes over religion and sticking
out his tongue at the priests. Only once, when he
painted the Bewazling of the Body of Christ (Vienna),
did he succeed in remaining serious. In the cor-
responding picture from the legend of St. John, he
shows, by weaving quite burlesque elements into the
subject, how heartily he made merry over these sub-
jects of a distorted medizval view of life. The Em-
peror Julian the Apostate, commanding the bones of
John to be burnt, is the embodied king of the theatre;
the grotesque grave-diggers resemble Brueghel’s merry-
andrews, and the knights of St. John attending the
celebration look at the relics of their patron as if they
were asses’ bones. In the Amsterdam picture of the
Holy Family, he has painted in the foreground the
tenderest female heads, such as only a lover could
paint, and behind them stupid-looking children in
dressing gowns, and waddling, bow-legged choristers
lighting a chandelier. It reminds one of Crabbe or
Heine spoiling the sentiment of a poem by some
low or trivial remark. Behind the enthusiastic Faust
stands the mocking Mephistopheles.
When Hans Memling lived times had changed. The parody and skepticism—the spirit of the opéra bouffe—had long been followed by romantic longing, and Thomas a Kempis had awakened new religious en- thusiasm in the Netherlands.
A young and jolly comrade (so the legend relates),
Memling 231
after a joyful wanderer’s life, became a soldier, and
while fighting under Charles the Bold at Nancy was
severely wounded. Painfully he dragged himself to
Bruges to sink unconscious at the gate of the Hospital
of St. John, into which he was admitted and there hap-
pily cured. Out of gratitude and without price, he
painted for the hospital the pictures still to be seen
there. Having fallen in love with the Sister of Mercy
who had carefully tended him, like Tannhdauser, he
made a pilgrimage to Rome to find redemption, and
died as a monk in the Carthusian monastery of
Miraflores.
As in many other cases, science has destroyed this beautiful legend. We know to-day that Hans Memling was a native of Mommlingen near Mayence, became a pupil and associate of Roger van der Weyden, and later figures as a wealthy burgher at Bruges. What a pity! History gathers in her dead, and the legend makes them immortal. Memling’s pictures are more in accordance with his legendary character than with that of the owner of three houses at Bruges. No learned critic could characterise the essence of Memling’s work more beautifully than the legend has done. His art actually resembles a quiet cell in which a sick man who had once galloped through the meadows, a trim soldier upon a white charger, now lived, wounded and weary. “Imaginez un lieu privilégié, une sorte de retraite angélique idéalement silencieuse et fermée, ou les passions se taisent, ou les troubles cessent,
232 The Religious Reaction
oi l’on prie, ou l’on adore, ot tout se transfigure, ot
naissent des sentiments nouveaux, Ot. poussent comme
des lis des ingénuités, des douceurs, une mansuétude
surnaturelle, et vous aurez une idée de ]’ame unique
de Memlinc et du miracle qu’il opére en ses tableaux.”
With these words Fromentin in his Maitres d’autrejois
has described the charm of Memling’s art.
One cannot fully enjoy him in all his works. When he attempts to be strong, -pathetic, or powerful, his talent does not suffice. This is true of the Crucifixion at Litbeck, and also in part of his Last Judgment. At least he has not depicted the terrors of the dies ire with the power of his teacher Roger, but with the child- ishness of Lochner. St. Michael, modestly weighing the souls, looks like a disguised maiden; and the damned approach the pit of hell with souls just as pure as all the dainty nude virgins ascending in single file to the gate of heaven, on the left. He is only great in sub- jects of youthful beauty and tender love. As in the legend, so in his works he appears as a natural en- thusiast, who, because his earthly love has scorned him, chooses a heavenly bride, Mary, rich in mercies, whom he celebrates with the rapture of a troubadour. In- describable in their girlish freshness and chaste grace are the women in his Betrothal of St. Catherine; and touching is the devoted piety with which he relates the Legend of St. Ursula. In contrast to the wide spaces, ravishing beauty, and festal attire of Car- paccio’s treatment of the subject all is here childish
oO
e
4
=
QQ
=
n
a
<q
td
THE MADONNA
Gallery
Vienna
ide
Memling 233
simplicity, miniature daintiness, humility and peace.
Even in the Martyrdom of the Virgins there is neither
complaint nor fear of death. With folded hands and
meek devotion, they depart from life with that be-
lieving equanimity for which the terrors of death are
only the foreboding of heavenly joys.
Memling’s difference from his Netherlandish prede- cessors is equally apparent. While Jan van Eyck was enamoured of the splendour of the world, and Roger, the painter of pathos, depicted careworn matrons, Memling’s works are pervaded by a mild, lyric senti- ment, a breath of feminine blessedness: his fair angels with the long flowing hair, these slender figures of maidens and dreaming Maries. The traits are the ‘same which distinguished Bellini or Borgognone from older masters like Pisanello or Tura. The difference between Memling and these Italian contemporaries is less obvious. From an external point of view the Netherlander is easily recognisable; he has painted but a single picture, the Madonna of the Vienna Museum, which shows familiarity with Renaissance decoration, as is evinced by a round arcade opening to view and by the putt playing and holding a heavy garland hanging festively over the throne of Mary. Otherwise Gothic forms are the prevalent ones in his paintings. While the worldly-minded Jan van Eyck avoided this style, and reverted to the massive Romanesque figures, Memling, although he was familiar with the Renaissance, preferred the aspiring, ethereal Gothic, because it alone
234 The Religious Reaction
was in harmony with his slender, spiritual fives
Between Memling’s women and those of the Italians
there also exists that difference which Barrés sketched
in his Deux femmes du bourgeots de Bruges. ‘The Italian
type is Mary, Memling’s Martha; there the animated
woman, here the good Cinderella. There, the broad,
sultry lagoons, over the mirror-like surface of which
gondolas glide to the music of the mandolin; here the
narrow canals of Bruges, in whose cold water white
swans bathe their snowy plumage.
The rich Bruges which Jan van Eyck had known had already become a dead city when Memling painted it. The great house of the Medici had collapsed; the foreign merchants who had formerly traded there had gone elsewhere; the canals were deserted, and the palaces had fallen into decay. This poetry of solitude which, like the sentiment of the fable of the sleeping princess, pervaded Bruges, as it now pervades Rothenburg, hovers over Memling’s pictures. He also gazed with the eye of a romanticist upon those defiant city gates and mighty churches, the proud survivals of a great past which towered aloft in an impoverished present. Even upon him the wide streets, once the scenes of festal processions, but now so useless and devoid of people, had a melancholy effect.
But the memory of the Hospital of St. joint whitewashed walls, white beds, and Sisters of Mercy—is awakened by his paintings. Borgognone is a monk, the man in a cowl who, tired of life, fled to nature and
Memling 238
to her peace, and his pictures awaken the sentiment
that one feels in driving on a fine afternoon from
Florence to the Certosa. The pictures of Bellini have
the effect which one experiences in passing from the
sunlight of the Piazza into the incense-filled gloom of
St. Mark’s. Quite a different sentiment is awakened
by the traveller wanderlng through the uneven, moss-
grown streets of Bruges to the Hospital of St. John.
A little gate is opened and he is led into a courtyard,
where under ancient linden trees poor old men dream
upon the benches in contemplative idleness. Béguines
in black and red costumes and neat white caps come
and go. There is something sad and resigned about
these maidens, who live the lives of nuns, away from
their families, and are transformed into such staid and
serious beings by the life within these walls. Memling’s
pictures are pervaded by the sentiment of a hospital.
One examines them with the same feeling which fair
and sickly maidens arouse. It seems as if he had
observed nature with the eyes of a sick man, sitting
in his little room and looking through leaded = panes
into the joyful world. .
Why are the people who sat to him all so pale?
Why do they hold the rosary or a prayer-book, and
fold their hands so thankfully? Why does the world,
bathed in mild light, stretch out in such a solemn and
Sunday attire in the background, so green and spring-
like, as if the splendour of the first day of creation still
rested upon it? They seem to be people who for the
236 The Religious Reaction
first time step out of the oppressive air of the sick-room
into God’s own nature, just as the old men of the
Hospital of St. John realise, with thankful happiness,
that the dear sun again shines upon them. Observe all
the flowers and books which he loves to keep up in
his pictures of the Madonnas. Does he not treat Mary
like a sick child to whom one brings picture-books,
elder-blossoms, and lilies? How touching are these
flower-pots, looking as if they had been tended by a
sick child, which Memling loves to place at the feet
of Mary. The picture-books of which his pale maidens
so abstractedly turn the leaves have the sentiment of a
sick-room; as do also the windows so tightly locked that
no cool draught may enter, and the enchanted bit of
the world seen through the tiny window-panes. Nature
is not thus enjoyed by one who has her always before
him, but appears only to a sick man standing at the
window so touching, so holy in her beauty. He sees the
rider upon his white horse approaching along the lone-
some road; he observes the reapers mowing in the
cornfield; the waggon driver asking a passer-by for the
road; and he rejoices in the swans paddling over there
in the pond, and in the sheep reposing upon the sunny
green meadow. A thatched hut standing lonely in a
field, an old mill or a decayed wooden bridge stretching
across gleaming water, is sufficient to fill him with
thoughts and emotions. His maidens themselves have
the beauty of a sick-bed; that fine and spiritual appear-
ance which the atmosphere of a room gives to people.
Memling 237
Their features are mild and resigned, their movements
powerless and silent; and in touching coquetry they
have donned their most costly garments and bedecked
themselves with pearl diadems and with rings. Such
thoughts, which others had long ago read in Memling’s
pictures, gave origin to the legend of the wounded
soldier who lived as a sick man in the Hospital of
St. John.
The same charm of lovable silence, the same bashful- ness which anxiously avoids everything brutal, per- vades the Madonnas of Gerard David, who appears in all respects a continuator of Memling. He also loves women with high brows and bashful downcast eyes. and knows how to make the expression of thoughtfulness, of sublimity speak from these eyes. An altar-piece painted in 1509 for the church of the Carmelite nuns in Bruges, which afterwards found its way to Rouen, is considered his masterpiece. His adoption in other paintings of the theme of the Madonna in a bower of roses, which had been so popular in the Cologne school, likewise shows how nearly related he was to Memling and Lochner. Mary and the other saints have that purity and dreamy thoughtfulness which enchants us in Memling’s paintings; they sit motionless there as if rooted to the spot by the overflow of psychic experiences; they have experienced the holiest, but their lips are silent, as if they feared through loud words to disturb the solemn repose. A certain mel- ancholy foreboding and silent reticence hover over
238 The Religious Reaction
them, giving to David's pictures also a touch of tender,
delicate reserve. Only in later works (he lived until
1523) did his style change, in accordance with the
changed sentiment of the time.
X.— Leonardo
The result of our studies has shown that Savonarola is in no wise to be considered as the grave-digger of art, but that the quattrocento owes to the religious movement which emanated from him the most refined and subtle works of art which it produced. It is true that through him the gods of Greece were ex- pelled from Italy, and that it was now all over with those narratives from the Old Testament and the legends of the saints which had served the realists as a pretext to depict the pomp and splendour of their time. In place of this, under the influence of increased emotional life, a new note came _ into religious painting. By reminding the artists that the highest aim of Christian art was to represent not the external but the inner world, the beauty not of the body but of the soul, he revealed to them the entire domain of the soul-life. In agitating against the worldly excesses of art he contributed to transform the realist’s love of nature to a higher, more significant beauty.
While the chief aim of the primitives had been portraiture, the masters of the age of Savonarola
Leonardo 239
created men who were indeed true to nature, yet an-
imated by the breath of a higher life, and removed
from everything earthly by the intensity of their
emotions. A subjective idea of beauty took the place
of the objective portrayal of nature. Whether the
heads were more melancholy, as in the case of Bellini,
more sentimental as with Perugino, or childishly good
as in Memling’s paintings—the command of form is
entirely subsidiary to the expression of the soul’s
emotion: The most intangible spiritual conditions
were painted; such as the self-sacrificing melancholy
of Mary, the prophetic inspiration of John, the agonising
repentance of Jerome, the inspired faith of Ursula, the
mystic fervour of Francis, the chaste devotion of
Catherine, and the blessed ecstasy of the angels.
After the conquest of nature accomplished by the
realists the awakening of the soul followed.
This awakening also changed the character of portraiture. The painters following Pisanello and Jan van Eyck had with an acute realism painted merely the epidermis—the exterior of man, as he sat immobile in presence of the artist; but in the portraits of Mem- ling, Bellini, and Botticelli, the corporeal is no longer the highest aim. A breath of sadness or of ia thoughtfulness begins to animate the rigid heads. The emotional character or the fate of the subject is
‘indicated by means of mysterious inscriptions or attributes, making the portrait a human document, a confession of the artist’s soul or a reflection of his mood.
VOL. I1.—16
240 The Religions Reaction
Corresponding with this physical effect in portraiture,
a similar element appears in landscape. Although the
realists had painted landscape backgrounds, the con-
sciousness that it was in the power of an artist to
reflect the sentiment of the action in the landscape
had not yet been awakened. The two elements had
been disconnectedly portrayed, the Entombment of
Christ, for example, being depicted in the midst of a
laughing spring landscape. The ucceeding painters,
however, as they had discovered the soul of man,
discovered also the soul of nature. In accordance with
the sentiment of the principal action the earth is
pervaded by a joyful peace or by a silent woe. Man
and nature are attuned to the same great chord.
Greatly to the advantage of these new psychic elements, for which flowers and music were also very important, the views of colour were also affected by the revolution. In their pronounced realism the primi- tives had given to each object its own bright and full colours; and after Piero della Francesca had discovered atmospheric effects, artists devoted their entire ability to mastering the most difficult problems of painting, the depicting of light and air. The masters of the epoch of Savonarola, less analysts than dreamers, went a step further. The objective presentation of a natural impression was no longer the final aim of Bellini and his associates; they attempted rather to make colour a means of expressing sentiment, thus discovering the intrinsic property of colour to awaken
Leonardo 241
effects akin to those caused by music. The outlines
are softened, a tender twilight veils the objects. The
period of chiaroscuro thus begins.
On the other hand, equally serious formal tendencies went parallel with these psychological and colouristic achievements. After Savonarola had forbidden the use of contemporary fashions, the ideal costume had regained its former importance, and the question of its artistic treatment arose. The study of draperies, which Mantegna had already emphasised, now became an important branch of art. The same religious fervour led to the exclusion of all anecdotic and other details. At a time when the love of nature rather than the religious significance of the theme stood in the foreground, artists recognised no bounds in adding the most incongruous objects. Different episodes, past, present, and future, were represented in a single picture; and all kinds of accessory figures, having nothing to do with the action, were grouped about the principal event as disinterested spectators. The masters of Savonarola’s time, in order to obtain a uniform impression of the whole, did away with all these accessories. A vowerful simplicity took the place of disintegration.. For this reason even the form of the altar-pieces was changed. Formerly composed of a central picture, wings, predelle, and lunettes, they were now confined to a single panel. and every figure was excluded which had no part in the principal action. The presentation now resembles a lyric poem or a uniform drama rather than a scattering
242 The Religious Reaction
epic. A psychic keynote pervades the whole and
assigns to each figure its corresponding réle. These
changes furthermore led to new problems of composition
which must be equally definite with the sentiment
expressed. While formerly the figures had been ar-
ranged as a frieze, the question now was to concentrate
them, giving a base and an apex to the picture, and to
express the dramatic unity of the event by a corre-
sponding arrangement. Thus the aim of composition
became that concinnitas which Alberti declared as the
ideal of beauty: a complete harmony of the different
parts, so that nothing could be added or taken away
without injuring the whole. The loose presentation of
the earlier painters was replaced by a style involving
a rigid arrangement; rhythmic simplicity and soft |
curved lines prevail.
Adding together all the attainments of the epoch, it becomes possible—at least in part—to conceive of the mighty figure of Leonardo da Vinci, seemingly far removed from the earth, in his proper relation to the age in which he lived; and to understand how he as a psychologist, as a master of light and shade and as the founder of the laws of composition, grew out of the age of Savonarola. He attempted and achieved the solution of all problems proposed by the age.
To begin with, he made the psychological problem proposed by Savonarola an object of scientific research; the chapter in his Treatise on Painting which relates to it, as well as many anecdotes of his life, show how
DLeonardo 243
much he was occupied with the study of expression.!
In order to study sudden outbursts of feeling, he in-
vited peasants to visit him, related adventurous
anecdotes, and suddenly frightened them; he escorted
criminals to the place of execution in order to see the
terror of death reflected in their faces. In the so-called
caricatures his aim is to exaggerate the peculiarities
of the human countenance to the utmost extent of
organic possibility but at the same time to portray
with harsh directness all shades of expression. In
like manner the heads which recur in his drawings
are psychological studies. His ideal is not physical
strength or voluptuous beauty, but the physical one of
delicacy, softness, and dreaminess. He is continually
searching for new nuances of quivering love, maternal
joy, and childish delight. The freshness of youth is
subdued to a soft melancholy, and the dignity of old
age is transfigured by philosophical resignation. A
commentary upon the heads which he painted are the
hands. Even his master Verrocchio had heightened the
charm of his youthful figures by the dainty pose of
slender fingers. Leonardo, going further, uses the
hands as a psychological commentary, assigning, to
them dramatic participation in the action.
Besides the psychological problem, he was occupied
1 The best edition of Leonardo’s Trattato della pittura is in J. P. Richter’s edition of his works (2 vols., London, 1883), which also contains an English translation. Others are by Ludwig in the Quellen-
schriften fur Kunstgeschichte (Vienna, 1882), with German trans-
lation, and by Tabarrini (Rome, 1890).—Ep.
244 The Religions Reaction
with that of colour. It is interesting to note that he
was a distinguished musician. It is related by Vasari
that even in his youth he had occupied himself with
music, and learned to play the lyre; that he was called
to Milan only because the duke found great pleasure in
his lute-playing, and that upon this occasion he took
with him an instrument, invented by himself, which
softened the sound, making it somelting and euphonious
that he surpassed all the musicians of Milan. As all
painters who were also musicians—Giorgione as well
as Gainsborough and Corot—loved soft and melting
colours, it is no accident that singing and musical
Venice witnessed the first triumphs of colour, and that
the musician Leonardo was the founder of the real
pictorial style.
But as he was a mathematician as well as a musician, he solved as many formal as pictorial problems. In his Treatise on Painting he dedicated an especial chapter to draperies, advising that they should be studied from clay figures draped with cloths soaked in plaster of Paris; and he attained in his compositions all that his predecessors Perugino, Mantegna, and Bellini had endeavoured to accomplish singly. His sepulchral inscription states that the ‘‘eurhythmy” of the an-- cients had been his chief aim. In such a versatility he stands out like a great gleaming sun at the boundary of two centuries. He rendered it possible to unite caressing charm of form with quivering emotion, and the formal beauty of the sculptures of the Parthenon
Deonardo 245
with deep spirituality; he founded the pictorial style,
and at the same time established new laws for linear
composition—enough problems to occupy a whole
generation of painters.
The few pictures which he painted when no more important questions occupied his mind, and which he did not usually finish, but cast aside as soon as he was himself satisfied with the solution of the problem, were in reality only illustrations for his Treatise on Painting; stray bits from the gigantic treasure-house of his soul. In the angels’ heads of Verrocchio’s Baptism of Christ, the keynote of Leonardo’s art is given. For the first time we behold the dreamy, melancholy eyes, the soft curly locks, and the quiet enigmatic smile,twith which Leonardo’s name is usually associated. In the female portrait of the Liechtenstein Gallery (Vienna)! he is occupied with the problem of the demonic woman. In the presence of this pale face with its cruel almond eyes, one thinks of a mur- deress, of Lady Macbeth. These psychological char- acteristics are supplemented by the landscape; for it is no accident that behind this head, with its exotic, almost Chinese effect, an Asiatic plant, the bam- boo shrub, arises. In the Resurrection at Berlin the
1 This painting is more commonly (as, for example, by Berenson) and
with greater probability ascribed to Verrocchio. The consensus of
nearly all expert opinion is against attributing the Resurrection to
Leonardo; and, as the author himself observes in his remarks upon
Boltraffio, it should perhaps be ascribed to this master. (Below, p.
332.)—Eb.
246 The Religious Reaction
psychological elements are united with a new achieve-
ment in composition. While earlier art depicted three
guards about the sarcophagus of Jesus, Leonardo
represents two youthful saints on bended knee in
ecstatic adoration. The young deacon, bowing softly
forward, raises his hands in fervent worship, while
Lucy, with hands folded upon her breast, is quite lost in
blessed ecstasy. The composition is so arranged that
the figures form an equilateral triangle, and the
Baroque Christ is an interesting parallel with these
works of Filippino which also form a strong connecting
link between the Dominican art of the fourteenth and
the Jesuit art of the seventeenth centuries.
The Last Supper, in the former convent of Santa Maria delle Grazie, Milan, is a psychological drama. Earlier artists had depicted the disciples either sitting quietly at table or receiving the Host from the Saviour, without uniting them by any common thought or action. In order to bring unity into the action and to attain a motive which should vibrate like an electric shock through the whole representation, Leonardo adopts the words of Jesus, “Verily, I say unto you that one of you shall betray me,”’ as a starting-point and shows how each individual disciple was affected by these words. Timidity, silent melancholy, sadness, horror, rising anger, listening, questioning, terror, indignation, curiosity, and pain are reflected in the heads and hands of the apostles in ever-renewed excitement. For. Leonardo does not confine himself to facial expression,
uUvIL IT ‘O12 DAL) 2119p DIAD TAT DIUDS
YaddnNs LSVTI AHL
QONIA Yd OGUVYNOGT
BLeonardo — 247
‘but makes the hands also assist in giving the highest
animation to the dramatic scene. But this is not
_ because it lies in the nature of the southerner to “speak with his hands,’’ as Goethe observed; for all Italian
painters before Ghirlandajo made little use of gesture
and seated their figures in the same repose as did the
northern masters. If Leonardo makes them ges-
ticulate, if one, as Goethe says, can read from the
hands the words that each individual speaks, this is
to be attributed not to the Italian national character,
but rather to the circumstance that every epoch
emphasises a particular artistic problem, and at that
time mimicry and the language of gesture had become
the most important field of study. \His drawings also
reveal how gradually the composition took shape
in Leonardo’s mind; how with increasing facility
he succeeded in arranging all the single figures within
the architectural composition; in creating and dis-
solving contrasts, in changing motions of the lines
lingering and again hurrying forward; and finally in
‘harmonising all by means of an unexampled rhythm. As a pictorial achievement—in the manner in which
the figures softly dissolved in space and the light
streamed through the window into the half-darkehed
hall—the Last Supper must have been a revelation,
although at the present time this can no longer be seen,
but only felt. The Madonna of the Grotto, on the other hand, still
There is much dispute as to the location of the original of this
248 The Religions Reaction
gives an idea of Leonardo’s treatment of colour.
In this painting all the aims of the master sound
together in rich accord. Again we see those beautiful
faces, gazing in such blessed happiness: the Madonna
bending dreamily over the Child, and the guardian
angel as far removed from this earth as if he were
listening to the soft, distant notes of a violin. It may
be seen how Leonardo first arranged the whole in the
strictly geometrical form of an equilateral triangle,
and then immediately disintegrated this pyramid of
lines by his treatment of the light; which, falling from
the upper left-hand side of the painting, quivers like
a soft chord through the enchanted twilight of the
grotto, revealing one object in plastic relief, another in
veiled picturesque haze. All sharp lines are dissolved
and each detail vanishes with soft delicacy into the
other.
Of his later Florentine paintings the Madonna tn the Lap of St. Anne! is perhaps the one in which he carries his principles of composition the furthest. In order to bring the figures into the form of a pyramid he places Mary in the lap of St. Anne, bending over towards
painting. Although some careful critics believe that the examples in the Louvre and the National Gallery (London) are both by the hand of Leonardo, the preponderance of expert opinion (Morelli, Müntz, — Müller-Walde, Richter, Berenson) attributes only the former to him.
Professor Muther regards the London picture as a copy by Ambrogio de Predis. (Below, p. 333).—Ep.
1 The oil painting after this celebrated cartoon, executed in part by Leonardo, is in the Louvre; the cartoon in the Royal Academy (Lon- don) being a variation by him on the same theme.—Eb.
Leonardo 249
the Christ-child, who forms the basis of a pyramid on
' the other side. With this he has joined a new problem
of light. While in the Madonna of the Grotto a gloomy
dolomite landscape is used to dissolve the pale faces
and hands in the mild gleam of a delicate chiaroscuro,
in this picture the heads rise airily and softly in a bright
and quivering atmosphere.
The smoke of powder and dust probably formed the atmosphere of the Battle of Anghiari. The drawings after this lost mural painting only show the psy- chological and compositional problems which he attempted. The same master to whom the highest beauty seen by an artist since the days of Phidias had been revealed, is here the painter of raving madness and snorting rage. A hoarse, roaring sound is heard; men hack and thrust, horses rear, neigh, and bury their teeth in each other, in a Gordian knot impossible to disentangle. But, however impetuously everything is commingled, the great master of composition holds the masses firmly in hand. The crossed forelegs of the prancing horses form the apex of a triangle, within which all the other figures find a proper place.
Even more complicated in arrangement, and almost Baroque in feeling, is the Adoration of the Kings. All former painters, placing Mary at one side of the picture, had represented the kings as approaching
! This picture, in an unfinished state, survives in the Uffizi; and
the world-famed Mona Lisa, mentioned below, is the pride of the
Louvre.—Ep.
250 The Religious Reaction
- with stately tread from the other side. In Leonardo’s
paintings all is commotion. With great curiosity
the people press forward, gazing, inquiring, wondering,
adoring, and guiding others to the scene; hands are
raised and heads stretched forward. At the same time
he has changed the relief-like composition in profile
which was formerly customary into the direct opposite.
Mary again forms the apex of the pyramid, the base of
which is indicated by the adoring kings. All about are
contrasts dissolving into harmonies, and a waving mo-
tion proceeding from Mary and streaming back towards
her.
Mona Lisa, whose portrait occupied him at the same time, is as little beautiful as the Vienna portrait. She is uncanny with her missing eyebrows and the witch-like shimmer of her unfathomable eyes, deep as the sea; which seem to glance now passionately, then ironically, then false and catlike; soon they blink at us, then stare cold and dead into the infinite— soulless as the sea which yesterday swallowed men and to-day lies there seductively beautiful, mocking at the misdeed which it has committed. As he has in the Vienna portrait represented the perverse charm of a murderess he has here depicted the Sphinx’s riddle of woman’s nature. Vasari further relates that Leonardo while painting this portrait had singers and musicians present, that the young woman might enjoy their music and thus avoid the rigid appearance of most portraits. This also explains why the picture at that
Leonardo 251
time affected artists like a new gospel. However
softly and tenderly Botticelli’s maidens dream, they
are not free from a certain expression of metallic
rigidity; seeming more like costly artistic jewels than
living and breathing people. But in this portrait, at
one stroke, the fulness of life and the charm of mo-
mentary expression had been attained. Painters
marvelled how softly and mistily the figure arose from
the background; they admired the nose which seemed
to vibrate, the eye which seemed to blink, and the
mouth which appeared to smile, and the bust seeming
to breathe. The pale, nervous, and quivering hands
form a commentary to the head, and at the same time
serve the purpose of composition. By resting them
firmly upon the waist, Leonardo has achieved the
simple outlines of a triangle, the apex of which is
_the head, while the basic angles are indicated by the
elbows. The landscape of the background echoes the
mysterious mood of the entire painting. For although
Piero della Francesca and Piero di Cosimo, improving
upon the “medallion”’ style of early Italian portraits,
had placed the figures in realistic landscape, it was
reserved for Leonardo to make the landscape a psy-
chical commentary on the figure. For this fantastic,
blue-black world, sultry and gloomy, encircling the
pale woman, 1s as mysterious and unfathomable as the
being wandering through these meadows.
It might be said that Leonardo had in this picture painted himself and his own unfathomable Faust-like
oreo. The Religions Reaction
nature. As the sphinx Mona Lisa stands there in
inpenetrable silence, so there is something sphinx-like,
demonic, and unapproachable in the nature of this
man, who, an illegitimate son and a childless man,
wandered lonely through life like a wonderful magician;
great as an investigator, and even greater as the seducer
who poured the sweet poison of sensuality into Italian
art; and who, after centuries, hurls at every one ap-
proaching him with a critical probe the crushing words
of the Earth Spirit:
‘* Du gleichst dem Geist, den du begreifst,
Nicht mir.”
LEONARDO DA VINCI
MONA LISA
Louvre
Chapter III.— Germanic Painting during the Age of the Reformation
I.—. The Beginnings of the Italian Influence
IN the same year that Leonardo da Vinci closed his eyes in the castle of Amboise, Michel Wohlgemuth died at Nuremberg. These names are typical of two different worlds: of the Renaissance and the middle age, of free artistic activity and the craftsman’s handiwork.
It has often been regretted that beginning with the sixteenth century German artists travelled south- wards and, like the emperors of the middle age, forgot their home for Italy. But they also forgot for a time in Italy the stifling air and the trivial caste system of the North. From philistine narrowness they had come into a land of freedom, into a happy en- chanted world; and from being sycophants, they had become lords. “Here the arts freeze,” wrote Erasmus in the safe-conduct which he gave Holbein, and Durer “froze for lack of the sun”’ after his return from Venice.
253
254 Germanic Painting
The dream of his life was ended, and the cage of
philistinism again received him.
It is touching to read the biographies of German artists of the fifteenth century. While the Italian masters wandered upon the heights of life, as the “singer walks with the king,” was a poor devil of the same guild with saddlers, glaziers, and bookbinders. First, he had to serve long years as an apprentice with the master; and then he entered into the trade by espousing the daughter or widow of a painter. There was no magnificent court, no aristocracy of distinguished connoisseurs. The patronage of art was in the hands of good burghers, who donated an altar-piece in order to buy their way into heaven. The panels, together with the necessary wood carving, were completed as well as might be in the workshop with the assistance of journeymen; and if upon the delivery they were pronounced well done, the wife of the painter received a pourbotre.
It is therefore hardly proper to speak of a style of German art during the fifteenth century. The problem was only to narrate a theme as clearly as possible and to impart strict religious instruction. This was done by the painters with rustic coarseness. It is not necessary to assume that they acquired their knowledge from Roger van der Weyden; rather, from the same requirements a similar style resulted. The problem was to be popular, drastic, and plastic; for which reason they applied the colours as thick as possible; screaming
the German painter
The Italian Mnfluence 255
instead of speaking, and exaggerating nature to the
point of caricature in order to be understood by even
the most stupid. The features are contorted; heavy
tears and drops of blood flow, and sprawling arms
are stretched out; the participants strike, thrust,
stamp, and spit in the midst of blood-curdling scenes
of martyrdom; and, as in the passion-plays, farces
are introduced in order to please the sense of humour.
If they cannot be impassioned the artists are at least
soberly honest. There is no silent thoughtfulness, no
ethereal grace; but everything is substantial, straight-
forward, and of an honest, home-made morality. —
It is a characteristic fact that Martin Schongauer, the chief master of Colmar, is better known from his line engravings than from his paintings. Not having the opportunity of expressing himself as a painter, he adopted the engraver’s art. His Madonna at Colmar is harsh, severe, and of rugged power, but the smaller pictures of Mary at Munich and Vienna are modest and trusting. His best work, however, is his drawings.
Wood engraving assumed a similar importance for the Nuremberg artists, who illustrating for the early printers discovered a field in which they could move more freely. In their altar-pieces they laboured as burghers, substantially and honestly. Until 1472, the largest atelier was that of Hans Pleydenwurff, to whom modern investigation has attributed a Crucifixion and a Marriage of Catherine in Munich, a Crucifixion
VOL. 1.—17
256 Germanic Painting
in the Germanic Museum at Nuremberg, a Deposition
in Paris, and an altar-piece in Breslau. Then Wilhelm,
his son, whose principal work is said to be the Perings-
dorff altar of 1488, set up in business. By marrying the
widow of the elder Pleydenwurff, Michel Wohlgemuth
acquired his business also. In him the Germans of the
quattrocento possessed the painter whom they deserved.
The number of his works is enormous; there are
examples at Munich, Nuremberg, Schwabach, Heils-
bronn, Zwickau, and many other places. But whoever
is familiar with Durer’s portrait of his teacher—the
head with the hawk’s nose and cold, steely glance—
knows also Wohlgemuth’s paintings. With a healthy
realism, more of a manufacturer than an artist, he
approaches nature rigidly and crudely, and has a
substantial manner of placing green beside red, and
red beside yellow. Such an art was sufficient for the
best spirit of his day.
Nordlingen, Ulm, Memmingen and Augsburg should also be mentioned as seats of German artistic activity. In Nordlingen, Friedrich Herlin of Rothenburg, who had sought enlightenment in the studio of Roger van der Weyden, was much admired for his technical dexterity. Bartholomaus Zeitblom of Ulm is the type of the Suabian pastor, speaking slowly and thoughtfully, and carefully weighing every word. If he wishes to be fiery he becomes unctuous and his lyric poetry becomes dry common sense. With Bernhard Strigel of Memmingen this clumsy repose is transformed into
HANS HOLBEIN THE ELDER
MARTYRDOM OF ST. SEBASTIAN Munich Gallery
The ftalfan Tnfluence 257
Baroque exaggeration. The gestures are sprawling,
the draperies puffy, and in his altar-pieces the same
ruffled intricacies prevail as in the architecture of the
expiring Gothic style.
Hans Holbein the elder, of Augsburg, is the se real artist among these painters. He is accomplished and versatile, full of soul and nerves; and because he was an artist, his fatherland let him starve. His youthful works, the little Madonnas in the Germanic Museum, go back to the days of ancient idealism, to the art of Lochner, being of a soft and ecstatic beauty. Then he became the most extreme leader of the new naturalistic tendencies. Especially char- acteristic for this phase of his style are the passion- scenes of altars at Kaisheim and Donaueschingen. The most dangerous rascals of the road are his models, and his gallery of beauty is composed of convicts, harlequins and whimsical inmates of hospitals. Finally the clarification comes. In the picture of Si. Paul’s Basilica in the Gallery of Augsburg, the man of storm and stress, who had only considered the hideous beautiful and the crazy as true, has become a serious man, who paints life with quiet objectivity. All the figures are modest portraits, among which the group representing the master himself with Ambrosius and Hans, his sons, is especially celebrated. With increasing age, his taste became purer and simple beauty his chief aim; his activity closed with a really classical work, the altar-piece of St. Sebastian in Munich.
258 Germanic Painting
The Renaissance decoration and the gleaming golden
colour betray the cause of this last change of style—
Italy.
Not until they became acquainted with Italy did the quest. of northern artists find a certain goal; and only through contact with the South did they realise that art means more than a substantial copy of nature. If during the fifteenth century the Nether- landers and even the Germans had exercised a fructify- ing influence upon Italy, this country now returned with interest what it owed to Johannes de Alemannia, Roger, and Goes. Thither the young artists made pilgrimages in order to refine their tastes; there they acquired that theoretical knowledge which the older painters had lacked, and became conscious of the dignity of their calling.
They did not indeed relinquish the things in which they had delighted during the epoch in which van Eyck dominated northern art. After engravers of the fifteenth century, Schongauer and the master who signs himself E. S., had begun to represent scenes from everyday life, such themes were now made subjects of pictures. After van Eyck had carefully painted every bud and leaf, and Goes and Memling had followed with real landscapes as backgrounds, the study of landscape painting as an independent branch was now begun. In addition to this, painting mastered a third domain: the fantastic. As long as the spirit of realism prevailed, artists had painted only what they saw, looking with suspicious eye upon anything beyond this. But when, in consequence of the ecclesiastical reaction, metaphysical tendencies followed the realistic, the fantastic element at once appeared. It was developed to an even greater extent in the North than in Italy, because the fantastic is a more important element in the northern than in the Italian character. The art of engraving, which, with greater facility than the brush, follows the spirit into the world of fable, became of determinative importance. After Schongauer in his Temptation of St. Antony had first modestly entered the territory the artists who followed him took possession of the entire legendary domain.
Serious efforts to attain the mastery of form, on the other hand, went parallel with these “intimate” and fantastic endeavours, and the labour of investigation, which had been solved a generation earlier in Italy, began also in the North. By eliminating the episodic from the works of former painters and concentrating themselves, like the Italians, upon the execution of life-sized human figures, the northern artists attained a characteristic simplicity unknown to the fifteenth century. The study of the nude, heretofore little attempted, was raised to the rank of an artistic problem. Instead of harshness a uniform harmony of colour was adopted, and instead of a broad juxtaposition of detail, a well arranged scheme of composition. The crumpled fashionable costume of the day yields to a simple
ideal drapery. Instead of being guided by accident, they laboured in accordance with fixed, theoretically- established norms.
II.— The Netherlands
Quentin Massys, the “smith of Antwerp,”’ introduced the reform into the Netherlands. According to the legend he only became a painter because his sweetheart would not marry a smith; and although this sounds quite improbable, in the story, as in all legends, there lies a certain logical justification. When people used to the highly detailed brushwork of the old masters saw his mighty and broad technique, they necessarily sought for an explanation of this change in style, and found it in the supposition that the creator of these works had originally been a smith; a man with heavy fists and of great swinging movements, who introduced something of the vigour of his former trade into this new profession.
Standing before his Burial of Christ in the Antwerp Museum, one feels that even to-day, with this work, a new epoch in the art of the Netherlands begins. Form, composition, and colour—everything is new. While earlier artists worked in unbroken colours, placing full blues, reds, and greens in immediate juxtaposition, Quentin Massys subordinates this gleam- ing splendour to a uniform colour tone. The figures are given not in miniature form as formerly, but in
QUENTIN MASSYS
THE BANKER AND HIS WIFE
Louvre
The Hetberlands 261
almost life size. Nothing episodic distracts from
the principal action; and the problem solved by
Leonardo in his Last Supper—the portrayal of a
complicated scene as a uniform drama, complete in
itself—has also become determinative for the Nether-
landers. Along with these psychological efforts he
attempts also the solution of the formal problems
of Leonardo. However different the movements of
his figures are, he has arranged them with reference
to a strict scheme of composition.
His other works also, like the Holy Family in Brussels, the Madonna in Berlin, and the Pzeta in Munich, are quite without the bounds of ancient art in their greater size, more graceful movements, and broader draughtsmanship; they form the connecting link between Jan van Eyck and Rubens. Half figures, which are especially frequent, resulted as a logical consequence of the tendencies of the master. Not wishing to depart from his life-size scale, as such figures would have demanded canvases of colossal proportions, he preferred in all cases of re- stricted size to confine himself to half-length figures rather than to diminish the scale.
His genre pictures likewise belong to this class. What Petrus Cristus had indicated in his St. Eligius, Quentin Massys carried out. In his Goldsmith and his Wife of 1518, now in the Louvre, he did in reality nothing more than omit the halo which Petrus Cristus had given to St. Eligius. While this may seem a
oaes Germanic Painting
very small service, it was nevertheless a decisive step;
for through it the genre picture was recognised as an
independent variety -of painting. It is true that
Quentin himself, as well as his predecessors Jan
Massys and Marinus van Roymerswele, did not venture
to dispense with all ecclesiastical accessories. After
painting had for a thousand years been strictly re-
ligious, such a change of repertoire could not be
accomplished at one stroke. Even though it were
only for appearance’ sake, the artist was compelled
to preserve a certain connection with the Bible. In
the picture above referred to the wife of the goldsmith,
although her glance lingers upon the gold, carries a
dainty prayer-book adorned with miniatures in her
hand. Succeeding painters proceeded to change the
prayer-book for an account-book, and to transform
the goldsmith and his wife into attorneys, merchants,
misers, and usurers. But even in such cases a biblical
content is assumed. In his picture at Vienna at least,
the words of the parable of the unjust steward are added
and, what is more, such paintings are not independent
representations, but pendants to the equally numerous
representations of St. Jerome. The joy in worldly
goods depicted in the pictures of money-changers
serves to emphasise their moral: all is vanity. In
contrast to paintings representing man in the midst
of his wealth were others warning him of the transitory
character of earthly things. Gradually the pictures
of St. Jerome disappeared and the biblical morals of
The Wetherlands 263
the others were forgotten. Pawnbrokers and ad-
vocates, surrounded by papers and documents, sit
in their offices collecting money or produce from their
clients; broadly painted genre pictures take the place
of the original allegories. The expression of the
heads was also changed. It had usually been con-
torted into passion, because an art occupied principally
with the pathetic scenes of the passion of Christ
unconsciously transferred this pathos to subjects of
every-day life; but now these forced grimaces gave
place to a quiet business expression.
The Chess Players, by Lucas van Leyden, is es- _ pecially characteristic of the pathetic element in the earlier genre pictures. The people act not as if they were assembled about a gaming table, but about the cross of the Saviour. The attention is especially attracted by gesticulating hands, indicating some remote connection with Leonardo. Lucas proposed a similar problem to that solved by Durer in his Christ with the Scribes and Titian in his Tribute Money. It is, by the way, difficult to recognise the aims of this intelligent, early deceased Dutchman. The de- terminative event of his life seems to have been a journey to Italy. Although so few paintings by him are preserved, he furnished rich inspiration to other artists in his engravings. Those highly-finished, thoughtful heads which we shall see in the works of the master of St. Severin are already to be found in the prints of Lucas van Leyden; and by his genre
264 Germanic Paintings
paintings of dentists, surgeons, vagabonds, and the
like, he prepared a way for later genre painters like
Ostade and Brouwer.
Another Dutchman, Hieronymus Bosch, made himself a name as a visionary. All those grimacing images which were customary in mediaval decorative art, especially in the stone ornaments of Gothic cathedrals and the wood carvings of the choir stalls, were transferred by him to panel painting. He is especially fond, as was Teniers at a later day, of giving fishes the wings of bats and of creating strange monstrosities by commingling the forms of animals and vessels. Any one expecting the fantastic in our sense of the term, the demonic and the ghostly, would be bitterly disappointed: for his paintings have not a fantastic, but a burlesque or rather a didactic effect. His practice of giving them the form of an altar is characteristic of their significance. Whether he represents the Seven Deadly Sins, the Ship of Fools, the Pleasures of the World or the Temptation of St. Antony, it is always a sermon beginning with the fall of man and ending with hell. At the same time that Luther threw the inkstand at the devil, the last representation of the devil as the middle age conceived him passed away with Bosch. At a time when gluttony and wild sensuality had followed upon the former mortification of the flesh, he swung, as did Hogarth later, the heavy moral club, practised the art of "hanging people in colours,” and painted the same Capuchin sermons with which Sebastian Brant, Geiler von Kaisersperg, and Thomas Murner regaled their hearers.
Like Quentin Massys, he was also fond of painting biblical scenes in half-size figures, in which he appears as a sharp and malicious physiognomist. His line engravings, Gluttony, Avarice, and Drunkenness are further examples in which low genre painting, though under an allegorical cloak, ventures forth. Themes like the dance of the cripples, surgical operations, and quack doctors became especially popular in painting.
For the beginnings of landscape painting Hendrik Bles and Joachim Patinir are important. Both passed their youth upon the picturesque banks of the Maas, where wooded hills alternate with green meadows and sloping valleys, and here their art received its characteristic imprint. It is true that they could not yet take the decisive step of being exclusively landscape painters. As in the older genre painting, so in landscape the religious element was still preserved, and by its presence excused the innovation. Yet one feels that, although they paint biblical subjects, the heart of the painters was elsewhere. Even their choice of subjects is determined by the point of view of ‘the landscape. St. Hubert, sinking on his knee before the wonderful stag, or the Vision of John at Patmos, the Flight into Egypt, and the Adoration of the Kings, are almost the only themes, because they give an excuse for depicting a rich woodland scene.
266 Germanic Painting
A particularly interesting painter is Hendrik met de
Bles. Though his spindly, elongated figures are often
mannered, his mannerism exercises an unusual charm.
A painting by him at Antwerp is especially noteworthy
because it portrays, in quite modern fashion, nature
reduced to the service of man. In the foreground
there is a lively street with rolling-mills, blast furnaces,
and a smithy where labourers are hammering; behind
this a cliff crowned by a castle, and in the distance the
ocean enlivened with ships. A subordinate group of a
man leading a horse upon which a woman with a child
is sitting is all that indicates the subject of the picture:
the Flight into Egypt.
Patinir, whom even Durer had called “the good ” worked along the same lines ex- cept that he piled together more details; a partial result of his youthful enthusiasm. As the profession of a landscape painter was not yet acknowledged, it was considered necessary to make nature more in- teresting than reality by exaggeration of form and ad- dition of detail; and it was supposed that more friends could be won for the cause if nature was exhibited in rich Sunday adornment. On the other hand, this tendency also reveals the same realistic trend and en- deavour to be correct which had originated with Bouts. As the subjects were biblical, they sought to invent a suitable landscape, one different from what they saw about them. As no painter had yet gone to the Holy Land (this was not done until some years
landscape painter,’
The Cologne School 267
later by Jan Scorel), they endeavoured to adorn
fantastically the nature about them, and to compose
imaginary landscapes from given Flemish motives.
The luxuriant tree-tops, wide views of rivers, sand
dunes, and horizons with the sea which they saw at
home were enlarged, multiplied, and joined with
abrupt, jagged cliffs and wild Alpine heights, under the
impression that the painting thereby received a biblical
and oriental imprint.
III.— The Cologne School
As one can travel in a few hours from the Netherlands to Cologne, so the transition between the art of the two schools is almost imperceptible. Of many painters who were active in Cologne it is impossible to say whether they were natives or Netherlanders; the development of its art in both places from 1480 until 1510 is identical; leading from Roger through Memling to Quentin Massys and Lucas van Leyden, and ending
’ Most of the paintings mentioned in this section are in the Cologne
Gallery, where the school can be most satisfactorily studied. As the
names of the painters are not generally known, they are usually called
after their principal work with which critics first become acquainted.
Among such works mentioned in this treatise, the Lyversberg Passion,
the altar of Sts. George and Hippolytus, the Glorification of Mary, the
Holy Kinship, and the Death of Mary are in the Cologne Gallery; and
the Master of St. Severin derives his name from an altar in the church
of that name at Cologne. The Masters of the Life of Mary and of St.
Bartholomew are named after pictures in the Munich Gallery; while
the Master of the Amsterdam Cabinet is so called because this cabinet
contains the greatest number of extant prints after his engravings.—Eb.
268 Germanic Painting
with the Italians. The first impulse of the painters
of Cologne to desert the paths of Stephan Lochner
was due to the influence of Roger van der Weyden.
After his return from Italy Roger probably tarried
in Cologne, and although the altar-piece of the Three
Kings in the church of St. Columba is not by
him, but by Memling, it is certain that relations
existed between Roger and the principal city of the
Rhine.
Without the great dramatic painter of Brussels the Master of the Lyversberg Passion is inconceivable. He relates his stories with crude directness, his favourite theme being martyrdoms in which rude soldiers as- semble with brutal love of torture about the Redeemer. In like manner the Master of the altar of Saints George and Hippolytus endeavours to equal Roger in wild passion. Emaciated, angular figures, with sharp, almost caricatured, features jostle each other and push forward in the midst of bright landscapes, exe- cuted in Roger’s style. For, as we have already seen, the influence of Roger did not last long. The final quarter of the fifteenth century—the age of Perugino and Bellini in Italy, and of Memling in the Netherlands —was a gentle lyric age. This trend of the century is also followed by the Cologne painters. As in southern Germany Schongauer developed from a sincere imitator of Roger into a sensitive lyric painter, the Cologne artists, instead of traversing further the paths of realism, returned to those of Lochner. Solemn
The Cologne School 269
religious devotion and tender ecstasy take the place
of crude pathos.
In the Master of the Life of Mary we can clearly follow the change. Only in his Christ Crucified does he endeavour to be pathetic like Roger; then Memling becomes his guide. As his Adoration of the Kings is a free copy of Lochner’s altar-piece for the cathedral, so in his Virgin in the Temple there is a woman taken directly from that altar. Returning finally to Lochner, he created in the Life of Mary, to which he owes his name, a lovely idyl of a delicate, archaic character. The tender, maidenly figures in their slender, sensitive beauty, the simple and clinging ideal drapery, and the solemn golden background enveloping the figures— all show a return to the ideals of Stephan Lochner, which, in their dreamy beauty, were especially suited to the mystic, pious spirit of the time. The other themes which he treated are characteristic of the same spiritual tendency: like his Madonnas in bowers of roses, such as Master Wilhelm had already painted, maidenly, modest, sensitive and tender; or the Bewazling of the Body of Christ, full of a deep sustained grief and of that mild quietude which fears by a loud word or an eager gesture to disturb the holiness of the hour. \
The Master of the Glorification of Mary is a more prosaic and sensible gentleman, and cannot therefore follow so unconditionally the new romantic and ecclesiastical tendencies. Although he retained the type of Stephan Lochner, it was without the latter’s
270 Germanic Painting
sensibility and loveliness; and his visionary themes are
painted with rustic clumsiness. The heaven radiates
in golden splendour, but over landscapes representing,
with dry objectivity, Rhenish scenery or panoramas of
entire cities.
All the more delicate, almost like that of a Perugino of Cologne, is the sentiment of the Master of the Holy Kinship. The prevailing effect of his paintings is one of mild beauty and sentimental softness. Even when he occasionally depicts dramatic subjects, like the Crucifixion or the Martyrdom of St. Sebastian, he does not leave the domain of soft elegiac sentiment. As he lived until 1509, it is not impossible that he may have seen paintings by Perugino; he occasionally paints palm-groves, which he could not have seen in the North. At all events, the similarity of expression of the elegiac spirit of the epoch in North and South is remarkable. Like Perugino, the Master of the Holy Kinship is not capable of depicting manly strength; like the Umbrian he avoids everything harsh and all dramatic action; and under his hands everything acquires the sentiment of “smiles amidst tears.” A quiet peace and a gentle weariness is spread over nature.
It is certain that the Master of the Death of Mary visited Italy. Although a born Netherlander, he was active in Cologne and finally settled at Genoa. His development corresponds with this activity, beginning with Memling and later resembling Mabuse. In his
The Cologne School 271
earlier paintings, women with tender, pale faces,
and men with mild, soft features live in the midst of
peaceful landscapes, over which the warm, even light
of springtime is spread. As with Patinir, one gazes
through portals in the cliffs upon moist and green
declivities, and over the heights upon warm valleys
and ancient ruins. He resembles Memling, as in his
interiors, which are scenes of comfort and repose,
so also in his aristocratic taste for costumes which,
while almost coquettish, are yet quite free from
detailed or overloaded adornment. When he visited
Italy at a later period, his taste became even more
clarified, uniting the grandeur of the Italian style
with German sentiment.
Two other artists, who preceded the Master of the Death of Mary, are the most interesting of the entire group. For them also parallels can be found in the Netherlands; they would hardly have painted those rugged monumental figures had not Quentin Massys preceded them; and in case of the Master of St. Severin, the influence of Lucas van Leyden is also perceptible. They stand there, nevertheless, as strange figures and lonely spirits—a delight to him who seeks not. the regular but the unusual. =
What a bold and reckless talent is this of the Master of St. Severin! Without trace of the mild beauty of the Cologne masters, the figures stand gaudy and stiff, like the kings of playing-cards. Yet with the angularity of the primitives he combines a quite
vou’ 1.—18
272 Germanic Painting
modern psychological acuteness and an intensity of
expression which no contemporary possessed. In-
stead of being satisfied with representing the maidenly
or conventional in woman, he represents her as she is
and has been made by life, with all the ugliness of
deviating forms and with suffering or hardened features.
And his men—what rugged figures are these ancients
with the weather-beaten countenances, these apostles
with heads of modern scholars! No other painter of
the day has succeeded in rendering such well-executed,
strikingly thoughtful physiognomies. The skulls are
very high, and the forehead is boldly rounded, as in
the case of chess-players; the eyes are set with heavy
rings like those of people who have studied throughout
the night; the lips are pale and drawn down as if
in nervous exhaustion. Modest chin beards lengthen
the bony countenance, which has an over-exerted
and tired expression. In strange contrast with these
spiritual heads are the damask mantles and brocaded
clothes, the glittering crowns, sparkling sceptres, and
swords. Even the treatment of the hair is individual.
It does not seem natural, but sits like a wig upon
the head, and the forehead is encircled by hairs stiff
as a horse’s mane. This strange combination—the
reflective thoughtful heads and the mummeries of
costume—creates the impression of standing before a
primitive carnival or modern living pictures adapted
to biblical scenes. One looks like a fantastic sea-king,
another like Shakespeare’s King Lear; here we are
The Cologne School 273
reminded of Norwegian fables, there of Klinger and
Eduard von Gebhardt. With this fantastic costume
a strange and visionary colour-scheme is often united.
In contrast to the hard and gaudy hues of his con-
temporaries, the pictures of this master often reveal
flashing and gleaming, glimmering and _ sparkling
effects, corresponding with the fabulous character
of the representations. At the close of his life he
achieved a statuesque grandeur which almost reminds
of Signorelli. Nude putt: play about the pillars; the
colour is uniformly light and cool; the drapery falls in
mighty folds and the line is solemn and reposeful.
A great psychologist, a great painter of light, and one
of the founders of the monumental style—such is his
place of honour in the history of German art.
The Master of St. Bartholomew forms the logical conclusion of the artistic activity of the Cologne school. In its four hundred years of culture it had gone through all the stages of artistic experience from ecstatic mysticism to laughing worldliness and festal sublimity. The Master of St. Bartholomew appeared at the time when piety was changed into hysteric cant; when pleasure in colour was followed by weary absten- tion; and when art returned from a surfeit of expres- sion to the style of medizval sculpture, that it might by archaizing attain new and piquant charms. The sculptors of the age of Hadrian, who sought to express in the severe forms of primitive Greek art all the sen- sations of their own jaded epoch, and the paintings
274 Germanic Painting
of Carlo Crivelli, who at the close of the quattrocento
resurrected Byzantinism, are the corresponding par-
allels—all sons of a dying culture which had spoiled
its stomach for ordinary nourishment and found taste
only in the pungent flavours of novelties.
It is hardly possible to enumerate all the elements to which the paradoxical, tasteless, and yet fascinating effect of the pictures of the Master of St. Bartholomew is due. Like living figures of sandstone in rigid, statuesque repose, his saints stand before us, their cold limbs clothed in the most magnificent vestments Pearl diadems are woven into the luxuriant reddish blond hair of the women, and dragons, looking strange as enchanted human beings, accompany them. Putt: in the Italian style flutter in the air; rich brocaded carpets hang behind the figures, over which the eye glides to bright, grey-green plains and gleaming blue hills. A strange contrast to this modern feeling for nature is afforded by his Baroque ornamentation and the Gothic architecture seemingly chiselled by a goldsmith’s hand, and also between the precious gleaming accessories and the cold neurasthenic colour of the remainder: a sallow, yellow carnation imparting to the figures a corpselike and half-decayed appear- ance, and the pale tones of the green, yellow, and grey clothing. But most fascinating of all is the over- refined sentiment and the affected grace of movement. One thinks at the same time of the most ancient and the most modern painting; of the sandstone figures
The Cologne School 275
arising so solemnly on the pillars of Gothic cathedrals
and of Fernand Khnopff’s Sphinx grinning perversely
as a stony archangel clutches her brow. But Leonar-
do’s Mona Lisa, and that pale woman of the Lichten-
stein Gallery with the cold almond-shaped eyes, also
come to mind. Asin both cases it was the sphinxlike,
enigmatic, and uncanny that tempted Leonardo, so a
similar thought seems to have hovered before the
Master of St. Bartholomew when he created those
female heads, which with their broad brows, thin eye-
brows, and cruel cheekbones seem caricatures of saints.
Their little mouths with the teasing dimple are full
of desire, as if pouting for a kiss; affectedly they bend
and stretch their bony, pointed fingers, and draw back
the thin bloodless lips as though they were laughing
over some doubtful remark which the saint opposite
them had just whispered. At the same time, it will be
remembered, Cologne was the home of the obscurantists,
a brood of stealthy hypocrites who during the day
knelt before the pictures of saints, in order that they
might in the night celebrate the secret orgies of the
black mass. The same tendency in art seems to be
expressed in the infernal, satanic element of these
paintings. a
Along with Cologne, Mayence appears to have been
a principal seat of artistic activity at the close of the
century. Here also there lived an artist who has
much to say to us moderns; an artist as rich in chivalric
grace as in individual romanticism: the sympathetic
276 Germanic Painting
unknown Master of the Amsterdam Cabinet. He had
long been known as a line-engraver, in which technique
he reminds one of Rops, when he shows woman as
the ruler of the universe, making a beast of the greatest
philosopher and causing the most pious king to grovel
in the dust before idols. There are indications of
Schwind and Bécklin when he depicts wild men and
nude young women dashing across the moor upon a
unicorn or a hart. The sentiment of a northern ballad
pervades the gloomy print representing a young man
festally crowned with grape leaves in his curly hair,
glancing over the glowing meadow, while Death, not
the usual skeleton but an old man with withered body
and tired, pitiful features, suddenly blocks his way
and looks him long and deeply in the eye. Yet this
same brooder also observed life with a quick eye, and
painted quarrelsome peasants, ragged tramps, and half-
starved village musicians with the acuteness of a
Rembrandt. Even more did the aristocratic world,
with its elegance and chivalric strain, find in him a
knightly poet. He has depicted tourneys, stag and
falcon hunts: crashing trumpets sound, horses neigh,
dogs bark, and the startled game runs gracefully away.
He has succeeded quite as well with the sweet game of
love. What tender, unspeakably lovely little prints
are those in which the young gallant sits, sedately
chatting with his sweetheart, while about them roses,
tulips, and flowers of all kinds are budding and filling
the air with perfume.
The Cologne School 277
Whether it is by accident or because a real relation
existed between them, one cannot examine the works
of the Master of the Amsterdam Cabinet without
thinking of Leonardo. Did he wander to upper Italy
from Constance, where he remained for a time, or did
he in some other way learn of the enigmatic genius
who was at that time revealing new beauty to the
South P At all events, his charm and his delicate
feeling for beauty resemble the Italian as much as they
are unlike the German art of the period. His slender
youths with elastic, yet soft and sensual bodies; the
modest delicacy of his young women; their luxuriant
locks framing the face with soft ringlets, their dreamy,
softly sensual eyes and the expression of ineffable
sweetness which transfigures their faces—only in the
drawings of Leonardo are similar things found. In
his pictures, also, which have lately become known,
he is recognisable by the coquettish costume, the
charming types, and the delight in wreaths and flowers.
His portrait of two lovers (Gotha) is probably the
most beautiful of all old German portraits. This
fine, fashionable youth with his long, fair hair crowned
with wild roses, and this bashful maiden with the rose
in her hand, listening so dreamily to the languishing
whispers of her lover, are graceful to their fingertips,
even for a modern eye. A ray of the blessedness of
the women sung by Walther von der Vogelweide,
and also a ray of southern sunlight, has fallen upon
this delightful work.
278 Germanic Painting
IV.— Dürer
In southern Germany Nuremberg remained the centre of artistic activity. Like Wackenroder and Tieck a hundred years ago, the traveller is still strangely moved in treading the streets of the ancient city on the Pegnitz. The venerable churches, the uneven streets, and the solemn patrician houses seem still peopled with picturesque figures in the quaint caps and head-dresses of that great period when Nuremberg was “the crowded school of the fatherland’s art,” when an overflowing spirit of art flourished within its walls, and when the masters Hans Sachs, Adam Kraft, Peter Vischer, Albrecht Durer, and Willibald Pirkheimer were alive.:
True, there is still much Romanticism in this en- thusiasm. How trivial and philistine seems the development of German art compared with its mighty progress in the Italian republics! Maximilian, the last of the knights, gave all manner of commissions, but in his chronic financial need he was unable to pay the artists. Although Cardinal Albrecht of Mayence had the high ideals of an Italian Mzecenas, the troubles of the Reformation prevented him from carrying out his plans. How small and poor do the commissions of the Fuggers, the Imhoffs, and the Holzschubers appear in comparison with those of the Medici, the Tornabuoni and the Pazzi! German art would have remained a craft, and confined itself to imparting religious instruction by means of altar-pieces, if the artists themselves had not sought and found the means
Diirer 279
of raising themselves on the wings of genius above
the age and the world.
Direr, especially, owes his splendid achievements not to his fatherland, but to himself alone. Only in the works which were no commission, in which as a poet he stands outside of the public, is he free and great. That which really makes him a classic is to be found not in his paintings, but in his wood and copper engravings. In recognising the specific value of engray- ing and making it technically capable of conquering the entire domain of fantasy, he loosed not only his own but the age’s tongue. In these arts he appears in the fulness of his genius, and reveals the “collected secret treasure of his heart.” The germs of the creations of Cornelius, Ludwig Richter, Schwind, and Bécklin in our own day, lie in the works of Durer, the most profound and powerful painter-poet recorded in the history of art.
The fact that his career began with the Apocalypse, the representation of wild, fantastic ideas hardly possi- ble to express in art, is characteristic for the tendency of his genius. In his hands even that which is contrary to nature found organic presentation. Like an uncanny dream, like a ghostly face, the gnostic vision passes before our eyes. But at the same time that he was labouring with the Apocalypse, the Life of Mary took shape in his mind; and the dzemonic artist of the world of revelation transformed himself into a refined, soulful story-teller, whose pleasant idyls, woven out of German
280 Germanic Painting
country life, German houses, and German furniture,
made the life of the Mother of God as simple and
intelligible as that of a woman of old Nuremberg.
He is equally celebrated as the poet of the story of
Christ. Even before Luther had thought of his
translation of the Bible, Durer had translated the
gospel for his people and had made the Roman-Asiatic
types of Christianity homelike and familiar to the
German people.
While in the popular technique of wood engraving he treated simple themes comprehensible to the people, his line engraving reveals an aristocrat and a humour- ist. One thinks of Schwind, when Durer tells of St. Genevieve, St. Hubert, and all tthose weather-beaten hermits living with the deer and the squirrels in the midst of the German forest ; of Boécklin in his Rape of Amyone, or the Abduction upon the Unicorn—those an- tique prints pervaded by the magic breath of fable, in which the clear spirit of Hellenism is so strangely united with northern sentiment. His Nemesis, the Knight with Death and the Devil, St. Jerome, and Melancholy are world-known examples of Diirer’s profound, struggling art. Like the deep furrows in the countenance of Melancholy, this brooding woman, his art is deep and serious; revealing the struggles of a mighty spirit in an enigmatic, unfathomable world, in which the vibrating thoughts of a great genius labour.
Lest one should think Durer was only a brooder, a reticent and unapproachable spirit, one has only to
Diirer 281
read his letters, pervaded by the same crude and homely
humour as Luther’s Table Talk. One has only to
glance at his marginal drawings for Maximilian’s
Prayer-book to observe that this serious man could also
laugh mischievously, and that this philosopher was a
convivial and joyful being. This universality is the
extraordinary thing about Durer’s nature. Although
a poet who was seemingly quite lost in the world of
ideas, he was at the same time an observer to whose
sharp eye the wide world was revealed. The Munich
portrait alone shows the thinker, the visionary, and the
brooding spirit whose art furnished four centuries with
profound enigmas to solve. In the others, painted
at an earlier period, he is a bold and joyful young man,
who, like Rembrandt, takes childish pleasure in a
pretty jacket, a coquettish cap or a handsome garment.
As an artist he is just such a mixtum compositum
of the most diverging elements. The same man who
could be so brooding and abstract had also a sense for
everything that concerned the world; and far from
living away from it, he created works which made him
the forerunner of the “intimate”’ art of the following
century. His simple drawings of popular life assure
him first place by the side of Quentin Massys among
the pioneers of genre painting. His studies of animals
did not find their counterparts in painting until
Rembrandt’s Carcass of an Ox a hundred and twenty
years later; his studies of plants and flowers are
pages trom the book of that impartial realism which
282 Germanic Painting
passes all boundaries of time. Pansies, columbines,
meadow grass, bindweed, plantains, violets, and dan-
delion—he draws them all with such astonishing grace
that his aquarelles might belong to the present instead
of the sixteenth century, and to a Japanese artist as
well as to Durer. In like manner all his landscape
drawings pass chronological bounds; they might just
as well have originated in the circle of the most modern
of artists, the Impressionists. If in any respect at all
he was in advance of his time it was as a landscape
painter; for he accomplished what the Master of the
Amsterdam Cabinet had attempted, and prepared the
way for that which Elsheimer, and, after him, only
the present age again attained.
But Durer did not confine himself to observing na- ture with an impartial eye; he wished also to ascertain the laws governing her appearance. Beside the poet stands not only the realist, but also the investigator, the scholar, and the theorist. Heretofore northern artists had proceeded in a purely empirical manner. Trusting entirely to the eye, they were correct when they saw correctly, but erroneous when their vision deceived them. Durer was the first to proceed as the Italians had done from empiricism to knowledge; and through the learned works written at the close of his life, he created for Germany the scientific basis which Alberti and Leonardo had furnished the Italians.
“ As for Leonardo, so also for Diirer painting was only a form of expression used occasionally when no other
Diirer 283
thoughts filled his mind. Even with the palette in hand,
he remained a brooder. If those only are to be con-
sidered painters who afford delight by the harmony
and beauty of their colour, Durer can hardly so be
considered. His works are entirely lacking in colour
sense; gaudy and hard, rather written than painted,
they afford little pleasure to the eye used to colour
effects. Just as in his graphic works art signifies
nothing more to him than a form of speech for the
expression of thought, so when he labours with the
brush, he is occupied more with spiritual or formal
than specifically pictorial problems.
The psychological problem most interested him in the many portraits which he painted from the days of his apprenticeship to the last years of his life. Aside from the portraits of princes, those of Frederick the Wise and the Emperor Maximilian, and of a few councillors of Nuremberg and merchants of Augsburg, he was seldom occupied with commissions. He painted only those who were related to him in mind or in heart or who seemed to afford an interesting psychological study. Like Rembrandt, he practised upon himself; he portrayed his father, the hearty old goldsmith, and the thin and hollow-eyed countenance of his brother, the tailor Hans; painted Michel Wohl- gemuth, his aged master, and created in Holzschuher the type of a whole generation; that rugged and warlike race, whose king was Luther and who effected the Reformation. From the purely pictorial standpoint his
284 Germanic Painting
portraits are examples of the same miniature paintings
which prevailed in the Netherlands in the days of
Jan van Eyck. Every wrinkle, hair, furrow, and vein
is depicted with documentary fidelity. While in
Holbein’s drawings the lightest pen stroke is applied
like a brush mark, Direr paints as if he were making
pen strokes with a brush. While Holbein, in great,
sure lines, seizes upon that which is lifelike in appear-
ance, Diirer does not progress beyond laborious efforts,
and seeks by the addition of details to establish the
sum of character expressed ina head. But whatever is
lacking in facility or workmanship is atoned for by
his intellectual greatness. Just because he so far
surpassed in intellect the dashing and brutal Holbein,
the latter’s portraits, notwithstanding their skilfulness
of technique, seem like photographs alongside of
Diurer’s characteristic, spiritual heads. There the cold
analyst reflecting the exterior of his subject with the
infallible certainty of the camera obscura; here the
brooder and thinker, who lends to his sitters something
of his own Faust-like nature.
In his religious pictures Durer was dominated partly by psychological, partly by formal problems; and the very fact that he made such problems the starting point raises him above his surroundings. All artists before him in Germany felt themselves artisans, and fulfilled each commission as well as they could without higher ambition. Durer was the first to raise art above the handicraft and to feel himself
Diirer 28s
an artist; he created not because he received com-
missions, but because a power within him cried out
for expression; he put his whole soul into his works,
and had the feeling that he was working for eternity.
Italy had shown him how great was the difference
between handicraft and art.
When his activity began, the rigid and constrained style of Michel Wohlgemuth dominated the artistic life of Nuremberg. Diirer lingered in his workshop, but only like the king’s son in the fable who, losing his way, had wandered into the charcoal-burners’ hut. As soon as his apprenticeship was over, he dissolved the bonds which had connected him with the school of Wohlgemuth, and chose masters who were spiritually nearer to him. His first mentor, as is shown by the small Madonna of the Cologne Museum, was Schongauer. Then he disappears for a time from view. For if the altar-piece at Meissen and the Flora of the Frankfort Museum be assigned to this period, it would mean that during his youth Diirer had adopted the manner of Jan Scorel as well as that of Bartolommeo da Venezia with quite astonishing surety. We do not stand upon sure ground until his next works, inspired by Mantegna.
Upon his arrival at Venice in 1494, Mantegna’s prints, of which he had copied two, opened his view into a new world. To this great master he did homage in his first altar-pieces; almost as an imitator in the small Dresden altar-piece and more independent in his Bewailing of the Body of Christ, which even in
eo Germanic Painting
subject is connected with the Paduan school. In the
Nuremberg as well as the Munich work, there is no
loose juxtaposition as in Wohlgemuth’s painting, but
a rigid composition. In the latter’s work the tough
metallic tone, the stony grief-stricken appearance of
Mary, and the pathos of the old toothless woman
raising her arms with a wild cry of grief show how
much Mantegna’s style and figures dominated Direr’s
thoughts.
When he developed from the creator of the Apo- calypse into the poet of the Life of Mary, these Padu- an elements were relegated to the background, and the painter of pathos became an idyllic artist. In the Birth of Christ in the Munich Gallery as well as the Adoration of the Kings at Florence, the Holy Family is placed in a ruin, full of corners and affording all kinds of interior and exterior views. Mary, with her fair hair protruding from a white head-dress, is the youthful and pretty Nuremberg maiden of the Life of Mary. Instead of harsh and emotional, he is quiet and mild— a transition from Mantegna to Bellini.
His development is the same that the art of Venice experienced at the beginning of the sixteenth century. When Diirer lived at Venice in 1494, the chief paintings which he saw in the churches were the products of the school of Murano, and of Giovanni Bellini, both inspired by Mantegna. But when he returned to Venice, in 1506, Bellini had adopted his soft and harmonious style. The people thronged before his altar-pieces, and
Diirer 284
Durer also experienced the same change in taste.
“The thing which so well pleased me eleven years ago
does not at all please me now”: in this passage of his
letters he announces that for him also the Muranese
were a thing of the past, and that he no longer con-
sidered Alvise Vivarini but Bellini as the greatest
artist of Venice.
The Festival of the Rosary now in the Rudolphinum at Prague is the principal evidence of his admiration for Bellini. As he himself had softened under the blue Venetian sky, so his art lost its rigidity and con- straint. A soft, lyric tone, a rhythmic line, and something lovely even in his colour betrays that while painting the picture he was looking not at the crisp and pointed gables of northern houses but into the quiet watery mirror of the lagoons. The Madonna with the Goldfinch also, although characteristically done, would have been no strange note in the midst of the full round tones of Bellini and Cima. Even the nude entered into his studies; and the delicate miniature-like Christ Crucified, at Dresden, shows that the art of Antonello had touched a sympathetic cord.
In addition to this Verrocchio also impressed_him. For many of his line engravings, like the Knight with Death and the Devil, the Little Horse, and St. George, were evidently conceived under the influence of the Colleoni monument which had recently been erected in Venice. In another direction he was inspired by
VOL. 1.—19
288 Germanic Painting
Leonardo, whom he met in Bologna.’ The content
of Diirer’s Christ Disputing with the Doctors (Barberini
Palace, Rome) is derived from the painting ascribed
to Leonardo in the National Gallery (London); it
belongs, with Titian’s Tribute Money, to that series
of works which were created under the inspiration of
Leonardo and treat the problem of characteristic heads,
using the hands as a_ psychological commentary.
From the tender smile playing about the portrait of a
Young Woman in the Museum at Berlin and the
Female Head in charcoal drawing of the Louvre,
as well as from the “ crazy coutnenances”’ which Durer
was so fond of drawing, it is evident that the caricatures
of Leonardo pleased his brooding spirit.
The further development of Diirer after his return home in 1507 is vacillating. Although his angular late Gothic taste sometimes appears, he endeavoured, wherever the theme permitted, to attain rhythmic, graceful: movement and unity of composition; and while he never thought of casting aside his own senti- ment in favour of a strange one, he is nevertheless conscious .that realism is not necessarily identical with monstrosity and abnormal ugliness.
It is quite characteristic that immediately after his return from Italy he painted the life-size figures of Adam and Eve, now in Madrid. Although both are thoroughly German in conception, he would not have
TIt is usually assumed, in the absence of conclusive favorable evi-
dence, that no such meeting took place at Bologna.—Ep.
Diirer 289
painted them had he never been in Italy; for his pleas-
ure in the nude and the rhythm which he endeavours
to attain in both figures are thoroughly Italian. The
same figures of the Ghent altar-piece are rigid and
angular, creating the impression that Jan van Eyck
had seen only nude, northern models without bodily
charm. In contrast to this coarse-grained ugliness
there is free and rhythmic line with Durer. In contrast
to the pure planimetric contours, filled with colour, of
former German art, he endeavours, in the sense of
Verrocchio, to give the figures bodily roundness and to
create effective contrasts in movement. As a pupil
of Leonardo he is no less occupied with psychological
analysis. Adam longingly opens his lips, and a quiet
smile—Flaubért’s “Ob sz tu voulais !’’—plays about
Eve’s lips.
In his next work, the Martyrdom of the Ten Thousand, painted for Frederick the Wise, and now in the Vienna Gallery, he falls back upon the realism which had previously dominated German art; but in the Heller altar-piece he reapproaches the aim that since his Italian journey had hovered before him. The groups of the apostles are simply and carefully composed, and in place of contemporary costume he has adpoted simple, ideal draperies, the studies for which might well be confounded with similar studies by Leonardo. He also shares with Leonardo the quality of avoid- ing undue emphasis upon the formal. Although the soles of the feet and the hands are drawn with the
290 Germanic Painting
assiduous exactitude of the primitives, he remained
a psychologist in the manner in which he makes his
portrait. heads types of character.
In the Trinity of the Vienna Gallery (1511) he has — attained the exact opposite of the style of Wohlge- muth. Where in the latter’s works one sees the wrinkled folds of wood statuary, Durer’s draperies are simple in arrangement and graceful in move- ment. Jn his own portrait, which he has introduced into the background, he no longer wears the cos- tume of the day, but a long and simple cloak. Where Wohlgemuth shows a confused conglomeration, with Diirer a solemn eurythmy of line prevails. In con- trast to the older German form of an altar with wings, Durer, in the manner of the quattrocento, has united the picture in a single frame rounded at the top.
Several other works which originated in the following years (both Madonnas and subjects like the Lucretia at Munich) contained nothing new. The only in- teresting point is how the recollection of the mosaics of St. Mark’s lives in his memory. Not only in the Munich portrait of himself, in that of Charles the Great at Frankfort, and his powerful woodcut the Head of Christ, but in several Madonnas, he has returned to the Byzantine tradition of full face; in order, no doubt, to attain solemn and monumental effects.
Not until the close of his life was he able to unite
Diirer 291
in a single great work the result of all his efforts.
His journey to the Netherlands in 1520-21 furnished
a new incentive to the imposing simplification of his
art. He saw the paintings of Quentin Massys with
their powerful life-sized figures, and the altar-piece of
Ghent. “That is a delightful, comprehensible painting,
and especially Mary and God the Father are excellent”’:
this passage of his diary shows the path he afterwards
followed. As at the same time the young artists of
Florence studied no longer Gozzoli and Pisanello but
the works of Masaccio in the Brancacci Chapel, so
Durer no longer admired the miniature painting of
Jan, but the powerful figures of Hubert van Eyck with
their solemn and mighty draperies, thus approaching
the same style which the artists of the sixteenth
century learned from Masaccio. Several wood en-
gravings enable us to follow the problem as it ripened
in his mind. Simple and lonely figures, impressively
conceived and executed, take the place of the charming
beings which had formerly lived so modestly in de-
lightful landscapes.
But the greatest revelation is in his mighty series of the Four Apostles, of 1526, long in the Rathaus of Nuremberg, but now in the Munich Pinakothek. According to ancient tradition, the « Four Tempera- ments” are represented ; and the fact that the series was thus explained shows how much real temperament and character reposes in each one of these Titans. Like Leonardo, Durer followed a double aim. He was
292 Germanic Painting
probably attracted by the problem of characteristic
heads; the saints formerly pious and contemplative,
become meditative and thoughtful men. On the
other hand, as in the case of Leonardo, the psychological
are accompanied by formal tendencies. The powerful
characterisation of the heads corresponds with the
statuesque character of the bodies; and in this com-
bination of psychic power with monumental grandeur,
the Four Apostles are something unique in the history
of art. Although similar figures occur in the altar-
pieces of Giovanni Bellini, Cima, and Mantegna, they
lack this formal simplicity and majestic, statuesque
repose. Others, like Fra Bartolommeo at a later
period, do not possess the spiritual grandeur; their
mantles no longer invest a thinker but are hung ac-
cording to academic rules over hollow lay figures.
Albrecht Durer, like Leonardo, solved the problem of
uniting the deepest intellectual content with formal
beauty and psychic grandeur.
V.— Franconia and Bavaria
In the midst of his time Durer stands like a giant, his feet rooted in the earth but his head reaching to the stars. A monument dedicated to German art of the period of the Reformation would have a colossal statue of Durer as its central figure; all the others would sit as figurines in sockets at the foot of the monument. Although they are indeed lovable and sympathetic men, the name Little Masters, which is applied to them, characterises their relation to Durer. Following the all-embracing colossal genius who had dominated reality as well as dreamland, came the diadochit who divided his world-empire, ruling their little principalities as well as they might.
Some, inspired by the humanistic movement, devoted themselves eagerly to the antique legend, others to depicting the culture of the epoch. They wandered about the yearly fairs and markets among the peasants and burghers, revealing the scenes of popular life with primeval crudity. The picturesque figures of weather- beaten lansquenets, market women, maidens and distinguished ladies, peasants, young dandies and aged noblemen, kirmesses, weddings, and banquets— such figures and scenes defile past us in their prints.
But it was not only in the graphic arts that this development took place. The achievements of paint- ing signify less an advance than a retrogression into the old craftsman’s ways. There was neither emperor, nobility nor bourgeoisie with appreciation for the problems which Durer proposed; and when later, on account of the Reformation, German intellectual life adopted a petty trend and lost itself in dreary and colourless quarrels, the tender flower of art must have frozen in this icy atmosphere.
Hans Süss of Kulmbach is a mild and pleasing master, much like a descendant through a feminine collateral line from Diirer’s harsh and manly art.
Hans Schaufeieln, the illustrator of Herr Thuerdank, fulfilled honestly, as might have been expected from a master-painter of Nérdlingen, his numerous com- missions. Barthel Beham, who had visited Italy, loved to fill the backgrounds of his paintings with rich Renaissance buildings. Anton Woensam of Cologne, untouched by the Renaissance, expressed himself in exaggerated late Gothic forms; with the archaic harshness which forms the characteristic feature of his works, he combines Baroque gesture with wrinkled, puffed draperies.
When speaking of German art one longs to hear the rustling of the German woods, to breath the fragrance of their ozone, and see nymphs and wood-sprites roving through the thicket. Faithfulness, inwardness, and an appreciation of the spirit of the wood seem to us characteristic of German art. We think of hermits sitting, oblivious of the world, before their caves; of green meadows and flower-strewn hills; of gloomy woodland slopes and pleasing valleys through which shimmering waters ripple. The fresh ray of the morn- ing sun breaks through the light green of the young birches, and leaping from branch to branch changes into diamonds the gleaming dewdrops, and into gold or precious stones the beetle comfortably crawling ir. the soft moss.
““ Da gehet leise, nach seiner Weise
Der liebe Herrgott durch den Wald.”
Because these things are found with Schwind and Thoma, they seem the most characteristically German among modern artists; and for the same reason, among the older artists Altdorfer stands nearest to us.
He was a lovable, truly German master, whose pictures are redolent of pine forests, and in their sleepiness and cosy sentiment strike a confidential and homelike chord within us. He began as a miniature painter. At the close of the fifteenth century Berthold Furtmeyer, who also lived in Regensburg, painted fragrant mountain ranges and the play of sunlight with fine feeling. Altdorfer was the first among the Germans to apply the delicacy of miniature to panel painting. His little pictures, therefore, seem curiously out of place in German painting of the sixteenth century, which still saw its chief task in proclaiming in large altar-pieces the doctrine of Christian salvation. But Altdorfer did not labour for the church. For miniature painting had since the days of Gutenberg become an aristocratic luxury; and Altdorfer, as a painter for amateurs, produced not altar but little cabinet pieces, intended not for religious edification but for artistic enjoyment. It is for this reason that one so gladly lingers before his works. As he laboured for the aristocrats of taste, he could go so far in advance of his time that many of his pictures, in their freshness of conception and sparkling colour, affect us like forerunners of the most modern painting.
In a classification of his works in accordance with the problems attempted, the first group would be
296 Germanic Painting
formed of those in which architectural features are
combined with landscape. For Altdorfer was not only
a painter but city architect of Regensburg as well;
and he enthusiastically adopted all architectural and
ornamental forms which at that time were introduced
from Italy into Germany. He therefore inserts into
his picture representing the Flight of the Holy Family
into Egypt a splendid fountain, which might well adorn
the court of a Renaissance palace. For the same reason
the scene of Susanna’s Bath is laid in the neighbourhood
of a great palace, which in its gay splendour surpasses
all the fantastic designs of contemporary German
architects.
The second group is composed of panoramic. views over broad plains, of which the Berlin picture illustrat- ing Beggary sitting upon the Train of Arrogance is the most striking example. A princely pair, upon whose trailing mantles a family of beggars sits, makes brilliant entry into a Renaissance palace, which is balanced to the right of the painting by a dark mass of foliage; and between the two the eye sweeps over a hilly country upon habitations, streams, and castles. Altdorfer therefore uses the same artistic device which Piero della Francesca had applied before and Claude Lorrain adopted after him. By painting dark curtains in the foreground, he achieves the possibility of making the distance appear lighter and more spacious.
To the third group belong the pictures in which, progressing in the paths of Gerard David, he attempted
Franconia and Bavaria 297
to interpret certain effects of light. In his Crucifixion
the heaven is veiled with dark, curiously coloured
clouds, through which gloomy lighting he endeavours
to render the sad parting feeling of the hour. In his
Assumption of Mary the whole heaven is bathed in a
fiery purple, as if a gleaming world of joy and mag-
nificence were opened. Through the same skilful
handling of light, he even succeeded in transforming
in an artistic sense the most tiresome commission
which he had received, Alexander's Victory. While
the other battle-pieces at that time ordered from
Bavarian artists by Duke William IV. and now united
in the Munich Pinakothek do not rise above the
character of coloured wood-cuts, Altdorfer spread a
bright morning light over the sea, the hills, and the
battle-field, playing in reddish gleam upon the pinnacles
of the castle and leaving the other parts of the landscape
in gloomy shadow. Armour, uniforms, and banners
flash and sparkle in the sunlight. Not until the
seventeenth century did another German, Adam
Elsheimer, paint the action of light in an equally
delicate manner.
But his most beautiful paintings are those which conduct us into the depths of the German forest. His name need only to be mentioned to remind us of the woodland, where sunbeams dance upon the tree- trunks, hermits sit beside their caves, or woodland gods repose upon green moss. No one before him had painted real woodland life. While all others had
298 Germanic Painting
“gemalne at the entrance of the wood, Altdorfer was
the first to plunge, like a miner, into the green shaft.
The branches of the trees closed over him and the blue
heaven disappeared; but he saw the sunbeams rustling
through the green leaves and the moss spread like a
velvet mantle upon the earth.
Even to his drawings, wood-cuts and etchings his delight in the German forest gives a unique charm. While Durer in his marginal drawings on Maximilian’s Prayer-book confined himself to clever scroll-work, Altdorfer sought by his trees, branches, and foliage to transport the reader into the silence of the forest. In the Triumphal Procession of Maximilian his prints, the Train of Prisoners, may be recognised by the German pine woods forming the background. How- ever different the content of his etchings may be, a tall and splendid tree, whether fir or pine, is added as though it were the artist’s monogram. The thick foliage and the heavy hanging branches of the pine, the thread-like roots, and the half-dried creepers winding about an ancient wall are more attractive to him than a biblical or legendary theme.
In pictures of this kind the figures are a matter of indifference; one only observes the woodland landscape enclosing them. Here in a green cave a family of satyrs has nested; there the wild solitude of the forest moves Jerome’s heart to repentance; or St. George, riding through a beech forest, has met the dragon. Neither the heaven nor the treetops,
Franconia and Bavaria 299
but only the foliage is visible. For the first time in
the history of art the depth of the forest, as in our own
days Diaz painted it, was revealed. Finally Altdorfer,
to crown his life work, painted a picture which was a
pure landscape, without any figures. Hanging, like
his St. George, in the Munich Pinakothek, this earliest
German landscape shows a simple bit of nature, de-
picted with the faithfulness of portraiture. Here all
time limits are obscured, and one seems to gaze upon
the works of a modern painter—a deep, blue sky
rising above a green clump of trees; a little lake, a
narrow footpath winding over the meadow, a bluish
mountain and a few houses—such is the content of this
painting. All that had previously originated in this
domain had maintained at least an external connection
with religious painting; and when the landscape at
first timidly appeared in altar-pieces, in order to have
a justification for its existence it retained, even at a
later period, the biblical figures. Even Patinir uses
nature as a mere foil for the religious subjects; and
although in his aquarelles Durer had rendered in-
dependent landscapes, in panel paintings he did not
venture to break with tradition. Altdorfer did, and
through this he became the precursor of the great
landscape painters of the following century.
Even in the sixteenth century he was followed, although timidly, by a few other masters. Augustine Hirschvogel and Hans Sebald Lantensack are known as etchers of spirited, quite modern prints, while
300 Germantc Painting
Michael Ostendorfer attempted by light effects to
impart sentiment to his pictures. Since his St. George
of the Marcuard collection has become known, Melchior
Feselen of Ingolstadt appears as one of the most
interesting painters of the epoch. For this picture,
with its Marée horse, its Nickelmann dragon, and
its Corot tree, combined with the delightful cosiness and
story-telling sentiment of the whole, is a fine example of
childish and hearty German fantasy.
Even to Cranach one can only be just in the presence of his “intimate’”’ paintings. The other works, which during his lifetime brought him fame and reputation, have now but little to say to us. However often he painted the spiritual heroes of the sixteenth century his portraits of Luther reveal nothing of the warm- hearted temperament of the reformer, as little as those of Melanchthon disclose the thoughtful delicacy of the scholar. They are simply great men seen through the temperament of a philistine. The dogmatising altar- pieces which serve as professions of his Protestant faith have only a didactic, even schoolmasterly effect ; they are learned treatises, as different from former pictures as an intelligible and naturalistic Protestant sermon differs from the poetic lyricism of the Gospels; as a whitewashed Protestant church from a mighty cathedral gleaming in the splendour of tapers and flooded with the notes of the organ. But he is most distressing of all when attempting to play the academi- cian and to render life-sized figures: the greater the
Franconia and Bavarta 301
size, the more awful the void. There are half-length
pictures of Judith with red Rembrandtesque hats,
showing with droll smiles a sword and a pewter bowl
containing a decapitated head; there are full-length
women wearing heavy golden necklaces, who when
escorted by a Cupid are called Venus, or when senti-
mentally thrusting a dagger into their breasts are
characterised as Lucretia. Everything is weak and
schematic in drawing and affected in sentiment.
But when upon the point of turning from Cranach as a dry pedant, an empty exaggerator or an aged talker, one suddenly discovers that the same man has painted pictures which, in their honest inwardness and simple thoughtfulness belong to the most delightful products of German life. Among these are the delicate yellow-haired Madonnas which fill one with such homelike pleasure in foreign collections—as when in the midst of fiery Romanic eyes the clear, faithful glance of a German eye meets us; or when in foreign climes the ear unexpectedly catches a simple German folk-song, sung with untrained voice but hearty feeling. Among these paintings, also, are his mis- chievous panels of the Fountain of Youth, in which old hags climbing into the water basin appear upon the other side as dainty maidens. Here also belong his pictures of Bathsheba, which are so Teutonic, and so simple and hearty in the manner in which the biblical bath scene with the lustful old men is transformed into an innocent foot-bath. A piece of Germany as our grandfathers knew it lives in these ancient village humours,—as when on a sunny Sunday morning they wandered through the flowering gardens and uneven lanes of an old German town, where fair maidens, looking down from oriel windows, sleepily combed their hair. Is there anything more dainty than Cranach’s fresh pic- tures of antique life, in which, however, the nymphs of German romance and the wild men of our woodland tales move and live? Far from the philosophic brooding of Diirer transposing the profound thoughts of a Faust into the antique world, or from the cold, clear correctness which at a later day prevailed, Cranach treats antique legends like romantic stories of the age of chivalry, with the same childishness that charms us in Thoma. Unspeakably comic is the gentleman with broad, well-kept beard of the formal cut of a Saxon elector, who at one time appears as a satyr, at another as Paris or Apollo. And the little maidens with the slight budlike forms, and delicate but firm limbs, and with the golden chains and red hats, associated in such an innocent manner with Eve’s costume, are surely charming. Whether they appear as coy forest queens daintily sitting on a stag’s back, as nymphs reposing beside a rippling brook, or as Venus, Minerva or Juno in company with the gentleman of the Saxon beard aforesaid—we have the German sentiment of story undisturbed by a single academic trait.
It is the spicy woodland landscape that gives to these paintings their indescribable charm. Works like the
Franconia and Bavaria 303
Flight into Egypt have an odour of pine forest and a
Christmas poetry which even Altdorfer did not attain.
While the latter depicted the German forest, Cranach
discovered the soul of the forest—the fairy story.
Sometimes it even seems as if the toadstool was about
to change into a gnome, the knotted branches of a tree
into old Rubezahl,! or the clouds into elves. For all
these beings are not placed arbitrarily in nature.
As the insect procures its whole existence, and even
acquires its form and colour, from the plant upon which
it lives, so Cranach’s beings, enchanted by the magic
of the wood, seem an integral part of the thicket.
Gnarled stumps, misshapen as the alum root, arise;
thick creepers, knotted roots, moss and ferns spread out;
and in the midst of this woodland nature, in its rugged
castles, dwell the inhabitants of the wood. Their cal-
loused fingers are knotted branches, their wrinkled skin
is the burst bark of a tree, their beards resemble that
clinging moss which in the autumn hangs upon old trees.
The denizens of the forest, stags, roes, squirrels, and
wildcats, are their comrades. It was a fatality for
Cranach that in the learned and courtly surroundings
of Wittenberg he was so often compelled to labour
against the trend of his talents. In\these simple
pictures of fable he is the most German of Germans.
One loves to think of him sitting in his drug shop beside
the heavy pigskin folios, brewing the herbs of the
German forest into wonderful elixirs. There is a
1A mountain demon of the Riesengebirge.—Ep,
VOL. I.—20
304 Germanic Painting
certain relation between his art and the pharmacy;
for he and Spitzwerg, the two apothecaries in the
history of art, are also most closely related as artists.
VI.— Alsace and Suabia
Matthias Grünewald, whose Conversion of Mauritius hangs beside Cranach’s Lucregia in Munich, again leads us to the southern soil. Not untruly does Sandrart, the acute connoisseur, call him the German Correggio. In sentiment, indeed, he has little in com- mon with the painter of Parma; his cruel naturalism, his delight in suffering and demonic fantasy found a counterpart neither in Correggio nor in any other Italian master; but in a colouristic sense the character- isation is accurate. For Griinewald’s relation to the school of Diirer resembles Correggio’s to the school of Rome. In the circumstance that neither prints from wood-cuts nor from line engravings by him exist, the difference is expressed. While other German artists pre- ferred the burin to the brush and gave their paintings the character of large coloured prints, Grunewald thought in a pictorial manner, and felt his power only in uniting bright, glowing colours in powerful harmonies. In his paintings there are no sharp outlines or arch- itectonic composition, but dissolving masses of colour and a magic chiaroscuro enveloping the scene with a subtle charm. In pathos also he is characteristically German, far deeper than the Romanic artists, although
certain shades of his sentiment remind one of Correggio.
A certain dreamy, sensuous tendency lends to his
Madonna at Colmar an almost North Italian character.
When Sandrart! characterised him as the German Correggio, he had, without knowing it, correctly determined the artistic origin of Grinewald. Correggio and Grunewald have sprung from the same source: their spiritual father is Leonardo. While it is not certain that Grunewald visited Italy, it must be re- membered that even to-day many a journey made by a young artist is not immediately recorded by a re- porter. In all of his pictures Griinewald used a kind of heraldic, late Gothic decoration—never antique : ornaments, columns or pillars as he would have done had he seen the South. He was perhaps attracted by something else besides the architecture of Italy. We know that when Durer went to Venice he was most interested in the problems of line, eurythmy and the nude. Although Griinewald was also impressed as his picture of St. Mauritius at Munich shows, by the monumental simplicity of Italian art, the mighty pose of its figures, and the nobility of its draperies, he was even more attracted by the wonderful world of colour and of sentiment which Leonardo had revealed. The effects of light in his paint are Leonardesque,
1 Joachim von Sandrart (1606-88), himself a painter and engraver,
is the Vasari of German art. The seventh volume of his monumental
work upon the fine arts, Teutsche Academie der Bau-, Bildhauer-
und Malerkunst (2 vols., Nuremberg, 1675-79), revised by Volkmann
(8 vols., 24., 1768-75), contains the lives of the painters.—Eb..,,
306 Germanic Painting
as is also the smile that plays about Mary’s lips
and the soft wavy hair encircling her countenance. The
Madonna in the Grotto is the elder sister of the same
subject at Colmar. Even the landscapes are different
from what Germany offers; he does not, like Altdorfer
and Cranach, paint the young green foliage of German
woods; but a sensuous, sappy nature, recalling the
Riviera. All the plants are luxuriant and rich in col-
our, almost seeming to smother in their overpowering
fulness of life. Every tree makes the impression of
rapid tropical growth. Sappy parasites wind from
stem to stem; garlands and creepers climb luxuriantly
through the branches; and glowing red roses gleam
from the dark foliage. It is curious to hear that even
the donor of Griinewald’s principal work was an Italian,
the preceptor Guido Guersi; but even stranger to
observe that many of his Leonardesque qualities are
found in the works of an older artist of Mayence, the
Master of the Amsterdam Cabinet.
In its pictorial and spiritual qualities, Griinewald’s masterpiece, the celebrated Isenheim altar-piece, now in the Museum of Colmar, is the most astonishing work produced by German art during the fifteenth century. Although he does not stand in such close relation to nature as Cranach and Altdorfer, and al- though it is useless to seek for German soulfulness in his works, he has nevertheless run through the whole scale of human emotion: from transfigured sensuality to cruel tragedy, and from joyful ecstasy to ghostly
Hlsace and Suabia 307
‘‘Satanism.” An entire witches’ Sabbath is let loose
in his painting representing the Temptation of St.
Antony. From the ravines and the fissure in the
rock hideous monsters crawl forth, not the tame little
devils of Schongauer, but wild demonic creatures.
Then there is a change of scene; heaven opens, angels
descend, and a golden temple of luxuriant parasites,
grape vines, and flowers arises, as if by magic, from
the landscape. Cherubim descend, making music and
singing in stormy devotion to Mary. In the other
wings of the altar, a wild cry of pain strikes us. The
sufferings of Christ are over; the arms of the cross
bend under the burden of his lifeless body. The
wounds made by the scourge still bleed; the fingers are
cramped, the toes stretched, and the feet swollen;
the head, like that of a man who had been hanged,
sinks heavily to one side. Magdalen cries aloud, and
Mary sinks to the earth in deathlike rigidity The
Resurrection is Griinewald’s greatest work as a painter
of light. The starry heaven is opened and the clouds
are torn apart; but while the earth remains in darkness,
fluttering cloud-like light floods the Saviour, whose
figure has no corporeal but a ghostly effect; it seems an
apparition of light which has suddenly taken shape,
only to dissolve again into vapour. This is more than a
colouristic achievement; it is a new way of thinking.
The linear style of older artists is replaced by a purely
pictorial style, centring around the treatment of
light and shade. A curious perspective in the history
308 Germanic Painting
of art is here revealed. Sandrart writes that the
painter Philipp Uffenbach, a pupil of Griinewald’s
pupil Hans Grimmer, had often told him at Frankfort
of the strange master who “led such a melancholy
life’ at Mayence. This Uffenbach was the master
of Adam Elsheimer, who inspired Pieter Lastmann,
who was in turn the teacher of Rembrandt; and thus
the two greatest fantastic painters of the North clasp
hands over the centuries.
An immediate influence upon German art was not exercised by Griinewald. For it would hardly har- monise with the style of Hans Baldung to call him a successor.of this master. It is true that upon making the acquaintance of the Isenheim altar in 1512 he adopt- ed its creator's tendency towards dreamy and colour- istic effects. If nothing were known of Grunewald, the altar of the Freiburg minster might be celebrated as the greatest sixteenth-century German achievement in colour. The beaming light, the tropical landscape with the luxuriant palms in whose foliage angels are swinging, resemble those in Griinewald’s works. But for lack of the instinct of a creative spirit, the colour is subordinated to rigid line.
Of his later panels, painted at Strassburg, the al- legories and his representation of Death stand nearest to the sentiment of our own day. Baldung here shows a fine eye for the sensuous charm of the female nude. Women, music, and cats are curiously juxta- posed in the example at Nuremberg. Strange also is
Alsace and Suabia - 309
the dzmonic trend of many of his works. One thinks
of Stuck’s Sin before the woman full of passionate
desire at whose feet the serpent crawls, or of Rops,
before the allegories of the Basel Museum, in which
death, like a were-wolf, seizes youthful women, pressing
his fleshless teeth in elfine, vampire-like passion upon
their rosy lips.
As Leonardo was for Grunewald, so Giovanni Bellini was a mentor for the Suabian masters. They are equally unacquainted with thoughtful fantasy, German inwardness, or wild passion; but insinuating, charming, and pleasing in their gentle sentiment, graceful flow of line, and harmonious colour. The treasures of the Italian Renaissance had been revealed to them earlier than to the Frankish and Bavarian masters, and they dallied with these ornaments as the Italians had centuries before with the antique. One sees splendid halls with painted ceilings resting upon Corinthian columns, mighty niches in churches with open aisles, Renaissance fountains and gilded thrones, in the midst of which, as in the Venetian paintings, gentle and quiet events occur.
In Ulm Martin Schaffner was the first to follow this path. Instead of the unctuous pulpit tone sounded by Zeitblom, his elder countryman, he indulges in worldly causerie. There is nothing angular or rugged in his works, but all is of flowing elegance. In his principal painting, the organ-doors of the imperial foundation of Wettenhausen, now in Munich, rich Gothic foliage
310 Germanic Painting
is combined with cupids, dolphins, and other joyful
decorative elements of the Renaissance. Gay columns
of marble with golden capitals arise; and the draperies
fall with an easy elegance. His Death of Mary does not
occur in her bed, as in older German paintings, but in
the solemn nave of a church where, surrounded by
apostles, she sinks toearth. For Schaffner had already
been influenced by the representative spirit of the
cinquecento, which considered the homelike and genre
accessories of the older art ordinary.
Augsburg, in which, unlike Nuremberg, the life of a great city pulsated, was the little Paris of those days. Even to-day, notwithstanding the levelling influence of time, the two cities preserve this contrast: in Nurem- berg Gothic churches, oddly decorated tabernacles, and angular narrowness; in Augsburg broad streets, mighty Renaissance palaces, and fountains with statues. The fountain of Augusta, a proud embodiment of the Roman origin of Augusta Vindelicorum, is the characteristic feature of Augsburg. Not only by reason of its pride as a Roman colony, but also through its commercial relation with Venice, it was destined to be an Italian enclave on German soil. The high- school of Augsburg merchants was Venice, where in the Fondaco dei Tedeschi its merchant princes like the Fuggers obtained their education.
Its painters, therefore, were the Venetians of the North. Ulrich Apt alone, in his Crucifixion at Augs- burg, the altar-piece of the Munich University Chapel,
Alsace and Suabta 311
and the Bewailing of the Body of Christ, creates a
northern and Netherlandish impression. The pictures
of the others all point to the South. Although Hans
Burgkmair belonged to the school of Schongauer, his
connection with Venice is proved by the fact that
Caspar Straffo, a Venetian, was apprenticed to him
in 1501, and that the background of his chiaroscuro
print Death the Executioner exhibits a canal scene
with gondolas. It would be vain to search for delicacy
of feeling in his works. Even in treating such subjects
as the Passion or the Apocalypse in his wood-cuts, he
achieved only a decorative effect, and confined himself
to placing ideas borrowed from others in pleasing
surroundings. But the prints designed for the Wezss-
kunig,a life of the Emperor Maximilian, are graceful and
elegant, and moreover valuable sources of information
upon costumes and arms. The same sense of harmony
in form and colour also characterises his paintings.
Quite Venetian is the mighty, gloomy effect of the
Renaissance architecture surrounding the figures, and
the manner in which he places the throne of Mary
in the midst of the landscape. The heads of his
Madonnas, with the regular oval and loose plaits of hair
framing the features, bear the impress of the South.
By a capriciously distorted position of the mouth he
sought to impart a Bellinesque touch and something
of the dreamy melancholy of upper Italy to his works.
Even his feeling for landscape is Venetian; for he
painted only southern nature—golden oranges gleaming
312 Germanic Painting
in the dark foliage—never the German; nor did he
attempt to render detail in sharp outline, but rather
to attain misty light effects in which the outlines are
dissolved in the decorative masses.
Gumpolt Giltlinger, a rather clumsier artist, offers in his Adoration of the Kings further variations of the same style, and Christopher Amberger is altogether a Venetian. His music-making angels, the soft, full figures of his women with their golden hair, the pompous columnar architecture and the glowing colour—all these things impress one as if the altar-pieces had been painted not on the banks of the Lech but on the Lagoons. His best portraits are in the Berlin Gallery: those of Charles V. and Sebastian Mutinster, which unite with the acute observation of nature, character- istic of the German, Venetian nobility of character and harmony of colour. By similar works the last great Augsburg artist, Hans Holbein the younger, achieved his world-wide reputation.
VII.— Holbein
Since Durer and Holbein are honoured as the greatest German artists of the sixteenth century, the in- clination to place them in antithesis arises; not in order to decide, in accordance with the well-known scheme, which of the two was the greater, but be- cause comparisons afford very valuable means of characterisation.
One is first struck by the change which had taken place in art since the appearance of Durer. As a pupil of Wohlgemuth, the latter began with angular Gothic forms, and laboriously achieved harmony and simplicity; while Holbein stood from the beginning upon the soil of the. Renaissance, which he had learned from his father. Besides the differences in time, there was a Striking difference in their surroundings; in the one case the uneven, angular Nuremberg, in the other the urban and elegant Augsburg, which also im- parted to its artists an urbane and polished character. Finally they were radically different in character. Although both were Germans they were nevertheless antipodes, While Diirer was at bottom a scholar and closed his activity with theoretical and_ scientific works, Holbein was quite indifferent to the theory of art, and, indeed, perhaps never took a pen in hand to write. As soon as he had left Nuremberg Durer at once kept a diary, or at least wrote long letters to his friends; but no letters of Holbein to his friends or family survive, notwithstanding his long residence abroad. This is indicative not merely of laziness in writing but of lack of feeling. Standing before the celebrated portrait in Basel with which he said farewell to his tamily in 1529, one receives a similar impression. His wife sitting there is the same being to whom he had sworn faith ten years before, except that she has grown older and now seems a burden to him. The handsome fellow of thirty-five, who wishes to conquer the world
314 Germanic Painting
for himself, could no longer use this matron who seemed
to him so provincial and countrified.
“‘ Was schert mich Weib, was schert mich Kind,
Ich trage weit besseres Verlangen.
Lass sie betteln gehen, wenn sie hungrig sind;”
this was probably his only sentiment for his family.
Durer would never have deserted his wife, whom he took with him even upon his journey to the Netherlands; and he was bound by the same tenderness to his native town. However much he rejoiced to receive a visit from Bellini at Venice, or when at Antwerp the artists instituted a torch-light procession in his honour, nothing could have moved him to leave Nuremberg. Holbein, on the other hand, was more suited in his unpatriotic cosmopolitanism to the international world of learning at Basel. Among these humanists he found his especial affinity in Erasmus. Could Durer be summoned from the grave and asked whom among his contemporaries he honoured most, he would have answered, Luther. He feared for him with con- stant solicitude, and read his writings with throbbing heart. Holbein’s life was influenced only by the Voltaire of the sixteenth century, the sceptical and ironical Erasmus.
It would not be wrong to call Diirer the Luther and Holbein the Erasmus of German art; for the latter’s portrait of himself has the same mocking and critical expression. In his portrait at Munich Durer appears as a visionary, staring rigidly into another world, like an
HANS HOLBEIN THE YOUNGER
PORTRAIT OF GEORG GISSE Berlin Gallery
olbein | 315
apparition of Christ among mankind. As sacramental
and solemn as is Direr’s portrait, so profane and
worldly is that of Holbein. His clear, light blue eyes
gaze not into the other world, but sharply and keenly
into this one. There is also something cold and
merciless in this face of the man who, when his father
ended in misery and his brother was overwhelmed
by life, was as cold and indifferent toward them as
others had been to him.
A document of 1517, summoning him to appear before court in order to answer for a nocturnal brawl with goldsmiths’ apprentices, illumines another side of his nature. From it one can see that he also re- sembled those Swiss artists who were known as such wild fellows. Urs Graf especially, a rude and ad- venturous companion, was a true type of the time. He marched through the country with market-women; served as a lansquenet in the murderous battle of Marignano; was warned in court to cease the licentious life which he had openly and shamelessly led with strumpets, and had to promise that he would hence- forth neither jostle, pinch nor beat his lawful spouse. Holbein also was something of a lansquenet. It is no accident that he was so fond of drawing quarrelsome peasants and lansquenets; that he painted the first courtesan picture in German art, that of Dorothea Offenburg; and that in his London will he made no provision for his family at Basel, but only for his illegitimate children.
ai Germanic Painting
With this analysis of his nature, that of his art is
also given. Diirer, the thinker, expresses as an artist
also the power of his personality in thoughts. His
art is poetic and story-telling, and his principal char-
acteristic is a brooding element, a reflective absorption
in mysterious, allegorical ideas. Holbein never offers
us such heavy nourishment. Not only is the allegorical
and thoughtful absent; he is also a stranger to the
hearty and confidential element of Diirer’s work.
In examining the latter’s St. Jerome one imagines that
it is the artist himself, sitting in his quiet retreat near
the Tiergartner gate, labouring at his engravings and
rejoicing in the sunshine that plays so cosily upon
the floor and chests. Turning through the leaves
of his Life of Mary the student is charmed with the
deep love of family pervading the works of this man,
who was never blessed with children. In his landscapes
he himself lives, as fresh, pious, joyful, and free as they
are, and with the wanderer’s staff in this hand he
marches over hill and dale. There is nothing of
all this in the works of Holbein. Homeless himself,
he was lacking in the German love of home. Although
he had children, he only knew the child as an Italian
putto. When he paints landscapes at all they are so
much like applied art that one could more readily
conceive them as chased in silver than as existing in
reality. Mysterious nooks and cosy corners, inviting
the beholder to reflect and dream, do no exist in his
works.
tholbein 317
As Durer began with his Apocalypse, so did Holbein
with book-titles; but while even in such work the
former remained a deep thinker—as, for example,
in his Knots—everything in Holbein’s works is char-
acterised by a clear and flowing elegance. Besides
the ornamentation of books, he also designed for
applied art; and while Diurer’s decorative designs
were dramas unsuitable for the stage (because in
these things, too, he placed so much thought that
no artisan could carry them out), Holbein’s, although
everything in them is strange, whimsical, and joyous,
were at the same time of a simplicity which admitted
of practical execution. He knew exactly how much
he could expect of the artisan and of the material.
Passing from the ornamental to his designs of figures, let us first examine those for stained glasses. Saints, Madonnas and angels alternate with sturdy lansquenets in gay and picturesque costume; not to forget those designs of feminine costume, which were resurrected thirty years ago by Makart and Fritz August Kaulbach. Finally, he also appears as a singer of the Messzad, in which work his difference from Durer is clearly shown. While the latter com- posed thoughtful religious epics and preached the life of the Redeemer to the people, Holbein only gives designs for stained glasses; quite unconcerned as to the emotional content of the subject, and only inquiring how the silhouette of the figures would harmonise: with their decorative surroundings. The
318 Germanic Painting
same is true of his wood-cuts, which belong to the
same circle of ideas. Durer never illustrated, but
incorporated his own thoughts, bringing before the
eye only that which moved his innermost being.
Holbein’s illustration of the Bible would hardly have
appeared had not Luther completed his translation
just at that time. In his illustration of the Apocalypse ~
he shapes even those things which for Diirer contained
the deepest riddles of the spirit into clear and elegant.
forms. With the same impartiality shown in his
designs for Luther’s Bible, he illustrated the Vulgate
also. The Old Testament, with which he was con-
nected by no ties of heart, permitted him to appear
even more as a profane narrator. Even in his Dance
of Death he is a jolly comrade whom neither the devil
nor hell inspires with terror. The night of insanity
broods over Rethel’s version, and that of Klinger is
thoughtful and demonic. Death, as Holbein .con-
ceived him, is not the great world-dominating power,
but a wild soldier, who, like Urs Graf, takes pleasure
in jostling, poking, and beating civilians.
Even with the brush in hand, he remains the same able workman. The entire manual dexterity of the old German stone-masons seems revived in him. He mounted scaffolds to decorate facades like those still popular in southern Germany and Tyrol. In his mural paintings of the council-chamber at Basel he obtained a monumental effect by a simple de- corative style. Even in his panels he never became
‘tholbein 319
a dreamer, but rather reminds us of the dual activity of
Menzel. Examining the ornamental illustrations of
Menzel for the works of Frederick the Great, one is as-
tonished to see with what facility the same man, other-
wise known as a realistic painter, was also a master of
clever improvisation. So Holbein, the facile decora-
tor and improviser, is in his oil paintings essentially
realistic; he never applies the brush without consulting
his model, knowing no fantasy, and trusts only his
clear and sure eye. -
His first masterpiece, the Christ of the Basel Museum, only bears this title pro forma. It is in truth a powerful realistic representation, before which in our own day Léon Bonnat and Wilhelm Tribner stood in thoughtful meditation before they themselves painted the subjects which aroused the horror of visitors to universal expositions. In other works Holbein places the chief emphasis upon costume; he introduces as saints the beautiful women, much décolletées and in rich costumes, who at a later period aroused the same indignation among Protestant reformers as had Ghirlandajo’s figures with Savonarola. In the Madonna at Solothurn he has portrayed his wife Elsbeth Schmidt, at that time a young woman, and his oldest child. As in the northern Italian works, a knight and a monk stand at her side as guard of honour. The same noble simplicity was not possible in the Madonna of Burgo- master Meyer, the original of which is at Darmstadt. Here the problem was to unite a whole family—the
VOL. 1.—21
320 Germanic Painting
father, his two wives, and three children—about Mary
in a picture which should serve as an epitaph. It
afforded, however, all the greater opportunity to a
portrait painter; for it would be out of place to speak
of religious feeling or to search for heavenly longing
and lyric softness in this picture. On the contrary,
just this Madonna shows wherein the gifts of the master
Jay; for Holbein’s distinction lies in his portraits.
Even in portraiture he cannot dispense with the
coldness which is his prevailing characteristic, Such
a clear and sober man was incapable of sentimental
fits. When Holbein, unknown and searching for for-
tune, came to England, he was taken up by Sir Thomas
More, the royal chancellor. For a year he lived in
More’s house, and through him he was introduced
into learned and court circles. Yet in the following
year he served the same Henry who had condemned
his first patron to the scaffold. He witnessed the
executions caused by Henry, and lived through a
dance of death far more awful than the one he had
designed. The proudest. and most touching figures
upon the stage of Henry VIII.’s reign stand before
us in his portraits: statesmen, princes of the church,
noblemen, and beautiful women, over whom even while
he painted them the Damocles sword of destiny hung.
His portraits betray nothing of this tragedy; even the
temperament and disposition of his models is a matter
of indifference to him. A stranger living among
strangers he only felt himself a camera obscura... Trav-
HANS HOLBEIN THE YOUNGER
ARCHBISHOP WARHAM OF CANTERBURY
Louvre
Holbein 321
elling in the service of the King to Brussels and later
to Cléves, he painted the proposed queens Christina
of Denmark and Anne of Cléves with the same ob-
jectivity with which he also painted Jane Seymour.
One might almost say that Holbein himself had some-
thing of Henry VIII. about him. One can hardly
conceive of other German artists, like Durer and
Griinewald, living in England. What could such
fantasts have done in the midst of these practical,
positive people, with their sensible matter-of-fact
disposition and their sanguine egotism which knew no
ideals ? Holbein suited England; when he became
court painter to Henry VIII. two congenial spirits found
each other. There was a secret bond between them,
the same pitiless coldness. Even his colour appears
to supplement this cold sensibility; for although
Holbein occasionally used warm colour, cold harmonies
are far more characteristic of his work. Blue and
black, green and grey especially appear in cool and
silvery harmonies, as distinguished as they are icy.
In this unparalleled objectivity lies also his greatness. Consider the portrait painters of all centuries; each one is more or less one-sided, succeeding with certain heads, but utterly hopeless when attempting to depict others. Jan van Eyck rejoices in pronounced ugliness, in fan- tastic noses, wrinkled hands, and furrowed coun- tenances. Durer, the master of the Four Apostles, succeeds .as a portraitist only in interpreting the heads of thinkers: while van Dyck, Holbein’s successor in
322 Germanic Painting
England, is powerless to portray rugged, manly
characters, and feels himself at home only with gracious
womanhood and dandified nobility. In contrast to this,
Holbein reflects nature with an absolute objectivity,
and is equally great in portraying the business-like
expression of a Giese or the puffed-up brutality of
King Henry; a weather-browned, swearing sea-bear,
or the distinguished ambassador Moret; the refined
grace of Christina of Denmark, or the homely pro-
vincialism of Anne of Cléves. Considering the paths
afterwards traversed by court painting, one must
admire not only the versatility but also the sentiment
of the master. There is something imposing in this
rugged plebeian pride which, even before the king’s
throne, never learned how to flatter.
Even more than Holbein’s pictures one admires his drawings. For the modern eye is accustomed to value artistic mastery most when it is expressed with boldest directness. A sketch preserving the original thought, the very handwriting of the master, is dearer to us than the completed painting no longer revealing the process of creation. Holbein’s drawings, and es- pecially the sketches in Windsor Castle, therefore con- tain, according to the present taste, the quintessence of his art. He was the first to form for himself what may be called a stenographic style, which in its grand- lose simplicity has no equal in the art of the sixteenth century. . The simpler the means, the more astonishing © the effect. A skilful line of the pencil suffices to fix
Holbein 323
a character or to create the impression of the corporeal.
Had he created nothing else than these rapid and
accurate drawings, they alone would suffice to insure
him a place among the first draughtsmen in the history
of art.
When he died at London in 1543 German art was buried with him. That he was compelled to leave home and seek sustenance in a foreign land, already presaged the end of German artistic life. For in the religious and political struggles of the day art was necessarily silenced. Such works as still came into being were created by foreigners; and instead of German art there existed only Italian art upon German soil.
Chapter IV.— The Triumph of the Sensual In Italy
I.— The Influence of Leonardo
IF one wished to denominate the change which Italian art experienced at the beginning of the sixteenth century with a single characteristic expression, he might call it the reaction against Savonarola. A spiritual period was followed by one of sensuality, and the mortification of the senses by their triumph. When Botticelli painted, Savonarola’s eloquence had changed all Italy into a house of God. The people streamed together to hear from him the gospel of renunciation and of the joys of paradise. The Banishment of the Vices, at that time so often painted, is no eternal allegory, but homage to Savonarola, who drove the vices out of Italy.
But when the executioner’s pyre of the Piazza della Signoria had consumed the troublesome disturber of peace, what he had outlawed, sensuality and the joy of living, arose phoenix-like from the ashes. It is true that at this time religious notes were also sounded. Luther had nailed his theses to the church door at Wittenberg, and an echo of these blows vibrated through Italy. But it was only a soft echo which was soon silent. Italy did not need to be excited over what took place in foreign countries. The generation which listened to Savonarola was followed by a new worldly race which wished to enjoy to the full the pleasures which life offered. The earth itself had become a paradise, and the most beautiful thing in this paradise was the fall of man. If, as was related, a cardinal at the court of Leo X. had his bathroom decorated with love-myths of the ancient gods; if another declared that to the perfection of the papal court only women were lacking; if, as is reported, one of the following popes upon his death-bed answered with a painful smile to the priest who was painting the joys of the other world, “This pleasure will be all the greater the longer it is deferred’”’—all such incidents illumine, in a striking manner, the spirit of the time. And what happened at Rome, the city of St. Peter, is more comprehensible elsewhere. There were eleven thousand courtesans in Venice, and at Parma there is said to have been a nunnery where the experiences related in Boccaccio’s Decamerone could have been duplicated. A paganism rejoicing in the senses, such as had existed at Athens and Alexandria, had once more come over the world, Art is the chronicle of its age, and if a title were sought for the epoch following Savonarola, it could only be found in one like the following: art under the influence of sensuality. Glanc- ing backward into the past, it is not difficult to recognise in Leonardo the man who began this new era. For however much he may have resembled Botticelli, Bellini, and Perugino in spirituality, the soul which he gave to his women is a different one. For these artists, however different they were, the Christian gospel of the renunciation of earthly things was determinative. The eyes of their chaste and pale women do not long for earthly joys, but gaze, fore- boding future suffering, with melancholy piety into the infinite. In this resignation and perfect renunciation of all earthly joys, they embody the ethical content, the innermost spirit of Christianity. Leonardo’s works contain no such religious sentiment. One is na longer reminded of a great cathedral where the quivering incense ascends to heaven: the odeur de femme has replaced the incense. The senses of these women have been awakened, and they no longer practise self-denial. Like a suppressed, erotic earthquake is the quiver about their mouth, and the moist shimmer which the Greeks gave to the love-goddess glistens in their eye. While Botticelli painted his Venus as chaste as Mary, in Leonardo’s hands Mary became a goddess of love.
The body also asserted its rights-against the soul. Those earlier artists thought with Millet: When I paint a mother, she should only be beautiful through the glance with which she beams upon her child. The earthly grace of Leonardo is not confined to the head; the love charm is indissolubly united with the body;
Influence of Leonardo 327
and for this reason thin gauze draperies cling to the
voluptuous forms. In his search for sensual beauty,
he commingles the charms of both sexes.
In subject also he stands in contrast to the artists of the age of Savonarola. They painted the Crucifixion, the Entombment, and the Bewailing of the Body of Christ in a manner as gloomily pathetic as the thunder tones of the prophet himself. From Leonardo da Vinci, the steel-armoured youth who paces so serenely in Verrocchio’s Tobias, all the waves of the religious movement rebounded. There is nothing sad in his works. Even his Last Supper is not the representation of the sad hour of parting, but a masterly dramatisation of a great psychological event. In the picture at Berlin he did not choose the moment of the Crucifixion. or of the Entombment, but of the Resurrection. Christ is represented not as suffering, but as the victor over
life and death. It is not his friends who bewail the martyred one, but two saints ecstatically glance up to the radiant Son of God. Indeed, he goes even further. As he knew no suffering, he knew no age and no decay. He avoided every theme which rendered it necessary to introduce Mary as an aged matron, as Bellini and Botticelli had done in_their representation of the Pietd@. In order to avoid painting folds and wrinkles, he went so far as to represent St. Anne in the same radiant youthful beauty as her daughter Mary.
How greatly he touched the heart of his time in this respect is shown by the literary products of the epoch.
328 Triumph of the Sensual
The same significance that the treatises on perspective
and anatomy had for the fifteenth century belongs
to those upon the beauty of women in the sixteenth—
such as the Venetian Luigini’s Libro delle belle donne
or the Discorso della bellezga by the Florentine Firen-
zuola. The same spirit of erotic sensuality and
Olympian serenity henceforth prevails in art. The
whole emotional content of the age is expressed in that
Leonardesque smile. In the Crucifixion every expression
of pain is softened, and the harsh severity of the theme
is deprived of its realistic truth by delicate treatment.
In martyrdoms not the physical pain and suffering, but
ecstatic foreboding of heavenly joys is depicted.
They no longer love to linger with sad things, but tim-
idly avoid all that can cause pain. Christ’s heart
bleeding and full of wounds, and his passion, about
which the representations of the German masters
centred, no longer exist for the Italians. It is dis-
tasteful to this age which takes so much joy in the
senses to see God suffer, die, and offer himself as a
sacrifice. Mary, too, is neither the pale maiden nor the
careworn mother, but an elegant lady of fashion who,
even in her later years, preserved the charm of a young
widow. The saints who serve her as guard of honour
no longer resemble the ecstatic children of the desert
and the weather-beaten grey-beards of former days;
they are now joyful individuals for whom heaven
signifies a court of love, and gallant young gentlemen
bowing delicately before an adored lady. Indeed,
Influence of Leonardo 329
they even receive a touch of feminine beauty. John
the Baptist is transformed from the aged man in
haircloth into a nude curly-haired youth with ecstatic
glance; Magdalen, the penitent, becomes a fair sinner,
and Golgotha has been transformed into a Christian
Olympus, where there is neither struggle nor tragic
pain, but pure unsullied happiness.
Thence to the actual Olympus was not a long journey. After Leonardo had opened the way with his Leda, all the antique subjects outlawed by Savona- rola found their way back into art. As in Leonardo’s painting, the pale Crucified One of Golgotha soared to heaven, and the joyful swarms of the gods of Greece took possession of the earth. The Hill of Venus which Botticelli, the penitent sinner, had deserted, now became the shrine to which the painters made pilgrimages. They knew nothing of the solemn power of the under world; of the struggles of the demi-gods Jason and Perseus, Theseus and Meleager, or of the heroes of Roman history. Ovid alone is the breviary of the age. As they depicted even the religious figures deprived of clothing, so also they preferred mythological subjects, because the Hellenic was such a lightly clad and very décolleté epocn. In abrupt contrast to the monkish art of the past, they celebrated the soft linear rhythm of the nude; they painted almost exclusively the voluptuous love-adventures of the ancient gods who transformed themselves to delude fair mortals; and used antique subjects only to whisper sensuous, melting
330 Triumpb of the Sensual
words and tempting love-melodies. A kind of fifteenth
century Rococo thus followed the impassioned Baroco
of the age of Savonarola.
II.— Leonardo’s Followers
The painters who assembled about the great master in Milan have not as yet been adequately considered by modern scholarship, which has dismissed them as planets shining by reflected light from the sun of Leonardo; as imitators who change the hoarded treasure of the master into small coin. Leonardo, of course, forms the imposing background of the artistic life of Milan. We are reminded of an Alpine landscape, the highest summit of which is his mighty head, so like an ancient river-god’s. At the foot of the colossus the others contend; not giants, but men. Each of them had his own personality, and increased by some feature the realm of beauty. It is not correct to say that they only imitated the female ideal of Leonardo; every one had his own, differing in delicate shades from that of the master: the same melody, perhaps, but in a different key.
In the portrait of the Emperor Maximilian, Ambro- gio de Predis still appears quite a quattrocentist. In the portrait of the Ambrosiana formerly supposed to be Bianca Sforza, wife of Maximilian, the Leonardesque female type first appears. How deeply he absorbed
AMBROGIO DA PREDIS
Ce ed
2
oe
ey ES
BIANCA MARIA SFORZA
Ambrosiana Collection, Milan
Leonardo’s Followers "331
the spirit of the master is shown by the London copy
of the Madonna Litta in the Hermitage at St. Peters-
burg formerly also attributed to Leonardo. It is the
representation of a distinguished lady taking pleasure,
as they did in the age of Rousseau, in nursing
her child. A sensual and piquant touch is here im-
parted to the ancient motive of the Madonna.
Andrea Solario, descended from an ancient family of
painters, was compelled as a young man to leave
Milan and received his first impressions in Venice.
His youthful works, principally portraits and half-
length figures of the Madonna; create the impression
made by a pupil of Bellini. After his return to Milan
he seems to have been influenced by Borgognone.
Reminiscent of this phase of his style, which resembles
that of the Empire, is the Repose on the Flight into
Egypt of the Museo Poldi Pezzoli, the strange Madonna
who reminds one of Queen Louise of Prussia. In
the Madonna of the Louvre he has become a pupil
of Leonardo, but a perfumed and over-refined one.
His other painting in the Louvre, the delicate head of
John, upon a silver platter, is an interesting example
of how art, freeing herself from the church, is at this
time used to make quite personal confessions. In
his portrait of the Liechtenstein Gallery, Leonardo
created the type of the demonic woman; and
Solario, developing the theme, celebrates love as the
demonic, enslaving power. For the refined head with
the delicate features is probably his own portrait,
332 Triumph of the Sensual
and the entire painting is dedicated to the lady who
played the rdle of Salome in his life.
Two other pupils of Leonardo, Francesco Melzi and Antonio Boltraffio, occupy a peculiar position, even as men. Such a charm was exercised by Leonardo’s personality upon his surroundings that young aristo- crats for whom it was not at all necessary devoted themselves to painting. With such dilettanti the problem is a peculiar one. Being less constrained and in a position to follow their taste more than a profes- sional could, perhaps also because of their aristocratic descent, they often created the most refined works.
Although Boltraffio’s female types are derived from Leonardo’s, he marks a new step in the history of painting. In former pictures Mary was always the Virgin: at first the maiden who had renounced the world, and then a more sensual type. Boltraffio’s Madonna in the National Gallery—a woman mighty in outline, with serious eyes quivering with suppressed melancholy, with deep black hair shimmering almost into blue framing her harsh, brown features— such a type has less in common with Leonardo than with Watts arid Feuerbach. The Child comes from its mother’s lap and returns into the lap of the earth: such perhaps was also the thought of Watts when he conceived the Angel of Death. A manly accent, a touch of solemn grandeur, distinguishes Boltraffio from the others. Solemn and sublime is the figure of St. Barbara in the midst of a gloomy, rocky landscape ;
Leonardo’s Followers 333
Stately and severe La belle Ferronitre of the Louvre}
and of the Czartoryski gallery—both after the same
model used at a later period for the Casio Madonna,
On account of the same serious and monumental trend
the Resurrecticn of the Berlin Gallery should perhaps
be ascribed not to Leonardo but to Boltraffio.
Francesco Melzi, Leonardo’s youthful friend, who
followed him to France and was present at his death,
is known only by a single painting, Vertummus in the
Berlin Gallery, But what distinction exhales from
this delightful work! Even the choice of subject is sin-
gular. No artist before him, except Leonardo in a
sketch, had painted that little-known tender scene of the
Metamorphoses, where Vertummus, the radiant god of
the seasons, changes himself into a poor old woman
in order to excite the pity and thereby win the love of
the chaste Pomona. With what choice taste the
thin gauze garment of Pomona is arranged, and how
entrancingly sweet are her dainty Rococo head
and the smile playing about her mouth! With what
fine taste of the connoisseur has he chosen all these
flowers and arranged them into a fragrant still-life!
True, the same dainty head, the same delight in flowers,
the same seductive, tender female charms, and the
same Hellenic spirit recur in Columbina, a painting in
the Hermitage. If this, as modern research now
assumes, is the work of Giampetrino, Vertummus
1 This painting is commonly ascribed to Leonardo, and sometimes
identified with Lucrezia Crivelli, the mistress of Lodovico Sforza. —Eb,
334 | Triumpb of the Sensual
should also be ascribed to him. His other known
works are principally Madonnas, rather glassy in
technique, and in the midst of cosy, almost Nether-
landish landscapes.
Bernardino Luini is the perambulating master-work- man of theschool. The many crowded frescoes which he painted for the small towns of upper Italy might lead to the under-estimation of his lovable talent. For he appears in these as a survivor of the quattrocento. Well-ordered composition and beautiful simplicity are lacking; and charming details like Magdalen in the Crucifixion are lost in the fulnessof indifferent figures. But in his youth he was a very dainty master, a true son of that Milan which sought in love-revelries a consolation for the horrors of war. He once painted his own portrait as St. Sebastian, looking ecstatically out of the picture, as if to charm beautiful women, and this trend towards an effeminate joyfulness pervades all his works. His picture of the Bathing Nymphs in the Palazzo Reale in Milan is something unheard-of in the art of the cimquecento; young maidens in poses approaching Fragonard, and a landscape as boldly handled as by any Impressionist of the present day. Ata later period he appears to best advantage in frescoes, when the problem, as in the Sposalizio is to paint soft and dreamy beings. Most reflective of all, and most reminiscent of Perugino, are those small pictures which he painted for quiet rural churches. At a time when religious sentiment was on the wane,
Leonardo's Followers 335
he imparted to biblical subjects an honesty and devoted
tenderness which seem an echo of the quattrocento.
He neither thrills nor frightens, but is mild and touching
and most in place when the subjects are quiet idyllic
scenes, silent friendliness or happy smiles. His female
martyrs have an expression of supreme blessedness,
and with sweet ecstacy Mary regards her Child. One
quite forgets that many works like the half-length
Vanity and Modesty are only the solution of one of
Leonardo’s school problems; that in the semi-circular
fresco in Lugano he had literally taken the Christ-child
from Leonardo’s St. Anne and little John from the
Vierge aux rochers. Yhe spectator never dreams
before his paintings, nor is he led into a secret workshop
reverberating with the throbbing thoughts of a genius.
But because Leonardo has painted so little, we love
Luini’s works as the emanations of his master’s spirit.
In the pictures of Cesare da Sesto Milanese blood is commingled with foreign elements. As he trans- planted the ideals of Leonardo to Rome, so also he himself adopted something of the Roman style. A striving after a grand style and a love of contrast take the place of Milanese softness. He regards the Eternal City with the eyes of the romanticist, and loves to depict native ruins covered with ivy in the background of his paintings. The principal example of this sentiment for ruins is the Adoration of the Kings at Naples, with its mannered and out-stretched figures. As the central group of these paintings
VOL. I.——22
336 Triumph of the Sensual
recurs almost unchanged in a picture of the Madonna
in the Hermitage, this also, which formerly bore
Leonardo’s name, was assigned to Cesare da Sesto.
He is probably the only master in question in that
lunette in Sant’ Onofrio which was also considered
a youthful work of Leonardo’s. In the Baptism of
Christ in the former Galleria Borghese he seemed
half Roman, half Venetian, like a double of Sebastiano
del Piombo, while in his St. Catherine at Frankfort,
the feminine ideal of Milan is translated into the
mystic and sickly—into the style of Gabriel Max.
The Madonnas of Gaudenzio Ferrari as well as the portraits of Bernardino de’ Conti are further exempli- fications of the fact that the school of Leonardo laid the foundations of modern painting of women. After Leonardo had shown the way, these masters were the first to realise the sensual charm of womanhood. They painted incidents like a flash of the eye, a smile wreath- ing the lips, the soft weariness following exertion, and the perfume of the hair, with the feeling of men to whom no sense of power but much appreciation of grace is accorded. That effeminate delicacy which has characterised so much of modern English art makes their works appeal especially to our own time.
Sodoma, the master of Siena, is the most over-refined of all. Like Luini, he also painted a number of in- different pictures. Possessing a ready pictorial talent, he fulfilled every commission in an elegant manner, and appeared, Proteus-like, in the most different
Leonardo's Followers 337
‘masks. Yet one feels which works occupied his heart
and which his hand only. In painting Crucifixions he
remains altogether cool; and if he attempts to be
energetic he becomes declamatory. In his pictures for
the monks of Monte Oliveto he not unaptly played
the réle of Signorelli or Zurbaran; but he took pleasure
only in the frescoes representing the courtesans at-
tempting to seduce St. Benedict.
His delight in shocking the good burghers of Siena is a significant trait of his character. During his work at Monte Oliveto, he denied entry to the monks; and when he did permit it, the first glance of the pious brethren fell upon the group of courtesans, whom, upon command of the prior, he was compelled to furnish with clothes. In the Crucifixion of the Siennese Academy he painted himself as a soldier, in a sturdy, defiant attitude. The summons of the tax commission to make declaration of his possessions he answered with a list of all the strange animals which he kept.
Only when the problem is to paint women can he be taken seriously; he is then an enchanting master, nervous and sensitive, and inimitable in the manner in which he transforms Leonardo’s smile into joyous, al- most frenzied ecstasy. As he is bold, almost Parisian, in the courtesan group at Monte Oliveto, so in the cele- brated painting of the Farnesina he depicted the bridal confusion of Roxana with the art of a connoisseur, fur- nishing a commentary, as in an Ars amandi, with the Cupids. Although the Leda of the Galleria Borghese
338 Triumph of the Sensual
is a copy, it nevertheless gives an idea of the delicate
Rococo perfume which pervaded the original. He
is also a fine interpreter of the state of unconsciousness
and of moments of gentle exhaustion; and the womanly
sense of shame or a virginal blush could only be ex-
pressed, as was done by Sodoma in his wonderful figure
of Eve, by a painter who was entirely a feminist.
He was even more charmed by the hermaphroditic expression in many of Leonardo’s drawings of young men. When Sebastian dies, his smile is as full of joy as if he was destined in the other world to become what the abducted Ganymede was to the Olympians. The whole character of Sodoma is expressed in the figure of Isaac in his Sacrifice of Abraham. This youth with the head of a young girl and the delicate hips, crossing his full round arms over his bosom, is the Antinous of Christian art—an ideal of beauty which only occurs in times of the highest culture and greatest immorality. The swan in his Leda and the squibs which the Siennese burghers sent him furnished the logical supplement. There is something strange in the activity of this light-hearted artist, who began his career, like a grand seigneur, in revelry and riot, kept horses for the races, and walked about in silk and velvet, escorted by beautiful slaves, to die at last not in prison, but in a hospital.’
In his description of Bazzi’s life, the statements of which Professor
Muther follows, Vasari seems to have been guided by no slight pre-
judice against the lighthearted and eccentric painter, due perhaps to
his extreme partisanship for Beccafumi, Bazzi’s chief rival at Siena. A
Giorgione 339
III.— Giorgione
Even Byzantine Venice had become a heathen city. With Aldus Manutius, the refined scholar, the hu- manistic movement began; the celebated Academia Graeca, in which he united his associates, considered itself a Platonic academy. At its meetings Greek was the only language spoken; a fine was levied upon every one who used an Italian word, and the proceeds were used to provide for banquets which remind one of the soupers à la grecque of the eighteenth century. The Hypnerotomachia Polyphili, that dreamy romance with its dainty wood-cuts, is the first monument of this time, when a breath of the bright and beautiful days of Hellas was Wafted over the oriental soil of Venice.
Painting, heretofore so religiously severe, also be- came an inspired hymn to the beauty of this world and the Hellenic joy inthesenses. Although Madonnas and saints were still painted, as in Bellini’s days, the spirit of the pictures was no longer the same. No Christian self-denial but heathen sensuality beams from the eyes of these figures. The body, formerly despised, becomes free, and voluptuous forms shatter the tender casement of the soul. Along with Mary,
fondness for racing was considered a mark of distinction in those days
So far from spending his last years in poverty and dying in a hospital,
Bazzi, the possessor of two houses at Siena, seems to have been in
affluent circumstances and to have lived quietly with his family. This
is evident from the documents cited in Milanesi’s edition of Vasari’s
Lives (Florence, 1878-85), vol. vi.—-Ep.
340 Triumph of the Sensual
Venus is honoured, and the gods of Greece make
their joyful entry.
At first there is little to be seen of this change. For the work which stands on the threshold of the Venetian cinquecento, the Madonna of Castelfranco, is so tender and oblivious of the world that it can hardly be distinguished from Bellini’s Holy Conversations. With the same tone with which the old century passed away, the new began. Two men, a young knight and a monk, stand guard before the throne of Mary. No breath of air moves, but everything is pervaded by a deep, silent repose, into which the saints also have dreamily sunk. Yet a dainty touch announces a new soul-life. However much the pretty oval head of the Madonna with its melancholy eyes and simply- parted brown hair resembles Bellini’s types her sen- timents are no longer the same. She silently dreams, sadly and tenderly, as if she were thinking of a distant lover. Although the figure is pure, it is pervaded by a refined sensuality; and one feels that for this artist Mary was no longer the Madonna; that he had kissed this mouth and had longed for this woman when she was absent. 5
“Vieni, o Cecilia, Vieni t’ affretta, Il tuo t’ aspetta Giorgio.” . , Whether these verses which were upon the back of the panel were written by the painter awaiting his beloved or by another, is a matter of indifference.
Giorgione 341
For this other man also felt the delicate sensual per-
fume wafted from the painting.
By every trait of his character Giorgione was called to be the pioneer of this new art. He was a native of the town whose church to-day prizes his altar-piece as its most splendid treasure: Castelfranco in the Marca Trevisana, to which poets were so fond of giving the title of “amorosa.” There nature is lyrically soft, and the air one breathesis sensuously laden; all is woven into a great and dreamy monotony of a mysterious and melancholy character. Men who have grown up in such surroundings are more sensitive in all their emo- tions than those who live among mountains and raw cliffs; for the perfume and melody of this strange, soft nature render the nerves more vibrating and tender. According to the legend, Giorgione was an illegitimate offshoot of the ancient noble family of Barbarelli; and there is, indeed, something noble in the complicated refinement of his nervous system, and something of the Shakespearian bastard in the wild way in which he stormed through life.
When he came to Venice he found himself upon his true soil. Vasari describes him as a pleasure-loving child, a worldling, who plunged full of passion into the whirlpool of life, progressing from one love-adventure to another, and tremulously enjoying a luxurious and sensual life. He depicts him as a galantuomo wandering through the streets in the evening with his lute and singing ecstatic love-songs to fair ladies.
342 Triumph of the Sensual
When at thirty-two years of age he collapsed, the
number of his works was not large, and even smaller
is the number of those which have come down to us.
In the earliest of these, the two little pictures in the
Uffizi, representing the Judgment of Solomon and the
Childhood of Moses, he still appears as a pupil of
Bellini. But although the figures are drawn in the
style of the primitives, one already recognises that
this artist was destined to become a great landscape
painter. Softly and delicately, not in hard outlines,
the graceful tree-tops dissolve into the soft firmament.
Pictures like Bellini’s Allegory, the figure of a woman
in a boat gliding so quietly over the floods, had probably
made the deepest impression upon this dreamer.
But his admiration of Bellini was soon supplemented by that of another master. When, in commission for Tuzio Costanzo, the condottiere of Castelfranco, he created his first masterpiece, he had already made the acquaintance of the man whose art at that time illumined all Italy. In 1503-04 Leonardo had resided in Venice, and if he did not paint, he at least made drawings, and his female heads had certainly been seen by Giorgione. For the spirit which beams from the eyes of his Mary, a love no longer melancholy and self-sacrificing, but quivering and longing, is no longer the spirit of Bellini, but of Leonardo da Vinci. As he had found in Bellini his ideal as a landscape painter, Leonardo revealed to him the path through the joyful earthly realm of the senses.
Several idyllic pictures form the transition from the Christian to his Hellenic works. At that time a sentiment similar to that of Watteau’s day pervaded the world. As in the eighteenth century men sought relief from the heroic and pompous in the Arcadian and the Elysian, so in the cinquecento, after the ascetic age of Savonarola, they wished to return into a Saturnian era, where there had been no Christianity, no monks, and no chorals; when the majestic wooded halls of the forests took the place of cathedrals; where men did not wait for the heavenly happiness, but enjoyed the earthly.
From this painting one recognises anew Giorgione’s importance as alandscape painter. Aman of sentiment, so dependent upon his emotion that he could not exist without his Cecilia and died because she was unfaithful, became the creator of the Stimmungsbild—a painting reflecting the mood of the artist. With him everything was sentiment; so he was the first to discover language in which the soul of nature speaks—light. Like Watteau, he never gives a copy of nature, which seems
344 Triumph of the Sensual
to exist only in order that happy men may live in her.
Even the trees quiver as if with tenderness and longing
and all is enveloped in a dreamy and sensuous at-
mosphere. In the objects also which he places in these
landscapes the same longing, soft, and melancholy
sentiment is re-echoed. He paints shepherds sitting
as in a golden age near their herds, lost in dreams.
He loves knights, for they also appear to him as
the incarnation of days gone by: not wild conquerors
devastating the land, but quiet dreamers who feel
themselves the Last Knights; youths of soft, feminine
forms, whose existence is passed in beautiful devotion
to love. He depicts antique ruins because they also
awaken elegiac memories of that distant time when
no monks preached self-immolation and the cult of the
senses was a religion. No man has yet guessed what
he wished to say in his most celebrated work, the
so-called Familia di Guworgione. Two objects are
represented which seem to belong to one another and
yet are strangely contrasted. Cecilia, the Madonna
of Castelfranco, has become a young mother, nursing
a child at her bosom. In no respect does she resemble
the quiet Mary; there is nothing left of the ethereal
chastity of the quatirocento.
This picture also prepares us for the one with which Giorgione concluded his life-work, his celebrated Venus in the Gallery of Dresden. That which in the Madonna at Castelfranco was longing, is here fulfilment. In unveiled beauty, Cecilia reclines upon the couch.
Correggio 345
The little figure of the Familia has become a life-sized
female nude, and the Madonna of Castelfranco has
become Aphrodite. In contrast to Botticelli’s Venus,
in which the spiritual asceticism of the middle age
still lingers, Je cri de la chair here rises joyfully to
heaven. Soft, undulating limbs are wearily distended.
Only a man of such refined sense as Giorgione, painting
not a picture but an experience, could throw open the
portals of this new era.
When he was buried, the work was incomplete, and it is almost symbolic that Titian completed it by adding the landscape background. Indeed, in a second work which also hung incomplete in his studio, one might find an allegory of Giorgione’s own career. It repre- sents three philosophers, of whom only the youngest turns to the rising sun, while the two elder stand un- concerned at his side. So the youthful Giorgione was the first to see the rosy dawn of the new epoch; but artists older than he, following his leadership, continued his life-work.
IV.— Correggio
In Correggio, the Legnardo of Parma, another shade of the erotic element in Italian painting appears. In all the other artists of the epoch the sensuality was external. For Giorgione his Cecilia was everything, and the sensuality of Bazzi is sufficiently indicated by his nickname. In the case of Correggio we know nothing of such things. According to Vasari, as a lad he was “bashful and inclined to dreaming and melancholy.” Although he visited different seats of art, he never became intimate with any of his colleagues, but was interested only in their pictures, inspecting them timidly as a cat, without any one knowing of his presence. His stay in lascivious Parma was not marked by a single scandal, nor did he ever paint a portrait. He did not like to look people in the eye, and felt himself most comfortable when alone, dreaming about what the others had experienced. This distinguishes his painting from Giorgione’s. While the latter’s Venus has the expression of weariness and of the soft repose after embraces, Correggio’s figures are convulsed by a perpetual nervous trembling. His creations are dreamland figures, as, mysteriously laughing, they appear to the sleeper; the beautiful apparitions of a lonely soul full of tender sentiment, never outwardly expressed. To this his colour corresponds. In contrast to the figures of Giorgione placed in actual surroundings, Correggio’s live in a dreamland veiled by twilight, transporting them into the far distance. The power under whose touch they tremble is no warm body, but a cloud.
Correggio’s father was a seller of spices and the lad passed hours and days in the small shop, the odours of which have a stimulating effect upon the nerves. If behind the counter he read the Bible, it was neither the Books of Moses nor the drama of the Passion, but
Correggio 347
the Song of Solomon and the beautiful story of Mag-
dalen that charmed him. The entire Holy Writ was
for him a love-story. He became acquainted also
with the romance of antique legends; for through Lady
Veronica Gambara his native town had become a seat
of humanism, and the lady took pleasure in the timid
lad. One can picture her stroking his locks and drawing
him tenderly to her side, as she translated for him
passages from Ovid, and told him the love-tales of
the ancient gods. With beating heart he heard of
the amorous adventures of Jupiter, of all the beautiful
mortals whom he had deluded, of Io and Dane, of
Antiope and Leda. On closing his eyes at night he
thought of them in feverish excitement, and they
followed him like phantoms in his dreams. Such
were the themes that lived in his spirit, that he wished
to paint, and that he finally painted.
True, it was only by a roundabout way that he at- tained his end, and he was compelled to create many works which were against his temperament.
The beginnings of his art point to Mantua. In this town, to which he had come with Veronica in 1511, he received the first artistic impressions of his life. Man- tegna, who still invisibly hovered over Mantua, became his first guide. He dreamed long in the Castello di Corte before the works of the great master, as a child dreams sitting at the feet of a bronze statue. The spirit of Mantegna, all that his realism and scholarship had created, were for him an unknown world. But one
348 Triumph of the Sensual
painting attracted him, the only joyful one among
Mantegna’s works—the nude putt playing about the
ceiling of the Camera degli Sposi. They pleased him, be-
cause they were so coy, so attractive, and so joyous.
At Mantua he saw also the portrait of Isabella d’ Este
and other drawings by Leonardo, and having seen one
work by the great magician he was attracted to Milan.
It is pleasant to picture young Correggio at Milan
after the return of Leonardo, not venturing to express
his admiration to the master, but seated timid and
dreaming before his paintings. He saw that soft
sfwmato which so effectively awakens the sensuous
vibrating mood—and the heads which had hovered
before him in his dreams: women quivering with joy,
children modestly blushing when beautiful female
sdints or loving youthful angels tenderly observe
them.
His earlier works reveal how the influence of Man- tegna was replaced by that of Leonardo, and finally the independent Correggio was evolved. His Madonna with St. Francis especially, contains the quintessence of what he had adopted from others; and the Betrothal of St. Catherine shows the new element which he added. Leonardo’s female ideal is transformed into a more dainty type, that of the Tanagra figurines. A morbid delicacy and over-refinement distinguishes him from the other painters of the cinquecento as much as it unites him with those of the Rococo. Especially in the nervous, delicate hands with soft, quivering touch,
Correggto 349
the essence of Correggio’s art lies. All the white,
small, slender hands of princesses which Parmeggianino
and many later artists painted are derived from
Correggio’s Betrothal of St. Catherine.
‘The following year (1518) was the turning point of his life, and the work which he created in commission for the noble prioress of the nunnery of San Paolo in Parma is characteristic not only of himself but of the age. Formerly the images of patron saints before which the nuns offered their prayers had been esteemed suitable decorations for nunneries; but Donna Gio- vanna thought in the Hellenic fashion. Diana, whose character as goddess of chastity did not prevent her from descending to Endymion, was the patroness whose crescent she chose for her coat of arms. And Correggio did not endeavour, like other masters of the Renaissance, to conceive a great and thoughtful composition, but confined himself to capricious, charming causerie. The putii of the Camera. degli Sposi and the foliated architecture of the Madonna della Vittoria lived in his memory; and the result was the delicate little beings joyously and_ gracefully sporting about in the midst of the grape-vines on the walls and ceilings of the priory. Now comes an abrupt change of scene, transporting us into the presence of the gigantic cupola frescoes of the church of San Giovanni Evangelista and the cathedral of Parma, As if Melozzoda Forli or Michelangelo had turned his head, the quiet Correggio suddenly became a virtuoso
350 Triumpb of the Sensual
who makes hair flutter and draperies swell. Gigantic
bodies writhe, throw their arms into the air, distort
their features; angels thunder and storm through the
sea of air. The fresco of the cathedral cupola already
contains the entire heaven that lived in the fantasy
of the Baroque painters. It is astonishing how he
mocks at all difficulties and with what sureness he
treads the path which led from the Renaissance to
Pater Pozzo.!. And yet how insignificant is the theme
behind this clanging instrumentation! All is without
force, form without content, the brows of thinkers
without thought, mighty gestures without sense or
purpose. Only in certain details is the former Correggio
recognisable, as in the beautiful angels joyfully flutter-
ing about the scene. Even the symbols of the evange-
lists in San Giovanni are in love; the angel of Matthew
embraces John’s eagle, and the lion of Mark jests with
Luke’s calf.
Correggio’s scale was a limited one; and as, after his successes in the cupola frescoes, he was of the opin- ion that he could accomplish everything, he painted a whole series of works which show him from a dis- agreeable rather than a lovable side.
As often as he ventures into the domain of the pathetic and endeavours to depict the moments of great passion, his pictures are as false as ever was a religious painting of Boucher’s day. As in the case
‘A celebrated decorative artist of the Baroque period (1642-1709),
whose chief work is in the church of Sant’ Ignazio at Rome.—Ep.
CORREGGIO
THE MARRIAGE OF ST. CATHERINE Louvre
Correggto 351
of Rococo painters the gift of depicting dignified and
quiet manhood was also denied him. His people are
beautiful as long as they are young, but insipid when
they grow old. They have done nothing in their
youth but smile, and now it appears how empty their
hands were. One often feels that his instincts warned
him; as when in the Bewailing of the Body of Christ,
omitting the customary male friends of the Saviour,
he introduces women alone as mourners, or when in
his Ecce Homo, contrary to all usage, he introduces
Mary and Magdalen instead of the soldiers; of course
not the emaciated mother and remorseful penitent,
but beautiful women with darkly-shaded eyes, ecstati-
cally gazing upon an effeminate young man. But
almost more numerous. are the works in which men
were not at all necessary, but which he spoiled by the
introduction of empty-headed giants. Just because
his entire feeling was feminine, he took it into his head
to label them as men, with the same result as when
a delicate, elegiac artist like van Dyck in his early
period imitated Rubens. A hollow striving after
power took the place of real, powerful grandeur.
By gigantic theatrical figures placed conspicuously
in the foreground, or else by virtuose, forced efforts
suitable enough for cupola frescoes but not for panels,
he spoiled the sentiment of many of his best
paintings. Even in the celebrated Holy Night at
Dresden, his beloved “ragout of frogs’ legs’”’ in-
trudes, depriving a scene which would otherwise
VOL. I.—23
352 Triumph of the Sensual
have been quiet and full of sentiment of its greatest
charm.
Correggio is great only when the problem is to render not power, but gentle feelings, not in pathos but in harmless play and laughing joyfulness; in painting not men but women and children; and especially where he remains the painter of the graces and confines himself within the bounds of a charming Rococo. His name “ Allegri” well indicates the confines of his art.
In describing his Madonnas. one cannot, of course, use the same terms as we apply to those of Botticelli, Bellini, or Perugino. When these masters lived a mighty, solemn and religious art still existed. . They understood the tenderness of religious tradition in all of its mystic charm, and had learned the significance of the qualities necessary for its expression. In com- parison with them, Correggio appears affected and empty. Where he cannot be pathetic he is affectedly sweet; he translates their sincere devotion into earthly gallantry, into a dialogue of languishing glances and significant smiles. It is characteristic that Joseph no longer feels comfortable in these scenes; he disappears to avoid disturbing his wife with her friends, who in their turn are very liberal with their attentions. Not satisfied with making eyes at Mary, if she smiles upon one of them, the other uses the opportunity to coquet with a beautiful lady among the spectators. This is the beginning of that exchange of glances between
Correggio 353
the figures in the painting and the observer which was
a heritage of Correggio to Baroque painting. Correggio,
if any one, was the genuine painter of the time, which
of all the teachings of Christianity followed only one,
«Little children, love one another,’ and that one
almost too literally. Finally, it is a mockery to misuse
the figures of Mary and the saints in order to paint
love scenes.
Correggio felt this, and as far as possible he trans- lated his figures into heathen conceptions. In the Betrothal of St. Catherine Sebastian might just as well have held a bunch of grapes instead of an arrow and been called Bacchus. St. John is transformed into an Adonis, and St. George into a Roman general. But his life-work was just as little completed with what he had previously done as was that of Mantegna when he had completed the Triumph of Cesar. All those erotic visions which had dawned upon his youth when Veronica Gambara had translated Ovid to him, but had remained dreams, had still to take bodily form; and so at the end of his life he found at last his proper province. The same woman who gave oc- cupation to Mantegna, Isabella d’ Este, gave also to Correggio the opportunity of realising the ideals of his childhood. Yhe last picture which Mantegna had painted for her represented the Banishment of the Vices; but now all the beings which Savonarola had sent into exile returned in triumph. Not until these pictures in which, turning away from Christianity, he
354 Triumpb of the Sensual
sang only the power of love, was the true Correggio
revealed. Here he has thrown off the mask, and the
former dissonance between theme and conception
has disappeared. The emaciated image of the Re-
deemer no longer hangs on the cross, but, as in the
etching by Rops, a female body, delicate as condensed
light, appears; and over it, instead of the letters I.
N. R. I., the word Eros is inscribed.
In his London picture, the School of Cupid, he ise down the basic theme. But the paintings of which one chiefly thinks when Correggio’s name is mentioned are Antiope in the Louvre, Dane in the Borghese Gallery, and Leda at Berlin—all intended by the Gongazas as presents for Charles V. The entire life of this man, who had lived so secluded from the outer world, had been a love-dream with beautiful women and laughing Cupids hovering about. For this very reason he created the most sensual paintings of his age, as. Watteau most daintily rendered the fra- grance of the Rococo. Being a sickly, lonely man, he never painted reality, but only dreams. It is no accident that the eighteenth century was so en- thusiastic about Correggio, and called him the prince of the Rococo. Sensitive and weakly, nervous and pampered, he represented the ideal of this over-refined age. Correggio born two centuries later is called Boucher.
His Jo at Vienna signifies the acme of the age of the triumph of sensuality. Here at last the word is
CORREGGIO
THE SCHOOL OF CUPID
National Gallery, London
Correggio 355
spoken which lay upon the lips of Leonardo, when he
converted the chaste and pious womanly ideal of
Savonarola into his own female type, glowing with
life and vibrating with passion. Correggio offers grat-
ification to the longing of the age. Along this path no
further progress was possible, and the great reaction
now began. All those masters whose art was a
reaction upon that of the preceding epoch could not
conceive of the nude without sensuality. By the
following artists the nude was withdrawn from the
sphere of the senses and raised to an artistic problem.
The lines of Michelangelo,
‘“ Woe to the man whose blind and reckless hand
Drags beauty down to where the senses stand,”
were intended not indeed for Correggio, of whom the
Roman Titan knew nothing, but for his spiritual
ancestor, Michelangelo’s great rival, Leonardo. But
they apply to the art which ruled in Italy from Leo-
nardo to Correggio. The epoch of eroticism and of
sensuality was followed by one of unapproachable
majesty.
Chapter V.— The Majestic and the Titanic
I.— The Conception of Beauty in the Cinquecento
HE change experienced by Italian painting after the disappearance of the influence of Leonardo can only be understood by reference to the
general change in taste since the beginning of the cinquecento. For all great epochs are pervaded by one artistic tendency, which permeates uniformly all expressions of life. As the men build, move about, and clothe themselves, so also do they paint. From this point of view it is easy to understand why the painting of the later sixteenth century considered as beautiful exactly the opposite of what the waning quattrocento had honoured.
Il Cortegiano, the manual of the perfect cavalier, published by Count Castiglione in 1516, is an account of what was at that time considered gentlemanly in society. It is improper, said Castiglione, to make violent or awkward gestures, to take part in rapid dances. The antique gravitas—a grave and sustained dignity—is mentioned as the essence of good tone.
In accordance with this sentiment a style of costume
356
Beauty in the Cinquecento 357
came into fashion which in its majestic fulness would
permit none but serious, sustained gestures. The
fifteenth century had loved an angular, coy slenderness
in costume; somewhat stiff and pedantic for women,
tight-fitting for men. Fashion delighted in the gay,
lively colours, embroidered borders, glittering chains,
golden caps, and gleaming pearl necklaces to be seen
in Jan van Eyck’s paintings, and in ruffles, creases,
and angular folds. In the sixteenth century this was
all eliminated in favour of a great sweep of line. The
form of garments is of grandiose simplicity, not over-
loaded as formerly with dainty details. While formerly
the suppleness and slimness of the body had been
emphasised by short sleeves and tight-fitting hose,
the costume is now treated with breadth and dignity.
Women are clad in heavy rustling brocades, the puffed
sleeves of which make the body appear broad and
majestic. The skirt, formerly short, now received a
mighty train, only permitting a sustained walk, an
andante mestoso. A black cap and wide mantle, rich
in folds, give the men a conscious, serious, and impos-
ing expression, their movements, formerly so dainty,
are full and round.
The portraits of the cinquecento differ in yet another respect from those of the preceding epoch. It is not unimportant for the psychology of the age that bust portraits, formerly the exclusive fashion, now developed into half and three-quarter lengths. While for such a soulful time as the quattrocento the head alone
358 Mafestic and Titanic
was of importance, the man of the cinquecento, for
whom dignity of movement had become so important,
preferred, if possible, to be portrayed in full fig-
ure. Whereas formerly only slenderness was popular,
to emphasise which the arms were pressed firmly
against the body, now a pose is sought which will
admit of the greatest possible breadth of movement.
In consequence of the majestic impression which
artists sought to make, the accessories are also changed.
Even with Memling, the men still held a rosary, the
women a prayer-book; and Perugino added to his
portrait of Francesco dell’ Opere the inscription,
Timete Deum. Now the ladies hold a fan and the
hands of the men rest upon a sword. The conception
of majesty would no longer permit of an humble
attitude towards the other world. Even the age of the
men portrayed is changed. At the beginning of the
quattrocento, when it was the custom to observe every-
thing microscopically, portrait-painters preferred the
heads richest in detail—in wrinkles and folds—and
consequently matrons and old men. Later, when the
tendency towards daintiness prevailed, girls and
youthful pages were the favourite subjects; and even
when men were represented, they retained something
youthful in their tight-fitting costume, curled hair,
and smooth-shaven faces. The cinquecento has nothing
to compare with the graceful, girlish busts depicted at
the close of the fifteenth century. Whether one
thinks of Lavinia, Dorothea, or the Donna Velata, the
Beauty in the Cinquecento 359
galleries of beauty of the sixteenth century consist
only of ripe, well-developed womanhood. In like
manner the portraits of youths are rare. The subjects
are almost exclusively men, no longer shaved but with
countenances framed by a serious beard; at that age
which most gives the impression of gravitd riposata—
of dignity and power.
Just as men appear serious and powerful in their portraits, so the apartments in which they move are great and spacious. During the Early Renais- sance the chief aim of architects was to attain fresh grace and slender elegance in their buildings. The slender columns of the palaces resemble the people in their tight-fitting clothes; and the walls of the buildings were as richly and daintily decorated as the costumes. In the sixteenth century, in harmony with the changes in costume and movement, there appears also in architecture impressive power and simple grandeur. All trifling ornament is avoided; the forms are heavy and massive, the apartments high and broad, in order that the majestic bearing may not be restricted.
As the paintings must correspond with these men and this architecture, a new ideal of beauty finds its introduction into art. It is sufficient to compare the Madonnas of the cznquecento with those of the pre- vious epoch. In the quattrocento the forms were slender and delicate, austere and budlike; in Leonardo’s day the closed bud began to open; and now it beams
360 Majestic and Titanic
in mature, summer-like splendour. Another language
of gesture is developed. | Whereas in the paintings of
Filippino and Pollajuolo the figures had walked in a
dainty measure, they now stand firmly upon the ground.
Then they had stretched the little finger and held
their garments with affected elegance; now they
affect neither the graceful gestures of the quattrocento
nor the soft, subtle ones of Leonardo’s day, but broad
and princely movements.
The psychological change is no less radical. People who preferred the sword and fan to prayer-book and rosary in their portraits could have no more use for humble saints, nor conceive of the divine in servile form. In place, therefore, of the wmilta, which had been the ideal of the age of Savonarola, maestd now appears. If formerly Mary’s hair was covered by a gloomy matron’s veil, she is now clad in princely garments. If she had formerly been the devoted handmaiden of the Lord, and later in the works of Correggio a woman of the world, she has now become the queen of heaven. Neither melancholy nor tenderness beams from her eye; but proud and dis- tinguished, lofty and unapproachable, she glances down from above. An odor di regina pervades her being. The complete absence of the motive of the nursing Madonna, to which the age of Leonardo had imparted a slight tendency towards the sensual, must likewise be attributed to these conceptions of dignity and princely majesty.
Beauty in the Cinquecento 361
The form and the composition of the paintings also
became different. The small and detailed panels
which the former age had loved now appeared trivial;
for the impression of the sublime could only be obtained
in life-sized or more than life-sized figures. The
miniature painting of the former epoch therefore finds
no continuation. As regards composition Leonardo
had indeed taken a decisive step. Improving upon the
mere juxtaposition of detail of the quattrocento, he
had attained the principle of compressing within a
small space the greatest possible action. This tendency
to develop the scene briefly and without accessories
by means of a few figures remained in the fifteenth
century the prevailing one. But Leonardo’s sense
of space, his concentration of action within narrow
limits, no longer suited a time used to such spacious
apartments. As the high bearing of the czmquecento
could not thus be limited, artists confined themselves
more and more to a few large figures, moving freely and
easily in the midst of a spacious architecture. It is a
characteristic circumstance that, whereas during the
quattrocento painters were often at the same time
goldsmiths, they are now at the same time architects.
Then they affected microscopic vision and joy in decora-
tion, now a broad view and impressive sense of roomi-
ness. The triangular composition which Leonardo
preferred now seemed too angular. As in costume
they no longer preferred bell-shaped dresses and small
shoulders for women, but full hips and puffy sleeves,
362 Majestic and Titanic
they also arranged the composition of the picture in
soft, flowing lines. The circle, bow, curve, and a
wavy line are their prevailing schemes of composition.
Even the ideal of landscape followed this new taste. The fifteenth century, with its taste for sharp, angular lines, loved also in landscape jagged, harsh outlines, and depicted it in the angular bareness of its forms. The sixteenth, which affected softness of line, prefers also in nature curved and wavy forms, as is shown by the use of vegetable forms to soften the hard outlines. The earlier artists, who loved rugged, muscular men, exhibited the skeleton of the landscape, to which those of the cinquecento, who preferred full and imposing bodies, added flesh. The fifteenth century, which painted slender people in hose, preferred cypress, pine, and fir trees with slender and ascending, tapering and pointed forms. The painters of the cimquecento, on the other hand, avoided these trees because only the full, well-rounded form of trees rich in foliage corresponded to the majestic beings with broad gestures which appear in their paintings. The parallel even applies to the flowers. As the fifteenth century, which had created the graceful portraits of maidens, saw in landscape principally the charm of the springtime, the sixteenth, whose ideal was the well-developed woman, saw nature only in the glowing splendour of summer.
The artists themselves are as majestic as the pictures which they painted. In Castagno’s day, they were
Titian 363
wild comrades, uncouth and defiant as the unhewn
walls of Palazzo Pitti; in the days of the Magnifico
they became zsthetes. Savonarola made friars of
them, and afterwards they plunged with avidity
into the whirlpool of life. Now. they are settled
men of the gravity which Castiglione describes as
. characteristic of the perfect cavalier; radiant in
majestic distinction, and associating as equals with
the great men of the world.
II.— Titian
Titian, the mighty king of the Venetian cznquecento, has the same relation to Giorgione as clarified, quiet manhood to the passion and ecstasy of youth. With Giorgione, one thinks of the verses which Mogens w-ote of himself:
“Tn Sehnen leb’ ich
In Sehnen”;
and with Titian of the words of Faust:
‘‘Entschlafen sind nun wilde Triebe
Mit jedem ungestiimen Thun.”
Not in Venice itself, not even in the neighbouring
plain, but in the distant Alps, he first saw the light of
day; and his early years were spent in the midst of
solemn pine woods and mighty mountain walls. This
alone gave to his personality a different character.
When he—a Hercules in growth, deep chested (for
he had breathed only the keen mountain air), his
364 Majestic and Titanic
features sun-browned as if cast in bronze, his eye
strong and clear, and with that keen, eagle glance
which one ascribes to the world’s conquerors—came
from his rude mountains into the shimmering wonder-
city, into the sultry atmosphere of Venice, he stood be-
fore the easel with a consciousness that he would
achieve greatness and become the prince of Venetian
painters, simply because he willed it. This force
of will, this cwdpoavvyn, the serious direction of life,
never deserted him.
As in the case of almost every other artist, there was a period in Titian’s life when he was not himself. When he painted the Gypsy Madonna at Vienna he wandered in Bellini’s path, and in the Tribute-Money he followed Leonardo. So there are also paintings by him which seem the product of Giorgione’s art: like the Three Ages of Man and Heavenly and Earthly Love. But just these paintings show that Titian never painted real St:mmungsbilder. Under his firm hands the soft fabric of Venice received the quality of granite. Even works like the Heavenly and Earthly Love, notwithstanding their ravishing beauty, are hardly dreamy and melting. Titian is no dreamer; he does not possess the tear-shimmering elegiac and bucolic qualities of Giorgione. When he is genuine, the real Titian is lofty and powerful, stony and firm as the mountains of his home. The light that flows. about his figures is not sultry and sensual, but cold and clear. Terms like lovely, charming, or dreamy can as little be
TITIAN
FLORA Uffizi Gallery, Florence
Citian | 365
applied to his works as to his home, the awe-inspiring
hills of Cadore; but they may properly be termed
powerful and majestic. The sublime element, cor-
responding to the nature upon which the first astonished
glance of the lad fell, and also the primeval power
of the mountaineer replaces with him the dreamy
softness of Giorgione, the son of the plain. He has
something of the primeval trees of his home, which,
growing in a stony, precipitous soil, were early strength-
ened to defy all elements, because their roots were
so tough and their branches so firm.» He even has
much of the cruel egotism of such giant trees. As
they robbed all the lesser shrubbery about them of
sunlight, in order that their own foliage might be
developed on all sides, so Titian, in accordance with the
right of the stronger, pushed aside with his powerful
elbows all those who would have lived and created
beside him.
Yet another phase of Titian’s art may be explained from his mountain origin. The house in which he was born lies at the uttermost end of the village, where the hill begins and the Pieve roars down from storm- capped heights. He heard the wind sweep through the mighty tree-tops and rattle the joints of the houses; he saw uprooted stones crush against the shore, and the rain pour down from black storm-clouds. So he was the first to associate with the quiet repose and the tender lyricism of Venetian painting a dramatic and impassioned element.
366 Majestic and Titanic
The two principal works which belong in this
class, the Battle of Cadore and Peter Martyr, were
destroyed by fire—as if the elements wished to revenge
themselves for his wild portrayal of their destructive
power. But ancient prints have handed down their
content. In a narrow ravine from which no escape
is possible, men and horses struggle; the smoke of
burning villages arises; rain and lightning stream
and strike from the gloomy cloud. A wild and stormy
note sounds through his Peter Martyr. The figure of
the saint is athletic and powerful; that of the murderer
bending over him is wild and gigantic; their garments
rustle and the tree-tops bend in the wind.
If his Assumption upon its appearance only created cool astonishment, the reason was that in a conservative city like Venice and in the midst of a quiet, priestly, solemn art, the picture was felt to be unsuitable. As if drawn by a celestial magnet Mary, her mighty arms out-stretched, ascends towards heaven. Her dark hair flutters in the wind, the folds of her garments swell grandiosely, and a roar like the moving wings of the archangels sounds through the air; astonished, the apostles stretch their arms upward. In the church of the Frari, before the Pesaro Madonna one first recognises the dramatic action which Titian brought into Venetian art. At the base of a mighty column, powerful as those which were in future to support St. Peter’s, Mary sits; not in the centre of the painting, nor even in full face, as Byzantine tradition
. Titian 367
demanded. For the column is erected on the side
of the painting, and is balanced only by a fluttering
banner which one of the praying figures unfolds.
With this the principles of composition of the past
are deserted ; the lines are not arranged in regular arch-
itectonic order; a composition which reckons only
with coloured masses takes the place of regular linear
arrangements.
True, this one characteristic is not the determina- tive for Titian’s art. Although his mountain origin explains a great deal in which he differs from the more naturalised Venetians, he nevertheless came as a young man to Venice. For this reason his art does not always remind of the summits of the dolomite Alps, but more often of the quiet mirror of the lagoons.
That Titian did not become a stormy dramatist is, aside from the conditions of the time, the result of the course of his life. Never had an artist a more even career; never did one understand better how to shape life into a work of art. His whole existence was a single great harmony, without want or mighty struggles, without convulsions. As early as 1516, Titian, receiving the legacy of his master Bellini, was appointed the official painter of Venice, and his course of fortune, a lifelong triumphal procession, began. In 1520 he appeared at the zenith of his fame; no meteor, but a quiet gleaming star, which, gradually but constantly ascending and in a slow course without diminution of power, brightens the firmament. The
VOL- I.—24
368 Majestic and Titanic
mightiest princes of Europe loaded him with com-
missions and honours: Charles V., who summoned
him to his court at Bologna and Augsburg, Pope
Paul IIJ., and Francis I. of France, who, in flattering
letters, sued for his favour. Two sons and a daughter
of radiant beauty filled his house with joy—that
patrician home which he erected far from the turmoil
of the market-place, and where he lived independently,
devoted to art and to his friends. Here he received
Henry III. with princely splendour; here was the scene
of those social gatherings which remind one of Feuer-
bach’s Dante in Ravenna. Proud senators and noble
ladies wandered through the shady arbours of his
gardens, and when the sun had sunk, and the distant
islands gleamed in evening twilight, the laughter of
the gondoliers, song, and the music of lutes sounded
over the lagoon. “All princes, learned men, and
distinguished persons who came to Venice visited
Titian,” relates Vasari; for “not only in his art was
he great, but he was a nobleman in person.”
This distinction has also left its mark upon his art. What we call the idealism of Titian is not the result of zsthetic reflection, but the natural point of view of a man who wandered upon the heights of life, never knew trivial care, nor even experienced sickness; and therefore saw the world healthy and beautiful, in gleaming and majestic splendour. Artlessly he ap- proaches things which an idealist would have avoided, as when in his Danae he contrasts the royal in the person
Titian 369
of his heroine with the plebeian in the ugly old woman;
or when he depicts the Presentation of Mary in the
Temple as a great public gathering in the sense of Gen-
tile Bellini, in which senators and bedecked patrician
women, market-women and beggar boys are presented.
But even the most ordinary he ennobles; the peasant
riding upon his ass to market has the great style of the
metopes of the Parthenon; and all his works are per-
vaded by a great repose, the royal tranquillity of
his own being.
In his portraits this style is especially conspicuous.
He never attempts to beautify or flatter in a servile
way. With awful realism he portrayed the old and
wasted body of Paul III. with the trembling spider
fingers, the thin half-decayed lips, the bleary eyes
whose crafty, fox-like glitter is all that is still alive
in this mummy. In like manner Charles V. was well
advised when he named Titian his Apelles. While
other painters had painted only his pale, scrofulous,
icy mask, Titian ennobled it with something of his
own majesty. That black knight in steel armour in
the Madrid picture, riding with tilted lance over the
battle-field at daybreak, is not the loiterer with whom
the electors of Germany trifled, the confused, hesitating
mind which received its political instruction from
Granvella the chancellor; but the personification of
the coldness of a great general in battle, and of destiny
itself approaching, silent and unavoidable. And the
emaciated reticent man, who in the Munich portrait
\
370 Mafestic and Titanic
sits shivering upon the veranda of his palace, enveloped
in spite of blooming summer in thick fur, is not the
melancholy grey-beard, broken in body and will, who,
disgusted with the world and with himself, a year
later retired as a hermit to the monastery of San Yuste,
and there, surrounded by ticking clocks and black cof-
fins, constantly celebrated his own funeral. Titian had
given him that of which Charles in his best years boasted
—the penetrating intelligence of the greatest statesman
of his day and the Olympian indifference of the ruler
of two worlds.
Although Titian is celebrated in text-books as the painter of kings because the kings of the sixteenth century sat to him for their portraits, the title is more justified in a reverse sense. The man who was himself a prince among his associates ennobled, like a king by the grace of God, every one who applied to him for his patent of nobility. The artist who, when the plague snatched him away, was buried not like Pe- rugino and Ghirlandajo in the potter’s field, but like a king in the church of the Frari, made princes of all men. Aretino, the choleric man of letters, looks like Jupiter whose darkening brow makes the great of the earth tremble. The little Strozzi maiden seems a king’s child; and his daughter Lavinia is transformed into a Greek goddess, who has enveloped her mighty limbs in the splendid garb of the Renaissance in order to linger for an hour among mortals.
His landscapes are the result of the same feeling for
TITIAN
THE MAN WITH THE GLOVE
Louvre
Titian 371 }
style. He has painted nature in all her moods, but
convincing truth is never lacking. Every detail
shows an artist who has grown great in nature, with
whom he never lost touch. Yet his biographers have
endeavoured in vain to identify the localities; for
Titian’s landscapes, true in detail and inspired by the
scenery of his home, are never exact copies of reality.
The azure tone of the distance is deeper, the brown
of the leaves warmer, and the light of the sun more
gleaming. He has created a sublime world, superior
to the earthly world in nobility, because as a landscape
painter he depicted not nature but himself. By
reason of this exalted style he has become the painter
of the heroic landscape, the forerunner of Poussin and
Claude. His reputation was so firmly founded that
the age of classicism, the epoch of Winckelmann, still
called him the Homer of landscape.
This epithet leads us to another characteristic— the feeling for the primeval and the patriarchal gen- erally associated with the name of Titian. One can only conceive him as he stands in the portrait of the Berlin Gallery, mighty as a patriarch of the first age of the world. Eighty years have passed over him, but an indestructible power lies in that head, with its _ fiery, gleaming eye and the high and mighty forehead. A heavy fur cloak envelops his body and the chain of the Golden Fleece adorns his breast—not conspicu- ously but naturally. In this picture all conceptions of Titian are united: the distinguished gentleman,
372 Majestic and Titanic
the son of the Alps, but above all the Homeric patriarch.
Although there are numerous other portraits of
him, not one shows him as a decayed old man, or as
a youth. He seems always the aged man, with whom
the conception of youth is as difficult to unite as with
Jehovah, “the ancient of days.”” To this mature old
age, long after Giorgione rested under the sod, his
most important works belong. They are the youthful
works of an old man, the full, ripe creations of a patri-
arch who remained ever young, This is not unim-
portant for their artistic comprehension.
For Titian never painted the springtime nor winter, when the rigidity of death covers the earth. The beautiful sunny October days, when thick blue grapes gleam from the dark foliage; when the leaves shimmer in warm, brown tones, and succulent fruit loads the trees—such is Titian’s season. It is no accident that he is so fond of placing a basket of ripe apples in his pictures of the Madonna, or of giving his daughter a bowl of fruit. These peaches, grapes, melons, and oranges in their gleaming, golden splendour meant for Titian what the lily did for Botticelli, the master of the springtime. Even when flowers appear, they are never spring blossoms—snowballs, crocus, anemones or gentian-—but the well-developed flowers of the autumn, and perhaps also pansies or violets, because they are more sonorous and less youthful in colour. As the autumn of the year so also he preferred the autumn of the day—the evening hour, when a deep
Titian 373
harmony of colour suffuses all things; even after a
long, beautiful day the earth lies in repose before the
veil of night sinks over it.
Corresponding to this also is his ideal of woman, with this difference, that she is usually portrayed ten years younger than man. For they are not exactly autumnal, these mighty women who seem never to wither, but to beam in an eternal, powerful beauty. If it is not autumn, neither is it springtime; but the high summer in its rich, mature splendour. Neglecting youth in its dewy freshness and its coy grace, he painted only, the proud majesty of the mature woman.
He paints her with a serious, quiet feeling of a settled manhood, which no longer knows dreaming or longing. The star which illumines his work is not Venus, but the evening star. The circumstance that no traditions survive about the models of Titian points to his dif- ference from Giorgione. It is indeed related that his Venus in the Uffizi represents Eleonora, the Duchess of Urbino, and for the others fair-haired Lombard women may have been his models, or German maidens from the distant Alps. For the proud and mighty female type of his paintings has nothing in common with the small, brown, black-eyed Venetians, who in their little wooden slippers glide over the Piazza di San Marco, as nimble as lizards. The Venetians of the cinquecento probably regarded Titian’s women with similar eyes to those with which the Romans gazed
374 Mafestic and Titanic
upon the German queen Thusnelda, marching royal
and proud in the triumphal procession of Germanicus.
The principal thing remains that Titian, according to Vasari’s account, painted mostly from his own imagination, and only used the female model in case of necessity. Unlike Giorgione, the first to make a pilgrimage to the isle of Cythera, Titian knew neither passion nor desire. A female body did not signify a woman for him, but a harmony of form, line, and col- our. Likehis picture of Alfonsod’ Este placing his mailed fist upon the bosom of his beloved is Titian’s feeling for women.
In this Olympian repose, this lofty patriarchal tranquillity, he is the most Hellenic of all Christian painters. Even Correggio was not capable of con- ceiving the nude from the purely artistic standpoint, but inserted the most un-Grecian element imaginable, that of desire, into the Hellenic worship of beauty. Titian’s figures have nothing languishing or tempting, and no sensual smile plays about their features. Even when Jupiter disguised as a satyr surprises the nymph Antiope, or Danae receives the golden rain, his works are pervaded by the candour of antique sculpture, a majestic sublimity which makes them almost sacred pictures. Calmly, without desire, the great black eyes of these women shine, and because they are so unapproachable and so free from all earthly longing, they are free also from prudish- ness and everything trivial. Their nudity is as
Titian 315
awe-inspiring as the exalted repose of Aphrodite of
Melos.
This Hellenic spirit is also expressed in his religious paintings. “Hellenism, what was it? Measure, dis- tinction, clearness.” Schiller’s definition applies to no Christian master as it does to Titian. True, Christian notes are occasionally sounded in his works. When he depicts martyrdoms like that of St. Laurence, or the Magdalen as a crushed penitent, the Bible and skull at her side, painted for Philip I.—these are the heralds of that convulsed and ecstatic spirit which dominated the close of the sixteenth century. But even in such works he remains solemn and measured. In his Madonnas a festal Hellenic conception and classic purity have displaced the Christian spiritualism. The fall of the drapery is broad and majestic, the movement full and graceful. Not only Mary but all his saints have attained Hellenic distinction. They are animated by a feeling of princely power, not of vassal humility, by strength and not by weakness. Their bodies are powerful and their features bespeak a commanding majestic spirit. As Titian himself associated as an equal with the kings of Europe, so these saints associate in proud independence with their God. In all respects he seems the son of the great age when Pericles and Phidias lived. One does not think of clouds of incense in the twilight of Christian cathedrals, but of the murmur of the sea waves and of the solemn grandeur of the temples of Pestum.
376 Mafestic and Titanic
III.— The Contemporaries of Titian
Although Titian was the centre of Venetian art as Leonardo of Milanese and Durer of German, the follow- ing are independent masters. each one of whom has added a new province to the realm of beauty. None of them, however, equals the giant of Pieve in his all- embracing power.
In the works of Palma Vecchio the soft repose of Venetian art almost degenerates into ennui without temperament. He painted much the same subjects as Titian: especially broad pictures in which the Madonna surrounded by saints is seated in evening landscape. As his activity began at a very early period, he seems even to have introduced a stylistic innovation in that he was the first to substitute full-length for the half- length figures popular in Cima’s day. His landscapes also are very beautiful, and hardly to be distinguished externally from Titian’s. The joyful peace and charm of his native town of Serinalta suffuses them. The eye is delighted with luxuriant fruitful valleys, brown slopes, blue distances, and the sun spreading a glowing red over dark ranges of mountains. In many of his pictures (as in Ruth and Boaz at Dresden) there is something cosily countrified, such as Titian has attained only in some of his wood-cuts. But he seldom passes beyond this pleasant thoughtfulness and a certain
mediocrity. As Serinalta, Palma’s birthplace, is
neither a sultry plain like Giorgione’s home, nor an
The Contemporaries of Titian 377
Alpine region like Titian’s, so his art is neither sensual
and dreamy nor powerful and sublime. It is indeed
attractive, but smooth and superficial; sympathetic
in colour, but without fire; and nowhere is temperament
Or spontaneous sentiment revealed. No matter how
many pictures he painted, itis always the same paint-
ing. Whether Mary, Barbara, Ottilia, or Theresa is
represented is of as little significance as if in our own
day Vinea labels his heads Ninetta, Lisa, or Giulietta.
The same head and empty forms always recur; and if
the lady, by way of a change, appears not clothed
but nude, it makes no difference. Standing, she is
called Eve; reclining, Venus. One of these pictures
of Venus hangs in Dresden near the wonderful work
of Giorgione; but a world-wide chasm separates them.
What with Giorgione had been a transport of love,
an ecstatic song of embraces, is with Palma the
idealised portrait of a tiresome beauty lying upon a
bed in order to display the full linear rhythm of her
figure.
Even his portraits, which made him the most popular fashionable painter of Venice, suffer from idealistic retouches. True, these women are majestic enough; they are even imposing in the fulness of their wavy, luxuriant hair fastened with a pearl chaplet, in their voluptuous outlines and puffed silk sleeves, as rigid and festal as if a wire frame were fastened beneath. Sometimes they raise with ample gesture their heads of golden hair; sometimes they are on the
378 Majestic and Titanic
point of powdering themselves; or else they do nothing
at all but lay their hand to their head and gaze with
a glance which might be seductive if it were not so
stupid. It is a question whether this unintelligent
expression is to be ascribed to Palma or to the fair
Venetians themselves. Women of intellectual ability,
like Cassandra Fedeli and Caterina Cornaro, were
certainly rare in Venice, and there were perhaps few
whose natural horizon extended beyond the powder-
box. But even the toilette has its poetry, as has been
shown by the Rococo painters and by Rossetti. In
Palma’s hands, grace and delicacy, fire and gentleness
of the eye, tenderness and mocking laughter are all
lost in the same tiresome majesty. All the delicate
dishes of the earth are changed into cold roast veal.
After Palma’s death his heritage passed to Paris
Bordone. Like Palma he also painted the most varied
-themes. Most of his pictures belong to that genre-
class introduced by Gentile Bellini: scenes from
Venetian history played amidst a rich architectural
setting. The only difference, corresponding to the
difference in time, is that the architecture now bears
the style of the High Renaissance and the people no
longer move about stiffly but with ample dignity.
But, like Palma, he is principally known as a painter
of Venetian women. Almost every gallery possesses
a portrait of his red-haired beauties, in gleaming
peach-coloured costume, and Bordone has a more
distinguished effect than Palma. He not only knows
The Contemporaries of Titian 379
how to cause velvet and silk to shimmer as brilliantly
as did his predecessor and renders the delicate shades of
red hair and the soft gleam of powdered skin with equal
appreciation, but also endows his women with such a
commanding majesty, such a nobility of pose, and
such queenly movements, that Palma’s entire art seems
trivial in comparison. For between him and Palma
stands the giant figure of Titian, to whom Bordone
owes his great style.
The Bonifazii and Bassani play an important rdéle in the history of genre-painting. The former treated religious subjects as scenes from the patrician life of Venice, the latter as scenes from peasant life. It is vain to search for religious sentiment in the works of the Bonifazii. Worldly splendour and enjoyment is the prevailing sentiment of all their works. Festal buildings rise, and richly dressed people come and go; and the twilight, which they especially affect, brings unity of colour into this gay medley. It is difficult to say whether Bonifazio Veronese ever thought of the Bible when he painted his Rich Man’s Feast; for the painting simply represents the private life of the Venetian nobility. After his dinner, the nobleman sits in his garden with his wife and daughters, one playing the lute, the other dreaming. There is nothing great about his art, which is only dainty and neat. But as the painters in the sixteenth century, in their endeavour to attain a monumental effect, usually avoided genre subjects, the pictures of the Bonifazii
380 Mafestic and Titanic
are important as forerunners of the genre-painting of
the following centuries.
The Bassani received their inspiration from the peas- ant idyls in some of Titian’s wood-cuts. They went into the country, drew huts, oxen, and waggons,- and transferred these studies to biblical and legendary subjects, which they decorated with rich landscape scenery. The household furniture and domestic ani- mals of their paintings were of more importance to them than the biblical theme. Thus a certain rustic trend was introduced into Italian religious painting, and the animal-painting of the following century stands revealed in the background.
The development of painting in Brescia runs parallel with the Venetian. In his dramatic actions and technical bravura Romanino greatly resembles the Venetian Pordenone. Moretto, one of the noblest painters whom Italy produced, gave his altar-pieces a grandiose and solemn character. A cinquecentist in the powerful simplicity of his painting, he neverthe- less preserved the solemn sincerity of the older time; and at the same time he strikes strangely modern accords of colour. In contrast to the Venetian’s love of full and vibrating colour tones, Moretto attuned everything to a fine silver-grey. He felt himself most at home in painting the white cowls of his monks, which supply the leading note for the colour harmony of the whole. In nature also cool and grey-blue tones prevail; the water is white and the clouds gleam in
Contemporaries of Titian 381
light grey. The evening red, with the Venetians a
deep crimson, is with him a greyish or lemon colour.
His chief altar-pieces, besides those at Brescia, are
a fine panel at Berlin, St. Justina at Vienna,
a Madonna at Frankfort and an Assumption of the
Virgin in the Brera. Otherwise he is principally
represented by portraits which are Venetian in their
mighty outline, but almost northein in the intimate
manner in which he depicts people in their accustomed
surroundings.
In this domain he was followed by his pupil Morone, who, at a later period, laboured at Bergamo, and whose Tailor is one of the most extraordinary examples of the sixteenth century portraiture. Nothing is con- spicuous or artificial in the pose; but a representative sublimity or monumental effect is to such an extent the prevailing note of the age, that a simple artisan is here transformed into a nobleman, and his portrait into a product of a mighty, historic style.
Savoldo is the most interesting artist of the group. As he, like Melzi and Boltraffio, was descended from a noble house and practised art as an amateur, he could, like them, follow his personal inclinations to a greater extent than his professional colleagues. His preference was for landscape, by means of which he changed the traditional religious representations into studies of light and shade and Stimmungsbilder. The great altar-piece painted by Titian in 1522 for Brescia, in which the Resurrection of Christ is represented as
|
382 Majestic and Titian
taking place in the evening twilight, seems to have
been the starting point of Savoldo’s art, which prefers
dreamy-and mystic effects. In his picture of the Trans-
figuration a mystic light radiating from the Son of
God fills the air; the Bewazling of the Body of Christ
takes place in a melancholy evening light; and the
Adoration of the Shepherds gives an opportunity to
depict the charm of a moonlight night. Even in his
portraits he introduces light effects, especially the soft
shimmer of the evening glow streaming in through the
window and flooding the room and its occupants. As
they were the principal problems for him, he took the
further steps of projecting light effects upon simple
figures of every-day life. The mysterious picture of
a girl in the Berlin Museum is especially celebrated.
With a brown silk mantle drawn over her head, she
glides past with rapid observing glance; the evening
sinks, and only a belated sunbeam falls upon her
pale, delicate face. In pictures of this sort Savolo
anticipated by decades the development of professional
art.
Sebastiano del Piombo, who was eight years younger than Titian, can only in his youthful works be considered a Venetian. His altar-piece of the church of San Giovanni Crisostomo belongs to the finest flowers of Venetian art. The figures of the women surrounding the throne of the saints are of a serious and solemn grandeur reminiscent of Feuerbach. He also had such a sense for deep glowing colours as had hardly
GIOVANNI BATTISTA MORONE
PORTRAIT OF A TAILOR
National Gallery, London
Michelangelo 383
another in Venice. But after he had become a resident
of Rome, in response to an invitation of Agostino
Chigi, the Venetian painter became a Roman. Even
his female portraits show the change: the mighty
heroic woman of the Uffizi gallery with the broad Ro-
man bust usually called La Fornarina, and Dorotea of
the Berlin Museum, glancing at the beholder like a Ven-
us Victrix, dignified and unapproachable. At a later
period the son of Byzantine Venice was only revealed
in the fact that he, even in heathen Rome, painted
passion scenes, representations of the Flagellation
or Christ Bearing the Cross and the Entombment, but
the style of these works is Roman: instead of Venetian
colour, a gloomy, leaden grey; instead of repose, a
powerful dramatic action. This is especially shown
in his picture of the Saviour summoning with mighty
gestures the herculean Lazarus from the grave. Michel-
angelo, the Roman Titian, was the demigod before
whom he admiringly bowed the knee.
IV.— Michelangelo
Under Michelangelo’s leadership the art of the cinquecento took its final step. Since the beginning ‘of. the century all detail had been increasingly elim- inated in favour of the grand style. If formerly as much as possible of the beautiful world had been depicted in paintings, now the development of monu- mental figure-painting was accomplished. In this
VOL. I.—25
384 Majestic and Titanic
respect Michelangelo spoke the decisive word. While
in the pictures of the Venetians landscape played an
important part as an aid to sentiment, Michelangelo
proclaimed that there was no other beauty except that
of the human form. Not a blade of grass occurs in
his paintings, and when in the picture of the Creation
in the Sistine Chapel it was necessary to indicate the
origin of vegetable life, he made use of a sort of primeval
fern. A piece of marble is the symbolic representation
of a city, a tree of the garden of Paradise. Michel-
angelo’s only problem is the nude human body, the
representation of which for him was the equivalent
of art.
For the comprehension of his paintings it is further necessary to remember that Michelangelo was really a sculptor. One loves to think of him sitting brooding before the marble quarry of Pietra Santa, reflecting upon all the beings concealed in the cliff. Although his occupation with painting goes back to his earliest youth, he was in his element only when he held hammer and chisel in his hands. Painting had for him an indirect value as the necessary surface representation of plastic thoughts which he was not privileged to carry out in marble. While he was not permitted to complete many works as a sculptor, painting afforded a means of conjuring up a whole world of beings in stone. The onesideness with which he followed these paths from the beginning was terribly impressive. He was never charmed by colour or by the psychic
=
Michelangelo 385
content of a theme, but viewed the world as a sculptor
alone, and is concerned only with the problem of form,
even when it is not the expression of a given subject.
The Holy Family in the Tribune of the Uffizi is the first thundering revelation of his abrupt personality. Former artists had depicted love and tenderness, manhood and cheerfulness in such works and attempted to achieve the solution of a problem in composition. But Michelangelo was occupied with the problem only because Leonardo’s cartoon of St. Anne had appeared. His chief interest was in those beings with gigantic limbs sprawling about the triangular composition. In the foreground sits a mighty woman, neither the humble Mary of a former day nor the queen of heaven of the cinquecento, but a heroine with brazen bones, and bare arms and feet. Stretching her knees to the right and her arms to the left she reaches over her shoulder to receive the Child from Joseph, a grey- bearded athlete, who is seated behind her. The Holy Family has become a brood of Titans, and the old theme of maternal joy a conglomeration of powerful dramatic action. The colour is of metallic hardness, the landscape only indicated in so far as it is necessary as the ground upon which they sit. Where other artists would have depicted trees, Michelangelo plants nude men with neither name nor purpose except that they are there.
The cartoon of the Bathing Soldiers, drawn in 1504, gave him for the first time an opportunity to make
ee
386 Majestic and Titanic
the principal object what in the picture of the Uffizi
had been relegated to the background—the nude. In-
stead of a battle-piece with arms and cannon, which
the Signoria had desired as a pendant to Leonardo’s
Battle of Anghiari, he represented the moment when
an alarm summoned a crowd of bathing soldiers to
battle. One attempts to climb the steep river bank,
another bends over to help a comrade; a third, sup-
ported upon his hand, swings himself up to the shore;
_ yet another lies negligently on the ground; and a fifth
endeavours to draw his hose over his nude body,
while his comrade runs about looking for his clothing.
A copious discourse might be delivered upon the content of the ceiling frescoes of the Sistine Chapel. After the Tuscan masters of the quattrocento had frescoed the walls with subjects of the Mosaic and Christian dispensation, contrasting the times sub lege and sub gratia, Michelangelo received the commission to recount upon the ceiling the period ante legem, from the story of the Creation to the Flood. To this he added the prophets, the sibyls, and furthermore the ancestors of Christ to prepare the way for His appearance. But such an account of the biblical content is quite inadequate. For Michelangelo there was nothing Christian or unchristian, neither sin nor forgiveness, neither guilt nor mercy; only human bodies and dramatic action.
In the three pictures from the life of Noah with which he began the work, the Florentine battle-piece is re-
——
Michelangelo 387
echoed. He claimed from the beginning the right of
treating the theme in the nude. The scene of the
Disgrace of Noah he rendered senseless by representing
not only the drunken patriarch but all the others nude.
The Thank-offering of Noah he used as a pretext to
assemble a group of nude men about an altar; and in
the Flood the motive of the Bathing Soldiers is mag-
nified into tremendous proportions. As there the
enemy, here the water approaches. Men drag their
wives away, and women gloomily brooding sit with
their children upon the ground. One seeks to save
his possessions, another to climb a tree, while a third,
who endeavours to climb into a canoe, is pushed back
by its inmates. Others are huddled together under
a tented roof. Not a vestige of clothes or landscape
appears.
With a better sense of perspective he confines himself in the following pictures to a few colossal figures. With hands raised and head thrown back, God the Father storms through space: “ Let there be light!” He spreads his arms, the sun and moon arise; He stretches them downwards, and one feels that life is coming upon the earth, although Michelangelo only paints the force and not the effect. In the fresco of the Creation Adam lies like a colossus of clay; his body in full view, his hips turned, the knee drawn up. At God’s touch an electric shock pulsates through the giant body. While in the older art the Fall of Man consisted of a landscape and two standing figures, Michelangelo
388 | Majestic and Titanic
merely indicates paradise by a few leaves, and instead
of reposeful figures presents contorted bodies. Eve,
cowering, turns backward to receive the apple from
the serpent, while the erect Adam reaches over his
wife into the foliage of the tree. In colour also he
becomes increasingly the sculptor. Although in the
frescoes of Noah a few tints are still visible, in the later
ones everything is softened to a dull grey.
Surrounding these middle pictures are twelve single statues, which, by way of ecclesiastical justification, Michelangelo labelled with the names ascribed by Christian mythology to the prophets and to the sibyls. But how indifferent it is whethe: one is called Joel, an- other Jeremiah, or a third Jonah! What cares he for the Delphic, the Libyan and the Cumzan sibyls! He is only concerned with the ecstatic convulsions of the gigantic bodies. Here one absorbed in deep thought supports his head on his hand; there a woman like a beautiful Medusa stares rigidly and wonderingly into the infinite; another prophet falls backward as if convulsed by a sudden revelation. And even if in this case the movement seems the expression of psychic action, purely physical motives actuate the other figures. A sibyl, wishing to procure a mighty book from a shelf, instead of rising reaches backward with both arms; another, in raising a giant folio, lying at her side upon her knee turns body and legs in opposite directions.
In the architectural framing he felt himself released
Imory “JadDY) IU1IStS IY} {O OISAL
WVdV dO HLUId AHL
OTAONVITHOIN
ae
Michelangelo 389
from all biblical fetters. Instead of the decoration of
the earlier masters he gives nude bodies. Children,
painted the colour of bronze or of wood, writhe in the
midst of triangular surfaces, and further on, youths
conceived as caryatids support the pillars of the ceilings
and the bronze tablets serving as labels for the prophets
and sibyls. Finally, to crown the whole, the Slaves,
high above the pillars, between: the prophets and the
sibyls, sit facing each other in pairs, winding the
bronze medallions about with garlands and draperies.
It is the old motive of the putt with the fruit garlands;
only that Michelangelo has made giants of the children
and changed the delighful sport into a neck-breaking
performance of balancing. Ten times the same prob-
lem had to be solved, and always new- motives of
movement crowded upon him. Thirty years later
he used the theme of the Last Judgment to hurl nude
human bodies through the air in all conceivable
movements, foreshortenings, and contortions.
This is, indeed, an external description of the pictures, but it does not correspond with the real content of Michelangelo’s art. As his God was neither the terrible Jehovah of the Old Testament nor the loving Father of Christianity, but Fate passing indifferently over the earth, so,in describing his work, one can properly speak neither of man nor of the nude. For his creations are not men; they have nothing in common with the creatures living upon our earth. In depicting the nude, he indeed adopted the heritage of Pollajuolo
390 (Majestic and Titanic
and Signorelli; but he is not tempted by the animal
heauty of the body, nor is this exaggerated action the
expression of a given theme. He only unburdens
the nightmare of his own soul, and what he created
relates only the tortures of a lonely, martyred spirit.
“7 T was of my own sad soul a picture true,
And bore the stamp that marks my gloomy brow.”
As Titian’s life was a great harmony, Michelango’s was a mighty dissonance. An event even before his birth is significant. When his mother had borne him seven months under her heart, and was accom- panying her husband on horseback to his post in Chiusi, the animal stumbled; she fell and was dragged after it. This is a premonition that the life of this man would be a chain of catastrophes and mighty convulsions. Proud of the ancient blood of the counts of Canossa flowing, as he believed, in his veins, his father was not willing that his son should become an artist; and it was only by the son’s immovable will that family resistance was conquered. Hardly was he apprenticed to Ghirlandajo when his relation to his teacher became one of enmity. Not long afterwards a further collision occurred. Torregiani, whom Michelangelo had irritated, broke his nose, a deformity which futher affected the formation of his character He who should in appearance also have been a priest of the beautiful was a homely, deformed man; in striking contrast to Leonardo, who moved about like a young god or an enchanting magician.
Micbelangeto 391
Michelangelo, on the other hand, was small, his head
almost abnormally formed, his brow mighty, and his
eye without lustre; his flattened nose gave an expression
of slavish, Malayan ugliness.
Thus in his youthful years he never learned what love meant. “If thou wishest to conquer me,” in old age he addresses love, “give me back my features, from which nature has removed all beauty.” Whenever in his sonnets he speaks of passion, it is always of pain and tears, of sadness and unrequited longing, never of the fulfilment of his wishes. But besides ugliness, quarrelsomeness of disposition was a gloomy present of nature to him. Sharp and ironical in his judgments, proud and irascible, he was not made to win friends. His judgment of Perugino was so severe that the latter accused him before a court; and in Bologna he quarrelled with good-souled Francia, to whose son he had observed that his father’s living figures were better than those he painted. From their first meeting he was hostile to Leonardo, because even their external contrast aroused a feeling of bitterness within him. He was never present when Florentine artists assembled. Sensitive and suspicious, irritable and discontented, he always believed himself surrounded by intrigues. - Even in his youth, at the time of his flight from Florence, that dependence upon gloomy forebodings appeared which in later life so often determined his actions. Only by labour could he assuage his melancholy and bitterness. He worked by fits and starts, lying for
392 Majestic and Titanic
a long time fallow and then tempestuously unburdening
himself. It is related that he laboured so feverishly —
upon his David that he slept in his clothes just where
he had fallen down in the evening, overcome by
work.
When he came to Rome a new convulsion im- mediately followed, for here two worlds collided. Michelangelo himself was, in the highest sense, of a tyrannical nature; and upon the papal throne sat a similar spirit, the passionate condottiere Julius, of whom it was said that he was accustomed to beat his cardi- nals at table. Like two hostile powers the two stood opposite each other. Michelangelo spoke to the pope with head covered, and treated him, according to Soderini’s words, “‘as the king of France would not have dared to.” Yet the pope tamed him, and led him back, after his flight to Florence, ‘with a halter about his neck.” But not only with Julius did he collide; nothing that he did took place without a battle. In Carrara he quarrelled with the labourers who hewed the blocks for the monument of Julius, and with the shipowners entrusted with their transport he was embroiled to such an extent that they finally besieged him in his house. He was compelled only by force to undertake the ceiling frescoes of the Sistine Chapel. Bramante who had built the scaffolding, was accused of designs upon his life. The assistants, whom he had sent from Florence, he suddenly avoided; when they came to work they found the
Michelangelo 393
chapel locked. Only because it was unbearable for
him to be in company with others, he completed the
giant work without assistance. ‘“‘Overburdened with
cares and bodily labour,” thus he writes home,
“I have not a friend in Rome, neither do I wish nor
have use for any; I hardly find time to take nourish-
ment. Not an ounce more can | bear than already
rests upon my shoulders.” When the work was com-
pleted he speaks in none of his letters of satisfaction,
but only complains, praising Bugiardini because he
was always satisfied with his own work, while he him-
self was not permitted to finish even one in accord-
ance with his desire.
Nevertheless, at a later period, he looked back upon the years which he had spent under the reign of Julius II. as upon a golden age. When the wild choleric Julius was succeeded by the effeminate, sybaritic Leo X., the discord between Michelangelo and the world into which fate had thrown him grew continually greater. A joyful epicurean spirit pre- vailed at Rome. One reads of merry cardinals and beautiful women, of Chigi’s villa and of the luxurious banquets at which golden plates that the pope had used were hurled into the Tiber. In the midst of this world of agreeable cavaliers, beside Raphael, who won all by his lovable character, stood the sarcastic, reticent Michelangelo, unbearable in demeanour, firm and immovable in his opinions; passing judgment even upon Raphael with unmerciful keenness. As the
394 Majestic and Titanic
pope observed to Sebastiano, Michelangelo was terribile
and filled people with fear.
It thus came to pass that he was banished by a commission to build the facade of San Lorenzo at Florence, where he lived during the following years. Here he witnessed the destruction of Florentine freedom, and was in charge of the fortifications during the siege, only to flee at a decisive moment—another symptom of the conflict of will which drove his tor- mented spirit hither and thither. Of the works which he planned not one was executed; for his plans were too gigantic. | Even in his youth he wished to trans- form a cliff near Carrara into a colossus, and he planned to make the tomb of Julius a forest of statues. As gigantic as were his plans, so small and poor did that which he was permitted to complete seem to him. There is always a dissonance between his mighty impulse to create and the impossibility of realising this impulse. The man who felt superhuman power in himself went through life with leaden weights upon his feet.
The return to Rome did not change his life. Raphael and Leonardo were dead, and a new diminutive race had grown up. Commissions which in his letters were the subject of grim persiflage were assigned him. He withdrew more and more from society, becoming an “impregnable fortress,” as contemporaries called him. He associated not with the living but with the dead, especially with Dante, whom he honoured as a
Michelangelo 395
mighty, misunderstood spirit. He suffered about him
only people who did not become burdensome to his
own thoughts; he had boors in his house and loved
to speak with children. His repugnance to seeing
others was so great that, when in his work upon the
Last Judgment he had fallen from the scaffolding,
the physician had to force his way through a window
in order to attend him. Even his family was a burden
to him. Without a home of his own, he had never-
theless to care for his father, brothers, and nephews—
all of them genuine types of a degenerate nobility—
who carried all their troubles to him. The manner
in which he assisted them was likewise a curious
mixture of touching love and indignant anger. The
man who met the mighty of the world with such
abrupt harshness, but watched through the whole
night at the sick-bed of his servant, would rise in wrath
over the demands of his relatives and yet lead the most
penurious life in order to save for them.
A further anomaly should also be considered. However much writers have endeavoured to associate Michelangelo’s sonnets with Platonism, the men to whom they were addressed, Tommaso Cavalieri, Luigi del Riccio, and Cecchino Bracci, were not Plato- nic ideals. When he wrote adoring poems to Cavalieri and drew the Abduction of Ganymede for him, he only revealed how a lonely man sought compensation for the love of women which was denied him. But even in this he did not get beyond torturing thoughts
396 Mafestic and Titanic
and self-reproaches; for to his other burdens religious
scruples were added. Memories of youth were awak-
ened in him, of the.days when he sat at the feet of
Savonarola. As he had formerly stupefied his suffering
by work, he now longed for peace of soul, for the heav-
enly love which, “stretched upon the Cross ‘holds out a
hand to us.”
‘I should have plunged my spirit deep in God—
But ah! through all the years I lent an ear
To every fable that the world holds dear,
And where sin led, unthinking took the road.”
Angrily he realised at last the dissonance between the
spirit within him and the bodily ills which tortured him.
At the same time that he designed the cupola of St.
Peter’s, he also, in bitter mockery, made a drawing
of himself as an old man moving about in one of the
little frames used to teach children how to walk.
He stands old and lonely “in a treacherous world of
sorrows.”
Only by his life can Michelangelo’s art be explained. Because-Titian was in harmony with himself and the world, the same inner happiness, the same mighty repose pours from his character into his works. Michel- angelo is of the race of Tantalus. As in his life there was nothing lovable or joyful, so his art is neither joyful nor free, but fearful and oppressive. It was no accident that he gave to his statue of Night a mask with empty eyes and distorted features as a symbol of her dreams, that his first work was a drawing after
Michelangelo 397
Schongauer’s St. Anthony Tortured by Demons. In
him. also demons struggle, and his dreams were not
beautiful but gloomy and terrible visions.
A single time, in his Leda, he painted the ecstasy of love; but precisely this work, which in content resembles the ideals of Leonardo, shows the difference between them. Leda does not tremble with joy as in Sodoma’s picture, but is rather the goddess of mis- fortune whose brood of swans brought ruin upon Troy and Greece. As in his sonnets he calls the ecstasy of love a cry of pain, so in his picture an erotic scene is changed into a tragedy of fate. His women inspire one with fear rather than love; their arms are of steel, and their mighty legs are formed like marble columns. If the theme does not require it, he avoids the female body altogether. As in his life women played no réle, so among the twenty Slaves of the Sistine Chapel there is not a single woman. He loved only the beauty of the male body, so much so “that it gave low-minded people cause for thinking evil of him.” The “eternal feminine” which Titian and the followers of Leonardo cele- brated is replaced in Michelangelo’s art by the “ eternal masculine.”
But he did not represent the living man. For as the great recluse passed through the world in communica- tion not with the living but with the geniuses of the past, so as an artist he seldom used living models; he preferred corpses, which powerlessly yielded to con-
398 Majestic and Titanic
tortion of the limbs which living bodies would resist.
And as the man was the great scorner to whom the
world could offer nothing, so the artist never repre-
sented natural mankind, but conceived a superhuman
race of giants.
He often emphasises to the pope and his relations how he suffered in being torn from his world of ideas. So his creations are for the most part self-absorbed; they sleep or brood thoughtfully, and if anything disturbs their repose, they start as if absorbed in thought, fearfully turn their heads or raise their arms to ward off. Adam’s gestures in the Expulsion from Paradise and the last line of the artist’s sonnet to his reclining statue, the Night,
‘* Pero non mi destar, deh! parla basso,”
are characteristic of the frame of mind of this lonely
man.
As he felt himself a giant in the midst of contemptible pigmies, so his creations are children of wrath, who would spring up and shatter a world. Moses, especially with his threatening, contracted brows and his untamed muscular power, is the.incarnation of the mighty passions and glowing wrath struggling in Michelangelo’s soul. But he is not only a titan; burning like Almighty God to create a world, he is a fettered giant; a Pro- metheus, whose hands and feet are bound by iron clasps. To what extent he realised this is shown
MICHELANGELO
THE PROPHET JEREMIAH
Fresco in the Sistine Chapel, Rome
{Michelangelo 399
by the Slaves of the Louvre. Indeed, he creates only
bodies of titanic power and yet fettered, as if they were
hindered in their movements by some superior power.
His people never move freely and easily like Titian’s;
their surroundings always seem too narrow for the
free action of their limbs. Here the framing is a
triangle in which they can only cower but not stand;
‘there a gable is placed above them, which, if they
arose, they would shatter. Within this space which
so heavily oppresses them, they struggle and stretch
in mighty action, twist their limbs, contort and wind
the different parts of their bodies hither and thither;
with gigantic effort they seek to rise, and yet are
unable to do so. In contrast with the full, joyful
power in Titian, there is here something compressed,
tortured; the unavailing struggles of Prometheus
bound.
Even the conflict of the will so characteristic of Michelangelo’s character recurs in the beings which he created. As he fortified Florence and yet fled at the critical moment; as in his poems be often uses the expression, “What shall I dor My will ever hesitates undecided’’; so in his creations conflicting forces seem to contend, as if the different parts of the body were not directed by the same mind. While with other artists the movements unconsciously follow the will and the body is at unison with itself and the soul, with him the will does not seem to dom- inate the body. The separate limbs pursue different
VOL, 1.—26
400 Majestic and Titanic
paths. Here the muscles of the arm are strained for
mighty action, but the body still reclines in deepest
lethargy. There the-neck is stretched and distended,
but the limbs know not wherefore, being mechanically
thrown in different directions. Or again, a sudden
determination quivers through the body, but the
limbs repose in dull apathy.
The Last Judgment of 1541 contains his legacy. Every element of wrath and bitterness that had collected in his proud soul is here poured forth. In older paintings the saints were silently and solemnly collected about the Saviour; wailing, but submissive, the damned yielded to their fate, and in solemn circles the elect soared to heaven. Michelangelo knows only wrath and revenge as the characteristic of the divinity. Naked, like a Roman izmperator, Christ appears; the martyrs press forward, the angels sweep past, and a thunderbolt from His hand seems to shatter the universe. But it does not strike the damned. As Hutten said of Julius II. that he stormed the gates of heaven when Peter forbade him entrance, so Michel- angelo cannot conceive of humility, slavish obedience and fear, or gentle suffering. Terrible as is his God with the mighty gesture, the athletes defy Him; they do not draw back, but press forward in ever thickening throngs. As they approach, their forms grow more powerful and their bodies are contorted into impossible muscular masses. These are no sinners receiving pun- ishment for past actions, but rebellious giants storm-
Triumph of the Formal 401
ing heaven. The final judgment is transformed into
a Gdtterddmmerung. |
In the Pauline Chapel he spoke his last word. Harsh and shrill are the lines; here depicting a yawning void, there wild dramatic action. Peter, nailed head down- wards upon the cross, seeks by a superhuman move- ment of the neck to turn round. It is Michelangelo, the fettered Prometheus, raising himself up for the last time.
For the Italian Renaissance he became the Fate which he himself had painted in the Sistine Chapel; for he deprived art of its joy in the simple and the ordinary, and of its pleasure in colour. After the artists had seen this world of demons, everything earthly appeared insignificant. They also wished to create giants in whom the powers of the universe struggled and contended. They attempted to make his language a universal one; but the greater the num- ber of his followers, the more lonely the great mas- ter became.
V.— The Triumph of the Formal
Of the two painters who at that time represented classic art in Florence, Andrea del Sarto is more nearly related to modern sentiment. Although noble composition meant everything to so true a son of the cinquecento, he nevertheless preserved, within this scheme of composition, complete freedom and a certain nervous mobility. The attitude of his figures is soft
402 Mafestic and Titanic
and tired, their movements are of gentle indifference.
In the softly bowed head of his angels the tender
ecstasy which Leonardo gave such beings still survives;
his female heads are also more nearly related to
Leonardo’s ideal of beauty than to the distinguished
and majestic conception of the later cznquecento.
Dark, passionate eyes, with blue rings bearing testimony
to sleepless nights, look upon us with consuming
glance. The cheeks are pale, and a loosened braid of
dark hair, straying downward, increases the sleepy
impression of his paintings. As if confirming Vasari’s
description of Lucrezia del Fede, the beautiful widow
whom he married in 1517, as the model of his Madonnas
and the evil genius of his life, a certain perverse
piquancy is expressed in these heads. As a colourist
also he entered upon the heritage of Leonardo by
imparting a very individual shade to the tender
sfumato, by substituting a subdued tone attuned to
a cool grey or delicate silver key for the warm
tones of Leonardo. In line as in colour he reveals
the same soft, tired, aristocratic beauty; his favourite
colours being black and white, yellow, red, and
pearl grey, in which fine colour scheme he differs
from all other painters of his day. With them one
hears, in so far as colour is not sacrificed to plastic
impression, the full flooding tones of the organ; with
Andrea the soft, sharp notes of the violin. It is
significant that he was fond of painting frescoes in
grey monochrome, for this style corresponded best
Triumph of the Formal 403
with his refined, neurasthenic temperament. He is
a painter for connoisseurs, and is most select in his
taste; at one time morbidly interesting, at another
attractive in his solemnity; and notwithstanding the
majesty which the style of the cznquecento required,
he was possessed of a worldly elegance belonging
to the unique family of Filippino Lippi, Melzi and
Boltraffio.
If we understand clearly what attracts us in Andrea del Sarto, we also know why Fra Bartolommeo makes such a strange impression. In the former’s paintings we find men who are majestic and yet have souls; but in the latter’s the difficulty of reconciling the apotheosis of the body, which was the real aim of the art the sixteenth century, with psychic refinement, too evidently appears. He has reached the stage in which feeling no longer animates the mighty forms, and where majesty is converted into hollowness. The body, in the quattrocento the fragile casement of the soul, has become an imposing vessel without content. What a mighty change to occur in the course of a decade! Like Botticelli and Perugino, Fra Bartolommeo belonged to those who gathered about Savonarola, and lived in the very con- vent where one painted and the other preached. He was at the head of the atelier connected with the convent of San Marco, and in conjunction with his friend Albertinelli provided many Tuscan churches with altar-pieces. But in these works the mysticism
404 Majestic and Titanic
of Fiesole as well as the tender soulfulness of Perugino
is quite forgotten. For these older masters beauty
of form was not an aim in itself, but only in so far as it
was an expression of sentiment. Now, in the very
cloisters of San Marco, the lay figure was invented by
Bartolommeo. When his name is mentioned one
thinks of apostles and prophets mighty in body but
insignificant in soul, and recalls the words of Goethe:
“By chilling idealisation and rigid dexterity these
biblical subjects have been deprived of their simplicity
and truth and torn away from the sympathetic heart.
By majestically draped and trailing cloaks artists try
to make us forget the empty nobility of the ecclesias-
tical personages.”
Let us neverthelesss beware of regarding Fra Bar- tolommeo from a false point of view. If he does not paint like Perugino or Botticelli, the reason is only because his ideals are different; and the fifteenth century, in its psychic refinement, is more nearly related to the present day than the sixteenth. The frate nevertheless remains one of the representative men of that great age to which the cult of form, nobility of movement, and the majesty of the body meant everything. His first picture, the Vision of St. Bernard in the Florentine Academy, has nothing of the quiet soulfulness of Perugino; but in place of this it announces in the sweeping draperies that trend towards solemnity, in which the greatness of the master lay. To this everything that might destroy the general effect must
aUaL,Op y ‘DiptounuUY ayy {o 42]810]D AY] Ut OISAAT
OOOVS Tad VNNOGVN
OLUYVS THC VAACNV
Triumpb of the Formal 405
yield. No individual heads suit these draperies, for
beauty must. be of a “regular’’ type. No landscape
can serve as a background for them; they can only
stand in the midst of solemn, imposing architecture.
This ensemble he creates with a firm hand. Mighty
pilasters, roomy niches, form the frames of his
scenes; amd he skilfully uses the steps of the throne
to vary the composition. Sometimes he places the
principal figure upon a pediment in order to attain
rhythmic lines. A baldachin held by angels often
forms the circular termination above. All his
pictures sound in full rich tones like stanzas of
Ariosto, and are cf the same rhythmic flow as a
well composed piece of architecture. After he had
seen the prophets of Michelangelo at Rome, he
himself with his St. Mark attempted the titanic.
It was due to the religious movement which, as a
reflex of the German Reformation, passed over Italy
about 1520, that his last work, the Entombment of the
Pitti Gallery, reveals psychic qualities which far
transcend the level of the fifteenth century.
It was Fra Bartolommeo’s unlucky fate that his works, just because the scientific rules predominated in them, became at a later period a welcome find for those who attempted to create classical art according to the formula of the classicists. His figures are distasteful to us, because they have become the con- ventional types of the “great historic style.” His service nevertheless remains this, that he gave an
406 (Majestic and Titanic
appropriate expression to the stately, pompous, and
representative spirit of the cimquecento, and was the
first to fix certain laws of composition, just as Uccello
had a century earlier determined certain laws of
perspective.
End oj Volume 1.
Chapter VI.— The Union of Styles
I.— Rapbael
THE acquisitions of those who extended the
bounds of the empire are inherited by those
who come after them. As in the middle of
the fifteenth century Gozzoli had adopted the results
of the investigations of Castagnor and Uccello, and
all the achievements of the next generation were
used by Ghirlandajo; so the great profiteur of the
sixteenth century is named Raphael.
In examining Raphael’s portraits of himself one indeed feels a certain persojiaL elemenUpf his style. This youth with the intelligent, sympathetic features, the bare neck, and the long artist’s locks; with the pure, soft girlish eyes like those of Perugino’s Madonnas, corresponds to Vasari’s picture of Raphael’s per- sonality: Every evil humour vanished when his comrades saw him, every low thought fled from their minds ; and this was because they felt themselves vanquished by his affability and beautiful nature.” ^
‘ Although this translation is a condensation of the well-known passage in Vasari, it embodies the essential sense. — Ed,
407
4o8
XTbe XHnion of tbe Stales
As he himself experienced nothing sad, so his art is one
of sunny joyfulness. As his life was passed without
storms, without catastrophes, so he never painted thrill-
ing or convulsive pictures. Even when the subject is
terrible, or violently dramatic, he remains mild and soft,
pleasing and friendly. As his portrait has more a typical
than an individual effect, so in his paintings everything
individual is either eliminated or changed into the
typical. As he never had conflicts either with his
employers or with his assistants, but was as pliant and
lovable in obeying as in giving orders, so there are no
dissonances in his art. Everything that is hard and
angular in nature is softened and rounded; and not
only the individual forms but the composition moves in
pliant, rhythmic lines. As his own life was a beautiful
harmony, so his paintings fuse the gay many-sided-
ness of life into soft harmonies in which no movement
or fold of drapery disturbs the pleasing unison.
But another side of his being is expressed in the portrait of himself. This handsome cavalier was no brooder over problems; he never knew the anxious hours of doubt which genius experiences. Instead of giving he receives; instead of the manly creative power his most prominent characteristic is a feminine element, the appreciation of work accomplished by others. Only in this manner can the enormous number of works which he created during a short lifetime be explained. The most receptive artistic nature that ever existed, he seizes all the threads in his hand, and
IRapbael
409
shapes what individual geniuses had created into
new stylistic unity. Here Perugino or Leonardo, there
Fra Bartolommeo or Sebastiano, there again Michel-
angelo or a Greek sculptor is his source. Only behind
the canvas, almost non-existent, stands the beautiful
youth of the portrait, smoothing the corners of his
models, softening their individuality, and smoothing
their abruptness.
His father, Giovanni Santi, possessed before him this eclectic versatility and followed with much adaptability now the Paduan, now the Umbrian school, uniting with the profession of a painter that of an author. With the son this eclecticism became a genial, inherent quality. While Leonardo and Michelangelo in their first works, the Angel and the Holy Family, displayed their individuality, Raphael devoted his power to mastering the entire development of Italian art from Perugino to Michelangelo. As his first boyish drawings were copies of the pictures of the philosophers which Justus of Ghent had painted in the ducal library of Urbino, so his earliest pictures reflect the works of his Umbrian teacher. The Madonna of the Solly Collection, the Virgin between Sts. Francis and Jerome, and the Connestabile Madonna are essentially Umbrian, and reveal the same soft, sentimental faces with melancholy doves' eyes that Perugino loved. In his first altar- pieces likewise he repeats with touching simplicity the models of his master. At the time that Raphael was his apprentice, Perugino had painted a Crucifixion,
410
XTbe Xllnion of tbe Stales
an Assumption, a Coronation, and a Marriage of the
Virgin; and although Raphael treated the same
subjects, the effect even at this early period, especially
in the Sposalipo, was more subtle and elegant.
He is also a stranger to the one-sidedness of the Umbrian masters. Where Perugino was only mild and contemplative, Raphael painted dramatic action: St. George plunging upon his white horse through the landscape and swinging his sword against the snorting dragon. He also enlarged the domain of painting in another direction. While Perugino, as the follower of Savonarola, had treated only religious themes, Rapha^ who, as in the horse of St. George, copied one of the steeds of the Dioscuri, was the first Umbrian to return to the domain of the antique. Siena, whither he had come as an assistant to Pinturicchio, possessed one of the most beautiful antique groups known to the sixteenth century, the Three Graces, which Raphael copied in a painting now in the Museum of Chantilly. Even more charming in its modest tenderness is the effect of the Umbrian antique in his little painting of Apollo and Marsyas in the Louvre. In a third somewhat earlier little picture, the Choice of Hercules, he painted the choice which he himself never had to make. In the days of Perugino antiquity and Christianity had been in conflict; but Raphael domesticated both in one household.
After he had thus mastered the painting of his Um- brian home he entered upon the heritage of Florentine
RAPHAEL
LA BELLE GIARDINI^RB
Louvre
IRapbael
411
art. In the Brancacci Chapel he learned from Masac- ^ do’s works the secret of the grand style; in the choir of Santa Maria Novella he studied Ghirlandajo’s Coronation of the Virgin which served as a model for his frescoes in San Severo, Perugia; and Donatello’s relief at Orsanmichele furnished the motive of his St. George in the Hermitage. But even more than from the dead, he learned from the living masters. From 1503 to 1506 Leonardo resided at Florence, and Fra Bartolommeo had made it his life-work to demon- strate in his paintings the latter’s maxims of linear composition. Raphael, who had been quite Umbrian in the tender Madonna del Granduca, now created a series of pictures of the Virgin which are as closely related to Leonardo’s Madonna of the Grotto as is the Conne stabile Madonna to Perugino; the best known examples being the Madonna in the Meadow, the Madonna with the Starling, and the Belle Jardiniere, in all of which the figures, as in Leonardo’s picture, are bounded by an equilateral triangle. From Leonardo also he derived the chubby-cheeked Christ-child with the Praxitelean pose; except that with Raphael, especially in the Madonna Canigiani, the calculation in the composition is more conspicuous because the linear arrangements are not softened by the effect of light. His individuality nevertheless is revealed in his type of the Madonna. She is not of heavenly beauty, has nothing of the delicacy of Leonardo, but is only friendly and mild, the true sister of the Raphael whom
412
XTbe XHnion of tbe Stales
we know from his own portrait. He appears as a
double of Fra Bartolommeo in his Madonna del
Baldacchino; and imparts to his portrait of Madda-
lena Doni the attitude, though not the mysterious
charm, of Mona Lisa. Finally he succeeded in
uniting in a single work, the Entombment of the
Brera, the characteristics of Perugino, Mantegna,
Michelangelo, and Fra Bartolommeo. His studies
began with Perugino’s Pietd, received a new point of
view from Mantegna’s line engraving of the same
subject, and were modified by Michelangelo’s statue,
from which he adapted the body of Christ, and his
Holy Family, which furnished the woman seated to the
right. Fra Bartolommeo’s spirit is revealed in his
manner of subordinating the emotional content of the
theme to the composition.
His call to Rome was attended by a new change. As in Perugia he had been a soulful Umbrian, and in Florence an apt pupil of Leonardo, he now rises to the “grand style.” The solemnity and majesty of the Eternal City streams into his works.
But the Disputa, the first of his paintings in the chambers of the Vatican, reveals his connection with the Florentine Raphael. As he adopted numerous figures from Leonardo’s Adoration of the Kings, so also he followed the principles which the latter had established for the composition of historical paintings. In like manner in his picture of the Promulgation of the Decretals the connection with the quattrocento.
IRapbael
413
with Melozzo's Appointment of Platina, is evident.
From his School of Athens, although here too there are
many motives from Leonardo’s Adoration, Melozzo’s
Platina, and Donatello’s Paduan reliefs another
master seems to speak. It need not be assumed that
Bramante furnished him the design; for he painted
the ideas of Bramante as Masaccio had those of
Brunellesco, and Piero della Francesca those of Leon
Battista Alberti. His association with the great
architect of Urbino, at that time building structures
which announced a new era of architecture, trans-
formed the master of line into a great master of
space, into a mighty architect.
The chief picture of the second chamber, the Expul- sion of Heliodorus, signifies the acme of his development under Bramante’s influence. As in the School of Athens, a wide hall stretches before us, which, enlivened by few figures, gives an even greater impression of depth. Within this hall an event of stormy dramatic action occurs. Raphael, ten years earlier, so modest and so Umbrian, and so solemn in the School of Athens, here surpasses Filippino Lippi in Baroque movement. In another picture of this chamber, the Liberation of Peter, he even succeeds in uniting with his mastery of line a glowing colour and gleaming effect of light. Sebastiano del Piombo, who had just at that time arrived in Rome, thus transformed Raphael the Umbrian into a Venetian.
In his following works the personal element dis-
414
Zbc Xllnion of tbe Stales
appears even more; for Raphael now assigned the
execution of his works to assistants and pupils. A
new principle, which is as characteristic for Raphael
as for the whole century, is now enforced. The
fifteenth century was the age of individualism. All
the masters who had laboured in the Sistine Chapel
worked independently side by side; and even Michel-
angelo painted his colossal frescoes without assistance.
Raphael, as he himself had yielded his personality to
others, now became in his turn a dictator, under whose
command an army of lesser masters laboured. The
place of individual creations is taken during the
cinquecento by works which are nothing more than
joint achievements of artistic activity.
Beginning with the year 1514, Raphael followed other models. Although he had formerly in his Entombment adopted single figures from Michelangelo’s paintings, he now created in the Sibyls in the church of Santa Maria della Pace a work which seems a transla- tion of Michelangelo’s art into the style of Raphael. Michelangelesque is the plastic execution of form and the imposing treatment of drapery; Raphaelesque, the pleasing rhythm of composition, the arrangement, and the gentle manner in which he leads back the titanic creations of Buonarroti to a measured humanity.
But even more than by Michelangelo he was influenced by the antique. Just at that time those celebrated works of antique sculpture were excavated, which until the days of Winckelmann, Lessing, and Goethe
RAPHAEL
THE SCHOOL OF ATHENS
Fresco in the Vatican, Rome
IRapbael
415
were considered the most perfect revelation of the
Hellenic spirit; the Apollo Belvedere, the Sleeping
Ariadne, Antinous, and the Laocoon group. The baths
of Titus revealed the principles of decoration of the
late Roman epoch. The museum of the Belvedere
was founded, and after Bramante’s death, Raphael,
his artistic heir, became not only architect of St.
Peter’s but conservator of antiquities.
The decorations of the Loggie of the Vatican were his first creations in this capacity. The problem was to enliven the ceilings and walls of the corridor of the Vatican palace with pleasing play of line; a commission especially sympathetic to his preference for harmonious form and “optical cantilena.” In this joyful Olympian scene, the cupids and birds, the maidens, swinging themselves in garlands of foliage or listening behind dainty columns, festoons and vases, tritons and satyrs, naiads and sphinxes — everything is included that the sixteenth century had adapted from antique works of art; and over it all hovers the graiiosissima grapia of Raphael himself.
After he had thus in light playfulness done homage to the antique, it won a stylistic influence over him. He is no longer tempted by the solution of problems of space and colour, but composes his pictures of statues. The Triumph of Galatea is a characteristic example. Although the motive of the action of the principal figure is derived from a modern work, Leo- nardo’s Leda, all the remaining figures, the marine
4i6
Ubc IHnion of tbe Stales
centaur, the nereids, the triton, and the putto with the
dolphin, are taken from the antique sarcophagus
reliefs. Space and colour appear so indifferent to
him that although this is a marine picture he does not
paint the water, but lets the figures rise like statues
from the dry earth. The neighbouring frescoes of
Psyche in the Farnesina offer the logical complement.
The ceiling frescoes with the Judgment of the Gods and
the Marriage of Psyche resemble a forest of statues
suspended in the air, and the figures of the ceiling
vaults arise plastic as statues from a void.
His religious pictures are treated in the same plastic style. The principal subject of the third Vatican Chamber depicted how Pope Leo 111. extinguished a conflagration by making the sign of the cross. In Raphael’s hands the Burning of the Bor go is transformed into the destruction of Troy; but even this designation is derived from a group interpreted as i^neas and Anchises. In truth, the entire painting is a collection of studies; a naked man letting himself down from a wall, another taking up a child, and the wind-blown figure of a woman carrying water. And as there is no psychical, neither is there any external connection among the figures. The whole theme serves to demon- strate certain mathematical principles of form, to juxtapose a few rhythmic and plastic bodies. In the cartoons for the tapestries which are now the pride of the South Kensington Museum, this feeling for the antique is clarified into a serene classicism. They have
IRapbael
417
been called the Parthenon sculptures of Christian art
and this characterisation contains much truth. Those
who, like Ruskin, the herald of the Pre-Raphaelites,
examine the cartoons with regard to their spiritual
content, are offended by the superficial character of
Hellenic linear rhythm; but he who does not measure
one period of art by another feels that the problem
imposed by the sixteenth century was most perfectly
solved by Raphael.
That he nevertheless retained a naturalistic power which enabled him to create portraits ranking with Titian’s as the greatest products of sixteenth-century portraiture, is a further proof of his astonishing ver- satility. He achieved the highest in the general amalgamation of styles in the works of his last years, in which a power reappears which had been long for- gotten: Christianity.
His earlier Roman Madonnas differ from the Flor- entine as the School of Athens differs from the Disputa. A more heroic race of women, majestically built and bold in movement, takes the place of the mild, gentle beings which he formerly painted. The backgrounds are no longer the sloping hills of the valley of the Arno, but the solemn forms of the Roman Campagna, animated by antique ruins and aqueducts. The composition, then laboriously constructed, now be- comes, in the midst of the most complicated intricacies, powerful and free. But although a breath of the universal power of the papacy and something of
VOL. II.— 27.
4i8 Ubc Xllnion of tbe Stales
the majesty of ancient Rome pervades these works, the Christian note is lacking.
Then came the time when Luther nailed his theses to the church door in Wittenberg, and a breath of this religious enthusiasm pulsated through Italy. Fra Bartolommeo’s Entombment, Titian’s Assumption, and Sodoma’s ecstatic pictures are due to the same sentiment which had moved the world a generation earlier, in the days of Savonarola, the .ime in which Raphael was born. In the visionary pictures which strike the final chord of his artistic activity, the great style, heretofore so cold and plastic, is warmed and animated by a breath of Christianity, by the same mystic enthusiasm which pulsated through the veins of the lad in Perugino’s workshop.
The transition to this later Christian style is repre- sented by St. Cecilia, listening like Raphael himself, who for the first time again hears celestial music. It is true that St. Paul is taken from Leonardo’s Adoration and that the Magdalen resembles the type which occurs in Sebastiano’s St. Chrysostom. But the rapturous upward glance of St. Cecilia’s eyes is new: Perugino is revived and Guido Reni is heralded. For the Madonna di Foligno, Leonardo’s Resurrection was determinative; but the ecstatic head of St. Francis and the burning eyes of the Baptist also show that the Hellene had become a Christian painter. In his Transfiguration he goes a step further in the amal- gamation of styles: dramatic life, gesticulating hands.
RAPHAEL
POPE JULIUS II.
Pitti Gallery, Florence
lBnl> ot tbe IRenaissance 419
and, in the figure of the woman, plastic and antique beauty ; above, the head of Christ taken from Leonardo’s Resurrection combined with an archaic solemnity re- minding one of Perugino.
In the Sistine Madonna, although she also was inspired by Leonardo’s Resurrection, the work of his life vibrates harmoniously in one great accord. All the nobility of the antique is here present; for Mary resembles a majestic antique statue. The arrangement of line is of the most perfect harmony, showing, in spite of the mathematical scheme, no cool calculation. There is an impression of space as if Mary had been wafted from the infinite; a bold colour scheme, and a tender twilight, from which the figures gleam forth as if of gold. Colour, beauty of line, space, composition, and Hellenic nobility of form — all are here united. But something else is added without which all the rest would remain dead: the psychic qualities which far transcend Raphael’s usual level. The slender girlish mother of God, enveloped by the air of heaven, approaching in golden aether; the Christ-child staring so solemnly with his great eyes into the infinite: it seems as if not Raphael but Murillo had painted them. The psychic is once more united with formal beauty. V ) -f-
II. The End of the Renaissance in Italy
In the manner in which he amalgamated the style of most different personalities into a new unity,
420
XTbe XHnion of tbe Stales
Raphael signifies the acme of the efforts of the sixteenth
century. For if one wished by a single expression to
characterise the fifteenth and the sixteenth centuries, the
former should be called the century_of individualism,
the latter of centralisation. In the former there ex-
isted side by side in Italy a multitude of independent
single states, every one of which had a part in history;
and everywhere lived rugged and genuine personalities,
great in evil as in good. In the cinquecento all this
ceased. There were no small principalities or con-
dottieri, but only one great native power in all Italy —
the States of the Church. In the north a mighty
empire had been founded upon whose domain the sun
never set.^ The same spirit of centralisation prevailed
in art.
As formerly every province of Italy had produced its artists, now Rome, the capital of the land, also became the centre of art. Few painters were born there; they came from the most distant regions and the most different countries of the peninsula. But they all streamed to Rome because they believed that upon the soil of the Eternal City the highest art could be produced. A single style pervades all that they have to say. The masters of the quattrocento were sharply
‘Although the author goes too far in his statement that Rome was the only great native power in all Italy, since Venice and Florence were still independent, it is quite true that it was the chiet native state. The empire in the north referred to is probably Spain, upon whose dominions the sun never set, and which by acquisition of the duchy of Milan and the union with the German Empire under Charles V. became also a northern power. — Ed.
EnJ) of tbe IReitafssancc
42J
defined individualities, like the tyrants of the different
cities, who were kings within their little principalities.
Each individual can be recognised at the first glance,
and even the cabinet-maker gave his work a personal
note. Their works are dear to us, not as products
of manual labour, but as human documents. The
painters of the cinquecento, on the other hand, conceal
their personality in their creations. All individual
characteristics are effaced. As in the political world
there were only two great personalities, the pope
and the emperor, so in the artistic there were only a
few kings, whose courtiers the others were satisfied
to be. The word “school,” which had no mean-
ing during the fifteenth century, now acquired its aca-
demic significance. All are vassals, whether one is
more inclined to Raphael, or another to Michelangelo.
To this relation the composition of the paintings
corresponds: one central figure dominating all the
others.
Perino del Vaga, whose estimable decorative talent was of much use to Raphael, painted at a later period the mythological frescoes of the Palazzo Doria in Genoa, variants of what he had painted under Raphael in the Farnesina and the Loggie. In his Deposition from the Cross, painted for the church of Santa Trinita dei Monti, Daniele da Volterra also appears as a faithful follower of Raphael, but his David Beheading Goliath (Louvre) was long attributed to Michelangelo. In the latter painting a preference for the colossal, for exag-
422
Ube Tllnion of tbe Stales
gerated dramatic action and swollen muscles, has
taken the place of his former noble simplicity.
The exaggerated form of Michelangelo combined with sprawling movements and obscene sensuality — such is the art of Giulio Romano. He was Raphael’s favourite pupil and later became his most useful assistant. Most of that which goes under Raphael’s name in the Stanza dell’ Incendio, in the Farnesina, and in the Hall of Constantine, as well as many pictures from Raphael’s later period (such as the Pearl at Madrid, and in the Louvre St. Margaret and the portrait of Joan of Aragon) is at least in execution the work of Giulio. After Raphael’s death it was he who completed the Transfiguration and the Coronation of the Virgin. None of Raphael’s pupils so completely adopted his style, although even then 'Giulio transformed it into a crude and coarser art. In his later works no traces of this tutelage can be observed. Impetuous haste replaces gentleness, and even his Madonnas are full of Michelangelesque elements : Mary herself being a mighty woman of gigantic form, the Christ-child a powerful lad with lively complicated movements. Even less do the frescoes in the Palazzo del Te at Mantua remind one of his former relation with Raphael. Great muscular power, great technical bravura, and coarseness are the characteristics of the pictures in which he depicts thelove stories of Psyche and other Olympians. The Hall of the Giants especially contains the boldest and wildest that Giulio’s strong hand created. Upon
GIULIO ROMANO
FALL OF THE GIANTS
Fresco in Palazzo del TF Mantua
of tbc IRenaissance
423
the ceiling one gazes upon an apparent panorama drawn
in perspective: an Ionic columnar hall vaulted with a
mighty cupola enclosing the throne of Jupiter. All
Olympus is in commotion; for the giants painted on
the wall are storming heaven. The lightning strikes,
overwhelming the malefactors with the columns and
walls of temples. There is no decorative arrangement
of the surfaces, with the result that the flood of figures
is poured without restraint over walls and ceiling.
Even the boundary between the floor and walls is
not preserved; for Giulio had the floor paved with
stones upon which he continued the painting of the
wall in order to heighten the dramatic illusion.
It was not long before the Florentine school pursued the same paths. In characterising these masters it is not necessary to speak of them, but only of the models whom they followed. Francesco d’ Ubertino, called Bacchiacca, decorated furniture in the style of the quattrocento, but attuned his colour to that soft misty grey which Andrea del Sarto had brought into fashion. Franciabigio, the fresco painter with whom the latter laboured in the Annunziata and the Scalzo, is also known by his furniture decorations and especially by portraits which form subtle variations of Leonardo’s Mona Lisa. Puntormo, likewise a good portrait painter, was, in his earlier works, like the Annunciation of 1516, a clever imitator of the. transparent silver grey tones of Andrea; but in his later works (as in the Forty Martyrs of the Pitti Gallery) he degenerated
424
ZTbe Xllnion of tbe Stales
into bombastic imitation of Michelangelo. Ridolfo
Ghirlandajo, who at first resembled Raphael, repeated
at a later period, with artisan clumsiness, what he had
in his youth spoken with freshness and spirit. In
examining the youthful works of Francesco Granacci
one is reminded of Domenico Ghirlandajo, in his later
works of Raphael or Michelangelo. Giuliano Bugi-
ardini, Giovanni Sogliani, Domenico Puligo, and
their numerous associates are all sympathetic painters,
but their works only reflect those created by the
authoritative masters.
The further the century progresses the rarer artistic individuality becomes. Portrait painting, indeed, for a time remains fresh. Bronzino especially has left a series of portraits which not only determined the character of court painting for all Europe, but in their sincerity are worthy of the best traditions of the primitives: in line as sharp as chiselled medals, and distinguished in conception and colour. But even this master seems only a survivor of the long procession of mighty portrait painters produced by the preceding epoch. What he still could do — the rendition of a human physiognomy with characteristic truth — the later painters neither desired nor were able to ac- complish. If the fifteenth century, with its civil wars which permitted every peasant lad to become a duke, with its bold recklessness and unrestrained feeling of personal worth, also created the most indi- vidual portraits: so the sixteenth, which destroyed
lErib of tbe IRenaissance 425
the free republics and the spirit of individualism, gave also to its portraits a uniform character. Types replace personalities, or else portrait painting is altogether avoided, because the dependence upon the model cannot be reconciled with the retention of ideal beauty.
A dreary monotony extends on all sides. There was a very great opportunity for painting. Even the com- missions of Julius II. or Leo X. seem unimportant in comparison with the gigantic works that originated in the second half of the sixteenth century. All mythological and historical subjects were reproduced in colours; but no matter how many figures occur in the paintings, they are always the same cliches printed over another signature. The antique is of course the centre of interest, and it is strange how willingly it at all times came to the aid of modern artists. At the beginning of the century when the ideals of taste were delicacy and nobility, the Apollo Belvedere was exhumed; and with the middle of the century, when the tendency was towards Baroque wildness, the Farnese Hercules and the Farnese Bull were resurrected from the earth. These Roman copies of Lysippan originals, although their chief char- acteristics are clumsiness and vulgarity, drew a whole generation in their trail. The head in these works is an eternal variant of the absolute ideal of beauty prescribed by the Grecian decadence; the body is no organism but a composition of bombastic, swollen
426
Jibe Tllnion of tbe Stales
iimbs placed in effective contrast. Because the most
influential antique work happened to be a Hercules,
moderns also thought they must render colossal figures
and no longer create men but giants.
This bombastic rendition of form is supplemented by a declamatory expression of thought. No one any longer expresses briefly what he has to say, but all shout with rhetorical pathos. Christ can no longer sit at the Last Supper without making cramped the- atrical gestures; servants with edibles rush up steps; the disciples wave their arms and contort their bodies. Others feel that such efforts' of bravura are in the long run tiresome, but the more they reason and follow the rules, the more monotonous their works become: geometrical constructions of general, formal beauty which differ from each other as little as the proofs of a mathematical theorem. It is significant that the history of Italian art was now first transcribed; for the historical activity of Vasari ends the entire development. The age itself had the feeling that its creative artery was dried, and sought in- spiration in the past, repeating what had already been done.
III.— Roma Caput Mundi
So great was the trend towards centralisation that other countries also submitted to the artistic supremacy of the Eternal City. During the second half of the
sixteenth century Italy marched at the head of civil-
isation. Italian generals won battles for the em-
peror, the king of France, and the king of Spain;
Italian physicians were summoned as far as Scotland
and Turkey; Italian scholars gave instruction in all the
universities of France, Germany, and England. The
Italian language, little known in the fifteenth century,
became the general language of the distinguished world.
Aretino, the Venetian pamphleteer, levied tribute upon
all the crowned heads of Europe. Artistically, also,
Italy gave the tone to all nations. As Italian masters
found occupation in the most different courts, so the
northern painters thought they could find enlighten-
ment only in the South. A homesick longing for Italy,
as in Goethe’s and Carstens’s day, seized the best
spirits, and gave them no rest until they had reached
the land of their dreams. With privations and
sufferings, labouring for their bread by the way, they
made pilgrimages to Rome as to a sanctuary, and
were never willing to depart after having been there.
Durer’s words: ‘'Oh, how shall I freeze for lack of the
sun; here am I a lord, at home a sycophant,” expressed
their innermost soul. For they not only admired
the art of Italy; they envied the artists themselves:
Raphael, whose whole life was a triumphal procession;
Michelangelo, who treated popes as his equals; Titian,
whose brush an emperor, Charles V., picked up.
They longed for relief from the limitations of their
little towns and from the philistine narrowness of the
428
Ube TUnion of tbe Stifles
North; they wished to take part in a great, free,
dignified existence.
In the Netherlands, where a sort of Renaissance pervaded the entire spiritual life, the pilgrimage to Rome began earliest. One artist especially, Jan Scorel, a chivalric romanticist, is a true type of this cosmopolitan race. He inherited from infancy much sense of gracefulness and a fine feeling for landscape. Old, gnarled trees, oaks and pines, occur in all his works. Even before he had trod the soil of the South, he dreamt of majestic mountain ranges, of cypresses and pines. Then he seized the wanderer’s staff. For some time he remained in Germany, and even longer in Carinthia, where he painted the altar-piece at Ober- villach and fell in love with the young daughter of the lord of the castle. With a company of Netherlandish pilgrims he went from Venice to Palestine — a journey which became a voyage of discovery for landscape painting. For while even Patinir, in order to give his landscapes a biblical character, composed them of fantastic sceneries, Scorel was the first to paint the real Holy Land. His Baptism of Christ in Haarlem must have seemed a revelation to men for whom the Orient was still a locked and distant world of fables. Returning to Italy he was called to play a curious role in artistic life. After his countryman, Adrian of Utrecht, the tutor of Charles V., had ascended the papal throne, he named Scorel director of the Belvedere. For three years he lived in the Vatican, in those places
IRoma Caput /iDunM
429
over which the spirit of Raphael still invisibly hovered.
What he created in later life, as canon of Utrecht,
seems like a mournful echo of these Roman impressions.
Exquisitely tasteful are the landscape backgrounds of his Madonnas. He was charmed by the Roman villas with their melancholy mixture of old age and youth, of splendour and decline. There are aqueducts, overgrown with parasites, the branches of which hang tiredly down from the weather-beaten wall; ruins, and quiet waters, in which brown ferns and withered ivy-clad foliage are reflected. But also as a painter of women he is one of the most subtle of the North. Few beautiful women had previously been created in northern painting. As if only old age, decline wrinkles, and furrows had attracted them, the ancient Netherlanders had only painted careworn women. The few Nuremberg women in Dürer’s drawings are raw-boned and angular, and the bedecked maidens by Cranach are so unattractive that one would think that at that time no beautiful women existed in the North. What pleased the artists was to draw hard faces with sharp and keen technique; they took no pleasure in the soft, misty, and maidenly qualities of womanhood. Scorel, the gentlemanly cleric, who could not live without Agatha von Schonhoven, had a fine sense of feminine charm. Whether he paints Mary or the Magdalen, his women are slender and elegant apparitions of classic outline. With tender sentimentality he draws the harmonious lines of a youthful neck, the fragrant hair curling over the brow; and with true connoisseurship arranges the soft veil, the puffed sleeves, and the collar. He brought to the Nether- landers who had previously known only nun-like women a new ideal of enchanting worldly grace.
What connection existed between him and the lovable unknown artist called the “ Master of the Female Half Figures”? He much resembles Scorel, except that he is often more quiet and hesitating: the Luini of the North, a mild dreamer who speaks only tender loving words. Life with him passes like a beautiful day, to the accompaniment of soft music. He paints young girls playing on the spinnet, raising a glass, or dreaming over their music. Something innocent and harmless, yet melancholy, pervades his graceful, delicate works. One would almost like to say that he saw women with the eye of a schoolboy in love for the first time. For pure as angels and of flower-like grace are these gentle quiet children with their soft movements, their lily- white hands and pure brows, over which the quaintly parted brown hair falls so simply. Pictures like these cannot be described but only felt, and admired in silence. This is probably the chief effect the artist himself intended, since he was perhaps no professional painter, but passed his life so quietly and so unnoticed that our entire knowledge of him lies locked in his pictures.
Jan Gossart, called Mabuse, who made a pilgrimage to Italy even earlier than Scorel, rendered important
IRoma Caput /iDuuDi
431
services as a painter of the nude. In his youthful
works, like the portable altar of Palermo, he was still
a miniature painter in the sense of Gerard David.
Then one can see in his Christ on the Mount of Olives
how decadent Gothic was transformed into Baroque
confusion. The Italian ideal of women began to affect
him and he painted the beautiful Woman Weighing
Gold in the Berlin Gallery, which is a faint echo of
the Master of the Female Half-Figures. In his more
ambitious altar-pieces also, as in Christ at the House of
Simon in the museum of Brussels, Renaissance elements
are commingled with the Gothic. In their severe
idealism and rigid angularity many of the figures re-
mind one of earlier days; but beside them are others,
which, if judged from their soft smoothness of form,
would seem to have been taken from Raphael’s painting.
Even the architectural backgrounds, in their union of
Gothic and Renaissance elements, are characteristic
of this transition. In his following works (several
Madonnas, the Danae at Munich, and the picture in
Prague Cathedral) he stands entirely upon the soil
of the cinquecento, although a certain trivial tendency
still distinguishes him from the Italians. In the life-
size nude figures which he painted at the end of his
life, even the remainder of the Gothic intricacies
is eliminated. Majestic as ancient marble groups,
the figures of Neptune and Amphitrite arise from
the cell of an antique temple. True, they are cold,
academic, and superficial, but this lies in the character
432
Zbc XDlnion of tbe Stales
of the later cinquecenio. If Mabuse had continued to
labour in the style of his youth he would have been a
belated survivor of the Gothic; but by attacking
the problems which the cinquecenio laid down he ful-
filled an historical mission. For without Mabuse’s
Aphrodite, Rubens’s Andromeda could hardly have
been painted.
In the works of Barend van Orley also there are a rhythm and a flowing, elegant movement which assure him an important position among the masters of the Renaissance in the Netherlands. It is not proper to speak of a repudiation of the national style in the case of these painters; for a style belongs not to a people but to an age. In their transformation from Gothic to Renaissance artists they merely followed the taste of the epoch, and are no worse than contemporary Italians. Of course they are deficient in personal characterisation ; for as the essence of idealism consists in the elimination of the individual and in the subordination of the personal to the absolute, so with them the individuality necessarily receded, and there remains only a general uniform type. The development in the Netherlands is a repetition of what Italy had experienced.
As late as the second half of the sixteenth century some energetic portraits were painted. The portrait- painter cannot confine himself to painting man as such, since resemblance can only be achieved by the rep- resentation of personal traits. Joost van Cleve, Antonis Mor, Frans Pourbus, and Nicolas Neufchatel resemble
IRoma Caput /IDunt)i
433
Bronzino in style. They are healthy, powerful realists
who, like their predecessor Massys, know neither
generalisation nor retouching; and only in the freer
character and quiet dignity of their portraits is their
Italian schooling revealed.
The products of the so-called “grand painting’' are lacking in every personal imprint. Michael Coxie was called the Flemish Raphael, Frans Floris, the Flemish Michelangelo; and these titles sufficiently indicate that they said nothing which had not been better said by Raphael and Michelangelo before them. Marten de Vos, Barthel Spranger, Marten Heemskerk, G^rnelis Cornelissen — the same statement applies to all of them. They covered enormous surfaces with beautiful but cold figures, and did not serve art, but made use of certain completed designs which en- abled them to satisfy all commissions with schematic perfection.
Proceeding from the Netherlands into other countries we find the names of the actors changed, but the drama which they play is always the same. The silence of the grave lies over Germany, in which the troubles following the Reformation had deprived art of a foothold. The few South German princes who were in a position to play the role of Maecenas either sum- moned foreigners to their courts or bought old masters. At this time originated the private collections which formed the basis of the Munich and Vienna galleries. The few painters who still existed in Germany fol-
28
434
ZTbe XHnion of tbe Stales
lowed the same path as the Netherlanders. Bartel
Bruyn, the last survivor of the Cologne school, under-
took the role of Mabuse. His portraits rank with
Holbein’s and Amberger’s as the best products of Ger-
man portraiture. In his religious paintings he at first
continued the work of the Master of the Death of
Mary, but later was transformed into a follower of
Raphael. The family group in the Munich gallery by
Christoph Schwartz, a Munich painter who studied at
Venice, possesses the strong and simple sincerity of old
German art, while at the same time it shows a har-
mony of colour and broad technique derived from
Titian. His altar-pieces also re-echo the full sonorous
chords of the Venetian masters. Johann Rottenhammer
is more trivial and dainty and possesses a pleasing,
superficial charm. The demand for decorative work
was supplied by Joseph Heinz and Hans von Aachen,
virtuosi of the brush, whose work might equally well
be Netherlandish or Italian.
French painting had a very original beginning in Jean Foucquet. Although he had visited Italy, his chief work in the Berlin Gallery, representing Etienne Chevalier, the favourite of Charles VIE, and Agnes Sorel, commended by Stephen, his patron saint, to the protection of the Madonna, reminds one of Goes, rather than the Italian masters. The corresponding painting at Antwerp has a specifically French note. In it the Blessed Virgin is represented with the features of Agnes Sorel, clad in a short fashionable dress and princely
IRoma Caput /IDunbi
435
ermine and suckling the Child. A piquant Parisian
perfume is wafted from the work.
In the sixteenth century the two Clouets, Jean and Francois, still laboured in this ancient style. Jean Clouet, who was until 1540 court painter to Francis I., resembles Holbein in the photographic truth with which he renders physiognomy. Francois Clouet, who suc- ceeded his father as court painter in 1540, had the same severe, sure art, except that he is more cos- mopolitan and distinguished, reminding us rather of Bronzino than of Holbein.
In fresco painting the same change that occurred elsewhere had in the meanwhile taken place. The invasions of I taly by the French kings at the close of the fifteenth century had already established an artistic connection. In their wars over the duchy of Milan Charles VIII. and Louis XII. not only took along their own painters like Jan Perreal, but also invited Italian artists to settle in France. It is sufficient to recall the mighty name of Leonardo. With Francis 1. the real Italian Renaissance in France began. A whole army of Italian artists was speedily summoned and commissioned to decorate the newly constructed castles. Fontainebleau especially (where in the nine- teenth century Millet, Rousseau, Corot, and Diaz painted) became the French Vatican. II Rosso, Primaticcio, and Niccolo delf Abbate were in charge of the decorations — painters whose works one indiffer- ently passes by in Italy and who do not improve by
436
TLbc TUnion of tbe Stales
being seen in France. Among their French followers
is Jean Cousin, a facile artist of profound knowledge,
whose Last Judgment contains many a brilliant theatri-
cal effect. It is very instructive to compare the later
decorations of the palace of Fontainebleau with the
earlier. The masters summoned to complete this
new work were not Italians but Netherlanders. But
Hieronymus Francken, the head of the Netherlandish
colony, was a pupil of Michelangelo’s follower Frans
Floris; and passing through the halls one observes,
therefore, no difference between the Italian and
Netherlandish works.
The tendency towards centralisation in the cin- quecento led to a complete uniformity of art. Every- thing is elastic, polished, and elegant. But just as in their portraits artists of the most different minds resemble each other (they all wear the same fantastic costume and assume the same declamatory attitude), so their painting lacks individual character. The signatures only tell us that this is the work of a German, that of a Netherlander, that again of a Frenchman. What one sees is always the same, general and idealised forms, typical faces, ideal draperies, carefully weighed composition, and an equally cold ceremoniousness in the expression of sentiment. In spite of all its fruit- fulness the second half of the sixteenth century was an age of weariness and exhaustion. The ideals of the Renaissance had lost their spiritual significance and new ones had not yet arisen. Although the great
IRoma Caput /IDunbi
437
masters were dead, men still laboured with their
thoughts, and deduced from scientific rules what with
them had been an expression of personality. As late
as the beginning of the sixteenth century every land
and every province had had its own art ; now a universal
language, a Volapuk of art, has replaced the dialects.
A new development of painting could only come when
some great movement in civilisation gave it new
subjects, new problems, and new aims. These new
ideals were furnished by the Counter-reformation.
Chapter VII.— The Struggle of Venice and Spain against Rome =
I.— Lorenzo Lotto
The course of the development of art in the sixteenth century was exactly the same as in the fifteenth. The great heathen Renaissance was followed by an ecclesiastical reaction; and as at that time the hurricane which descended with Savon- arola had been heralded long before by thunder and lightning, so the beginning of the Counter-reformation goes back to the decade following 1520.
A strange tone is suddenly sounded in the activity of the masters of the Renaissance: weird, visionary, convulsed elements mingle with antique joyfulness and Hellenic pleasure in form. Michelangelo’s figures seem pursued by a nightmare, as if the thought of the Nazarene would not let them rest. The eyes of St. John in Fra Bartolommeo’s Entombment, the eyes of John the Baptist in the Madonna di Foligno, those of St. Cecilia and of the Sistine Madonna — all betray that even these masters were touched by the religious current whose wave dashed from Germany over Italy.
438
Xorenso Xotto
439
But with them the influence was an external one; the
few drops of Christianity did not mingle with their
Hellenic blood.
Conditions were different in Venice, which since its origin had been a religious city, a Byzantine outpost on Italian soil. During the entire quattrocento it remained a bulwark against the Renaissance; and even after a worldly and religious art had been introduced from elsewhere by Gentile da Fabriano and Pisanello, the native school of Murano held fast to mediaeval traditions. We remember how at the close of the century, when the religious reaction passed through Italy, Crivelli seized the opportunity once more to resurrect Byzantinism. A time indeed followed when Venice, like an isle of Cythera, was pervaded by worldly sensuality and joyful festal feeling. No one thought any longer of heaven, into which the earth itself had been trans- formed. The gondoliers sang, beautiful women laughed, and every one seemed rich, proud, and happy. It was a soft and sensuous atmosphere, such as Giorgione painted; a proud and majestic splendour — that of Titian. But although those works form the acme of Venetian art, no Venetian was among the leaders of the movement. Aldus Manutius, who made Venice the literary centre of Humanism, was a Florentine, and all the painters came from the mainland: Giorgione from Castelfranco, Palma from Serinalta, and Titian from Pieve. Yet even in their antique works these masters preserve a holy solemnity. There is no longing
440
Ube Strua^le against IRome
as with Correggio, no sensuality as with Sodoma.
Titian, though a heathen, painted the Magdalen with
the skull, which almost heralds the art of the Jesuits;
and with a picture which was no antique subject but
the Crown of Thorns his activity passed away. At
Rome Sebastiano avoided antique subjects, painting
miracles and martyrdoms. However much the trav-
eller would fain think of the sound of mandolins and
of sunshine when Venice is mentioned, his first impres-
sion is the black gondola gliding gloomily as a hearse
over the dark green lagoons. The character of the
palaces is solemn and gloomy; the bells of Murano
sound subdued and solemn. For Venice paganism
remained an episode. The Renaissance masters from
foreign cities were confronted even at the beginning of
the sixteenth century by a native Venetian, a follower
of Savonarola and the herald of Caraffa. Like a ghost
or a preacher of penance Lorenzo Lotto wanders in the
midst of that joyful, worldly race; and amid the
jubilant bacchanalian hymns of his contemporaries
his pictures sound solemn as the bells of Murano.
Lotto also, when a young man, was influenced by the ideas of the Renaissance. The cycle of his works begins with that Danae of the collection of Professor Conway in London whom one would not be surprised to meet among the works of Bocklin. In a green meadow yellow, blue, and white flowers grow; round about trees, fine and erect as in Bocklin’s Summer Day, stretch into the blue ether. In the
3Loren3o Xotto
441
midst of the meadow sits a maiden in white garments
receiving in her lap the shimmering golden rain,
and a small goat-footed satyr listens behind a
tree. But his next picture belongs to a different
world of ideas. Upon the slope of a steep precipitous
cliff a half-naked hermit kneels before the cross of the
Redeemer. Swarms of ravens flutter over his head
while he penitently strikes himself with the scourge
in his hand. St. Jerome is Lotto’s second hero;
the old man who turns away from mankind to find
rest in solitude, the tired greybeard burdened by the
oppressive weight of the past.
Lotto, the son of conservative Venice, arose as the standard-bearer of the great religious past; for thus the strange archaism of his early works may best be explained. When his activity began, Giorgione, Titian and Palma were regarded as foreign intruders. Even Giovanni Bellini was considered a renegade to the religious art which his predecessors, the Muranese, had still comprehended in its majestic Byzantine solemnity. Lotto bears the same relation to Titian and Giorgione in the sixteenth century as Crivelli to Bellini in the fifteenth. His ideal is Alwise Vivarini, the last survivor of the old school of Murano, who in the days of Giovanni Bellini had proclaimed the gospel of self-renunciation so dear to Byzantine art.
The pictures at Naples, in the Borghese Gallery, Rome, and at Asolo are the principal examples of Lotto’s Muranese style. Cima had removed the throne
442
XTbe StruQQle against IRome
of Mary from the solemn apse of the church to the open
landscape. Even Bellini, his teacher, breaking with
the old form of altars with wings, predelle, and lunettes,
had treated altarpieces as simple, decorative panels
in the manner of the cinquecento. Giorgione took a
further step by substituting for the humility of the
handmaid of the Lord, the love charm of the worldly
woman. There is nothing of all this with Lotto.
In the apse of a church with solemn and gloomy
architecture stands the throne of Mary, or in his
smaller pictures the figures arise as if out of nothingness,
from a dark background. He always maintained the
mediaeval form of the altar with wings and predelle.
Solemn and unapproachably majestic is the expression
of Mary, gloomy and troubled is the following of saints
gathered about her throne. The wild men of the desert
of Castagno and the old Donatello, the ascetic hermits
and fantastic preachers of Botticelli are revived in
Lotto’s works. Especially does the figure of the aged
Onophrius in the picture of the Borghese Gallery,
so like King Lear, sound like the echo of a convulsed
time, when the aged Donatello designed his confused
reliefs at Padua, and when Zoppo and Schiavone,
Tura and Bartolommeo Vivarini painted their harsh,
ascetic pictures.
Meanwhile Alwise Vivarini had died, no one worked at Venice in the spirit of the past, and Lotto was not strong enough to stand alone. Thus, at least, the abrupt change which he made may be best explained.
!lLoren30 Xotto
443
After Muranese art had sunk into the grave he sought
for other models, sublime beyond all doubt. No art
could be more religious or rest upon a sounder founda-
tion than the one to which the Vicar of Christ gave his
blessing. So he set out upon a pilgrimage to Rome,
not to the Eternal City, the city of antiquity, but to
the centre of Christendom. The Roman ideals which
the pope approved he would make his own. But
after he had laboured for four years, from 1 508 to 1512,
under the influence of Raphael, the result was the
same as twenty years before with Savonarola. As
what he had seen in Rome aroused the reforming
spirit of the Dominican friar, and as the libertinism
which ruled in the most holy places confirmed him in
the belief that a new prophet must come to save the
church from destruction : so Lotto also, in his associa-
tion with the Roman artists, felt there that was nothing
Christian in Christian art as it was then practised; that
it was further away from what the church had once hon-
oured than were the works of Bellini, Titian, and Giorg-
ione which he had viewed with fearful eyes at home.
The picture of St. Vincent Ferrer which he painted for the altar of Recanati seems like a thunderbolt of the Counter-reformation striking into the Venetian Renaissance. Not only the theme announces the spirit of Ignatius Loyola (for Vincent Ferrer is a saint whom the Spaniards honoured as an apocalyptic prophet); but the gloomy monastic trend, the wild convulsion of the painting has more in common with Zurbaran than
444
Ubc Struaole against IRome
with the cinquecento. In the altar of San Bartolommeo
at Bergamo his feeling was again quieted; for no senti-
ment of battle but a mild resignation pervades the work.
Lotto had, it would seem, found a support in a religious
movement which was accomplished at that time.
During the pontificate of Leo X. a sort of society,
the Illuminati, had been formed, to which distinguished
gentlemen and cultured ladies from all parts of Italy
belonged: “beautiful souls,” who were as little sat-
isfied with the heathen philosophy as with the forms
of official religion, and professed a sort of pantheistic
Christianity. Was Lotto a member of this “ Society
of the Divine Love?” One might almost believe so
in view of his paintings during the following years
(1515-24), when quiet Bergamo was his place of resi-
dence. The characteristic feature of these paintings
is a pantheistic Christianity. He feels himself in com-
munity of love with everything that exists. Nature,
which in the sense of the Muranese he had formerly
regarded as something godless, the accursed Golgotha
upon which the cross of the Redeemer stood, has now
become for him a book written by the finger of God;
the great mother of all things to whom man and animal,
tree and flower owe their existence. A new religion
had revealed itself to him which reminds one of Spinoza
or of the first "enthusiastic days of the Franciscan
order when the saint of Assisi, in reaction against
a rigid scholasticism, proclaimed the gospel of love,
transferred the love of God to the whole world, and
Xorenso Xotto
445
addressed Christ and Mary, men and animals, the
plants and the stars of heaven as his brothers and sisters.
This change of opinion is clearly shown in the type of his Madonnas. Gloomy and unapproachable with the Muranese; a sibyl, staring sadly with wide eyes into the distance with Bellini; the solemn queen of heaven with Titian : she has become with Lotto the blessed mother, caressing her boy, and pressing her cheek against his in beaming maternal joy. Pictures like his Madonna at Dresden contain nothing new for the history of art, since Leonardo and Correggio had painted similar themes; but they are new for Venetian painting, which had always imparted to the Madonna involuntary and apathetic qualities, and had never attempted to portray tender maternal love. The contrast between wealth and poverty is overcome. In the older Italian paint- ings Mary is either soulful, in which case she is the poor maiden, or she wears costly garments and is proud and haughty. Although Lotto’s Madonnas are richly clothed, although pearls adorn their hair, and their hands are white and tender, they also quiver with feeling. Not only under a beggar’s garb but under a silken bodice, a tender heart may beat and the love of God may move.
This love he imparts also to the landscape. Mary is no longer enthroned in church but in God’s free nature. Wide and boundless the country stretches before us, traversed by rivers which empty into the distant sea. As in a single picture he attempts to
446
XTbe StruGGle against IRome
render the whole infinity of the universe, he also reveals
a power of observation for minute objects, for tender
forms of the vegetable world, which no contemporary
Venetian could rival. Here a rose-bush in full bloom
hangs over the wall; there a thick wall of jasmines
forms the background or branches of blossoms are
spread over the ground. If interiors are represented,
he paints, like a Dutch still-life painter, cups, books,
pots and candlesticks. A soft light, as if in heavenly
harmonies, quivers through the room. Even his
frescoes gave a new expression of this pantheistic
tendency. In contrast to Italian fresco-painting
in general, which has a certain monumental sweep
and preserves the solemn character of tapestry. Lotto
disregards its decorative character, giving broad views
upon sunlit streets and squares, where high houses
arise and men move about in daily traffic. And while
other masters gave their work an architectural framing
of friezes and pilasters. Lotto eliminates all such
features, and, like the Japanese in their wood-cuts, de-
picts grape and cherry branches of the foreground
extending into the midst of the fields.
As a portrait painter, he struck chords which are echoed in no other Italian work. All other portraits of the cinquecento are solemn representative pictures. The subjects are not at ease, but seem as dignified as if they felt that the eyes of the world were upon them. People who played an important part in the world did not exist in little Bergamo, or such as did were not
LORENZO LOTTO
PORTRAIT OF THE PROTHONOTARY GIULIANO
National Gallery, London
Xoren30 3Lotto
447
congenial company for tranquil Lotto. Only those
whom he loved and honoured were invited into his
studio, and this circumstance alone differentiates his
portraits from those of Raphael or Titian.
Instead of the general representative types of the cinquecento Lotto paints workmen of the spirit, a humanity which stands nearer to us of the present day in thought and feeling. Unconcerned with their decorative appearance, he does not show them as they move in the world, but in their hours of introspection. Nor does he confine himself to reading their countenances and abstracting their secrets like a father confessor, but even seems to offer them advice, to adjure and warn them; as when in his picture of the youth in the Borghese Gallery he adds a skull amid rose or jasmine leaves, or in the picture of the nervous man in the Doria Gallery gives the age of the subject as in sepulchral inscription. Woman is for him a vampire, who sucks the life-blood from men. This thought seems to pervade his groups; as for example the Messalina-like woman of the National Gallery with the hard, cold glance, and at her side the pale man with trembling hands, and a resigned and tired glance.
The wonderful picture of Palazzo Rospigliosi (Rome) , which is wrongly called the Triumph of Chastity, marks the conclusion of this period of tranquil artistic activity passed at Bergamo. Although he had attained his fiftieth year, he had as yet expressed few of the sentiments that had convulsed his youthful
448
Zbc Struggle against IRome
soul. He therefore decided to see the world again and
find out what was moving the artists there. So he
set out, travelled for a while in the Marches, was at the
sack of Rome in 1 527, and in 1 529 returned to Venice.
The immediate result of these travels was that he united what he saw into a strange potpourri of painting. He, the brooder and the thinker, for a time imitated Palma, and threw himself at Titian’s feet. But with the spread of the Catholic reformation fate was more favourable to him. The mild and conciliatory Con- tarini, who had before this laboured for reform in Venice, was joined in 1527 by the gloomy Neapolitan CaralTa. In a garden by the monastery of San Giorgio Maggiore the friends of the movement assembled weekly as guests of Abbot Cortese. The nobility, the learned world, and the clergy were all represented, and the eyes of all who longed for a reformation of the church looked in silent hope towards Venice. A reform of art was also intended; for Caraffa recom- mended the rigid and ritual forms of Byzantinism to the painters as the truest expression of reverential, churchly piety. There was thus suddenly awakened in Lotto a sense of power similar to that which Botticelli felt when Savonarola confirmed his youthful ideals; he also would preach and struggle. He' has at last found a fixed aim and a true reason for artistic activity. Enthusiasm and pathos radiate from his works: the mighty figures of bishops. Crucifixions, and Madonnas.
But for the present paganism was still stronger than
Xoren^o Xotto
449
Christianity. Contarini was deserted by his followers
and Titian, who had in some works professed Christian-
ity, returned to his old Hellenic ways. For Lotto this
meant the collapse of all of his hopes. He clung
helplessly to the most primeval masters, painting
works like the Crucifixion at Milan, which seems a
gloomy echo of the trecento; the Pietd of the same
gallery, which in its grimacing pain approaches Crivelli;
and the altar-piece of Ancona, a strange union of
Baroque wildness with Muranese archaism. The
altar-piece of the church of Santi Giovanni e Paolo
at Venice — human hands stretched upwards, as in
Lempoeks Fate, with quivering longing for salvation —
he presented to the monks in return for a free burial.
The aged St. Jerome, who sought in solitude refuge
from earthly strife, again filled his mind. He also
would have nothing more in common with the profane,
and would settle in some quiet corner of the world to
end his days as a hermit. He sold the contents of his
studio, which included a picture of the Rational Soul,
another of the Christ-child Bearing a Cross, and a third
of the Conflict between Force and Happiness, and
withdrew to Loreto, where he bought a place among
the monks. In this sacred precinct Lotto died, a
martyr to his faith, because his message came too
soon. But the tendency heralded in his works was the
one to which the future belonged.
45°
Xlbc Struggle against IRomc
II.— Tintoretto
In the year 1545 Pietro Aretino, the Venetian author, wrote a strange letter to Michelangelo. As a Christian he disapproved of the freedom which the master had taken in his treatment of the Last Judgment. It was a scandal that such a work should be daily seen in the greatest temple of Christianity, upon the chief altar of Jesus, and in the holiest chapel of the world, by the vicegerent of Christ himself. Although even the heathens had portrayed Diana or Venus with modesty, Michelangelo did not consider this necessary; and his picture therefore was suitable for a bathroom but not for a church. It was a blasphemy to represent the Heavenly Father as Jupiter and the saints as antique heroes, to transform the Madonna into a love goddess and Christian martyrs into hetcerce.
It is significant that this letter came from Venice. Ancient, rigid Byzantine Venice again girds herself to take a part in the development of Italian art, and to supersede the Renaissance of antiquity by a Renais- sance of the middle age.
But the time was not yet ripe. As in the fifteenth century Ghirlandajo had to appear before Savonarola, so in the sixteenth the extreme bound of ecclesiastical worldliness had to be reached before the reaction could begin. The Ghirlandajo of the sixteenth century came in the person of a stranger, Paolo Cagliari, who became the painter of Venetian festivities. In his
Uintoretto
451
brilliant art the worldly spirit of the cinquecento
celebrated its last great triumph.
An ancient author has described a festival which the Venetian Senate gave in honour of Henry III. of France. Two hundred of the most beautiful gentlewomen of Venice, dressed in white and covered with pearls and diamonds, received him, so that the king thought that he had suddenly entered a realm of goddesses and fairies. Paolo’s paintings in the Ducal Palace are of a similar fairy-like pomp. The whole splendour of Venice is there revealed. Representatives of the people salute the doge; beautiful women smile down from marble balustrades; cavaliers ride about upon splendid, prancing horses. Allegories also — Loyality, Happiness, Gentleness, Moderation, and Re- tribution— are to be seen: at least, so says Baedeker, but from the paintings one would never know it. For Veronese painted only beautiful women; if he gives one a lamb, it is Gentleness, if a dog Loyalty.
Notwithstanding their titles, his earlier decorations of the Villa Maser are no frosty allegories. Landscapes, beautiful Ionic columns, guide the eye into the distance; mighty nude figures in bold poses fill the niches and recline upon the architraves: Venus surrounded by Loves and Graces, and Bacchus with his joyous vine- crowned fauns. Christianity and paganism, the nude and the draped are strangely commingled. Cupids, beautiful women, genii, goldsmith’s work, and gleaming fabrics are heaped together in superb examples of still
452
Ube StrugGle against IRome
life. The Olympian joyfulness of the cinquecento, in
no wise “sicklied o’er by the pale cast of thought,”
here speaks its last word.
The above descriptions also show what may not be expected from Veronese. He is certainly a clever decorator and an improviser of enviable facility; a painter of great delicacy of feeling. How festally effective is his red, recurring like a joyful trumpet- blast among the silver grey harmonies of his paintings! Yet one never thinks or dreams before his works, but only sees. Veronese seems to have come into the world to prove that the painter need have neither head nor heart, but only a hand, a brush, and a pot of paint in order to clothe all the walls of the world with oil paint- ings. His panel paintings are a supplement of his achievements as a mural painter. In contrast to Carpaccio, who discriminates sharply between decorative and panel paintings, Veronese knows no such difference. Out of a still life of satin portieres and rustling brocaded robes, the head of a woman appears: such are his female portraits; powerful female figures clad in heavy, gold gleaming damask, their blond hair decked with diamonds, the neck with sparkling chains, are labelled Venus or Europa. If he paints Mary^ she is not the handmaid of the Lord or even the queen of heaven, but a woman of the world, listening with approving smile to the homage of a cavalier. In light, red silk morning dress, she receives the Angel of the Annuncia- tion and hears without surprise — for she has already
PAOLO VERONESE
THE MARRIAGE OF CANA
Dresden Gallery
Tintoretto
453
heard it — what he has to say; and at the Entombment
she only weeps in order to keep up appearances.
Those luxuriant festal suppers to which he gave the title of Christ in the House of Levi, the Marriage at Cana, or the Last Supper are especially celebrated. In a splendid hall of columns the festal board is laid amid staircases and colonnades of marble ; waiters move busily about with silver platters and crystal wine-bottles; upon a festively adorned balustrade musicians make table music; while the ladies and gentlemen of Venice, celebrated painters and princes in gala costume, assemble for the state banquet. Veronese was a happy man. Everywhere he goes there is joy and splendour; everywhere beautiful women smile, every- where there is a maitre d’ hotel who has prepared the best of things. He knows no want, but only riches; no huts, only palaces; no sacrifice, only enjoyment. He does not even know of an after- world or of the final judgment which follows, but stands with both feet upon the earth; nor can he imagine that the Last Supper means anything else than a repast.
Just so Ghirlandajo had painted a hundred years before ; and the same reaction followed. On the i8th of July, 1 573, Veronese was summoned before the tribunal of the Inquisition to answer for his Last Supper, which to-day hangs in the Louvre. Lotto had died a martyr to his belief, but now a shrill signal was sounded; Venice remembered her ancient traditions. All that the foreigners from Giorgione to Veronese had created
454
Zbc Struggle against IRome
was not real Venetian painting. Tintoretto, like Crivelli
and Lotto, a born Venetian, rose up against the joyful
Veronese as the black knight of the middle age, the
sombre priest of a gloomy art.
By his whole character Jacopo Robusti was called to this role of giving the first expression to the gloomy pathos of the Counter-reformation. He is described as a stormy and exalted spirit, a fiery passionate nature. When he invited Aretino to come to his atelier, and by way of reminder of a criticism which he had formerly written tArust a pistol under his nose, he reveals himself by this one trait as the predecessor of that wild race to which Caravaggio and Ribera belonged. The well- known scene of the artist painting his dead daughter by lamplight also heralds the time of Bea- trice Cenci. Examining his bust in the court of the Ducal Palace, the head with furrowed brow, the hollow cheeks and the deep-set staring eyes, one can also understand how the consuming passion and the charnel- house sentiment of his paintings were based upon the character of the man.
Like all other Venetians of the day, Tintoretto had studied with Titian, and appears in his first works as a master of the Renaissance, tranquil in sentiment, gleam- ing and golden in colour. He painted the radiant nudity of the youthful female form, studied the play and reflection of light as it softly caresses a tender back, and by means of fairy-like landscape imparted to his pictures a solemn and majestic splendour. To
Uintoretto
455
his works of this period belong Susanna in the Vienna
Gallery, the slender Andromeda in St. Petersburg,
his Venus at Florence; and the most beautiful work
by him in Germany, Martha’s Supper, in the Augsburg
Gallery. His representation of Christ Washing the
Feet of his Apostles signifies, in its joyful Renaissance
spirit, the acme of his work as a worldly painter.
The sunlight floods the hall, and through the rows of
mighty columns the eye falls upon shimmering palaces
and the glittering mirror of the lagoons.
As in these paintings there are points of contact with Veronese, so in his portraits he resembles Titian. Tintoretto is more one-sided than he. While in Titian’s portraits the most beautiful women of Venice pass by, among Tintoretto’s few women occur, and such as do are harsh and mannish, massive and heavy. The portraits of the doges and procurators which he painted in an official capacity are the only ones which reveal him in his full greatness. Here also a harsh objectivity differentiates him from Titian. While the latter seeks beautiful poses and graceful movement, and by the use of columns and a curtain imparts to the background also a festal and decorative effect, Tintoretto’s back- grounds are sombre, enlivened with a coat of arms at most; and he is unable to render a beautiful pose because he never paints entire figures but mostly a three-quarter piece. Even the hands, upon which Titian bestowed so much attention, he subordinates, as does Lenbach, to the head, either concealing them in
456 Xlbe Struggle against IRome
Danish gloves or completing them with a few brush strokes. By means of this simplification — and also because he never paints transient traits, but the official mien — he achieves even more powerful and monumental effects than Titian. Velasquez learned much from Tintoretto’s portraits of senators.
In his portrait groups he appears as a predecessor of Frans Hals. He was the first to paint pictures intended for public buildings which, like the Dutch doelenstukke, united a number of officials in a single group. But while the Dutch, in order to unite the figures, represented them at a banquet, Tintoretto’s nobili were far too proud to show themselves to the people in an exhilarated condition. Without any bond of union, without loss of composure, gloomy and reserved, they stand there, like Spanish grandees upon Italian soil.
But the real Tintoretto, the diligent master workman of the wild and fanatical style which dominated the following decades, can only be studied in his religious pictures. It seems as if suddenly a dark cloud had overcast the bright heaven of Venetian art. Instead of the enchanting festal music of Veronese, funeral^ marches and trumpet blasts sound; instead of smiling women, bloody martyrs and pale ascetics appear.
In order to become a painter of the Counter-reforma- tion Tintoretto had formed a quite new technique.
In contrast to the other Venetians who portrayed the nude in repose, he learned to represent it in most
ITintorctto
457
dramatic action. By the study of Michelangelo and
the use of the dissecting knife, he learned the extreme
play of muscles that could be applied to his stormy
figures. The rounded, classic forms of Titian were
not suitable for these nude bodies which, inflamed
with the ardour of faith, twist and contort themselves
as if in illness. No superflous flesh could make men
phlegmatic or restrain the eccentric pathos of their
gestures. He therefore introduces a new, emaciated
and distended type into Venetian painting. His wo-
men, especially, with their pale, livid features and en-
circled eyes, strangely sparkling as if from black
depths, have nothing in common with the soft ideal,
of form which he followed in his youth. The colour
is used to strengthen the convulsive sentiment. The
inscription above the door of Tintoretto's studio:
“The line of Michelangelo, the colour of Titian,” is an
error. For Titian's colour resembles that of a beautiful
autumn day, when everything gleams in rich harmonious
colours, and the sun, before sinking in the west, once
more spreads her warm, even light over the earth; but in
the presence of Tintoretto's pictures one does not think
of an autumn day, but rather of a dismal night, when
the lightning flashes or the flames of smouldering
autos da je ascend to heaven. Important portions of
the painting lie in deep shadow, while others are
illuminated in a ghostly fashion by harsh greenish
lights. In place of the rich harmonies of the Re-
naissance he has substituted the gloomy colour of
458
Xlbe StruQOle against IRome
the Baroque; the serene brightness of the Hellenic
spirit is followed by mediaeval night.
The celebrated painting of the Venetian Academy, representing St. Mark freeing a slave from death by sacrifice, is the first shrill trumpet note. The repre- sentation of the supernatural interfering in the course of earthly events was a suitable theme for Tintoretto. Head foremost the saint plunges down, seizing with mighty movement the arm of the executioner; a majestic light proceeds from him, illuminating some details, leaving others in deep shade. The symbolic significance is not far to seek. The popes in their free-think- ing heathenism are the executioners of the church; but the Republic of St. Mark interferes to save her.
Then came the frescoes in the church of the Madonna del Orto, the Worship of the Golden Calf and the Last Judgment. Here also is revealed the spirit of the Counter-reformation, which in an age of idolatry pointed to the terrors of the last day. In wild action, as if the delay had already been too long, the angels rush upon Moses to give him the tables of the law. All architectonic laws are dispensed with: here are clouds and yawning space, there wildly commingled masses of figures. At the day of the final judgment all nature is in uproar, the sea overflows its shores, a death- bringing flood. Only a few of the risen, ascending to heaven, find mercy; the angels dash the rest down into the depths. For the whole world had offered sacri-
TINTORETTO
THE MIRACLE OF ST,
XTbe Spanish School
459
fice to the idols of heathendom and lost the right to
redemption.
The fifty-six paintings of the Scuola di San Rocco show the whole greatness and boldness of this daemonic artist. While the Renaissance had avoided the representations of physical suffering and given even to martyrs the smiling expression of a Ganymede, the picture of Tintoretto’s St. Roch Healing a Sick Man already reveals the awful naturalism which the Spaniards later employed in such representations. The Annunciation, which in Veronese’s painting is received by Mary as if it were indifferent town news, Tintoretto renders with a passion as if it were his office to proclaim a rebirth of Christ to the world. In his Crucifixion he has found methods of heightening the feelings which were not further developed until the panoramic painting of the nineteenth century. In Cagliari’s and Robusti’s paintings two worlds collide. In the former pleasure in life, the joy and beauty of the Renaissance pass away, while the gloomy and mighty works of Tintoretto pave the way for the art of the seventeenth century.
III.— The Spanish School
As mighty allies, the Spaniards came to the assistance of the Venetians. It is no accident that the portraits of senators by Tintoretto are reminiscent of Velasquez and that the last great Venetian master, Tiepolo, died
460
Ubc Struggle against IRome
in Madrid. For there was a spiritual connection
between the city of the black gondolas and the land
of the black-robed priests. If the history of art dealt
only with spiritual factors, the Spaniards would
outrank the Venetians. For the movement of the
Counter-reformation originated in Spain. CaraflFa had
been legate there before he came to Venice in 1527,
and it was thence that he brought those rigid Gregorian
principles which culminated in the destruction of the
heretics and the relentless purification of the church
by the return to the discipline of the middle age.
Dark, gloomy figures sat upon the throne of the land;
kings who were buried not with insignia of real power,
but in the cowl of the Dominicans.
The struggle for the faith was traditional with the Spaniards, who battled against the paganism of the Roman church during the sixteenth century as they had in the middle age against the Moors. Ignatius Loyola was the great herald of the battle. By him and his creation, the order of the Jesuits, the mightiest impulse was given to the great movement which has since that time swept over the nations. As the religion of the Roman church had become a veiled paganism, so Spain was the country of convulsed mysticism, which nowhere else revealed itself in such strange forms. Purely contemplative in Italy at the time of Catherine of Siena, mysticism became in Spain a system of self-stupefaction; the art of transporting oneself by external and internal artifices into a con-
Ubc Spanish School
461
dition in which a sensuous union with supernatural
divinity was achieved. In this sense Ossuna in 1521
wrote his Abecedario spiritual, a manual of the method
by which one could attain complete union with God.
But religious hysteria found its classic expression in
the writings of St. Theresa. According to her
doctrine the subject must be absorbed in spiritual
contemplation of the Deity until the approach of
the moment of ecstacy, the “immediate entrance
of the Deity into the soul.’’ She especially empha-
sises the fact that in such ecstacy there should be
complete absence of volition in the body. Only when
one is as if dead in this rapture, the Sabbath of the Soul,
a foretaste of paradise approaches. The sensations
enjoyed, the '‘joys of heaven in which the body takes
such a strange part,” are described with detailed
exactitude. The same paths were pursued by Michael
Molinos and St. Peter of Alcantara, the begging friar,
who was composed only of bones and dark brown
skin, and took the little sleep which nature persisted
in demanding sitting in his narrow cell. At the end of
the cycle came those with whom the supersensuous
was transformed into sensuality.
That this specifically Spanish element had not yet been purely revealed in the painting of the sixteenth century is due to the fact that art presupposes more difficult manual conditions than literature. Until the fifteenth century paintings had found no home in Spain. The brilliant reception which Jan van Eyck
462
Zbc StruQole against IRome
had received there caused some enterprising Nether-
landers to visit the Pyrenean peninsular, and incited
by these foreigners, native Spaniards took up painting.
Juan Nunez, Antonio del Rincon, Velasco daCoimbria,
and Frey Carlos, who laboured in Spain and Portugal
during the fifteenth century, are Gothic masters and
advocates of the style which in the Netherlands was
represented by Roger and in Germany by Wohlgemuth.
As late as the sixteenth century there laboured at
Seville Pieter de Kempeneer, a Netherlander, by
whom there are a number of Madonnas of gloomy
solemnity in German collections. Resembling his
art was that of the Spaniard Luis Morales, whose style
has points of resemblance with that of Massys. A
painful, passionate, gloomy, ascetic character pervades
his works. In most of them he displays the Man of
Sorrows sinking down under the burden of the cross,
flogged at the column, or bleeding under the crown of
thorns; in others our Lady of Sorrows, sometimes with
the body of her Son in her lap, at others looking upon
the cross with wild lamentation. Like Massys he pre-
fers half-length figures. Although the drawing of his
emaciated, distended figures is archaic and angular, one
feels that this use of the old style is intentional, because
it appeared to the master more pious than that of the
Renaissance.
Portrait painting is represented by Alonso Coello and Juan Pantoja de la Cruz, representatives of the style usually identified with the name of Bronzino. As
XTbe Spanish School
463
in the case of the latter, their draughtsmanship is
careful and delicate, the treatment of costume and
ornament very detailed, and the colour of a pale, subtle
grey. But while with Bronzino the men wear a sword
and the women hold a fan, at the court of Philip II.
no one had his portrait painted without a rosary.
Thus even the portraits show that one is not in heathen
Italy but in the land of religious struggles.
As Spain never offered sacrifice to the gods of Greece, she never had a real Renaissance. It is true that mythological paintings by Titian were placed in the gloomy Escorial, and that Spanish painters journeyed to Italy to complete their technical education. But no one painted a real antique subject. While the pupils of Raphael and Michaelangelo are heathens, contemporary Spaniards, although formerly pupils of the Italians, kept their faith pure and used Renaissance forms only to paint religious scenes: the tragic pathos of the passion scenes, the ascetic solitude of weather- beaten hermits, ecstatic visions, and profound dogmatic treatises. It is significant that they went almost exclusively to Venice, which had remained a bulwark of the church, and had been the first to proclaim the ideas of the Counter-reformation.
Juan Fernandez Navarete and Vincente Carducho, the leaders of the school of Madrid, indeed, use Italian forms; but Navarete, when he painted his Christ in Limbo, was inspired not by a Renaissance master, but by the great painter of the Counter-reformation,
464
XTbc Struggle against IRome
Tintoretto. In his History of the Carthusian Order
Carducho created one of the monastic epics that Zur-
baran at a later period composed.
Notwithstanding Justi’s investigations, the chief master of Toledo, Domenico Theodocopuli of Crete, deserves a new biographer. For the “pathological degeneration ” of El Greco seems an important symp- tom of the great religious fermentation which at that time had seized all minds. Pictures like his Purification 0} the Temple, in which he appears as a Venetian, express but little; although the theme seems in some wise related with the purification of the church at that time by Caraffa and Loyola. But in the work which introduced him to Spain, Christ Stripped of His Garments on Calvary, he has freed himself from Titian, and now seems a savage entering the world of art with impetuous primeval power. He displays a collection of herculean figures composed of real flesh and blood, of barbaric bone and marrow. The same quality gives his painting of the Holy Trinity a primeval, brutal grandeur. His picture in the church of San Tome in Toledo, in which the members of a knightly order solemnly attend the funeral of Count Orgaz, whose corpse is lowered into the grave by two saints, while Christ, Mary, martyrs, and angels hover in the air — this painting, in its abrupt union of actual with transcendental, already heralds the visionary painting of the seventeenth century. His later works are uncanny, ghostly pictures of exaggerated line and harsh colour; which
Ube Spanish School
465
seem to be executed in wax colours mingled with
the mould of corpses. In all respects he seems a
strange, titanic master; and not until more is
known of his life will he stand revealed as an artist.
His chief pupil is reputed to have been Luis Tristan,
who painted night scenes with mysterious-looking
hermits and ascetics doing penance. A harsh green
light from above pulsates, as in the case of
Tintoretto, through certain parts of the painting,
while the remainder is lost in the gloom of the
background.
Of the masters who laboured at Valencia, Vicente Juanes is traditionally reputed to have received his education in the school of Raphael. Although he has been called the Spanish Raphael, there is little of the Raphaelesque in his pictures of the Martyrdom of St. Stephen. The movements are hard and angular, the colours harsh and brusque; the heads, of a pro- nounced Jewish type, are painted without reference to any ideal of beauty. Francisco de Ribalta, who travelled no farther than northern Italy, was attracted by the aifmities of colour which he found there. But although influenced by Correggio’s light and shade, with the technique of the smiling Italian he painted gloomy Spanish subjects: cloistered figures in white hoods; Mary and John returning from the grave of the Lord; Luke and Mary seated in a lonely nocturnal landscape, wrapped in deep thought; and the En- tombment of Christ, likewise a night scene, with flickering
30
466
XTbe Stru00le a^aiuBt IRome
stars and mighty figures of angels holding the pale
body of the Redeemer.
In Seville, where Pedro Campaha,i the Nether- lander, had laboured, Luis de Vargas was the first to enter the paths of the cinquecento. But he also is no Renaissance master. It is unlike the cinquecento to introduce a heavenly vision into his Adoration of the Shepherds and to paint a goat and the straw with the naturalistic joy of a Ribera. In his principal work, the Genealogy of Christ in the cathedral of Seville, the figures are said to have been taken from Raphael, Correggio, and Vasari. It is all the more strange how he translates these masters into Spanish, and with the borrowed forms treats a dogmatic theme never painted by an Italian. Juan de las Ro6las, a pupil of Tintoretto at Venice and a clergyman by pro- fession, was the first to give the favourite subjects for Spanish devotion a classic form. The Mother of God hovering upon a crescent in the clouds, adored by a Jesuit in ecstatic devotion, is his principal theme. In his work the Death of St, Isidore earthly and heavenly are directly juxtaposed. Below is a representation of monks given with the exactitude of Zurbaran, above angels with palms, song-books, and flowers, fluttering through the luminous aether. Francisco Herrera is known outside of Spain by the great picture of the Louvre, St. Basil Dictating his Doctrine. His saints,
‘ This is the Spanish form of the name of Pieter de Kempeneer by which he is usually known. — Ed.
Ube Spanish School 467
with their flashing eyes and majestic gestures, are mighty as primeval kings.
The Spaniards of the sixteenth century assume a peculiar position. Technically they are pupils of the Italians. Like Pacheco and Cespedes, they reflect much over the aims of true art, and are concerned, like all others at that time, with beauty of line and noble composition. But the spirit which pervades their work is the spirit of Jesuitism, — the spiritual tendency to which the future belonged. Venice and Spain, the city of the Byzantines and the land of re- ligious struggles — these two powers, contrary to the will of the popes, encompassed the Counter-reformation. They reminded Rome that she was not only the city of antiquity but also the city of St. Peter. The movement which was now accomplished has been called the “ Hispanisation of the Catholic Church.’’
cy
Book III.— THE SEVENTEENTH AND EIGTEENTH CENTURIES
^Ibe Seventcentb anb Bighteentb Centurleo
469
Chapter I.— Italian Painting in the Seventeenth Century
I.— The Spirit of the Counter-Reformation
The Gods in Exile, the title of a fanciful sketch by Heine, would also be an appropriate designation for this chapter. In Leo X’s day the gods of Olympus had taken possession of the Christian heaven. Men lived and moved in antiquity, to such an extent that the most sacred monuments of Christian religion gave place to new structures conceived in the antique spirit. In place of the ancient basilica of St. Peter a temple arose in antique proportions, "a Pantheon suspended in the air." The Vatican, the residence of the pope, was filled with the masterpieces of antique art. The purpose of a crusade to which he summoned the nations was not to recover the Holy Sepulchre; he hoped to find Greek codices in Jerusalem. In life also the spirit of Hellenism, the joyous sensuousness of the ancients reigned. Not the princes of the apostles, Peter and Paul, but the heathen philosophers Plato and Aristotle, were immortalised by Raphael as the rulers of spiritual life.
Now the reverse of the medal appeared. The German Reformation became more and more threatening, not only in Germany but also in England, the Netherlands, and France. Whole provinces were conquered by Protestantism; and even the soil of Italy was undermined. This had to be checked. The Roman church had to reform her life in such a manner as to deprive her opponents of cause for blame and to satisfy her own adherents. Not of her own accord but under compulsion by Venice and Spain, the decision was made. Since the man who himself gave the signal for the revulsion had mounted the Roman throne under the title of Paul IV., the ancient oaths of the Popes: “We promise and swear to encompass the reform of the church universal and of the Roman court,” was no longer regarded as a mere formula. The spirit of the Renaissance had not the power to rule the nations. The popes again recognised that Christianity was their only hold, the very reason for their existence. Repentant and with a sudden change, they returned to the Catholic ideal which the Renaissance had denied. Epicureanism was followed by fasting and castigation, the friends of paganism by the inquisitors.
The plan in the beginning was to conquer the hostile elements with iron and blood. The order of the Jesuits received the commission to watch over the mind in the sense of ancient Dominican theology. Just at that time the triumphant course of science had begun with the appearance of Copernicus, Galileo, Cardanus, Telesius, Campanella, and Giordano Bruno. Banishment, funeral pyres, and racks took care that the investigating thought should not lift its head too high. Poetry also submitted to the autocratic church. Torquato Tasso, the son of the Renaissance ended in a convent, holding dialogue with spiritual apparitions. No longer antique writers but Augustine and Thomas Aquinas dominated his thoughts.
Art, especially, seemed at first banished from the new system. As men had formerly regarded the works of antiquity with religious piety, they now considered them pagan idols. In so far as they were not destroyed or removed from public places, care was taken to change them in accordance with the Christian spirit. A statue of Minerva which stood before the Capitol received a cross instead of a spear, in order that it might signify Christian Rome. From the columns of Trajan and Antoninus the urns with the ashes of the two emperors were removed, and replaced by the statues of Peter and Paul, as an expression of the “triumph of Christianity over heathendom.'’
The works of the masters of the Renaissance were also subjected to a strict control, particularly as regards their nudity. Because its nudity seemed offensive, Michelangelo’s Last Judgment was bedecked with those rags which still deface it. The artists themselves became so prudish that they were trans- formed into penitentiary preachers. Ammanati, a Florentine sculptor of the time of Leo X., “after the mercy of God had opened his eyes/' begged the Grand Duke Ferdinand for permission by means of draperies to transform into Christian virtues the nude statues of gods which he had created for the garden of Pitti Palace thirty years before; and in 1582, “in bitterest repentance over the errors of his own youth," in an open letter to the Florentine artists he warned them “to desist from all portrayal of the nude, lest they offend God and give men a bad example."
Meanwhile the council of Trent had fixed orthodox doctrine as regards ecclesiastical pictures, and had assigned to the bishops the duty of seeing that it was strictly carried out. In 1564 Andrea Gilli da Fabriano wrote his Dialogo degli errori dei pittori, wherein he subjected the moral value of the frescoes of the Vatican to severe criticism. In his treatise De picturis et imaginihus sacris Molanus in 1570 further developed these unfavourable criticisms ; this was followed in 1585 by the Trattato della nohiliid della pitiura by Romano Alberti, and in 1751 by Gregorio Comanini's Figino. The Discorso intorno alle imagini sacre e projane, published in 1582 by Gabriele Paleotti, arch-bishop of Bologna, shows with especial clearness the art-hating, fanatical, and puritanic spirit which at first dominated the Counter-reformation.
But only in the beginning: for herein consists its great difference from iconoclastic Protestantism. This is the great thought which the Catholic church never forgot : at all times to treasure art as a mighty ally of religion. After the church had for a moment thought of throwing art into shackles, she immediately recog- nised what an invaluable propaganda had been lost. Instead of banishing art she made use of it: instead of subjugating it she began to employ it as an effective means of agitation, and confronted cold and sober Protestantism with the splendid pomp of the ancient church. The splendour of the Eternal City should have a dazzling and overpowering effect upon every one who trod the sacred soil. If art had formerly only served aristocrats of the spirit and the personal in- clinations of the popes, it must now conquer the masses, and be the enticing siren who should lead back the doubters into the bosom of the church. A nervous artistic activity suddenly began in all parts of Italy. Not only did modern Rome at that time receive the form which it has preserved until the present time but everywhere men builded, carved, and painted. But the quiet, cool, and solemn art of former days war incapable of solving the new problems. A strong stimulating potion had to be offered, and the strongest effects achieved. For the gorgeous or the crude, that which was comprehensible to the masses, alone could win them. Into all branches of art this new spirit enters.
If the architecture of the closing sixteenth century was reserved and cold, so that of the seventeenth is pompous, oppressive, and confusing. The latter does not attain effects by quiet beauty of line, but blinds the eye with the glittering splendour of material used, and to an even greater extent shocks the nerves, using music and incense as accessories. As if seized by wild frenzy the columns tower and twist. The interior, formerly evenly lighted, now seem to fade into the infinite. Here everything beams in brilliant splendour; there a mystic twilight spreads through gloomy chapels. Above, where formerly a flat ceiling rested, the heaven seems to open and angels carried on golden clouds storm about. If the pictures of the seventeenth century be considered in these surroundings the change in subject, form, and colour is at once understood.
As regards the subject-matter of painting, the change is this, that what the Renaissance painted most is now painted least, and what was once painted least is now painted most. The rarest subjects treated in the sixteenth century were pictures of martyrdoms. The Olympian joyfulness which pervaded the age disliked to linger over painful things. Christ had become a beautiful Olympian, Mary the queen of heaven. A time the conceptions of which were so Hellenic, did not wish to see its gods bleed and suffer. The council of Trent found the art of the Renaissance objectionable just because it did not adequately portray the self-sacrificing spirit of the martyrs. The true province of art was to move even the hardest heart by the presentation of the awful sufferings of the saints. As the Renaissance had praised the power of the human body to enjoy, so the Counter-reformation therefore glorified its power to suffer. Pictures of Christ crowned with thorns and of the Mater Dolorosa form the central feature, and the legends of the saints were searched for the most shocking deeds of blood. Poison, dagger, and cord, drawing, strangling, burning — all such subjects were represented. St. Andrew is nailed to the cross, St. Simon struck with a club, St. Stephen stoned, and St. Erasmus is disembowelled. The whole technique of the torture-chamber is revealed, and instruction is given in all the accessories of the Inquisition.
As well as the representation of suffering, in the sixteenth century all deformities had been timidly avoided. Of the many representations of dwarfs, idiots, blind men, lepers, and maniacs enumerated in Charcot and Richer’s Representation of Deformities and Sicknesses in Art, not a single one belongs to this age of joyful sensuality. In the seventeenth century, as in the days of Grunewald and the elder Holbein, sores, caries, lameness, blindness, and insanity are represented with joyful zest.
The representation of old age was also unpopular in the sixteenth century, and even saints like John, the desert preacher, had been transformed into radiant young men. Now aged prophets and hermits with shrivelled, starved bodies, flabby, leathery skin, and harsh weather-beaten forms appear in great numbers. There was no lack of models, for Paul IV., in order to show living examples of penitent asceticism, imported into Italy real hermits, who, as in the days of St. Jerome, inhabited the cliffs of Dalmatia.
That all these paintings are only busts or three- quarter figures is likewise characteristic. The sixteenth century in its search for rhythmic movement had pre- ferred the full figure. Now, since the chief emphasis lies in the ecstatic expression of the head, a bust suffices. These “ longing half-figures with raised eyes ” had appeared in all ages of convulsed religious life. In the days of Savonarola, Perugino was the first to use them: and when the German Reformation had thrown its shadow over Italy, Raphael came with his Cecilia and Titian with his Magdalen. In the pictures of the Counter-reformation the same feeling is expressed, but in a more abrupt and passionate manner. Re- pentance (as in case of Peter), inspired writings (as with the prophets), and castigation (St. Jerome) present ever varying motives.
The sixteenth century had treated principally antique subjects. Its pleasure-loving artists were more at- tracted by the joyful assembly of the gods of Greece than by the figures of Christianity: for in the former they could celebrate love and the radiant splendour of the nude. The Counter-reformation had, at least in its first stages, avoided everything antique. Domen- ichino even paints St. Jerome punished by the angel for his love of Cicero. But in spite of restriction to increase. On the contrary, instead of the healthy sensuality of the past a perverse and hysterical sen- suality appears. They had been too long accustomed to portray sensuality: the Venetians in their pictures of Venus, and Correggio in his lo sinking into blessedness. Similar subjects were still painted, only with Christian titles. What had formerly been called Venus was now the Magdalen, and lo was transformed into St. Theresa. Magdalen also displays the charms of her body and Theresa kisses with all the passion of which a woman is capable; but Magdalen’s nudity creates no offence, because she repents of her sins, and Theresa’s kisses are holy, because they are pressed not upon the lips of man but upon the feet of the Crucified One. It is a similar sensuality to that expressed in literature by Zinzendorf when he sings of the lance thrust and the wound in the side of Christ :
- “ Du Seitenkringel, du tolles Dingel,
- Ich fress und sauf mich voll.”
As formerly they had searched through classic authors, so now they searched through the Bible for erotic scenes; and what they found there was not as harmless as the joyous legends of the Hellenes, but such scenes as Lot and his daughters, the expulsion of Hagar, the two elders peeping at Susanna in the bath, or Herodias confounding by her dance the senses of old Herod. If Judith is represented with especial frequency as the murderess of Holofernes, the reason probably is that the thought was akin to the episode of Beatrice Cenci.
Other possibilities of smuggling in profane charms were offered by the legends of the saints. They painted Agnes, the maiden of thirteen years, who, because she would not marry a heathen, was brought into a house of prostitution; but her long hair was spread over her body like a mantle and angels brought her a garment. They painted Christina beaten by her father, and Apollonia whose teeth were torn out. Even more popular is the martyrdom of Agatha because in it sensuality and cruelty are even more closely related.
The possibility of returning to antique subjects was created by first representing only such as were consistent with the sentiment of the Counter-reforma- tion. Such subjects were presented in antique martyr- doms: the flaying of Marsyas, Prometheus bound. Dido upon the funeral pyre, Cato stabbing himself, and Seneca opening an artery in the bath; in longing subjects with raised glance, like Lucretiaor Cleopatra; in antique hermits like Diogenes, or in examples of filial piety, as Cimon in prison comforted by his daughter Pera.
Finally, an entirely new domain of painting was opened to the seventeenth century in its pictures of visions. In this domain also the religious art of the past had taken the initial steps. Giotto had painted St. Francis receiving the stigmata; for the artist of the age of Savonarola the apparition of Mary to St. Bernard was of great importance; and Raphael in later life painted his Sistine Madonna and the Transfiguration. But in all of these works the taste of the Counter- reformation for the miraculous was not sufficiently emphasised, and the Holy Conversations of an earlier period were even less satisfactory in their unaffected simplicity. For the blessing of having visions is only conceived in a condition of religious ecstasy; the saint cannot be in repose, but must be lost in longing fervour and heavenly joy. The oppressive character of the sentiment is heightened when no witnesses are present, and Mary mystically floats into the cell of the lonely monk.
The same transformation as in the subjects may be noted in the forms. Under the overpowering influence of the antique, the late Renaissance admitted only of universal and idealised forms. Everything individual was considered vulgar, and in consequence portrait painting, which is compelled to follow nature, was only tolerated as a subordinate branch. “ No great and extraordinary painter,'’ it was said, '‘was ever a portraitist; for such an artist is enabled by judgment and acquired habit to improve upon nature. In portraiture, however, he must confine himself to the model whether it be good or bad, with sacrifice of his observation and selection; which no one would like to do who has accustomed his mind and his eye to good forms and proportions." In abrupt contrast to these aesthetics, the seventeenth century saw the rise of a series of mighty portrait-painters: Velasquez, Frans Hals, and Rembrandt. Religious art itself again becomes portrait-painting, and crude fidelity to nature takes the place of general beauty. The supernatural has all the more wonderful effect when it towers in tangible reality in the material world. For the saints they sought poor old peasants with overworked figures and weather-beaten faces. The pictures of martyr- doms, formerly rhythmic compositions of swinging motion, are depicted with a merciless, brutal, butcher- like reality. In paintings of visions all the external manifestations of epilepsy and hysteria are rendered with naturalistic truth. Indeed, the conception of a “grand style” is strange to this age. While the sixteenth century had eliminated all accessories in order to attain a monumental effect, the seventeenth in its religious paintings heaps up fruits, birds, fishes, goats, cows, bowls, and bundles of straw — everything calculated to occupy the eye of the people — into veritable examples of still life. The desire to see such things was so great that when Caravaggio introduced a water bottle and a flower vase into one of his first paintings he awakened a storm of enthusiasm. Por- trait-figures in contemporary costume, which the Renaissance had banished from historical compositions, are again introduced; just as in the quattrocento, only that the pictorial view of the seventeenth century is exactly the opposite of that of the fifteenth.
As the latter was the age of detailed execution and miniature painting, so the seventeenth is that of a broad bravura. The masters take pleasure in mixing fat, rich colours, in applying them with broad brush, and in arranging artistic details into a harmonious whole. The later cinquecento, which only appealed to the refined eye, had placed the principal weight upon the language of line. The seventeenth, which appeals to gloomy sentiment and found in music the greatest stimulant to awaken it, at the same time discovered the power of colour to strike responsive emotional chords. The effect of its pictures depends not upon lines but upon blending masses of colour; not upon rhythmic but upon pictorial composition, held together by the treatment of light, and formed in accordance with the masses of light and shade.
II.— Religious Painting
Naturally, such revolutions are not suddenly ac- complished. The brothers Carracci, who as old men survive into the new century, belong also as artists more to the cinquecento than to the Baroque period. It is true that in their subjects the new spirit of the age is expressed; for they painted martyrdoms, visions, and ecstacies. At the same time, however, they are partisans of the antique, and completely under the influence of a worldly and mythological spirit. They extol Juno as much as Mary, and Jupiter as much as Christ. And it is especially to be noted that in the
484
Utalian painting
treatment of the new religious subjects they use the
traditional forms of the cinquecento.
At the appearance of the Carracci the problem was to prepare the technical foundation for a new develop- ment of art.
“Because the arts of design from day to day are losing mo.e of their original beauty, and on account of the lack of a good school are sinking into increasing rudeness, we propose the foundation of an academy over which men, able and experienced in their art, shall pre- side; who shall exhibit to the students the most important master- pieces of Rome, in order that every one, in accordance with his talent, may imitate them/’
Such is the language of the Bull of Sixtus V. in 1593, authorising the foundation of the Academy of St. Luke; b(it the Carracci had at an earlier period followed the same path. They pointed out that the age of the Mannerists had been an epoch of super- ficial and rapid painting. In order to attain excel- lency like that of the classic painters, the student must in serious and conscientious labour abstract from the creation of the past great epochs what was most suitable to learn and teach, extract it and render it useful for the present. In order to accomplish this theory they founded the Academy of Bologna, that Accademia degli Incamminati (“of those upon the right road ”) to which all the young people from Italy soon flocked. A rich collection of plaster casts, medals, and drawings of celebrated masters was collected as the materials of study, and a library of aesthetic books was acquired. The artistic programme
IReliaious IPaintiuG
4S5
of the Academy is well stated in the sonnet which
Agostino Carracci dedicated to the Bolognese painter
Niccolo deir Abbate:
“ Chi farsi un bon pittor cerca e desia,
II disegno di Roma habbia alio mano,
La mossa coll’ umbrar Veneziano E il degno colorir di Lombardia,
Di Michel Angiol la terribil via,
II vero natural di Tiziano,
Del Correggio lo stil puro e sovrano E di un Raffael la giusta simetria.”
The Carracci are not quite as eclectic as would ap- pear from this sonnet. Although they regarded the present as an age of decline, they could not themselves escape the change of times. It therefore happens that we find in their works many things which they should in theory have avoided, because they were entirely out of harmony with the classic profession of faith. They often attempted strong effects of light and colour and a powerful realism. There are etchings by them which have more in common with Tiepolo than with the cinquecento. Even the celebrated work upon which the three brothers proved their power, the cycle of frescoes in the Farnese Palace, is not mere imitation. The different elements are indeed harmoniously united. The antique, the Farnesina, the ceiling of the Sistine Chapel and the Villa Maser — everything is carefully assimilated with conscious eclecticism. For the stories of the gods on the ceilings Raphael’s style rather than Giulio Romano’s was de- terminative. The mighty figures of Hermes supporting
486
IftaUan paintina
the frieze, the giants who hold the medallions of the
ceilings, are familiar frc^ the Sistine Chapel; and the
mural decorations are antique statues translated into
painting. But the masks, the shells, and the puffed
draperies are in no wise classic but quite Baroque.
However much they endeavour to adopt only the
classic, they were nevertheless under the influence of
the exaggerated, bombastic feeling of form which
dominated their time, and they created new things
in unconsciously following this modern taste.
They have, therefore, in the history of art a strange double position: they are at the same time Baroque painters and cinquecentists, heralds and stragglers. ‘Often, without their own knowledge, the new spirit breaks through the traditional scheme; but more often their work is purely collected activity and learned retrospection. They laboured in accordance with rules and precepts derived from the past epoch, and in the application of these aesthetic principles to the new subjects which the seventeenth century demanded, the result was often a mixture without character. For in art form and content are identical. As little as the antique artist could have expressed the pathos of the Pergamenes in forms of Praxiteles, so little could the new fermenting wine of the Baroque be kept in the old bottles of the cinquecento. Their pictures of martyrdoms give the impression of anatomical demon- strations because over all the scenes, even the most cruel, the marble coldness of classicism lies. The
IReU^ious ipaintina
487
half-figures in which they depict religious devotion and
ecstacy have a smooth, academic effect. As Laocoon
was the model of their martyrdoms, so Niobe, the
Mater Dolorosa of antiquity who just at that time
had been resurrected, became the prototype of their
emotional figures. Whether the effect was sadness or
ecstacy, pain or blessedness, the foundation was always
the same normal academic head. The works of the
Carracci are important as the first in which there were
border conflicts between the new sentiment and the old
language of form. But the spirit of the Baroque and
aesthetics of the cinquecento, the convulsed sentiment of
the Counter-reformation and the serene beauty of the
antique, could not be united into a harmonious whole.
Not until the works of their successors did the naturalistic elements become more prominent. One would imagine that a pupil of Raphael had painted the celebrated Aurora of the Palazzo Rospigliosi in Rome, so well has Guido Reni succeeded in transport- ing himself into the spirit of the past; so classic are the outlines of the light hovering figures; so truly cinque- centist is the colour in its bright and pleasing harmony. But the same master who wears the garb of the class- icists with such surety has also created works in which the antique nobility of form is quite supplanted by the naturalistic power, the pathos, and the sentimentality of the Baroque. To these belong the great picture of the Berlin Museum in which he depicts with powerful naturalism the visit of the hermit Antony to the hermit
488
•fftaUan painting
Paul. Here also belong certain presentations of the
Pieta and the Assumption, a series of martyrdoms
(especially the Crucifixion of Peter, in which he created
the model for such subjects), and those numerous half-
figures with eyes cast heavenwards, who illustrate,
especially in their theatrical superficiality, the forced,
artificial character of this new ecclesiasticism.
A greater realistic power, a certain primeval and coarse element appear in the works of Domenichino. While Guido sometimes became soft and theatrical, Domenichino always seems as a clumsy and crude and honest fellow. In his Diana' s Hunt, for example, there is no academic emptiness; everything is of virile harshness and bronze-like precision. In his Death of St. Jerome he paints the decay of an aged body with astonishing bravura. How time brought truth to light and the pure teaching of Christianity triumphed over the superstition of the Renaissance, is the subject of his powerful ceiling frescoes of the Palazzo Costagneti at Rome.
As regards colour Francesco Barbieri, called Guercino, is the most important master of the school. His frescoes in the Villa Ludovisi are characterised by bold movement and powerful light effects; his Burial of Petronilla by fine colour and a naturalistic power. All the bonds which united the art of the Carracci with the Renaissance are here torn asunder; Guido, as well as Domenichino and Guercino, already stood under the influence of the man who had in the meanwhile an-
IReUGtous painting
489
nounced, far more abruptly than the Carracci, the
ideal of the new time — Caravaggio. The life history of
this uomo fantastico e besiiale would yield a fine criminal
romance. He was born at Caravaggio near Bergamo,
where Lotto, the first master of the Counter-reforma-
tion, passed the happiest years of his life. His father
was a stone-mason, and as his assistant the son went to
Milan and for four years earned a livelihood at his
father’s trade. But on a certain day he stabbed a work-
man and fled, loaded with the curse of blood, to Venice,
where Tintoretto, the second master of the Counter-
reformation, crossed his horizon. In the meanwhile
he had, without having visited an academy, learned
how to use brush and colours, and was employed at
Rome by the Cavaliere d’ Arpino, half as an assistant,
half as a servant. Here he was discovered by the painter
and art-dealer Prospero, who ordered pictures from him.
One of these pictures was bought by Cardinal del
Monte, who conceived an interest in the young man.
Caravaggio seemed to be in a safe haven; for the
different churches ordered altar-pieces from him, and
even the pope sat to him for a portrait. But the stone-
mason could not be transformed to a well mannered
academician. With wild comrades he wandered about
in taverns, disputing and quarrelling, and always ready
to plunge his dagger into any one who did not share his
opinion. An act of this kind made him impossible at
Rome and he wandered like a nomad from village to
village, finally landing at Naples. Here, too, he re-
490
irtaUan paintinQ
ceived commissions and the past was forgotten. But
the demon again seized him. As the Cavaliere d’ Ar-
pino had declined to fight a duel with him, a mason’s
son, Caravaggio resolved to become a knight of Malta
in order that he might as a nobleman compel his rival
to give him satisfaction. He therefore went to Malta
and accomplished his purpose. For the portrait of the
grand master of the order, which to-day hangs in the
Louvre, he received the cross of Malta and a present of
a gold chain and two slaves. In gratitude for these
favours he wounded one of the knights and was thrown
into prison, but soon escaped into Sicily where he
painted large altar-pieces in Syracuse, Messina, and
Palermo. Not until his return to Naples did fate
overtake him. The knights of Malta had hired rulfians
who one evening waylaid him; blow followed blow, and,
severely wounded, he determined to escape to Rome in a
boat; for at the intercession of a cardinal the pope
had assured him of pardon. But the bleeding man
excited suspicion. He was held by a coastguard and
placed under arrest, until his identity was proven.
When he returned to the shore his boat had been stolen
by brigands. Robbed of his possessions exhausted and
dying, he dragged himself as far as Porto d’ Ercole,
where he perished from his wounds at forty years of age.
Think for a moment of the artists’ biographies of an earlier day. At the beginning of the sixteenth century when Castiglione wrote his Cortegiano, that antique gravitas which he designates as characteristic of a
CARAVAGGIO
THE FALSE PLAYERS
Dresden Gallery
IReUatous painting
491
perfect cavalier, was characteristic also of painters.
They wandered upon the heights of life and were
accustomed to associate with princes as with equals.
This aristocratic generation was followed in the second
half of the century by a generation of scholars. Their
portraits resemble professors; they associated with
scholars and poets, themselves wrote poems and books
upon archaeology, aesthetics, and the history of art;
they arranged conferences in which lectures were given
on the true aims of art. In Bologna, the seat of an
ancient university, this learned art experienced its
last after-flower; then the reaction came.
From the people themselves the reaction against the libertinism of the church issued. Not until pressed by the people did the church itself proceed to reforms. So also in the days of Roger van der Weyden, the peo- ple had furnished the first painters of the reaction. The aristocrats were succeeded by plebeians, the thinkers by men of nature, who could wield only the brush but not the pen. A new class, in immediate touch with nature but separated from the formalities of the academies, entered the development of art. They are all from the people, one of them the son of a mason, another of a day labourer. Not one of them visited an academy or received learned instruction; nor did they grow up in large cities, where the sight of works of art at an early period guides the taste into certain directions. They came from the country or from cities like Naples, which had as yet played no part in the artistic develop-
492
fltaUan ipainttna
ment of the past. They were thus lacking in the ad-
vantages connected with development from a long
line of ancestors. Their art is sturdy, wholesome, and
occasionally crude. A cultivated taste schooled by
study of the old masters like that of the Carracci could
only feel indignation over this brutal crudity, this
clumsy copying of nature. But such plebeians were
necessary in order to break the ban of tradition. As
at the time of the Revolution the guillotines had to
be erected in order that the Third Estate should come
to its own, so this new plebeian race of artists could
only establish itself by force, poison, and the dagger.
As in Castagno’s days, they are all wild comrades whose
names belong quite as much in the gallery of great
rogues as in that of great painters.
Caravaggio’s appearance is like the sudden irruption of some primeval force of nature. He comes from the country with the confidence of a peasant who fears nothing, and has powerful elbows to push everything aside that stands in this way. With the same barbaric abruptness as Courbet in our own days, he struggles against the academies and declares that nature should be the only teacher. To her he wishes to owe every- thing, nothing to art. The more wrinkles his model has the better he is pleased. Porters and beggars, strumpets and gypsies are used in his religious pictures, and he takes pleasure in callous hands, torn rags, and dirty feet. In harsh contrast to the Renaissance, which had recognised only the distinguished, the pie-
IReU^tous painttna
493
beian Caravaggio will acknowledge the existence of
beauty only among the lower classes, and sets himself
up only as the democratic painter who raised the lowest
classes to a place of honour. His St. Matthew in the
Berlin Gallery is a crude proletarian of uncouth great-
ness. In his Death of Mary in the Louvre, he paints
the corpse of a drowned person with swollen body and
clumsy feet, distended in the cramp of death. In his
pictures of martyrdoms like that of Sebastian or his
Christ Crowned with Thorns, he shows no beautiful
youth, but a suffering man whose body is bent with
agony. In a picture of the Madonna at Loreto a
pilgrim with a torn, greasy cap in his hand kneels before
her, and another shows his swollen footsoles, besmeared
by the dust of the streets.
On account of this “apish imitation of misshapen na- ture” Agostino Carracci caricatured him as a hairy wild man, with a dwarf at his side and an ape upon his knee; Baglione denounced him as the Antichrist of paint- ing and the destroyer of art. But history can only extol him as the man who was the first to plant himself firmly upon the new domain of the new century. While with the Carracci, as with the Mannerists of the cinquecento, rule still prevails, here a powerful personality speaks. None of the Eclectics could have painted a work of such power and grandeur as Caravaggio’s Entombment in the Vatican Gallery. He was possessed of enormous ability, and his paintings are dashed off with wild bravura. Even the illumination heightens the power-
494
UtaUan ipatntino
ful effect. Although he at first preferred the golden
tone of Venice, he later painted his altar-pieces as
gloomy as if the light had fallen from above into a
cellar, or as if the figures were moving in a dungeon.
Some parts are harshly and sharply illumined, others
are lost in the gloom of the background. Although
Tintoretto had previously used similar effects, it is
perhaps no accident that the man who often sat in
gloomy prison cells further developed this “cellar-
window style.” And as the church had to yield to
the claims of the people so the plebeian Caravaggio
triumphed over the distinguished academicians. Under
his influence Guido, Domenichino, and Guercino de-
veloped from pupils of the Carracci into naturalists. He
was followed also by Luca Giordano whose pictures of
martyrdoms and those half-figures of aged, weather-
beaten saints are to be found in all European galleries.
Finally, the “democratic painter” was followed by
those who proceeded from religious to folk pictures.
III.— The Genre Picture
The Italians of the sixteenth century did not further develop the genre elements in the works of the quattrocento. To paint scenes from daily life, or to give by means of pleasing accessories a genre trend to relig- ious paintings, was not in the spirit of a time for which only that which was noble and significant had value.
But in the Netherlands, the land of kirmesses, the pleasure in such things was so great that, even in this
Ubc 6enre picture
495
epoch of monumental conceptions, a few progressed
along the paths which Quentin Massys had trod with
his Money Changers. All the burlesque scenes which
Lucas van der Leyden and the Little Masters of
Germany had treated in their line-engravings found a
place in painting. As it was necessary to appear so
solemn and measured in religious pictures, they took
pleasure in relating in such little works real, crude, and
vulgar things.
The little paintings of Jan van Hemessen are there- fore very drastic. He conducts the beholder into public houses where men drink with slovenly women, absolving his conscience by adding the inscription The Prodigal Son by way of a moral. Cornelis Massys, the son of Quentin, relates farces such as in our own day Schroedter and Hasenclever painted; for example, a driver who has allowed women to mount his waggon, and who while courting one is robbed by another.
Pieter Aertsen approached genre painting from an- other side. Just because the religious painting of the sixteenth century excluded still-life from its works, a reaction had soon to occur. For there were also painters who took more pleasure in these gay acces- sories than in biblical figures. Aertsen’s works show how still-life was gradually emancipated. He painted fruits, vegetables, fish and game, whole kitchens with polished pewter mortars shining and yellow copper dishes, with plates and beer glasses, jugs and straw baskets. In this scenery he places the proper figures,
496
IFtalian painting
market-women, cooks, and kitchen boys. No episode
is related; his pictures are large still-life with human
figures, rendered without witticisms or humour, but,
with simple objectivity and powerful colour. In this
sense — because he placed emphasis not upon anecdotes
but upon the pictorial — he signifies an important step
in the history of genre painting, and bears the same
relation to his predecessors as in our own day Ribot
or Leibel to painter-novelists like Knaus and Vautier.
Similar kitchen and market subjects were painted by his pupil Joachim Beuckelaer, who took especial delight in the jolly life of the Amsterdam fish market. He conceived even the Exposure of Christ as a market subject with hucksters, vegetables, and cakes, with maids and peasants who are much more interested in apples and cabbage heads than in the Martyred One.
On the basis of these varied achievements Pieter Brueghel wrote the chronicle of his day. Like all the Netherlanders of the later sixteenth century he made the journey to Italy. He did not linger before the pictures of the great masters but he wandered about in nature and. among the people. Like Durer in his wan- derings. he made a halt everywhere that a pretty land- scape motive charmed him; made drawings of the cliffs of the Alps with the same simplicity as he studied the harbour of Messina ;and rejoiced in the gay life of the Italian people. Upon his return home he found in the daily life of the north as much that was pictorial as in that of the south. His drawings especially make a curi-
Ubc (Bente picture
497
ously modern impression. They represent the simplest
things : a peasant resting on a tree-stump on the way to
market, horses dragging a heavy cart over a dusty
road, or a tired woodcutter carrying an axe under his
arm on the road home. There are also studies of heads
which in their simple and powerful realism might have
been painted to-day instead of three hundred years
ago.
In his pictures such simplicity was not possible, because in them, according to the conception of the day, extensive apparatus and humorous episodes were necessary. Brueghel only used his delightful studies as material for more extensive subjects.
At first the Bible had to yield the subjects. He paints for example a Flemish village in winter time. A division of cavalry, formed in strict conformance with military tactics into a main body and rear-guard, approaches from the road; the foremost have already dismounted and proceed to look for quarters. Men and women plunge into the street calling their children; others bolt the house doors: for these troops have received command to execute the massacre of the innocents at Bethlehem. Or a gay crowd, on foot, in waggons, and on horseback, surges along a road towards a hill — artisans and shopkeepers, clergymen and sol- diers, women and children; the whole city is on its feet, for an execution cannot be seen every day. And this picture represents the Crucifixion! Another, a tax-collector’s office with Flemish burghers paying
32
498
IFtaltan paintino
their taxes, is supposed to represent the scene of Joseph
and Mary coming to pay their taxes at Nazareth.
To other paintings he gives an allegorical mask; a religious morning service he calls Faith, a group of poor people chewing with their mouths full, Charity, or a regular court session with advocate, judges, and public. Justice. Sometimes he develops pictures, as did Hogarth later, into moral sermons and introduces entire life scenes of a warning kind. The alchemist who has staked everything upon his invention ends with his wife and children in the poor-house, the quack who deceives people is thrown into prison; and the Naples picture of the blind men groping through the landscape is labelled with the biblical quotation: “If the blind lead the blind, shall they not both fall into the ditch?’'
When, as an exception, he dispenses with biblical and allegorical titles, the multitudinous accumulation of comic traits must atone for the lacking moral. Kirmesses with numberless figures, skating scenes, and similar subjects, which can be related in a broad and detailed manner — such is the content of these works. His Vienna picture, the Struggle of Carnival and Lent, is a treatise upon all nonsense that can be conceived in the carnival; his Peasant's Wedding a treatise on intemperance. In his ice scenes all ludicrous episodes are narrated which could possibly occur in skating; or he heightens the comic effect by making the peasants bestial in their hideousness.
In this regard Brueghel is a true son of the sixteenth
Ube Genre picture
499
century: an age which was accustomed to see nothing
but gods and heroes could not conceive of the poetry
of actuality. Daily life must be brought into humorous
contrast with the ideal; for the opinion was that nature
could not be represented because she was too ugly.
For this doctrine Brueghel furnished the proofs by
contrasting with the gallery of beauty presented by the
idealists his gallery of ugliness.
It was impossible for genre painting to enter other paths until the art of the seventeenth century had broken with the doctrine of the ugliness of nature and had substituted for idealised saints men of flesh and blood. Human beings good enough to don the gar- ments of saints were also beautiful enough to be painted in their own clothes: no longer as caricatured louts and heroes of ludicrous anecdotes, but with seriousness and objectivity. So Caravaggio, the first great natur- alist, became also the first great painter of the people. By selecting, as did Courbet in our own day, the life-size scale for presentation, he removed the last hindrance to the treatment of such subjects. Genre painting thus took its place as an equally justified branch beside religious painting.
To Caravaggio’s early period belongs the lovely blond maiden of the Liechtenstein Gallery listening so dreamily to the tones of her lute. Later the golden gleaming colour was replaced in such pictures also by the gloomy light of a cellar, and the figures became more primeval and wilder. He passed his time in obscure
500
UtaUan paintina
taverns with lansquenets, gypsies, and women; and
these people, whose society he preferred, are also the
heroes of his paintings. For Cardinal del Monte he
painted the gypsy Fortune Teller (now in the Gallery
of the Capitol) and the False Players of the Sciarra
Gallery, another version of which is at Dresden. In
still another picture he represented a company
of people making music. With such scenes a great
new domain was opened to the following painters.
Among P'renchmen he was followed by Jean de Boulogne, called le Valentin, who came when quite young to Rome. His subjects are lansquenets quarrel- ing over dice or making music with the women in taverns. Even when he now and then painted biblical themes like the Innocence of Susanna or the Judgment of Solomon, he treated them in the crude naturalistic style of genre painting. Among the Flemings belong- ing to this group are Theodor Rombouts, who painted companies of singers and card-players in life-size figures, and among the Dutch Gerhard Honthorst, who varied the “cellar-window” style of Caravaggio by the addition of candle-light. Michelangelo Cerquozzi and Antonio Tempesta progressed from genr6 to hunt- ing pieces, which in a century of great wars found a thankful public. Benedetto Castiglione added shep- herd scenes with goats, sheep, horses, and dogs. Unlike the majestic sixteenth century which had only recog- nised one variety of historical painting, the seventeenth witnessed the development of all other branches.
IV.— The Landscape
SOI
IFlD.-ZTbe Xanbscape
The cinquecento held the same opinion of landscape painting as Winckelmann. An age which con- sidered only the mighty forms of the nude human body beautiful had no sense for life in nature. Even among the Venetians no one followed the path indicated by Titian; not until the seventeenth century, when the bond of the antique had been broken, did landscape painting awaken to new life.
Like Caravaggio, Salvator Rosa, the Neapolitan, was a wild and restless spirit. A fugitive from a seminary of priests, he wandered as a lute-player and a serenader through the taverns of Naples. Then he began to paint; and, without having even seen an academy, he wandered with portfolio and colour-box about the neighbourhood of the city; roamed through the wilderness of the Abruzzi, the Capitanata, Apulia, the Basili- cata, and Calabria, making drawings of all points connected with historical events : the wild cliffs of the Cau- dine Forks where the Roman army surrendered to the mercy of the victor; the marshy plains of the Volturno where Hannibaks soldiers wasted away stricken with fever; the jagged summits of Monte Cavo with the fallen cliff of Otranto which the Turks destroyed in 1480. Falling into the hands of robbers, he continued his roamings partly as a prisoner, partly for the pleasure he took in the bandit’s life.
As an old man he looked back upon the adventures of his youth as upon a wild romance. The brigand became a grand seigneur, the landscape painter a historical painter. He painted battles and combats of cavalry, historical pictures like the Conspiracy of Catiline, ghostly and fantastic subjects, like the Ghost of Samuel appearing to Saul; in clever etchings he seized upon scenes from popular and military life, and designed those weird landscapes peopled by centaurs, sea nymphs, and sea monsters, which are so strongly reminiscent of the greatest fantastic painter of our own day, Bocklin. The greatest number of his pictures in the galleries are landscapes; and, as in the etchings, here also he has points of contact with Bocklin and reminds us of the youthful works of Lessing and Blechens. His favourite subjects are not the serene majesty of the South, but romantic cliff walls and jagged mountain tops, the crumbling world of ruins of the Abruzzi. He does not see nature in the joyful sunlight; but envelopes the heavens with mighty clouds or leads us into the silence of mountainous deserts. Ruins and weather-beaten trees start upwards ; mighty oaks are swept by the tempest, and threatening storms gather over gloomy chasms. The leaden miasma of malaria hovers over the withered earth, or lightning strikes down from black clouds; a gloomy poetry of solitude, something passionate and impetuous, pervades all his works. In this respect also he resembles the German romanticists of 1830: by making the figures a commentary of the sentiment. As in the pictures of Lessing, monks and nuns, knights and ladies re-echo the elegiac sentiment of the landscape, so adventurers, bandits, and mercenaries are the only objects which people Salvator’s gloomy world.
Salvator Rosa is an isolated instance of romanticism in the seventeenth century. With him alone, the Neapolitan, a wild, passionate fire reigns, with all others classic repose. He alone chooses South Italian motives; all the others depict Rome. The reason for this was not only the fact that Rome was the centre of artistic activity, but also because the plastic appear- ance of the Roman landscape was in harmony with contemporary taste. An epoch in which the great historical painters stood in the foreground, could find no sense in the true charms of a landscape. The noble lines and plastic forms which painters sought could best be found in Rome. The Alban mountains with their lonely seas and distant perspectives, the Cam- pagna with its mighty ruins and solemn, monotonous mountain ranges-— -such is the content of the heroic landscape painted at the beginning of the seventeenth century.
Even the Carracci, in some of their works, made concessions to the landscape tendencies of the century. Learned scholars in their historical paintings, they here feel themselves creators. In their landscapes an intangible and solemn repose seems to rest over nature. Albano’s works have an idyllic and arcadian effect: green mountains with majestic trees and shady arbours, peopled by dainty cupids. A distinguished gentleman
504
irtalian painting
living with his mistress in the country, he makes the
impression of the Rococo master gone astray into the
Baroque period.
The Carracci, as well as Albano, would hardly have painted these things if foreign artists had not opened their eyes. These strangers, who had often starved for years before they entered upon their pilgrimage to the South, were, when they had reached the land of their longing, far more receptive for the beauty of the Eter- nal City than the natives. The dawn of modern land- scape painting approaches.
Apart from others, a genius by himself, stands Velasquez. For him there exists neither romanticism nor idealism, neither the elegy of ruins nor majestic line. In Rome as in Spain, he sought only the cool green, white, and grev harmony of colours to which his eye was accustomed. A half-wild garden, a white shimmering piece of architecture, a couple of people, and some marble figures are the elements of his Roman land- scapes. As he was too distant from the sentiment of the epoch, Velasquez’s Italian stay passed away without an echo. Far more important were the impulses which owed their origin to a Netherlander and a Frenchman: Paul Bril and Nicolas Poussin.
Bril, whose gay and kaleidoscopic pictures often appear in the galleries, was at the same time a fresco painter in the grand style. That he found opportunity to paint such frescoes in adornment of the walls of a church is characteristic of the trend towards landscape
Ube Xanbscape
505
during this period. Through painted halls of columns one looks upon impressive hills, by which distant perspectives the narrow chapels are changed into a laughing world. Thus in church frescoes modern landscape painting created its first monumental achievements.
Poussin is called a “primitive” by his countrymen, the French; and although the figures of his paintings reveal him as a cool composer, he looked upon nature with the eye of a primitive — a kind of Mantegna of the seventeenth century, at the same time a scholar and realist. In the midst of the Baroque period, from the ruins of the antique world he created painting anew from the very foundations. In a convulsed epoch he alone maintained classic repose; in an age in which painting was pictorial he was ‘Te peintre le plus sculp- teur qui fut jamais.” His youth was passed in bitter poverty, and when he at last trod the land of his dreams he could never again part from the solemn Roman landscape. His life passed as simply as that ^ of an Arcadian shepherd. In the day he laboured in his workshop upon the hill of Santa Trinita de’ Monti^ whence he could enjoy a wide view over the Campagna. At eventide he roamed with scholars and poets in the environs of the Eternal City; filled his mind with her landscape; brooded in the garden of the Villa Borghese over the primeval past; and made sketches of those gigantic trees which in his pictures rear their heads so majestically towards heaven. In his work there is
Utaltan painttna
506
nothing intimate, nothing homelike. Nature, as he depicts her, is a purely plastic, apparently soulless world. H^ees only forms and lines; gazes upon the outlines of a tree with the same eyes as does a sculptor upon the silhouette of a statue. But the grandeur of his line is such that it alone inspires his landscapes with a solemn sentiment. He created a world free from everything trivial and insignificant. These great, noble mountain ranges, these mighty trees and crystal seas are combined with simple antique buildings in com- positions of classic rhythm. The figures also are attuned ' with the elements of nature to one great accord. Many of his works, like the Prometheus of the Louvre, were probably inspirations for young Bocklin.
His pupil and brother-in-law, Gaspard Dughet, added nothing new. Although his landscapes with scenes from the lives of Elijah and Elisha in the church of San Martino ai Monti rank with those of Bril as the most important religious frescoes of the century, they reveal only the form of Poussin without his spirit. Even when he paints those storms to which his chief celebrity is due, he lacks the great and sustained har- mony of his master.
The painter who followed him, on the other hand, has something new to offer. After artists had painted the permanent character, the firm lines, and the eternal repose of nature, they had yet to learn to express the changeable, the transient, and the evanescent effects of light. The rhythm of form and poetry of line had
XTbe Xanbscape
507
also to be combined with the sentiment of light. The
decisive steps in just this path had to be taken at the
beginning of the sixteenth century by artists like
Grunewald and Altdorfer. Gerard David’s picture of
Christ’s Prayer upon the Mount of Olives is pervaded
by a subdued bluish-white moonlight, and in another
picture, Christ taken Prisoner, he painted the effects
of torchlight. Among the Italians Giorgione had
already interpreted lamplight, painted the lightning
flashing in the night, and the fiery glow of the sun pour-
ing his light over the earth. Many of Titian’s, Sal-
vator’s, and Tintoretto’s pictures are lighted by the
beams of evening red and moonlight. But classicism
had interrupted this development, and it was reserved
for the seventeenth century to enter upon the heritage
of the earlier masters. As Poussin, the master of line,
can only be conceived as a Frenchman, so Elsheimer
in his entire being appears a German. A pupil of
Grunewald’s in the third generation, he was called to
become the first great Stimmungsmaler^ of the seven-
teenth century, who opposed the power of colour tone
to the clear elasticity of form. In his pictures the
robust and powerful light and shade effects of Cara-
vaggio are clarified into a poetic tenderness.
It is true that Elsheimer did not paint pure land-
» The nearest approach to the translation of this significant word is a “ painter of moods,” It is applied to those artists who use the landscape or some other subject as a means of expressing their own poetic sentiment, as was done in the nineteenth century by the painters of the Barbizon school.— Ed.
5o8
irtaUan painting
scapes; for he peoples them with biblical figures. But
the relation of the figures to the landscape is different
than with earlier masters. Their art was a species
of historical painting. They found in the Bible scenes
enacted in a landscape, and sought in the neighbour-
hood of Rome the natural elements needed for the
completion of such narratives. Elsheimer’s works
originated through a different psychological process.
What he first sees is the sentiment of nature, and
then he peoples her with suitable beings. The senti-
ment of landscape produces the subject of the picture.
Whole days he lay, as Sandrart relates, in thoughtful contemplation under beautiful trees, and he became so thoroughly imbued with the sense of their forms that he could see them as clearly with closed as with open eyes. This serene and dreamy observation of nature pervades all his pictures. He paints the vicinity of Rome with its silent mountain ranges, its noble groups of trees, and idyllic valleys. But his observation is not confined to the solemn grandeur of its lines. At one time the light of noon, at another soft dawn, the weary evening red or pale moonlight spreads over the earth. Indeed, he often approaches the problem of the “double light.” Silver stars twinkle, houses burn, and pine torches smoke; or the light of the camp-fire quivers in flaming red through the night. The Flight into Egypt especially gave occasion for variations like those given at a later period by Domenico Tiepolo. He painted it innumerable times under all illuminations.
XTbe XanbBcape
509
In a picture of the Dresden Gallery, the full noonday
sunlight spreads over the scene; in that of the Munich
Pinakothek it is night: in the foreground Joseph with
a gleaming torch walks near Mary, while in the back-
ground shepherds sit under mighty trees around the
fire. From the sky the moon in serene splendour
pours down her mild, silver light upon the earth.
Between Poussin the Frenchman and Elsheimer the German stands one who is at the same time a mas- ter of line and a painter of light, — a Lorrainer, Claude Gelee. With Poussin he shares the feeling for the majestic and the opinion that the landscape should be the scene of an historical event or the dwelling-place of gods and heroes. From the standpoint of line alone, all his works are variations of a single theme. In the foreground a mighty group of trees or a temple is pushed forward in order to carry the eye into the distance, and in the background a classic row of hills bounds the scene. These elements which he always repeats hardly change their position. But the light which vibrates among them is different at every hour of the day. And as Elsheimer always repeated the Flight into Egypt, Hokusai painted a hundred views of the mountain Fuji, and Claude Monet twelve times the same haystack, so also Claude Lorrain could all his life long depict the same temples and groups of trees, but it was each time a different picture. After Sal- vator had painted the struggle and the devastating effects of the elements, Poussin the rigid, linear beauty
510 UtaUan painting
of nature, and Elsheimer the magic of the moonlight, Claude sang the wonders of the sunlight and the mighty dome of heaven, which gleams in the morning in a cool, silver splendour, at noon like liquid gold, and at even like crimson. One loves to think of him as a poor lad, aimlessly leaving the parental roof and on his distant wanderings gazing up into the mighty sky; as a wander- ing journeyman sitting by the lagoons of Venice and following with his eye the rippling sunlight, as it played upon the waves and danced over the colonnades of marble palaces. For it was in Venice that he discov- ered himself : and however often he afterwards painted Roman monuments or the harbours of Messina, Naples, and Tarentum, the recollection of Venice seems to hover over his paintings; the memory of the city of light where he lingered to dream upon his journey. Not until the nineteenth century did another painter, the Englishman Turner, sing such jubilant hymns to light.
CLAUDE LORRAIN
THE DISEMBARKMENT OF CLEOPATRA
Chapter II.— The Religious and Realistic Art of Spain
I.— Ribera and Zurbaran
Like the painters just mentioned, Ribera, who opens the history of Spanish art of the seven- teenth century, also resided in Italy. At the beginning of his activity he had been directed by his master Ribalta to study the Lombard school, had gone to Parma and become so absorbed in Correggio that his decorations in a chapel of that city were for a long time considered works of Correggio. But much as he loved light and colour at the beginning, his pictures became at a later period equally dark and gloomy. Although it does not appear that he made the personal acquaintance of Caravaggio, he certainly honoured him as his master; and when he was called to continue this master’s activity in the Spanish vice- royalty of Naples, he found himself in his true element.
Ribera was a bold and energetic spirit. He had in his youth defied all misery, hunger, and dangers; had without blushing worn the livery of a servant in order to avoid begging in the streets. This will-power, this unbending energy is also apparent in his works. Of
511
XTbe Hrt of Spain
SI2
all artists of the seventeenth century he is the most powerful naturalist, and such was the power and force of his works that they exercised a deep influence upon many artists of the nineteenth century, especially upon Bonnat and Ribot. In contrast to the cinquecento, which had avoided the representation of old age, Ribera felt himself most at home when he could paint aged faces furrowed by the hardships of life — grey hair, swollen veins and sinews. A black background into which the dark garments of his figures imper- ceptibly pass, a mass of furrowed skin and wrinkled hands which he has seen somewhere — such is usually the content of his paintings. But he loved not only the harsh and overworked forms of old age, but also the deformed, which the art of the sixteenth century had never represented; and in his club-footed beggars of the Louvre he created a wonderful piece of defiant realism.
Such figures peopled also his larger works. As Caravaggio had represented fat women of the Trastevere and rugged porters as Madonnas and apostles, so Ribera depicted them as market-women and aged peasants with brazen bones and weather-beaten faces. His Adora- tion of the Shepherds takes place among a rude shep- herd tribe of the Abruzzi. Brown, raw-boned fellows in coats of sheep-fell press about Mary. The still-life — the bread basket, the bundle of straw, the chickens, and the lamb — is arranged to form a complete kitchen subject. In his Entombment the body of Christ is that of a raw-boned Neapolitan peasant.
VELASQUEZ
^SOP
Prado, Madrid
IRibera anb 2^urbaran
5^3
The gloomy inquisitorial spirit of the Spanish hier-
archy is expressed in his pictures of martyrdoms.
Here Bartholomew is flayed, there Lawrence is roasted
on the grill, or Andrew hangs upon the cross, while a
soldier tries to drag away the corpse before the fetter
about his wrist has been loosed. Even when for a
change he treads the domain of the antique, he selects
martyrdoms, and places beside the Christian such
heathen victims as Marsyas, Ixion, and Prometheus.
But the same man who here appears as such a one- sided painter of tortures and wrinkled beggar phi- losophers, has in other cases succeeded wonderfully in presenting soulful ecstacy, and occasionally surprises one with a melancholy type of maiden with great dark and dreamy eyes. Take for example his St. Agnes at Dresden and his Immaculate Conception in Salamanca, which reveal a psychic delicacy and radi- ant rendition of light attained by no Italian painter.
The path indicated by Ribera was followed by other artists .whose activity falls not now in Italy but in Spain. The way was prepared, and a series of mighty spirits proclaimed with powerful naturalism what Ribalta and Roelas had expressed in the forms of the Renaissance. The seventeenth century was the age of the greatest development of culture in Spain: when Calderon wrote his sensual but mystic and romantic poems, and sculptors carved those master- works of glowing polychromy before which one to-day stands amazed in Spanish churches. To painters also the
33
Zbc Hrt of Spain
5H
foundation of monasteries by Philip III. and Lermo gave work in abundance; and in full possession of a most powerful technique they now became in every drop of their blood true Spaniards.
In Spanish art Spanish religion lives. Passion and fanatical asceticism, gloomy, ecstatic sensuality, and hysteric fervour are reproduced in their religious pictures with an unequalled naturalistic power. In a feudal state like the Spanish, with its grandees and princes of the church, portraiture also found such a soil as it had nowhere else. This is the age of those por- traits in which solemn grande{{a and faded weariness, majesty and insanity are united into such an in- describable whole.
Francisco Zurbaran is the painter of the clergy and monasticism. Before his paintings one has the feel- ing of standing in a gloomy cloister cell. A wooden crucifix hangs upon the whitewashed wall; upon a straw seat lies the Bible, printed in great black and red letters; here stands the prayer-bench and upon it a skull, warning of the changefulness of this world; there the row of books, all great pigskin folios. In the midst of this solemn space, solemn figures move about in ample white woollen cowls, the cross of the order upon their breasts ; men who in solitude have forgotten speech and associate only with the saints of heaven. Some- times they are ecstatic and wild, convulsed by the ful- ness of spiritual feeling, radiating like glowing stoves a light from within. But he often paints them also in
ZURBARAN
VISION OP ST. PETER NOLASCO
II.— Velasquez
515
everyday monastic life as they read, write, and meditate.
Instead of the wildness of Ribera there reigns with
him an unspeakable simplicity, a quiet almost sober
unpretentiousness. The objects about them — the cups,
fruits, bread, the coarse stuff of the cowls, the folios
and straw chairs are rendered with the objectivity of a
still-life painter. If notwithstanding this his works
create the impression of all that terrihile which frightens
us in Castagno’s and Michelangelo’s works, this effect
is the result of the .grandeur of his line. The folds of
the great white cowls are statuesque in effect, and the
silhouettes are powerful and grand. Like a mystic
bandit, a giant of primeval times, seems the Praying
Monk of the London Gallery ; and the portrait of Peter
of Alcantara with the sparkling eye and solemn
threatening gesture is truly grandiose. Of the larger
paintings in which he, the epic poet of monasticism,
relates the legends of the orders, four scenes from the
Life of St. Bonaventura, painted in 1629 for a church of
this saint in Seville, have found their way to Paris,
Berlin, and Dresden. But even these works are but
poor examples of his art. Not until more has become
known which is concealed in the churches of Seville
and the mountain villages of Estremadura, will
Zurbaran be discovered for the history of art.
irir, lDeIa6aue3
A year after Zurbaran, Velasquez was bom, and these two artists are united by the closest of
XTbe Hrt of Spain
516
bonds. Although most other Spaniards delighted in tragic pain and wild ecstacy, there is nothing oppressive in the works of Velasquez or Zurbaran. Their chief characteristic is royal repose and their only difference this, that of the two pillars of the Spanish state, the church and the nobility, the works of Zur- baran feflect rather the ecclesiastical, those of Velasquez the knightly spirit.
Velasquez also painted religious pictures like his Adoration of the Shepherds and an Adoration of the Kings, a Christ Crucified and a Coronation of the Virgin. He painted landscapes, historical pictures, like the Surrender of Breda, and antique subjects like Los Borrachos and the Smithy of Vulcan, Mars and Venus. Yet one thinks little of these works when the name of Velasquez is mentioned, but rather of his portraits. He is for us the court painter par excellence. The entire enervated Spanish court of the seventeenth century, degenerated by family marriages, stares from his works as from a witch’s mirror. No portrait painter of the world had, it would seem, more interesting problems. Whereas in the works of Titian and Rubens princes alternate with scholars and artists, beautiful women with generals and statesmen, with Velasquez the same figures always recur with tiresome similarity. Al- though his activity in Madrid lasted thirty-six years he hardly painted a picture that was not ordered by the king. Two journeys to Italy in 1629 and 1648-51 were the only events that showed him that a world
IDclasques
517
existed outside of the royal palace of Madrid. The
same walls which separated the Alcazar from the com-
mon herd form the boundaries of his art. Within these
walls as little happened as in the mountain palaces
of Louis 11. of Bavaria. Foreign royalties were in-
frequent guests: and of all the court officials almost the
only one of whom we hear, except the minister Olivares,
was Cardinal Caspar Borgia, who returned in 1636 to the
Spanish capital, after his fanaticism had made him
impossible even in Rome. Philip IV. usually preferred
to associate with subalterns, to whom he was as de-
voted as a master to his dog. His master huntsman,
sturdy foresters, and their assistants were dearer to
him than ministers; he preferred dwarfs and fools to
sane persons. It was so pleasant to address these
comical old fellows as uncle and cousin; so elevating to
feel, in the presence of a crazy little monster, how
like divinity royalty was.
These, then, are the personages whom Velasquez had to paint. We see in a dozen variations the pale, cold, phlegmatic countenance of the king and his brothers Carlos and Ferdinand: men with pale, lan- guishing faces, long Hapsburg chins and protruding underlips, and tired, expressionless faces; men who were old when they were born. We gaze upon Balthasar, the heir apparent, at whose birth his majesty was “so pleased and contented that he opened all the doors and admitted every one: so that even the ordinary chair- carriers and kitchen-boys congratulated his majesty
XTbe Brt of Spain
518
in his innermost chambers, and begged leave to kiss his hand, which was most graciously granted them/’ There follow the portraits of the minister Olivares, a few master huntsmen, and the sinister procession of fools One is dressed as a Turkish madman, another has been dubbed Don Juan of Austria, after the king’s great uncle; a third stands upon the stage declaiming one of his farces. Of the dwarfs, one with a mighty dog at his side is dressed as a Flemish nobleman ; another with a mighty folio is occupied with gene- alogical studies; a third has an expressionless grin; yet another with a mighty deformed head stares with empty eyes. His women are as little beautiful as the men are interesting. Isabella of Bourbon and Mariana of Austria, as well as the princesses Maria Theresa and Margarita in their monstrous costumes, resemble Chinese pagodas rather than living beings. They possess neither coquetry nor charm, neither archness nor a friendly smile. Everything is sacrificed to icy pride and implacable ceremony. He who glances back into the past and remembers the beautiful, heavenly women who look down from the pictures of- the Venetians, feels himself transferred in the presence of the works of Velasquez into a world of uncanny phantoms.
How is it, then, that notwithstanding this one turns the leaves of the book of Velasquez’s portraits with awe, that in comparison with him Rubens seems a plebeian, van Dyck a parvenu and a dandy ?
VELASQUEZ
PRINCE BALTHAZAR CARLOS IN HUNTING COSTUME
Prado, Madrid
l?ela0Que3
519
Much of this imposing impression is due to the fact
that Velasquez presents to us a world so closely cir-
cumscribed. With other portrait painters the im-
pressions change. Here we linger in a scholar's study,
there in a ballroom: here upon the battle-field, there
in the boudoir. With Velasquez one has the feeling
of standing in a great, lonely, royal palace, whose
panelled floor plebeians may only tread in felt shoes;
a royal palace where old servants in gold-embroidered
liveries pace silently over soft carpets.
The pathological elements of his subjects also give their portraits a strange charm. The Bourbons and the Stuarts who appear in the portraits of Rigaud and van Dyck are still full-blooded, healthy, and powerful. Whenever the court physician discovered that the royal blood was growing thin, he prescribed marriage with a healthy daughter of a foreign royal family, who furnished new life-blood to the race. The Spanish Hapsburgs, who had become exhausted by centuries of endogamy, are refined and nervous, pale and thin : of that fragile delicacy which occurs in the last scions of ancient families with whom the race dies out. There is something fascinating in the union of the two ele- ments of which these characters are composed: illness and chivalry, decline and enforced will-power, weary indifference and the habit of tension. They are all weary, and yet have no time to be weary. All would like to be seated but the kingly profession allows of no relaxation. Velasquez alone had the opportunity
520
Ube Hrt of Spain
of painting children with such silken ash-grey hair
and such big bluish eyes, who while they gaze at us
say that the next year will be their last. Just because
his heroes are such pale, enervated, bloodless people,
his portraits had such an over-refined, aristocratic effect
in an age that was still powerful.
Furthermore, it might be pointed out that the por- traits of Velasquez served a different purpose from the representative pictures of the seventeenth century. Even Louis XIV. was in a certain sense a democratic king, who could be condescending — not with the people indeed, but with the “noblest of the nation.” He considered it necessary to impress them by his splen- dour, led an open life, and showed himself affable; for he even feared for his kingdom “held by the grace of God.” The pillars of the Spanish monarchy were not yet shaken by such fears. If Philip IV. had heard of any discontent among his people, he would have been quite as astonished as the good Emperor Francis; who, in 1848, when his adjutant announced that it was time to flee because the people were storming the royal palace, gave the surprised answer: “Well, are they allowed to do that ? ” For the Spanish Hapsburgs there existed neither people nor aristocracy. They are still princes to whom ministers deliver messages on bended knees; princes who invisibly hover over the people. True, the Spanish court was the most costly in Europe; the liveries of the servants cost 130,000 ducats a year. But these expenses were not made for
Delasques
521
purposes of display; they were things which a king
might allow himself as a matter of course. The long
passages of the Alcazar in which he lived, enabled him
to move unseen among the most distant parts of the
palace. When at rare intervals he set foot upon the
plebeian soil of the outer world, he avoided the shouting
rabble and took pains that no one should see him;
sometimes, perhaps, leaving behind his monogram
painted in large letters, lo el rey, in order that the
people might know that the king, like God, was omni-
present. “The Spanish court,’’ says a contemporary
author, “is no court like the French and English, but
a private m.ansion in which a secluded life is led.”
The portraits of Velasquez, therefore, were not intended to be seen by profane eyes and had no patriotic missions to fulfil, nor was it their duty to remind the nobility that kingly power hovered over them. They were family portraits which hung upon the walls of the Alcazar and in the dining halls of the distant hunting-lodges or were sent as presents to relatives in Vienna. Everything which in other lands characterised the courtly style of portraiture was therefore not suit- able in Spain. While elsewhere the crown and different accessories had to be displayed upon the table in order to show that the subject was really a king, with the Hapsburgs no such insignia were necessary. Every one who saw the picture knew: this is my brother Philip, that my uncle Eerdinand, this my cousin Mariana. In other countries princes show themselves affable or
522
Zbc Hrt of Spain
gracious, or they sit in imposing positions; they move
their arms demonstratively, and if they are on horse-
back assume the air of a general reviewing his army.
The Hapsburgs need no such display; for they are quite
among themselves. They do not need to indicate by
a pillar or a curtain that they live in palaces, nor to
display their white hands or their costly toilettes.
For all these things are understood among them as a
matter of course, and the stage effects used to overawe
the people serve no purpose among relatives. They
have themselves painted in the situations which signify
the great moments of their existence: when they grant
an audience (God knows what self-control this re-
quires! ), when they are in their household or upon the
hunt. A portrait by Velasquez was for them what a
photograph is for us.
One might then aver that the distinction of Vel- asquez’s portraits is not a merit of the master, but rather due to the surroundings. But how little this is true is shown by a comparison with the portraits which Rubens painted of the same- persons during his stay at Madrid: Philip IV., Isabella, and Ferdinand. Before these portraits of the Munich Pinakothek one seems in the presence of another race. Philip, with Velasquez pale and tired, the withered branch of an ancient sapless tree, is with Rubens a fresh and corpulent gentleman. Isabella, cold and solemn in the portrait of the Span- iard, appears as a lovable, happy lady. The Cardinal- Infant Ferdinand, there a pale reserved young man
VELASQUEZ
PORTRAIT OF INNOCENT X.
Doria Gallery, Rome
Delasquea
523
with weary, feverish eyes, has Decome a robust and
joyous prelate. If van Dyck had painted them they
would not have been so distressingly healthy, but
all the more vain and dandified. Philip would have
coquetted with his blue-veined hand and assumed the
pose of an Adonis; Isabella would have shown that her
silken robe was very valuable, and that her handker-
chief was genuine Brussels lace; Don Ferdinand, the
cardinal, would have looked from the picture with a
warm and sentimental glance, as if to charm beautiful
women. Something soft and dandified, an obtrusive
distinction, would have found its way into the portraits.
Both Rubens and van Dyck would have brought for- eign traits into this highly aristocratic world; Velasquez could see it thus distinguished because he himself belonged to it. Not only did he live in the midst of the most ancient nobility of Europe, in the royal palace itself, loaded with all the titles of a courtier; but he was himself descended from an ancient and noble family. So great was his pride in an ancient family tree that he laid aside his father’s name Silva, although it belonged to the most distinguished of the realm, and assumed his mother’s because this was the name of a still more ancient race.^ So much did he feel
1 The author rather overestimates the ancient character of the artist’s lineage. His full name was Diego Rodriguez de Silva y Velasquez. His father, Juan de Silva, was a Portuguese, who came to Seville from Oporto : his mother, Geronima Velasquez, was a native of Seville. Both were of the inferior nobility (hidalgos), and neither family used the title Don. It was a common custom in Andalusia to assume the ma-
524
XTbe Brt of Spain
himself an ancient Spanish cavalier and so conscious
was he of his dignity as master of his majesty’s
household, that it offended him to be regarded as
a painter. Nothing that could remind one of his pro-
fession can be seen in the portrait of himself in the
Uffizi; neither the palette nor even the eye of a painter.
Cold and proud, distinguished and solemn as a Spanish
grandee, he looks down upon the beholders. From this
endeavour of Velasquez to appear as a courtier rather
than a painter the individuality of his style can best
be explained. He is separated from the professional
painters by a similar barrier to that which divided
Goethe, the dignified minister of state, from poor
literati.
According to the usual conception, the activity of artists consists in transfiguring actuality into beauty. They impress upon their models to show themselves from the most affable and winning side; pose them so that pleasing lines will result, determine the costume and seek by pictorial attitudes to enliven the portraits. As painters they also love beauty of colour. Rubens, the powerful sanguinist, even in his portraits declaims fortissimo in noisy colours with blending reverberating tones. Rembrandt, the master of light and shade, moves in dim mysterious harmonies and has in his Night Watch woven about a simple portrait group the charm of German fable. Others consider themselves
ternal in addition to the paternal name. Compare Justi, ydasque^
and his Times (London, 1889), pp. 59 sg. — Ed.
lDela6que3
525
virtuosi of the brush. Hals especially, a true son of his
warlike century, seems to stand before the easel with
the consciousness of wielding a hussar's sword instead
of the brush.
None of these. things exist for Velasquez. Of him is true what Nietzsche wrote about Voltaire : Wherever there was a court he laid down the law of court speech and with it the law of style for all writers. The courtly language, however, is the language of the courtier who has no profession, and who even in scientific conversa- tions avoids all handy, technical expressions because they smack of a profession. Technical expressions and anything that betrays a specialist are in countries of courtly culture considered a blemish of style." Velasquez considered everything that could betray the specialist of the palette a blemish of style.
For all extravagances of colour he had an instinctive distaste. He used neither blending colours like Rubens nor chiaroscuro effects like Rembrandt, nor did he even know of an interesting treatment of light; but painted only the cool, silver tone of simple daylight. So great was his moderation in colour that in the days of asphalt painting it was said of him that he did not un- derstand the essence of colour; since all of his pictures were monochrome. As with colour so he also avoids conspicuous brush work. No sketch or clever im- provisation by him exists. If with Hals the strokes of the brush have the effect of sabre-cuts, in Velasquez one observes nothing technical. The effect is obtained without betraying the means. As Mengs wrote:
- “With nothing but the will alone Velasquez was wont to paint his pictures.”
Nor does he otherwise recognise artistic considera- tions. In the Surrender of Breda he feels like an officer, and nothing can induce him for artistic considerations to deviate from military rule. He is a master huntsman in his pictures of hunts, and therefore gives no free im- provisation like Rubens, but severe historical repre- sentation of the hunting achievements of Philip IV. In his equestrian portraits he feels himself the master of the royal stables and therefore never asks whether an attitude is artistic or beautiful. Everything must be correct and bear the criticism of the most exacting sportsman; the position of the rider blameless and the gait of the horses such as would not offend the royal riding school. Likewise in his pictures of royal audiences he is the master of ceremonies and not a painter. No ideal of beauty, but the rule of Spanish etiquette, governs his creations. He who more than any other would have had the opportunity to invent a costume which would admit of freedom and pictorial rhythm, not only confines himself strictly to the con- ventional, but treats the toilette with the professional knowledge of a superintendent of the royal, civil, and military wardrobe. Even less would he, for love of a beautiful line, have deviated from the regulations of the court marshal’s office. However unnatural all these regulations were, his aim is only to paint this unnatural with the greatest conceivable accuracy. Every offence against the regulations of court ceremony would have seemed to him ordinary and in bad taste.
From this severe conformity to court etiquette the aristocratic effect of his paintings results. The beauti- ful gestures, the artistically draped curtains which can be seen in other court portraits were considered as cheap, plebeian beauty. A genuine artistic beauty pervades the works of Velasquez. Just because he did not inject artistic notions into this ancient and noble world, his pictures reflect so overpoweringly the essence of ancient Spanish royalty. They seem works which no individual but the spirit of royalism has created.
III .— Murillo
When Velasquez died in 1660 his funeral was celebrated like that of a grandee. The entire court, the knights of all orders took part in the ceremonies. With him was buried the art of Madrid.
After the death of the master, his son-in-law Battista del Mazo, who had often made copies of his portraits, continued his activity in Madrid. Besides his copies of Velasquez, he is known by a panorama of Saragossa, the only landscape painted during this period in Spain. The court painter who became the heir of Velasquez’s offices and titles was Juan Carreho de Miranda — no very happy lot, for his task was to paint the death struggle, the last convulsions of the Spanish Hapsburg. Mariana of Austria, the regent, who in Velasquez’s
528
XTbe Brt of Spain
first pictures still preserved a touch of Viennese smart--
nesS; has now become a bigoted old woman. She holds
a breviary bound in black; all splendour in dress is
relinquished, her jewelry laid aside, and her hair buried
under the black widow’s veil. Then Charles 11. be-
came the subject for Carreho as Philip IV. had been for
Velasquez. The same pale cheeks, the same receding
lower jaw, the same soft blond hair which Velasquez
had so often painted, he also rendered. But the blue
melancholy eyes are no longer the same: they stare
without expression, stupid and empty as those of
Nino de Vallecas, the hydrocephalic dwarf who con-
cludes the series of Velasquez’s pictures of idiots. The
family tragedy of the Hapsburgs is now at an end.
At this time great masters lived only at Seville, where Spanish religious painting found its final expression. If in any case, it is to be deplored in that of Alonso Cano that the history of Spanish art is still so little known. He must have been an interesting personality, this young man with sparkling eyes, impetuous demeanour, and the manners of a cavalier, whose sword was always ready to spring from the scabbard. To- gether with Melzi, Savoldo, and Boltraffio, he belongs to that group which may be called the “aristocrats of art history.” The circumstance that he was a native of Granada, the southernmost city of Spain, enables us to understand more fully the mixture of brio and proud chivalry which speaks so charmingly from his works. Before them one thinks of cavaliers fighting duels, of
/IDudllo
529
challengers and seconds, of rapiers, florets, and swords.
The lady over whom they are fighting is called Mary,
Theresa, or Agnes; for in his hands Spanish religious
painting was transformed into knightly love-service.
Every visitor of the Berlin Gallery remembers the
wonderful painting of St. Agnes, the patroness of
chastity, the bride of God, staring with her great brown
Andalusian eyes into the infinite. Every visitor to the
Munich Pinakothek recalls the Vision of Si. Anthony —
Mary, proud as a Venus Victrix and tender as a Tanagra
figurine, looking down upon the pale friar who, holding
the Christ-child in his arms, looks up to her in soulful
ecstacy. This is no religious painting, but such a love-
song as the knightly singers of the middle ages daily
offered to their gentle ladies. How daintily sits the
crown upon the small austere head of the Madonna;
with what exquisite taste he has arranged the veil, the
chaplet of pearls, the palm and lilies' Or he depicts
Mary with a child upon her lap, dreaming in a nocturnal
landscape; she has no halo, but the stars of heaven are
grouped into a glittering wreath behind her. Or he
paints the Entombment, but not with our Lord’s earthly
friends gathered, as in former paintings, about the
sepulchre; angels with radiant wings hover down to
support the pale body.
For Spanish naturalism Juan Parejas’s picture in the Madrid Museum representing the Calling of St. Matthew is especially characteristic. Uhde and Jean Beraud have gone no further in the union of modern with
530
ZTbe Hit of Spain
biblical life. As the cinquecenio had banished all
portrait-figures from religious paintings so the age of
the Counter-reformation depicts the spiritual directly
projected into the material world. Parejas paints
merely the office of a tax collector where Spanish
gentlemen in the costume of the seventeenth century
are seated, and into this room enters a strange gen-
tleman in simple costume — Christ. Claudio Coello’s
picture of St. Louis shows how the seventeenth century,
with complete disregard of the sixteenth, reaches
back to the pious painting of the quattrocento. In the
foreground stands a prince in the knightly costume
of the period, and behind him is the Holy Family, with
jubilant angels in the air. That Matteo Cerezo in his
principal work did not represent the Last Supper but
the Disciples at Emmaus is likewise significant for
the changed views. The representation of a historical
event is less congenial to the mystic tendencies of the
time than the theme of Christ appearing as a spirit
among the disciples. In another work, which bears a
remarkable resemblance to a picture by the great
idealist of our own day (Watts’s Love and Life), he
represents the guardian angel leading a child through
life, that is to say, a new version of the legend of Tobias,
so popular in the age of Savonarola.
Murillo drew all these threads together into his hand and entered upon the heritage of Spanish artistic achievement. The earliest examples of his work consisted in life-size folk subjects, such as had since
/IDurillo
531
Ribera’s day occupied Spanish painters. Indeed, in
Germany, one thinks especially of the beggar-boys of
the Munich Pinakothek when Murillo’s name is men-
tioned. Here a couple of lads cower on the street corner
throwing dice, there little girl-venders of fruit count ■
their gains, or brown urchins eat their meal of melons
and bread crust in dirty corners. Like Ribera, Murillo
is in such pictures an incomparable painter of still-life.
The velvety surface of the peach, the blue skin of the
grape, the rind of the melon, the yellow peel of the
orange, ripe fruit showing juicy cracks, the earthen
jugs and woven baskets are painted with fidelity to
the substance and a nobility of colour, such as among
later still-life painters only Chardin possessed. One
of these folk pieces. Las Gallegas, even betrays the
fact that there were courtesans in severe, ecclesiastical
Spain.
His paintings of the youthful history of Christ and Mary are also rendered in the manner of such folk subjects. In his Adoration of the Shepherds he paints, like Ribera, poor, sunburned people assembling curi- ously about the cradle, and adds an entire still-life of pots, straw bundles, and animals. If the Holy Family is represented, he leads us into the simple workshop of a carpenter, where Mary sits winding yarn, and Joseph, reposing from his labour, gazes at the child playing with a bird or a little dog. In the picture of the Education of Mary Elizabeth wears the costume of the seventeenth century, and Mary looks like a princess by Velasquez.
532
Xlbe Brt of Spain
A whole cycle of such subjects was united in the
hospital of Seville. As Raphael had painted in the
Vatican the philosophy of the Renaissance, so Murillo
depicted the ethics of the Counter-reformation: the
works of Christian neighbourly love and the blessings
of almsgiving. The feeding of the hungry is interpreted
by means of the biblical miracle of the loaves and
fishes; the supplying of drink to the thirsty by Moses
striking the rock in the wilderness; the healing of the
sick by the history of the man with the palsy at the
pool of Bethesda; the office of the good Samaritan by
St. John of God carrying a poor man who has fallen
in the street to a hospital; hospitality by the story of
the Prodigal Son. St, Thomas of Villanueva Giving
Alms, and the Munich picture, St. John of God Healing a
Lame Man, are further examples of this philanthropic
naturalism.
In other works the earthly and spiritual are har- moniously united. Much in the Birth of the Virgin — the bed with mother, physician, the nurse, and visiting relatives — might have been painted by a realist like Ghirlandajo. But among the maids preparing the bath for the new-born child, the angels of heaven are busily commingled. In the Annunciation one seems to look through the attic window of a seamstress: a basket of laundry stands before Mary, but above the heaven is opened, and God, surrounded by circles of angels, gazes down.
The changes in the types of religious presentation
/IDurillo
533
during this period are especially conspicuous in this
painting. During the Renaissance Mary was the
glorious queen; here she is a simple Andalusian maiden,
and, be it noted, she is younger than in pictures of an
earlier epoch. By presenting her as a child, shame-
faced and timid as a nun, they emphasised all the more
the doctrine of the miraculous birth of her Son. She
must appear not as a mother, but as the divine being^
the youthful mother of God. With this dogmatic con-
ception which does not like to dwell upon the earthly
relation of mother and child is also connected the
circumstance that, as never happened at an earlier
period, Joseph takes the place of Mary. He holds a
lily upon his arm as a sign of his innocence, and the
Christ-child with the gesture of Noli me tangere stands
upon his lap. Even in the pictures of Mary the two
figures are seldom placed in relationship to each other.
They gaze solemnly upon us out of great deep eyes. If
the Renaissance had changed the Madonna into a
family idyl, the Counter-reformation reverted to the
mediaeval mosaics. Only from the dark presentient
eyes fixed upon the beholder should the sentiment of
the picture be developed.
Even when Christ appears alone. He is almost always a child. He wanders thoughtfully through lonely deserts; rests with a lamb by His side upon the pagan ruins; as .the Good Shepherd, staff in hand, leads His lambs through a gloomy wood; meets the child John in the forest. He may not appear as a man who from
534
XTbe Hrt of Spain
His own power became a prophet; for the mystery is all
the greater if through a child who cannot think, the
Holy Ghost reveals Himself.
There follow the many works with Which he treads his most proper domain, that of miraculous apparitions, forebodings, and dreams. St. Francis was praying before the crucifix, when the arm of Jesus loosened itself from the cross and rested upon the shoulder of the mystic. A childless couple wished to make some pious foundation, but they knew not how or where. At night JMary in a pure white garment appeared to them, and told them it must be upon the snow- covered surface of the Esquiline. In the next picture they kneel before the pope and recount the vision, and to the right a procession marches to the new house of God.^ His Angels’ Kitchen of the Louvre is dedicated to San Diego, an Andalusian mendicant friar, who was such a pious man and longed so for heaven that during prayer he arose in the air. This occurred upon a day when the monastery, of which Diego was the chief coox, received distinguished visitors. When a brother and two cavaliers appeared in the door to look for the dinner, they saw him suspended in mid-air, while the angels of heaven, in the role of benevolent brownies, are doing the pious brother’s work.
But not only the angels help the good man; even Mary descends to her worshippers. As in the days of
^ This cycle is in the Academy of San Fernando, Madrid.
/IDurillo
535
Savonarola, she appeared especially to St. Bernard,
and if she did not come herself she sent the Christ-child.
To old St. Felix soliciting alms, it appeared from
heaven and nestled for a kiss upon his arm. Even
more fondly than to this weather-beaten grey medi-
cant it came to the young and refined St. Anthony, in
whose cell the whisper of angel voices was often heard,
and who when asked about it, answered: '‘The little
Christ-child is visiting.” Murillo treated the story in
four paintings: first Anthony, absorbed in prayer,
does not even observe the Christ-child, who is sitting
upon his book; then he glances up, and, trembling
with eagerness, embraces the warm, rosy little body.
The Immaculate Conceptions form the conclusion of Murillo’s works. All painters of Seville had celebrated the great Christian mystery, but none more frequently than Murillo. Not upon clouds, as in the Italian examples, was Mary borne to heaven; but she is sus- pended serenely in the ether, which is filled with gleaming, golden, fructifying particles of the sunlight. Her eyes are not full of inspiration and longing as in Italian paintings; but glance astonished as those of a child gazing upon the splendour of the candles of a Christmas-tree.
In artistic qualities all of these works vary exceed- ingly, and the enthusiasm for Murillo is, at all events, no longer as great as formerly. At the beginning of the nineteenth century, when through the Napoleonic wars a part of his best paintings was taken from Spain
536
Ube Hrt of Spain
the name of Murillo signified everything: devotion,
beauty, love, and ecstacy. He was the first Spaniard
whom Europe learned to know, and his appearance was
therefore the discovery of a new world. When later
his predecessors became known, he lost much of his
celebrity. His art seems in many respects a softening
and an enervation of ancient Spanish virility; like a
translation of Spanish idiom into a universal language.
He possesses neither the chivalry of Cano, the power of
Zurbaran, nor the wild force of Ribera; but a certain
mediocrity, a soft, insinuating sweetness which renders
him universally comprehensible; and he stands in the
same relation to his predecessors as in Italian art
Raphael to Michelangelo and Leonardo.
This gentle affability may be partly explained by the fact that Murillo belongs to a younger' generation. The works of his predecessors are full of the ardour of battle; they live in the subjects which they depict. With glowing passion they proclaim the doctrines of Christianity, battle in feverish excitement against paganism in the church, and depict martyrdoms and visions amidst darkness and flashes of lightning. Murillo represents the consummation of the age. The wild bubbling source has become a quiet stream. What had excited the others was for him only a subject for elegant pictures. He is never crude, abrupt, harsh, or puritanic, but interesting, pleasing, and charming. The quality which the French called chic has conquered religious painting, and transformed the saints who in
MURILLO
THE IMMACULATE CONCEPTION
Louvre
/IDurillo
537
the beginning were so threatening into dainty toy-
figures. His soft and dreamy painting resembles a
beautiful summer evening after the thunder-storm has
passed, and the quiet sun on the horizon envelopes the
earth in its rosy light.
On the other hand, the effect of his painting is less abrupt, less Spanish than that of his predecessors, because the world for which he laboured was not bounded by such narrow walls. Velasquez was the painter of the court, Zurbaran the painter of monks ; the former’s world was the Alcazar, the latter’s the mon- astery. Murillo, on the other hand, laboured for the cultured circles of a large city. His pictures in the Hospital of Seville might be termed charity concerts, in which he reminds the well-to-do of those who suffer and are troubled. He depicts the return of the prodigal son as though it were an event in middle-class society. This consideration for the taste of the bourgeoisie, which wishes to see nothing that would cause unpleasant sensations, never left him. If Zurbaran and Ribera in their crude veracity resemble Flaubert and Zola, Murillo in his good breeding is like Ohnet or Marlitt. It is true that in one of his hospital pictures sick people move about upon crutches; a boy is having the sores of his head washed, and a man lays bare his knee, revealing caries of the shinbone. But these gloomy events are only represented in order that the beauty and the goodness of the dainty Samaritans may shine the more brightly. To the most beautiful maidens of
538
XTbe Brt ot Sp^in
Seville, those brown, dark-eyed children described by
Merimee in Carmen, he assigns the role of the Madonna ;
and even his beggar boys do not resemble the rude,
dirty rabble of Ribera. He cuts and polishes their
nails, makes them so presentable that even one who
would avoid contact with the actual objects loves to
gaze upon them when painted. This is the explanation
why these pictures were considered masterpieces at a
time when such subjects were otherwise tabooed, and
why it was through Murillo that at the beginning of the
nineteenth century the taste for Spanish paintings
became so widespread. All others were too harsh, too
aristocratic, too reserved. Murillo,* the painter of the
old Spanish bourgeoisie, spoke the language most
comprehensible to the nineteenth century, and won the
heart by the same qualities which once made Palma
Vecchio, and later Angelica Kaufmann, Friederich Au-
gust Kaulbach, and Nathaniel Sichel the favourites of
their day.
After him there came only Jose Antolinez, a soft, rather insipid and coquettish painter, whose favourite subjects were blond Magdalens and Blessed Virgins in glory. With the younger Herrera Spanish religion became a purely theatrical sentiment. A child of the world, he dallied with the figures of religion as much in the manner of an operetta as Filippino Lippi had done in Italy. Everything is dissolved in the perfume of roses and violets. The last Spaniard, Don Juan de Valdes Leal, the daemonic and gloomy master, is hardly
/IDurtllo
539
to be counted in this time. His weird and gloomy pic-
ture depicting the coffins and decayed corpses, over
which a hand from the clouds holds a scale, already
announces the blood-curdling etchings created in the
following century by Goya.
Chapter III.— The Sensual Art of Flanders
I.— Rubens
From Spain the way leads to Flanders ; for Fland- ers was in the seventeenth century a province of Spain. In this country the religious wars had raged with especial force. The year of the iconoclasts, 1566, was the acme of Protestant power. Singing psalms the Puritans marched through the streets, pressed into cathedrals and monasteries, burning and destroying every work of art they found. In three days four hundred churches and chapels were de- vastated, and the streets were covered with broken pictures of the Virgin, the venerable products of Flemish art. Then the reaction came. The con- servative separated from the “storm and stress’" elements; Alba appeared in Brussels and the land fell into his iron hand.
Flanders became the citadel of Jesuitism in the North, and the air of the Spanish court pervaded the land. Archduke Albert and his consort Isabella, the daughter of Philip IT, who ruled the land as a fief of the Spanish crown, erected churches and monasteries everywhere.
Like black swarms of grasshoppers, bands of foreign priests descended upon the land.
One would therefore expect to find in Flanders an art similar to the Spanish; an art uniting gloomy fanaticism with the hot breath of ecstatic fervour. Yet the contrary is true. The churches have not the same gloomy effect, the mystic twilight that pervades the Spanish, but rather that of gigantic festal halls, where sumptuous magnificence and gold gleaming splendour greets the eye. In the midst of this festal magnificence hang pictures just as sumptuous and loudly reverberating. In Spain the colours are gloomy brown, here flashing red and jubilant; there asceticism and ecstatic fervour, here sensual elation; there world- forsaking mysticism, here exuberant vitality and power; there mortification of the flesh, here a full- blooded, over-healthful epicureanism.
It seems almost incredible after the puritanism with which the Counter-reformation began. Then artists had been forbidden to represent the nude, in order that they should not ‘"offend God and give men a bad example"; even the sexless nudity of Michelangelo’s Last Judgment seemed so offensive that the figures had to be clothed. The Flemish pictures are alive with naked human bodies, and these bodies are fat and soft. The art of the Counter-reformation, v/hich began with the prohibition of the nude, ended with the apotheosis of the flesh. In the beginning antique statues were removed from public places, or if clothed were transformed by change of attributes into Christian saints The artists fearfully avoided the domain of the antique. The Flemish painters dealt almost more with the gods and goddesses of Olympus than with the saints of the church, and used antiquity as well as Christianity to sing the joyful praise bf the flesh. Nor does the church call them before the tribunal of the Inquisition as it had called Paolo Veronese, but laughingly gives her blessing. The Catholicism of the Counter-reformation, in the beginning so incomprehensively rigid, became in Flanders a joyful religion, serving not only for the spiritual but also for the fleshly needs of her children.
The explanation of this strange phenomenon is to be found in the fact that the spirit of the Counter-reforma- tion in Flanders had to reckon with the sensual temper- ament of a crude, pleasure-loving people. But in the first instance the difference in time must be considered. The development of art from 1 560 to 1650 illustrates the history of a Counter-reformation. When the reform began the church was in danger; now her dominion has been restored, more splendid than ever before, and the church militant has become the church triumphant. The subjugation of Flanders, in particular, was an astonishing result of carefully planned Jesuitic activity. This triumph of Catholicism is reflected in the works of the Baroque period. In Caravaggio’s and Ribera’s time the pictures were solemn, gloomy, and defiant; now they are festal and joyful and representative of the age With clanging music Jesuitism marched, proclaiming its victory through the valleys of Flanders. It did not fear art, which had rendered important services in the labour of conversion. More quickly than the sword could have done, it won men by contrasting with the puritanic zeal of the iconoclasts the attractive pomp of Catholic pageantry. Humanism also, whose excesses had once given the impetus to the great movement, was no longer dangerous, and the church only gained by again posing as the protector of learning. Thus the Counter-reformation, although it had in the beginning assumed a hostile attitude towards the Renaissance, now entered upon the entire heritage of the Hellenic spirit of the Renaissance.
The painter to whom this great heritage was trans- mitted is named Rubens. He was, generally speak- ing, what Ghirlandajo had been in the fifteenth century and Raphael in the sixteenth. He belongs neither to the inquiring minds who attempt the solution of new problems nor to those whose works are confessions of the soul. In Veronese the Renaissance and in Murillo the Counter-reformation passed away; it was Rubens’s achievement to reconcile the two previously separated worlds, the Counter-reformation and the Renaissance.
The art of the Counter-reformation in its hostility to sensuality had reached that psychic domain where the unnatural begins. The sensuousness of St. Anthony embracing the Christ-child is perverse, as is also that of the monk adoring the Immaculate Mary. After this condition of hysterical over-excitement, Rubens led art back to a healthy Hellenic sensualism. His whole activity is like a great reaction against the spiritual tendencies of the Spanish school. The Counter-reform- ation had transformed sensual to spiritual: Rubens tears the mask of Tartuffe from its countenance and leads back sensuality to its proper domain. It is no accident that he is so fond of painting the passion of animals; lions, tigers and leopards, bears and wolves; for he himself has something of the character of a beautiful, powerful animal, and he stands among other painters like a stallion among horses. He appears in an age of heated fpjitasy like a centaur, like one of those beings in whom the human head is united with the horse’s body, typifying the strength, wildness, and sensual desire of the animals. Instead of self-denial he paints passion, instead of psychic ecstacy over- flowing physical power. The excited visions of the pietists he confronts with healthy animal desire, the spiritual erotics of Theresa with the passion of primeval man. In a country where religion had caused the most blood to flow a painter extolled the eternal procreative powers of nature. His appearance in the history of painting signifies a similar moment to what art had experienced a hundred years earlier, when the asceticism of the epoch of Savonarola was followed by the triumph of sensuality. But the works of those days seem tame and modest in comparison to the orgy which now began. It was just this fruitless psychic exaltation into which the new Catholicism had fallen that excited sensuality to the fever pitch. Therefore it now seemed as if the dykes had burst. Like the irresistible flood was the onward rush of sensuality, overflowing and tearing down everything before it.
His Kirmess of the Louvre and those social subjects which he called conversations a la mode form the intro- duction to his work. In the Kirmess men and women join in a wild orgy not before a tavern door, but upon a wide open field. In the reckless dance one fellow has thrown his arm about the body of a woman; another, shouting, lifts his partner into the air; a third seizes his closely, pressing her at the same time with arms, legs, breast, and lips; yet another has thrown his to the ground. In more distinguished circles there is greater propriety, but the theme is likewise love. Before a fountain in the form of a female statue from whose full breasts thick streams of water spout, ladies and gentlemen are seated. Here a couple assume the position for a dance; there young men play the lute; there again beautiful women, with cupids hovering over, approach. The santa conversazione of the Renais- sance has been transformed into the conversation d la mode. These two pictures reveal all the qualities of Rubens. As the Flemish people are, so they wish their saints to be. Although Rubens’s activity included all branches of painting — religious, mythological, landscape, portrait, and animal — it is all held together by one bond: the warm-blooded, fiery sensuality pulsating through all. After men had for so long been consumed by hysteric longing, the necessity of holding warm and living flesh in their arms was so great that, with all the ostensible difference of the pictures, the theme is at bottom always the same: the apotheosis of the flesh.
The beholder must therefore not expect to find very edifying qualities in Rubens’s religious pictures. All the delicate, fine shades of sentiment which the old masters expressed are strange to him. He has a feeling only for the crude, massive, and sensually powerful. 1 n- stead of genuine feeling and soul, one finds in Rubens’s pictures only aesthetic poses and fat human flesh. All his holy women are so mighty in flesh and have such corpulent bodies that one has little belief in their sanctity. All of his male saints are colossal fellows who are impressive more by reason of athletic, mus- cular power than psychic greatness. The spirit of Christianity is so transformed into its opposite that even the old doctrine of the mortification of the flesh is ex- pressed by means of figures of the greatest imaginable corpulency.
From the Old Testament he selects scenes like Susanna s Bath or the Captivity oj Samson, which give opportunity for the introduction of voluptuous female bodies or of pleasing his stormy sentiment by battle and slaughter. Mary, the spotless maiden of Spanish art, here resembles rather the Aphrodite Pandemos. A thick garland of fruit which fat-cheeked sturdy angels wind about the picture heightens the succulent, sensual effect. If instead of Mary other saints (Mag- dalen, Cecilia, or Catherine) are painted, the change of name necessitates no change of character. It is always the same voluptuous woman of Brabant, with the decollete clinging silk dress. As he loves the Adoration of the Kings only because it gives opportunity to display pomp and splendour and to let the sun’s rays glitter upon damask robes, so in the Slaughter of the Innocents. where the sentiment is one of suffering and gloomy despair, he preserves the same sensual qualities. The Crucifixion of Christ gives the opportunity of painting noble, manly bodies of the highest muscular develop- ment; the risen Lazarus is a robust athlete, whom the sojourn in the grave had not injured, and his sisters also use the opportunity to display their mighty forms. As in this case there is nothing of the mysteries of death, so the repentant sinners bending before the Redeemer show neither regret nor repentance. Christ is a beautiful man with noble gestures, and Magdalen a voluptuous sinner, whose contrition is not very deep. Even the Last Judgment, in which the old masters were wont to express the whole faith of their childish souls, is for Rubens only a cascade of human bodies affording him the opportunity to juggle with the nude and scatter them through the air like a giant emptying a tub of colossal fishes.
The antique is not necessarily the domain of the senses. When one hundred years earlier Mantegna painted his antique pictures, he sought with scientific severity to restore the image of the Roman world, its architectural forms and costumes, its implements and customs. In contrast to this intellectual classicism contemporary Romanticists sought antiquity with the spirit. For Piero di Cosimo, Greece was a vanished, enchanted kingdom, the land of witchcraft and fable; but Botticelli, the disciple of Savonarola, remained even in his antique pictures a Christian painter. Not the stupefying perfume of the roses of Aphrodite but the sentiment of the cloister is wafted from his pictures. One could think of his Venus sitting, like silent Mary, upon a festal throne crowned with cold white flowers. Then follow the pictures of Correggio and Sodoma, who endowed the figures of the antique world with the quivering, erotic sentiment of the age of Leonardo; and further those works of the High Renaissance which imbued the antique with majestic nobility. Before Titian’s pictures one has the feeling of tarrying in Hellenic thermce, where in classic restfulness noble and distinguished figures move about. A change came with Poussin, who, as a follower of Mantegna and a pre- decessor of Schinkel, sought, with all the accessories of his great scholarship, to restore the architecture and the applied arts of the ancients. Ribera and the other painters of martyrdoms discovered that among the Greeks also martyrs had been flayed and chained. With Rubens the antique is a great butcher-shop. Upon the subjects which he portrayed a book has been written, in which it is proved that in his two hundred and eighty mythological pictures nearly all the scenes are treated which occur in the works of Homer, Virgil, Ovid, Plutarch, and Livy. But this achievement of science is love’s labour lost; for Rubens only treasured the antique because he took pleasure in the strong and healthy female nudes and because it gave him the opportunity to depict exuberant power and stormy movement. After the transcendental longing and mystic ecstacy of an earlier day men wished to see flesh. He therefore knows no difference of types. Neither majestic Juno, nor slender and supple Minerva, nor chaste and severe Diana exists for him; the same fat heroines with straw-coloured hair, watery blue eyes, and mighty hips always recur. Corpulent, sturdy, and piquant is Venus, but just as fleshy is Diana, the virgi- nal goddess of the chase, as if she were more accustomed to repose upon downy cushions than, spear in hand, to follow the stag. It is characteristic of Rubens that, often as he represented Venus, the type of the goddess reposing, which was so popular during the Renaissance, never once occurs. Easy repose was no theme for Rubens, who could only conceive of a voluptuous body in motion or glowing with passion. Jupiter approaches the fair Antiope, Amazons join in battle, the Dioscuri carry off the daughters of Leucippus, centaurs gallop across the landscape in pursuit of a maiden, or satyrs assault Diana’s nymphs. These pictures of satyrs, introducing the theme, “And in glowing passion the faun held the nymph fast,” are introduced in ever new variations; and bacchanalia treating fortissimo the theme of drunkenness and passion form the acme of Rubens’s glorification of stormy sensualism. Great masses of colossal femininity are displayed; in untamed passion the distended bodies press each other; bacchic pairs in wild sensual embrace storm about. Thus the hysteria of the earlier day is followed by satyriasis.
His allegorical pictures are distinguished from the mythological only by their titles. He paints the four parts of the world sitting together united only by love, surrounded by powerful animals and the symbols of truthfulness. He models a historic theme like the Life of Maria de' Medici^ in such a manner that it is at the same time a hymn to human flesh. Although he here portrays the age in which he had himself lived, and diplomatic events in which he had taken part, he does not confine himself to the historic costumes, or even to historic subjects, but sets all Olympus in motion. In the midst of the assembly of historical personages, nude geniuses, gods, and goddesses are mingled. Water nymphs guide the ships of Queen Maria, and sturdy Lutti carry her heavy brocaded train. It might be expected that the figure of Truth who is lifted aloft by Time would be naked; but the gloomy fates spinning the thread of the queen’s life also gleam in voluptuous nudity.
His landscapes form a supplement to this tendency.
’ The author here refers to the series oi* the twenty-four decorations for the Luxembourg Palace, Paris, painted after Rubens’s designs by his pupils, and now occupying a separate room in the Louvre.
He paints neither characteristic selections from nature nor a barren landscape of delicate restrained tones. As in his historical painting he loves only flesh and corpulency, and knows only the two poles of over- flowing sensuality and raging struggle, so as a land- scapist he has painted nature only in opulent comfort or in moments of upheaval when elementary powers are let loose. In the foreground of one of his Munich pictures a cow is being milked whose fat swollen udder symbolises the sentiment pervading the earth. In another picture a rainbow appears in the heavens; the struggle of the elements is past, everything glitters with moisture, and the trees rejoice like fat children who have just had their breakfast. At Windsor, Vienna, and Florence other landscapes are preserved in which the power of the elements is let loose; a raging storm dashes over mighty tree-tops, and lightning strikes down from storm-laden clouds. The waters break their barriers, sweeping away ancient trees and mighty cattle. Sometimes he tells of all the earth’s delight when fructifying rain descends; of fat steers driven to pasture; of Flemish peasant women with ripe sheaves of grain striding over the rich soil of Brabant. Passion and fruitfulness, desire and relief — such are his themes.
In speaking of Rubens’s portraits one first thinks of Helene Fourment, the spicy blonde whom he married in 1630; for it is characteristic of this master that at the age of fifty-three he married a girl of sixteen years.
It is no less significant that it was Helene; for in her he found the genius of his art. Not many thoughts were treasured in her pretty animal head, but she was healthy, full-blooded, and overflowing with life — a real Rubens. And as he married a woman who appeared as if he himself had painted her, he painted others as if they belonged to Helene’s family. Whether aristo- crats or scholars, gentlemen or ladies, they are all of blooming, exuberant life, of overflowing, full-blooded power. Although they wear the pompous garments of the seventeenth century, they seem to live in a para- disiac condition; not “sickbed o’ er with th6 pale cast of thought,” but more bodies than souls, more animal than spiritual. Even the personages whom he painted in 1628 at the Spanish court have not the withered charm of a waning race. The weary Philip IV., cold Isabella of Bourbon, and pale Ferdinand are transformed into fresh, joyful, healthy beings. As in his historical paintings, so also in his portraits he proclaims the doctrine that physical and spiritual health are the greatest treasures bestowed upon mankind.
As our own time cannot boast of such health, Ru- bens’s works seem stranger than those of the remaining masters of the seventeenth century. We are too much accustomed to subtle and delicate charms to endure this eternal fortissimo. We are too weakly, too nervous for this crude, animal intoxication of the senses to have any further effect than to frighten us. But we can understand that after an age of oppressive, cerebral erotics such a perversely healthy sensuality must have followed. That Rubens himself regarded this activity in this spirit is proved by the motto over the door of his workshop: Mens sana in corpore sano.
II.— The Contemporaries of Rubens
Corpulent Flemish healthfulness is the charac- teristic also of other painters who were at the same time active in Flanders. Whether they paint nude women, ‘animals, or landscapes, they are all able workmen, sensual and coarse in spirit; men who in their overflowing health take intense delight in the material world.
Jacob Jordaens in particular is a genuine Flemish bear, and compared with the aristocratic Rubens a clumsy plebeian. Flis portrait of himself indicates this difference. In contrast to Rubens, who in all of his pictures wears a plush coat and golden chain, Jordaens, the descendant of a dealer in second-hand clothes, looks like a coarse-grained proletarian. The fact that he was a Calvinist gave his painting a different char- acter. It has only the Flemish heaviness and nothing of the noisy swing, the festal pompousness of the art of the Jesuits. He delights in massive shoulders, plump bodies, the brown fatty skins of satyrs, and the odour of the stable; and heaps up fishes, geese, chickens, pigs, sausages, eggs, milk, bread — fat and heavy nutriment — ■ beside the figures of his pictures. In his Adoration of the Shepherds at Antwerp, weather-browned fellows
554
Zhc Hrt of fflanbers
unwashed and uncombed, press forward towards a fat
peasant woman. A child in a yellow jacket represent-
ing Jesus holds an egg and a bird’s nest; a great dog
and a woman with a mighty milk-pot stand beside
him. Under the title of the Prodigal Son or Noah's
Ark he paints animal pieces of exuberant power. The
scene of the youthful Christ Teaching in the Temple
is laid in a tavern, where the young lad astonishes
fat burghers by his answers. The only antique picture
that he painted is a carousal : the Infant Jupiter Nourish-
ed hy the Goat Amalthea in the Antwerp Gallery. The
obese, pursy nymph, the goat with her overflowing
udders; the fat little Jupiter who, although holding the
milk bottle, still yells for nourishment; the brown satyr
and the succulent things lying upon the ground — all
are highly characteristic of Jordaens, the painter of
gluttony and love.
Usually he dispenses even with biblical and mytho- logical titles. The orgies of a kirmess are his true domain. In the Festival of the Three Kings an old man with a pouch sips from his wine-glass, a soldier embraces a fat maiden: all drink, shout, or eat. One has gone so far that his paunch will no longer hold the load, and even the cat staggers about, as if drunken, upon the floor. If instead of the above subject the proverb As the old sang so the young twitter is treated, there is little change. He only paints the joy of gluttony, how man eats, drinks, and digests; a Gargantua with an enormous appetite who
Contemporaries of IRubens 555
has seated himself in the navel of the nourishing earth.
The following artists laboured more in the pompous, swinging style of Rubens; Abraham van Diepenbeeck, Theodor van Thulden, Cornelis Schut, and Jaspar de Grayer. Diepenbeeck used the theme of the Flight of Clcelia, and Thulden the Triumph of Galatea to display female bodies from all sides. Schut and Grayer supplied the need for religious pictures: in the beginning nat- uralistic and crude, later flashy and dazzling.
As a portrait painter Gornelis de Vos developed a great activity by the side of Rubens, and his portraits are characteristic of the representative courtly spirit which under the influence of Spanish etiquette came into Flemiish family life. He painted seldom individual portraits, but almost always monumental family groups. All of these people seem to dwell in palaces. The background is a pompous columnar architecture with boldly puffed and broadly falling curtains; or else the family is seated upon a veranda, with an open prospect on the palace and garden. Vos is older than Diepen- beeck and Jordaens, as is betrayed by his severe and almost rigid manner. Instead of the picturesque breadth of the younger generation, incisive drawing is the prevailing feature of his work, which is treated in the manner of Antonis Mor and Frans Pourbus. Of his smaller portraits, the Steward of the Guild of St. Luke, in the Museum of Antwerp, and that of his little daugh- ter in the Berlin Gallery are celebrated. In the forme-
556
XTbe Hrt of fflanbers
an ancient cellarer is polishing the table furnishings
of the guild-house — an indication of the luxuriant life
led by the artists of gay Antwerp. His portraits of
children are represented eating cherries and peaches —
an indication that with Vos, as with all Flemings,
gormandising plays a prominent part.
The family groups of Gonzales Coques are distin- guished from those of Vos by their smaller size only. The impressive elegance is the same: every one wears the festal costume of the court; the walls are adorned with gobelins and pictures; columns and majestically falling curtains seem to belong to the necessary fur- nishings of every merchant’s house.
The change experienced by landscape painting under the influence of Rubens is shown by a comparison of the works which originated before and after his activity. Lucas van Valckenborch, Joos de Momper, Jan Brueghel, Hendrik van Balen, Roelant Savery, Sebas- tian Vrancx, David Vinckboons,and Alexander Keirinx, although they survive into the seventeenth century, have more in common with Patinir than with Rubens. Yet they were innovators. Patinir and Bias had not attempted to render distant views: their backgrounds did not recede, but were painted higher than the fore- ground. Accustomed to microscopic vision, they did not observe that in the distance the outlines fade and colours change. At a distance of miles the branches and leaves of their trees retain the same incisive forms and the same bright colour as objects of the foreground.
Contemporaries of IRubens
557
Important progress was made by Gillis van Coninxloo.
He was the first of Flemish landscape painters to realise
the effect of air and light upon the appearapce of things,
and sought to express the fading outlines and the soft-
ened colours in the distance. In his foregrounds every-
thing glitters in sharp brown, green, or blue; in a second
plane the foliage is not drawn leaf for leaf but tufty;
the dark green changes to a lighter bluish-green, and
the colour of the tree-trunks from brown into greenish.
Farther in the distance the colours become even
lighter and fainter. Proud of his discovery of the three
planes, Coninxloo did not tone down his colours grad-
ually but distinguished them as if brown, green, and
grey curtains divided nature into separate planes.
The same opinion was maintained by those who fol-
lowed him. Instead of their pictures becoming more
uniform, the gaudiness constantly increased. A grey
background with light blue perspective and dark grey
hills; in sharp contrast a foreground of bright green
and in the midst of this highly coloured nature little
figures in gleaming garments — such is the sole content
of their paintings. With jubilant pleasure they com-
mingled bright plants and bright costumes, gaily-
plumaged parrots and Olympian gods, ruins, cliffs, and
waterfalls, in bright bouquets of red, green, and blue.
Every picture resembles a palette upon which the most
conspicuous colours are whimsically commingled.
In this preference for beautiful, succulent, and voluptuous colours they are genuine Flemish masters,
558
Ube Hrt of jflanbers
except that the richness of detail, the clear and diminu-
tive character of their works are no longer in harmony
with the taste of a later period. “1 confess that 1,
in consequence of a natural gift, am more adapted to
paint very large pictures than small curiosities.” These
words of Rubens are characteristic for the works of the
following artists.
A single one, Jan Silberechts, would not be recognised as a Fleming. For his landscapes are neither rhythmic nor do they shimmer in moist brilliancy. In a picture at Munich he depicts a dairy-maid and a little girl sleeping by the roadside; pewter milk vessels are in front of them, and a few sheep are grazing by the road- side. The entire picture is composed of white, blue, light green, and grey. His Peasant's House at Brussels and Canal at Hanover are likewise extracts from nature with a directness and truth approaching the plein air painting of the present day. As Silberechts was one of the first landscape painters to discover that sunlight envelopes things not in a golden but in a silvery tone, he has in his modest, cool grey pictures created works of a very modern delicacy.
All the others are broad, dashing painters, who en- deavour to obtain pompous and festive effects. They mix rich colours and cover yards of canvas with trees, rivers, hills, and valleys. Rubens’s flashily gleaming and noisily dramatic style of figure painting is de- terminative for them also. Two hills on either side of a sandy road, along which two riders in red doublets ap-
Contemporaries of IRubens
559
proach; in the distance blue hills under a deep brown
sky — such is the landscape of Lodewyck de Vadder.
Jacques d’ Artois found in a park near Brussels impos-
ing, pretentious sceneries; and Lucas van Uden painted
ponds full of moss and luxuriant meadows upon which
fat cattle reposed. The two Huysmans painted Italian
landscapes in warm, glowing colours, and Jan Peeters,
the marine painter, likewise followed the programme
of Rubens by painting the sea in moments of dra-
matic disturbance.
Animal and still-life painting is represented by Frans Snyders, Jan Fyt Paul de Vos, Pieter and Adriaen van Utrecht. Like Rubens they paint animal pieces in which lions, tigers, stags, and wolves struggle in wild snorting passion. In their still-life they heap up dead game, fruit, fish, lobsters and oysters, pheasants and turkeys into mighty decorative pieces. As in the pictures of animals Flemish pleasure in action and passion is expressed, so in the representation of such succulent morsels, their love of pleasure appears. Like true epicureans they delight in the appearance of edibles, and their mouths water when in their pictures they heap up breakfast delicacies. Even the flowers which entwine the voluptuous Baroque vases of Daniel Seghers seem to smother in their overflowing fulness of life.
The entire Flemish art resembles a full-blooded body distended by powerful nourishment. All depict a creation which is healthy to the point of bursting and
560
Zbc Hrt of fflant)ers
which foams over in comfortable corpulency. Rich
garlands of flowers and gleaming fabrics, nude human
bodies and wild animals, saints, geniuses, and bac-
chantes are boldly wound into gay and sensual bou-
quets. Van Dyck, the Benjamin of the school of
Rubens, was the first to tread a different path.
III.— Van Dyck
After the Spaniards had painted the Immacu- late Conception and Rubens had celebrated sensual joy, the next stage had to be painting of the sad- ness which, according to the proverb, follows sens- ual joy. The flaming, quivering passion of Rubens was followed by the elegiac sadness of van Dyck.
Moon and sun — such is the position of the two in Flemish art; Rubens the radiant, gleaming, all fructi- fying orb; van Dyck the planet which, softly gleaming but not fructifying, pursues its quiet path. Beside the wild dramatist Rubens, he seems a singer of the world’s woe; beside the powerful, fruitful master an over-refined, weary roue. A soft touch of tender ener- vated sensuality characterises both his being and his art. If Rubens is the king, van Dyck is the knave of hearts in Flemish art.
He was descended from a family which belonged neither to the aristocracy nor to the people. His father, a dainty, spruce little gentleman, was a dealer in silks, who waited upon his distinguished customers with a very winning smile. His mother, a tender, pale
Dan
561
woman, was celebrated for her artistic embroideries
and is said, just before Antonis was born, to have
embroidered the story of Susanna and the elders.
This notice of his youthful surroundings is not unim-
portant ; for before his pictures one thinks of the dull
gleam of silken fabrics. It is easy to imagine how
fond the lad was of passing his time in the shop, with
what beaming eyes he looked up when a perfumed
lady swept in, and how daintily he blushed when an-
other nodded to him with friendly smile — and we may
be sure that they all nodded. Refined, pale, of girlish
delicacy, with blond locks and great dark eyes, with
glance now ecstatic, now melancholy — he was the type
that the ladies love. They all knew him, and he re-
ceived many a tender glance when, clad like a prince,
with white feathers on his hat, he sauntered through
the streets of Antwerp. He had a right at a later
period to depict himself as Rinaldo conquering the
sorceress Armida by his beauty; the right to paint
himself as Paris, hesitating as to which of the three
goddesses he should award the apple of beauty. The
choice was not an easy one for him at whose feet they
all lay.
Even in the atelier of Rubens he took an especial position: not indeed that of Achilles among the daughters of Lycomedes (as might be imagined from this theme of one of his earlier pictures), but a maiden lost among wild boys. He preferred gallant chats with Helene to association with these crude daubers.
562
XTbe art of fflanbers
At the fetes which Rubens gave, he was admired as an
infant prodigy when, with his sweet voice, he sang
Italian songs to the accompaniment of the ’cello.
Later at Rome the contrast with his Flemish associates
became even sharper. The raw fellows sat in their
tavern in the Piazza di Spagna and got drunk; but
though all of his countrymen came, van Dyck remained
away. He preferred the more refined and elegant life
of aristocratic circles. There was no festival to which
he was not invited; no carnival in which he did not
charm the ladies. He never went out without a follow-
ing of servants, or forgot to wear his golden chains and
new gloves. No wonder then that he was known as
il pittore cavalleresco, the cavalier painter, among these
Flemish bears.
Painters who do not harmonise with other painters are more comfortable in cities where no artists reside. The cavalier therefore left Rome for Genoa, where there were no Flemings to laugh at him, and no Italian painters to mock him ; but women, beautiful women, and cavaliers, weary young marquises. An air of withered decadence hovered over the city, which had once been so mighty, and with song and pleasure awaited its end. It was just because they saw the collapse coming that they sipped so eagerly the cup of life, with feverish, hasty draughts; and van Dyck stood upon the soil where he belonged.
He found a similar stage of activity when at the close of his life he migrated from Flanders to England. Here
IDan DpcR
563
also was the sultry air preceding the storm, the soft,
sensual atmosphere which lies over the earth before a
hurricane descends. The old “ merry England” was
in its last throes. A young king who loved art and
women, a beautiful queen and delicate royal children;
and in the background a scaffold and the dark gloomy
figure of Cromwell, the man of the people. His studio
was the meeting-place of the distinguished world. But
although hardly thirty years old, he is no longer the
bold coxcomb, the fastidious Paris of former days; for
the “god of time clips the wings of Cupid.” He
painted this subject in that picture of the Marlborough
collection which sounds like a melancholy elegy upon
earthly mutability, upon his own fate. He therefore
awards the apple and finds a compensation for his lost
youth in his new aristocratic splendour. For Mary
Ruthven, his wife, is the granddaughter of an earl,
and the son of the Antwerp silk-mercer is now a
knight and belongs to court circles. True, the fire
burns but feebly, the power of love is gone. Life has
lost its sunshine for him, the favourite of women, and
at the age of forty-two he closes his eyes.
His portraits of himself are a supplement to the course of his life. They occur in nearly all of the galleries, and beside those of other Flemings they create the impression that a man of a different race had lost his way among these crude, healthy people. Pale and tender, as if his pleasures extended far into the night, is the colour of his face; his lips tell of many
5^4
Ubc Brt of fflanbers
kisses; white and aristocratic is the hand with the rosy
well kept nails, and his hair is dishevelled as if the hands
of women had passed through it. Van Dyck knew
that he was handsome; he knew the charm exercised
by a sentimental singer, when by way of a change he
assumed the attitude of one weary of the world. He
coquettes even with his decline.
His art has a corresponding effect. Van Dyck has in- deed painted pictures, like the Crown of Thorns and the Two Johns of the Berlin Gallery, which seem works of Rubens: except that the gigantic, herculean impression which he endeavours to attain seems rather affectation than actual power. As soon as he had progressed suffi- ciently to dispense with the forms and qualities of Rubens, he pursued his own paths, substituting delicacy for power, and attuning his picture to a minor instead of a major key. With Rubens we hear the clear fan- fares of a gleaming, joyful red; with van Dyck the soft tones of the violoncello, harmonious and subdued; a red that is never scarlet, but a deep carmine, and which seems softened by the funeral veil. With Rubens there are two motives : flesh and strife ; with van Dyck delicate bodies and gentle suffering. No man complains loudly, for a noise is plebeian; no one makes violent gestures, for only elegant poses are allowed in the salon. He never paints peasants, wild kirmesses, broad laughter, or shouting; for everything crude and coarse is ab- horrent to him. To such an extent did women dom- inate his life that his pictures seem love-letters to
VAN DYCK
JAMES STUART, DUKE OF RICHMOND AND LENOX
Metropolitan Museum, N. Y.
Dan
565
beautiful women or recollections of love’s happy hours.
The antique is distasteful to him, because Rubens transformed it into a domain of rude bacchic sensu- alism. He only painted a Danae — love without brutal contact — and a Diana Surprised hy Endymion; as if some indelicate intruder had appeared at an inop- portune moment in the handsome painter’s studio.
From the Old Testament he selected, like Rubens, the scene of Susannahs Bath. In Rubens’s version a corpulent woman sits before us — a blue-eyed, fair- skinned Fleming; sparkling red and gleaming white are the prevailing notes of the colour scheme. Van Dyck painted a lithe, black-haired Italian, whose dark southern beauty gleams like gold from a deep brown landscape. While with Rubens a gigantic athlete springs over the wall to overpower the woman; in van Dyck’s picture both gentlemen are careful to preserve good form. One tendeny strokes her arm, while the other looks ardently into her eye and vows his love by Cupid.
From the New Testament and the legends of the saints, Rubens painted scenes which gave him the opportunity to display flesh, passion, and worldly splendour. For van Dyck mystic marriages stand in the foreground; and whether the subject is Rosalia, Herman Joseph, or Katherine, the theme is that platonic love which, by avoiding everything crude, wins the heart all the more surely. Or he paints himself in the likeness of his patron saint, Anthony, to
566
Ube Brt of fflanbers
whom the Madonna appears; or preferably as Sebastian
because the negligee of this saint is so interesting.
His pale body, bathed daily in essences, is covered
only by a white cloth. Beautiful women, while ob-
serving Sebastian, gaze in reality upon van Dyck to
meet the warm, sensuous glance which, even when
dying, he casts upon them. The days of flirtation
were indeed followed by others of weariness. As Musset
then wrote world-weary poems, so van Dyck is in
such moments very sorrowful and distressed. He
paints Christ, alone under a gloomy, nocturnal sky,
with a quiet sigh giving up the ghost. No brutal
executioners torture him, as in the pictures of Rubens.
He dies resignedly, a martyr to love; and they who
have slain, bewail him. Again and again he painted
the Bewailing of Christ — lovely women bending in
sorrowful pain over the body of a beautiful man. The
ancient and sacred subjects of the Christian religion
are for him leaves from the diary of his own life. Here
he is coquettish, there sorrowful; but he always plays
only with his own erotic and sentimental emotions.
His portraits are like his biblical pictures. He was the born painter of the aristocracy. It is true that as a portrait-painter his talent is limited. He is helpless in the presence of abrupt and self-willed characters. Although it was the time of the Thirty Years’ War, there is nothing military about his men. They wear no leather collars or jackboots, but black satin and silk stockings ; and are at home not upon the battle-field
tDan
567
but only upon smooth parquetry. He was more
adapted to be a painter of beautiful women than an
interpreter of rugged manhood. To these pictures
he could impart the entire tenderness and delicacy of
his soul. Of exquisite taste are the black, mild white,
or mild blue fabrics which he chooses for their toilettes;
their movements are genteel and indifferent. To all
the heads he imparts a subtle charm by the significant
language of the eye, by a discreet smile or a dreamy
melancholy expression. With fine perception for the
eternal feminine, he understood how to read the hearts
of women and perceived their wishes and secrets.
Here a touch of life’s happine.ss spoiled, there a soft
sensuality or languid weariness plays about the lips.
He also succeeded admirably with the timid delicacy of
aristocratic children and the genteel indifference of
young noblemen, because in such subjects he painted
his own aristocratic nature.
Often it even appears as if in his effort to appear distinguished he introduced affected, dandified traits into the aristocratic world. At the time of the Renais- sance, when the new states were in process of forma- tion, there were few social differences. All were equal who by their own ability had risen above the common herd, whether they were princes, poets, painters, or scholars. Now the separation of the classes had been accomplished, and the nobility of the intellect was no longer upon the same plane as nobility of birth. In the courts of Europe it was found tactless when the
568
XTbe Hrt of fflanbers
Regent Isabella entrusted Rubens, “a painter,’’ with
diplomatic missions. Van Dyck is proud to have
entered these aristocratic circles. In contrast to
Titian, whose eyelashes did not quiver when the
Emperor Charles V. picked up his brush, he considered
it a great honor when King Charles I. dined at his table.
The vanity with which he himself played the grand
seigneur he imparted to others. As he himself co-
quettes with his velvet cloak, his golden chain, and
his well-kept, consumptive hands, so must all of his
noble sitters do. The self-evident distinction of an
earlier day is replaced by an intentional distinction.
Or is this sharp variegation of the aristocratic con- nected with the fact that van Dyck painted at Genoa and in England ? The parallel with Velasquez, the black knight of mediaeval Spain, presents itself. The princes whom he painted did not need to impress others by fine poses and select costume. They did not know that other than silken clothes existed, or that any other handkerchiefs excepting those of Brussels lace were used. They did not need to show that they were blue-blooded, because they were not acquainted with any other world. Van Dyck’s sub- jects have already been startled out of their aristocratic repose. Genoa was near its end, and in England threatening storm-clouds were gathering. When Hol- bein was there Henry VI 11. had caused a “ Dance of Death ” to be performed; now the people came to make their king dance. Charles I. appreciated this. How-
Dan
569
ever enterprising he appears upon van Dyck’s portrait,
his beard curled upwards, one hand coquettishly
propped upon the hip, the other holding a walking-
stick, and with an indifferent, mocking expression about
his mouth, his glance nevertheless travels uncertainly
into the distance, as if in unconscious foreboding of com-
ing misfortune. All fear that the end of a long, beautiful
day is approaching and the commoner is beginning
to disturb their circles. Hence they are so cold and
forbiddingly proud; therefore there plays about their
lips a contemptuous Odi profanum vulgus et arceo:
therefore they assume noble poses and show their blue
blood as though it were a holy symbol. To the wild
plebeian hordes which are storming upon them they
oppose their whole enervated, aristocratic refinement,
and they push back with white blue-veined hand the
fists that grasp for the royal crown. Fated to die,
they wish to die in beauty; a Ueu mourant sentiment
pervades their existence.
The long and beautiful day of the ancient aristocratic world — order approached its end, and van Dyck was its evening star. Wan and pale is the colour of his last pic- tures, as if soft moonlight were spread over them. In Holland the sun of a new day had arisen, the sun which to-day illumines the world.
Chapter IV.— The Rise of Dutch Painting
I.— The First Portraitists
IN the midst of the aristocratic world of the seven- teenth century, Holland arises like an island of burgherdom. What was dimly foreseen in Eng- land when van Dyck painted had already been accom- plished here. After a long struggle Holland had become a republic; and immediately after the war a brilliant rise of the Dutch cities had begun. At a time when elsewhere the townsmen were poor, enslaved, and hungry, in Holland an almost premature bourgeois culture replaced the aristocratic. Clever merchants moved to Amsterdam and guided Dutch commerce into new paths. The surplus of popular power sought distant lands. Who would have thought in i 572 that a part of the Spanish Netherlands would become the possessors of a land like Java, would hold the Cape of Good Hope, and dominate the Asiatic trade? In the seventeenth century Holland had become the first commercial and sea power of the world.
If formerly art could only flourish where a splendid court, a pomp-loving church, or a refined aristocracy
570
TLbc ffirst portraitists
571
afforded it protection and support, now in rich, repub-
lican Holland, for the first time, the bourgeoisie, with
all its good and bad sides, became a power in the
patronage of art; a change like that experienced by
literature in the late middle age when the Minnesingers
wer^ followed by the Meistersingers. There was no
call for the decoration of palaces, or for ecclesiastical,
painting, the reason for whose existence had been
destroyed by Calvinism. But the love of home had
been awakened. Every family occupied its own house,
and did homage, as wealth was not lacking, to the
principle, '‘Adorn thy home.’’ From an ecclesiastical,
royal, noble art painting became an art for the home.
From this change further consequences resulted for the view of colour as well as for the subject-matter of painting. While the gay and brightly coloured Flemish paintings were intended for roomy, bright churches and splendid palaces, the Dutch were placed in narrow half-dark rooms, “where even the dear light of heaven breaks gloomily through painted glasses.” In harmony with their destination for gloomy, brown-panelled rooms, lighted by little bullseye glasses, is the soft, rich light and shade of the pictures. With the Flemings grandeur, decorative movement, and conspicuous colours; here even in colour a sentimental and home-like quality. As to the subjects of Dutch paintings, scenes from everyday life and the landscape were all the more opportune because the Hollanders saw reality transfigured by poetic light. As they had for
572
Zbc IRise of Dutch ipaintino
long years been compelled to battle, they gratefully en-
joyed the pleasures of life. Their own hearth was the
world for them, indeed the very soil of their home was
the creation of the inhabitants, who protected it by
dykes against the ocean and had in bloody struggle
torn it from the enemy. These conquests were cele-
brated in art. They did not think of transporting
themselves into distant worlds of beauty, because
what they saw about them seemed beautiful enough.
They knew nothing of the myths and legends which
were a recreation to the distinguished people of other
lands; but they wished to see pictures of their own
life and all the luxury with which they were able to
surround themselves, treasuring art as a glorification
of the happiness of home. One is interested in cattle,
another in tulips and poultry, a third in the ships which
bring his goods to port. One loves to hear a jolly farce,
another finds that the view from his window upon the
landscape is very beautiful. The subjects which dom-
inate the bourgeois art of the present day were first
depicted in this bourgeois land in the seventeenth
century.
The movement began with portraiture; for it is natural that the rich burgher should begin his role of Maecenas by perpetuating his own image. Through portraiture he finds the way to art. He wishes a counterfeit of his personality, and as photography has not been invented, he sits for his portrait. An in- credible number of portraits was painted in the first
XTbe ffirst portraitists
573
quarter of the seventeenth century. Every trade and
profession is represented in the works of the Amster-
dam Museum; the admiral and the merchant, the
pastor and the professor, the counsellor and the ship-
owner. The portraits of women are the pendants of
those of the men. Occasionally the entire family,
along with the servants, is united, the elder daughters
with their husbands, the young children playing with
their toys. These works already show that a new
race of men had come upon the stage. Rubens and
van Dyck, in their portraiture, seldom descended below
a count; even when as an exception a burgher was
presented, the picture is pervaded by a noble, courtly
air. They love the rhythmic elegance of the toilette,
and fair, round gestures; their hands are white and
delicate ; the man is more at home upon parquetry, the
woman is not a mother of a family but a lady of the
world. The dogs, indeed, but not the servants, are
counted among the family; and the columnar archi-
tecture with the curtain completes the impression of
pretentious magnificence.
A democratic atmosphere, on the other hand, en- velops the soil of Holland. The third estate appears — men with raw, plebeian spirit, who are proud enough to wish to appear nothing higher.
“ Ehrt den Konig seine Wiirde,
Ehret sie der Hande Fleiss.”
Everything is simple, unpretentious, bourgeois, and moral. The men are angular, rugged, and self-con-
574
XTbe IRise ot Dutch paintina
scious; the women jovial and honest. They have
nothing of the cosmopolitan polish, the social routine
of the Flemish noble ladies, and are not dazzled by the
splendour of an elegant life. They sit before us dressed
in plain costumes, their hair under a thick cap, the
neck concealed under a "stiff collar. They are accus-
tomed, basket on arm, to do their own marketing, and
themselves to wash their blue aprons or stiff ruffs. The
hand, which with the Flemish women is long, slender,
and aristocratic, is one accustomed to labour and to
wield the broom. If they endeavour to appear elegant,
their toilette is pathetically tasteless. Here and there,
with the taste of a cook dressed up for Sunday, they
display a bow, ruching, or ribbon ; they hold a fan as if
it were a kitchen utensil. The children, who are all
princes with van Dyck, are here so awkward that they
will only pose as models if the painter gives them an
apple or a bunch of grapes.
These family portraits are supplemented by portrait groups of the corporations. The palace of other lands was replaced in Holland by the guild-house and the town-hall. The rising power of the guild life is likewise characteristic for the bourgeois trend of the time. The £ite were replaced by the men of the hearth and the rule of the masses supplanted the oligarchy. At first the societies of marksmen played a similar role to the veterans’ societies of the present day. Having during the long wars provided the fatherland with gallant defenders, they now rejoiced in amusing war-play.
FRANS HALS
BANQUET OF THE OFFICERS OF ST GEORGE’s GUILD
Haarlem Gallery
TLbc jfirst portraitists
575
Every society had its guild-house and exercising
grounds, where once a year a solemn shooting match
occurred. The victor was proclaimed with the sound
of cannon; then there was a banquet at which the
winner was presented the prize offered by the city,
usually a golden cup. The posts of captain, officers,
and standard-bearer were assumed by rich young men
who delighted to wear uniforms ; and, because they were
fond of being painted in this uniform, such group
pictures formed an important part of Dutch painting.
Every member paid his dues and was therefore per-
petuated by a master’s hand.
But there were also guilds for more serious purposes. The love of charity and interest in the care of the poor and sick which had been awakened during the years of war still existed when these had passed. In all cities of the land hospitals for the sick and asylums for orphans, old men, and women were founded. It was the pride of the burgher to belong to the governing board of such institutions of charity, and to be handed down to posterity in such a capacity.
The craft guilds also experienced a new prosperity. The guild of the clothiers, especially, was an important industry which contributed much to the prosperity of trade. Like the military corporations, these industrial chambers had pictures of the masters of the guild painted for the guild-house. The submission of their accounts is always the moment chosen. At a table men are seated; those who review accounts, control the
576
Zbc IRise of Dutch paintina
treasury fund, and announce that, in their conduct of
affairs, everything is done in accordance with the
regulations.
Even the learned corporations, especially the phys- icians’, gave occupation to the painters. Precisely at that period, in the century of the great war, surgery became an important science. In Leyden, as in Delft and Amsterdam, dissections were publicly conducted in the great hall called the theatrum anatomicum. The nearest benches were intended for colleagues of the professors and the invited guests, the middle for the students, and the rear for the public. In the middle of the amphitheatre was a table with the corpse, where the professor, surrounded by his assistants, per- formed the dissection. And as in Holland everybody had his portrait painted, portrait groups were also donated for this anatomical lecture-room, represent- ing the professor in the midst of his assistants demon- strating upon a corpse or skeleton.
The oldest portraits of military societies date as early as 1 530, and are in the style of the present photo- graphs of soldiers of the reserve. No artistic effect, but resemblance alone is the object desired. As all paid the same dues, each one demanded the same considera- tion, and wished to be seen in full face and have both hands in the picture. These works are therefore no portrait groups but juxtaposed single portraits. If the number of subjects is too great for one row, they are arranged in several rows, one above another, so that
Ube ffirst portraitists
577
the upper faces look through the spaces between and
above the lower row. This phase of portraiture is
represented in the Amsterdam Museum by the works
of Dirk Jacobs, Cornelis Teunissen, and Dirk Barents.
The following generation, the treasuries of whose so-
cieties were in a position to pay higher prices, was not
content with such simple portraits. Instead of busts
they demanded three-quarter pieces or full-lengths,
which necessitated the placing of figures in action and
assigning some uniform motive to what had formerly
been a mere juxtaposition of heads. This motive the
painters at first found in representing the archers march-
ing forth and at a later period in portraying them
at a common banquet. The group of 1 588 by Cornelis
Ketel represents the culmination of this new develop-
ment, and the seventeenth century then completed
what the sixteenth had begun.
In 1618 Cornelis van der Voort painted the picture of the regents of the Amsterdam Hospital for Old Men, and before this his soldiers with the lances — those iron, unbending men who fought the Spaniards at Breda. In 1624 Werner van Valckert painted his two principal works, the four male and the four female regents of the Hospital for Lepers. Nicolas Elias Pickenoy, who was softer and tamer, understood the treatment of coloured costumes in a manner befitting the drawing-room, and was therefore especially prized as a painter of female portraits. Aert Pietersen, the son of the still-life painter Pieter Aertsen, painted,
37
578
Ube IRise ot H)utcb ipaintina
in 1603, the first group of surgeons, the Anatomy
Lesson of Dr. Sebastian Egbert. To this same Dr.
Egbert is dedicated the earliest work of Thomas de
Keyser, who afterwards practised forty-five years in
Amsterdam.
Not only in the capital but in all the smaller towns, portrait painters found work in abundance. In The Hague the rugged and powerful Jan van Ravestyn painted old swashbucklers with cuirass and sash, who had been in the field and preserved a warlike taste all their lives. In Delft the court painter of the house of Orange, Michel Mierevelt, developed an extensive activity, in a somewhat sober and manufactured style, and dashed off not only the Stadtholders, William I., Maurice, and Frederick Henry, but also the scholars of the land. In Dordrecht resided the ancestor of the Cuyp family, Jacob Gerrits Cuyp, a very busy painter, while in Utrecht Paulus Moreelse and Willem van Honhorst executed numerous commissions.
More than all of these cities, Haarlem had suffered in the war with Spain. After having fallen into possession of the foe in a desolate condition, and having been later destroyed by conflagration, it now became the most joyous of all Dutch cities. The painter of the Haarlemites therefore, is particularly the painter of young Holland. One thinks not only of rugged burgherdom and democratic self-confidence but of assertive bravery and lively animation, when the name of Frans Hals is mentioned.
II.— Frans Hals
Think of a people enslaved and oppressed for decades; compelled to witness the restoration of Catholic monasteries in its land and the proclama- tion of laws of mediaeval severity; a people which had, in a bloody struggle, thrown off the foreign yoke and achieved political and religious freedom. A bold and fiery generation grew up, conceived during the thunder of cannons in the battle and reaching manhood at the time of victory and fame. For such a genera- tion the air they breathe has something exhilarating. They fear neither hell nor devil, but move about with clashing sabres and challenging glances. Their life is passed in revel and riot, in knightly war-play, at the banquet amid the clink of glasses. Bayonets flash and the rattle of the drum sounds. Should the Spaniards ever again come, these men, like their fathers, will be found at their posts.
Frans Hals was a true son of this sword-clattering, mad, rollicking Holland. Even in advanced years he felt like a Corpsstudent, joyous and light-hearted, youthful and bold; an anti-philistine who would have considered the word bourgeois as an insult. ^ One can imagine him in a state of exhilaration strolling through the streets at night, breaking windows and
1 For the benefit of the general reader it may be advisable to state that the Corps is the oldest of the varieties of student organisations wearing colours as insignia and devoted, among other purposes, to con- viviality and fighting duels; and that the term philistine is applied by them to all who are not students. — Ed.
beating the night-watchman or in lieu of the night-
watchman, his own wife. When this poor creature
went to a better land, without ever keeping the year
of mourning, he married Lisbeth Reyniers, with whom
he is seated in the celebrated picture of the Louvre.
Both are no longer young and have experienced many
storms. Hals may have cracked many a joke during
his work, and often called his wedded wife “old girl.”
Jovial and indifferent to fate, as if he himself perceived
the comic side of his married life, he looks down from
his portrait. Yet he never deserted good Lisbeth; for
she was no spoiler of fun, never gave curtain lectures,
but could herself raise the wine-glass. It almost seems
as if the refrain of the old drinking-song,
“Altes Herz, was gliihest du so,” were inscribed, half ironically, under the picture.
This portrait of himself acquaints one with the re- maining works of Frans Hals. As he himself remained all his life a gay student, so he made his Haarlemites gay students, casting such bold glances and moving about as briskly as if they were always on the point of jostling some philistine. Their life is passed between the Mensur and the Kommers.
“O selig, O selig, ein Fuchs noch zu sein!”»
His three earliest works in the museum of Haarlem
‘The Mensur is the rather harmless duel practised by German stu- dents; the Kommers a convivial celebration consisting principally in singing and drinking. A Fuchs is a student during the first year of his membership of a Corps or other society; his characteristics are supposed to resemble those of the American college freshman. — Ed,
are archers’ banquets, and it is no accident that Hals, the joyful genius of the Kneipe, invented this type of picture. A fresh love of pleasure and rugged health laughs from all the faces. These are the men who themselves had taken part in the defence of Haarlem, and now merrily enjoyed what they had accomplished; men who had smelt powder, had seen blood flow and passed the night on the field of battle. In a later work, the Archers of the Guild of St. Adriaen are united under the trees of their garden, armed cap-a-pie and prepared for the march. In the picture of 1639 representing the Departure of the Guild of St. George, he uses the motive of the staircase to bring new life into the accustomed arrangement into rows. The colours are bold, fresh, and joyous: red sashes and bright blue banners, the rich still-life of fruits and lobsters, and the silvery light streaming through the treetops.
In his smaller portraits also, boldness, joy in life, and self-confident alacrity flash from every eye. If he paints children they do not weep or look serious, neither are they bashful and awkward. However small they are, they do not fear their elders, but look boldly and laughingly into their eyes. Even the nurse is full of a consciousness that her baby will become a field marshal or a Maid of Orleans. And these types of men ! Here a little hunchback feels as brave as if he had just slain the giant Goliath; there a clergyman swings his book in a warlike manner, as if he wished to bring it down upon the heads of the Catholics; there again, a young
man with his knees crossed cracks his whip as if in challenge. In another picture of the Liechtenstein Collection (Vienna) there stands a young man, van Huy- thuysen by name, with his hat on one side, one hand upon his hip, the other playing with his sword hilt — as indescribably swaggering as if he had just declared war upon the united states of Europe. This is one of those portraits which reflect the spirit of an age. No scholar but a painter, Frans Hals, is the historian of Dutch liberty. If one thinks of the portraits of Velasquez, one feels what different worlds these two artists repre- sent. There the refined distinction of the ancient Span- ish nobility; people who seem quite apathetic, because others do not exist for them; here a defiant assertion of the commoner, the almost ludicrous vanity of the Dutch, who considered themselves the first people, the acme of the civilised world; who, confident of the morrow and proud of themselves, their intelligence and their ability, their fencing and their uniforms, paced about with clanking swords. Velasquez’s people are distinguished gentlemen who can indeed wield the sword, but never have the opportunity of drawing it, because every one else is for them a pariah; those of Frans Hals cannot rest until they have scars of which to boast. In van Huythuysen he has painted the soul of the epoch and the soul of himself, the splendid Corps student of art.
What his portraits do not say is related in his genre pieces. In them everything is united in which the artist himself took pleasure — laughing, singing, music and drinking, exuberant sturdiness and bold abandon. The honeymoon of young Holland was celebrated in drinking and sensuality. Here a coarse bearded fellow, his cap awry upon his bald head, jestingly holds a girl in his lap, there the grinning Junker Ramp holds a goblet. There follow those delightful improvisations of light and characteristic portrait painting: the Young Musician in Amsterdam; the Boys making Music in Cassel ; the Drinking and Flute Playing Boys at Schwe- rin. Then figures of the tavern and the streets : joyous topers and laughing girls, half-drunken fiddlers and old sailors' wives; Hille Bohhe, the witch of Haarlem, with the owl upon her shoulder and the pewter mug in her hand.^
In works of this sort Hals has achieved his high- est in the representation of instantaneous expression. A sudden laugh distorting the face, a keen glance, a bold gesture — everything he seizes in its flight. All gradations of laughter, from a pleasant smile to a hoarse roar, are depicted with the directness of the instantane- ous photograph. This telegraphic style is his lan- guage, and in order to catch the flitting expression, he has created a technique in which every line is pulsat- ing life. He wields the brush as if it were a sabre, and treats the canvas as if he stood opposite to the enemy upon whom he was showering blows. Two
» Professor Mother refers to the example in Berlin, of which there is a replica, with slight variations, in the Metropolitan Museum of New York.— Ed.
hundred years before Manet he founded Impressionism.
It is true that he lived eighty years and more — too long; for while he remained the same the world changed. The joyful time of riot and revelry gradually passed away.* Holland had attained its desires, the soldiers of freedom of a former day, in their gallant, knightly costume, had become old and thoughtful. Bowed under the burden of years they still held meetings, but now for quiet counsel, no longer for a joyful banquet or a bold march. Even their clothing was changed; they no longer wore red sashes and glittering armour but solemn dark clothes; they were no longer marks- men and joyous feasters, but dignified patricians of rigid Calvinistic spirit.
These changed conditions are reflected in Hals’s later works. In place of the joyful gaudiness which he formerly loved, an almost monochrome tone prevails in his portrait (1641) of the Regents of the Hospital of St. Elizabeth. A dark green table cover, a grey wall upon which a white spot resembles a map in black bevelled frame, and in front old people in dark costume — such is the content of the picture, which, in its serious characterisation and refined beauty of tone, reveals the boon companion of former days as a quiet, clarified master.
But it does not appear that his art still corresponded with the taste of the day. His free, student-like nature was no longer suited to the more settled views. He was warned in court to “abstain from drunkenness and similar excesses/’ Commissions were no longer forthcoming, and the sheriff’s officer appeared in his house. In 1661 he was declared exempt from taxes on the ground that he had no possessions. Later, when he had passed his eightieth year, the city fathers roused themselves and decided to grant him a life pension of two hundred gulden.
In this noteworthy year, 1664, when free Holland provided so royally for one of its greatest artists, Hals’s last works originated. He who began as a gallant cavalier with soldiers’ banquets now painted the regents, both male and female, of the hospital for old men of which he had himself become an inmate. And how they appear! The consciousness of carrying a hussar’s sabre is no longer his. Contemptuously he dashed the mighty spots of colour upon the canvas. Anxiously and timidly the old maids and the worthy gentlemen gaze upon us, as if provoked and angry over the dirty, slashed garments and the brown linen in which the aged master has vested them. Barthol- omaeus van der Heist knew how to make velvet and satin gleam and cloaks flutter, and painted the gentle- men elegant and the ladies beautiful; Abraham van den Tempel, who imparted to them the aristocratic dignity of the Flemings, clothed them in black silk and white satin and let them wander upon park terraces amidst imposing colonnades; such artists had already become the ideals of those bourgeois who wished to play the role of barons.
In 1666 the aged master Hals filled a pauper’s grave. Nine years later his name is again mentioned: when jolly Lisbeth, his wife, received a weekly allowance of fourteen sous in addition to her pauper’s pension. The life of Frans Hals thus reflects the history of Dutch painting; beginning proudly and boldly but ending in sadness. A single artist whose life lasted eighty years saw how democracy was succeeded by com- fortable philistinism, and philistinism by an apish imitation of courtly manners.
III.— The Contemporaries of Hals
Hals is the centre about which the art of the first half of the seventeenth century is grouped. As he painted portraits and genre pictures, and in his portrait-groups also depicted still-life, his influence extended in all directions, and he became the model of portrait, genre, and still-life painters.
Jan Verspronck and Jan de Bray painted military groups which, in their fine grey tone and vivid anima- tion, resemble^^ose of their master. Such subjects continued to be popular among the successors of Hals; for the Dutch burgher, seated in his comfortable room, was proud of his services as a soldier, of the marches and dangers which he had experienced and loved to relate to his children. In the gazettes he read of the things which were occurring in unhappy Germany; and straggling marauders still wandered through Holland itself. After having his portrait painted, the
Contemporaries of Ibals
587
burgher extended his patronage of art to recollections
of his soldier days. Bivouac scenes, quarterings, and
plunderings were the first subjects selected; then the
occupation of gallant officers out of service, consoling
themselves with charming girls over wine, with gam-
bling and love for the hardships of military life. Dirk
Hals, Frans’s younger brother, Pieter Godde, Jan Olis,
Jacob Duck, and Antony Palamedes are representative
of the group. “The old soldier sits at the window,
empties his glass, and blesses peace and peaceful
times.”
Others progress from pictures of soldiers to scenes from popular life. The “ third estate,” which had now become dominant, pointed proudly to the fact that beneath it there was yet a “fourth estate.” As in courtly France the plebeian manners of Monsieur Dimanche and Monsieur Jourdain furnished the aris- tocrats with cause for laughter, so in Holland the burgher laughed over the uncouth conduct of the common people. Tavern life and tobacco play a special role in these pictures; for the pipe was as modern in 1600 as the bicycle was with us t^li^ty years ago, and beer taverns were first customary in Holland. In the paintings of Jan Molenaer one sees such figures of drinking comrades and singing couples, pretty, fem- inine, pleasing pictures, in which the soft light of the candle is daintily interpreted.
Although a Fleming by birth, the adventurous Adriaen Brouwer likewise belongs to this group. After
588
XLbc IRise of Dutch paintina
his flight from his father’s house he took service with
the Dutch. With them he defended Breda against
the Spaniards, and he appeared with a Dutch troupe
of players at Amsterdam and Haarlem. Even in Span-
ish Antwerp he acted so much the Hollander that he
was thrown into prison. His paintings also, in their
homely coarseness and simplicity, belong more to the
Dutch than to Flemish art. In the smoke of obscure
taverns, over beer and strong drink, he wandered about
among drunken plebeians. Boors throwing dice and
playing cards, quarrelling, stabbing each other, and the
next morning having their thick heads bandaged by
the village barber — such is the content of his pictures.
It is certainly a one-sided, almost disgusting theme; but
his colouristic charm is so great that one quite forgets
the content and only admires the brilliancy of execution.
Brouwer possessed a native genius for painting. There
is nothing reflective, nothing laboured in his work;
each stroke of the brush suits just where he placed it.
It is related that when he could not pay for a drinking-
bout, he would rapidly design a sketch upon paper in
the tavern, and send it to the art dealer. Most of his
pictures seem to have originated this way; for he never
considers the technical finish. Each one of them
preserves the outlines of a sketch, and for this reason
his works are a delight for every artistic eye.
In landscape painting there were at the beginning of the seventeenth century two opposing tendencies. Cornelis Poelenburg, Dirk van der Lisse, Bartholomaeus Breenberg, and Moses van Uytenbrock relate to Dutch burghers how things looked in fair Italy; painting small landscapes in the environs of Rome and Tivoli, peopled with shepherds and satyrs, with goddesses and bathing nymphs. Everything is executed with calligraphic elegance, and with a pleasing though superficial charm. But while in these little pictures that “arcadian” landscape painting whose chief representative had been Albani passed away, others began to paint the scenes of their native soil, which they well knew how to treasure, because it had been bought with blood. Italian scenes were replaced by Dutch environs; a flat country with high sand-dunes and distant perspective. The nymphs and goddesses were changed into peasants, fishermen, drivers, wood-cutters, hunters, and sailors. The earlier of these landscape painters — Hans Bol, Hendrik Averkamp, Adriaen van de Venne, and Esaias van de Velde — could not dispense with broad narrative; for something interesting had to happen in the pictures, if they were to receive the applause of the bourgeoisie. Popular sports upon the ice — at that time recently introduced, — sleigh-riding, markets, and hunts are the usual subjects of these works. Then the artist began to dispense more and more with figures and emancipate himself from the demands of the purchasers. The way across the fields to the woods, the slope of a sand-dune ; a village amidst trees and shrubbery animated by peas- ants and waggons, by a troop of riders or marauders ; the fiat country with church towers and windmills — such subjects recur in the works of Pieter de Molyn and Hercules Seghers. Jan Porcellis took up his quarters on the coast and observed the sea in its grey colour and monotonous beat of waves with quiet, true Dutch objectivity. Thus was the soil prepared for the great landscape and marine painters of the following epoch.
The walls of dining rooms were decorated with still- life paintings: these too a glorification of the luxury which the opulent burgher -nOw enjoyed with thankful pleasure. Formerly, when Holland was a province, he was satisfied with herring, beer, and bread; now he can afford Rhine wine and oysters.
Among these painters, Pieter Claesz, Heda, and Frans Hals the younger depicted silver goblets, dishes, and gleaming plates with ham, oysters, and peaches in very refined harmonies. Their works reflect the joyful satisfaction of a burgher in his possession of a good wine-cellar and fine table-utensils.
Only the still-life pictures painted in the old uni- versity city of Leyden have a different character. In such a worldly age, so devoted to intense enjoyment, these masters alone thought of the change of earthly things. The pleasure of the table was not painted by Pieter Potter, the father of the celebrated Paul; but skulls, prayer-books, hour-glasses, crucifixes, fragile glasses and clay pipes, and slowly dying candles — such things as formerly St. Jerome had gazed upon when, brooding over the changefulness of earthly things, he arranged them in groups with the inscription Vanitas
Contemporaries of Ibals
beneath. The pictures remind us that the Dutch of
the seventeenth century were not only merchants
but also theologians.
They had suffered for their belief in the days when Alba raged in the Netherlands; and they are fond of being represented in their portraits with the Bible in their hands. Proud of the political freedom which they had won, they are even prouder of the Reformed church, which in 1 572 arose from fire and blood. Their state was founded upon the model of the republic of Geneva. The special city of the theologians was Leyden, where the most prominent scholars of the land assembled and did for Holland what a century earlier Luther and Melanchthon had done for Germany. The States’ Bible, completed nine years later, became the palladium of the new church, and was soon spread abroad in a million copies. In this book, which founded the modern Dutch language, the people found a new inspiration in the charm of holy legends, and became absorbed in the poesy of Old and New Testament narratives. The Old Testament, especially, acquired a significance which it had never before possessed in the Christian church; for the Dutch believed that a similarity existed between the fate of the people of Israel and their own, and regarded the prophecies of the Old Testament as wonderful promises for them- selves. They identified Palestine and the Babylonish captivity with Holland and the Spanish domination.
From this feeling of kinship with the Israelites the
592
XTbe IRise of Dutch paintino
philo-Semitic sentiment which at that time passed over
Holland is best explained. It was the first place in
which the Jews found a home. Even in the beginning
of the seventeenth century there were at Amsterdam
four hundred Jewish families, most of them from Por-
tugal. Soon afterwards the complete emancipation
came. Some of the Jews, like Ephraim Bonus, became
prominent physicians, while others stood at the head
of the great transmarine projects.
Dutch poetry also has a biblical and Israelitic trend. Not only has Marnix, the poet of the wars of liberation, the effect of the Psalmist; Camphuysen’s Edifying Songs resembles an Israelitic songbook, Vondel and Daniel Heinsius introduced Old Testament dramas upon the stage. In his musical setting of David’s psalms, Huygens hopes “only to obtain immortality if he can reveal in his own works something of the beauty and power of the King of Israel.” The preachers, in dis- cussing contemporary events, refer to Old Testament parables in the pulpit.
By this means a new and wide domain was opened to art also. Although there were no saints to glorify and no churches would endure altar-pieces, the artists possessed the Bible, into which they might penetrate with their whole souls. As the Dutch considered themselves the representatives of the Israelites, the old legends suddenly appeared in a new light. Pieter Lastmann was not strong enough to lift the treas- ure out of its hiding-place; his works are crude, dry,
1RembranC)t
593
vulgar, and heavy; but — he was the teacher of
Rembrandt.
IV.— Rembrandt
A picture by Rembrandt in the Dresden Gallery represents Sampson putting Riddles to the Phil- istines; and Rembrandt’s entire activity, a riddle to the Philistines of his time, has remained puzzling until the present day. He has been called the master of light and shade; but this is not significant, since many others, Correggio, for example, attempted the solution of the same problems. He has been praised as the creator of the religious art of the Ger- manic North, which is equally meaningless, as Durer has the same right to this fame. Although all the aids of science have been set in motion, he can neither be apprehended nor explained. As no other man bore his name, so the artist, too, is something unique, mocks every historical analysis, and remains what he was, a puzzling, intangible Hamlet nature — Rembrandt. The clearness and measure of the Hellenic spirit which dominated the Renaissance finds a contrast in the gloom of sentiment in Rembrandt’s works. He has the same relation to the masters of the Renaissance as Ossian to Homer, and beside the Olympians he seems a Nibelung, a hero from cloudland.
It is perhaps possible to approach Rembrandt only if one resolves to interpret his pictures not as paintings but as psychological documents; for this is his most 38
594
XTbe TRtse cf Dutch painting
individual characteristic. However important the few
commissions which he received (like the Anatomy
Lesson, the Night Watch, and the Staalmeesters) they
did not make him what he was. He is only Rembrandt
when he holds aloof from the public, as is the case in
most of his paintings. He was the first artist who, in
the modern sense, did not execute commissions, but
expressed his own thoughts. The emotions which
moved his innermost being were the only things which
he expressed upon the canvas. He does not seem to
think that any one is listening to him, but only speaks
with himself; he is anxious, not to be understood by
others, but only to express his moods and feelings. No
painter, but a human being speaks to us. What he
created and how he created it can only be understood
by regarding his works as a commentary upon his life.
He was born in 1607 in the old university city of Leyden, where Bogermann just at that time began his great work of the translation of the Bible. His father was a miller, his mother the daughter of a baker, and he himself was the fifth of six children. His youth was spent in a serious and religious atmosphere. His mother, in particular, must have been an honest and pious woman; in her son’s numerous portraits she holds in herdap the Bible, her favourite work. It is pleasing to think of the lad sitting at his mother’s feet and listening to the old legends, or wandering about alone in the open field; for his father’s house was at the end of the city just where the two arms of the Rhine
REMBRANDT
PORTRAIT OF SASKIA
Dresden Gallerv
lRembranC>t
595
unite, and even farther out stood the famous windmill.
He probably wandered for hours along the Rhine; saw
the ships with their coloured sails, the sand-dunes in
their melancholy brown, the fresh green pastures where
in philosophic calm the cattle reposed; gazed upon the
grey sea with its boundless horizon and upon the heav-
ens with the ever-changing passage of the clouds. A
foreboding of the infinity of the universe was even then
revealed to him.
At first he was uncertain as to his profession, and was enrolled as a student in the university; then he studied with Swanenburch, and later with Lastmann at Am- sterdam. But after only six months he returned to his father’s house and began anew with painting. His earliest pictures are attractive only in so far as they reveal the early technical progress of a great master. He carefully posed his model, about whom he then arranged into a complete still-life the contents of his atelier: pigskin folios, damascened knives, pieces of ar- mour, and swords. In his studies of light and shade he followed the problems which had been popular in Dutch paintings since Honthorst. In the Stuttgart and 'the Nuremberg pictures representing an old apostle, probably Paul, in prison, the sunlight falls upon the head of the aged man. In his Money Changer of the Berlin Gallery he attempted a night piece: an old Jewish banker examining a coin by candle light, as in the Money Changer of Quentin Massys. The thought of the changefulness of this world and the joy in it
596
XTbe IRise of Dutch ipainting
is probably the basic idea of this picture. If pro-
fessional models could not be obtained he made shift
with his relatives, whom also he bedecked with the
garments to be found in his atelier. In a picture at
Amsterdam, his father, the worthy miller, wears an
iron armour and a cap with a high feather, and has
turned his moustache martially upwards. It was the
time when all Holland stood under the spell of the
warrior’s profession: such is the best explanation for
this preference for military bearing.
At the same time he familiarised himself with the technique of etching. Just at that time, during the great war, beggars from all Europe wandered over the roads of Holland. Rembrandt drew them as he saw them ; hunchbacks, lame, blind, and drunkards. He was especially fond of drawing himself in the most differ- ent costume and with ever-varied expression. Here he is thoughtful, there he rolls his eyes; here he starts back in terror, there smiles broadly, and there again his lips are contracted in pain. It seems as if he were seeking his own personality, which was a riddle to himself. But no less remarkable than the difference in his own portraits is his versatility as an artist.
His activity at Leyden closed in 1631, with a Holy Family and a. Presentation in the Temple. His first attempt at life-size figures is the Munich picture from sacred history, depicted in the manner of Honthorst, as occurring in a Dutch home. Carpenter’s tools hang upon the wall, and both Joseph and Mary wear
IRembranbt
597
the workaday clothes of 1630. In a painting at The
Hague, a great, wide church opens to view; it would
seem that, after having painted people in narrow cells,
his father’s house had become too small, and the uni-
verse was revealed to his sight. This picture is at the
same time the first instance of the struggle of light
and shade, as if in foreboding that his life also would
be shaped into a similar struggle. In his picture of
himself in 1631 he stands bold as a conqueror, his hand
braced upon his side; and, although a book-plate, his
etching of the Ship (Bartsch iiH), may signify the
reckoning between past and future. One sees the head
of Jesus, a nude woman forms the mast. So he, en-
circled by enticing phantoms, sailed into the sea of life.
When he came to Amsterdam woman was at first the centre of all his thoughts. With the joy of a student coming from the constraint of the paternal roof into a strange university city, he yielded to the new impressions. A whole series of feminine studies arose, partly sheets of such coarse sensuality that they are usually preserved as “secret” in the cabinets of engravings. But soon studies of different character arose, like Le lit franfais, expressing a distaste for the sexual. Rembrandt’s life was a constant struggle between these two natures; the desire of the sensual man to plunge into the world, and the disgust of the dreamer who did not find there what he sought.
1 This reference is to the number of the etchings in Adam Bartsch's catalogue of the master’s engravings: Catalogue raisonne des ceuvres de Rembrandt i797)* — Ed.
598
XTbe IRise of Dutch ipaintina
He was otherwise occupied in fulfilling, in a serious
and objective manner, the commissions for portraits
which he received. If he had formerly clothed his
relatives in armour, helmets, and strange fabrics, he
now confines himself strictly to contemporary Dutch
costume. As de Keyser had done before him, he de-
picted it in its monotonous seriousness, its dark
colours, and its symmetrical cut. Only in the introduc-
tion of action into the portraits, does he occasionally de-
part from the traditional, as in the portrait of the ship-
builder receiving a letter from his wife. By this innova-
tion alone his first portrait group, the Anatomy Lesson
of Dr. Tulp, is distinguished from earlier works. Even
Mierevelt and de Keyser had in their pictures of sur-
geons not thought of unifying the scene, but had sub-
mitted to the wish of the sitters in placing the chief
emphasis upon individual resemblance, fslo one looks
at the professor or the corpse, but all are occupied with
themselves or the observer. For Rembrandt the in-
dividual is only a part of the work of art. All take
part in the event, of which the strongly lighted corpse
forms the centre: Tulp demonstrates, and the other
surgeons attentively follow his lecture.
His preference for gay and fantastic costume could only be gratified in his portraits of himself. In one he wears a storm-hood adorned with a feather or in another a black velvet cap and a moustache trained boldly upwards, in a third a velvet mantle with armour and a golden chain. When Diirer painted his Madrid
1Rembrant)t
599
portrait with the gay coat and feathered cap he
was like Rembrandt also in 1632, a suitor. In a por-
trait of the dispersed Haro collection there appears
for the first time a youthful female head with fine
delicate complexion, blue eyes, and light blond hair;
Saskia van Uylenburgh makes her appearance in
Rembrandt’s art. Her cousin, the art dealer Hen-
drik van Uylenburgh, had ordered a portrait of his
cousin from Rembrandt. They saw and loved. After
the completion of the portrait she continued to visit
his studio, and the next portraits at Stockholm and the
Liechtenstein Gallery are no longer commissions. The
sober Dutch costume is replaced by splendid, fantastic
clothing. In the former she wears the red, gold-em-
broidered velvet mantle which Rembrandt had brought
from Leyden; in another he painted her as her chaper-
one was arranging her long golden hair. In the bust
portrait of the Dresden Gallery she laughs from under
a red velvet hat; in that of Cassel she shows the
fine lines of her profile; in the St. Petersburg picture
she is costumed as a Jewish bride adorned with pearls
and flowers and holding a shepherd’s staff in her hand.
In fact, all the pictures of these years are connected with Rembrandt’s betrothal. The sudden, seemingly illogical appearance of quite different subjects is only to be explained by the fact that all of Rembrandt’s works symbolise personal moods. It was so strange that he, the son of the miller of Leyden, should have won this refined daughter of a patrician, almost against
6oo
Ube IRise of Butcb painting
the will of her relatives; he therefore paints himself as a
prince of the nether world abducting Proserpina. It
was so strange that this dainty little doll loved him,
the awkward, coarse-grained giant; the figure of
Samson therefore arises in his mind. When Saskia’s
guardian was opposed to the engagement, Rembrandt
recalled the biblical scene in which Samson wishes to
visit his wife and finds the house locked. “ I verily
thought that thou hadst utterly hated her; therefore
I gave her to thy companion,” the old man calls
down, while Rembrandt as Samson threatens with his
clenched fist. When at last in June, 1634, the wedding
was celebrated, it gave occasion for the picture Sam-
son s Wedding: Saskia, dainty and serene, sitting like
a princess in the circle of her relatives; he himself
appearing as a crude plebeian, whose strange jokes
frighten more than they amuse the distinguished
company.
After he had so long followed public taste, it now amused him to shock the bourgeoisie; he felt himself at odds with the whole world when he painted Samson Destroying the T emple of the Philistines. The early years of his marriage were spent in joy and revelry. Sur- rounded by calculating business men who kept a tight grasp on their money bags, he assumed the role of an artist scattering money with a free hand; surrounded by small townsmen most proper in demeanour, he revealed himself as the bold lansquenet, frightening them by his cavalier manners. He brought together all
IRembran&t
6oi
manner of oriental arms, ancient fabrics, and gleaming
jewelry; and his house became one of the sights of
Amsterdam. Like the princess of a fable, Saskia,
decked with gold and diamonds, strutted about, so that
her relatives thoughtfully shook their heads. In a
picture in Buckingham Palace he paints her examin-
ing gleaming earrings before the mirror, while he places
a collar about her neck. In the picture of the Dresden
Gallery he sits as a cavalier at table, a sword at his side
and a velvet cap with curled ostrich feather upon his
head. Like a giant playing with a doll, he holds dainty
Saskia upon his lap, and smilingly raises his glass of
wine. This is no artless pleasure, but Samson throwing
down the gauntlet to the Philistines ; a giant stretching
his mighty limbs in preparation for a struggle with all
existing views.
At the close of his life he once painted a picture of himself grinning at an antique bust. He probably felt a similar feeling in painting the Abduction of Ganymede, that jolly farce which shocked the educated Hollanders as much as Bocklin’s Bath of Susanna shocked cultured Germans. At that time Rembrandt experienced his artistic “years of indiscretion.’’ One need not assume that he wished to imitate Rubens. The first years after his marriage were the times when he let himself loose as a man and as an artist ; for thus may be best explained the coarse affectation of force and the wild impetuosity of his works during this period. The cycle of the Pas- sion of Christ which he began in 1 633 for the Stadtholder
6o2
Ube IRise of 2)utcb ipaintin^
Frederick Henry — a commission, which cannot there-
fore be considered a psychological document — is the
principal example of this phase of his style. Arms
gesticulate, faces are contorted, and the costumes are
puffed in Baroque rhythm. Even as a colourist he
speaks fortissimo: he could not depict the splendour
of the sky blinding enough or the raging of the elements
wild enough.
Gradually he became more serene, more serious. The world which he wished to shock became indifferent to him. Even his marriage had brought gloom as well as sunshine. In 1635 when Saskia became a mother, he drew the jubilant, light-flooded etching of the Annunciation to the Shepherds; now, when his first child died, he commenced the picture of Abraham Offering Isaac. His home, in the Breestraat in the midst of the Jewish quarter, became his world. The fantas- tic Orient, the great and ancient culture which the Jews had brought over from the Moorish middle ages into prosaic Holland, attracted him. The artistic fig- ures of the Ghetto moved about under his window: grey-bearded men with high turbans, veiled women in gleaming fabrics. With many of them, as with Ephraim Bonus and the Rabbi Manasseh ben Israel, he was on friendly terms. The son of youthful Holland, which as yet had no traditions or artificial forms of life, felt himself attracted by these bearers of a culture many thousands of years old. He stood isolated among his countrymen, like a foreigner whose language they
IRembranbt
603
did not understand ; an orator who preached to ears as
deaf as those which heard Christ on the Mount ; a seer
among the blind, like Tobias whose eyes were opened by
the mercy of heaven. ‘Among the people of the Ghetto
he found appreciation for his lonely art. His house also
was a piece of the Orient on occidental soil. Smyrna
carpets and Arabian curtains, burnooses and caftans,
fragments of architecture with polychromatic Moorish
columns filled his studio. By means of portieres and
gleaming glass windows he created gloomy corners,
through which a dreamy light vibrated in mysterious
harmonies. As his aim had formerly been bravura,
passionate emotion, large size, and harsh colour, his
eye now finds repose in the mild gleam of velvet, the
warm splendour of silk, and the sparkling shimmer
of gold and precious stones. Of tropical and luxuriant
landscapes, of costumes and people he built a fairy
architecture of exotic splendour; in the midst of a
prosaic world he created a poetic one of his own. A
romanticist, he dreamt himself far away from the
grey of every-day life in a distant and enchanted
world.
The beauty of the female body was also revealed to him in its gleaming splendour. If at the beginning only coarse models had been at his disposal, he could now glorify the beautiful body of Saskia. Stretched out gracefully and voluptuously upon a white couch, she is called Danae in the dainty nude of the Hermitage In the picture of The Hague Museum he shows her as
6o4
XLbc IRise ot Dutch ipaintin^
Susanna The light illumines the little face with pale
splendour, caresses the shoulders, and plays upon the
body in white, golden reflection. As little as in the
first instance Rembrandt thought of the antique, did
he here think of the Bible.
Since he had discovered this gleaming wonder-world of light, he felt no inclination to fulfil commissions for sober portraits. In the Dresden portrait he stands with a guinea-hen in his hand, and the light, falling fully upon the plumage of the feathers, presents a bouquet of grey, brown, yellow, and red tones, in which it shines, gleams, sparkles, and glitters. Henceforth all por- trait heads are for him such studies of light effects, a playground for rays of light. The Lady of Buckingham Palace is encircled by soft, golden light, and her toilette, in its select elegance, is one determined not by the sitter but by the painter himself. He would hardly have painted the portrait of the preacher Ansloo if the contrast between the dark red tablecloth with the light grey background and the black clothes had not yielded such refined colour harmonies. His celebrated Night Watch of 1642, representing the departure of the stand- ard-bearer Frans Banning-Cock, is more of a fairy picture than a portrait group of archers. From a gloomy courtyard they step out into blinding sunlight. How this different light is painted, which encircles the figures, here sunny, there gloomy; with what master hand Rembrandt runs through the entire range of his colours, from the lightest yellow through all shades
IRembranbt 605
of light and dark red to the gloomiest black — this has often been pointed out and justly celebrated.
But one can also understand that the soldiers who gave him the commissions to paint their portraits for the guild-house were little satisfied with the manner in which he conceived their commissions. Not only is the composition which he arranged, for pictorial reasons, contrary to military discipline; positive, sober, and clear-headed, the Hollanders were incapable of appreciating his treatment of light and shade. Accus- tomed to the dry objectivity of de Keyser, they missed resemblance in these heads emerging from the gloom. No military guild ever thought of applying to Rem- brandt again; for other artists were more compliant with the wishes of their patrons. The allegory number- ed '‘Bartsch 1 10'’ perhaps gives expression to Rem- brandt’s feeling over his loss of popularity. The fashionable painter has fallen; but the artist Rembrandt arises, and, free from all fetters, he may now preach the gospel of a new art.
Unfortunately he lost something far more important than the favour of the public in the year — Saskia. A short time before she had presented him with a boy, and Rembrandt had during this time of hope painted the Meeting of Mary with Elizabeth and the Sacrifice of Manoah, in which Manoah and his wife kneel thank- fully before the sacrificial fire while the angel who has announced the birth of Samson rises in the air. Now he was alone in his house in the Breestraat, where
6o6
XTbe IRise of Dutch IPaintina
everything reminded him of the years of his happiness;
alone with the lad, to whom the sufferer had given
birth shortly before her death. In a drawing showing
himself nursing a little child with a milk bottle he
ridicules himself as a widower. If even before this his
relation to the outer world had been dissolved, his art
now become wholly that of a lonely man who only
seizes the brush to express the thoughts of his soul.
Before this, Dutch nature had said nothing to him. For the only suitable background to the glittering pictures of the Orient was that tropical splendour which he painted in his Susanna at The Hague or the Maodalen in Buckingham Palace. Even the Storm in the Brunswick Museum, his first landscape, conducts us into a land of dreams. Black clouds pass over the sky, and a dazzling light falls upon the walls of a city and upon trees quivering in the storm; torrents rage and jagged cliffs tower aloft. His loneliness after the death of Saskia drove him out into nature; into that solitary Dutch landscape where the washerwomen labour, and the mills flap their wings. With a beating heart, and perhaps as astonished as when formerly he wandered along the banks of the Rhine at Leyden, he stood in the presence of the great Mother and learnt how to feel her breath even where it but softly sighs. In his sketch-book he seizes upon the simplest, poorest things: the canals with their bridges and bordering houses in his walks through the streets of Amsterdam; if he wanders farther, fallen huts, hay-stacks, and
REMBRANDT
THE SACRIFICE OF MANOAH
1Rembrant)t
607
peasant houses. Here he is charmed by a silhouette of
trees, there by a windmill rising upon a lonely hill.
A bit of pasture or a path losing itself in a field is suffi-
cient to attract him. His wanderings did not extend
far; the quiet environs of Amsterdam, Sloten, Kronen-
burg, and Zaandam, were his farthest excursions. Nor
did he need to seek for motives or majestic lines; for
something much finer, the poetry of the plain, had
been revealed to him. In some of his etchings one
has the feeling of wandering lonely and self-absorbed
over a great plain. However small they are, they seem
pervaded by the infinity of space. By these drawings
Rembrandt advanced beyond the centuries and became
the father of “intimate'’ landscape painting. In them
he is the greatest space composer of all times; for a
simple suggestive line suffices to make the eye measure
infinity.
In his other works the memory of Saskia at first prevailed. For a long time he lived with her in spirit, and as in the Berlin picture he painted her a year after her death, so his other pictures are pages from the book of memory dedicated to his wife who died so young. It is no accident that just at that time he etched the Death of Mary; that just now, when he himself had no domestic happiness, he painted again and again the Holy Family, or Mary with the Child approached by the shepherds in timid adoration. With the Good Samaritan he thought of the hours when he himself sat at Saskia's deathbed. The introduction of the
6o8
Ube IRise of Dutch painting
supernatural into the material world occupied his
thoughts; that dream life with its forebodings and
visions; eyes which open again after they have seen
death; the secrets of the realm of shadows which the
risen Lazarus or Christ could reveal. He represents
Jesus appearing as a spirit to the disciples at Emmaus,
and shows Him calling Lazarus from the grave. But
Christ seems to him not only a worker of miracles; He is
also the loving comforter. Once he had painted the
Sermon on the Mount: about the Saviour a crowd busy
with its own affairs and hearing nothing of His words,
and in the foreground a dog, symbolising the thoughts
of the masses. Now all who are troubled or heavily
laden press about the Blessed One, and He eases their
pain, comforts and teaches them, and points to the
better world beyond. He is no longer a demigod, but
the plain carpenter’s son of Nazareth, who speaks
simply to the simple.
Precisely because Rembrandt’s paintings were never ecclesiastical commissions but the ‘'outpourings of the heart,” he has shown, more than all religious painters, what a treasure of poetry, tenderness, kindness, and love slumber in the ancient legends. The purpose of Catholic religious painting was to create general types of Christianity. God must receive the faithful in His house with courtly splendour and with dazzling adorn- ment. This pompous and proselytising element, so predominant in the work of Rubens, is as distant as possible from Rembrandt. Expressing his sentiment
IRcmbcanbt
609
only, he relates biblical stories as we imagined them
when as children we sat at Christmas-time by grand-
mother's knee. Instead of the agitation of Rubens’s
works, with Rembrandt self-restraint prevails; instead
of the oppressive ecstacy of the Spaniards, a soulful
inwardness, something sad and suppressed. Although
he uses no gestures and no dramatic actions, he never-
theless expresses the most delicate emotions of the
soul. If Rubens’s art is like a palace with a showy
highly coloured facade, but without an interior where
human suffering could find refuge, so Rembrandt’s
works are a tresor des simples. To this discreet trend
of his art, which speaks only in whispers and makes
faint suggestions, his attitude towards colour corre-
sponds. In the older works when he was the warlike
Samson, he loved sharp contrast of dark shadows and
harsh light. In the later pictures which originated at
the time of his brief and happy love, the air also glitters
and gleams as if full of gold dust. Now a melancholy
greenish tone prevails ; a soft evening light whose mild
rays daintily and softly quiver through the gloom.
A spirit like Rembrandt’s was of course too com- plicated to express itself in a single direction only. Many other scenes chosen from Bible and legend show that woman still influenced his thoughts. He painted V eriumnus Deluding Pomona, Christ Forgiving the Adulteress, and a new version of Susanna, in which she is no longer alone, but the two old men in the back- ground gaze with quivering desire upon the young
39
6io
XTbe IRise of Dutch painting
woman. As in his younger days, he again works after
the feminine model. Often they are hideous women
and in such cases Rembrandt renders everything de-
formed in the sense of severe modern realism. As
formerly in his Lit jrangais, it now sometimes seems
as if he wished to conquer his passion for
women by representing actuality in its disgusting
ugliness.
His troubled soul at length found repose in the blandishments of his housekeeper Hendrikje Stoflfels, at that time twenty-three years of age. He first painted her in the portrait which survives in the Louvre, bedecked like Saskia with pearls and jewelry. In a picture of the National Gallery (London) she sits clothed only in a chemise, placing her foot in the water; the evening sun casts its rays upon the legs, the chemise, and the blond hair. In the next picture the model has become his beloved, and is depicted as a modern Bathsheba receiving a letter from Rembrandt, her David.
From this time something reposeful pervades Rem- brandt’s works. As he was happy again and enjoyed domestic comfort, his melancholy as well as his desire for women had disappeared. A simple woman, kind and self-sacrificing, was the comrade of his life; she provided for the household and occupied herself with Titus, who had become a fine lad. In the picture of the Kann collection (Paris) he seems a little prince of the Northland, a dreamy Hamlet. She had also
IRembran&t
6ii
brought into the house her mother and another relative,
a wild boy from the country.
These years were the most fruitful in the activity of Rembrandt’s life. After he had himself again found a home he etched those "‘intimate” portraits like that of Jan Six, in which the man and the home, the figure and its surroundings, are so skilfully interwoven. He was especially attracted by the peacefulness and quiet contemplation of the aged: that great repose which seems so serene, but in which the mighty stream of memory flows. The portrait of Hendrikje’s vener- able mother, with its mild and thoughtful expression, rises before us. In her he has painted the clarified, passionless repose which gradually became the pre- vailing characteristic of his being. In the etching of 1650 he has represented himself in no fantastic costume, but in an ordinary garb, his hat upon his head, stand- ing at the window absorbed in thought. Such is the Rembrandt to whom Hendrikje gave a new summer and who awaited a beautiful and peaceful autumn. He held himself more and more aloof from society and seldom left his home: that paradise which he had created for himself, and where, far from the banality of every-day life, he lived as a lonely aristocrat of the spirit.
But in the meanwhile the civil authorities had discov- ered that such a life offended against the law. On the 23d of July, 1654, Hendrikje received a summons to appear before the consistory to answer to the charge
6i2
Ubc IRtse of Dutch IPainting
of leading an immoral life with Rembrandt the
painter. Three times she was summoned but failed to
appear. Not until the fourth warning did she “ac-
knowledge her guilt and was severely punished there-
for, warned to repent, and forbidden to partake of the
Table of the Lord.” This scene also, the accusation
of Hendrikje by the neighbours before the authorities,
was transformed in Rembrandt’s mind into a biblical
picture: the Accusation of Joseph by Potiphars Wife.
The Egyptian woman is common rumour, bringing the
accusation with hypocritical indignation; Potiphar
listening with severe judicial mien, the Reformed con-
sistory; and poor Joseph, bashful, blushing like a girl,
and casting down his eyes, is the good Hendrikje.
This was the prelude of the dramawhich now followed. Rembrandt, through whose hands thousands had passed, suddenly became penniless and loaded with debts. All his earned and inherited fortune had gone, and even the fortune of his son Titus, which he managed as a guardian, had disappeared. He had promised the dying Saskia to be a good father to Titus, and in memory of this hour painted himself as Esau tenderly holding young Jacob in his arms. Now he had forgot- ten the claim of his first-born. Little Cornelia, the daughter of Hendrikje, with her rosy, blond, childish, face, had brought new sunshine into the house. So he painted himself as Jacob blessing Ephraim, the younger, and forgetting Manasseh, the elder. Rembrandt brooded over his troubles, and this mood is reflected in
IRembranbt
613
the picture of an architect at Cassel, in which an old
man with white, beautifully lighted hair sits at his
table covered with papers, lost in deep reflection. He
endeavoured to raise new sums of money; but the loans
which he wished to obtain were refused him. He
himself was responsible for his fate, and the public of
Amsterdam, which had already dropped him, could
wash its hands in innocence. At this juncture he
painted the picture of Pilate IV ashing his Hands in
indifferent calm.
In response to the pressure of his creditors on the 26th of July, 1656, he was declared a bankrupt. He who had such a horror of all business matters had to negotiate with the bailiffs. Externally everything seemed indifferent to him. He even had the repose to etch the portraits of the two men appointed to conduct the bankrupt proceedings, the porter of the bankruptcy court, Haaring, and his son, the auctioneer. But to the same year also belongs the etching of Christ Ex- posed to the Multitude. When the public posters on street corners announced that the collection of the painter van Ryn would be sold at auction; when tailors and glove makers appeared in the quiet house of the Breestraat in order to examine the exhibition of his collections, there arose in Rembrandt’s mind the picture of Christ at the Pillory surrounded by a mock- ing, plebeian throng. At the same time he etched the Stoning of St. Stephen, the protomartyr; with a thought of himself as one of the many great men whom the
6 14 Zbc IRtse of Butcb ipaintina
ignorant world had since then stoned. Rembrandt, who wished to found a new religion in art, was, while he lingered in the realm of his thoughts, thus denied by his people. So he paints the Denial of Peter and Moses in wild anger breaking the tables of the law.
A rich shoemaker bought his house. He himself led a nomadic life until Hendrikje, associated with Titus, began an art shop in order to support the family by the sale of his etchings. In the Rosengracht, at the entrance of the Jewish quarter where Rembrandt had formerly lingered so much in the antiquaries’ shops, lay the little house of which they took possession, and where his last works were created. For although he was robbed of his possessions; although he sat in a poor, bare attic room and his meal consisted of herring, cheese, and bread, Rembrandt struggled on. “ I will not let thee go except thou bless me,” are the words which Jacob spoke when he wrestled with the angel; and with this picture in the Berlin Gallery the last period of Rembrandt’s artistic activity begins.
His power is unbroken, but the sentiment and the colour of the picture is different. He no longer paints the magic harmonies which flooded his house in the Breestraat, but the cold, sober daylight of little attic rooms — no longer gorgeous garments, but rags. Every- thing is attuned to gloomy brown and blackish-grey tones. His art is that of a poor man who has himself experienced Solomon’s '‘All is vanity.” In a picture of the Louvre (1660) he stands before the easel in an or-
1RembranJ)t
615
dinary brown coat, with a white cap upon his head, his face unshaven, his skin withered, his hair grey, but with brush and palette in his hand still painting. To himself he must have seemed a Franciscan in his brown woollen cowl, and it is therefore no accident that one of his last etchings is dedicated to St. Francis, il poverello, who also had nothing of his own. With this brown woollen cloak which he himself wore, he also draped his models. He drew it over the mother of Hendrikje, who also has suffered much and has become even more wrinkled, more careworn, and kills time by paring her nails. He draped with it the old man whom he painted as St. Matthew listening breathlessly to the word of the angels, and over the tired pilgrim of the Weber Gallery. In the former painting the theme is inspiration which the human soul receives from heaven; in the latter, the fervour of the prayer which comes from the depths of the soul. But Christ es- pecially, the great sufferer, the God of the lonely and suffering, again becomes the centre of thought to him whom fate had cast down; as in the picture of the dispersed Demidoff collection, the suffering, downcast man, with the mild, kindly eyes, and the Ecce Homo in Aschaffenburg — that phantom-like picture with the expression of a supernatural repose.
One more commission, although as a charity, was assigned to him. A former pupil, the marine painter, Jan van de Capelle, who as the possessor of a dye-shop was known to the members of the clothier’s guild, ob-
6i6
Zbc IRise of Butcb painting
tained for him the commission to portray that august
body. Rembrandt, who in 1642 had transformed a sober
group of soldiers into a fairy picture, fulfilled this task
without thinking of experiments, just as it had been
assigned him and as earlier artists had done before.
But such commissions seem to have been followed by
evil fortune. As in 1642, after the completion of the
Nighi Watch, Saskia had died, so in 1664, after the
completion of De Stalmeesters Hendrikje breathed
her last. As if in foreboding that he would survive
quite alone, he had drawn as early as 1659 the etching
Youth Surprised by Death: a young woman and a young
man, Hendrikje and Titus, in whose way a skeleton
with an hour-glass steps. Now that Hendrikje was
dead, his own end rapidly approached. His last pic-
tures show in an awful manner the changes in him.
His face is puffed, his cheeks are flabby, and his ex-
pression contorted by pain. The bandage about his
cap indicates chronic headache, and the eyes,
dimmed by drink, seem half blinded. Weyermann
describes how he slept during the day and wandered
about in the taverns at night: and the distinguished
Chevalier Sandrart saw him wandering with ex-
pressionless eye among the second-hand stores of the
poorer quarter.
His eyes will no longer permit him to etch; but the brush, or at least the mahlstock, he does not relinquish. He applies colours with a knife, paints reliefs. I'hus originated the Family Group of the Brunswick Gallery
REMBRANDT
THE ARTIST AND HIS WIFE
Dresden Gallery
1Rembran5t
617
(whomever it may represent) , and a strange picture in
the Amsterdam Museum, in which he the lonely man
thinks of the aged Boaz, leading home a youthful bride.
His last dated picture (1668) is the Crucifixion of Christ
in the Darmstadt Gallery. While one soldier fastens
the fetters upon the Redeemer another draws him up
by a rope. “It is finished!'’ He died upon the 8th
of October, 1669, Titus also having preceded him.
An inventory established that excepting his artist’s
materials and woollen clothes, he left nothing behind
him. His life was a tragedy of fate, the tragedy of the
first modern artist, it has been called.
Chapter I.— The End of Dutch Painting
I.— The Genre Painters
WITHIN the bounds of Dutch art, that of Rembrandt stands isolated. However much his pupils superficially resemble him, his works are the revelation of a genius, theirs are merely good oil paintings. It is related that Rembrandt in the begin- ning devoted much time to his teaching. Himself the most individual of all artists, he encouraged individual- ity in others, and had the atelier in which they laboured partitioned off, that no one might influence the others. But while he protected them from each other, he could not rescue them from the power of his own personality. Whatever was transferable, they adopted: fabrics, costumes, and the treatment of light. In the beginning, when he was the' most admired painter of Holland, it was their highest pride to have their works taken for his; but later, when the favour of the masses turned from him, they trod more conservative paths, along the broad road of the easily comprehensible.
As early as 1630 Jan Livens and Willem de Poorter were inmates of his studio at Leyden. The former, whose principal work is a Sacrifice of Ahraham at Brunswick, is also known by his woodcuts, which were formerly ascribed to Rembrandt. De Poorter’s Sol- omon s Offering to False Gods is derived from Rem- brandt’s Simeon of 1631. Jacob Adriaen Backer, one of the first to study under him at Amsterdam, became a portrait painter, and all his life remained true to Rembrandt’s style of 1632. His portraits are powerful, simple, and objective works. Ferdinand Bol, who in his first paintings (the Flight into Egypt, the Angels at the Grave of Christ, and Tobias) often adopted Rembrandt’s figures, became later a tame and com- prehensible gentleman, by which policy he won the favour of the public to the same extent that Rembrandt sacrificed it by his eccentricities. By means of beauti- ful types, gleaming columns, and majestic draperies he sought to create in his pictures the impression of distinction, which was missed in those of Rembrandt. From Rembrandt to van Dyck: such is the path tra- versed by Govaert Flinck: and as this Flemish, im- pressive tendency corresponded with the wishes of his sitters, he became the most popular portraitist of princely personages and corporations. Gerbrand van den Eeckhout remained truer to the principles of Rembrandt. Such pictures as the Adulteress of the Amsterdam Museum were influenced by Rembrandt not only in subject, but in treatment of light. Jan Victoors is drier and more prosaic; Solomon Koninck is in his pictures of hermits little more than a copyist.
620
Ube ]£nb of Butcb painting
At the beginning of the decade following 1650, on the
other hand, several excellent masters issued from the
school of Rembrandt. Women peeling vegetables,
young girls standing dreamily at the window, old
women at the spinning-wheel, carcasses of animals; such
is the content of the quiet, delicate, and very modern
pictures of Nicolas Maes. The light plays upon the
red table-cloth, grey walls, and bluish white jugs. In
pictures like his family scene with a little drummer boy,
every chronological estimate is silent: they might be
exhibited to-day and signed Christoph Bischop. Not
until later, after he had visited Antwerp, did he begin to
give to his portraits something of a theatrical dignity.
Carel Fabritius, who died at the age of thirty at the
explosion of the Delft powder magazine, would, if he
had lived longer, have probably become one of the
most important masters of Holland. His few pictures
belong to the pictorial miracles of the school. In all
of them a man speaks who did not imitate Rem-
brandt, but followed independently the magic of light-
movements and the charm of refined colour-effects.
His Starling in The Hague Museum, especially, has as
modern an effect as a study by Degas. The best
landscape painter of the school is Philips Koninck, to
whom Rembrandt had revealed the poetry of the wide
plain. Covered by low shrubbery, the flat landscape
stretches endlessly away; the air is clear and affords
a view into the far distance. Another follower of
Rembrandt was Jan van de Capelle a marine painter,
■JTbe (Bcnrc painters
621
the most insinuating and subtle colourist of all of his
class in Holland. While others had to paint pictures
of the ships for their owners, Capelle, who was a rich
man and only used the brush for his own pleasure,
could place weight upon the purely artistic. He has
interpreted the flitting play of light more delicately
than the objective and prosaic Dutch painters other-
wise do. Aart de Gelder had the courage to enter ,
Rembrandt’s studio in those years when Rembrandt
had become the laughing stock of children. As de
Poorter reflects the detailed, youthful style of the
master, de Gelder shows that of the half-blind sufferer,
who could only labour with mahlstock and palette-
knife. Many pictures by him, like Abraham with the
Angels, the Ecce Homo at Dresden, and Boa{ in Ber-
lin are of such powerful and broad technique that
they were formerly considered works of the age of
Rembrandt.
It is, by the way, only an echo of Rembrandt’s spirit if his pupils occasionally paint biblical subjects. All other Dutchmen knew nothing of the dream life, but rested firmly and contentedly upon the earth, happy in their mediocrity: quiet settlers who tilled their little fields with diligence and intelligence.
In spite of its world-wide commerce Holland was at bottom a philistine little country. Even to-day, he who treads the halls of one of the old patrician houses of Amsterdam is amazed at the precise neatness, cleanliness, and order, and at the philistine ennui and
622
TLbc }6n^ of Butcb paintina
the self-satisfied comfort which reign there. All the
copper utensils shine, and in the great chests which are
carefully dusted every morning lies the substantial
store of linen lasting for generations, which was the
pride of our grandmothers. Along the walls, as cor-
rectly placed as soldiers, stand the chairs; and upon the
panelling of the walls, arranged with equal regularity,
are the faiences, the silver flagons and mugs. Above
hang the pictures, small cabinet pieces, which are dusted
with the same care as the furniture, and in their colour
harmonise with the soft light of the rooms. Delft
ware, very carefully executed line-engravings, and
maps, reminding us of the world-wide possessions of
a seafaring people, are also displayed. In the garden
nearly everything is straight-lined, stiff, or laid out in
circles; the trees as well as the sod; and in rectangular
carefully tended flower-beds tulips and hyacinths
grow. Even the facades of the houses gleam in snowy
whiteness; for they are painted once or twice a year,
thanks to the careful cleanliness which is a proverbial
characteristic of the Hollanders. Everything in the
country shows order and a sense for the practical ; clean
houses, as well as the well-trimmed rows of trees grow-
ing in faultless regularity about the quays. Even the
landscape is divided by streams, canals, and the straight
boundaries of fields as if in accordance with a mathe-
matical design.
The art of Holland harmonises with the general character of the country. Even to-day its painting is
XTbe Genre painters 623
somewhat bourgeois and limited in its self-contented phlegm, inimicable to change. It possesses neither fantasy nor poetry. One breathes the soft, regular warmth of the great fragrant stoves, which stand in the wealthier Dutch houses. A contemplative contented- ness and a comfortable provincialism characterise everything. The painters confine themselves to the representation of their home, the stately harbours of their ports, the quiet simplicity of their life, the heavy weight of their cattle, and the fertile soil of their fields. Strangers to all revolutions, to all impetuous boldness, they follow their thoughtful temperament and form a quiet nation in which no tumult sounds. Everything is tasteful and of an almost tiresome excellence. As they paint to-day, they painted two centuries ago. Every one has his small field which he tills un- ceasingly, and paints one picture which he repeats all his life.
Genre-painting, which in the beginning found its subjects only in scenes of soldiers’ life, was greatly ex- tended to include all life — progressed from soldiers to the portrayal of the peasantry, and then to the repre- sentation of city life.
It is difficult to acquire a taste for the peasant pictures of the seventeenth century. Since the days of Millet we have gained too serious a conception of the ethical importance of art and of man’s labour to find pleasure in the puppet-show of the old Dutch masters. The mighty words, ‘‘I labour,” which first gave to
624
Ubc ]Ent) of Dutch paintino
peasant-painting its significance, had not penetrated
their consciousness. Not one of all these painters dares
to plunge into the depths of life. They make a mum-
mery of peasant life, and let their heroes experience so
much pleasure that the question of their sustenance is
not even touched. No one seeks the people at labour,
in the field, behind the plough and harrow, with the
scythe, spade, or hoe. Drinking, revelry and the
dance, quarrelling and cracking of skulls are the only
themes. The romances of roguery which at that time
appeared as a special branch of literature afford a
parallel. The types also are strangely alike. It is not
to be supposed that there were ever such stupid-look-
ing peasants, such sawed-off, thick-nosed beings who
vegetated in half-animal stupidity. It is likewise
incredible that peasants appeared so charming and
clean as they appear in other pictures; that they had
such clean nails, and trod a measure with the dainti-
ness of a cavalier, taking a dancing lesson. The latter
made the peasant artistic by endowing him with the
charms of the salon; the former by treating him as a
fool over whose stupidity and coarseness the refined
burghers could laugh.
The first path was taken by the Flemings. When David Teniers, inspired by the successes of the Dutch, began to paint peasant pictures, he chose the most dapper youths and prettiest girls; he idealised them and gave them a touch of distinction, and made the peasant popular as an artistic subject by paring his
Ube 0enre painters
625
nails and smoothing down his coarseness. All act like
well-bred people; they dance, skip, and sing; but with
decency and reserve. However extended the repertoire
of his figures appears, they are in truth only changing
marionettes, whose words are written down, whose
gestures are prescribed, actors in peasant’s garb, who
never forget that the public before which they appear
consists of very proper ladies and gentlemen.
Adriaen van Gstade, who stands at the opposite pole, tries to raise a laugh by the stupidity of the types, the drollness of their mien, and the comical situation. Boorishness and good-natured stupidity is his domain. Beginning with tavern quarrels and their rude scenes in the spirit of Brouwer, he later yields to Dutch phlegm, and substitutes contemplative peasant in- teriors for the debauches of an earlier period. The people no longer rage and quarrel, but eat, drink, and smoke in the tavern. A fiddler goes through the village, and by his music attracts the people to the window; or the family sits listening in an arbour before the house door. Although a reflective, peaceful, and idyllic tone pervades his last works, he cannot dispense with the cheap joke of distorting the heads into long- nosed caricatures.
His younger brother, Isaac van Ostade, who was par- ticularly occupied with the traffic of horses and waggons, in front of rural taverns, is more serious and objective. Horsemen approach, the peasant-carts make a halt, horses are being shod, and beggars loiter about the road.
40
. 626
Zbc JEuD of Dutch IPaintina
As he avoids constrained effects and approaches
things as a simple observer, his pictures are more
sympathetic to us than the others. We can no longer
appreciate the vulgarity and cheap jokes of Cornelis
Bega, Richard Brakenburgh, and Cornelis Dusart.
Their “hearty humour and vulgar clownishness no
longer provoke laughter, and their paintings show that
along these paths progress was no longer possible.
To say nothing of the circumstance that the blunt tone
which prevailed in the school of Frans Hals no longer
found appreciation in the proper Holland of the decade
following 1650, the trouble was that the painters
discovered no new traits in peasant life. The stupid,
coarse, and crude remained their circumscribed domain.
As they saw in the peasant only the voracious, drunken,
quarrelsome boor, the peasant picture of the seven-
teenth century degenerated into a hollow farce, and
not until the nineteenth could it, borne by a new social
and literary movement, be seriously revived.
Jan Steen, the Moliere of Dutch painting, has at least done the service of having enlarged its subject- matter. In his portrait of himself he appears grinning with a tankard at his side. This hilarious trend, a boorish, Falstaffian humour pervades most of his works. The tavern is the place where as a man and a painter he is most at home. Peasants quarrel and throw mugs at each other's heads : a drunken man is dragged home by his comrades: a quack, in front of a tavern, offers his remedies, or an old scamp courts the waitress. But
ADRIAEN VAN OSTADE
THE OLD FIDDLER
Metropolitan Museum, N. Y,
Xlbe ©enre ipalntecs
627
the jolly landlord of Leyden was not exclusively a
painter of tavern humour. He also paints children’s
festivals and scenes of the toilette, serenades and
weddings in which acute, mischievous, and witty traits
replace crude clumsiness. At times he has even a
didactic and moralising air, and he swings a satiric
scourge almost like Hogarth. As it was won, so it is
spent; As the old sang, so the young pipe; What avails
light and spectacles, if the owl does not wish to see; Here
no medicine will help, she is love-sick — such are the
characteristic titles of the works in which he satisfied
those who demanded artistic qualities in a picture, as
well as those who wished to read amusing stories from
it
A finer variety of genre-painting is that which, look- ing aside from all narrative and representation of character, places the weight upon artistic qualities exclusively. All of these painters were jesters and entertained the correct mynheers by narrating the dissipation and crude conduct of the people. Some did it in the form of crude drollery : others were quieter and more sedate. This drastic crudity was followed by the epigram, the farce by the novel. But the start- ing-point still remained the anecdote. The poetry of the simple and the charm of the purely pictorial had not yet been discovered : for the Dutch burghers appreciated the subject-matter rather than artistic qualities. The problem was to educate the burgher to art. So the clowns were followed by the painters. The
628
Zbc ]£nb of H)utcb palntina
themes became indifferent — simple scenes from every-
day life without action or episode — and the beauty
of the painting lies in its purely technical qualities.
There the people grin, gaze at the beholder, and play a
comedy for him; here they are among themselves and
do nothing interesting, but dream, read, write, make
music, or amuse themselves. From the colour and
treatment of light alone the sentiment is developed.
The conquest of the purely artistic was made easier by the circumstance that some painters came into contact with a more aristocratic culture. Gerhard Terborg, who stands at the head of this group, prob- ably issued from the school of Frans Hals. A blackish- grey tone, resembling the scale preferred by Frans Hals in his later years, gives to his youthful works their individuality, in contrast to the light and shade of others. About his figures he arranged, as did also the masters of Hals’s school, skulls, hour-glasses, and books into veritable still-life. Soon, however, other masters entered his horizon. A cavalier and an enter- prising spirit, he went in 1635 to the court of Charles 1. of England, where he was attracted by the female portraits of van Dyck, with their gleaming, milk- white satin robes. In 1648 he was present at the peace of Munster which he commemorated in the picture of the London National Gallery: and this residence at Munster had the further result that, at the suggestion of the Spanish ambassador, he tried his fortune in Madrid. Although Velasquez was at this time at
XTbe (Benre painters
629
Rome, his paintings hung in the Alcazar, and the later
works of Terborg show the deep impression which the
spirit and the colour of Velasquez made upon him.
Distinguished gentlemen of almost Spanish grande^^a
are presented in his portraits, as with Velasquez dressed
in black, standing out in full figure from the pearl-grey
wall. It is the Spanish court manner translated into
the Dutch miniature style. Likewise in his genre-
paintings he has adopted not only the yellow of the
great Spaniard, but his much-admired pink, his mystic
grey, and his deep black. He also preserves an aris-
tocratic dignity and a cool reserve which distinguish
him from the mass of crude Hollanders as a knightly,
almost Spanish figure.
Although the days of war were past, Terborg re- mained the painter of soldiers, partly because the lieutenant had a sort of knightly halo for the Dutch burgher, partly because bright uniforms, swords, and plumed hats, contrasted with the white satin dresses and ermine-lined silk jackets of charming ladies, afforded possibilities of distinguished harmonies of colour. These demands of colour alone determined the content of his pictures. A dapper trumpeter as a love-messenger delivers a letter, awaits the answer, and presents the message to his master, or officers sit with ladies in gallant tete-Mete. Even the celebrated picture which Goethe describes as Fatherly Advice shows in truth nothing but a man with a plumed hat, beside a lady in black and in front of a lady in
630
XLbc lEnt) of H)utcb painting
white. His paintings of still-life are usually arranged
about silver cups, finely cut glasses, silver chandeliers.
Delft porcelain, and the most costly products of foreign
applied art which came to Holland by way of the col-
onies. If, instead of love, music forms the theme,
the performers do not sing and fiddle as with Ostade
and Steen; the scenes are laid exclusively in the salon
and in select society. The lute, whose soft silvery
sound suits well the silver tone of the paintings, is used
either for solos or else in duets between ladies and
gentlemen. Distinguished, cool, and placid are the
proper epithets for all of his pictures.
One other painter alone has the same Spanish effect: Michel Sweerts, who is known by a single but very fine picture in the Munich Pinakothek. Four men are re- presented sitting in a tavern; yet one hardly observes the figures, but only the harmony of the black and whitish grey tones. In an etching known to be by his hand Sweerts calls himself eques et pictor, and it seems strange that we do not know more of this knightly painter.
As devoid of subject as Terborg’s are Pieter de Hooch’s pictures. A few people are gathered in a room in front of the house door, in a court, or in a garden; a woman reads a letter, sits sewing or rocking the cradle, gives alms to a beggar-boy, or arranges her little daughter’s hair. What charms the master is chiefly the sunlight,which, like a stream of gold-dust, pours into the softly lighted rooms or gloomy courtyards. He is
GERARD TERBORG
OFFICER WRITING A LETTER
Dresden Gallery
Zbc Genre painters
631
especially fond of varying the effects of illumination
by displaying a view through several rooms. In the
foreground, perhaps, is a room into which the sun shines
brightly, and through the open door one looks into
another which is even more brightly illuminated, or
perhaps pervaded by a soft twilight; or the eye falls
upon a shady garden and the street beside it is flooded
by warm sunlight. In his charming simplicity de Hooch
is a very delicate master. Without thinking of prais-
ing the artist, one would like to sit in these cozy rooms,
where the sunshine falls upon the floor and chests and
the kettle hums softly over the glimmering fire.
He had two doubles who were formerly often confused with him: Esaias Boursse and Johannes Janssens. Their difference from de Hooch consists only in the circum- stance that the people whom they paint are less well- to-do. His belong to the wealthy bourgeoisie, whose houses are paved with marble tiles, and contain heavy, handsome furniture. The rooms of the people whom Boursse and Janssens paint are poorer and barer. They are paved with red brick, and instead of the warm glowing tones of de Hooch, greenish-brown colours prevail.
Jan van der Meer is the master of the brightly flaring sunlight. His teacher, Carel Fabritius, the refined pupil of Rembrandt, had directed his attention to light- painting; but the problems which he attempted are quite different from those of de Hooch. The latter paints entire forms with full-length figures; and the
632
Ubc Bnb of Dutch painting
light pours through the door, bathing everything
evenly in soft tones. Van der Meer, on the other
hand, places the figures near the side of the picture
and presents them in half-size, depicting only a part
of the room. The light does not enter through a door
but through a window at the side; and as the figures
sit quite in the foreground they remain in the gloom,
while the middle and the background flare in bright
sunlight. The scale of colour is also different.
Whereas de Hooch’s pictures are attuned to a dark red,
van der Meer loves a bright, misty blue and a delicate
citron-yellow; a map with black bevelled frame is
generally on the wall, upon whose fine pearl grey it
forms a piquant white and black spot.
Nicolas Koedijk, Pieter van Slingeland, Quirin B re kelenkam, Jacob Ochterveld, and Nicolas Verkolje should further be mentioned; and Gabriel Metsu in- cludes them all. The themes of Terborg (ladies at the toilette, officers, trumpeters, and musical entertain- ments) alternate with the doctor’s visits of Steen and with the fish and vegetable markets. Although Metsu’s activity included but a few years, he illus- trated the entire life of Holland, that of the people as well as of more distinguished circles.
nil, ^Tbe XanDacapc painters
Equally popular with genre pictures were animal sub- jects. The raising of cattle was an important pursuit in Holland, and even to-day the land
II.— The Landscape Painters
633
resembles a great farm-yard; a soft carpet of turf
spreads over hill and dale; clover and vegetable fields,
splendid meadows stretch out, and everywhere
are pastures surrounded by hedges. Fat oxen and
sheep, as white as though they had just been washed, lie
upon the grass. At the head of these animal painters
stands Paul Potter, who painted with Dutch objectivity
the mighty brown masses of flesh and the slow, heavy
tread of the cattle. They are essentially Dutch, for
they know neither passions, nor struggles, nor move-
ment, but chew the cud phlegmatically or lie down in
comfortable repose. Round about the greenest of
meadows extends, and above it is a mighty heaven,
which shades imperceptibly into the sea. Adriaen van
de Velde is more mobile and coquettish; he has less
power and more grace. Instead of the bright green
spring colours of Potter, a golden chiaroscuro pervades
his works. The cattle, with Potter the principal theme,
are with him only a part of the landscape.
Pictures of horses were painted during the first half of the century by Gerrit Bleeker; he was followed by Palamades, who painted cavalry conflicts of stormy movement, and by Pieter van Laar, a healthy and powerful master who found charming things to paint in the neighbourhood of Rome in front of the decaying smithies and taverns. The best known of this group is the graceful and elegant Philips Wouwerman. Soldiers having their horses shod; gypsies, and peasants going to market ; ladies and gentlemen riding to a deer
634
Zbc ]£nC) of Dutch painting
or falcon hunt; distinguished companies of hunters at
breakfast, or cavaliers in a riding-school — such is the
content of his pictures. The execution is clever and
distinguished. In order to attain an interesting spot
of light colour, he usually places a white horse in the
foreground. Poultry found its specialist in Melchior
Hondekoeter, whose poultry yards, turkeys, peacocks,
and ducks are to be seen in all galleries.
The landscape-painters progressed along the paths which Esaias van de Velde and Hercules Seghers had trod. As the popular style demanded such additions these earlier masters could hardly dispense with the appropriate figures in landscape — such as riders, fisher- men, foot-passengers, and skaters. Now the figures disappear, and the landscape is raised to an independent artistic production. At the same time that Spinoza proclaimed his pantheism, landscape-painting achieved its earliest triumphs.
As regards colour the Dutch landscapes differ from their predecessors in that beauty of colour is superseded by beauty of tone: a peculiarity which is partially to be explained by the foggy atmosphere of Holland which subdues all colours, and partly by the reaction against the school of Brueghel. The highest aim of the Flemish masters had been fresh gaiety of colour. By introducing three tones, brown, green, and blue, for the fore-, middle-, and backgrounds, they changed nature into a shimmering, many-coloured stage, in the midst of which gaudy scenes gay little figures' and
XTbe Xanbscape painters
635
gleaming animals wander about. In the Dutch pic-
tures, on the other hand, all contrasts of colour and
indeed all pronounced colours are avoided. The bright
green of the trees, as well as the blue of the sky and
the colours of the figures, are all subordinated to a dark,
usually brown, colour scheme. The conception of
colour which had been developed in painting small
interior pictures is determinative also for the landscape.
Jan van Goyen, the earliest of this group, is most at home on the coast of the Zuyder-Zee and the banks of the Maas. Rivers with lazy, rolling waves, with boats gliding silently to the sea, with fishers drawing their nets to the land are his usual themes. A moist and misty brown is his characteristic feature. Solomon Ruysdael uses brighter colours, especially in his foliage, which is not greyish brown but a yellowish green. Shining waters, in which his favourite tree, the willow, is reflected, occur most frequently in his pictures.
His nephew and pupil, Jacob Ruysdael, is rightfully considered the greatest Dutch landscape painter. A majestic “gallery’’ beauty which shows to advantage on parade is characteristic of all of his pictures. At the same time he is more versatile than the others, and has painted everything which his home offered: oaks a century old and hills covered with heather; ponds and stagnant water; deeply shaded woods in which herds graze; and wild waterfalls roaring through dark pines. Ruysdael’s pictures, indeed, reflect the fortunes of his life. He belonged with Hals and Rembrandt to those
636
Ube 3Enb of 2)utcb patntina
artists who were not understood by their time. He
passed his last years lonely and careworn, and ended
his life in a hospital. Of these gloomy experiences his
pictures seem to tell us. He began quietly and peace-
fully, painting the sand-dunes in the environs of Am-
sterdam, tiled loofs, fields, shrubbery, and the wide
plain reposing under a bright and silver grey sky. Then
came the time of quiet, self-conscious power: great
broad-topped oaks which defy every storm and raise
their mighty branches to heaven. Then the struggle
and the lost illusions are reflected in sceneries of de-
struction, a terrified nature and the devastation of
the elements. Cold, black storm-clouds, through
whose darkness livid lightning quivers, gather in the
sky; streaming rain pours down upon the ruins of a
church; waterfalls foam over rocks, from the lonely
darkness of the forest, bearing cliffs and shivered pine
trees along with them. Sometimes the storm shakes
the crowns of bare, withered trees; the surging waves
toss about little fisher-huts, and stones torn loose are
shattered with a shrill noise upon the seashore. Finally
came the time of loneliness, of melancholy resignation.
He leads us into the darkness of the primeval wood;
a white cover of snow lies like a funeral shroud over the
earth; in gloomy brown the sky forms a vault over
weather-beaten gravestones; a tired mountain brook
seeks its way over broken tombstones.
As Meindert Hobbema also could not have subsisted as a painter, he accepted a position- as tax gatherer.
JACOB VAN RUYSDAEL
THE WATERFALL
Dresden Gallery
Ubc Xaut)5cape ipainters
637
to protect himself from want. Modest in his require-
ments and content with little, he passed his life as a
happy father of a family. His modesty, happiness, and
contentment are reflected in his art. No surging
waves and threatening clouds, no gloomy pines and
melancholy ruins, but peasant’s houses, mills, and quiet
brooks and foliage. In idyllic peace, in sunny joy-
fulness the earth lies before us. He paints roads leading
to quiet villages; sunny field-paths which are lost in the
green; ponds where quacking ducks bathe and water-
lilies raise their heads. Red-tiled roofs gleam through
the trees, and in the quiet cool of the woods a mill
paddles and rays of sunlight scurry through the foliage.
In this regard also he differs from Ruysdael, that nature
has with him something joyful and friendly. Ruysdael,
the lonely man, painted solitude, graveyards, primeval
forests, thick impenetrable underbrush. With Hob-
bema rocking boats near the shore betray the presence
of fishermen near by. The smoke ascending softly
from peaceful huts relates of the people who live in
them:
“In einem kiihlen Grunde Da geht ein Miihlenrad,”
such is the sentiment of his idyllic and friendly art.
Of the other painters each preferred a landscape and an hour which appealed most distinctly to his sentiment. It is characteristically Dutch, the way in which they follow their quiet temperaments, always repeating, without need of change, the same things.
638
Ubc lEnO ot Dutch painting
A sandy road and an old stump covered with ivy; a
fallen tree-trunk near by, and on the other side a view
of sandy hills: such is the ever-recurring content of the
pictures of Jan Wynants. Aelbert Cuyp is the painter
of the sky. The earth lies there like a brown mass of
copper under a blazing red steel cupola. Whether he
paints grazing cattle or camp scenes, the principal
theme is not the landscape, but the mighty dome of
heaven forming the crimson, gleaming vault above it.
Van der Neer is celebrated as the painter of twilight
and the night. He paints skaters enjoying themselves
in the foggy winter afternoon on the ice; conflagrations
quivering through the gloom of night; and oftener still
the moonlight spreading itself in reddish-brown har-
monies over lonely dunes. The eye of the Hollanders
was so attuned to brown that even the moonlight did
not appear to them in a silvery blue mist, but as golden
light in deep, warm tones. Antonis Waterloo, master
of the forest glades, and Jan Beerstraten, the master
of the snow landscapes, might futher be mentioned,
without exhausting the list of Dutch landscape
painters. he whole country' seems to have been
divided among the painters, every one of whom had
his own plot which according to his abilities he tilled.
After having described Holland, they occupied themselves with foreign countries, and by the interest in the subject sought to give their paintings new power of attraction. Allart Everdingen, the painter of Norway, had, during his wanderings in the Scandi-
XTbe OLanbscape painters
639
navian mountains, filled his sketch-books with the
studies which he afterwards used at Haarlem and
Amsterdam. His celebrity was due rather to the
novelty of the subject than to artistic qualities. For at
bottom he is a mere declaimer who speaks in strong
hyperboles. Gloomy fir-trees stand upon abrupt and
towering cliffs over which a torrent flows ; or weather-
beaten ruins tower upon pointed mountain tops. In
endeavouring to make the wild landscape of Norway
more powerful and effective than it really is, he
crowded cliffs and waterfalls into impossible com-
positions. As he continued throughout his life to
make use of the studies which he had made in his
youth, his last pictures are only schematic repetitions.
Hermann Saftleven depicted the valley of the Rhine; and Frans Post made a voyage in 1637 to Brazil with Count Maurice of Nassau, painted South American landscapes with brown, half-naked people, white tents, palms, and tropical sunlight — pictures which might as well belong to the time of Bellermann and Eduard Hildebrandt as in the seventeenth century. But Italy in especial again became the promised land. Jan Both, Hermann Swanefeld, Nicolas Berchem, Hendrik Mommers, Karel Dujardin, Johannes Lingelbach, Jan Asselyn, Adam Pynaker, Jan Griffier, and many others began anew the pilgrimages to the South, and painted the solemn lines and glowing light of the Campagna. That the subject of their pictures was one of tiresome monotony can be explained, as in the case of Ever-
640
Zbc Bub of Dutch paintina
dingen, by the fact that the contents of their portfolios
were soon exhausted. Roman peasants clothed with
goatskin, peasant women riding astride of asses, shep-
herds, muleteers, brigands, and bagpipers, with an old
Roman aqueduct, a broken marble column, a temple,
or the fragment of a 'statue in the background; of
such materials they constructed their landscapes, like
mathematicians testing different combinations of a
row of figures.
In addition to landscape, marine painting was equally popular, as might be expected from the important part which the sea played in Dutch life. Simon de Vlieger, Willem van de Velde, Reynier Nooms, Abra- ham Storck, and Ludolf Bakhuyzen are the most cele- brated names in this branch. Refined subtleties need not be expected in their works. They did not suc- ceed in rendering the restlessness of the waves in motion, or the reflection of the water. In fact, they think far less of sentiment than of ships. Their aim is to satisfy the professional knowledge of the Amsterdam merchants, and they therefore regard the ship with the eye of a ship-owner, who examines whether every mast and every plank is properly placed, and the sea with the eye of a captain, who calculates whether a voyage will be successful.
Jacob Berckheyde and Emanuel de Witte painted the interiors of the whitewashed Reformed churches, with the light streaming through high glass windows and the worshippers filling the naves. Gerrit Berckheyde and
MEINDERT HOBBEMA
AVENUE OF MIDDELHARNAIS
National Gallery ^ London
Ube Xanbscape ipattitcis
641
Jan van der Hey den are the painters of Dutch streets
lined with red brick houses, of quays, canals, and
straight rows of trees. When the name Weenix is
mentioned, a discrimination should be made between
Jan Baptista Weenix the father, and Jan Weenix the
son. The former lived four years in Italy, and painted
pictures of the Campagna with shepherds and ancient
ruins; the name of the latter is inseparable from^the
thought of a dead hare, about which, his favourite,
animal, he arranges dead peacocks, swans, pheasants,
partridges, ducks, hunting-knives, and guns. To the
left a large vase or a reddish-brown curtain, to the right
a view of a park, forms the background.
The number of ‘'breakfast painters’’ is inexhaustible. Abraham Beijeren, who painted fruits, oysters, lobsters, and glasses; Marten Simon, the painter of partridges, Jacop Gillig of fishes, and Willem Kalf whose subjects were goblets, books, and shells, may be selected from the mass. As Holland was the land of flower-culture, flower painters like Jan and Cornelis de Heem, Jan Huysum, and Rachel Ruysch found abundant occupa- tion. One pays more attention to the harmony of colours, another to botanical exactitude; a third im- presses his patrons by painting insects upon the flowers in sufficiently detailed manner to be observed under a microscope. It is as difficult to make a selection among the Dutch painters as it is to characterise the individ- uals. They are united by a remarkable family re- semblance and characterised by an artistic technique
41
642 Ube Bnb of Dutch ipaintin^
which clothes the humblest object with pictorial charm.
III.— Court Atmosphere
It cannot however remain concealed that since 1650 Dutch artistic products became more extensive than intensive. Great and powerful masters are no longer active, and the few who did survive to a later time fared as did Hals and Rembrandt. Prudent painters sought some other means of support than painting. Goyen speculated with old pictures, with tulips and houses; Jan Steen, his stepson, was an inn- keeper; Hobbema was a collector of taxes, Pieter de Hooch a bailiff; Jan van de Capelle conducted a dye- shop, and Adriaen van de Velde was a linen draper. Others, like Ruysdael, ended in a hospital or stood upon the list of bankrupts; but it was just these who brought life, spirit, and motion into monotonous artistic activity.
After having been the refuge of freedom Holland became in course of years a land of shopkeepers. The rugged race of statesmen, naval heroes, and colony- founders died out, and a generation of rich bankers took their place, who impressed art also with- the pedantic principles which formed the content of their philosophy of life. Just as correct as the lives of the mynheers, just as clear and free of dust as the Dutch rooms, the pictures must be. It pleased them to take a magnifying-glass in their hand and discover things
Court Htmospbere
643
invisible to the naked eye. The result of such
aesthetics was that soulless, smooth, and over-detailed
painting which found its first representative in Gerhard
Dou.
Dou was the pride of his nation, and the best-paid painter of his day. The accuracy of his brush-work impressed his contemporaries as much as the geniality of Hals provoked them. When the East India Com- pany congratulated Charles II. upon his restoration to the English throne, they bought for a “ Meissonier” price a picture by Dou as a present for him. One banker paid a thousand florins the year for the option of purchasing Dou’s pictures. They are to be found in all museums and represent the most diverse subjects; but their philistine dryness is always the same. There are portraits in which every fold and wrinkle of the skin, every hair of the furs and cloaks, and every thread is copied in facsimile with microscopic exactitude, in the spirit not of the primitives, but of philistine pedantry. Then came those half-length figures in window alcoves, which were his particular hobby: such subjects as a smiling maiden, a lady making her toilette, a girl water- ing flowers, an old man smoking, or a wrinkled old lady sitting over her sewing. Round about he places the things in whose polished brightness Dutch housewives took delight: mugs, plates, glasses, pots, and kettles, not even forgetting the implements which effected this cleanliness: brooms, rags, and brushes. In the display of clothes every texture of the cloth can be clearly
644 ^be Bub ot Dutch ipaintina
recognised; and with the books he does not neglect to reproduce the print so exactly that it can be read with the aid of a magnifying-glass. Instead of a window, the framing is sometimes supplied by a cave in which hermits are seated; first, because such old men have many wrinkles to be painted, and then because the appropriate crucifixes, skulls, hour-glasses, and bundles of straw afford the opportunity of detailed miniature painting. In order to emphasise even more the de- tailed character of the execution, he sometimes seeks the assistance of candle-light. A maid with a lighted candle steps into the dining-room, or a baker-woman illuminates her wares by means of burning candles. Trivial jokes which give the opportunity for laughter (like a waffle-baker tidying her offspring, or a mouse gone astray in a tidy room) are never scorned. His is a witless, dreary, petrified art, enlivened by no thought and pulsating with no idea. In the soul of Dou there lives the soul of that Holland which clipped the wings of Rembrandt, the only real “ Flying Dutch- man,*' and let Hals starve.
Frans van Mieris differs from Dou only in that the subjects of his pictures are even more presentable in the salon. Young ladies breakfasting on oysters, trifling with a parrot or a lap dog, playing the lute, or looking at themselves in a mirror, are his usual themes. With the same neatness as Dou his woollen jackets, he paints the shimmering silk clothes, plumed hats, pearl necklaces, and ermine furs. Willem Mieris, Eglon van
dourt Htmospbere
645
der Neer, Caspar Netscher, and Gottfried Schalcken
offer further variations of such miniature fabric paint-
ing. At the same time a smooth execution is supple-
mented by an affected grace — something rosy, insipid,
and banal, resembling heads of the Niobe type.
Columns and reliefs having nothing to do with the
subject are everywhere added; and finally, for love of
the accessories, the subjects themselves are changed.
As, during the honeymoon of young Holland, men had
taken pleasure in spirited pictures of peasants, musi-
cians, dentists, quacks, and rat-catchers, and at the same
time of artistic deftness had delighted in Dou’s nat-
uralistic rendition of a pewter mug, flower-pot, majolica
bowl, or broomstick: now light bucolic shepherd scenes
of affected elegance came into fashion. At first crude,
then petrified and trivial, art now becomes insipid and
affected.
The portraits explain how this change came about. In the oldest, stiff-necked democrats and rugged plebeians are represented; their sons became wealthy householders, ostentatious of their riches. The third generation is ashamed of its burgher blood and, seeking to acquire the aristocratic charm of the former tyrants, plays the nobleman. The men appear in theatrical poses, a puffed cavalier’s cloak over their shoulder; they coquet with white hands and adorn their breasts with golden chains. They are perfumed in order not to smell of herring; they bow their heads with servile gratitude when some foreign potentate bestows upon
646
Zbc Bub of Dutch iPaintino
them a courtly title or the honour of knighthood. The
ladies are no longer cooks, but smile discreetly behind
their fans. Books of instruction in aristocratic man-
ners appear. Courts, they say, are the seats of cul-
ture^ and only by travelling can young men acquire
the elegance and polish, the aptitude and charm which
distinguish the courtier from the bourgeois. Even
in the style of their letters and in literature the em-
phasis upon the courtly element may be observed. In
the beginning straightforward and without formality,
the Dutch now address each other with pompous titles.
Upon the stage, which formerly produced Brederoo’s
folk-dramas, the “lofty fates of distinguished persons”
are celebrated.
This path from burgherdom to servility was also followed by art. The first symptom was the adapta- tion by Terborg of the Spanish courtly style to Dutch portraiture, with the result that the jolly merchants of Deventer assumed the proud reserve of Spanish grandees. It will be remembered that Sweerts added eques to his signature. Wouwerman painted bankers’ sons fighting duels and riding forth with their ladies, like young noblemen, to the falcon hunt. Weenix, Hondekoeter, and de Heem treated still-life as if their pictures were intended not for burghers’ houses but for royal palaces. Now the entire trend was towards showy decoration or affected aesthetics. The burgher boasted of his classic culture, and even Catholicism, against which he had formerly struggled, found
Court Htmospbere
647
advocates as being the '‘religion of the distinguished/'
Gerard de Lairesse in his Schilderhoek spoke the word which lay upon the lips of all. He mocks Hals who had “sought the beautiful among fishwives and apple-vendors’’ and demands of the artist that he shall acquire “what the fine world considers good taste.” This good taste, however, is the courtly style of France; Lebrun is declared to be the greatest of all painters, and the landscapist is recommended to paint pictures with '‘straight trees, stately palaces, and graceful fountains” — that is to say, landscapes in the style of Le Notre. As both painters and patrons have become cavaliers, the problem now is to “ennoble” art also; to create the grand style which the antique and the cinquecento taught.
This need was filled by the knight Adriaen van der Werff, who. with the dainty brush of Mieris, treated with classical correctness and academic coldness the subjects of historical painting — such biblical and mythological themes as were popular during the period of aristocratic patronage of art. A son of democratic and Protestant Holland, raised to the nobility, painted for a Catholic elector, whose court painter he was, the mysteries of the Catholic church. With this ends the tragi-comedy of the first appearance of the bour- geoisie in art. In the meanwhile, the French invasion of 1672 put an end to the world-wide importance of the Dutch state; the bourgeoisie and their art again bowed to the sceptre of monaichism.
Chapter VI.— The Aristocratic Art of France
I.— The Age of Louis XIV
During the first half of the seventeenth century France did not yet possess an indigenous school of painting. Her great painters, like Poussin and Claude, lived at Rome; and the few who were active in Paris merely reflect the different tendencies which prevailed in foreign countries.
During his stay of fifteen years in Italy, Simon Vouet had become a disciple of Guido Reni, and continued, after his return to France in 1627, to labour in the same Bolognese style.
Louis Le Nain seems to be connected with the school of Frans Hals, and it is surprising with what seri- ous objectivity he depicts the life of the people. The earliest of his paintings possessed by the Louvre is entitled the Family of the Smith. A man at the anvil pauses for a moment in his work, v/hile his wife and children follow his glance, as if the door were about to open and a visitor to enter. In the second painting a peasant’s family sits at table: in the foreground, the husband with a woollen cap upon his head, raising his
648
Uqc of %0\xiQ ffllD
649
glass thoughtfully to his lips, and beside him his wife
who looks wearily up from her work. A third picture,
the Return from the Fields, is remarkable from a colour-
istic point of view; for no brown light but the simple
hue of the day is spread over the landscape. While
other painters of his day had selected jolly episodes
from peasant life and treated them as caricatures
in the spirit of the hambocciade, Le Nain created simple
pictures of labourers, quite modern in charm.
Philippe de Champaigne, a born Fleming, is known partly by religious pictures, partly by his portraits. The learned world and the Jansenist clergy were his sitters, and this spirit of Jansenism gave his large pic- tures something cool, sober, and ascetic. Nuns in ample white woollen robes, the cross of their order upon the heart, the veil upon the head, sit praying in simple cells. Upon a straw stool lies a Bible, and a wooden crucifix hangs upon the wall. Yellow, black, and brown heighten the gloomy effect.
Eustache Le Sueur depicted in the same spirit the life of the monk. His pictures of the Life of St. Bruno have not the power to arrest the indifferent observer passing through the halls of the Louvre; but if one remains standing before them, he feels the charm of this timid, retiring art. In that lonesome, peaceful room it seems as if a church had been built in the midst of the museum, or as if one breathed the soft, quiet air of a monastic cell. Solemn and simple are the com- positions, unaffected and without exaggeration the
650
ZTbe Brt of ffrance
attitudes and gestures; and all the colours are attuned
to brown or greenish-white harmonies, as if he himself
had, like St. Bernard, taken the vow of poverty and
humility. With monkish self-denial Le Sueur avoids
whatever charms the eye or enchants the senses. A
painter-monk like Fra Angelico seems to have created
these works, and one understands how the person of
this man, who lived so quietly and died so young (at
the age of thirty-eight), was easily encompassed by the
veil of legend. Like Memling, it is said, he had as a
young man fallen in love with a nun, become a melan-
cholic, and ended as a monk in a Carthusian monastery.
Sebastien Bourdon is as wavering and versatile as Le Sueur is one-sided. He began as an adventurer and ended as an academician; he laboured sometimes in Rome, sometimes in Paris and Sweden; so also as a painter he appears, Proteus-like, under the most varied masks. There are decorative pieces by him which might come from the school of Caravaggio, and re- ligious paintings in which he is as classically severe as Poussin himself. Yet on the other hand, he painted portraits, like that of Descartes, and genre-pictures, gypsies and beggars, which prove a connection with the school of Caravaggio.
Salvator Rosa and Michelangelo Cerquozzi found a French counterpart in Jacques Courtois, called Le Bourguignon. A gloomy sky, with bright yellow clouds, dust and powder, and fighting lansquenets — such is usually the content of his pictures.
Uqc of Xouis flflD
651
France indeed produced a number of great person-
alities, which, however, were less able to form a national
school because the leading spirits were active not in
Paris but in Rome. In order that French art should
become an organic whole, the centre of artistic activity
had to be shifted from Rome to Paris, and a common
field of labour had to be provided for artists. This
period opens with Louis XIV, This age is called by
the French le grand siecle; and in so far as one under-
stands grand as identical with grandiose, the designation
is justified. No ruler ever made art more sub-
servient to himself on a more magnificent scale ; no one
to the same extent surrounded himself with pomp
and splendour. Louis XIV. is a kingly builder par
excellence. As Augustus could say of himself that he
found his capital built of brick and plaster, and left it
a city of marble and bronze, so Louis conjured up
fairy palaces from a sandy soil; not indeed at Paris,
but at Versailles. As all of his buildings demanded
artistic decoration, an activity began upon such a scale
as the world had never before seen. As numerous as
formerly in little Holland, the painters sprouted from
the earth. France, which had previously for the most
part supplied its need of art from Italy and the Nether-
lands, now provides other European countries with art
and with artists.
To one encountering in the galleries the works of the masters who gave their stamp to the age of Louis XIV., they seem more colossal than refined, more bombastic
652
XTbe Brt of ffrance
than distinguished. Among these painters is van der
Meulen, who immortalised, in gigantic pictures, the
king’s military career, his campaigns, sieges, parades,
and triumphant entries; Alexandre Desportes, who
was employed to portray the hunting-dogs of the great
king; and Jean Baptiste Monnoyer, in whose hands
even the flower became solemn, rigid, and typical.
Others are Le Brun, Coypel, Blanchard, Audran,
Houasse, Jouvenet — how mannered, pompous, and in-
flated their works appear! Nothing can occur without
a great apparatus. The columns must be twisted, the
velvet puffed. Like the Precieuses ridicules, they
seem to take pains to express the simplest thing in an
affected manner and with bombastic phraseology.
Biblical pictures always receive the same theatrical
heads and hollow declaiming gestures; and in antique
subjects the same Roman tragedy is always declaimed
in monotonous, inflated Alexandrine verses.
But in the midst of these imposing historical sub- jects also hang the portraits of Rigaud and Largilliere, in which one makes the acquaintance of the men whom the painters served. In self-conscious, chal- lenging dignity, too exalted to be ludicrous, and in the midst of pompous surroundings, Louis XIV. stands before us. The halo of a gigantic wig with heavy curled locks encircles his head; an immense blue velvet mantle, embroidered with golden lilies, envelops him; and the luxurious showy frame is adorned with a heavy golden crown. Velasquez, van Dyck, Rigaud — these
HYACINTHE RIGAUD
PORTRAIT OF LOUIS XIV.
Versailles
Bae of %o\xi5 JlflD
653
are the three worlds of courtly portraiture. The
Spanish kings knew nothing of the world outside of the
Alcazar; their pictures are ancestral portraits handed
down in the royal family. The aristocrats of van
Dyck have come into contact with the common people.
Delicate and pale, conversing only in low tones, they
grow nervous when a loud or rude tone sounds in their
ear, and turn shuddering when their sleeves are in
danger of being touched by a coarse-grained commoner.
Louis XIV., on the other hand, does not show the
world his blue blood, but his royal power; he is not like
Charles I., a nobleman in his attitude towards the
people, but a king towards his subjects. The dis-
tinction which with van Dyck lies in a pale complexion,
white, blue-veined hands, and fragile tenderness, lies
with Rigaud in the majestic pose, the flowing curtains,
and the insignia of royalty which he displays. U eiat
c’est moi, Louis seems to say; and like the king are
the rest. They are portrayed in typical rigidity and
solemn grandeur, with that stately tread which the
parquetry of the court demands. Every one assumes
a pompous expression and makes a significant gesture
with his hand. The ladies aie draped with a princely
mantle hanging from their shoulders; the poet, en-
circled with a royal mantle, leans with a heroic gesture
upon a lyre; the preacher holds a Bible and raises a
gesticulating hand; the merchant sits at his desk, the
astronomer at his globe. But they are not occupied
with their own thoughts; they turn to the beholder, as
654
TLbc Hrt of jfrance
typical as the king. As Louis XIV. displays his crown,
so they show the insignia of their power: books which
they have written, works of art which they have
created, the ships which they send over the sea. Even
when they occasionally appear in n4glig(^e, the dressing-
gown is of blue silk or red velvet. Even the home life
of a private individual is a gala performance, like a
royal levee. Be it observed, however, that Rigaud
and Largilliere are not rhetoricians, but the faithful
historians of their age. .All things that they portray —
swords and shoe-buckles, furs and laces, wigs and
fans — they paint exactly after nature. If they appear
so pompous and never unlace their buskins, this is not
to be ascribed to their art. They paint as they do
because the subjects themselves were pompous, stilted,
and dignified. It was the age when the spirit of
royalism penetrated even into the family and children
addressed their parents with vous, with Monsieur mon
ph^e and Madame ma mere.
After the examination of these portraits, the gallery pictures of Le Brun and his associates also appear in a different light. For this time the classic repose of Poussin and the quiet sentiment of Le Sueur were no longer suitable. What art was called upon to express was majesty, rigid ceremonial, and typical dignity. It must be showy, blending, and bombastic as the sentences of Bossuet and the verses of Racine; must disguise the simple with the sustained dignity of pompous generalities. And be it particularly noted
Hae ot %o\xiQ fUlD
655
that the picture-gallery is in no sense a home for works
of this kind, because they are only parts of a great
decorative scheme.
No one can escape the imposing impression made by the palace at Versailles. The building is not planted in the midst of a beautiful nature; the common opinion that a house should correspond with the character of the soil upon which it stands is glibly disregarded. The king gives all the more evidence of his almighty power by conjuring a paradise from a desert and causing fountains to spring forth from a dry and sandy soil.
The palace rises on artificially created soil, separated from the common earth. Every stone proclaims that royalty dwells here. Mighty stairways lead to the wide halls, which gleam and glitter in golden splendour. Bronze and marble figures, hermae, or atlantes, fill niches and cornices, or bow in homage to the king from the ceiling. The park is wide as the horizon, ex- cluding every common neighbourhood from the eye. Wherever one glances, nature has laid aside her power and bowed to the will of the Great One. The straight paths, the trim walls of foliage, the stiff and solemn rondels — everything expresses the submission of free and defiant nature to cultivation and rule. No tree may grow as it will ; the pruning of the gardener gives it the form which the king demands. No stream flows where it wishes, but submitting to the will of the king, rises as a column of water towards heaven or
656
Xlbe Brt of ffrance
streams as a cascade down white marble stairs. This
is the language of royalty by the grace of God, which
not only rules man but subdues by the power of his
sceptre hill and valley, the wild water and the free
forest. It is the spirit of that young Louis who, at the
age of fourteen, appeared in his parliament riding-whip
in hand. Suprema lex regis voluntas!
If one imagine people suitable for this world — ^gen- tlemen with flowing wigs and gold-embroidered robes, and ladies with high fontange and stiff silk dresses which in long gleaming train sweep over the smoothly polished floor — one recognises with what truth and power this art reflects the spirit of the age. No period has to the same extent proceeded from the conception of the subordination of all component parts to the work of art as a whole. The style of Louis XIV. labours on a grand scale, with buildings and gardens, with trees and water. The palace with its decorated columns, its gardens, cascades, and statues — all of these together form the work of art, and every single feature is only a decorative element. This must not be over- looked in forming an opinion of the painters of the epoch.
In the halls of the palace, indeed, one experiences at first only a shudder, because the content of the pictures, the deification of the king, corresponds so little with the sentiment of our own time. It would also be a waste of time to seek the individuality of the artist behind the pictures. A man like Louis XIV. would
Uqc of %o\xiB flflD
657
tolerate free individuality as little as would a captain
exercising his company. Whether the ceilings are de-
corated by Blanchard or Coypel, by Houasse, Audran,
or Jouvenet, these names do not signify artistic person-
ality. All submit to the sovereign will of the king of
France and his minister of fine arts. A hundred
painters are embodied in a single artist. Louis XIV.,
as overlord of architecture, sculpture, painting, and
landscape gardening, named Le Brun as commanding
general of the army of painters. He leads the man-
oeuvres and gives the orders, which are carried out in
the proper spirit of subordination. While this is very
unedifying for psychological observation, it was, on
the other hand, just because of this uniform direction
that Versailles became such an imposing work of art;
a work which gives expression to a whole epoch, a
historical document.
Quite astonishing is the lung-power of Le Brun. For fifty years he succeeded in expressing himself in the pulpit style of Bossuet without ever losing breath. He set all Olympus into motion praising the power and wisdom of his lord : all kings and heroes of the past prostrated themselves in the dust before Louis. Here he extols him in the figure of Alexander the Great; there the sun-god Apollo must increase the fame of the “Sun King’'; there again the oriental monarchs Nebuchadnezzar and Cyrus do him homage. In the gallery of mirrors the warlike career of the king is declaimed and embellished with pompous allegories:
42
658
XTbe Hrt of France
the four quarters of the earth and the Muses doing him
homage. It is no less astonishing what an adept was
Le Brun in heightening the effect. The first rooms are
treated in simple white and the nearer one approaches
to the chamber of the king, the more the splendour
increases. Green marble alternates with gold, deep
blue with silver; in the last room, the wall of which is
adorned with the great relief of the king on horseback,
there is only gold in broad masses spread over mantels,
doors, and windows. Yet, with all this bombastic
servility, a great and ancient culture is everywhere
evident. This may be seen in going from the old parts
of the palace to the new, in which Horace Vernet cele-
brated la grande nation in an equally bombastic but
in a common and banal manner. His pictures differ
from those of Le Brun as the King with the Umbrella
differs from le Roi Soleil.
By the side of palace architecture, in the last years of Louis XIV. church-building assumed an important role. For even the king was a man, and after he had emptied the cup of life to the dregs, he felt the need of reconciling himself with God. Madame de Maintenon influenced him in the spirit of Jesuitic piety, and there arose the dome of the Invalides in Paris, the churches of Notre Dame and of St. Louis, and the palace chapel at Versailles — all works of Mansart, which, compared with the ostentatious Baroque of the palace of Versailles, indicate a return to severe classicism and have more in common with Palladio than Bernini.
II.— The Spirit of Rococo
Noel Coypel was commissioned to decorate the dome of the Invalides, Charles de la Fosse the palace chapel of Versailles. Pierre Mignard, who after the death of Le Brun was entrusted with the decoration of all royal undertakings, painted a cupola fresco in the church Val de Grace. And although these pictures seem eclectic and his Madonnas soft and insipid, he also painted the spirited portrait of Marie Mancini, the niece of Mazarin, which it is impossible for any one who has stood before it in the Berlin Gallery to forget.
The age of Louis XIV. was a proud, rigid, bombastic, and boastful age. Only gala performances, significant gestures, and representative splendour were popular. In it the solemn grandeur of the Baroque reached its acme, and further progress in this direction was im- possible. The style of Louis XIV. was not only a natural product of the age, but also the necessary prelude to that which followed. Men had first to grow weary of gazing upon the powerful and imposing before the grandiose could be followed by the graceful, declamation by delicacy, the sublime by the elegant, the ceremonial by the dainty; in short, the Baroque by the Rococo.
There lies, according to the legend, somewhere in this world, an island called Cythera, where the heaven is ever blue and the roses ever bloom. Throughout the day, the island lies in repose like a sleeping beauty; but towards evening, when the earth is enveloped in silence, a busy activity begins in Cythera. Then cupids begin their services and make ready the boats to carry over the pilgrims who await there on the shore. These are young men and beautiful women, clad not in brown cowls but in silk and velvet, with flower-wreathed shepherds’ staves in their hands. When they have entered the boat and approach the enchanted island, all the world is forgotten. A soft, sensual atmosphere caresses them; the roses waft perfume and the doves coo. The marble statue of Aphrodite gleams in the green foliage, and with beating hearts they sink at the feet of the goddess. Such a picture is the glittering title-page of the art of the eighteenth century.
At the beginning of the seventeenth century a spirit of a convulsed, wild piety passed over the world. After the humanistic vagaries of the Renaissance men did penance in sackcloth and ashes. Then came the compromise; and the artists of the Counter-reformation, at first so gloomy and threatening, ascribed in Flanders the cult of the senses and the pleasures of the flesh, even to beings of the other -world.” France had transplanted the pomp of Baroque art from the church into the palace, and, instead of the saints, had served the Sun King. But finally the century ended as it had begun, for the Rot Soldi himself was frightened at his resemblance to God. His unfortunate wars, his financial difficulties, and the deaths in the royal family filled him with gloom. The noisy and glit- tering festivities ceased, and, as is the constant complaint of the letters of Princess Elizabeth Char- lotte, the fashion of being joyful was discontinued.^ In conjunction with Madame de Maintenon the king issued edicts of faith, had churches built and masses read. At the beginning of the eighteenth century France had more monasteries than Italy; the number of monks and nuns was 90,000, and that of the clergy 150,000. Great pulpit orators used all the powers of their splendid oratory to call Paris to penance. A tire- some royalty decreed piety and a clerical spirit bur- dened the land.
Then the Great King died, and society breathed afresh. As the regent, Philip of Orleans was himself the first to throw off the mask, it was no longer neces- sary to pretend dejected and croaking piety, and to yawn behind the fans. The imprisoned joy in life burst forth afresh. There was also money to satisfy all desires. As long as Louis XIV. lived, the keen trade projects of the speculator Law had remained plans; but the Duke of Orleans was easily won. A series of stock speculations and projects brought money into circulation which permitted a luxury that had formerly been impossible. As men had prayed, they now wished to enjoy themselves, as they had been bored they now
1 A German princess, the daughter of the Elector Palatine Karl Ludwig and wife to Philip, Duke of Orleans, brother of Louis XIV. Her letters to her friends and relatives were edited by Bodemann (2 vols., Hanover 1891). — Ed.
wished to be merry. The portraits show that suddenly quite a new race of men appeared on the scene. There were no longer proud generals, dignified archbishops, and ministers granting audiences, but only men of fashion and elegance. They move about gallantly, speak gallantly, smile gallantly, and are versed in the most beautiful compliments and their effect upon the fair sex. The features of the portraits are no longer dignified but soft and rosy; the pose is no longer im- pressive but dainty and refined; the toilette, formerly solemn and rigid, assumes an elegant negligee and a certain feminine character. Velvet and silk in all shades, laces about the neck and on cuffs, embroideries in gold, silver, and silk are worn, even by old gentlemen. All are as lithe and slender, as effeminate and eternally young, as charming and redolent with the perfume of roses, as if they were no longer men but grown-up cupids.
Even more conspicuous is the change in women. The ladies at the close of the seventeenth century, in their stiff whalebone corsets, have an Olympian grandeur, like that of Juno. The figure is majestic, and full, gleaming shoulders and fine arms emerge from ermine mantles. But they are also unfeminine, un- approachable, and dignified, the type of Louis XIV. and of the Great Elector translated into womanhood. The mouth is firmly closed, the brow energetic and virile, the eye glances firmly, cold as metal, from under the hard brows; the hands are plump and expressionless.
These are women like the proud Montespan, at the sight of whom Hebbel cried, “ Such a woman could be loved only by a king/' Now there are no longer women of majestic beauty. If they then seemed forty years old, they are now either under twenty or oversixty. If they then sought to impress by their fulness of form, they are now ethereal beings who are animated only by spirit and piquancy. The figures, then powerful, have become delicate and light; the faces, once proud, are now childish, and no longer painted or powdered white. The lines of the mouth have lost their proud seriousness, and curve in soft mischief or in a delicate lovable smile. The bust has lost its fulness and is only lightly revealed under a silken bodice. Even the jewelry is different: the heavy rings and chains which were formerly worn give place to dainty filigree-work. The taste for the imposing is followed by the taste for graceful charm, unapproachable indifference by neat- ness and seductiveness; the dignified by the coquettish, and bodily by spiritual beauty.
The life of these people also stands in sharp contrast to that of the past. Then the king was the centre about which all revolved. The idea of unqualified autocracy went so far that Louis's own brother must remain standing in his presence. This solemn court ceremony dominated the world. Men either went to church to gain the favour of Madame de Maintenon or they moved about in dignified rigidity, doing homage to the king in the gorgeous halls of the palace at Versailles. Now Louis XlV/s dictum, “I am the state,” is supplanted by another: “The aristocracy is humanity.” The change which at the end of the century terminated in open popular rebellion began as a palace revolution. Formerly collected about the royal throne, the aristocracy now follows its own paths.
There are two places where they never go — to church and to court. The religious enthusiasm which had risen in the seventeenth century is dead. As if to solace themselves for the years lost under Louis XIV., men now coquette with atheism. As early as 1710, Tyssot de Patot wrote his romance, Voyages et aventures de Jagues Masse, in which he speaks of Christ as of Mohammed or Confucius. Later Natoire, the director of the French Academy at Rome, was removed from his post on account of his “exaggerated piety.” The century of religious wars was followed by the century which permitted every one to be saved in his own fashion; the age of the last saints by that of the clever mockers who believed neither in heaven nor in hell.
- “Ci git dans une paix profonde
- Cette Dame de volupté
- Qui pour plus grande surete
- Fit son paradis de ce monde
thus reads the light epitaph of the Marquise de Boufflers, and these words may be written upon most gravestones of the eighteenth century. As men had formerly striven for the heavenly paradise, Jhey now enjoyed life in full draughts and died with a joyful consciousness of having enjoyed it. As George Sand’s grandmother once related to her: “Your grandfather was handsome, elegant, carefully attired, delicate, per- fumed, active, lovable, tender, and joyful until his death. At that time there was no repulsive bodily pain; one preferred to die at a ball or in the theatre rather than in one’s bed among four wax tapers and ugly, black-gowned men. We enjoyed life, and when the time came to leave it no one sought to deprive others of their pleasure in it. The last farewell of my husband consisted in his bidding me to survive him long and to enjoy life.” Those who had not lived before 1789, wrote Talleyrand, did not know the sweet- ness of life.
Men now fled from the suffocating court life to a joyous Arcadia, from the halls of the palace into nature. If formerly the typical had prevailed, the constraint of rigid etiquette, men now loved the laisser-aller and yearned for harmless pleasure. More beautiful than gaudy palaces seemed the thatched cottage which might be bought in the country; more beautiful than the formal gardens of Le Notre, the woods and the fields where the cowbells tinkled, the dairies with their poultry yards, and the pigeon cote. They reclined at their ease in the meadows, along the brooks, and in the woodland glades, arranged hals champetres and de- jeuners sur V herhe, and danced graceful gavottes and sportive minuets. They hastened to the neighbour- ing village where the peasants gathered for the yearly market. The formal court dress was laid aside, the wig disappeared, and, in dainty peasant costumes, they played at being peasants, shepherds, and shepherdesses. In 1697 Louis XIV. had closed the Italian theatre be- cause the actors ventured remarks upon Madame de Maintenon. The regent re-opened the Italian comedy in 1716, and these comedies became an important part in the programme of the pleasures of distinguished society. The time was passed in balls, theatrical per- formances, musical evenings, and especially with masks. Not only were the actors of the Comedie Fran^aise, the Comedie Italienne, and the Opera often ordered to appear in the Palais Royal ; even the rope- dancers were considered presentable. The young men took lessons from the actors, and the ladies studied with them pieces which they produced upon the stage. It was so jolly and offered such material for dainty intrigues and gallant experiences to wear the gay spangles of Pierrot and Colombine.
Like etiquette they also avoided scrupulous modesty because it appeared pedantic. Marriage was considered a picture in grey whose monochrome must be en- livened by rosy tones. “What a, tiresome creature this Julie must be,” wrote Madame de Pompadour after a perusal of Rousseau’s Nouvelle Heloise. At that time Paris became the magic city where the nabobs of the whole world assembled, the island of Cythera where every one who brought money, spirit, and love of life would be received. Even sensuality now assumed a new aspect. In the grand siecle, which only recognised the powerful and pathetic, it had been a great passion, which Rubens had painted brutal and animal. Now the nerves had become tired, and could endure only discreet and delicate excitement. So the eighteenth century, which loved only little things, made love a flirtation. ‘‘Great passions,’’ wrote Mercier, “are nowadays rare. Men no longer fight duels for women, and we see no forsaken lover seeking by poison to escape his suffering.” What was formerly said with sobs and sighs is now said chattingly in light conversation. There is no glowing desire, no impetuous passion but artificial courting, flattering and homage, wooing and languishing. A piquant smile takes the place of hearty laughter and pastoral play supplants the former coarseness.
New people need a new art. The great change in culture which took place at the beginning of the century was also accompanied by a clear, far-reaching sesthetic revolution. Formerly the heroic Corneille and the classically severe Racine had dominated literature. These pompous and solemn stylists, who stalked about majestically, were now followed by clever prattlers who, in spicy and charming tones, without ever growing coarse, spoke of love and nothing but love. As the nervous temperament of the age was no longer pleased with the perpetual recurrence of iron measures, the tyrannical rhythms of the Alexandrine verse dis- appeared and the reverberating periods of Boileau vanished in a dazzling display of wit and humour. In letters a mischievous grace replaced bombast. The Amadis, the Robinsons, and the popular romances whose scene is laid in China are characteristic of the arcadian trend of the age. The natural, innocent, and free — all that was missed at home — was sought in distant lands, upon lonely islands or in the land of Con- fucius. For to the Chinese they were bound by an es- pecial tie of interest; since to them they owed the tea, the new drink which was so popular in the eighteenth century. At the same time the Celestials were consid- ered a happy people in a state of nature, who, free from courtly constraint, lived a paradisiac life upon the shores of the Pacific.
Parallel with this change in literature a change occurred in art. Architecture, which in the seventeenth century had built extensive churches and royal palaces, now creates dainty residences and country-seats. The nobility, heretofore bound to Versailles, now builds its own quarters. The Faubourg Saint-Germain and the villas about Paris were constructed, and in a style the opposite of all that formerly prevailed. As in life everything pompous and heroic, so also in architecture everything ponderous must be avoided. Majesty was followed by daintiness, and show by comfort. The rooms are smaller, and serve the purpose no longer of show but of comfort or of the refined enjoyment of life. Instead of living in the formal, glittering halls reserved for especial festivities, they lived, loved, and
Spirit of tbe IRococo
669
chatted in little salons and boudoirs. From the
panelled walls the last vestiges of constructive elements
disappear: for nothing rigid or massive was permitted
to disturb the gracefulness. As they who had so long
borne the oppression of royalty now made themselves
free, so also they released the architectural supporting
members of their functions, and transformed them
into jolly people, who joyfully and without trouble,
for politeness’s sake, played the role of caryatids.
Ornament also, which had formerly shown measured
dignity, now received the free and easy movement of
life; those flowing forms, those charming informalities
with which the man of the world places himself above
the rules of etiquette. Flowers and arabesques, thyrsi
and shepherds’ staves, glasses and grapes, fauns and
nymphs are commingled in joyful, trifling playfulness.
Even the unsymmetrical character of the Rococo has
a psychological explanation. The people who had
been so long compelled to live according to fixed rules
now took such pleasure in the unrestrained and the
capricious that they intentionally avoided the principle
of all former laws of beauty, viz., symmetry, and
searched for everything which in wanton humour mocks
at regularity.
Furniture in the seventeenth century had been mon- umental and pompous, as if it all came from the halls of the palace of Versailles; it now became light and coquettish, dainty and small, as if it were all intended for a lady’s boudoir. Comfortable upholstered chairs
670
XTbe art of iFtance
and soft, yielding sofas covered with silken cushions
took the place of the stiffly painted, straight-lined
armchairs. Japanese screens and Chinese pagodas,
Sevres vases and dainty clocks are scattered over
mantles, tables, and consoles. Soft and fragrant per-
fumes, such as vanilla and heliotrope, fill the air; a
luxurious feminine spirit pervades everything.
Sculpture, which in the seventeenth century had been colossal, now becomes a miniature art, which no longer peoples churches and gardens with monumental groups but nestles in the salon and the boudoir. Its principal materials are no longer stone, marble, and bronze but gold, silver, faience, and porcelain. The porcelain statuettes in particular signify for the art of the eighteenth century what the terra-cottas did for - the Greek art. The relief, formerly boldly cut, is now carved in soft and delicate outlines.
From this it is evident what character painting was forced to adopt in order to harmonise with its sur- roundings: for, like art under Louis XIV., the Rococo must also be regarded as a whole. Indeed, there never, perhaps, existed a style in which everything formed such a harmonious part of a clever ensemble.
It is in the first place characteristic that artistic productions decreased. An epoch so spirituelle as the Rococo preferred also the least material of the arts — music. This was the prevailing art of the age, and to her painters did homage in numerous allegories. The form of the pictures had also to change.
Sptrtt of tbe IRococo
671
As the seventeenth century chose the colossal, so the
eighteenth preferred the dainty. Monumental tasks
in great historic style were no longer assigned, or
else executed by artists who survived from the time
of Louis XIV. The younger artists, hostile to all
grandiose undertakings, created their daintiest works
in fans, piano decorations, and screens. Even in
panel painting a diminution of size appeared; for the
full length was considered crude, and only small and
dainty proportions were permissible. Another conse-
quence of the love of the unsymmetrical was the popu-
lar practice of giving a curious, irregular form to the
pictures.
V It was all over with religious painting. All the pious martyrs and ecstatic Madonnas which were painted in the seventeenth century had nothing to say to this age. Ancient and rigid Venice, is the only surviving city where important religious pictures still originated. Otherwise only such decorations occur which, in accordance with the free-thinking trend of the age, are connected with Nathan the Wise’s story of the rings, that is to say the theme of the equal value of all re- ligions. One picture from the Bible is especially popular: Sara Leading the fair Hagar to her Husband Abraham. The whole spirit of the Rococo is expressed in such a work.
After they had come to the point of making life pleasant, they wished to see only pictures which pro- claimed this gospel of joyful, sensual pleasure. Having
672
Zbc art of ffrance
freed themselves from the bonds of etiquette, they also
demanded of painting that it should be lively and
clever and reflect in elegant lines and dainty colours
the life which they saw about them, or as they dreamed
it. The theme of the works is therefore the same which
Rubens treated in his Love Gardens, except that the
place of his full-blooded voluptuous women is taken
by dainty ladies with thin wasp-waists, and that the
coarse, grasping Flemings are replaced by slender
cavaliers with gallant manners. When they drank
Chinese tea from Chinese cups, they also loved to see
the Chinese in painting. Conscious of guilt they loved
to dream of childhood’s happy days; tired of the city,
they dreamed of rustic idylls — not the peasant who in
hard work wins his nourishment from the soil; but
the countryman of romance, a happy being who leads
an ethereal existence in the open air.
Since not the coarse but the delicate, not the passion- ate but the discreet, not the loud but the quiet is presentable in the salon, so all obtrusive effects of colour are avoided. The age of Louis XIV. loved showy pomp; a bright blue and red in combination with gold were the favourite colours of the king who de- termined the costumes of his subjects and the taste of the painters. In the decoration of rooms also, gold and pompous red, brown wood and dark gobelins pre- vailed. The eighteenth century in its over-refined daintiness found that such colours distress the eye and used only light, soft, and broken tones. The loud
Spirit of tbe IRococo
673
fanfares of an earlier day are changed into a soft
colourature, and the shrill sounds of the brass in-
struments are followed by the wooing, insinuating
notes of the flute. The white tone of porcelain was
especially popular, and determined the colour of the
decoration of rooms as well as the tone of paintings.
As they were so fond of being out-of-doors they also
loved to see the salon flooded by the bright light of day.
High windows reaching to the floor gave light to the
rooms. The walls were tinted white; the gobelins, the
silk window-curtains, the wood and upholstery of the
furniture were bright and light in colour. Mirrors
scattered throughout the room also had the purpose of
increasing the light. Even the former popular gold
ornamentation frequently yields to silver. In these
white rooms, pervaded by the light of day or by the
candle-light of Venetian chandeliers, the cool silvery
tones of high-keyed painting were alone suitable.
Dainty harmonies of dull yellow, light blue, pink and
lilac, greyish blue, greyish yellow, and dull green be-
came especially popular. The artists also endeavoured
to free oil painting from its fatty and heavy qualities;
and as, notwithstanding their efforts, this was not alto-
gether possible, new technical processes, like pastel
painting, were invented. The pastel alone solved the
problem of relieving figures of all earthly heaviness,
and could perfectly present these evanescent, flower-
like natures with the rustling silk robes and powdered
hair.
674
tibe act of jfcance
“Sieh meinen feinen Fliigelstaub,
Ich flattere und fliege,” —
such is the beginning of a Rococo song, which also characterises the nature of Rococo painting. 1 he pictures are pale as the complexion of the people. They have a touch of the ethereal, just as men had themselves been transformed from heavy and full- blooded into light and ethereal beings. The age of highest development of power was followed by one of the highest refinement, the century of passion and majestic grandeur by one of grace and elegance. It is no accident that France assumed the leading position during this epoch. The individual nations have always found an artistic expression at the moment when the spirit of the time and the spirit of the nation are in unison. As in the seventeenth century gloomy Spain had been the leading country, now when the Coun- ter-reformation was followed by a new ebullition of sensuality, France placed itself at the head, and suc- ceeded in accomplishing what since Foucquet’s Ma- donna and the novels of the Parisian Boccaccio seem to have been the destiny of the French.^
III.— Watteau
His first pictures create more of a Flemish than a French impression. One awaits fetes galantes and
» The picture in the Antwerp Gallery referred to represents the Madonna with the features of Agnes Sorel, the mistress of Charles Vll., suckling the Child. Although Boccaccio was born in Paris,
Matteau 675
hymns to love, but their content is scenes from soldier and camp life.
Watteau’s youth fell in the time of the war of the Spanish Succession. As the Netherlands, his home, were the scene of a motley military life, he began with scenes like those painted by the Dutch in the age of Frans Hals. In a picture of the Rothschild collection recruits march over a plain under a heavy storm; in others he groups soldiers and market-women, waggons and tents in the midst of Flemish landscapes. From such representations of military life he proceeds to similar scenes of peasant life. In his picture True Gaiety a couple dances in front of a tavern, while upon an upturned tub sits a man playing a violin. In another picture a group of peasants are drinking before a tavern, and others stagger homewards. All are genuine Flemish paintings; a new Teniers seems to have appeared. But the women are of a different race. With their white bodices and clean aprons, their elegant motions and dainty heads, they have something tidy and graceful which does not belong to Teniers’s art.
Yet one has no idea that this peasant-painter is destined to become a master of the graces. Not until he had returned to Paris did his themes change. In place of the boors, elegant French society appears.
of a French mother and a Florentine father, his early boyhood was passed in Florence, and at fifteen he was in Naples. He can therefore scarcely be called a Parisian, nor can the spicy character of his literary work be considered a French characteristic. — Ed.
676
XTbe Hrt of ffrance
Different pictures reveal how gradually the change
was accomplished. A composition which only exists
in a print shows a gondolier upon a placid canal.
The coarse-grained Flemish figures have become grace-
ful and distinguished; and only the background, with
its canals and palaces, is still in the manner of the
panoramas of cities by Jan van der Heyden. The
same is true of the picture called the Promenade upon
the Walls: distinguished ladies and chatting young
gentlemen, but in the background massive towers and
symbols of quite a Netherlandish character. There
follows the picture of the Shepherds in the New Palace
at Potsdam: in the foreground a young couple for
whom an old shepherd plays the music for a dance;
round about maidens looking at the dance and a
gentleman swinging a lady. Then come the repre-
sentations which are known by the names of The
Seductive Offer, Recreation, Le faux pas, Uamour
paisihle. La mariee de village, Assemhlee galante, and
Lefon d’amour — the originals almost all in the royal
palace at Berlin, where they were placed by Frederick
the Great. If these works, notwithstanding the Rococo
costume, still show a certain Flemish heaviness, in the
subject which in 1717 he presented as a diploma paint-
ing to the Academy, all ties are broken which had bound
him to his home. It is the Embarkation jor the Island
of Cythera, that painting of the Louvre, in which the
dream of a whole generation takes form. Watteau
treated the theme a second time in the painting of the
ANTOINE WATTEAU
THE ISLE OF CYTHERA
Matteau
677
palace at Berlin, which is even more jubilant than the
Louvre picture. The boat which bears the pilgrim to
the enchanted island has become a frigate with flutter-
ing rosy sails. Cupids climb up the mast, fire their
arrows at the people, and bind the fair ones with chains
of roses. In the few years which he had still to live,
there followed all those works which treat the same
theme — joy in life and love — in the ever-new variations :
Boccaccio's Decameron in the garb of the Rococo.
Young men in silk and velvet, a guitar slung by a broad, red ribbon over the shoulder, wander aim- lessly about, and pay court to beautiful women: here in the woods, there upon the meadow or in the village, but never in the city or in the vicinity of the palace. They know no hunger, no labour, no cares; for fairies have given them all that they need: their satin shoes, their music books.their shepherds' staffs, and mandolins. The women are children of the same enchanted Elysian world. From blue eyes whose peace is destroyed by no passion, they gaze at their admirers; they carry lace fans and wear dull red, violet, or yellow silk dresses; their slender arms and hands with long white fingers and rosy nails gleam among fine laces. Nothing happens in these pictures; they only sing and play, speak and laugh. Pleasant embraces, tender glances, and gallant words are exchanged. Here a gentleman offers a lady his hand in order to conduct her up a few marble steps; there they dance the gavotte or play blind-man's buff, or young maidens gather white roses
678
XLbc Hrt of ffrance
in their aprons; there again a gentleman with his lady
leaves the company, and they recline upon the shore of
a little lake, behind a tree or low shrubbery. Mis-
chievously laughing, pouting, or slightly offended, half
promising, half granting, the ladies accept the homage
of their cavaliers. Their eyes sparkle, and tremblingly
they breathe the atmosphere of love with which they
are surrounded. And when it grows darker the gay
company dissolves. The chatting couples disappear,
the song and the sound of the guitar are silent, and
only sweet, stammering, whispering words are heard.
Occasionally instead of the silken shepherd-costume that of the theatre is worn, although Watteau is not therefore the painter of clowns and wandering comed- ians. True, some of the paintings, like Pierrot of the Louvre, seem portraits of actors, and in others like Love in the Italian and Love in the French Theatre scenes from comedies are depicted. But most of such pic- tures are jetes galantes. The distinguished ladies and gentlemen have only assumed the costume of the Ital- ian actors, and usq Pierrot’s white linen, Harlequin’s gay silk, and Scaramouche’s gallant mantle to bring variety into their pastoral plays. When evening comes a motley procession of masks swarms through the park. Bright torches throw their light upon grotesquely disguised figures, who seem to have ascended from the kingdom of Lucifer, and yet are only lovers seeking their sweethearts.
For these people Watteau created a nature in which
Matteau
679
they belonged. As his landscapes have little in com-
mon with the formal gardens of Le Notre, they resemble
actuality just as little. There are no clouds in them,
no wild underbrush, no abrupt cliffs. Mighty trees
stretch their crowns, as if protectingly, over the couples;
soft sods invite them to repose; roses, daisies, and butter-
cups bloom in the midst of the woods in order that
gentlemen may pick them and wind them into bou-
quets. Elder and jasmine waft their odour from the
hedges; in the air the butterflies dance a noiseless
minuet, springs and cascades murmur near by, as if to
prevent the love-whispers from being heard. Here a
swing is hung, there naked marble statues — cupids, an
Antiope, a Venus, a goat-footed satyr seizing a flying
nymph, Apollo pursuing Daphne — peep from the green
foliage, tempting mortals to similar pranks. Not Pan,
but Cupid bears the sceptre in this world. The scene
of all these paintings is the isle of Cythera, where the
roses ever bloom and the nightingales pipe, where all
the trees murmur and whisper of happiness and love.
The colours also are different from those of this world. Watteau required a long time to find the real expression of his feeling for colour. His first pictures show a connection with the older masters — the bright luminosity of Rubens or the warm gold of Titian. But after the Emharkment for Cythera his colour-scheme is also independent. If one hears a brass instrument with Rubens, the full tones of the organ with Titian, with Watteau one listens to the vanishing sound of the
680
XTbe Hrt of ffrance
flute or the tender, quivering, silvery tone of the violin.
The softened, morbidly refined colour corresponds with
the ethereal charm of the figures. The earth lies in
repose, bathed in mild splendour, and the light green
tree-tops move tremulously in the soft air. The hour
of sunset, when all is wrapped in the silvery mist of
twilight, is Watteau’s favourite hour. At the portal of
the eighteenth century, he created the most exquisite
work which the century produced and directed art
into the paths in which it moved for fifty years to
come.
How is it that Watteau was the first to depict Parisian elegance? There seems to be an inexplicable contradiction between his art and his life. For he was never a Frenchman, nor was he even of a distinguished family. His native town of Valenciennes, although it had, since the peace of Nymphenburg, belonged to France, was nevertheless a Flemish city. His father was a tiler, who intended to make his son a carpenter, and the boy had great difficulty in acquiring permission to visit the workshop of a village painter. He then formed the great resolution of trying his fortune in Paris, the centre of all taste and of everything beautiful. Alone and without connections, a bashful, reticent young man, he walked the pavements of a great city, his head full of plans, but his pockets empty. He finally obtained occupation with a dealer near the Pont Notre Dame to paint copies of Netherlandish pictures for three francs a week; was afterwards em-
Matteau
68i
ployed by the scene-painter Gillot, and later by Claude
Audran, conservator of the Luxembourg, in decorative
works.
How, then, did this son of the Flemish tiler, who knew only the misery of life, become the painter of the graces? The explanation is perhaps to be found in the fact that Watteau was a foreigner. All the Parisian painters passed regardless by this world of beauty which they saw about them daily. Watteau discovered it, because for him the Parisian was some- thing strange and wonderful that he observed with the delighted eye of a peasant lad who had just come into a great city. He had only seen tradesmen, jugglers, bird-dealers and rat-catchers, kirmesses and crude peasant dances in his native home. In Paris, as the associate of Audran, he lived in the centre of the ele- gant world. Even to-day in the garden of the Luxembourg at night, the spirit of the eighteenth century awakes. The huge old trees wind their branches as if to form fairy groves, and through the long paths loving couples wander, while others whisper on marble benches at the feet of old statues. To-day they are students and grisettes, but they were then young cavaliers and dainty countesses; for the garden of the Luxembourg was the rendezvous of distinguished society in the eighteenth century as was the Bois de Boulogne in the nineteenth. Often the poor tiler’s son of Valenciennes looked timidly down from the high windows of the palace upon this elegant life.
682
Ube Hrt ot dTrancc
What he did not see here he learned at a later period
with Crozat, the rich financier: the whole history of the
epoch and the most adored women of Paris. As he was
a stranger, he was the first to paint what Parisian
painters had not considered capable of artistic rendi-
tion— a phenomenon which has often been repeated.
Jan van Eyck became the father of landscape painting
because he travelled from his homp tn P^rtnor;^l •
Gentile Bellini, the painter of Venic
previously been in Constantinople;
first painter of Spanish women, because he was a native,
not of Spain, but of Greece.
A second motive must also be considered, — that Watteau himself was a misshapen, embittered man. An incurable malady had made him tim.id and un- sociable. He is described by his biographers as sad and fearful, suspicious and awkward in company, and his portraits confirm this description. His eyes aie empty and expressionless as those of a sparrow-hawk; his hands are red and bony, and his mouth is drooping. In the portrait in which he is represented without a wig, it seems as if he wished to mock his own ugliness and sickness. The hair is tangled and disordered, the clothes droop about low shoulders and a small chest. Though surrounded by riches, beauty, coquetry, and elegance, he, the consumptive, had no part in all this.
He too wished to love. This is shown by the myth- ological pictures which he painted at the beginning of his career. He dreams of rosy bodies, thinks with envy
Matteau
683
of Paris, whom the three goddesses chose as an arbiter;
he recalls Jupiter who, as a goat-footed satyr, won fair
Antiope, and how Vertumnus, in the disguise of an ugly
old woman, deluded the fair Pomona. Only to him,
the sick man, love is denied. A picture of Cupid
disarmed closes the series of his mythological pictures.
With increasing sickness he became more timid and restless. He locked his door and separated from Crozat because he preferred solitude. After taking refuge with a countryman, the painter Vleughels, where no one would seek him, he left even him, because the thought of being a burden to others distressed him, and wandered aimlessly to London, only that he might be unobserved on foreign soil, f After his return he painted a sign for his friend the art dealer Gersaint — an ethereal picture which only a consumptive could have created: without substance, the grey rose colours as if breathed upon the wood; the over-slender figures relieved of all that is fleshly ; a breath, a nothing. Then he retired to Nogent-sur-Marne. He began an altar- piece which he wished to donate to the church, a Crucifixion of Christ, with an expression of pain which only one sick unto death could give. He died on the 1 8th of July, 1721, at thirty-six years of age.
If one knows this biography, the fetes galantes of Watteau appear in a different light. He became the painter of such subjects because he did not reproduce reality, but conceived fata morgana pictures, his own dreams of beauty and of love. While others sailed
684
TLbc Hrt of ffrance
arm-in-arm to the fields of the blessed, he, the sick
and misshapen, remained alone upon the grey earth,
and gazed upon the happy shores from which no ship
approached for him. His whole activity was the ex-
pression of a great longing; the longing of a sick man
for joy, and of a lonely man for love. In youth when
he saw others struggle, he thought of soldiers and of
camp life, of military fame and of the clangour of
trumpets; as Memling in the hospital of Bruges painted
himself as a lansquenet galloping through the landscape
upon a white horse. At a later period, the weak man
was enraptured by the strength of Rubens. Then he,
the ugly one, dreamt of beauty. Sitting, weary unto
death, in his sick-room, he was borne by the wings of a
dream into a distant Utopia, into a land of happiness
and of love. When lonely, he thought of women, the
touch of whose garments would be blessedness. We
can thus understand the sadness, the breath of melan-
choly, which quivers through these representations
of the enjoyment of life; the fact that his figures,
although based upon actuality, seem to spring from a
distant Elysium. Although they wear the garb of the
eighteenth century, his women are not those of whom
the authors relate, but are as innocent, as maidenly
and bashful, as though they had never before seen a
man. Watteau sings of them like a schoolboy to
whom love is still a holy mystery. For him the prose
of life is interwoven with the magic of fable. Per-
haps, indeed, life was modelled after art, and the age
discovered its grace after the dreamer Watteau had
revealed it.
IV.— The Followers of Watteau
Our attention is first attracted by a curious change of parts. Watteau, the Netherlander, seems like a Parisian: Chardin, the Parisian, like a Netherlander. Both adopted their subjects because they saw the world with the eye of a romanticist. Watteau, who came from the country of corpulent Flemish matrons, was captivated by the chic, ethereal grace of a Parisian woman. Chardin dreamed that he was far away from the majestic pomp of the style of Louis XIV., by imitating the coy little pictures of the Dutch. Thus the Netherlander became the painter of jetes galantes, while the Parisian extolled the joys of private life.
Heretofore still-life had only been painted in France when it was possible to unite it logically with the fig- ure of Flora or Pomona. Chardin was the first to pro- gress to independent still-life: a successor of the Dutch, and yet in his conception of colour altogether a Ro- coco master. For the Dutch laboured in warm Rem- brandtesque light and shade, while Chardin loved cold harmonies of blue, white, and yellow, which seldom occur in Dutch painting, and then almost exclusively with Terborg. Porcelain, the favourite decorative material of the Rococo, is determinative for his colour-
686
ZTbe Brt of ffrance
scale; for objects must be represented in cool values of
colour when grouped beside white porcelain dishes.
A blue grape lies near a yellow lemon; a white porcelain
mug with a blue border stands beside a clay pipe and
a copper kettle. Sometimes he paints a table with
white cloth, and upon it silver knives and forks, a water
goblet, oysters, and glasses; the skin of a pear and the
bluish rind of a melon. Books, vases, and marble busts,
bluish-white carpets, globes, and atlases — always only
cool or mellow, never succulent objects — he arranges
so as to form dainty harmonies of colour.
Chardin lived in an old atelier under a roof, a quiet, gloomy room, usually full of the vegetables which he used for his still-life. There was something picturesque about this dusty place, where the dark green of the vegetables stood in harmonious relief against the grey walls, and the blue and white plates formed such pretty spots of colour upon the light table-cloth. In this peaceful, harmoniously lighted room the little scenes from child-life are also set of which one chiefly thinks when Chardin’s name is mentioned. The clock ticks and on the cozy porcelain stove the kettle bubbles. He knows no significant moments, and paints in these scenes also nothing but still-life: the poetry of habit. And his portraits show that with him art and per- sonality were one and the same. He looks like a good grandpapa, almost like an old lady ; without making any toilette, he painted himself as he moved about at home in his atelier. With a white nightcap upon his head,
ffollowere of Matteau
687
a thick cloth about his neck, horn spectacles upon his
nose, and above them a green eye-shade, he looks
serenely and quietly upon us. Just as quiet and serene
is his art. In an age which knew nothing of innocence,
he glorified the innocence of childhood; and in depicting
this little world with all its games, joys, and sorrows
he opened a new field for art. How tenderly he has
painted the soul-life of the child: the little hands folded
in prayer, the little lips which the mother kisses, the
dreamy, wide-open young eyes! Sometimes he shows
the laundress, the cook, or the labours of the housewife.
He never relates anecdotes. His field of study is the
pale, subdued light of dim kitchens, or sunlight play-
ing upon white table-cloths and grey walls. Just
because he does not attempt to narrate, his pictures
have such a distinguished charm. Art is concealed
behind an unspeakable simplicity, which is the more
charming because it has been at all times so rare.
That of the many who, following Watteau’s ex- ample, devoted themselves to the portrayal of the life of the upper classes, not one approaches him in deli- cacy is due rather to psychic than technical reasons. Watteau, the sick, consumptive man, to whom the happiness of love was never granted, saw the world with the eye of a dreamer. A soft zephyr wafted him into the Elysian fields where nothing had the heaviness of earth and everything was dissolved in poetic mist. His realism, which consisted in the externals of cos- tume, is only apparent. In reality there were no
688
XTbe Hrt of ^France
cavaliers of such grace, no ladies of such a heavenly
charm. Only the perfume of flowers and the essence
of things is wafted from his pictures. The prose of
life is transformed into idealistic poetry.
The artists who follow him stand with both feet firmly planted in real life; they paint not dreams but reality, not elegies but the chronicles of their time. For this reason their works lack the poetic, transfigured spirit which hovers over Watteau’s. But although compared with him they have a cruder, soberer, drier effect, they seem charming, light, and free, if we do not spoil our pleasure by thinking of Watteau. With them also there is neither ennui nor acaaemic coldness. They follow the most joyful and exquisite fashion which ever existed, and they follow it with great taste. Instinctively and without effort they find for the light, sparkling things which they wish to say an equally light and spaikling style.
Lancret, who worked with Watteau under Gillot, is a delicate and refined master, a reflection of Watteau indeed, but one who mirrors reflected light in in- dividual variations. He is especially fond of painting ]eies galantes in the open air, to which he gives the title of the Four Seasons. In the springtime young ladies whom the sun has tempted out-of-doors gather flowers in the woods, while the organ grinder plays his instru- ment near by. In the summer they have assumed the costume of reapers and celebrate the harvest feast; in the autumn they recline with attentive cavaliers
ffollower6 ot Matteau
689
under shady trees; in the winter, muffled in coquettish
furs, they are courted upon the ice. Sometimes a
Turkish fete is celebrated or an excursion is made to
the neighbouring village, where the yearly fair is being
celebrated and jugglers dance.
Pater was the first to transfer the scenes of his pictures to the salon. After the new hotels of the Faubourg Saint-Germain had been built and Oppenort had created the new style for applied art. Pater could begin composing the symphonies of the salon. Pretty costumes and clever little figures in the midst of charm- ing Rococo rooms — such is the content of his pictures. Young ladies, packed in amidst soft cushions, recline on silken fauteuils; dainty chambermaids occupied with their mistress; the abbe appears to inquire in regard to her health, the dressmaker submits her latest robes ; and lackeys serve tea upon silver waiters. A young couple sitting upon a sofa, in front of a brightly illuminated chimney-piece, is examining en- gravings so close together that the outlines of the silken breeches of the gentleman are lost in the lady’s silk robe. A world of exquisite articles, such as Japanese ivories, bronzes, and oriental fabrics, is all about the figures. From pier-glasses and Lyonese cushions, blue silk beds with white muslin curtains, from dainty silk petticoats, grey silk stockings, and pink silk clothes, from coquettish dressing-gowns trimmed with swans- down, and from ostrich feathers and Brussels lace he composes delicate bouquets of colour.
690
XTbe Hrt of jfrance
Le Prince, Fauray, Ollivier, Hilaire, and the two
Swedes Lavreince and Roslin are further interpreters
of worldly elegance. But in order to make the ac-
quaintance of the Rococo in all its distinction one must
also study the etchings. The preference for light,
evanescent colour was especially conducive to this
branch of art. Under Louis XIV. line engraving also
had served the purpose of glorifying the king. The
boastful pictures of the palace of Versailles and the
portraits of the royal family and accounts of the court
festivals were spread abroad in prints. Now engrav-
ing loses its courtly character and becomes a fancy
article like all the products of the Rococo. Dainty
books in fine morocco binding must lie upon the table;
books intended not to be read, but to be examined
during the leisure hours. Dainty duodecimo editions
of the clcbssic authors also appeared; Moliere’s comedies,
Ovid’s Metamorphoses, Boccaccio’s novels, and La Fon-
taine’s fables were published with spicy illustrations.
Hubert Gravelot, Nicolas Cochin, and Charles Eisen
furnished the illustrative material, spread extravagant
grace on all sides, and enveloped even the classic
authors with gallant charm.
But even fonder than of seeing gods and nymphs were men of beholding themselves in the mirror of art. And, since art had come to be nothing more than a reflection of life, in no period of art had portraiture such a significance as during the Rococo. Balls and promenades, the theatre and the salon — every social
jpollowers of Mattcau
691
event was caught by the etchers in prints which give
back to us the entire jrou-frou of the century. With the
older artists the innocent, paradisiac sentiment of
Watteau prevailed, and Arcadia was the ideal of the
salon. Young women dream, mechanically turn over
the leaves of a volume of music, or listen abstractedly
to the words of a cavalier. From the later etchers,
as from Saint Aubin’s Bal pare, the jubilant Evoel
of joy is echoed. The rooms gleam in the light of
Venetian chandeliers. Rosy cupids look down from
the light walls, silken trains rustle, silken shoes skip
about, fans are coquettishly shaken, diadems and
necklaces sparkle and gleam. Slender cavaliers and
young girls dance the gavotte with a teasing yet sol-
emn grace; knights of Malta and abbes pay court to
the ladies. The mirrors reflect the whole glittering
picture.
Before the portraits of the eighteenth century one remains standing in the galleries with especial pleasure. Even little medallions, the works of unknown artists, have a discreet grace which disappeared from the world with the rise of democratic art. Certainly the Rococo is one-sided here also. There are no rugged, manly characters, for life did not produce them. The eighteenth century is the century of woman. She is the axis about which the world revolves; the most distinguished protectress of art, and its principal sub- ject. There passes before us the whole company of young women with rosy complexions and gentle eyes,
692
TLbc Hrt of ^France
in ample silk clothes, adorned with collars, or in half
mythological garb; young girls who are innocence itself,
and others less apparently so. An age which devoted
itself to self-culture produced so many beauties that
it seems to us, descendants of a later period, as if
ugly women had not existed in the eighteenth century.
Jean Marc Nattier was the first to desert the style of Rigaud and paint the dainty instead of the dignified, the lovable instead of the proud. Although he probably had little insight into the character of his models — and such insight would hardly have been worth while — he has given them all an expression of unaffected distinction. He is especially at home in painting silk clothes, of caressing light shades of blue, grey, and green, and in pink tones. He had also a fine taste, for pretty coiffures, for those simple wavy modes of dressing the hair which succeeded the majes- tic arrangement of the age of Louis XIV. In the application of beauty spots, and the wearing of pearls and delicate diadems, he was a past master. Often he painted the ladies in fragrant, transparent robes, through which a leg or breast peeped forth, and in- scribed them Diana or Musidora.
Louis Tocque, his stepson, carried to barbaric Rus- sia something of the splendour of the Rococo, and Robert Tournieres introduced the mode of medallions and of delicate miniature portraits. But far richer in consequence was the inspiration that came from a Venetian artist. Under Watteau’s portraits we find
followers of Matteau
693
one of a lady upon a background of roses — Rosalba
Carriera, whose beautiful name and rosy art he in-
dicated by a symbol.
This lady played an important part in the history of art during the eighteenth century; for she invented pastel painting. The effect of oil painting was too heavy and material, too gloomy and solemn in the light rooms of the Rococo. Its oily and moist colours did not suit the fragrant-powder sentiment. They needed a technique which was as spiritual as the subjects; a technique that used the dust of flowers as colour and preserved the sensitive qualities of the butterfly’s wing. For this reason Rosalba adopted pastel painting. Although her portraits are life-sized, they preserve the character of dainty jewels. She does not paint her ladies in dignified poses, but attempts to catch the nervous charm which lies in the turning of a corner of the mouth, a mocking glance of the eye, a dainty gesture, or a refined movement. Light silk robes rustle, dainty laces flutter and the perfume of tea- roses and flowers is wafted from the powdered hair.
Among Frenchmen Maurice Latour progressed further in the paths of Rosalba. All types of Rococo society — aesthetic abbes and gallant ministers, theatri- cal and real princesses, chamberlains, princes, and sub- tle marquises — file by in his pastels. His portrait of himself resembles Voltaire. A light, mocking smile plays about his mouth, and this sharp epigrammatic trait distinguished also his pastels from the soft
694
XLbc Brt of jfrance
and charming productions of Rosalba. In keen, witty
strokes, bold and sarcastic, he depicts a character.
The ladies of the opera, those dancers who continue to
live under the delightfully vague names of Mile. Rosalie
and Mile. Silanie, gave the preference to Perronneau,
in whose works they found a more graceful rendition of
their beauty. The most celebrated of all was the Swiss
Liotard, who made a triumphal progress through the
world, from Naples to London, and from Paris to
Constantinople.
V.— Boucher
The Rococo was the first period which used the rustling of the toilette to heighten sensual charm. A piece of bare flesh, shimmering under a lace sleeve, no larger than was -necessary to press the lips upon, seemed more piquant than statuesque nudity. As in this domain there were so many delicate discov- eries to be made, historical painting had from the beginning to yield to genre-painting in the same proportion as taste preferred the small to the great. Jean Restout, Jean Raoux, Pierre Subleiras, Carle van Loo, Lagrenee, Jean Francois de Troy, Charles Antoine, and Noel Nicolas Coypel, the chief representatives of historical painting in the first quarter of the eighteenth century, still belonged to the school of Le Brun. At least, the same powerful and heavy forms remain and there does not live in their work that indefinable spark
ROSALBA CARRIERA
A LADY (pastel)
Louvre
IBoucber
695
which electrifies the beholder in the works of the Ro-
coco. Only in their subjects the spirit of the Rococo
is expressed, just as the Carracci had once depicted
the subjects of the Counter-reformation in the lan-
guage of form of the fifteenth century.
As in the days of Correggio and Sodoma, love stories were the only themes treated, and both Bible and mythology were used to furnish material to the ars amandi. Magdalen, for the Counter-reformation the penitent sinner, became again for the Rococo the spirit of attractive sin. A favourite subject was the theme Lot and his Daughters in which the relation of the Regent to the Duchess of Berry seemed personified. Seductive pursuits and gallant shepherd scenes were offered by the antique. Psyche is led by Zephyrus into the palace of Cupid, Vertumnus deludes Pomona, and Andromeda breaks the bonds of marital conven- tion; Telemachus seeks his father lingering with the beautiful Calypso. Venus, the open-hearted spouse of Vulcan, is surrounded by a court of all her admirers. She coquettes with Adonis, Hermes, or Mars, receives the reward of the apple from Paris, and celebrates her relation with Bacchus — a hymn to wine and love. Dainty chambermaids costumed as graces serve her, cupids bearing flowers and silken bands hover in the air. Favourite subjects also were the love-adventures of Jupiter; how he approached Danae as a golden rain, Callisto as a satyr, and Europa as a bull ; how Latona retired to the isle of Delos to give birth to her twins.
696
Zbc Brt of France
Neptune, ruler of the sea, plays an important part,
because the bath has become the centre of refined
pleasure for the Rococo. He is enthroned at the side
of Amyone tritons and nereids swing and rock upon
the waves. The artists are delighted to have passed
the days of gloomy piety, and therefore paint the sun-
god, progressing through the clouds upon his glittering
waggon; leaving the abode of Thetis at morn, and re-
turning to the palace of the goddess at even, after he
had during the day pursued Daphne or done homage
to Leucothea or Clytie. Even Hercules is a hero of
the time, not indeed the giant who throttles Antaeus,
but Musagetus, leading like a dainty ballet-master the
dances of the Muses, or the enamoured Phaeacian sitting
at the spinning-wheel of Omphale. Especially in this
scene did the Rococo find a confirmation of its own
philosophy of life: that even the heroes of antiquity
passed their happiest hours in ladies' boudoirs. Other
celebrated lovers, Angelica and Medor, or Rinaldo
following the enchantress Armida to her island, fre-
quently recur. The beautiful lady of the period con-
sidered herself a Dejanira when a marquis in the role
of Nessus carried her off, and consoled herself with the
deserted Ariadne or Dido, when, after a brief love-
affair, her friend deserted her.
After these masters had depicted Rococo thoughts in the heavy forms and the showy colours of Le Brun, Francois Lemoyne led the Rococo to victory in form also, and gave to historical painting that trend to
Boucber
697
freedom, lightness, and grace which genre-painting had received through Watteau. In place of the heavy red and blue, dainty rosy and light tones appear, and at the same time the dainty bodies of the Rococo ladies were no longer enveloped, as formerly, in a rustling silk dress, Lemoyne’s figures have not the majestic movement and the rounded limbs of the preceding epoch, and no longer resemble the heroic massive female type of the Baroque. They have dainty, fragile bodies with piquant little heads and coquettish coiffures, with a fine sensual nose, soft arms, and long, graceful legs. Neither do they stand amidst mighty architecture or before heavy sweeping curtains, but, light and ethereal, in careless joy, they rock upon the clouds. Whether he calls them nymphs or graces, or unites the Muses, Diana, Flora, and Pandora in the Apotheosis of Hercules, they are all Parisian women of the Rococo, elegant and supple. A mischievous laughter, a mixture of innocence and corruption plays about their mouth. Before they sat as models their little waists had been laced in tight corsets and their legs encased in silk stockings. Paint and beauty- spots are not unknown to them, and, although they are antique goddesses, they know all the secrets of the toilette and the refinement which the marquises and opera beauties of the eighteenth century had brought into vogue. His Muses are as portrait-like as Falguiere’s statue of Cleo de Merode.
Through Lemoyne historical painting thus attained
698
XTbe Hrt of ffrance
a new character. It became a new feature of the ars
amandi to be painted as an antique love-pair. How
unrestrainedly this was done is shown by the picture
which the young Due de Choiseul ordered in 1750 upon
the occasion of his marriage to the daughter of the
financier Crozat, in which he was depicted as Apollo
descending to Clytie, the beautiful mortal.
Charles Natoire was the first to progress farther in these paths. His usual subjects are bacchic festivals, scenes from the story of Psyche, Galatea encircled by cupids, or the deserted Ariadne. Everything is light and rosy, corresponding perfectly with the light tone of the rooms and the silvery gleam of the orn- aments.
Francois Boucher grasped all these threads in his hand and created an art which was an apotheosis of the Rococo. The carnival which had begun with a meas- ured gavotte has now become a wild can-can. He paints no longer Watteau’s minuet, but those so-called Babylonian dances which the corps de ballet of the Grand Opera performed before Louis XV. Crebillon, Bernard, and Grecourt in literature. Pompadour and du Barry upon the throne, find in him their artistic parallel.
In many respects his works are disappointing. He did not possess the delicacy peculiar to the best Rococo masters. At a later period Diderot called him a painter of marionettes, and this criticism touches Boucher’s weakest point. His works are lacking in the psychic charm which Watteau possessed to such a high degree; they have no soul, and therefore cannot speak to soul. A malicious smile, a tender infatuation, are the only sentiment reflected in these heads. Many as were the models who frequented his atelier, Boucher is seldom individual, and gives to his deities and nymphs some- thing typical and empty which almost reminds us of a wax doll. In form and in colour also he is often cruder than the others. Crimson tones prevail in his car- nations, and his intense blue sometimes has an almost gaudy effect. Especially are his works of his last years far from attaining the charming grace of the Rococo painters; the heads being grimacing and in- sipid, the bodies of an artificial elegance in their rounded softness. The pressure of work during the last years caused him to adopt a fixed pattern, and to strive after chic and external effect.
But just this pressure and the colossal number of his works, point out the exceptional position which he occupies within his epoch. The Rococo is an age rather of Phaeacian enjoyment than of bold activity, rather of trifling dalliance than of serious work. The artists also are aesthetic lovers of pleasure with little of the energy of the preceding generation. In contrast to these over-refined epicures who early in life became blasts and were silent, Boucher appears to teem with health, although it was he who in later years was con- sidered the genuine type of the man of the Rococo, whose existence was passed in sybaritic effeminacy.
700
Ube Hrt of ffrance
He led the life of a grand seigneur, spent 50,000 francs
a year, subsidised ballet dancers, and gave artistic
fetes to which the whole world of the stage flocked.
He possessed an artistic collection containing gold-
smith’s work, bronzes, Japanese wood-engravings, and
Chinese porcelains, besides pictures and drawings by
almost all great masters. At the same time, how-
ever, he stands in the midst of this epicurean time
as a powerful, able workman: a sort of Augustus the
Strong, who was out of place in this effeminate epoch.
The period of his activity covers half a century.
Until very old age he sat daily ten hours at the easel,
and under the government of Pompadour especially
he was the man for everything. Every day he ap-
peared in her palace to give her instruction in painting
and look through her etchings. No court festival, no
theatrical representation took place which he did not
conduct. In addition to the role of the designer of
the wardrobe he also had to play those of a paper-
hanger, cabinet-maker, jeweller, and decorator. For
the solution of such many-sided problems a dreamer
like Watteau would not have been capable; it re-
quired a robust workman sure of whatever he under-
took. As Boucher was this, he is lacking in the fine
note of the Rococo, and appears like an artisan among
artists. But as he alone still had the power of work
possessed by the great men of the past, he was, not-
withstanding this, the representative man of the
epoch, and has, as its strongest and busiest master.
JBoucber
701
given the final bodily form to the spirit of the Rococo
in all of its radiations.
Boucher’s activity included everything. He once painted a picture for Mme. de Pompadour: little cupids making music, carving, building, etching, painting, and kneading in clay — a homage to the beautiful woman who, as a dilettante, was active in all domains of art. Such a magician was Boucher. He took part in everything that art produced to surround life with aristocratic splendour. He not only arranged the ballets and Japanese fetes which took place in the house of Pompadour, but even designed the cos- tumes for all the great ladies who appeared at the court, and for all the little dancers whom she sum- moned from the Opera. Landscape-gardening re- ceived through him a new character. In his designs Diverses jontaines we first meet with the rose-bowers and shell grottos which dominated the style for several decades; the fantastic cliffs from which the water spurts forth; chimaeric monsters who dwelt with beauti- ful women in enchanted grottos. Next to Aurele Meissonier, he was the great leader of applied art in France. Inexhaustible in invention, he furnished designs for sculptors, ivory carvers, goldsmiths, and carpenters; for paper, furniture, sedan chairs and bookbinding, fans and jewelry; he modelled porcelain figures and mantel decorations, vases and chandeliers.
As a painter he is devoted to no especial branch; Whether the problem is to paint easel-pictures or
702
XTbe Hrt of ffrance
decorations, wall or ceiling pictures, surportes, wag-
gon doors, dainty miniatures or menus, oil paintings,
etchings, or pastels — he furnishes everything. For
the stage he designed curtains and scenery, gardens
adorned with statues, grottos, and waterfalls, palaces
with marble colonnades, and country dairies in hazy,
blue landscapes. As director of the Gobelins’ factory,
he fixed the style of tapestries, and composed vases and
garlands, shells and medallions into joyous fantastic
designs. The number of chambers which he decorated
for the king was colossal ; the royal bedrooms in especial
which were scattered throughout Paris were entirely
Boucher’s work. The palace of Bellevue which Pompa-
dour built for herself owed to him its decoration.
And as he was technically the master of the most different branches of art, so his range of subjects knew no bounds. The man who could himself play the role of tailor and carpenter understood from its very found, ations the furniture of the Rococo. Pictures from the elegant world form therefore the introduction to his works. When he designed his illustrations to Moliere, he did not think of keeping them within the style of the seventeenth century; he forgot that these ladies wore high toupets and stiff corsets and moved about in Le N6tre’s gardens. He merely translated Moliere into the Rococo, made him coquettishly young and amusing. Like Watteau, he is the leader of fashion who is always inventing new coiffures and new toilettes. The scene is laid at one time in the park,
Boucber
703
then in the street, the boudoir, or the salon. The
furniture is of bizarre elegance: the bed especially,
a mighty four-poster, is hardly ever lacking in the
background of his prints. He has similiarly depicted
in a series of pictures the aristocratic life of the Rococo.
Here a young lady sits at her mirror and reflects where
the beauty-spot which she wishes to apply will be most
becoming; or she interrupts her toilette to interview a
little milliner who is submitting Brussels lace for her
inspection ; or she stands at a window engaged in tying
a rose-coloured love letter about the neck of a carrier
pigeon; or in the winter season she is pushed over the
ice in a chair-sleigh by her admirer, an elegant boa
about her bare shoulders, and enveloped by snow-
drops gleaming like featherdown. The Chinese also
play an important part in his paintings, certainly little
resembling actual Chinese, but all the more like the
distinguished ladies and gentlemen who took part in
Pompadour’s Chinese mummeries.
As a portraitist he does not belong to the great psychologists. He painted few pictures which are at the same time interesting and a good likeness, like the head of a young girl in the Louvre. Yet he has in the picture of Pompadour created a work which re- flects the spirit of the whole epoch. She sits in her workroom upon a couch, the piano is open, upon a tabourette lie pieces of music, some of which have slipped down and lie upon the floor beside the im- plements of painting. The great mirrors behind her
704
Xlbe Hrt of ffrance
reflect the salon, the books, the library, and the cupids
of the clock. One is really conducted into the work-
shop of an artist rather than in the boudoir of a mis-
tress, and the picture is permeated by the spirit of an
age which made even of love an art.
On account of his pastoral subjects he was celebrated as the Anacreon of painting. For surportes as well as for gobelins and etchings he used landscape views, and the scenes are more confidential and enamoured than with his predecessors. Here a young marquis, disquised as a shepherd, teaches his sweetheart to play the flute; there he bends over her, pressing a kiss upon her hair, and offers her a dovecote, a birdcage, or a Pandora’s box; or they kiss each other through the mediation of a bunch of grapes, which he devours in rapturous ecstacy after they have been touched by the maiden’s lips.
His cooks and pe<^sants bring another shade into this love-play. It is idle to speak of intimate know- ledge of folk-life in these paintings; for these are not peasant women who labour in the field with a hoe but such as a young marquis, tired of the salon, dreams of. After he has breathed the perfume of the distinguished ladies, he envies the grenadier his cook, the village youth his country beauty. For the marquise Boucher paints the sturdy country boys, for the elegant roues the maidens with brown arms and broad shoulders. In literature Jules Lemaitre (in his romance Les rois) has probably best depicted this sentiment of the age.
Boucber
705
With this sentiment is also connected the fact that
the countryfolk took such a prominent part in his
landscapes. Although he shares with Watteau the
love for green and blooming nature, no distinguished
ladies and gentlemen recline upon the meadows. The
wood is for him no Elysium but an ideal village seen
with the eye of a gentleman of the salon, who for a
change finds an especial charm in the odour of the
stable. The dwellings are thatched peasants’ huts;
turtle-doves sit cooing upon the roof, chickens are busy
upon the dunghill, brooks wind through the meadows
past decaying bridges. Fishermen with their nets
are catching trout, and especially neat washerwomen,
their skirts tucked up high, bend over their work.
Even religious pictures occur among Boucher’s works. For in Pompadour’s residence provision was made for repentance as well as for love. The architect had not forgotten the palace chapel and Boucher had designed the necessary altar-pieces, with the same chic as he had the gauze costumes of the ballet dancers. Among his religious works are a Birth of Christ, an Adoration of the Shepherds, a Sermon of John the Baptist, and an Assumption of Mary. He is espec- ially fond of painting the Christ-child and the infant John kissing each other — another evidence of the close relationship of the Rococo to the age of Leonardo, which had first used this motive.
But Boucher’s especial domain is nude mythological figures. He was celebrated by contemporaries and
7o6
XTbe Hrt ot ffrance
condemned by later generations as the “painter of the
frivolous court of Cythera.” When the name of
Boucher is mentioned one thinks not of shepherds and
jMes galanies, but of pictures like the Birth of Venus
in the Stockholm Museum. Tritons blow their shell
horns and play with the fair-haired daughters of the
sea, approaching upon the backs of friendly dolphins.
In all positions the bodies caress and embrace each
other, while cupids in the air wave a cloth like a
fluttering banner of victory. The heaven gleams
brightly, as if bathed in the perfume of roses; the
bodies of the women arise bright and gleaming from
the light blue waves. This picture means for Boucher
what the Embarkment for the Isle of Cythera meant
for Watteau. When Watteau appeared the pilgrimage
was begun, but now its end has been attained. While
his heroine is the lady in silken dress and Brussels
lace who swings her dainty slipper over a world
of cavaliers, Boucher’s is Venus in person — likewise
a Venus of the Rococo, not the terrible murdering
goddess whom Racine depicted in PhMre, but a
courtesan of the grand style, a gay marquise who
from the balcony of Olympus scatters fragrant roses
through life.
The female nude was the dream of Boucher’s life, and to honour it he set all Olympus in motion. Phoebus, Thetis, nymphs, naiads, and tritons rock softly in the waves and the ether; Apollo with his lyre sits upon the clouds; the Muses dance, and cupids forge the
FRANCOIS BOUCHER
NEPTUNE AND AMYONE
Trianon, Versailles
Boucber
707
weapons of Vulcan. Here, in a bright blue fragrant landscape, Venus leaves her dove-chariot to descend to the bath. There the fair Europa is abducted by Zeus, but without being frightened; her playmates do not wail, but congratulate her on being the chosen one of his celestial majesty. Sometimes he paints the Education of Cupid, the Abduction of Cephalus by Aurora, or subjects like that strange picture in the Louvre, Diana Ascending from the Bath, in which he uses the motive of the cherry-harvest to display youthful bodies in the most varied movements. Fat- cheeked putti tumble about the clouds, triumphantly swing silken banners, shoot down arrows, and bind the hesitating with chains of roses.
If Watteau is the Giorgione, Boucher may be called the Correggio of the Rococo. Like Correggio, he was helpless in depicting manhood. All the men in his pictures are marionettes, who have no bones and are made of sawdust. With Correggio he shares the preference for fleshy cupids with enormous hips and the baut gout which pervades all his works. They naturally differ in composition and colour. While Correggio’s composition was geometric, Boucher’s work is pervaded by the dainty rhythm and the spark- ling freedom of the Rococo. While Correggio, the son of the Renaissance, loves dark and golden tones, Boucher prefers pale, light silver, bluish-red scales. Whereas Correggio uses shadows and contrasts to emphasise his nudes, with Boucher everything, figures
7o8
Ubc Brt of fftance
as well as landscape, are bathed in carressing, vibrating
light. Psychically also the difference in the epoch
is evident. Correggio’s quivering passion is replaced
in Boucher by the love-sick antics of an old gentleman
tapping a young girl under the chin.
Boucher’s types of women are even younger than those of Lemoyne: early matured at the age of fourteen — types like the Irishwoman Murphy who succeeded Pompadour in the royal favour. The legs are tender and nervous, the waist is delicate, and the young, hardly rounded breast quite undeveloped. At first his wife, a seventeen-year-old Parisian, served as his model: then he found by his association with the opera the means of keeping his art ever young; for the corps de ballet was at that time very youthful, and only graceful and languishing bodies were popular. In the portrait which Lundberg painted, Boucher him- self looks like a ballet-master; the head with the wavy wig has something triumphant and self-conscious. His eye gleams as if in fever, and his mouth is soft and sensual. His models were the most youthful and the freshest of figures. One can even observe how with increasing age he found a more subtle pleasure in seeking out quite childish, budding bodies. Like- wise he was, as a true adventurer of love, impartial in his favours. As he painted robust cooks as well as ethereal marquises, so he never thought of confining himself to the elastic firmness of childish bodies, but proceeded from thin to fat, taking pleasure in flaccid
painters of ffrivoUti?
709
bodies and soft, fatty skin. He sometimes renders
every feature of such corpulencies with such delight
that it seems as if Rubens had come to life again.
VI.— The Painters of Frivolity
In this manner the development progressed. With the dainty and measured minuets of Watteau the ball had begun, at midnight under the leadership of Boucher they danced the can-can, and now at dawn the cotillon follows.
They had danced and loved too much. Instead of exerting themselves they now wished only to observe, as the pasha smoking opium sits apathetically in his harem. Even to have the ballet-girls dance no longer affords pleasure. Thus begins at the close of the Rococo the really gallant art — the living pictures. Sturdy fellows and pretty maidens of the people must enact for the distinguished gentlemen the love-scenes for which they have themselves become too biases.
Pierre Antoine Baudouin is the first to tread this domain. His entire activity is devoted to the narration of gallant adventures. Here a young girl is willingly carried off; there an old gentleman takes pleasure in overhearing his beloved with a young gardener; there again confessionals are used for interesting conversa- tions. The circumstance that in the narration of such episodes Baudouin never uses a large canvas and the heavy oil colours, but always a miniature form, and the
710
Ubc Hrt ot ffrance
gouache technique is a proof of the never-failing tact
which like a force majeure dominated this age.
But the cleverest of this group, and indeed one of the most refined artists of the century, is Fragonard, the subtle charmer, in whose works all the joy in life and light-heartedness, the whole grace of the Rococo is once more revealed. He painted everything. Next to his teacher Boucher, he was the most popular de- corator who adorned the temples of the goddesses of beauty. Guimard as well as du Barry made use of his services, and although such works, torn from their environment, lose their most subtle charm, even from the fragments one can judge what clever and sparkling decorations Fragonard created; bizarre and coquettish in conception, light and delicate in tones. That in one of these works, the Four World-Religions , he places the Christian, Asiatic, American, and African side by side, in a setting of the purest Rococo style, is likewise characteristic for the spirit of the century.
Beside the decorator stands the landscape painter. Even in his youth, when a pensioner of the king in Italy, he drew very delicate landscapes; the ancient Roman villas in their mixture of grandeur and de- cay, black cypresses rigidly stretching their boughs to heaven, and bright white statues blinking from the green foliage. Later on he left Paris every summer for the country to portray in fresh pictures peasant life. Countrymen repose after the day’s work, laun- dresses spread their linen upon the ^eadows, cows
painters of jfrivolit^
711
and asses graze in a lonely field. Children especially are the heroes of these pastoral scenes; they make their little dogs dance, play with Polichinelle, or receive their supper from their mother.
His portraits have made him the admired favourite of modern Impressionists. It is hardly possible by simpler means or by any retouching or additions to concentrate more life and directness in one head. With Hals’s bold presentation he combines the spark- ling frou-frou of the Rococo. The toilettes are attuned to delicate greyish-red tones, and he grasps the most fleeting movements of figures and features. Actors especially were represented in his pictures: for they were the heroes of this age, which no longer loved and laboured but only played or had things presented.
Nevertheless one thinks not of such things when the name of Fragonard is mentioned, but of hoop-skirts, silken trimmings and short petticoats, swings revealing interesting grey stockings, fine cambric chemises gliding from rosy shoulders, of cupids kisses and love-play.
‘'Shortly after the close of the Salon exhibition in 1763,” Fragonard himself relates, “a gentleman sent me an invitation to visit him. When I responded to his invitation he was in the country with his mistress. At first he overwhelmed me with praises of the picture I had exhibited, and then confessed that he wished another one by me, the idea of which he himself would give: ‘ I should like you to paint Madame in the swing. Place me so that I can see the pretty child’s feet, or
712
Xlbe Hrt of fftance
even more if you wish to give me especial pleasure.* ”
To this strange lover we owe the picture of The Swing,
the first that shows the real Fragonard.
With this picture he found his mission and became the privileged master of this genre. All the gentlemen of court as well as those of the haute finance wished to have a Fragonard, and the artist was inexhaustible in his invention of piquant situations. He is certainly not a moral artist, but whoever judges works of art not by their subject but by their artistic value will nevertheless reckon him among the greatest masters; so much sparkling verve, so much spirit and dash is shown in all of his paintings. It is astonishing with what fine feeling he arranges his colours and by what simple means he expresses life and movement. From the circumstance that he, like Baudouin, always used water-colour, not oil, and never painted upon a large scale, every trivial realism is avoided and the character of the joyful capriccio is sustained.
Is it the mobile blood of the southern Frenchman (for Fragonard was a native of sunny Provence) which pulsates through his works, or did he labour so nervously and hastily because he himself felt that the days of joy were numbered? The carnival of the Rococo approaches its end; and Fragonard is the Pierrot Lunaire, skipping about pale and ghostlike at dawn. Many of his pictures, mad as they are, have something of the character of a prayer. Upon the altars smouldering flames rise towards heaven, and
XTbe pastoral pla^ 713
pale mortals lay white wreaths at the feet of almighty Eros. Here women raise their hands beseechingly to Satan, praying him to reveal to them the secret of a new sensation; here a couple in mad haste rush to the fountain of love, and the youth drinks eagerly of the water which Cupid gives him. It is no accident that this was the time of spiritualism and wonderful elixirs ; when distinguished gentleman became alchemists and locked themselves up in the laboratories in hopeless endeavour to discover the secrets of life and death; that the saints of this age were those charlatans who pro- mised an elixir of life to weary, effete mortals. Frago- nard’s pleasure in sturdy children resembles what Wagner felt when he brewed the homunculus in his retort. It is no accident that pictures of prophets now became so popular; for all felt that the future con- cealed something gloomy. A light sentimentality, a mournful melancholy pervades Fragonard’s last works. The roses, once so red, are grey as ashes. The joyous carnival of the Rococo was at an end, and Ash Wednes- day had dawned with penance and fasting.
VII.— The Pastoral Play, Bourgeois and Antique
It is with the centuries as with individuals: when they approach their end, they hold inward com- munion and repent of the follies of their youth. So it had been at the close of the quattrocento, when the proud paganism of the Renaissance was followed by
714
XTbe Hrt of jfrance
the gloomy Counter-reformation; at the close of the
seventeenth century, when the Roi Soleil paced from
the magnificent halls of his palace to the confessional.
For the eighteenth century the appearance of Rousseau
had a similar significance.
At the middle of the century epicureanism had attained an unsurpassable refinement. All pleasures of life had been exhausted, and the moment had now come when, after the sparkling champagne, the desire for simple nourishment was awakened; when after over-refinement and frivolity men dreamed themselves back in a happy condition of simplicity and virtue. In the midst of the time of highest culture there ap- peared a man who branded this culture as worthless, and who, in contrast with the over-refinement and effeminacy which he saw about him, praised in glowing colours the primeval condition of the savage. As Tacitus extolled the ancient Germans to the Romans of the decadence, so Rousseau held up as an example to the aristocratic world of the eighteenth century the natural man, who in his virtue puts to shame the civil- ised man. Only where people have few wants and are honest, where under natural conditions natural men and women cling to each other in true love, is true happiness to be found. With tears in his eyes he depicts the life of the plain people; all those charms of quiet home life which the whirlpool of society had destroyed; those sweet cares for house and child, for garden and field, which, though cares, also afford
Ube pastoral plai?
715
happiness. To these conditions of paradisiac innocence
the aristocratic world must return; it must again learn
from the people what it had lost in the current of over
culture. Earnestly he advises mothers themselves to
give the child its first nourishment, for only with
mother’s milk is filial love imbibed. He also exhorts
people to piety. Voltaire, the Mephistopheles of the
century, had only clever mockery for religion ; Rousseau
again substituted faith for doubt.
Voltaire ridiculed the apostle with these words:
After having read your work one feels inclined to walk on all fours. As I have been out of this habit for the last sixty years, I unfortunately feel that it is impossible for me to resume it; and I leave this natural locomotion to those who are more adapted to it than you and I.” The rest of the world was inspired by Rousseau’s writings, and ladies especially adopted the new ideas. Flirtations with aesthetic abbes had after a while become tiresome. They longed for new sensations, and Rousseau gratified this longing. It was so charming after having so long been fashionable ladies to play the role of mothers; so piquant to satisfy the wants of a child in the midst of brilliant social functions and adored by the eyes of cavaliers. The religious feeling also awoke. After free-thinking materialism, it seemed new and distinguished to do homage to sentimental religion. They had heretofore passed the time in idle pleasure; it now seemed to be demanded by good tone
7i6
Zbc Hrt of ffrance
to knit children's garments for charity bazars and to
distribute cakes among handsome beggar boys from
Savoy. These elegant women of the world sprinkled
their heads with ashes and begged forgiveness for
their former sins. They went into the homes of the
poor, took the children in their arms, and loaded them
with the strangest presents, with cast-off silken shawls
and knitted silken purses. They knelt before the altar
and took part in religious processions. The melody
played upon the piano was no longer scherzo vivace,
but sentimental. Religious concerts and Gluck’s ora-
tories were produced at the Tuilleries. The orgies
of the Palais Royal were inevitably followed by orgies
of morality; the gallant pastoral plays by pastorals of
virtue.
Diderot was the first to give to the thoughts of Rousseau a dramatic form. With his family dramas Lee pre de jamille and L’ honnete femme he brought the tragedie hourgeoise and comedie larmoyante into fashion. As the public had formerly taken pleasure in the frivolous dramas of C^rbillon and Gretry’s comic operas, in Zemire and A^or, in Aucassin and Nicolette, they now listened with delight to these tearful dramas which in such a touching, edifying, and virtuous manner extolled the life of the middle classes. Even science was moved by the current. La tendresse de Louis XIV. pour sa jamille was the theme of the prize composition offered in 1753 by the Academy of Sciences. ZLs- thetics followed the same paths. Art must not amuse
Z\)c pastoral pla^
717
but improve, must create examples to encourage the
good and warn against the evil. Only moral sculpture
and painting could now be used. Every painting and
every statue must express a great maxim and be a
lesson for the beholder.
For the older artists this meant ruin. Boucher, in particular, the painter of graces and of the frivolous court of Cythera, felt bitterly the change in taste. In his portrait by the Swede Roslin in 1760 he is no longer a brilliant cavalier, the frequenter of the opera, whom Lundberg painted in 1743. Weary lines are written upon his countenance, and there is something uncertain and restless in his glance. Like a tiger, Diderot had pounced upon him; it was a disgrace still to be compelled to view pictures by a man who openly passed his life with prostitutes; who had lost all ideas of honesty and innocence, and who only lived in this virtuous epoch as a warning example against moral turpitude.
To these sentiments Greuze gave the artistic ex- pression. While Boucher and Fragonard had catered to the piquant pleasures of aristocratic men of the world, the picture became in his hands a moral sermon. Like the philosopher and romancer, he proclaims the doctrine that pure unadorned tenderness lives only in the cottage, and that here alone can be found the life which makes men truly happy. Like Diderot's writings, his paintings show the intentional endeavour to excite moral emotion; they always contain the
7i8
XTbe Hrt of ffrance
practical application: jabula docet. As the
aristocratic world after its orgies of sensuality had become sentimental and tearful, Greuze’s life was a continuous triumphal procession. The whole age wept virtuous tears with him over the reward of the good and the punishment of the evil. The life of the people had been seldom portrayed in aristocratic France; for la canaille was a subject rather of ridicule than glorification. In his twelve etchings published under the title of Cris de Paris, Boucher had por- trayed certain types of the great city — the peddler, the organ-grinder, the milk-woman; but they were curious beings who caused merriment when their harsh voices sounded from the street. Now, under the asgis of Rousseau’s philosophy, the third estate enters art. Men discover that the Arcadia which had formerly been sought far off on Robinson Crusoe’s island could also be found close at hand. They were charmed to be instructed about the honesty of the people, and were so tired of the perfume of the salons that they breathed with pleasure the odours of the dogs, cats, and chickens which shared without restraint the dwellings of these good people.
His first picture, the Father of a Family Reading the Bible to his Children (1755) made him a cele- brated master. The entire aristocratic world pressed to see the work, because it seemed so new, after the clever atheism of the philosophers, to hear of the simple piety of such honest peasants, The numerous
JEAN BAPTISTE GREUZE
THE BROKEN PITCHER
Louvre
XTbe pastoral pla^
719
progeny here depicted also created a profound impres-
sion. Although the women of the Rococo had thought
very lightly of the joys of motherhood, now, as is shown
by the memoirs of Marmontel, the “little man” was
also envied for his wealth in children. Like a biblical
patriarch, he holds in Greuze’s pictures his sceptre in
the midst of a hundred descendants. The good great-
grandfather and the worthy grandfather, both paternal
and maternal, were still alive; and even the uncles,
aunts, and cousins find a home in this model family,
of which all the members cling to each other with
devoted tenderness. Contrasted with the intimate
family life of these people, all social pleasures seemed
to these distinguished ladies dismal and constrained.
They were no less astonished to see with what biblical
solemnity all the other events are portrayed in these
circles. An engagement with the aristocracy was an
indifferent matter of business. A countess became
engaged in order to receive additional homage as a
young wife — a matter solved by signing the marriage
contract and a formal kiss from her fiance. But the
common people still believed that marriage was a
holy sacrament. In the picture of the Country
Betrothal which Greuze exhibited in 1761, twelve
people take part. With solemn gesture the father
gives the dowry to his son-in-law, and with it wise
advice, solemn rules to be followed upon the journey of
life. Bashful and loving, the young girl links her
arm with that of her lover, while the good mother
720
Ube Hrt of jfrance
whispers comforting words in her ear. In awed aston-
ishment, as if she were a superior being, the younger
sisters gaze upon her.
“God speed you, dear Greuze! Remain moral, and when the moment of your death draws nigh there will be not one of your pictures of which you need think with repentance.” With these words Diderot saluted Greuze’s following picture, the Paralytics, when it ap- peared in the Salon in 1763. He here reveals the de- voted care which, in accordance with the biblical command, the children of the bourgeoisie took of their parents. “Honour thy father and thy mother, that thy days may be long in the land which the Lord thy God giveth thee”: such is the theme of the two pictures the Father's Curse and the Punished Son. Like an Olympian Zeus, the father thunders his paternal curse upon his erring son; his mother bursts into tears, and the younger children look tearfully and timidly upon the. culprit. Time passes; and after he has found that only with a father’s blessing can children prosper, the son returns repentant to his father’s house. In the second picture he stands with quaking knees, like a beggar, on the paternal threshold to seek forgiveness; but it is too late, his father is dead. With a tragic gesture the mother points to the corpse, about which the sobbing children and grandchildren stand.
Greuze even intended to paint an entire romance of twenty-six pictures, treating, under the title Battle and Thihaut, the influence of good and bad bringing-
Ube pastoral plas
721
up; it was to conclude with the condemnation of the
murderer Thibaut by his friend the judge Bazile.
This undertaking was never carried out; but in the
next Salon he exhibited two pictures treating the
theme of maternal duties in the spirit of Rousseau.
A young mother gives her child to a nurse, and with
hot tears on part of the whole family, the parting
takes place. In the next picture the baby returns, a
sturdy lad, into the house of his parents; but he does
not recognise his mother and longs for his nurse. The
moral, of course, was that only women who themselves
practise the maternal duty can be sure of the love of
their children.
The young mother occupied with her child was a favourite theme of Greuze. He painted her giving her baby the breast, or sitting at the cradle, full of tender thoughts, beside her husband. Indeed even when the theme is not young motherhood, he constantly points out that this is the mission of woman. The little girl plays with a doll ; because care is to be taken that even in a baby a feeling of motherhood shall be awak- ened. She wears no deforming corset, in order that the bosom may fully develop. While the woman of the Rococo remained all her life a young girl, Greuze’s women gre already mothers. La laiti^re is the occa- sional title. A close psychological connection exists between the appearance of the young ladies and their rustic pleasure of milking the cows early in the morning. They are either fair or dark, and wear a blue or a 46
722
TLbc Hrt ot ^France
red band in their hair; their great brown eyes aie
pouting or foreboding. The effect, however, is always
calculated upon the contrast between the bright,
gleaming and childlike eyes which appear so innocent
and inexperienced and the fully developed forms of
ripe womanhood.
In Greuze’s works Boucher's ideal of beauty has not become more innocent but more ratfine: with this difference, that even in such paintings Greuze remains a moral artist. The scene of a young girl offering doves to Cupid has always as a pendant Mary Magdalen, the repentant sinner, praying with the glance of a Niobe to heaven for forgiveness. He paints not the joys of sensuality, but the sorrow over lost innocence. The poor child whose jug is broken looks like a startled doe; the girl who has let her mirror fall looks perplexed and inconsolable upon the broken fragments. Robbed of all happiness in life and with tearful eyes, another child gazes upon its dead bird. “Think not,” wrote Diderot, “that it is over the jug, the mirror, or the bird that they weep. These young girls bewail more, and well they may.”
In this mixture of tearful morality and perverse raci- ness Greuze is the true painter of his day. For one must not believe that this reformation was a deep one; the simplicity and virtue were only a show. It is true that the Trianon, Marie Antoinette’s “little Vienna,” presented externally a very rustic appearance. At the foot of a wooded hill, on the bank of a placid pond.
XTbe pastoral plai?
723
a row of peasants’ houses extended. There was a
farmhouse and a mill, a dairy and a dovecote; fisher-
men and washerwomen laboured in the vicinity. The
ladies wore straw hats, which had become the fashion
through the taste for pastoral scenes. Upon the
meadows the king’s children played as shepherds and
shepherdesses with their sheep and goats. But in the
interior of the Trianon it looked exactly as in the
artificial village which the Prince of Conde had caused
to be built in the park of Chantilly. There also were
peasants’ houses, a mill, a barn, a stable, and a village
tavern; but none of the buildings actually served
the purposes which its exterior announced. The inn
contained a kitchen, the stable a library, the village
tavern a billiard room, and the barn an elegant bed-
chamber with two boudoirs. Likewise in the Trianon
a whole building consisted of kitchens. There was
a kitchen for cold dishes, another for the entremets, a
third for the entrees, a fourth for the ragouts, a fifth
for the roasts, a sixth for pastry, a seventh for tarts.
Gentlemen could only appear in scarlet uniform with
white, gold-embroidered vests. The barn served the
purpose of a great ball-room. Sometimes, when they
danced under a tent upon the sward, they took pleasure
in summoning a couple of sturdy peasant boys from
the neighbourhood that they might laugh over their
awkward movements ; but otherwise the placard de par
la reine excluded from the park in its greatest extent
every one who had not the right to appear at court.
724
Ube Hrt of ffrancc
Even the king could visit the queen at the
Trianon by invitation only.
In other respects they held fast to all the prescrip- tions of etiquette. The levee of the queen still took place in the presence of the court ladies. Her court, comprising four hundred and ninety-six items, required a yearly outlay of 45,000,000 francs; the sum allowed for gambling was 300,000 francs, the sum for toilets 120,000, which, however, was usually exceeded by
140.000 francs. Her dignity required the purchase of twelve great robes of state, twelve fantastic costumes, and twelve parade costumes for each of the four seasons of the year. In a single year three hundred necker- chiefs for the queen were bought from a single modiste. The yearly salary of a hair-dresser of a great lady, Madame Matignon, was 240,000 francs. At that time the profession of the hair-dressers had become so im- portant that in a memorial to the government they requested to be placed on the same social footing as the artists; for like the painter, the hair-dresser uses the “formative hand, his art demands genius and is therefore a free and liberal art.” The coiffures, a yard high, were adorned with ostrich feathers and rubies. In a single year Marie Antoinette spent
700.000 francs for diamonds, and presented the dauphin with a waggon the wheels and ornaments of which consisted of gilded silver, rubies, and sapphires. The annual allowance for the candles used by the queen was 157,000 francs, and those which were not burnt
XTbe pastoral plai^
725
were assigned to a court lady, who acquired thereby
a yearly income of 50,000 francs. And that morality,
in spite of external appearances, had not improved,
is evident from a remark of the Journal des Modes,
that although Louis XVI. had no mistresses, others
kept masters.
The same pretended naturalness, the same moral immorality exists in Greuze’s pictures, in which there lives the virtuous, sentimental person as the closing eighteenth century dreamed him to be. Even the artificiality and the theatrical affectation of his pictures existed also in the spirit of the time. They thought they had achieved such great virtue that it must be proclaimed with declamatory pathos. They were so proud to have remembered the disinherited that they shed tears of commiseration over their own goodness of heart. In tones quite as unctuous and quite as rich in phrases as Greuze, authors wrote and statesmen spoke of the goodness of the people. All human life was to them a melodrama which ended with the victory of virtue and the punishment of vice. It was certainly a cruel irony of fate that history under- took the punishment in quite a different spirit; that all this rose-coloured dream of simplicity and innocence ended in blood; and that the “man of the people” in no wise revealed himself as gentle and pious as aristocratic society had conceived him to be.
This idealisation of the middle classes was followed by an antique pastoral play: for the longing for sim-
726
Ube Brt of jfrance
plicity was one of the most promising characteristics
of the age. Endeavouring to reconcile Rousseau’s
ideal of simplicity of manners with the yearning for
simple form, they turned from the Rococo to the
Greeks, and dreamed themselves in that bucolic era
when there had been neither powder, bodices nor
crinolines, but the women moved about beautiful as
goddesses, and men, syrinx in hand, rested beside
their flocks. They had also become virtuous; for
which reason they dressed their hair d la Diane. After
the appearance of Abbe Barth^lemy’s Voyage du
jeune Anacharsis, all Paris changed into Athens.
There were no longer balls, but Anacreontic fetes.
The ladies’ girdles were adorned with red figures upon
a black ground in the style of Greek vase pictures;
the gentlemen wore hoUes d la grecque. From the
dressmakers the fashion extended to the artist’s studio.
Architects began to study Vitruvius, and to give their
buildings the serene beauty of line of the Greek
temples. In 1755 Soufflot built the Pantheon, and in
1763 Grimm wrote: “For several years men have been
looking for antique ornaments and forms. The prefer-
ence for them is so general that everything is done d la
grecque. The interior and the exterior of the houses,
the furniture, the goldsmith’s works — all bear the
stamp of Greece.” Even Diderot’s love for the moral
and pathetic picture, such as Greuze painted, was
supplemented after 1760 with an inspiration for the
antique. He gave lectures upon antique taste,
XTbe pastoral plai? 727
and demanded plastic beauty and pure simple line.
The last years of Marie Antoinette were the time of the climax for the antique pastoral play. She wished to become “natural/' and found the models of this naturalness in the Greeks. Etiquette was therefore banished from the Trianon; she chose the harp as her favourite instrument, and prescribed a Grecian cut for her clothes. In a simple white muslin robe, a white kerchief tied loosely about her neck, a straw hat upon her head, and a cane in her hand, she wandered, accom- panied only by a single servant, through the shady alleys of the Trianon. So great was her simplicity that the complaints over the queen's passion for dress were replaced by the wails of the merchants, that through this new fashion the industries of the land, and especially the silk trade of Lyons, were ruined.
Vien, who sought to give his pictures the appearance of antique gems, is the first of these followers of Anacreon, and the antique pastoral play is reflected even more delicately in the works of Madame Vigee- Lebrun. Her studio was during these years the artistic centre of Paris, where all the great men of diplomacy, literature, and the theatre met. It was more interesting to be portrayed by a young girl than by a dignified academician. The beautiful woman was treasured by these great men even more than the clever painter, Marie Antoinette also and the court ladies sat to her. and Mile. Vigee used to paint them as goddesses.
728
Ube Brt of jfrance
muses, or sibyls. Later she married the rich art dealer
Lebrun, and held in her house those aesthetic soupers
d la grecque, which so finely illumine the whole epoch.
‘‘Everything — clothes, customs, food, pleasures, and
table — was Athenian. Madame Lebrun herself was
Aspasia, and Monsieur V Abbe Barthelemy, in the
Greek chiton with a laurel wreath upon his head, read
a poem. Monsieur de Cubieres as Memnon played
upon a golden lyre, and young boys as slaves waited
upon the table. The table itself was filled only with
antique vessels, and all of the dishes were genuine
Greek.” To her marriage we are indebted also for her
most beautiful pictures — those representing her with
her little daughter. The example in the Louvre,
especially, in which she sits embraced by her child,
seems to be the conception of a divine moment. Just
as many of the Tanagra figurines appear as if they
had come directly from Paris, so here the soft grace of
the Rococo is woven with Hellenic simplicity into a
charming harmony. Such works are pervaded by
the sentiment of a Theocritean age, which in its last
moments warms itself in the sunshine of an ancient
world of beauty and listens dreamily to the soft tones
of the syrinx, while below already reverberates the
rattle of the drums of a new age.
Chapter VII.— The Triumph of the Bourgeoisie
I.— England
However similar they seem externally, Greuze and Hogarth are direct antipodes. While in Greuze’s work the old aristocratic art finds its last expression, in Hogarth’s, for a second time in the history of art, the voice of the common people sounds. The threads which the Dutch had relinquished in the seventeenth century were taken up anew, and never again surrendered. I n the seventeenth century Holland still formed an isolated domain of the bourgeoisie in the midst of the aristocratic world; but the prevalence of the monarchic principle was such that the art which had begun bourgeois ended courtly. Now the scale tips towards the common people. One piece after another falls off from the ancient aristocratic world; and one land after another assists in the foundation of the new temple, upon which we are building to-day. In the preparation of the great middle-class culture of the nineteenth century, England was called to be the leader. For even in the eighteenth century this was a relatively democratic country, and had carried
729
730 XTriumpb of tbe Bourgeoisie
out the idea of the modern free state at a time when upon the continent the sultriness of the coming storm was hardly perceptible in the atmosphere. Despotic oppression had ceased to exist, and there was no chasm between the nobility and the middle classes. Every man was at liberty to shape his personality and fate after his own fashion.
A change such as the Restoration of 1660 brought about must have had a deep influence upon the moral formation of life. It seemed as if suddenly the prisons had been thrown open, and hordes of criminals swept over the country. The restraint of an earlier day was followed by an intoxication of viciousness and un- bridled dissipation. In revelry and riot, with assault and murder, England celebrated the first years of its liberty. All London was full of pickpockets, robbers, and speculators, and gambling reached a dizzy height. English officials, grown rich in India, established oriental harems. The theatre also followed the trend of the time. The obscene comedies of Wycherley and Congreve have nothing in common with the dainty frivolity of the French plays. From them speaks the vulgar crudity of the plebeian who takes pleasure in wallowing in the mire. The menagerie of the passions was let loose, and in the enjoyment of liberty all morality was lost.
The problem of the education of this new race of men therefore arose. The wild years of youth should be followed by a settled manhood. As a free country
}£nGlant)
731
could not restrain the wild unchained flood of the
popular spirit by police regulations, improvements had
to be accomplished along pedagogical lines. In this
manner can be best explained the deep moralising tone
which henceforth runs through English intellectual
life. Collier began by writing his book upon the im-
morality of the stage. As the dramas had formerly
been coarse and vulgar, they now became moral and
didactic. For Southerne as for Rowe, the stage is only
a means of exhibiting in the clearest method possible a
general rule of morals. In like manner Richard Steele
regarded the press as a pulpit of moral improvement.
In 1709 appeared the first number of the Taller, in
which he scourged gluttony and drunkenness, gam-
bling and the abuse of married life. The Taller was
followed in 17 ii by the Speclalor, and this by the
Guardian, which declared as its programme '"to im-
plant as deeply as possible religion and morals in the
soul of man, to exhibit lofty examples of filial and
parental duty, — to make vice hated and virtue at-
tractive.” Richardson founded the moralising family
novel. Under the influence of these moralists a new
spirit entered art. Art also, it was said, must take
part in the problems of civilisation which the epoch
presents, and the painter must become a portrayer
of the morals of his day; the same programme which
in the nineteenth century Proudhon announced in his
book Du principe de V arl el de sa deslinalion sociale.
Hogarth, therefore, is like Greuze a moral preacher.
732
Uriumpb of tbe Bouraeoisie
He lingered where the crowd is thickest; in the coffee-
house where the politicians, scholars, soldiers, mer-
chants, and money-changers sit together, he was always
to be found. In the morning he went to the Exchange,
in the evening to the theatre, and he was never a silent
observer but a judge. He paints, like Greuze, pictures
to prove single paragraphs of the moral code; with this
difference, that he presents his messages to a different
public. Greuze did not attack vice, but awakened
sentimental admiration for virtue. He uses the third
estate as a mirror of virtue, whose noble qualities are
exhibited for the edification of the aristocracy. Ho-
garth, on the other hand, scourges the vices of the
third estate, in order to raise its own morality. He
denounces and hurls thunderbolts at the execrescences
of modern civilisation, and storms against drunken-
ness and libertinage. In contrast to France, where the
life of the people only served to create a melodramatic
pastoral play, in England the middle classes had already
become a factor of intellectual life.
His sermons began with the six paintings for the Harlot's Progress. Mary Hackabout comes from the country to seek a position as a servant. She soon yields to the temptation, becomes the mistress of a Jewish banker, 'then the accomplice of a pickpocket, and finally ends in. a house of prostitution. A second cycle, the Rakes Progress, treats in eight pictures the similar course of life of a young man. As a student in Oxford, he had promised marriage to a young girl,
BnalanC)
733
when the death of a rich uncle drew him into the
whirlpool of London life. As a favourite with women,
a hero in sports, he went the way to ruin, but again
recouped his finances by marriage with an elderly lady,
whose money he gambled away, and he ended a mad.
man in a debtor’s prison. Only the love of his student
days, Sarah Young, whom he had so cruelly deserted at
Oxford, thought of her betrayer and visited him in the
madhouse. The Manage d la mode of 1745 is the acme
of his moralizing activity. A lord loaded with debts
married his son to the daughter of a rich shopkeeper
of the city. After the birth of a little girl, each fol-
lowed his own inclination, until the husband surprised
the wife with a lover, by whom he was stabbed; and
the young widow returned to the dulness of her father’s
house, to end her life by poison when she heard of her
lover’s execution. In his last series he devoted himself
entirely to the cure of souls and to criminal subjects.
The cycle of Industry and Idleness of 1747 includes
twelve designs which were only published as line
engravings and distributed as a weekly sermon to
labourers. Two apprentices are at the same time in-
dentured to a clothier. The diligent one marries the
daughter of the proprietor, becomes alderman and
lord mayor of London, while the lazy one. pursuing the
opposite course, becomes a vagabond and a murderer.
The two comrades meet for the last time when the good
one pronounces the death sentence over his erring
friend.
734
XTriumpb of the Bourgeoisie
Whether art remains art when it descends to the
level of pedagogical science is in itself a question; but
the problem which Hogarth attempted he solved in
a drastic manner. Since he did not, like Greuze,
labour for fine marquises and dainty countesses, but for
Englishmen, he could only attain his end by heavily
underlining his thoughts. Indulgent consideration was
out of place, and everything is applied with a coarse
brush. While Greuze endeavoured to create a pleasant
impression, Hogarth, like a sturdy policeman and a
puritanical bourgeois, mercilessly swings the heavy
club of morals over human beasts. He leaves no door
open for sentimental repentance, but shows vice in
all its coarseness, rolls it in the mud, and drags it to
punishment. The wheel and the gallows tower in the
background of all his works; and as the new, plebeian
world required from art nothing further than weekly
sermons, he was praised not only as an educator, but
also as a great painter.
The two portrait-painters Reynolds and Gainsborough introduce us into the circles which conducted this popular education. Hogarth is the commoner, the bulldog, the incarnation of John Bull; they are the painters of distinguished gentlemen. The most cele- brated men and the most beautiful women sat to them. But with all their distinction, it is even here evident that we are confronting the people of a new era. The French portraits represent affable and refined ministers, gallant and dainty archbishops, perfumed and
jEn^lanb
735
charming marquises, who move with elegant lightness
upon the floor of the ball-room, whose wide brow is
never saddened by a serious thought. All are joyful
and fond of life and of an enervating, effeminate
elegance; they have the stereotyped smile of an edu-
cated politeness upon their lips, and the faded delicate
faces of men who live more in the salon than in the
open air: whose costly toilette is not made for the hunt
and sport, for wind and weather; who never move about
on foot but only in the carriage or sedan chair. Even
with the French bourgeoisie, clothing and bearing are
thoroughly aristocratic; they ape the distinguished,
smiling, powdered, and affected air of the marquise.
The very scholars deny their profession. They are
never represented in the professor’s chair or in their
study, lecturing or working with book or pen at hand,
but have the faces of diplomats and mouths wreathed
with an obliging smile; they wish to appear not as
specialists but as polished men of the world.
In England, during the same period, a great rise of literature and the drama commenced. Burke had written his essay On the Sublime and the Beautiful, Sterne, Tristam Shandy and the Sentimental Journey, Johnson, his Dictionary, Fielding, the History of Tom Jones, Smollett, Peregrine Pickle’, Richardson, the author of Clarissa Harlowe, had reached the acme of his popular descriptions, Oliver Goldsmith had com- pleted the Ficar of Wakefield, and Gibbon was writing his Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire; Garrick, the
73^
Xlriumpb of tbe JBouraeoisie
actor, was at the height of his fame. Pictures of
such writers and artists predominate among Reynolds’s
and Gainsborough’s portraits. They are no diplomats,
but sit at the work-table. One plunges his pen into
the ink, another, who is short-sighted, holds his book
close under his nose. His hands are uncared for, his
toilette neglected. But one sees thoughtful, expressive
heads: men whose brows show deep reflection over all
the problems which the new age had called forth.
Parliamentarians, rich merchants, weather-beaten sea-bears, clergymen, and soldiers are also represented; and they too in no wise resemble the pale aristocrats of the ancien regime, but are a race more coarsely built and with less delicate features: many of the faces are even red and puffed, with round noses and eyes of cool determination; and the sturdy attitude is full of self-conscious dignity and coarse-grained pride. Here stands a general, coarse, fleshy, and broad shouldered, with a red, butcher’s face, a brutal man of power; there a clergyman, short and sturdy, with rosy cheeks and energetic glance. In none of them does one encounter an affable smile, finely cut nostrils, white hands, and dainty elegance. If along with the middle classes rugged country squires occasionally appear, they too possess something of this coarse, full-blooded power of life. The garments of simple dark cloth which have replaced velvet and silk also announce the dawn of a new era.
The women, notwithstanding all their elegance, have
SIR JOSHUA REYNOLDS
PORTRAIT OF DR. SAMUEL JOHNSON
National Gallery, London
}£nglan5
737
nothing in common with the Frenchwomen of the
eighteenth century. The French aristocratic lady
lived in the salon, and sat for her portrait in the toilette
which she wore at the ball or in the theatre, set off by
the dazzling light of candles. In Gainsborough’s por-
trait, Mrs. Siddons is represented in street costume,
a great hat upon her head, muff in hand, and no pearls
but a simiple band of silk about her neck. Thus the
ladies who endeavoured to make an art of life are
followed by the actresses, and these actresses have
already become great ladies. Her forehead is high
and broad, and the earnest eyes, with the brows severely
drawn together, announce the progress of women
during the following century. While with the French
the predominant trait is still worldly joy and a soft
sensuality, we already find here the intelligent eman-
cipated woman, prepared to be the rival of man in all
branches of intellectual activity. Even the character
of the pose is characteristic; there the attitude of the
lady of the castle who makes no visits but only receives,
here that of the lady who has just come from the street
from a short visit with a friend.
For other portraits it is characteristic that the scene is never laid in the city, but usually in the country. Sport, reading, and country life — things which the Frenchwoman did not yet know — are the leading motives of these pictures. The lady sits in the park of her country estate under lofty trees and dreams with a novel upon her knee; not perfumed, but fresh and 48
738
Urtumpb of tbe Bouroeoisie
dainty, her hair breathing the fragrance of the woods
and her face shaded by a broad straw hat. Her hand
glides mechanically over the back of a great St. Bernard
lying at her feet. Sometimes she looks up to watch
the games of her children, for in contrast to the French-
women, she always conducts their education. Rejoic-
ing in their romps with a little dog, they dash across
the turf towards her. The mother takes the youngest
daughter, kisses her and arranges her hair, dishevelled
by the wind. In France the boys are already little
gentlemen, the girls little ladies who strut with solemn
mien at the side of their nurse. Their costly clothing,
their powdered hair, admits of no romping. Their
movements are measured and elegant, not of un-
conscious childishness, but of that studied grace which
the minuet demands.
In England there was such no “corset education.” The babies are true children of nature, who, unfettered as the wind, romp about the woods. They fetch their mother to go to the chicken-coop with them to feed the poultry; or they clap their hands and rush towards her when she returns from her ride, whip in hand, leading the horse by the bridle. If the French por- traits are suffused in the close air of the salon, these breathe the pure country air, the fragrance of the meadows and the woods. The landscape, also, in which they move, has nothing in common with the French. While the park style of Le Notre shows the sovereign will regulating and directing everything,
JEnolanb
739
the English style of gardening, corresponding to the
taste of a free people, leaves nature unrestrained,
except that it ennobles her and softness her wildness,
just as the cultured classes sought to transform the
wild, natural man into a well-bred bourgeois.
With Gainsborough this English element is even more clearly expressed than with Reynolds; for Reynolds, the thinker and the brooder, did not regard his models with a quite unprejudiced, eye, but saw them through the medium of the older masters. Like the Italians of the seventeenth century he loved to represent his sitters in mythological- or historical costume: as when he painted the actress Mrs. Siddons as St. Cecilia, and the actor Garrick between the allegorical figures of Tragedy and Comedy, in colour and pose also he sought to impart to his sitters a resemblance to the men of the Renaissance, a sort of typical, classical air. The pictures of Gainsborough are purely the expression of an Englishman. They are attuned not to the warm brown tones of the old masters, but to a light greenish, blue scale. Though not radiant with the splendour of the Renaissance, they yet possess the fine native flavour which is to-day characteristic of the English school.
The two painters also differ in this respect, that Reynolds, when he had no portrait sitters, painted historical pictures, Gainsborough landscapes. But while the historical paintings of the President of the Academy (the Death of Dido, the Continence of Scipio,
Uriumpb of tbe Bouraeoisie
740
Cupid and Venus) point back to the seventeenth century, Gainsborough is justly celebrated as the pre- decessor of the great landscape painters of the nine- teenth century.
Literature had proceeded along these paths. As early as 1727, when Le Notre still dominated taste in France, Thomson's Spring had appeared, in which the author sings of cosy and idyllic forest shades, of the brightness of the meadows, of the green exuberance of the English soil and the song of the birds. Gains- borough translated Thomson into painting. Along with Wilson, the imitator of Claude Lorrain, he ranks as the earliest English landscape painter. His native town, Sudbury, lies in the midst of the fresh, green English nature. Little brooks flow through softly rolling country; wide meadows alternate with smiling valleys and enclosed parks, where stags and does are at pasture, approaching curiously when the train rushes past. Fragrant lindens rise dreamily in the soft park- like landscape, through which like a silver ribbon the Stour winds. Here Gainsborough wandered as a lad, and what he learned to love in his youth, he painted later. His landscapes do not possess dramatic grandeur and are not stages for pastoral plays, but a romping-place for children and a place of repose for the herds. High trees stretch their branches protect- ingly over lonely cottages, before whose doors little children play, or a peasant returns from the woods with his bundle of fagots. Dark green stretches of turf
II.— The Englightement
741
and waving fields of wheat extend to view: goats, with
their young, graze upon the meadow. There is in his
works the glad feeling of the inhabitant of the city who
comes from the dirt of London into the fresh, green
country. Through pictures like these England became
the home of “intimate” landscape painting, that
delicate, refined, modest art, which only the life of a
great city could produce. Both in literature and in
art England had shown the other nations the way.
nil, Zbc BnUgbtenmcnt
Beginning with the middle of the eighteenth century, the English influence fructified the Continent. There also war was declared upon the past; in all domains of intellectual life new condi- tions were sought; and the rise of the middle classes began. Naturally this emancipation could not be accomplished in peaceful repose. All the struggles which England had experienced in the seventeenth century had to be fought out afresh upon the continent. The second half of the eighteenth century, therefore, signifies for their people the stormy time in which the old and the new were separated.
In literature Germany assumed the leadership. As formerly the German courts had taken pride in being little copies of Versailles, so now the simplicity and naturalness of English customs became the fashion. The epoch of August the Strong and Countess Konigs- marck was immediately followed by an age to which
742 XTriumpb of tbe Bouraeoisie
good, honest, moral Gellert gave the tone. Of English authors Smollett, Sterne, Richardson, and Goldsmith found a wide vogue. In contrast to the custom of allowing only princes and generals the right of tragic dignity, the drama now assumed a bourgeois character. In place of treating only kings and statesmen, the scene of tragedies began to be laid in middle-class circles; and with the predominance of the bourgeoisie sober, didactic, and easily understood presentation came also from England to Germany.
Then a further change of scene, and the age of philistine moralising was followed by one of wild geniality. After the spiritual horizon had been wid- ened, an actuality was revealed to them which had nothing in common with what they had dreamed about. They longed to escape from the pedantic, the artificial, and the social hierarchy, to the “brooks and sources of life.” They wished to begin anew, raved about prim- eval men, and sought to resemble them in power and daring boldness. They took delight in mad stories and wild rides, in skating parties and wild hunts by night. Instead of silken shoes, they wore topboots; they peopled the German woods with bards and Druids, and dreamed of Gothic cathedrals and knights with mailed fists. The gentle race of writers was followed by a warlike one, which wished with blood and iron to form a new world. In 1774 appeared Goethe’s Werther, a love story, but at the same time a manifestation of a young Titan whose cry for freedom burst all social
GAINSBOROUGH
PORTRAIT OF MRS. SIDDONS
National Gallery, London
XTbe BnUgbtenment
743
barriers. Soon afterwards came Schiller, with those
youthful works which seem a declaration of war against
the existing order. The angrily rising lion with the
inscription In tyrannos which serves as a title-page
to the second edition of Die Rauher is the innermost
expression of the sentiment which inflamed the age.
With sharp emphasis Fiesco is entitled a '‘republican
tragedy”; and K abate und Liebe attacks at the very
core the rottenness of its day.
The feeling for landscape also experiences a change. The same love of nature which in England prompted Thomson’s Seasons also found expression in Germany. In 1749 Kleist wrote his Fruhling; and Haller extolled the natural grandeur of the Alps, and conducted the reader into the caverns of the cliffs and lonely forests where no ray of light gleams through the dark pines. Even richer in consequence was the influence of Rous- seau, with whom a new epoch of the love of nature begins for the Continent. He does not grow enthusi- astic over artificial country scenes such as Boucher and Fragonard painted; those landscapes with dovecotes and windmills, with cascades, dairies, thatched cottages in which the aristocratic ladies, weary of Le Notre’s park, milked cows in silken shepherd’s garb. He praised the majesty of lonely nature untouched by the hand of man; the grandeur of towering cliffs and raging waterfalls; he spoke of gloomy cloud-wrapped mountains covered with firs, of the glitter of sunbeams upon icy mountain-tops, and of dewy, fresh woods in
744
TTriumpb of tbe Bourgeoisie
which the birds twitter. If for the old aristocratic
generations the landscape was only a background for
the social pleasures of life, it is now treasured for its
sublime solitude. Instead of the soft zephyr men
loved rushing wind, instead of bucolic repose the wild
raging of the elements. Many of the landscape de-
scriptions in Goethe’s Werther are of a modern delicacy,
as if he were describing pictures of Dupre, Corot, or
Daubigny.
But if one seeks the works of art which the period of geniuses in German literature produces, the result is an extremely meagre one. This heroic age for the his- torian of literature is a desert for the histoiian of art. Nor is this an accident. For while literature prepares new ages, art can only rise upon the basis of a quiet, well-rounded culture. In bourgeois Holland and Eng- land it attained development not during the struggles, but only after culture had attained a fixed character. In Germany the age without art lasted longer, be- cause here, even more than in England, the new cul- ture assumed a specifically literary character. It was Schiller’s “ink-splashing” century, in which litera- ture attracted all powers into its service. The whole world hearkened to the words of the author: the book became the companion of man, and art found justifi- cation in a new world only as far as it served litera- ture. As in England Hogarth is a part of the great literary movement, so in Germany Daniel Chodowiecke owes his fate solely to the circumstance that he dedicated his clever burin to the service of authors.
After Lessing created in Minna von Barnhelm the first middle-class drama, Chodowiecke attempted to become the illustrator of the German bourgeoisie. At a time when no one took a walk without a book in his pocket, he found his mission in the illustration of the great German authors. It is true that he has nothing of the spirit of the great writers. "Honest Chodowiecke" Goethe usually calls him, and this is the only possible characterisation. At bottom he is a thorough philistine, as honest and talkative as he is commonplace and sober — a genuine type of that Berlinism which was represented in contemporary literature by Nicolai, lived once more at a later period with Kruger, and in the works of Menzel came very near to genius. He treats his themes in a broad and generally com- prehensible way. The more an author is genial, honest, and clear, the more congenially Chodowiecke illustrates him. He loves good and gentle Gellert better, than clever Lessing; Gleim, Campe, and Kotzebue are more congenial to him than Burger, Mathison, and Wieland. In this honest common-sense his works reflect only the age of enlightenment, not the higher inspiration of the "storm and stress” period. One of his finest prints shows him sitting at the window, in the cosy circle of his family, engaged in drawing. The centre of the living-room is the sofa, and around the table before it the family is united. This appreciation of the cosiness of German family life is the characteristic feature of his friendly, good-humoured, and harmless art.
Beside the illustrations for classical writers the por- trait alone plays a role, and in this also one can see the gradual surrender of the patronage of art by the aris- tocracy to the bourgeoisie. Antoine Pesne, a Parisian, who was director of the Academy at Berlin, is still a type of the court painter. But although he is oc- cupied almost exclusively with the aristocracy, even these portraits surprise the beholder by a certain massive and coarse element, forming a striking contrast to the light coquetry and rosy softness of the Rococo. Both the countenance and the costumes are serious: for Pesne is the painter of a court which does homage to the view that the king is only the first servant of the state.
Balthasar Denner of Hamburg was the first portrait- painter of the rising common people; of those circles which as yet had no relation to art, but demanded of a picture the most common-place, exact reproduction of reality. In accordance with these wishes he adopted a manner like that of Gerard Dou. Every wrinkle, every fold of the skin is carefully drawn, every hair of the head, every gleam of the plush cap is conscien- tiously noted and the whole is so smooth that nothing can be seen of the brush-work, and the picture has the appearance of a porcelain panel.
A series of other portraits reflects the spiritual rise of Germany; for the so-called “temples of friendship" are characteristic of this age of enlightenment. As early as 1745 Gleim had begun at Halberstadt to collect the portraits of celebrated Germans. Somewhat later Philipp Erasmus Reich, the owner of Weidmann’s bookstore in Leipzig, who had, as a publisher, come into contact with the celebrated men of his day, began that collection of portraits which is at the present time in possession of the university library of Leipzig. Anton Graff was destined to become the historian of this epoch. As Chodowiecke illustrated the classic writers, Graff portrayed them: and his portraits were spread among the people by means of Bause's line engravings. His subjects included Gellert and Bodmer, Gessner and Herder, Wieland and Lessing, Schiller and Burger, Weisse and Rabenar among writers and poets; Sulzer and Mendelssohn among the philosophers; Ifffand and Corona Schroter among the actors; Ramler, Lippert, and Hagedorn among scholars; and he thus gave to the literary lights of the eighteenth century the features by which they are now known. Even more than in the authors’ portraits by Reynolds the purely spiritual element of the new age is reflected in those of Graff. There are no accessories, and he rarely paints his subjects in full figure, concentrating his efforts upon the heads with their mighty thoughtful brows. The eyes which gaze upon us have no longer time for the minuet or dances on the green, but they have read Kant’s Kritik der reinen Vernunft.
Outside of the illustrations of clever artists and their
748 Xlriumpb of tbe Bourgeotste
portraits, the new world had for the present no need of art. A meagre result was achieved by Wilhelm Tischbein's picture of Conradin in the spirit of Bodmer’s ballad. It is more pleasant to read Gpethe’s wonderful landscape descriptions in Werther than to see the pictures of contemporary landscape-painters. It is indeed a very characteristic trait that this was the time of that literary landscape painting which Lessing at a later period combated in his Laocoon. Written landscapes were preferred to the painted, and the literary were only valued from the literary stand- point or on account of an interesting subject. Salomon Gessner amused himself by representing in etchings the idyllic places which he praised in his poems. Philipp Hackert became the Chodowiecke of landscape painting, and with solemn and honest ob- jectivity related to German burghers how beautiful Italy looked. The animal-painter Elias Riedinger gained applause by the zoological exactitude with which in his engravings he perpetuated dogs and horses, stags and does, elephants and hippopotami. Not yet capable of enjoying with the eye, men valued painting only in so far as it furnished food for the mind. In this icy world of thought beauty was compelled to perish. After man had eaten the fruit of the tree of knowledge, he was driven from the paradise of art.
HHH. ^Tbc ipaesing of ^Seautg There was a single city in Europe into which as
III.— The Passing of Beauty
749
yet nothing of all these struggles had penetrated,
and where at a time when artistic culture had
been elsewhere destroyed the ancient aristocratic art
experienced a delicate aftergrowth. At all times
decades behind the general artistic development,
Venice in the eighteenth century remained true to the
habit. Having for so long been the bulwark of the
church, she now became worldly and frivolous, grace-
ful and mirthful, peopled no longer by black-robed
ecclesiastics, but by shepherds clad in rose and pale
blue. In Favretto’s picture Upon the Pia^ietta a gaily-
coloured, elegant crowd promenades upon the smooth
marble pavement, before the Loggietta with its light-
coloured marble columns and gleaming metal-work.
They chat, look through their lorgnettes, and chival-
rously salute the goddess of beauty. Such was the
Venice of the Goldoni, Gozzi, and Casanova; the magic
city radiant with ancient splendour, which, at a time
when people elsewhere already wore horn spectacles
and coats of black cloth, still celebrated its Rococo
in feverish, festal joy, with song and coquetry.
Giambattista Piazzetta was the first to leave the paths of the old religious art. His Madonnas are only characterised as such by their names, and are in truth young mothers dallying with a child. Most of his works are pictures of young girls of that seductive age when the dainty little feet are covered with the first long dress; who dream, pout, laugh, and glance in- nocently yet fearfully into the world. He never knew
75°
Uriumpb of tbe Bourgeoisie
variations. This type of the young girl recurs with
the artists who followed. Peasants, youthful dealers
in game, and flower-girls are represented in the paint-
ings of Domenico Maiotto, Francesco Guaranna, and
Antonio Chiozzotto. In no wise resembling the fat
women in the market-place, Piazzetta’s maidens, with
their rosy lips and slender movements, are young ladies
who have for a change disguised themselves as country
or flower girls. Rotari is the finest interpreter of this
budding maidenhood. He has portrayed these pretty
children in all situations; asleep over a book and teased
by a youthful swain; dreaming over their sewing of
kings’ sons in the fairy tales, or as gypsies turning the
heads of old men. Pietro Longhi thereupon wrote
the entire chronicle of Venice. For centuries the
Venetian gentlewomen had been condemned to a life
as secluded as that of an oriental harem, the secrets of
which no painter’s eye had seen. Now the portals
were thrown open and the gentildonna had become a
lady of the world, the attraction of an aesthetic salon.
Longhi mastered the figure of the Venetian patrician
woman, and did not leave it until he had told every-
thing about her, from the levee until the return from
the ball. He followed her everywhere — into the bed-
chamber, the boudoir, upon the promenade, in the
gambling-halls, to the fortune-tellers, to the Ridotto —
and narrated his observations with more objectivity
than esprit.
The spirit of the age took the most characteristic
TLbc passing ot Beauty
751
form in the works of Tiepolo. He is the prince, the
radiant god of light of the Venice which arose like an
enchanted island in an artistic world.
Tiepolo painted everything and is a stranger to no subject, to no technique. Just at that time a great building activity developed in Venice. Baldassare Longhena, Cominelli, and their pupils created those Baroque buildings which at the present day give the city of the lagoons its fantastic, glittering character: the facade a wild conglomeration of hermae and atlantes, of columns and cartouches, the interiors bare and empty. Tiepolo’s activity consisted in filling this interior space with the sunshine of his bright radiant art. In the church of the Jesuits in Venice he painted the Distribution of the Rosary by St Dominic; in the church of Santa Maria della Pieta, the Triumph of Faith; in the church of the Scalzi, the legend of the Angels Bearing the House of Mary to Loreto. In Palazzo Rezzonico the Triumph of the Sun God is treated, and in Palazzo Labia* a theme of the decline of the Roman republic: the Banquet and the Departure of Cleopatra. He laboured not only for Venice but also for the neighbouring cities. The Villa Valmarana near Vicenza he decorated with scenes from Homer, Virgil, Ariosto, and Tasso; the Palazzo Clerici in Milan with the Apotheosis of Apollo; the Palazzo Canossa in Verona with the Triumph of Hercules; the archiepiscopal palace in Udine with the Fall of Lucifer. Nor was his activity confined to Italy, but extended to Catholic Southern
752
ITriumpb of tbe ^Souroeoisie
Germany and to Spain. Beginning in 1750, he painted
the decorations of the palace at Wurzburg: in the hall
of the stairway the representation of the four quarters
of the earth doing homage to the duchy of Franconia;
in the imperial hall a scene from the glorious past of
the city: the marriage of Frederick Barbarossa in 1156
with the beautiful Beatrice of Burgundy, and the
emperor creating the bishop of Wurzburg tem-
poral lord of the duchy of Franconia. In the royal
palace at Madrid he painted for the hall of the body
guard the Smithy of Vulcan, for the entrance hall an
Apotheosis of Spain, and for the throne-room the
Spanish Provinces.
But little is accomplished by enumerating the subjects of his works. Tiepolo’s art is* no wall-didac- ticism but decorative music reverberating in jubilant accords through the halls. One gazes upon distant palaces and sun-bathed landscapes, and ‘into the heavens’ wide aether. In wild, maenadic ecstacy angels and geniuses soar through space, singing, laughing, and tumbling over each other. Young knights upon white steeds gallop past with waving banners in their hands, loggie supported by columns and adorned with bal- dachins, stairways, and terraces arise; festally clothed men look down from balustrades, at the musicians playing below. Servants, among whom are Nubians in gay oriental costume, come and go. Yellow Egyptian women seated upon elephants with gold-studded trappings, pilgrims to Mecca, Moors riding upon
GIVOANNI BATTISTA TIEPOLO
MARTYRDOM OF ST. AGATHA
Berlin Gallery
Ube passing of JBeaut^
753
camels, Arabs, Persians, Turks, Indians, and American
gold-seekers march past. Chinese episodes also occur;
Chinese tea-parties and Japanese temples, Chinese men
and women walking in solemn dignity under red
parasols. Pegasus storms through the aether, and a
pyramid is erected in the midst of the clouds. All
ages and zones come to the meeting-place; gods, mor-
tals, and cupids, tropical plants, birds, and gay banners
are arranged in fairy pictures of a fabulous and exotic
splendour.
He ranks with Veronese as the greatest Venetian decorator, as the heir, user, and squanderer of an ancient culture. The tremendous ability of a mighty artistic ancestry is revived in this frivolous child of the eighteenth century; but he uses it for the expression of quite new ideas. Veronese’s art was a daughter of the sixteenth century, clear, serene, and classic; of rigid composition and carefully considered geometrical lines. Tiepolo sings in no majestic stanzas, but bold, spark- ling songs. The rhythm and repose of Veronese is replaced in his work by freedom, nonchalance, and nervous moods. The Venetian spirit, then so solemn, has become a subtle juggler, lies, leaps, and dances caprioles. All heaviness has disappeared: deprived of all corporality, the figures soar through the clear silvery aether. All the past masters of perspective, Mantegna, Melozzo, Correggio, and Pater Pozzo, appear, clumsy and struggling compared with Tiepolo. He is the aptest of the apt, a man who again and again pre-
48
754
XTriumpb of tbe Bourgeoisie
pares new fetes upon this earth; a prestidigitator whose
hand, as if in a logical reflex, follows every flash of his
eye.
But he is even more than this. These frescoes form only a part of his enormous life-work. In addition to his decorations, his etchings and oil paintings must also be considered. His etchings, the Capriccios and the Scherii di fantasia, cannot be described in words. They are a witches’ sabbath of magic fantasy and oriental enchantment. Here beside an antique sar- cophagus an old magician conjures a snake; there one sits upon a pagan gravestone, burning a skull; an- other leaning against an altar of Dionysus thoughtfully examines a skeleton, while a maiden is caressing a satyr. Even in these works the black and white figures seem radiant with glowing sunlight. His oil paintings reveal him from another side. The novelty does not consist in the subject; for Tiepolo, unlike Piazzetta and Longhi, seldom painted scenes from modern life. Most of his easel-pictures are altar-pieces; visions, martyrdoms, and conceptions, in which cruelty is mingled with hysterical sensuality and Catholic mysticism. Dead eyes stare hopelessly at us, pale lips murmur prayers, and wan hands are raised aloft to the Cross. It is no accident that in Venice alone, even at the close of the eighteenth century, these ancient sub- jects of the Counter-reformation recur. But what an indescribable pathological refinement Tiepolo has given them! How in the Berlin picture he has transformed
TLbc passing of Beauti^
755
the ancient theme of the Martyrdom of Agatha to suit
the nerves of the Rococo ! As a colourist he loves only
light, dainty, pale harmonies, such as one would expect
from the son of the eighteenth century. He softens and
subdues the colour, and delights in soft, fading com-
binations, in the gloomy black, delicate white, and
pale, refined rose and lilac nuances. To him alone
belongs this female type of exquisite sensuality and
oriental dreaminess, of pale, dark-eyed weariness and
trembling joy in life.
It is not certain whether Tiepolo was descended from the ancient, noble house of that name, which for several centuries bestowed upon the republic of St. Mark doges, procurators, and military heroes. But so great is his horror of everything common-place and plebeian that one loves to think of him as a descendant of an ancient and noble house. As the last child but one of an aged father, he passed his youth under the guardianship of his mother, and the aristocratic dandy soon became the favourite of women. This explains the feminine trend in his character, the morbid deli- cacy of feeling with which he expresses feminine charms. In contrast to the earlier Venetians who loved a royal, powerful, and animal beauty, Tiepolo, the abstracter of the quintessences, plucked pale tea- roses of enchanting fragrance. As Beaudelaire relates: “Two women were introduced to me, one obnoxious in her healthfulness, without carriage or expression, in short, simple nature; the other one of those beauties
756
XTrtumpb of tbe Bouroeoisie
who dominate and oppress the memory; who make
their toilette contribute to their deep individual charm;
mistresses of their bearing, conscious rulers of them-
selves; with a voice like a well-tuned instrument and
glances which only express what they wish.” Thus
Tiepolo also loved, not the healthy, but a morbid
autumnal, fading beauty; a volcano in whose interior
glowing lava seethes; the charm of La dame aux
camelias.
He seldom assigns to the charming brown maiden of the people the role of the Madonna, but usually depicts as his saints ladies of the highest circles; pale countesses with tired laughter and with wonderful white hands, who know the excitement of gambling and all the sensations of an over-refined love. His perception of movement and gesture is as sharp as his rendition of the play of countenance. In the sixteenth century movements were round and majestic, in the seventeenth exaggerated and pathetic; but an almost imperceptible crook of the finger, a shrug of the shoulders, a quick turn of the head is sufficient for Tiepolo. Quite in- describable is the charming grace with which his ladies raise the train of their stiff, brocaded dresses. Only the descendant of ancient, over-refined culture which required many centuries to prepare could have such a refined sense for delicate shadings.
But even for this ancient culture the grave had been prepared. Tiepolo’s activity signifies only the “ passing of beauty.” It is no accident that his finest works
Ube passtna of Beauty
757
treat themes of the Roman decline; for the same time
had come for Venice. The odour of decay, the livid
atmosphere of a sultry but pale autumn day pervades
his works. They are the products not only of an
ancient but of an over-ripe and decayed culture, and
as in the days of the Germanic invasion, the world
once more needed barbarians.
For two decades after Tiepolo’s eyes closed in Madrid, the death-struggle of ancient Venetian art continued with unflagging joyfulness to the last. The two Canaletti, Antonio and Bernardo, came to complete the death-mask of the queen of the Adriatic; they painted the noble beauty of Venetian architecture, the fantastic splendour of the churches, and the weather- beaten grandeur of the palaces. Francesco Guardi arose to depict the glowing light that spreads over the lagoons. Gondolas, adorned with wreaths, glide fairylike, as in the days of Carpaccio, over the green canals, and the columns and balconies, the arches and loggias of marble palaces are reflected in the waves. Strange embassies move in gala splendour over St. Mark’s Square, saluted by the proud Venetian nobility. Everything is as of old, except that it is seen no longer with the eye of a realist but with that of a romanticist. For when Guardi’s last works were created, the empire of the Doges had already fallen.
Even the pillars of the royal palace in Madrid, where Tiepolo, the aristocrat, created his latest works, were shaken by the democratic spirit of the age.
75^
ITriumpb of the Bourgeoisie
Strange figures, mocking and threatening, appeared
under the windows of the Alcazar. Spain, the land of
blind piety, had ceased to believe, laughed over the
Inquisition, and no longer trembled at threats of the
punishment of hell. Indeed, it is one of the ironies of
the world’s history that precisely here, in the most
mediaeval land of Europe, the storm-bird of the revolu-
tion appeared. An art which was aristocratic and
knightly and more Catholic than Catholicism was
followed by the greatest possible reaction in the works
of Goya. A wild plebeian, in whose mind gloomy
thoughts of freedom revolved, crept into the walls of
the Alcazar, where a little before the refined Tiepolo had
dwelt. A skeptic who believed in nothing painted
the walls of churches which had once been decorated by
Zurbaran; a stiff-necked peasant lad became the por-
traitist of a royal house whose court painter had been
Don Diego Velasquez. ^
Goya painted the most varied subjects. His re- ligious frescoes are parodies of Tiepolo. Beautiful women look down coquettishly from the ceiling and angels, with challenging laughter, display their legs. His portraits of maidens, especially the celebrated double picture of the clothed and nude Maja, belong to the finest studies of the century. In other pictures he has depicted with powerful brush-work scenes from popular life: processions, bull-fights, beggars, and brigands. But however seductive he may be when charmed by his model, he is no painter. His pictures
GOYA Y LUCIENTES
Academy of San Fernando, Madrid
XTbe passing of Beauty
759
are rapidly observed and rapidly executed, without
artistic love or refined feeling. He is a revolutionist,
an agitator, a nihilist.
Even in his portraits of the royal family these opinions are betrayed. He seems to laugh over the pompous nothingness that stood before him, and to be chagrined at having to paint the noble ladies and gentlemen in such solemn poses, instead of letting them disport themselves and jump over balustrades as did his angels. All of his pictures have a hopelessly plebeian quality. This son of a revolutionary age deprived the poor princes who were his sitters of the talisman of majesty and displayed them stripped before the eye of the world.
His etchings reveal the true Goya. Only in such prints, not in oil paintings, could his wild fire, his harsh, stormy spirit find expression. A mad, uncanny fantasy is everywhere revealed. Witches ride upon broomsticks and white cats; woman tear out the teeth of executed criminals; robbers scuffle with demons and dwarfs. A dead man arises from the grave and writes with his finger the word Nada. But the prevailing note is his hatred of tyrants. Nothing which had formerly been considered authority escapes his scorn. In the Capriccios he attacks with raving fury the kings and magnates, and scoffs at the priest’s robe concealing human passions. In Los desastres de la guerra he contrasts the military glory which his predecessors had celebrated with the bloody ruin which is the price of glory. Everywhere he struggles with cutting irony against despotism and hypocrisy, against the vanity of the great and the servility of the small; heaping all vices of the time into a horrible hecatomb. In his works there sounds the suppressed rumbling of the revolution whose crater had in the meanwhile opened.
IV.— Revolution and Empire
In glancing at the French etchings of the decades following 1770 and 1780 or wandering through the gardens laid out about this time, one perceptibly feels how the coming events cast their shadows before them. The feeling of the end of the world is there. Men embrace and weep tears of friendship; they feel that they have little time left to see the light of the sun. Therefore nature seems to them so touching, so holy and beautiful; but they do not see life in her — only a mighty grave. Their enthusiasm for nature is accompanied by thoughts of death and floods of tears. At the beginning of the century, in the time of festive joy, men fancied Chinese summer-houses; then, when they believed that by a return to virtue and idyllic simplicity, the ruin might be averted, cottages, dairies, and temples of virtue were erected. Now that the dark care had come, they named their country places Sanssouci; laid out island cemeteries with mausoleums, and placed urns with tear-cloths in them. Mournful is the rustle of the poplars whose foliage shades the grave; weeping willows bend down their branches,
and inscriptions point to the changefulness of the earthly. In etchings as well as in gardens the ruins play the most important part. Men were attracted by the crumbling, the old, and the fallen, as if they were conscious that an old civilisation would soon fall. In an impressive illustrated work, Moreau’s Monument de costume, the old aristocratic society relinquishes its heritage, desiring before the parting to leave to the world a reflection of its beauty. Even the conception of colour experiences a change. The favourite colour of the epoch is the hleu mourant which is generally used for clothes, as well the walls and the floors of the dwellings. Or else black, the colour of mourning, is preferred; and not only is the furniture, formerly so light, black as ebony, but black silhouettes replace the coloured miniature portraits of the Rococo. So much like ghosts, so doomed to the realm of shades people see themselves, that they have themselves portrayed in shadowy outlines. They had too long closed their eyes against what was happening. Blind- man’s buff has now become a play of ghosts, and the gloomy feeling of the approaching end is reflected in everything. The toilettes are changed after the pat- tern of democratic English and American costumes and every one has the best intention to become dem- ocratic. But it is too late.
In 1789 the die was cast. Après nous le déluge, so lightly spoken by the Marquise de Pompadour, had become a solemn truth. The perpetual motion which
had begun its course one hundred and fifty years
earlier in England rolled like a great avalanche over
the soil of France. Gloomy and confused as the
raging of the storm roar the peals of (^a ira and the
Marseillaise — sounds which tore all Europe out of its
grooves. The troubled and the heavy-laden, the
beggars and cripples, once painted by the Master of
the Triumph of Death in the Pisan Camposanto as
begging in vain for the advent of Death, have
themselves seized his sickle. From their caves and
huts, from cellars and attic windows they rush forth
like raging wolves; hollow-eyed, ragged, dirty, with
empty stomachs and thirsty throats, the disinherited,
the people, la canaille. Like a band of witches and
demons, like spirits spying out the earth, they storm
forward waving red flags, torches, and pikes; red caps
upon their heads, armed with knives and clubs, with
flails and hoes. They tear up stones and clods of earth,
they press into park, palace, and salon. The Megaeras
of the Revolution, fishwives and market-women,
transformed into raving Bacchantes, force open doors
with crowbars and ignite the silken decorations. The
walls re-echo with rude language, with curses and
shrieks. They drink from bottles, and make costly
glasses of Murano clink so that the pieces fly. Pleb-
eian orators prate like ancient Roman tribunes of
freedom and brotherhood. Then comes a procession
of masks. Hideous fellows with shaggy hair, dressed
as Roman lictors, drag in triumph a blood-stained machine with gleaming blade, and test upon rabbits
the sharpness of its steel. For their philanthropy, ex-
tolled by Greuze, the aristocratic ladies and gentlemen
are rewarded with the guillotine. The last tableau
of their pastoral play is the elegant bow with which
they offer their neck to the knife. The device of the
Regent, yive la joie, is followed by another, Vive la
mort. Marie Antoinette, her hair cut short, clad in a
rough linen garb, rides amidst the jeers of the people
upon the hangman’s cart to the place of execution.
The execution of aristocrats has become for the people
what the gladiatorial games were for the Roman
emperors. Among those who witness the drama is a
young captain, who, armed with letters of recommenda-
tion to Robespierre and Danton, has come from a small
southern garrison to Paris, and who, gazing upon the
guillotine, has already wonderful thoughts in his pale
head, thoughts to be realised later at Austerlitz and
Jena, in the imperial coronation and the burning of
Moscow.
Men lived in the atmosphere of antiquity; for after the destruction of royalty the Roman republic had become their ideal. The mighty senatus populusque Romanus again lived in the inscription R. F., which now adorned the public buildings. Upon the walls stood the busts of the great citizens of Rome, the elder and younger Brutus, Scipio, Seneca, Cato, and Cincinnatus. The Brutus who killed Caesar was especially the hero of the hour, and the tyrannicides Harmodius and Aristogiton were immortalised — as were the ancient heroes who had died for their country and served their people by heroic deeds: Curtius, Leonidas, Mucius Scaevola, and Timoleon. No longer the psalms and gospels, but Livy and Tacitus were cited by preachers in the pulpit. The Roman heroes of Corneille seemed to have left the stage and now stood in new forms upon the stage of life. Men addressed each other as Romans and gave Roman names to their children. The Jacobins went about sans culottes, in Phrygian caps, and later the “head of Titus” came into fashion. Women and girls bound sandals about their feet and dressed their hair in Grecian knots. ,Clad in white clothes, with no ornament but the virtue of simplicity, they appeared in the President’s office to sacrifice their treasures, as had the Roman women at the time of Camillus, upon the altar of the fatherland.
Art also had to submit to this framing; indeed, it did not even wait for the events. Even before the catas- trophe had occurred, at a time when the Revolution knocked almost imperceptibly at the gate of the king’s palace, art had accepted it. Writers had drawn parallels between the institutions of ancient and mod- ern states, and had endeavoured to prove that the ancient republics were models of absolute perfection, which should be imitated as closely as possible; they had contrasted the moral conditions of Sparta and Rome with those of monarchic France. The painters followed. The Roman art of the Revolution has nothing in common with the Hellenic art of Madame Vigee- Lebrun. It is now all over with golden dreams and Theocritean idylls, with charms, courtly delicacy, and clever play. The demand is for rude Spartan virtue, and heroism is identified with beauty. As in dem- ocratic England, art was robbed of her diadem and converted into the handmaiden of patriotism. ’"‘Not by pleasing the eye,” so it was said in the session of the jury of the Salon of 1781, "do works of art accomplish their purpose. The demand now is for examples of heroism and civic virtues which will electrify the soul of the people and arouse in them devotion to the fatherland."
He who uttered these words was Jacques Louis David. He was the first to animate the antique lines of his teacher Vien with republican pathos and to adapt painting to the heroism of the day; by which he became the great herald of the age that read Plutarch and transformed an aristocratic Capua into a democratic Sparta. His very first pictures, the Oath of the Horatii and Brutus, painted at Rome in 1784, were the heralds of the Revolution. To a new puritanic race, to whom the soft aristocratic art of the Rococo seemed a slander upon all rights of men, he showed the heroes who died for an idea or for the fatherland, giving them a mighty muscular development like that of a gladiator rushing into the arena. Art received through him the martial pose of patriotism. The whole domain of the antique became a salle d’ armes, where nude praetorians exer-
766
Urtumpb of tbe Bouroeoistc
cised in the poses of fencing-masters. And the more
pathetically his heroes showed their heroism the more
men saw in them a picture of the French people; for
this exaggerated declamation was also in the spirit
of the time. Talma excited the admiration of the
people by playing in a classic style Les Horaces of
Corneille. Robespierre is said to have spoken upon
the tribune in a slow, scanning, and artistic manner,
and to have moved over the volcano smouldering at his
feet as if he had been a Bossuet m the pulpit or a
Boileau in the professor’s chair. Corresponding to this
are the severe composition and the stiff rhetoric of
David’s pictures. If the overthrown society of the
ancien regime had done away with all form, young
France now required even of painted objects the
severest discipline. If in the time of Sybaritism
rhythmic lines and gentle movement had prevailed, now
the puritans will only tolerate the stiff rigidity and
movements like those of soldiers on parade.
David’s ability as an artist and his close connection with the era of the Revolution is revealed even more in his works in which, disregarding a translation into the antique, he depicted what he had himself exper- ienced or directly observed. Two pictures in especial, Lepelletier upon his Deathbed and the Murdered Marat, are works of mighty naturalism, cruel documents of that troubled age. Himself a radical revolutionist, he was also destined to become the portrait painter of the mighty race which had the courage to begin
Jacques louis david
LEONIDAS AT THERMOPYL^
Louvre
TRevolution ant) Bmplre
767
civilisation and found religion anew; these men of
Cato-like severity and these women with the proud,
free glance. A characteristic example is the portrait
of Barrere, standing upon the tribune and delivering
the oration which cost Louis XVI. his life; his glance
cold and hard and his mouth twitching with bitter hate;
furthermore the portrait of Madame Recamier in its
puritanic simplicity, in the severe rooms with the bare
walls — a genuine product of that epoch which would tol-
erate only hard, merciless lines, and which introduced
even into the ladies’ boudoir its ideas of Spartan
asceticism; and finally the portrait of Bonaparte, the
execution of which is the turning-point in David’s
career.
In a sitting of a few moments he outlined the cadav- erous bronze head of the Corsican; and afterwards he, the first painter of the republic, was named imperial court painter. As under Robespierre, so under Na- poleon he was a dictator, and his artistic power, his style remained the same. As the men of the Revolution considered themselves Roman republicans, so Napoleon felt himself a Roman Caesar. David could therefore feel the events without changing as an artist. His Coronation of the Empress Josephine of 1804 is a typical picture of rigid, solemn severity. His portraits of the Emperor, the Pope, Murat, and Cardinal Caprara symbolise the brutal greatness of an epoch which worshipped power. He occasionally approaches the themes of Rococo painters in such subjects as the
768
ITriumpb ot tf3e BourQeoisie
celebrated lovers of antiquity; but even in such works
he remained a son of the Empire, and his cooing lovers
are not doves but eagles.
Not until a later period, after France had relinquished its antique Roman predilections and the connection of classicism with life became looser, there entered into David’s works a certain dry, archaeological, cold, and calculating element. French art thus returned to its starting-point; for since the beginning it had been dominated by a mathematical spirit. Poussin com- posed pictures as if he wished to prove geometric theorems, and even the Rococo, by way of change, only turned its mathematics upside down. For all its apparent freedom, its asymmetry is only a reversed rule which by means of grotesque flourishes assumes the appearance of freedom. Every line is as coolly calculated as is every motion of the body in the minuet. After artists had exhausted the possibilities of deviating from rules, they returned to the old paths, from flourishes to the mathematically regular, from the unsymmetrical to the straight-lined, from the capricious to the statuesque. David was the first to unite antique statues into pictures, and painting became for him a geometrical problem regulated by fixed rules. These principles he impressed upon his pupils. Belisarius and Telemachus, Achilles and Priam, Socrates and Hercules, Phaedra and Electra, Diana and Endymion — such are almost the only subjects treated with stiff classical exactitude by such pupils as Girodet, Guerin,
IRevolutton an^ lEmptre
769
Jean Baptiste Regnault, and Francois Andre Vincent.
But one artist held aloof. Prudhon is distinguished from the mass of learned artists by his delicate and refined poetic qualities. While the others with sober intellectuality constructed pictures of antique frag- ments of form, Prudhon really bore the gods of Greece in his heart, and without troubling himself about academic formulas felt as a Grecian. Under his hand the antique arose anew in dreamy beauty, in the spirit of his own modern sentiment and of the great masters of the Renaissance, who had awakened it to life three centuries earlier. Even as a colourist Prudhon held an exceptional position among masters of his time. While with the others colour had to yield to rigid line, Prudhon possessed the soft light and shade, the tender morhideiia of the Lombards.
Even the hasty sketches with which he supported himself during his youth, vignettes for letter paper, visiting-cards, invitations to balls, and pictures for bonbonnieres, are richer in poetry than the pretentious compositions of David’s pupils. They unite French grace with the beauty of line of antique gems. His celebrated picture of 1808, Justice and Vengeance Pursuing Crime, is from the standpoint of colour the most clever achievement of French classicism. In his endeavour to render the tone and the softness of flesh in the most dainty manner possible, Prudhon sought for an illumination which would increase the clearness of the nude body, and found it in the hour when moon-
770
XTrtumpb of tbe Bourgeoisie
light spreads its silver rays over the earth. While
nature lies in colourless twilight, the wan j3aleness of
the human body seems to have absorbed all light and
to radiate it. In a lonely and deserted place the
murderer leaves his victim, the nude body of a youth
over which the moon pours its ghostlike rays; but
over him, like cloud pictures, hover the avenging di-
vinities. In his other works Prudhon was more inter-
ested in the joyful, veiled myths of antiquity. He to
whom love had given little happiness, rose upon the
wings of art into the domain of fabulous love. In the
evening twilight Psyche is borne by Zephyrus to Eros’s
nuptial couch; or she descends to the bath in a still
mountain lake and gazes astonished at her own picture
in the gleaming mirror; or she is visited by dreamy
geniuses in the cool shade of the wood in the shimmering
moonlight.
These pictures of Prudhon have even been compared with Correggio’s, but the difference is greater than the resemblance. Not only in the rigid draughtsmanship of the Empire does Prudhon differ from the elder painter, but in his sad and dreamy melancholy. Cor- reggio knew nothing of the pale moonlight gliding over snowy bodies, or of the soft longing which pul- sates through all the works of Prudhon. The laughter of his goddesses, so sweet and seductive, is changed with Prudhon into smiles amid tears. He and David are sons of the same epoch, and have both seen the guillotine. David painted the Plutonic spirit of ter-
IRevolutlon anb Bmpire
771
rorism and felt like Hercules cleaning the Augean
stables. When he made his appearance, the Mar-
seillaise sounded majestically through the land,
proclaiming the fall of all Bastilles and of all thrones,
the deliverance of mankind from the bonds of serv-
itude. Men hoped for a time when freedom and
virtue should reign, when all men should be Gracchi,
all women Cornelias. But Prudhon lived to see that
all these dreams only awakened the beast in man.
Freedom was followed by a reign of terror and this
by universal despotism. He had seen men whom
he loved die under the axe of the executioner, and
had heard the wings of the death-angel rustle over
the earth. Through all his works runs the elegiac
question *‘Why?’' — something like the sound of a
death-knell or of subdued tears. His brow is fur-
rowed, his cheek is pale, and his eye dimmed by a
veil of tears. An unspeakable pain is mingled with
the^sweetness of his smile.
And yet another thing he bewails: the world of beauty which democracy had destroyed. David was a man of the new epoch, and placed his art at the service of a young, democratic race. Prudhon, al- though younger than he, still belongs in character to the old order of things. He is not crude and demo- cratic like David, but appears in his portrait aristo- cratic and refined, pale and pampered. In his youth he revered Fragonard and Greuze, and dreams of beauty filled his mind. Now all that was passed:
772 iTriumpb of tbe 3BourQeot9ie
the smoke of powder had gathered between past and present. In the white salons which had formerly been flooded by the light of Venetian chandeliers, the pale moonlight shone. Dust has gathered in the corners; the gold of the ornaments has crumbled off; the gobe- lins are frayed at the bottom; the ceiling-paintings are pale, the roses dry, and the silken tapestry has been eaten by mice. Spiders weave their webs over the ivory fans; the old sofas shake upon their curved golden legs. The cultivated race of aristocracy has been followed by citizens to whom art is strange. Army contractors, speculators of the exchange, and corn usurers surround themselves with the treasures which the impoverished noble families have sold. Prudhon, the spiritual relative of Madame Lebrun, thinks sadly of past days: he is a master of the Rococo in the garb of the Empire; a son of the ancient aristo- cratic world, who has survived like a phantom into the democratic century. If he so frequently paints the tender Pscyhe borne by Zephyrus into the Elysian fields, it seems as if he thought of his own art which found no more room upon the rude earth.
V.— Classicism In Germany
Although Germany experienced no revolution, it followed similar artistic paths, and this is to be explained by other, by scientific reasons. Men’s minds were occupied by the excavations of Herculaneum and Pompeii; the ruins of Paestum had been explored; Greek vases were made known by Hamilton, and Roman monuments by Piranesi. In 1762 Stuart and Revett’s great work on the antiquities of Athens appeared, and in 1764 Winckelmann wrote his History of Ancient Art. Winckelmann’s whole artistic activity was a hymn to the recently discovered antique art. Poetry followed; for after the inspired wildness of the "storm and stress" period it was a natural reaction to praise the measured beauty of Greek art as the highest attainable. Goethe, the author of Werther and Götz was transformed into the poet of Iphigenie, and Schiller, who had written Die Rauber became the singer of the gods of Greece. In consequence of this antiquarian current, painting also was guided into a direction similar to that which had been caused by the Revolution in France. Its development is henceforth determined by the paths upon which literature, the prevailing intellectual factor, moved. Indeed, painting so far relinquished its independence as to accept its rules from authors. While earlier authors like Vasari, van Mander, and Sandrart, who were themselves artists, had only followed the modest aim of giving to later times notes on art and artists scholars now put forth the claim to direct the paths of art and sit in judgment upon its achievements. For the aesthetics of that day did not find its aim in discovering what was beautiful in works of art, but wished to tell the artist how he must create them. And as the scholar who is destitute of a creative vein can only conceive of the beautiful in the form of some already existing beauty, their instruction consisted in recommending to the artist the imitation of an older and greater epoch, and chiefly the Hellenic.
Although independent works of art cannot originate in this way, it was nevertheless, compared with the inartistic age of enlightenment, a gain for culture that the age once more attempted to enter into relation with art. The authors not only considered themselves the teachers of the artists, but were also concerned with the aesthetic education of the citizen. The new middle-class society could only attain art by educating its taste on the model of the great civilisation of the past; and the new art could only be maintained by leaning upon the art of the great epochs of the past. Even before the scholars began to participate, the artists had themselves sought to enter into such rela- tions to ancient art, some by imitating the Dutch, others by following the Bolognese. The great artists brought system into this planless search by pointing to the age in which they saw the realisation of the highest ideal of an aesthetic culture, and they followed in this a carefully considered plan of instruction. The eye of the German bourgeois would not yet have been receptive to delicacies and caprices of colour. His taste could best be formed by pictures composed in accor- dance with the simplest and severest laws and which were drawn in rigid plastic outlines. The circum- stance that all the young German painters took up their residence in Rome shows clearly how unsuitable for artistic creation the soil of their home seemed to them.
It was in Dresden, the classic home of the German Rococo, that the movement began. Nine years before the appearance of his History of Ancient Art, in 1755, Winckelmann published his first treatise. Thoughts on the Imitation of Greek Works, the content of which culminated in this statement: “The only way for us to become great and possibly inimitable is to imitate the ancients.” As the new German art which had gradually risen after the upheaval of the “storm and stress” period needed a staff upon which it could lean, the teaching of Winckelmann became the gospel of the epoch. “By studying the works of Greek sculptors the painter can attain the sublimest conceptions of beauty, and learn what must be added to nature in order to give to the imitation dignity and propriety,” says Salomon Gessner in 1759. In 1766 Lessing wrote his Laocoon, in which, like Winckelmann, he recommended Greek sculpture as the ideal to be imitated. In like manner Goethe taught that Greek art was an absolutely exemplary model from which a fixed canon determinative for the artists of all times could be derived; and that the composition of pictures should correspond strictly with the style of the antique relief.
A few opposed this Hellenic programme. “Every land has its individual art, like its climate and its landscape, like its food and drink,” says Heine in his Ardinghello. “It is high treason to maintain that the Greeks cannot be surpassed,” wrote Klopstock. At a later period Madame de Stael in her book on Germany wrote: “If at the present day the fine arts should be confined to the simplicity of the ancients, we could never attain the original power which distinguishes them, and the deep and complex sentiment which exists with us would be lost. With the modern simplicity would easily become affectation, whereas with the ancients it was full of life.” The sharpest dissent was expressed by Herder in his Viertes kritisches Waldchen: “The sculptor indeed cannot render morning and evening, lightning and thunder, brook and flame, but why should this be denied to the painter? What other law exists for painting than to reflect the great picture of nature with all of its phenomena? And with what charm she does this! They are not wise who scorn landscape painting and forbid it to the artist. It is as much as to say that a painter should be no painter, but should carve statues with his brush! Certainly, the Greek monuments shine like beacon lights in the sea of time; but they should be only friends and not commanders. Painting is a magic panel, as extensive as the world, in which every figure certainly cannot be a statue. Otherwise a feeble monotony of long-shanked, straight-nosed Greek figures will result. Affectation will prevent us from depicting our own age and the most fruitful subjects of history, and all feeling of individual truth and certainty will be lost.”
But these voices were isolated. Winckelmann had no sooner indicated the aim, than Anton Rafael Mengs put the teachings of his friend into practice. This master, who reposes in the Pantheon by the side of Raphael, was an artist of persistent will-power, and he devoted his whole life to guiding young German art to the grandeur of the antique. His earliest works were rooted in an ancient courtly culture; for he had begun at the court of Dresden with pastel portraits which were quite in line with the taste of the Rococo and re-echoed its last achievements. He had also painted oil portraits, as distinguished in their delicate grey tone as they were powerful in their directness; which were in no respect either hazy or insipid. But in his large altar-pieces he remembered the mission which his father had assigned him in his cradle when he christened him with the given names of Allegri and Santi — that is to say, he makes the impression of a pupil of the Caracci. In his need of leaning upon an ancient epoch, he sought in the spirit of the Bolog- nese to give his pictures the style of the cinquecento, the serene flowing line of Raphael and the light and shade of Correggio. But in his Parnassus of the Villa Albani he has gone back to the original source: the imitator of the cinquecentisti has become the pupil of Winckelmann and the Greeks. The picture has been called a depot of plastic wares, a collection of painted statues; and it is true that in its cold correctness it seems to be the labour rather of a scholar than a
778
ITriumpb of tbe BourGcoisie
painter. In the manner in which he endeavours by
means of scholarship to discover the essence of art,
Mengs is the true contemporary of Winckelmann.
The difference is not only an external one; instead of
perspective effects, gobelins nailed fast to the ceiling;
instead of figures hovering to and fro, a mathematically
calculated composition; instead of painting, sculpture.
The difference consists in this, that from Tiepolo’s
work a great, freely creating artist speaks, while Mengs
is only the amanuensis of the scholar. Whatever
is good in his pictures is due to his courtly and realistic
past. The colour preserves a certain nobility; the line
is as sure as that of an old master; and even the
faces, notwithstanding their Greek profiles, are free
from an idealised generality. They were designed by
a master who could also paint portraits of a sharp
individuality.
A reflection of the ancient aristocratic culture also lies over Angelica Kauffmann’s works. A soft and sympathetic talent and a truly feminine nature, she supplemented the severity demanded by Winckelmann with a dainty addition of charming grace. Cornelia, the Mother of the Gracchi, the Death of ALcestis, Hero and Leander — such are the principal subjects which she treated in an insipid, affectedly coloured, and intellectual manner. The Italian Battoni’s coquettish conception of the antique probably bears the greatest resemblance to her smooth, pleasing, and insinuating manner. Compared with Mengs, she has a more
ANGELICA KAUFFMANN
THE VESTAL VIRGIN
Dresden Gallery
Classicism in 0ermanp 779
sentimental and softer effect. She differs from Madame Vigee-Leburn, the aristocrat, in a certain bourgeois beauty, resembling those soft retouches by which a photographer makes his portraits pleasing to the public. But her Vestal Virgin in the Dresden Gallery, the ancestor of all the beauties whom at a later period Blaas,Vinea, Seiffert,and Beischlag painted, is a picture worthy to find a place in any collection. The soft and dainty chords of colour which she touches have more in common with the Rococo than with the young bourgeois art of the epoch.
The two Suabians, Eberhard Wachter and Gottlieb Schick, also preserved a certain degree of excellence as regards colour, because they had studied under David. The first to carry out uncompromisingly the programme of German classicism was Carstens.
It is difficult to assume a positive position in regard to Carstens’s art. To Mengs he bears a relation similar to that of Prudhon to David, or of Goethe the poet to Winckelmann the scholar. As regards the antique he is not, like Mengs, a mere adapter of Greek forms, but he lives in the classic past, and the world of the Greek poets is his spiritual home. While Mengs did not progress beyond the mere arrangement of antique motives, beyond an intellectual and learned art, with Carstens a poetic conception prevails; the free and creative reproduction of images which are not external but which live in his spirit. More than Mengs had ever succeeded in doing, he mastered at Rome the
780
Xlriumpb of tbe iBouroeoisfe
simplicity and the distinction of Greek art, and attained
a perfection of line in which archaeologists saw the
acme of classicism. The Greek Heroes with Chiron,
Helen before the Sccean Gate, Ajax, Phcenix, and
Odysseus in the Tent of Achilles, Priam and Achilles,
The Fates, Night with her Children, Sleep and Death,
the Ferry of Megapenthes, Homer before the People,
the Golden Age — all these prints possess what Winckel-
mann called the “noble simplicity and silent greatness’'
of Hellenic art. Reading the biography of this master,
one is filled with respect for a martyr who sacrificed
himself to an ideal. Standing in Rome at the grave
of the lonely man near the pyramid of Cestius, one is
inclined to agree with the statement of the inscription
which praises him as the renewer of German artistic
activity.
But is this possible? Does not Carstens’s activity rather indicate the moment in which all tradition is at an end, and the new, on a tabula rasa, begins; when the artist has ceased to exist, and only the author remains? One can well understand, from the stand- point of the history of culture, that in such a time of literary activity a painter like Carstens had to appear. At the time when Goethe wrote Iphigenie, Carstens illustrated the ancient poets; in the paper epoch he founded the paper style; at a period when all great spirits wielded the pen, a painter also wields the pen instead of the brush. But however characteristic this is, what is its significance for the history of art.?
Must not the thought of the least of the old masters prevent us from counting Carstens a painter? For by seeking the value of his works exclusively in the poetic element, in invention, he forgot his own pro- fession. While Mengs could still draw, Carstens no longer possessed this ability.
But what made his activity so important in the development of German art is that he drew the logical consequences from Winckelmann's teachings by dis- pensing with colour. ^‘Colour, light and shade, do not make a painting as valuable as noble outline’'; so the scholars had written, and in this colour-blindness Car- stens is the true son of a new bourgeois age, to which the contemplation of noble colour did not yet signify an aesthetic pleasure. This linear style was the founda- tion of Carstens’s art. While over the works of GraflF, those of Edlinger at Munich, of Vogel at Dresden, and even over those of Mengs and Kauffmann, a reflection of the old and distinguished past still gleams, with Carstens the new bourgeois and exclusively literary art of Germany begins, and quite without colour — a “paper style.” The Danish note in his works consists in the same impotence which even the creations of a modern artist like Jacobsen have: that for very dream- ing he never came to action, from pure contemplation he never came to work, and from hazy enthusiasm he never came to learn.
This, then, is the great difference between French and German classicism, that in France a fragment of
782
XTriumpb of tbe :Kouroeoisie
the sensual, a remnant of the old culture was saved
for the nineteenth century. However much he battled
against his predecessors, David as a technician did
not dispense with the heritage of the Rococo, and
Prudhon ranks as a painter with the most delicate
of the old masters. German classicism, on the other
hand, deprived of all sensuality and the pure product
of the brain, broke so completely with the past that it
did not acquire its technical traditions, but substituted
outlines and pen drawings for pictures. The cartoon,
the black and white style, became for a generation
the domain of German art. And by this surrender
to the technical ability which had heretofore been
handed down unchanged from one generation to another
the future was made the poorer. It revenged itself
by this, that the difficult art of painting had to be
acquired anew by the German artists of the nineteenth
century.
Index
The index supplements the critical treatment in the text by the addition of the birth and death years of the artists, or, when these are not obtainable, the approximate date of their artistic activity. The dates given correspond, in the main, with those appended to the German edition. In ad- dition to these biographical data, other entries designed to facilitate the use of the work by the student have been added ; as, for example, the names of prominent individuals who have influenced the development of painting, whether as artists in other branches, like Donatello, or as patrons, like Lorenzo de’ Medici, or as spiritual factors of the age, like Savonarola; and the names of modern artists, like Bocklin, frequently used for purposes of comparison. Notice has been taken of im- portant artistic terms, such as Landscape Painting, Por- traiture, Engraving, and Etching. The paintings themselves are classified under the galleries, churches, and other places in which they are situated, in so far as these are mentioned in the text, to which the name of the artist is appended. Finally the editor offers under the heading. Schools of Painting, the requisite entries for reference or study of the local and national development of the art, which the author’s psychological treatment would not permit to be emphasised in the general disposition of the work.
For the purpose of easy identification, the names of the painters belonging to the period covered by Professor Muther’s work have been printed in italic type. — Ed.
[The index has been omitted by the editor]
Partial list of illustrations
- volume 1
- The Tribute Money (Titian)
- Rome, Italy. Basilica of Saint Paul Outside the Walls
- Duccio di Buoninsegna
- Cappella degli Scrovegni, Envy, Giotto
- Triumph of Death by Buonamico Buffalmacco
- Arnolfini and His Wife
- Coronation of the Virgin (Filippo Lippi)
- The Nativity (Piero della Francesca)
- Miraflores Altarpiece
- Parnassus (Mantegna)
- Luca Signorelli frescoes of the Last Judgment (1499–1503) in Orvieto Cathedral
- Adoration of the Shepherds (Hugo van der Goes)
- Birth of St Mary in Santa Maria Novella in Firenze by Domenico Ghirlandaio
- The Death of Procris
- Madonna of the Magnificat
- Primavera (Botticelli)
- Carlo Crivelli : Virgin and Child Enthroned with Saints
- Barbarigo Altarpiece
- Trittico della Madonna in trono
- The Last Supper
- Mona Lisa
- The Last Supper (Leonardo)
- Martyrium Des Hl. Sebastian Hans Holbein
- The Money Changer and His Wife
- The Four Apostles
- Portrait of Georg Giese
- William Warham, Archbishop of Canterbury (Holbein)
- Bianca Maria Sforza by Predis
- Mystic Marriage of Saint Catherine (Correggio, Paris)
- Venus with Mercury and Cupid
- Flora (Titian)
- Man with a Glove
- Giovanni Battista Moroni - The Tailor ('Il Tagliapanni')
- The Creation of Adam
- La Vierge au sac (Andrea del Sarto)
Source
See also
{{GFDL}}